r-»     TTT  T 


IN 

Frederick  Slate 
Professor  of  Physics 


• 


I  o  *>*• 


OTTO'S 

F  E  E  N  C  H 
CONVERSATION  GRAMMAR. 

REVISED    Bi     ,     .  ,       ,       -,  .      .       . 

FERDINAND    BOO  HER, 

INSTRUCTOR  IN  FRENCH  AT  HARVARD  COLLEGE. 


THIRTY-EIGHTH  EDITION. 


NEW  YORK 
HQLT    &    WILLIAMS 

P.  W.    CILIIISTERH 

BOSTON:     S.  R.  URBINO 


;••  :«••  .  : Y;  V;  ! 


Ong  to  4ct  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1864,  by 

S.  R.  URBIXO, 
la  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  the  District  of  Massachusetts. 


\  -v\ 


PREFACE 


The  first  edition  of  Dr.  EMILE  OTTO'S  "  FRENCH 
CONVERSATION  GRAMMAR"  appeared  at  Heidelberg  in 
1859.  A  second  edition  was  issued  in  1863,  upon 
which  this  first  American  edition  is  based.  The  pres- 
ent editor  has  not  hesitated  in  making  such  changes 
as  he  deemed  proper  in  the  body  of  the  work,  abandon- 
ing, among  other  thingfe,  the  names  of  the  Latin  cases, 
genitive,  dative,  etc.,  which,  although  they  may  be  of 
help  .to  tha  Germain  student,  can  only  confuse  the  Amer- 
ican learner.  The  names  of  the  tenses  have  also  been 
changed,  and,  it  is  hoped,  simplified.  A  few  lessons 
have  been  added  to  Part  L,  and  the  chapter  upon  the 
Past  Participle  has  been  re-written.  -The  preliminary 
lesson  upon  Pronunciation  is  also  entirely  new,  and  an 
English  and  French  Vocabulary  of  the  words  that 
occur  in  the  Themes  has  been  added. 

BOSTON,  August,  1864. 


CONTENTS. 


PRONUNCIATION. 

PAGE. 

The  Alphabet *  .  .  .  13 

Division  of  Syllables 14 

Syllabic  Accent,  or  Stress 14 

Accents  —  Orthographic  Marks 15 

Simple  Vowels 15 

Compound  Vowels 18 

Diphthongs 18 

Nasal  Vowls 19 

Consonants. —  General  Rules 21 

Consonants.  — Special  Rules 22 

Linking  of  Final  Consonants 20 

Observations  on  E  mute 20 

i 

PA.RT     I. 

LBSSOIC.  .  PAGE. 

I.  The  Article iiS 

II.  Formation  of  the  Plural 30 

III.  Case  —  A  —  DE 33 

IV.  Prepositions 36 

V.  The  Partitive  Article 39 

VI.  Further  use  of  de 42 

VII.  Proper  Nouns 44 

VIII.  Conjugation  of  avoir ',  to  have  —  affirmatively 48 

IX.  Idiomatic  use  of  avoir 51 

X.  Conjugation  of  e.tre,  to  be  —  affirmatively 54 

XI.  Negations.— The  Negative  and  Interrogative  forms  of  the  Aux- 
iliaries     * 57 

IX 


X  CONTENTS. 

LIB sow.  PA as. 

XII.  Demonstrative  and  Interrogative  Adjectives 62 

XIII.  Possessive  Adjectives 64 

XIV.  Cardinal  Numbers 67 

XV.  Ordinal  Numbers . 71 

XVI.  Indefinite  Adjectives 75 

XVII.  Adjectives.  —  Formation  of  the  feminine  and  of  the  plural  ....  78 

XVIII.  The  place  of  Adjectives 82 

XIX.  Degrees  of  Comparison 8t> 

XX.  Regular  Verbs.  —  First  Conjugation.  —  Donner 88 

Reading  Lesson:  Le  chameau  et  le  chat 95 

XXI.  Remarks  on  the  Orthography  of  some  Verbs  of  the  First  Conjuga- 
tion   96 

XXII.  Second  Conjugation :  Finir 100 

Reading  Lesson :  Le  Moineau  et  ses  Petits 104 

XXIII.  Third  Conjugation :  Vendre 105 

Reading  Lesson:  Le  roi  de  Perse 110 

XXIV.  Disjunctive  Personal  Pronouns 110 

Reading  Lesson:  Le  Rosier 113 

XXV.  Conjunctive  Personal  Pronouns 114 

Reading  Lesson:  Suite  du  Rosier 118 

XXVI.  Demonstrative  Pronouns •....,.  119 

XXVII.  Interrogative  Pronouns 122 

XXVIII.  Possessive  and  Relative  Pronouns 125 

XXIX.  Indefinite  Pronouns 129 

Reading  Lesson:  Puissance  de  la  Concorde 132 

XXX.  Passive  and  Neuter  Verbs 133 

XXXI.  Reflective  Verbs 138 

Reading  Lesson:  Le  Sansonnet 141 

XXXII.  Impersonal  Verbs 145 

Reading  Lesson :  Productions  de  divers  climats 150 

XXXIII.  Formation  of  Adverbs 151 

XXXIV.  Adverbs  of  Place  and  of  Time 155 

XXXV.  Adverbs  of  Number,  of  Quality,  of  Negation,  etc 158 

XXXVI.  Conjunctions Ifi2 

Reading  Lesson :  Lafitte 106 

XXXVII.  Conjunctive  Phrases 107 

XXXVIII.  Irregular  Verbs.  — First  Class 170 

XXXIX.  Irregular  Verbs.  — First  Class  continued 174 

XL.  Irregular  Verbs.  — First  Class  continued ,  .  .  177 

XLI.  Irregular  Verbs.  —  First  Class  continued ,  .  180 


CONTENTS.  XI 

LKfaoir.  PAGI, 

XLII.  Irregular  Verbs.  — Second  Class 183 

XLIII.  Irregular  Verbs.  —  Third  Class 188 

XLIV.  Irregular  Verbs.  — Third  Class  continued 189 

XLV.  Irregular  Verbs.  — Third  Class  continued 194 

XLVI.  Defective  Verbs 197 

Alphabetical  List  of  Irregular  and  Defective  Verbs 199 

XL VII.  How  to  render  do,  did,  shall,  will,  etc 201 

Supplementary  Tenses * 2QJ 


II. 


Elision  ..............................  205 

I.  On  the  Gender  of  Substantives  ..................  206 

II.  Tlural  of  Nouns    .........................   214 

Heading  Lesson  :  Le  Castor   ...................  216 

III.  Use  of  the  Article   ........................   218 

Reading  Lesson  :  Demosthene  ..................   226 

IV.  Special  use  of  de  and  a  ......................  228 

V.  Peculiarities  in  the  use  of  names  of  Countries,  Towns,  etc.  .  .  .   235 

Reading  Lesson  :  Charles  XII  ...................  233 

^Yl.  Possessive  Adjectives    ......................  239 

'  Reading  Lesson  :  Eudamidas  .  .  .................   242 

VII.  Numerals  ....................  .  ........   244 

VIII.  Adjectives    ............................  246 

Reading  Lesson:  L'elephant  ...................  253 

IX.  1.  Personal  Pronouns  .......................   255 

2.  Particular  use  of  en  and  y  ...................   258 

3.  The  supplying  Pronouns  le,la,les  ...............   260 

Reading  Lesson  :  L'elcphant  (continuation)  ............   262 

X.  Interrogative  Pronouns    .....................   203 

Reading  Lesson  :  Servilius  se  defend  devant  le  pcuple  ......   266 

XI.  Relative  Pronouns   ........................  267 

Reading  Lesson  :  Suite  de  "  Servilius,"  ..............   272 

XII.  Indefinite  Pronouns    ..........  .  ............   27* 

XIII.  Indefinite  Pronouns,  continued  ..................   278 

XIV.  Adverbs  .........................  •  .....   284 

Reading  Lesson:  Le  Constable  de  Bourbon  et  Bayard  .....   288 


XII  CONTENTS. 


XV.  Syntax  of  Negations  ......................  289 

Reading  Lesson:  Le  Conne"table  de  Bouibon  et  Bayard.  (Suite)  .  295 

XVI.  Remarks  on  some  Prepositions  ..................  296 

XVII.  Different  uses  of  the  Conjunction  gue  ..............  307 

Reading  Lesson:  Le  Connetable  de  Bourbon  et  Bayard.    (Fin)  .  311 

XVIII.  Use  of  the  Tenses  of  the  Indicative  ...............  313 

Reading  Lesson:  Alexandre  Selkirk  ...............  324 

XIX.  The  Subjunctive  Mood   ......................  325 

Reading  Lesson  :  Alexandre  Selkirk.  (Suite)  .......  ....  330 

XX.  The  Infinitive  ...........................  338 

««           "         preceded  by  de  ...................  342 

"          "         preceded  by  a  ...................  347 

«'          "         preceded  by  other  Prepositions  ..........  354 

Reading  Lesson  :  Alexandre  Selkirk.  (Suite)  ...........  355 

XXI.  The  Present  Participle  ......................  357 

Reading  Lesson  :  Gesler  conduit  Tell  a  Kusnach  ..........  360 

XXII.  The  Past  Participle  ........................  303 

XXIII.  The  Participle  Absolute    .....................  367 

Reading  Lesson  :  Gesler  conduit  Tell  a  Kusnach  ......  ...  369 

XXIV.  Government  of  Verbs    ......................  371 

XXV.  Idiomatical  Expressions   .....................  380 

Efiglish  Vocabulary  of  the  Words  that  occur  in  the  Themes  .........  SS3 


FRENCH    GRAMMAR. 


PRONUNCIATION, 


THE  ALPHABET. 

1 .  The  written  French  alphabet  is  the  same  as  the  English.  W 
and  K  are  found  only  in  words  borrowed  from  other  languages. 

The  names  of  the  letters  are  given  below  in  the  French  spelling  as  they 
are  of  little  or  no  value  to  the  beginner.  In  the  new  names  the  e  in  be,  ke, 
d*,  gue,  etc.,  is  only  sounded  enough  to  allow  the  utterance  of  the  consonant 
that  precedes  it,  as  in  globe,  cake,  made,  fatigue :  j  is  sounded  as  s  in  pleasure. 
The  vowels  have  their  normal  French  sounds.  —  W  when  spoken  of  ii 
vailed  double  V. 


'"V" 

OLD 

NAMES.     NEW  NAMES. 

OLD 

NAMES.     NEW  NAMES. 

A 

a 

a 

a 

N 

n 

enne 

ne 

B 

b 

be 

be 

0 

0 

0 

0 

C 

c 

ce- 

ke (se) 

P 

P 

P6 

pe 

D 

d 

de* 

de 

Q 

q 

ku 

ke 

E 

e 

£ 

e 

R 

r 

erre 

re 

F 

f 

effe 

fe 

S 

8 

esse 

se  (ze) 

0 

g 

ge 

gue(je) 

T 

t 

te 

te 

n 

h 

ache 

he 

U 

U 

u 

u 

I 

i 

i 

i 

V 

V 

v4 

ve 

J 

J 

ji 

Je 

X 

X 

ics 

kse 

K 

k 

ka 

ke 

Y 

y 

i  grec 

i 

L 

AT 

1 

elle 

le 

Z 

z 

zede 

z® 

13 


PRONUNCIATION. 


DIVISION  OF  SYLLABLES. 

2.  "Words  are  generally  divided  as  in  English;  but  whenever  it 
is  possible  a  syllable  must  begin  with  a  consonant.  Henc^,  verbal 
and  other  terminations  beginning  with  a  vowel  must  be  join  3d  to  the 
consonant  that  precedes;  thus  ai-mer,  but  ai-me-rai ;  chan-ter. 
chan-te-rai,  clian-ie-rons. 

As  to  x  equal  to  g$,  cs,  its  compound  nature  prevents  its  separation  from 
the  vowel  thac  precedes  :  hence  the  following  division  ex-em-ple. 

In  writing,  silsnt  n  apparently  begins  a  syllable,  as  in  in-h€-rent;  but  in 
the  spoken  syllables,  silent  h  has  no  value  whatever ;  and  a  consonant  be- 
tween a  vowel  and  a  silent  h  is  separated  from  that  vowel  in  the  spoken 
though  not  in  the  written  language;  hence  the  following  divisions. 

Written.  Pronounced. 

in-hu-main  i-nhu-main 

in-ha-bi-le  i-nha-bile 

in-he'-rcnt  i-nhe-rent 

bon-heur  bo-nheur 

If  these  words  were  pronounced  according  to  the  written  divisions,  they 
would  begin  with  a  nasal  sound ;  but  they  do  not.  (See  Nasal  vowels,  37.) 


SYLLABIC  ACCENT,  OR  STRESS. 

As  compared  with  English,  French  is  generally  said  to  have  no  syllabic 
accent.  Such  a  stress  of  voice  as  is  heard  in  the  words  accent  and  accent? 
does  not  occur  in  French ;  but  the  following  rule  explains  the  uniformity 
of  the  English  accent  on  the  last  syllable  in  words  newly  introduced  from 
tha  French,  such  as  barouche,  surtoutt  machine,  fatigue,  etc. 

3.  In  French  each  syllable  of  a  word  must  be  pronounced 
smoothly,  the  voice  resting  upon  the  last,  unless  it  ends  in  e  mute, 
in  which  case  the  syllable  before  the  last  is  slightly  accented.  Ex. 
constitution ,  indubitable. 


ACCENTS  —  SIMPLE  VOWELS.  15 


ACCENTS,  —  OKTHOGBAPHIC  MASKS. 

4.  Three  orthographic  marks,  the  acute  ('),  the  grave  (x),  and 
the  circumflex  (A),  have  received  the  name  of  accents. 

These  marks  never  affect  a  syllable ;  they  can  only  modify  the  sound  of 
a  vowel  over  which  they  are  placed.  Sometimes  they  have  a  mere  ortho- 
graphic value.  They  must  never  be  neglected  in  writing. 

5.  The  ACUTE  (')  is  used  only  over  the  vowel  e  (e),  which  then 
has  the  sound  of  a  in  date.     Ex.  etc,  donne. 

6.  The  GRAVE  (x)  or  open  accent  is  used  principally  over  e  (e), 
which  then  has  the  sound  of  e  in  ebb  or  of  e  in  there.     Ex.  five, 
pere.     Over  a  and  u  it  is  only  used  to  distinguish  words  otherwise 
similarly  spelled,  and  does  not  affect  the  pronunciation.     Ex.  la, 
the  ;  la,  there  ;  a,  has  ;  a,  to  ;  ou,  or;  ou,  where. 

7.  The  CIRCUMFLEX  (A)  is  used  over  all  the  vowels,  which  are 
then  long.     Ex.  age,  cote,  sur. 

The  circumflex  denotes  that  a  contraction  has  taken  place ;  thus  age  and 
sur  were  formerly  spelled  aage  and  seur.  Often  an  s  has  been  dropped  in 
modern  French  which  still  remains  in  the  English  word  taken  from  the  old 
French.  Ex.  ile,  isle;  hate,  haste;  fowt,  forest ;  tempete,  tempest. 

8.  The  CEDILLA  is  placed  under  the  c  (9)  when  it  has  the  sound 
of  s  before  a,  o,  u.     Ex.  facade,  gar$on,  recu. 

9.  The  DIJERESIS  (••  Trema)  is  used  over  e,  i,  and  u;  in  which 
case  these  letters  do  not  coalesce  with  the  preceding  vowel,  but  be- 
gin a  new  syllable.     Ex.  hair,  Noel,  aigue,  are  pronounced  harir, 
No-el,  ai-gu-e,  (the  last  e  is  silent.) 


SIMPLE  VOWELS. 
A. 

10.  A  long  has  the  sound  of  a  in  far.     Ex.  ame,  soul ;  p&te, 
paste;  cas,  case. 

11.  Short  a  differs  from  long  a  principally  in  quantity.     It  has 


1G  PRONUNCIATION. 

the  sound  of  a  in  the  Interjection  ha  !  pronounced  quick.     Ex.  la, 
the  ;  patte,  paw. 
A  is  silent  in  Saone,  taon,  aout,  aoristc,  Cura9ao. 

E. 

12.  E  unaccented,  when  it  ends  a  syllable  in  the  middle  of  a 
word,  and  in  the  monosyllables  ce,  de,je,  le,  me,  net  que,  se  and  te, 
has  the  indistinct  sound  of  e  in  Battery.     Ex.  lever,  to  raise;  re- 
gard, look. 

13.  E  unaccented  final  is  mute.     Ex.  table,  table. 

14.  E  with  an  acute  accent  (e)  has  the  sound  of  a  in  date.     Ex. 
ete,  summer  ;  donnd,  given. 

E  unaccented  takes  the  sound  of  €  (a  in  date)  before  final  d,  r,  z9  mute, 
also  at  the  beginning  of  a  word  before  a  double  consonant.  Ex.  pied.,  foot  ; 
donncr,  to  give  ;  assez,  enough  ;  effct,  effect  ;  et,  and,  is  always  pronounced  Lf. 

15.  E  with  the  grave  (e)  or  with  the  circumflex  accent  (e)  is 
more  or  less  open,  varying  between  e  in  ebb,  and  e  in  where.     Ex. 
reve,  dream;  ipQTG,  father  ;  for§t,jfbres£;  apres,  after. 


E  unaccented  takes  the  sound  of  e  (e  in  ebb)  when  preceding  c,f,  I,  rf  s,  t, 
or  x  in  the  same  syllable  and  in  the  middle  of  a  word  before  any  double 
consonant.  Before  r,  the  sound  is  more  open  than  before  the  other  letters. 
Ex.  for,  iron;  dessert,  dessert;  tcrre,  earth  ;  tendresse,  tenderness  ;  sonnette, 
bell  ;  chef,  chief;  mes,  my  ;  est,  is  ;  esprit,  spirit.  In  the  last  words  the  e  ia 
pronounced  by  many  persons  very  nearly  like  €  especially  in  rapid  conver- 
sation. Even  e  often  loses  its  broad,  long  sound. 

16.  E  takes  the  sound  of  French  a  infGmme,  solcnnel,  indemniser, 
*nd  in  all  adverbial  terminations  in  emment. 

17.  E  is  silent  between  g  and  a  or  o.     Ex.  pigeon,  pigeon  ; 
mangeons,   (we)  eat]   mangeant,  eating.     In   these   words  the  e 
merely  serves  to  prevent  g  from  having  the  hard  sound  of  g  in  go, 

For  further  observations  on  e  mute,  see  page  26. 

I. 

18.  I  has  only  one  sound,  that  of  i  in  machine  ;  —  long  in  vie, 
life  ;  rire,  to  laugh;—  short  in  fini,  finished  ;  ici,  here. 


SIMPLE  VOWELS.  17 

o. 

19.  0,  when  long,  has  the  sound  of  o  in  rose.     Ex.  cote*,  side ; 
dose,  itose. 

20.  0  short  has  a  sound  between  the  o  in  rob  and  the  u  in  rub. 
Ex.  Rome,  robe,  mode. 

21.  0  before  final  re  or  r  and  a  final  consonant  has  the  sound  of 
o  in  lord.     Ex.  aurore,  dawn  ;  alors,  ffon  ;  bord,  border. 

O  is  silent  in  Laon,  paon,  and  faon. 

U. 

22.  French  u  has  no  equivalent  in  English.     To  acquire  the 
sound,  place  the  lips  as  if  about  to  whistle,  leaving  the  aperture  very 
small;  keeping  the  lips  in  this  position  try  to  utter  e  as  in  me. 
Ex.  inurmure,  murmur. 

U  may  be  long  as  in  mur,  ripe  ;  or  short  as  in  vertu,  virtue. 

23.  U  is  silent  after  q  and  between  g  and  e  or  i.     Ex.  guide, 
guide;  question,  question;  quatre, /owr /  fatigue,  fatigue. 

EXCEPTIONS.  —  U  is  sounded  when  the  rowel  after  it  is  marked  with  the 
diaeresis,  as  aigue,  acute  ;  also  in  arguer,  to  argue  ;  aiguille,  needle ;  aiguiser, 
to  shcftgen;  etc.  Qu  is  sounded  as  in  English  in  a  few  words  directly  de- 
rived from  the  Latin.  These  words  are  alike  or  nearly  alike  in  French  and 
English.  Ex.  equateur,  equation,  quadrupede,  etc.  In  equitation, 
nbiquite,  and  a  few  other  words,  u  retains  the  proper  French  sound. 

Y. 

24.  Y,  initial,  or  between  two  consonants,  has  the  sound  of 
French  i.     Ex.  style,  style;  y,  there. 

25.  Y  between  two  vowels  is  equivalent  to  ii,  the  first  i  forming 
a  diphthong  with  the  preceding,  the  second  with  the  following  vow- 
el.    ThujS,  essayer,  to  try ;  royal,  royal;   appuyer,  to  lean;  are 
pronounced  as  if  written  essai-ier,  roi-ial,  appui-ier.     (See  ai  and 
of.) 

In  pays,  country ;  paysage,  landscape  /  paysan,  peasant ;  ay  is  equivalent 
to  ai'i. 

2 


18  PRONUNCIATION. 

COMPOUND  VOWELS. 
AI  and  El  (ay). 

26.  Ai  and  ei  are  equivalent  sometimes  to  e,  sometimes  to  & 
Ai  final  is  always  like  e ;  in  other  cases  it  takes  the  sound  of  e,  — < 
whenever  e  unaccented  would  have  that  sound.     (See  under  E.) 
Ex.  reine,  queen;  j'aimai,  I  loved ;  j'avais,  I  had  ;  kit,  milk. 

Ay,  followed  by  a  vowel,  is  equivalent  to  ai-i.     Ex.  rayer. 

Ai  in  the  present  participle  of  the  verb  faire  and  in  the  corresponding 
syllables  of  all  the  forms  derived  from  it,  has  the  indistinct  sound  of  e  in 
battery.  Ex.  faisant,  je  faisais,  tu  faisais,  il  faisait,  je  defaisais,  bienfaisant, 
etc.  These  forms  were  all  written  formerly  as  they  are  pronounced :  fesant, 
je  defesais,  etc.;  compare  the  future  of  the  same  verb,  which  isjeferai  and 
not  fa  irai. 

AU. 

27.  Au  and  eau  sound  like  o  in  note.     Ex.  haut,  high ;  beau, 
handsome. 

EU  CEU,  (02.) 

28.  Eu  (oeu)  has  no  exact  equivalent  in  English ;  it  is  some- 
what like  the  u  in  fur.     It  is  longer  in  jeune,  fast,  peur,  fear, 
coeur,  heart,  than  in  jeune,  young,  feu,  fire,  and  oeuf,  egg. 

CE  has  the  sound  of  eu  before  liquid  I,  — as  in  ceil,  eye. 

Eu,  whenever  it  occurs  in  the  conjugation  of  the  verb  avoir,  to  have,  has 
the  sound  of  simple  French  u,  so  that  J'eus,  tu  eus,  il  cut,  etc.,  must  be  pro- 
nounced as  if  written /MS,  tu  us,  il  ut,  etc. 

ou. 

29.  Ou  has  the  sound  of  oo  in  poor.     It  is  long  in  roue,  wheel ; 
boule,  ball;  short  in  mou,  soft'  cou,  neck. 

DIPHTHONGS. 

80.  The  vowels  i,  u,  ou,  o,  preceding  a  vowel  sound,  may  co- 
alesce with  it  and  produce  a  diphthong. 

Those  vowel  sounds  (Y,  «,  ou,  o,)  are  the  only  ones  that  can  be  initial  in 


NASAL  VOWELS.  19 

a  true  diphthong ;  *-  «.  one  in  which  two  vowels  are  heard  but  coalesce  into 

one  syllable. 

31.  In  French  diphthongs  the  first  vowel  (i,  u,  o\i,  0)  is  uttered 
quick  and  short  and  the  voice  rests  upon  the  second  vowel  element. 
The  dipthongal  combinations  are  :  i-a,  i-e  (i-ai),  —  i-o  (i-aii),  i-eu, 
i-ou,  —  o-a,  o-e,  o4  (wa),  —  ou-a,  ou-ai,  ou-e,  ou-i,  —  u-a,  u-e,  u>i. 
The  e  in  these  combinations  is  not  the  e  mute. 

By  paying  attention  to  the  above  remark  the  diphthongs  present  no  dif- 
ficulty, as  each  vowel  retains  its  proper  sound,  the  first  being  very  short ;  oi 
ia  the  only  exception. 

01.  (oy.) 

82.  Oi  is  nearly  like  wa  in  water;  more  accurately  oi  is  equiva- 
lent to  French  a  preceded  by  a  w  sound.  The  a  (ah)  is  more  pro- 
longed in  voir,  to  see  ;  poire,  pear  ;  than  in  roi,  king  ;  moi,  me. 

OY,  followed  by  a  vowel,  is  equivalent  to  oi-i.     Ex.  royal. 


NASAL  VOWELS. 

33.  M  and  N,  following  a  vowel  in  the  same  syllable,  lose 
their  .^ower. as  consonants,  and  form  with  that  vowel  a  nasal  sound 
whichlsin  every  respect  a  vowel. 

34.  The  nasals  form  four  groups,  viz.:  — 

A.  E,  AI.  O.  EU. 

an,  am.  am,  aim.  on,  om.  eun. 

en,  em.  in,  im.  (ym.)  un,  um. 

To  acquire  these  sounds  the  organs  of  speech  should  be  kept  in  tlie  same 
position  as  they  are  in  uttering  the  simple  vowel  that  is  to  be  nasalized ;  tho 
back  part  of  the  tongue  being  raised  enough  to  close  the  passage  between 
the  mouth  and  the  nose.  The  same  is  done  in  English  in  such  words  as 
anger,  ink,  want ;  but  in  English  the  nasal  sound  is  not  detached  from  the 
next  consonant,  while  in  French  it  is.  No  m  or  n  consonant  sound  must 
be  heard.  To  avoid  this,  the  tip  of  the  tongue  must  be  kept  motionless 
and  the  lips  disposed  to  articulate  a  vowel.  French  a,  thus  uttered,  will 
give  an;  —  e  (ai),  (not  i  in  macJiine)  gives  in  (ain) ; — ogives  on;  —  eu 
(not  French  u)  gives  un  (eun). 


20  PRONUNCIATION. 

The  nasal  sounds  may  coalesce  with  a  previous  i,  u,  ou,  or  o,  and 
form  a  nasal  diphthong,  to  which  all  that  has  been  said  of  the  other 
diphthongs  is  applicable. 

35,   The  following  list  presents  the  nasal  combinations. 

K.  B.  The  English  equivalents  of  the  French  nasal  vowels  are  all  neces- 
sarily imperfect,  as  no  consonant  m  or  n  must  be  heard  in  the  French  sound 
they  are  meant  to  explain. 

an  "1  f  dans,  lance,  manger,  vanter. 

ani   1  an  in  J  camp,  ambre,  ample,  lampe. 

en    I  wa?it  J  en,  enfant,  mentir,  dent. 

em  J  ^  temps,  empire,  membre,  trembler. 

ian  ")  is  equivalent  to  (  viande. 

ien  j  i-an         \  patient.     (See  special  rule  for  ien.) 


in 

im 

ym 

ain 

aim 

em 


an  m 

anger 


pin,  crm,  vm,  rmcer. 

impie,  importe,  im  poser,  imbu. 

thym,  nymphe,  symphonic. 

sain,  bain,  saint,  craintc. 

faim,  essaim,  daim.  < 

sein,  peindre,  feindre,  ccinture. 


ien  is  equivalent  to  i-in,  rien.     (See  special  rule  for  ien.) 

oin  "         "         "  w-in,  foin,  coin,  point,  moins. 

on   7  on  in  ( non,  conte,  chanson,  ronde. 

om  ")    song  \  nom,  comte,  plomb,  compris. 

ion  is  equivalent  to  i-on,  action,  passion,  question. 

un   J      no  equivalent      Tun,  brun,  tribun,  chacun. 

um  >in  English,  French  •<  parfum,  humble. 

eun  )          eu  nasal.          (^  a  jeun. 

The  nasal  diphthongs  ian,  ion,  are  the  simple  sounds  an,  on, 
preceded  by  a  short  French  i  ;  oin  is  in  preceded  by  a  w  sound. 
All  other  combinations  may  be  decomposed  in  the  same  manner,  aa 
own,  ou-en,  etc. 

36.  IEN  final,  and  in  verbs  in  enir,  is  equivalent  to  i-in  or  yin, 
(i/an  in  yankee).  Ex.  chien,  lien,  viendrai,  tiendront ;  in  other 
cases,  when  followed  by  a  consonant  (not  n),  it  is  equivalent  to  i-an 
(yaw)  nasal.  Ex.  science,  audience,  patient,  and  all  words  in 
ient 


CONSONANTS.  21 

REMARK.  In  compound  words,  as  bientot,  cliiendent,  ien  retains  tlic  sound 
of  the  primitive  Tvords  bien,  chien. 

37.  M  and  N  aro  not  nasal  when  double  or  when  between  two 
vowels  or  a  vowel  and  a  silent  h.     Ex.  annee,  innocent,  homme, 
une,  inoui,  inutile,  inhumain. 

EXCEPTIONS.  The  nasal  sound  is  heard  in  ennui  and  its  derivatives ;  m 
exiinener  and  all  words  beginning  in  emm  ;  in  enivrer  and  enoryueillir. 

38.  Ent  in  the  third  person  plural  of  verbs  is  silent.     Ex.  ils 
aimont,  they  love ;  ils  unirent,  etc.     In  other  cases  ent  final  is 
equivalent  to  nasal  an.     Ex.  content,  contented ;  president,  presi- 
dent ; — while  in  the  verbs,  ils  content,  they  relate,  ils  president, 
they  preside,  ent  is  silent. 

39.  En  and  em  in  a  few  foreign  names  have  the  sound  of  in, 
nasal.     Ex.  Benjamin,  Memphis.     Em  final,  and  sometimes  am 
and  im  in  foreign  proper  names,  are  not  nasal.     Ex.  Jerusalem, 
Abraham,  Selim.      Um  in  words  that  still  preserve  their  Latin  forra 
is  not  nasal,  u  having  the  sound  of  o.     Ex.  album,  triumvir.     In 
many  other  foreign  words  m  and  n  final  are  not  nasal.     JZx..lSdent 
Hymen,  amen,  etc. 

-""        1 

CONSONANTS 

/ 

GENERAL    RULES. 

40.  Final  consonants  are  silent  except  c,  f,  I,  r.     Ex.  etait 
apres,  croix,  pronounced  as  if  written  etai,  apre,  croi. 

REMARK.  When  several  consonants  occur  at  the  end  of  a  word  with  no 
vowel  after  them,  they  are  all  silent,  except  c,  f,  lt  r.  Ex.  est,  fails,  ils, 
dards,  pronounced  as  if  written  e,fai,  il,  dar. 

EXCEPTIONS.  In  foreign  proper  names  the  final  consonant  is  generally 
sounded.  Ex.  Brutus,  Job. 

41.  A  double  consonant  is  pronounced  as  one  letter.     Ex.  abbe, 
frapper,  pronounced  as  if  written  a-be,  fra-per. 

42.  B,  c,  d,  f,  1,  m,  n,  p,  (ph,)  q,  v,  and  z  are  pronounced  aa 
in  English. 


22  PRONUNCIATION. 

Exceptions  to  th3  above  general  rules  will  be  given  under  the  various  let- 
ters. 

43.  In  English,  consonants  in  tho  middle  or  at  the  beginning  of 
words  are  often  silent,  as  p  and  I  in  psalm  ;  g  in  phlegm  ;  I  in  calm. 
In  French,  consonants  in  a  like  position  retain  their  proper  sound. 
Thus  in  psaume,  flegme,  calme,  tho  p,  the  g,  and  the  /  are  fully 
sounded. 

SPECIAL    RULES. 

B  final  is  pronounced  in  radoub,  rumb. 

C  has  the  sound  of  g  in  second  and  its  derivatives. 

44.  C  is  pronounced  as  c  in  facade.     Ex.  gar con,  le$on. 

45.  Ch  has  the  sound  of  ch  in  machine.     Ex.  chaise,  cherchcr. 

Ch  in  many  words  derived  from  the  Greek  and  in  several  proper  names 
has  the  sound  of  Jc.  Ex.  chaos,  chceur,  Michel- Ange.  But  ch  has  the  sound 
of  sh  in  Acliille,  patriarche,  archeveque.  It  is  silent  in  almanack. 

Cc  before  e,  i,  and  y  is  equivalent  to  Jc-s.    Ex.  acces,  accident.. 

C  final  is  silent  after  n.  Ex.  bane.  It  is  silent  in  accroc,  broc,  derc, 
estomac,  lacs,  tabac. 

D  final  is  heard  in  sud. 

Dd.  Two  d's  are  heard  when  ad  precedes  a  syllable  beginning  with  a  d. 
Ex.  addition. 

F  final  is  silent  in  clef,  chef-d'oeuvre,  bceufs,  ceufs  ;  though  sounded  in  chef, 
bceuf,(xuf.  F  is  silent  in  neuf,  nine,  only  when  the  next  word  begins  with  a 
consonant,  before  a  vowel  it  has  the  sound  of  v.  Ex.  neufhommes. 

G  before  a,  o,  u,  sounds  like  g  in  game.    Ex.  gargon. 

46.  G  before  e,  i,  and  y,  sounds  like  s  in  pleasure.     Ex.  genre, 
gibct,  general. 

47.  GN  has  a  liquid  sound  something  like  ni  in  union.     Ex. 
agneau,  magnifique.     This  sound  is  produced  with  the  body,  not 
with  the  tip  of  the  tongue  against  the  roof  of  the  mouth. 

G  is  hard  before  n  at  the  beginning  of  a  word.  Ex.  gnomon  ;  also  in  stag* 
ttant,  inexpugnable,  and  in  ssveral  words  in  eg  and  ig  that  seldom  occur. 

Gg.  Two  g*s  are  heard  in  suggerer :  the  first  hard,  the^  last  Jike  *  in 
pleasure. 

G  final  is  sounded  in^'ou^. 


CONSONANTS.         .  23 

48.  H  is  said  to  be  mute  or  aspirate.     When  mute  it  is  entirely 
disregarded  in  pronunciation,  and  the  vowel  that  comes  after  it  is 
pronounced  with  the  preceding  consonant,  or  causes  the  preceding 
vowel  to  be  elided  as  if  no  letter  intervened.     Ex.  Phomme,  deux 
habits. 

49.  When  h  is  aspirated  no  real  aspiration  is  heard  as  in  Eng- 
lish ;  but  the  vowel  that  comes  after  it  is  pronounced  strongly.     II 
aspirate  presents  linking  and  elision.     Ex.  le  heros,  deux  heros. 

50.  There  are   about   300   words   beginning  with  h   aspirate. 
These  comprise  many  marine  terms,  foreign  words,  and  the  words  in 
the  following  list,  and  their  derivatives. 

REMARK.  The  derivatives  ofhe'ros — heroine,  htroique,  heroism, — are  not  as- 
pirated. But  hdbleur,haine,  hausser,  etc.,  follow  the  anology  of  their  prim- 
itives halter,  hair,  haut,  which  alone  are  given  in  the  list. 


hablcr 

hameau 

hargneux 

hennir 

hache 

hanche 

haricot 

Henri 

hagard 

hangar 

haridelle 

heraut 

hais 

hanneton 

harnais 

herisson 

hailloBs» 

hantcr 

harpe 

herisser 

ha'ir 

harangue 

harpie 

he'ron 

haire 

haras 

hasard 

heros 

hale.  , 

haras  ser 

hate 

herse 

hallo 

harceler 

haut 

heurter     , 

hallebarde 

hardes 

have 

hibou 

hallier 

hardi 

havre 

hideux 

halte 

hareng 

havresac 

hierarchie 

homard 

houblon 

houx 

humer 

honte 

houille 

huche 

huppe 

horde 

houlette 

hue'e 

hure 

hors 

houppe 

huguenot 

hurler 

hotte 

housse 

huit 

hussard 

51.  J  is  pronounced  like  s  in  pleasure ;  it  is  never  silent  nor 
double.     Ex.  dejd,  joujou. 

L  when  not  liquid  sounds  as  in  English.    Ex.  livre. 

52.  Ill  not  initial,  and  il  final,  have  a  liquid  sound  somewhat  like 
U  in  William,  brilliant.     This  sound,  still  prevalent  in  the  southern 


24  PRONUNCIATION. 

and  central  parts  of  France,  has  been  softened  down  to  nearly  a  $ 
in  the  north  and  especially  in  Paris,  so  that  there,  ill  in  tailleur  is 
scarcely  more  audible  than  i  in  paien.  Ex.  file,  famille,  gentille. 

53.  The  vowel  that  precedes  liquid  ill  or  il,  retains  its  proper 
sound  and  does  not  coalesce  with  the  i  ;  ue  and  a  are  then  equivalent 
tu  f-u.     Ex.  muraille,  patrouitte,  orgueil,  ail. 

54.  Ill  is  not  liquid,  that  is,  I  retains  its  proper  sound,  in  words 
that  begin  with  il.     Ex.  illustre,  illisille  ;  also  in  mille,  ville,  tran- 
quittc,  pupille,  Achille,  osciller,  vaciller,  etc. 

'  77  is  not  liquid  in  mil,  fil,  civil,  prqfil. 

L  final  is  silent  in  laril,  clienil,  coutil,fournil,  fusil,  grit,  gent  it,  soured,  per- 
sil,  outil.  It  is  also  silent  in  soul,  pouh,  fils,  and  in  the  terminations  auld. 
ault,  ould,  oult. 

M  and  N,  when  not  nasal,  are  pronounced  as  in  English.    Ex.  manier. 

M  is  silent  in  damner,  automne,  and  their  derivatives. 

P  is  silent  in  bopteme,  sept,  compte,  dompter,  exempter,  sculpter. 

Q  is  always  followed  by  u  except  in  cog  and  cinq,  when  it  sounds  like  k. 
(Tor  qu  see  u,  23.)  In  cinq  before  a  consonant  it  is  silent. 

55.  R  is  rolled,  but  with  less  force  at  the  end  than  at  the  begin 
ning  of  a  syllable.     Ex.  grand,  sceur  ;  rr  and  rh  are  generally  pro- 
nounced with  more  force  than  r  alone.     Ex.  arriver,  rliume. 

In  the  future  and  conditional  of  the  verbs  acquerir,  to  acquire,  courir,  to 
run,  inourir,  to  die,  the  two  r*s  must  be  distinctly  heard  to  distinguish 
them  from  other  forms  that  have  but  one  r.  Thus  nous  courrons,  vous 
acquerrez,  Us  mourraient,  must  not  be  pronounced  like  nous  courons,  vous 
acque'rez,  ills  mouraient. 

R  final  is  generally  pronounced,  but  final  er  is  equivalent  to  £  Ex. 
parler,  aimer.  In  monosyllables  in  er  the  r  is  sounded.  Ex.^/er,  cher,  mer. 
It  is  also  sounded  in  amer,  enfer,hier,  hiver,  and  in  a  few  words  of  foreign 
origin,  as  magister,  etc.  E  is  silent  in  monsieur. 

56.  S  is  generally  sounded  as  ?n  English;  but  in  words  er  Jing 
isme,  asme,  etc.,  it  has  not  the  sound  of  z.    Ex.  prisme,  miasme. 

57.  S  between  two  vowels  has  the  sound  of  z.     Ex.  rose,  base, 
vase. 

S  has  also  the  sound  of  z  in  words  compounded  with  the  Latin  preposi- 


CONSONANTS.  25 

tion  trans,  followed  by  a  vowel.    Ex.  transitif,  transition.    It  has  the  same 
sound  before  b,  d,  v,  and  after  /.     Ex.  presbytere,  svelte,  balsamique. 

As  s  initial  has  the  hissing  sound  as  in  English,  —  when  a  word  beginning 
with  an  s  takes  a  prefix,  the  s,  though  between  two  vowels,  retains  its  hiss- 
ing sound.  Ex.  vraisemblable  (compounded  of  vrai  and  semblable),  mono 
syllale. 

•    Sch  is  generally  pronounced  like  sh.    Ex.  schisme.    It  has  the  sound  o{ 
s7j  in  a  few  words. 

S  final  is  sounded  in  words  that  have  been  taken  from  Greek  and  Latin 
without  any  change  of  orthography.  Ex.  atlas,  blocus,  gratis,  etc.  S  is 
also  sounded  in  cens,  en-sus,  mais,  mosurs,  vis,  Rheims,  fils,  sens  (in  some  of 
its  meanings),  Us  (not  in  fleur-de-lis)  ,  tous  (when  used  without  a  noun). 

T  is  generally  sounded  as  in  English. 

58.  In  words  corresponding  in  form  to  those  in  which  t  has  in 
English  an  sh-  sound,  it  has  in  French  the  sound  of  ss.     This  occurs 
in  tied,  tiel,tter,  tion,  not  initial  or  preceded  by  x  or  s.   Ex.  partial, 
essentiel,  initier,  nation.      But  bestial,  bastion,  mixtion,  have  the 
pure  t  sound. 

59.  T  has  also  the  sound  of  s  in  words  in  tie,  that  have  in  Eng- 
lish cy,  or  tia,  in  which  t  sounds  like  sh.     Ex.  prophetie,  democra- 
tic, minutie,  initier,  —  also  in  balbutier.     In  other  words  in  tie 
and  tier,  t  retains  the  proper  sound.     Ex.  moitie,  metier. 


Th  is  never  pronounced  as  in  English,  but  always  like  t  alone,  as 
tique. 

T  final  is  heard  in  brut,  chut,  correct,  dot,  direct,  deficit,  fat,  exact,  net,  sus- 
pect, strict.  In  sept  and  liuit,  t  is  silent  only  when  they  precede  a  noun  com- 
mencing with  a  consonant.  Ex.  huit  gargons.  In  Christ,  s  and  t  are  both 
pronounced;  but  in  Jesus-  Christ  they  are  both  silent.  In  vingt,  t  is  pro- 
nounced only  in  the  series  between  20  and  30.  Ex.  vingt-cinq. 

X  has  the  sound  of  gs  in  words  beginning  with  x  or  ex  before  a  vowel  or 
an  h  mute.  Ex.  Xavier,  exil,  exhumer. 

In  a  few  proper  names  x  has  the  sound  of  ss.  Ex.  Bruxelles,  Auxerre;  it 
has  also  this  sound  in  soixante,  —  and  in  six  and  dix  when  standing  alone. 
In  dix-huit  and  dix-neuf,  x  sounds  like  z. 

X  in  other  cases  has  the  sound  of  ks.    Ex.  luxe,  Aix-la-Chapelle. 

Z  is  pronounced  in  gaz.  When  final  in  proper  names  it  has  the 
sound  of  s.  Ex.  Metz,  Suez,  etc. 


26  PRONUNCIATION. 


LINKING  OF  FINAL  CONSONANTS. 

60.  The  final  consonant  of  a  word,  closely  comiected  in  sense 
with  the  next  word  beginning  with  a  vowel  or  silent  h  must  general- 
ly be  can-led  over.  In  that  case  5  and  x  are  sounded  like  z  ;  d  like 
tt  and  y  (seldom  linked)  like  k.  Ex.  un  grand  homme,  vous  avez, 
Us  ont,  aux  armes. 

No  general  rule  can  be  given  embracing  all  the  cases  in  which  a  final  con- 
sonant must  be  thus  linked.  In  poetry  and  in  impressive  reading,  the  link- 
ing must  be  made  in  many  cases  where  it  would  sound  unnatural  and  af- 
fected in  daily  conversation.  It  may  be  stated  in  general  terms  that  the 
more  closely  connected  the  words  are  in  sense,  the  more  imperative  it  is  to 
link  them  together  in  pronunciation.  Certain  words,  such  as  et,  riz,  clef, 
plomb,  loup,  etc.,  can  never  be  linked.  Words  ending  in  a  nasal  sound  are 
seldom  linked,  except  short  words  that  recur  frequently,  such  as  on,  en,  unt 
mon,  ton,  son,  lien,  Ion,  etc.  "When  a  nasal  n  is  linked,  either  the  nasal 
sound  is  heard  and  an  additional  n  pronounced  before  the  next  vowel,  or 
the  nasal  is  dropped  altogether,  thus  un  homme,  on  a,  as  if  written  un 
nhomme,  on  na ;  or  u-nhomme,  o-na.  In  rapid  speech  the  nasal  sound  ahn&st 
always  disappears ;  many  omit  it  altogether.  In  some  combinations,  such 
as  bon  homme,  bien  heureux,  it  is  never  heard. 


OBSERVATIONS  ON  E  MUTE. 

We  have  seen  that  e  unaccented  when  final  is  mute,  and  that  in  the  words 
ce,  de,  je,  le,  me,  ne,  que,  se  and  te,  and  when  it  terminates  a  syllable  not 
final,  it  has  the  indistinct  sound  of  e  in  batteiy.  In  rapid  utterance,  however, 
even  this  feeble  sound  is  not  heard  whenever  the  articulation  connected  with  it 
can  be  distinctly  uttered  without  it. 

Hence  the  following  rule  :  — 

61.  E  unaccented  ending  a  syllable  is  silent  whenever  the  con- 
sonant before  it  can  be  pronounced  either  with  a  vowel  that  precedes 
or  one  that  comes  after  it  in  the  next  syllable  or  word. 

Practice  and  oral  teaching  only  can  make  this  law  of  euphony  perfectly 
clear.  In  the  following  examples  the  e's  printed  in  italics  are  not  pro- 
nounced. v 


27 

Voilk  le  diemin  de  fer.  There  is  the  railway. 

Je  le  sais.  I  know  it. 

Je  ne  to  le  donne  pas.  I  do  not  give  it  to  thee. 

Beaucoup  de  monde.  Many  persons. 

Je  ne  me  le  propose  pas.  I  do  not  propose  it  to  myself. 

Etre  attentif.  To  bo  attentive. 

Noble  ardeur.  Noble  ardor. 

In  the  last  two  examples  the  r  and  /  that  precede  the  e  are  virtually  car- 
ried over  to  the  next  word  as  if  no  e  intervened,  and  tr  and  U  were  final. 

NOTE.  Care  must  be  taken  not  to  pronounce  tre,  dre,  lie,  pie,  ere,  etc.,  as 
they  are  in  English,  that  is  as  ter,  dcr,  bel,  pel,  etc.,  in  order,  temple,  noble. 
ID  French  the  I  and  r  must  not  be  separated  by  any  intervening  sound  from 
the  consonant  that  precedes.  Ex.  ordre,  aimable,  quatre,  nacre,  peuple. 


I.    PREMIERE    LEgON, 


THE    ARTICLE. 

1.  IN  the  French  language  there  are  only  two  genders,  viz., 
the  masculine  and  the  feminine.     This  distinction  applies  also  to 
inanimate  objects,  which  are  either  masculine  or  feminine. 

2.  The  definite  article  has  a  peculiar  form  for  each  gender :  le 
before  a  masculine,  la  before  a  feminine  substantive ;  les  is  the  plu- 
ral of  both  genders.     Ex. :  — 

Masc.  Le  roi,  the  king,  Fern.  La  reine,  the  queen. 

le  pere,  the  father.  la  mere,  the  mother. 

3.  Le  and  la  in  the  singular  lose  then1  vowels  and  take  the  apos- 
trophe (T)  before  a'noun  beginning  either  with  a  vowel  or  h  mute. 
Ex.:  — 

Masc.  L'ami,  the  friend.  Eem.  L'amie,  the  (female)  friend. 

I'homme,  the  man.  I'histoire,  (the)  history. 

4.  The  indefinite  article,  answering  to  the  English  a  or  an,  is 
un  for  the  masculine ;  line  for  the  feminine.     Ex.  : 

Masc.  Un  roi,  a  king.  Fern.  Une  reine,  a  queen. 

un  pere,  a  father.  une  mere,  a  mother, 

tm  ami,  a  friend.  une  amie,  a  (female)  friend, 

VOCABULARY. 

Le  livre,  the  book.  un  chapeau,  a  hat,  bonnet. 

le  pain,  the  bread.  la  rose,  the  rose. 

le  cheval,  the  horse.  lafleur,  the  flower. 

le  chien,  the  dog.  la  plume,  the  pen,  feather. 

I'oncle,  the  uncle.  la  tante,  the  aunt. 

I* enfant,  the  child.  une  poire,  a  pear. 

I'or,  m.  the  gold.  wnc  pomme,  an  apple. 

unjardin,  a  garden.  e£,  and. 

23 


THE  ARTICLE.  29 


8.  .Fait  I  have.  Ai-je,  have  I  ? 

tu  as,  thou  hast.  as-tu,  hast  thou  ? 

t/  a,  he  has.  a-£-z7,  has  he  ? 

a,  she  has.  a-t-elle,  has  she  t 


PI.  wows  avons,  we  have.  avons-nous,  have  we  T 

rows  avez,  you  have.  avez-wws,  have  you? 

Us  ont,  they  have.  ont-ils,  have  they  ? 

eiVes  only  they  (fern)  have.  ont-elles,  have  they  ? 

REMARK  1  .  J*ai  is  for  j"e  al.  The  e  of  j"e,  I,  is  elided  when  the  verb 
begins  with  a  vowel  or  silent  h. 

2.  Observe  the  hyphen  by  which  the  verb  and  pronoun  are  always  joined 
in  interrogations. 

3.  The  t  in  a-t-il,  a-t-elle,  is  merely  euphonic.    It  is  inserted  to  prevent 
the  hiatus  between  two  vowel  sounds,  when  the  third  person  singular  of  a 
verb  ends  in  a  vowel,  and  is  followed  by  il,  die,  on. 

4.  The  use  of  the  2d  person  singular  is  much  more  frequent  in  French 
than  in  English.    It  generally  denotes  familiarity  and  intimacy.     In  ad- 
dressing inferiors,  it  denotes  authority;  in  poetry,  its  use  is  the  same  as  in 
English. 

5.  When,  in  a  question  not  beginning  with  an  interrogative  pronoun  or 
an  adverb,  the  subject  is  expressed  by  a  substantive,  it  must  begin  the  sen- 
tence, and  the  pronoun  still  be  put  after  the  verb.    Ex.  :  —  L'  enfant  a-t-il  ? 

has  the  child  ?     La  imre  a-t-elle  ?  lias  the  mother  ? 

^Sgc*-" 

READING  EXERCISE    1. 

J'ai  lo  livre.  Tu  as  un  livre.  J'ai  la  rose.  As-tu  la  rose  ? 
II  a  le  cheval.  Ello  a  le  pain.  Lo  pere  a  un  clieval.  La  mere  a 
un  jardin.  L'enfant  a  une  poire.  Nous  avons  un  chien.  Avez- 
vous  un  chapeau  ?  Us  ont  un  oncle  et  une  tante.  Elles  ont  une 
tante.  L'  enfant  a-t-il  une  plume  ?  La  mere  a-t-elle  la  fleur  ?  Lo 
roi  a-t-il  un  clieval?  II  a  le  clieval.  Les  amis  (plu.}  ont  leslivres, 
Les  cnfants  ont  les  plumes. 

THEME    1. 

1.  I  have  the  Lorse.  2.  I  have  a  friend.  3.  Thou  hast  the  book. 
4.  He  has  a  dog.  5.  She  has  the  bonnet.  6.  The  father  has  a 
garden.  7.  The  mother  has  the  rose.  8.  The  king  has  the  gold. 


30  II.  DEUXIEME  LEf  ON. 

9.  The  uncle  has  a  friend.  10.  We  have  the  bread.  11.  You 
have  a  pear.  12.  They  (masc.*)  have  an  apple.  13.  They  (fern.) 
have  a  flower.  14.  Has  the  friend  a  horse  ?  15.  The  friend  has 
a  horse  and  a  dog. 

CONVERSATION. 

Ai-je  la  rose  ?  Yous  avez  la  rose. 

As-tu  le  pain  ?  J'ai  le  pain. 

A-t-elle  la  fleur  ?  Elle  a  la  fleur. 

L ' enfant  a-t-il  le  livre?  II  a  le  livre. 

Avez-vous  nn  cheval  ?  Nous  avons  un  cheval  et  un  chien. 

L'enfant  a-t-il  une  poire  ?  L 'enfant  a  une  poire  et  une  pomme. 


II.    DEUXIEME    LE90N. 


FORMATION   OF   THE   PLURAL. 

1.  GENERAL  RULE.     The  plural  is  formed  in  French  as  in  Eng- 
lish, by  the  addition  of  an  5  to  the  singular.     Ex. :  — 

Le  roi,        Plur.  les  rois.  la  pomme,  Plur.  les  pommes. 

le  livre,  les  livres.  I' enfant,  les  enfants* 

Vhomme,  les  hommes.          I' ami,  les  amis. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

2.  Nouns  ending  in  s,  x,  z,  in  the  singular,  remain  unchanged. 

Lefils,  the  son.  Plur.  les  fits,  the  sons. 

la  noix,  the  walnut,  les  noix,  the  walnuts. 

le  nez,  the  nose.  les  nez,  the  noses. 

3.  Words  ending  in  au,  eu,  form  their  plural  by  adding  x  instead 
of  *,  as :  — 

Le  chapeau,  the  hat  or  bonnet.      Plur.  les  chapeaux. 
le  feu,  the  fire.  les  feux. 

le  lieu,  the  place.  les  lieux. 


FORMATION  OP  THE  PLURAL".  31 

REMARK.    Seven  nouns  in  ou  take  x  in  the  plural,  viz. : 
Le  chou,  the  cabbage.  le  pou,  the  louse. 

le  bijou,  the  jewel.  le  genou,  the  knee. 

le  caillou,  the  pebble,  k  joujou,  the  plaything. 

le  hibou,  the  owl. 

Plural :  les  choux,  les  bijoux,  les  cailloux,  etc. 

The  others  ending  in  ou  follow  the  general  rule  and  take  s  in  the  plural, 
as  .  le  clou,  the  nail;  plur.  les  clous;  le  trou,  the  hole;  plur.  les.  trous,  etc. 

4.  Nouns  ending  in  al,  ail,  change  these  terminations  into  aux, 
to  form  the  plural,  as  : 

Le  cheval,  the  horse.  Plur.  Les  chevaux. 

I'animal,  the  animal.  les  animaux. 

le  travail,  the  work.  les  travaux. 

KEMABK.  This  rule,  however,  has  a  few  exceptions,  which  follow  the 
general  rule,  simply  taking  s  in  the  plural,  as :  le  bal,  the  ball ;  le  carnaval, 
the  carnival ;  le  portail,  the  doorway*  le  gouvernail,  the  helm ;  Ve'ventail,  the 
fan,  etc.  Plur.  les  Ids,  les  carnavals,  etc. 

5.  The  following  words  form  their  plural  irregularly.     (The  first 
force  have  also  a  regular  plural.     See  Part  n,  L.  n.) 

Le  del,  heaven.  Plur.  Les  deux,  heavens. 
Z?cez7,  the  eye.  les  yeux,  the  eyes. 

1'cueul,  the  great-grandfather.  les  aieux,  the  ancestors. 

le  b&ail,  the  cattle.  les  bestiaux,  the  cattle. 

VOCABULARY. 

Le  canif,  the  penknife.  le  jeu,  the  play,  game. 

lefrere,  the  brother.  la  souris,  the  mouse. 

la  soeur,  the  sister.  le  nom,  the  name. 

la  porte,  the  door,  gate.  le  chameau,  the  camel. 

la  maison,  the  house.  le  couteau,  the  knife. 

le  chateau,  the  castle.  mon,  an.  ma,  f.  mes,  pi.  my. 

le  palais,  the  palace.  vu,  seen,    ou,  or. 

un  tableau,  a  picture.  deux,  two.    trois,  three. 

le  chat,  the  cat.  quatre,  four,    cinq,  five. 

le  ggnfral,  the  general.  le  bras,  the  arm. 

la  noix,  the  walnut.  aussi,  also. 


32  H«    DEUXIEME 

Voici,  here  is,  this  is,  here  are,  these  are. 

Voila,  there  is,  that  is,  there  are,  those  are. 

Voici  is  compounded  of  the  imperative  of  voir,  to  see,  and  ici,  here.  It 
means  therefore  literally,  see  here.  Voila  means  see  there.  They  both  gov- 
ern the  objective  case.  Ex.  me  void,  here  am  I ;  literally,  Behold  me  here. 

S,  J'avais,  I  had.  Avais-je,  had  I  ? 

tu  avals,  tliou  hadst.  avais-tu,  hadst  thou  ? 

i7  avaifc,  he  had.  avait-il,  had  he  ? 

e2Ze  awzzY,  she  had.  avait-elk,  had  she  ? 

PL  nous  avions,  we  had.  avions-nous,  had  we  ? 

vous  aviez,  you  had.  aviez-vous,  had  you  ? 

tfe  avaient,  they  had.  avaient-ils,  had  they  ? 

cZ/es  avaient,  they  had.  avaient-ettes,  had  they  ? 

READING  EXERCISE  2 

Nous  avons  un  canif.  Vous  aviez  deux  canifs.  Mon  frere  a  les 
couteaux.  La  maison  a  deux  portes.  Avais-je  les  noix  ?  Aviez- 
vous  les  joujoux  ?  Oui,  nous  avions  les  joujoux.  Le  roi  avait  trois 
chateaux.  La  reine  a  les  bijoux.  Voici  quatre  souris.  Les  enfants 
avaient  trois  pommes.  Mon  oncle  avait  deux  chevaux.  Ma  tante 
a  cinq  tableaux.  Les  chameaux  ont  une  bosse  (hump).  Ma  mere 
a  deux  soeurs  et  trois  freres. 

THEME  2. 

1.  I  have  three  brothers.  2.  (The)1*  man  has  two  arms.  3.  I 
had  four  horses.  4.  Hadst  thou  the  flowers  ?  5.  I  had  the  roses. 
6.  There  are  the  apples,  the  pears,  and  the  walnuts.  7.  There  are 
also  the  games  and  the  pictures.  8.  Have  you  seen  the  houses,  the 
castles,  and  the  gardens  ?  9.  My  uncle  has  four  pictures.  1$..X 
have  seen  five  horses  and  two  camels.  11.  The  children  have  three 
mice.  12.  Have  you  seen  the  games  of  the  (des)  children? 

*  In  the  thomes,  words  placed  in  parentheses  ( — )  must  be  expressed  in 
French,  though  redundant  in  English.  English  words  printed  in  italics 
must  be  omitted  in  French. 


CASE. 


33 


13.  Has  my  aunt  three  dogs  or  three  cats  ?  14.  She  has  three  dogs 
and  two  cats.  15.  The  eye  is  blue  (est  lieu).  16.  I  have  two 
eyes.  17.  My  brother  has  two  knives,  and  I  have  two  penknives. 


CONVERSATION. 


Avez-vous  un  canif  ? 
Avais-je  les  couteaux  ? 
As-tu  vu  les  chameaux  ? 

Avez-vous  aussi  vu  les  cha- 
teaux ? 

Avez-vous  les  bijoux  ? 

Les  enfants  ont  ils  les  habits 
(coats)  ou  les  chapeaux? 

Avaient-ils  vu  les  feux  ? 

Avez-vous  les  tableaux  ? 

Mon  pere  a-t-il  un  chat  ? 

Combien  de  (how  many)  freres 
avez-vous  ? 

Combien  de  soeurs  avez-vous  ? 

Avez-vous  vu  les  amis  ? 


J'ai  deux  canifs. 

Vous  aviez  ]es  couteaux. 

J'ai  vu  les  chameaux  et  les  cho 
vaux. 

J'ai  vu  les  chateaux  et  les  \ Ca- 
lais. 

Ma  tante  a  les  bijoux. 

Les  enfants  ont  les  habits  et  lus 
chapeaux. 

Bs  avaient  vu  les  feux. 

Je  n'ai  pas  (not)  les  tableaux. 

II  a  un  chat  et  un  chien. 

J'ai  trois  freres. 

J'ai  deux  soeurs. 

Nous  n'avons  pas  vu  les  amis. 


III.    TROISIEME    LEgON. 


—  A—DE. 

1»  French  nouns  have  no  variation  of  termination  to  indicate 
case ;  the  nominative  and  objective  are,  as  in  English,  alike  in  form, 
and  the  possessive  is  expressed  by  the  preposition  de  (of)  and  its 
object. 

2.   The  possessor  must,  in  French,  follow  the  object  possessed, 

3 


34  m.    TROISIEME 

and  be  preceded  by  the  article,  e.  g.  The  king's  throne,  must  bs 
transposed  as  if  it  were,  the  throne  of  the  king ;  Le  trone  du  rot. 

3.  The  preposition  de  (of,  from,)  appears  either  unchanged  or 
contracted  with  the  article.     A  contraction  takes  place  whenever  de 
occurs  before  the  article  le  or  les  ;  in  the  first  case,  it  takes  the  form 
du  (singular),  in  the  second  des  (plural).     Ex. 

S.  du  roi  (instead  of  de  le  roi,)  of  the  king,  or  the  king's. 
dupere  (instead  of  de  le  pere,)  of  the  father,  or  the  father's. 

PI.  des  rois  (instead  of  de  les  rois,)  of  the  kings,  or  the  kings'. 
des  meres  (instead  of  de  les  meres,)  of  the  mothers. 

4.  Before  la  and  l\  de  remains  unaltered,  as  :  — 

de  la  mere,  of  the  mother,  or  the  mother's. 
de  I'ami,  of  the  friend,  the  friend's. 
de  I'homme,  of  (the)  man,  the  man's. 

5.  Before  the  indefinite  article  un,  une,  an  apostrophe  is  put  in- 
stead of  the  e  of  de,  as  :  — 

.  d'un  roiy  of  a  king.  d'une  rcine,  of  a  queen. 

d'un  ami,  of  a  friend.  d'une  amiey  of  a  female  friend. 

6.  Before  le,  the  preposition  h  (to)  is  contracted  with  this  article 
to  au;  and  before  les  into  aux;  as: — + 

au  (&  le)  roi,  to  the  king.  aux  (a  los)  rois,  to  the  kings. 

au      "     frere,  to  the  brother.        aux      "     freres,  to  the  brothers. 

7.  The  definite  article  must  be  used  in  French  before  all  nouna 
used  in  a  general  sense  or  denoting  a  whole  species  of  objects,  though 
in  English  the  article  is  not  employed ;  as  :  — 

Man,  I'homme.  nature,  la  nature 

life,  la  vie.  summer,  V  el€. 

fortune,  la  fortune.  dinner,  le  diner. 

Hence,  of  man,  of  life,  of  fortune,  etc.,  are  to  be  translated  in  French 

de  rhomme,  de  la  vie,  de  la  fortune,  etc. ;  to  man,  to  life,  to  nature,  etc.,  a 

I'homme,  a  la  vie,  a  la  nature. 

8.  In  French  the  article  is  to  be  repeated  before  each  substantive 
of  a  sentence,  as  :  — 


CASE.  35 

The  salt,  pepper  and  vinegar,  —  le  set,  lepoivrcet  le  vinaigre. 

The  men,  women  and  children,  —  les  hommes,  lesfemmes  et  les  enfants. 

VOCABULARY. 

Dieu,  God,  lafenetre,  the  window. 

le  cre'ateur,  the  creator.  le  cousin,  the  cousin. 

le  mondey  the  world.  la  cousine,  the  cousin,  f. 

Vemiemi,  the  enemy.  lafille,  the  daughter. 

le  sommeil,  sleep.  la  ville,  the  town. 

I'image,  f.  the  imago.  je  donne,  I  give. 

la  mort,  death.  le  voisin,  the  neighbor. 

lafeuille,  the  leaf.  est,  is.  (belongs)     sont,  are. 

a  qui,  to  whom,  whose  1  oui,  yes.    non,  no. 

I'oiseau,  the  bird.  Monsieur,  Sir. 

votre,  your.  Madame,  Madam. 

I'arbre,  m.  the  tree.  Mademoiselle,  Miss. 

READING  EXERCISE   3. 

Le  pere  cle  F  enfant.  La  mere  des  enfants.  La  porte  de  la  mai- 
S)n.  Les  portes  des  maisons.  Les  fenetres  du  palais.  Le  chat 
est  un  animal.  Les  chats  sont  les  ennemis  des  souris.  Le  sommeil 
est  1'image  de  la  mort.  Le  chateau  est  au  roi  et  a  la  reine.  Je 
donne  la  plume  k  1'enfant.  Je  donne  le  jeu  aux  enfants.  Le  jar- 
din  est  aux  freres  et  aux  S03urs.  Les  images  des  rois.  Les  feuilles 
des  arbres.  Les  fenetres  de  la  maison. 


THEME  3. 

1.  The  father  of  the  son.  2.  The  mother  of  the  daughter. 
3.  The  mother  of  the  children.  4.  The  door  of  the  house.  5.  The 
gates  of  the  town.  6.  The- houses  of  the  towns.  7.  The  windows 
of  the  houses.  8.  God  is  the  creator  of  the  world.  9.  The  dog  is 
the  enemy  of  the  cat.  10.  I  give  the  book  to  the  brother.  11.  I 
give  the  coats  to  the  brothers  and  sisters.  12.  The  dog  is  the  friend 
of  man.  13.  The  feathers  of  the  birds.  14.  My  cousin's  bonnet. 
15.  My  cousins7  bonnets  (the  bonnets  of  my  cousins).  16.  Sleep 
is  the  brother  of  death.  17.  Of  the  trees  of  the  garden.  18.  The 


IV.      QUATRIEME    LEgON. 


eyes  of  the  horses  are  large  (grands).  19.  The  friend's  name. 
20.  The  windows  of  the  castle.  21.  The  neighbor's  house  and 
garden.  22.  I  give  the  roses  to  the  sister  of  the  general.  23.  Give 
(donnez)  the  pen  to  the  father. 

CONVERSATION. 

Ai-je  le  livre  du  cousin  ?  Tu  as  le  livre  du  cousin. 


As-tu  Fimage  de  la  tante  ? 
A-t-il  vu  le  jardin  du  roi  ? 
Les  enfants  ont-ils  les  jeux  ? 

Qui  (who)  a  les  ciseaux  (scis- 
sors)  de  ma  so3ur  ? 

A  qui  sont  les  noix  ? 

A  qui  sont  les  poires  ? 

A  qui  est  ce  (^iz's)  jardin  ? 

Avez-vous  vu  le  chien  de  Ton- 
ale? 

A  qui  sont  ces  (these)  roses  ? 


Oui    M  — *  j'ai  Fimage   de   la 

tante. 
Non  M  —  il  a  vu  le  chateau  du 

roi. 
Oui    M  —    les    enfants  ont  les 

jeux. 
Yoici  les  ciseaux  de  votre  soeur. 

Elles  sont  &  1'enfant. 
Elles  sont  aux  enfants  du  voisin 
II  est  au  roi  et  a  la  reine. 
Voila  le  chien  de  Foncle. 

Elles  sont  a  ma  cousine. 


IV.    QUATRIEMB 


PREPOSITIONS. 

1.   The  following  list  includes  the  French  prepositions  of  most 
frequent  occurrence. 

d,  to,  at,  in.  dans,  in,  into.  par,  through,  Ly 

apres,  after.  de,  of,  from.  parmi,  among. 

*  This  M  —  ,  which  will  always  be  inserted  after  Oui  and  Non  should 
be  read  Monsieur,  Madame,  or  Mademoiselle,  as  the  case  may  require. 


PREPOSITIONS.  31 

avcsnt,  before,  (time),  devant, before, (place). pendant,  during. 
avec,  with.  derriere,  behind.          pour,  for. 

chez,  at,  with,  at  the  en,  in.  sans,  without. 

house  of.  entre,  between.  sous,  under. 

contre,  against.  envers,  vers,  towards,  sur,  on,  upon. 

As  to  the  contraction  of  a  and  le  into  au,  of  a  and  les  into  aux,  of  de  with 
le  into  diij  of  de  with  les  into  des,  see  page  34. 

2.  After  prepositions  no  article  is  used  whenever  the  noun  is  taken  in  a 
wide  and  indeterminate  sense,  and  forms  with  the  preposition  a  sort  of  ad- 
verbial phrase,  as  :  avec  plaisir,  with  pleasure ;  sans  crainte,  without  fear. 

3.  Chez  means  at  the  house  of.  It  governs  the  noun  or  pro- 
noun as  any  other  preposition.  Ex.  chez  moi,  at  my  house,  (at  the 
house  of  me) ;  chez  vous,  at  your  house ;  chez  mon  oncle,  at  my 
uncle's,  (at  the  house  of  my  uncle). 

For  remarks  on  the  employment  of  some  prepositions,  see  P.  n.,  L.  16. 

VOCABULARY*- 

La  cour,  the  court,  yard.  la  chambre,  the  room. 

Vecole,  f.  the  school.  l^glise,  f.  the  church. 

le  maitre,  the  master,  teacher.  la  unit,  the  night. 

Vt&&3  fMihe  water. '  le  jour,  the  day. 

la  main,  the  hand.  la  cuisine,  the  kitchen. 

la  pluie,  the  rain.  la  poche,  the  pocket. 

le  toit,  the  roof.  demeure,  lives,    noire,  our. 

oii,  where,  ton,  thy,  ce,  this  qui,  who,  whom '? 

S.  Je  suis,  I  am.  Suis-je,  am  I? 

tu  es,  thou  art.  es-tu,  art  thou  ? 

il  est,  he  is.  est-il,  is  he  ? 

elle  est,  she  is.  est-elle,  is  she  ? 

PI.   nous  sommes,  we  are.  sommes-nous,  are  we  ? 

rows  etes,  you  are.  etes-vous,  are  you  ? 

t'/ssoTrt,  they  are.  sont-ils,  are  they  ? 

c//es  sont,  they  are.  sont-ellcs,  are  they  ? 


38  IV.      QUATRIEME 

READING  EXERCISE  4. 

Je  sriis  clans  la  cour.  L'oiseau  est  sur  le  toit.  Es-tu  au  jardin 
(dans  le  jardin)  ?  Louis  est  cbez  mon  pere.  Lcs  chevaux  sont  de- 
vant  la  porte.  Apres  la  pluie.  Pendant  la  nuit.  Avant  le  jour. 
L'enfant  est  sous  1'arbre.  Panni  les  enfants.  Noi^  sommes  der- 
I'erc  les  arbrcs.  Us  sont  entre  la  porte  et  la  fenetre.  Ce  livre  esfc 
pour  mon  frere.  Ma  tante  est  a  1'eglise.  Sans  argent  (money.) 
Avcc  les  chevaux  de  rnon  oncle.  Centre  1'ennemi.  Notre  ami 
demeure  a  Paris  dans  la  maison  de  sa  tante. 

THEME  4. 

1.  In  the  yard.  2.  During  the  night.  3.  I  am  before  the 
house.  4.  Louis  is  in  the  garden.  5.  Are  you  in  the  yard  ?  6. 
Before  night.  7.  I  speak  (je  parle)  of  the  house,  —  of  the  coat,  — 
of  the  flowers,  —  of  my  father,  —  of  my  mother.  8.  The  two  knives 
are  in  my  pocket.  9.  Where  are  the  cats?  10.  They  are  in  the 
kitchen.  11.  The  birds  are  on  the  roof.  12.  The  three  children 
of  my  cousin  (m.^)  are  in  (the)  town.  13.  Against  the  rain.  14. 
With  my  father.  15.  Without  a  master.  16.  Louis  is  in  his  (so) 
room.  17.  The  book  is  for  my  sister.  18.  Between  the  two  wki- 
dows.  19.  Under  the  roof  of  the  house.  20.  Are  they  before  the 
door  of  the  church  ?  21.  No;  they  are  behind  the  church.  22. 
The  children  are  at  (the)  school. 

CONVERSATION. 

Oa  est  Louis?  II  est  dans  la  cour, 

Ou  est  mon  fils  ?  II  est  au  jardin. 

Ou  sont  les  enfants?  Ilsjouent  (play)  devant  la  mai 

son. 

Votre  cousine  est-cllc  a  Tecolc?    Non  M — ,  elle  est  a  1'eglise. 
^tes-vous  dans  le  jardin  ?  Non  M  — ,  nous  sommes  dans  la 

cour. 
Ton  pere  est-il  au«jardin?  Non  M — ,  il  est  dans  sa  chain- 

bro. 

Sont-ils  a  la  fenetre  ?  Oui  M  — ,  ils  sont  a  la  fenetre. 

Avez-vous     vu     les     canards     Nous  avons  vu  les  canards  ct  les 
(ducks\  dans  la  cour  ?  oies  (geese) . 


THE   PARTITIVE   ARTICLE.  39 

V.    CINQUIEME    LE9ON. 


THE  PARTITIVE  ARTICLE. 

1.  The  partitive  article  answers  to  the  English  some  or  any,  ex- 
pressed in  French  by  du  before  a  noun  masculine  beginning  with  a 
consonant,  by  de  la  before  a  noun  feminine  beginning  with  a  conso- 
nant, and  by  de  P  before  a  noun  of  either  gender  beginning  with  a 
vowel  or  an  h  mute.     Ex. : 

Du  pain,  some  or  any  bread.  de  la  biere,  some  beer. 

du  vin,  (some  or  any)  wine.  de  la  viande,  some  meat. 

de  V argent,  some  money  (Silver).        de  Vhuile,  some  oil. 
In  the  plural  the  partitive  article  is  des  for  both  genders.    Ex. 

Des  livres,  (some)  books.  desfleurs,  flowers. 

des  enfants,  children.  des  roses,  roses.  , 

Some  is  not  always  used  in  English,  whereas  du,,  de  la,  de  V,  des,  must 
always  be  expressed  in  French. 

2.  In  questions  the  English  use  any  instead  of  some  ;  in  French 
it  must  be  rendered  by  the  same  article,  as :  — 

Have-£Pu  s^y  bread  ?  •  avez-vous  du  pain  f 
Is  there  any  water  ?  y  a-t-il  de  Veau  ? 

3.  The  partitive  article  must  be  used  whenever  in  English  some 
or  any  is  expressed  or  understood  before  a  substantive ;  it  must  be 
repeated  before  every  substantive  in  a  sentence.     Ex. :  — 

Have  you  bread  and  cheese  1    Avez-vous  du  pain  et  dufromage  ? 
Bring  me  some  mustard,  oil  and  vinegar. 
Apportez-moi  de  la  moutarde,  de  I'huile  et  du  vinaigre. 

4.  However,  when  the  substantive  is  preceded  by  an  adjective, 
the  simple  preposition  de  or  d'  takes  the  place  of  the  partitive  arti« 
cle,  in  the  singular  as  well  as  in  the  plural,  as :  — 

S.  de  bon  vin,  some  or  any  good  wine. 
de  bonne  viande,  some  or  any  good  meat. 
de  mauvais  cafe',  some  or  any  bad  coffee. 
<f  excelkniefarine,  some  or  any  excellent  flour. 


40 


V.      CINQUIEME 


PL  de  Ions  Hvres,  some  or  any  good  books. 

de  Idles  fleurs,  some  or  any  beautiful  flowers. 

d'  excellents  vaisseaux,  some  or  any  excellent  vessels. 

VOCABULARY. 


Lafarine,  the  flour. 
lefer,  (the)  iron. 
I' argent,  m.  silver. 
le  papier,  the  paper. 
I'encre,  f.  the  ink. 
lefromage,  the  cheese. 
le  gar$on*  the  boy. 
le  plomb,  the  lead. 
le  sel,  the  salt. 
le  canard,  the  duck. 
I'ceuf,  m.  the  egg. 
ily  a,  there  is,  there  are. 

S.  J'aurai,  I  shall  have 
tu  auras,  thou  wilt  have. 
il  aura,  he  will  have. 
die  aura,  she  will  have 

PL  nous  aurons,  we  shall  have. 
voits  aurez,  you  will  have. 
Us  auront,  they  will  have. 
dies  auront,  they  will  have. 


le  fruit,  the  fruit. 
le  sucre,  the  sugar. 
Ze  cafe",  the  coffee. 
Za  prune,  the  plum. 
le  beurre,  the  butter. 
le  crayon,  the  pencil. 
le  soulier,  the  shoe. 
Ze  Las,  the  stocking. 
acliete',  boaght. 
que,  what,     mais,  but. 
£z,  there,    six,  six. 
c'esJ,  this  is,  that  is. 

Aurai-je,  shall  I  have  ? 
auras-tu,  wilt  thou  have? 
aura-t-il,  will  he  have  ? 
aura-t-dle,  will  she  have  ? 

aurons-nous,  shall  we  have  ? 
aurez-vous,  will  you  have  ? 
auront-ils,  will  they  have  ? 
auront-dles,  will  they  have  ? 


READING  EXERCISE  5. 

J'avais  dc  la  farine  ct  du  sel.  Aviez-vous  aussi  du  sel  ?  Le  roi 
a  de  For  et  de  Fargent.  II  a  aussi  des  bijoux.  Tu  auras  du 
fromage.  Louis  a  achete  du  papier  et  de  Fencre.  Nous  aurons 
des  livres,  des  plumes  et  des  crayons.  Avaient-elles  des  fleurs  ci 
des  fruits  ?  Je  donne  a  ton  cousin  des  noix  et  des  pommes.  Dans 
ia  cour  il  y  a  des  canards.  Mon  cousin  avait  des  chevaux  et  dea 
chiens.  Ma  cousine  aura  des  chats,  mais  ma  tante  aura  des  oiseaux 
Dans  les  jardins  il  y  a  des  arbres,  des  fruits  et  des  fieurs. 

*  Garcon  means  waiter  and  bachdor  as  well  as  boy.  Petit,  small,  is  there- 
fore generally  prefixed  in  speaking  of  a  young  boy. 


PREPOSITIONS.  41 

THEME  5.  ^ 

1.  We  had  some  butter  and  (some)  cheese.  2.  You  had 
butter  and  eggs.  3.  Here  is  (L.  n.)  bread.  4.  There  is  some 
bread.  5.  My  father  has  bought  lead  and  iron.  6.  The  child  has 
flowers.  7.  My  cousin  (/.)  will  have  some  flour  and  bread.  8. 
Thero  are  eggs  and  fruits.  9.  The  man  has  sugar  and  coffee. 
10.  The  queen  has  gold  and  silver.  11.  I  give  (to)  the  boys 
books,  pencils  and  pens.  12.  They  will  also  have  some  paper  and 
ink.  13.  Louis  has  horses  and  dogs.  14.  My  sister  will  have 
shoes  and  stockings.  15.  I  give  (to)  the  boy  stockings,  clothes, 
(habits)  and  hats.  16.  Have  you  (any)  friends  (m).  17.  They 
(f.)  will  have  friends  (f.).  18.  At  my  uncle's  (L.  iv.  3.)  house 
there  are  books  and  pictures.  19.  Will  you  have  (youlez-vous) 
some  money?  20.  No;  give  me  (donnez-moi)  some  bread. 
21.  Read  (lisez)  good  books.  22.  This  is  bad  coffee.  23.  We 
have  seen  beautiful  roses. 

CONVERSATION. 

Avons-nous  do  la  farine  ?  Nous  avons  de  la  farine. 

Avons-nous  aussi  du  sel  ?  Nous  avons  aussi  du  sel. 

Aurons-nous  du  beurre  et  du    Non  M — ,  mais  vous   aurez  des 

painT"-  fruits. 

Qu'avez-vous  la  (there)  ?  Nous  avons  de  la  viande  ct  du 

pain. 
A-t-elle  des  crayons  ?  Non    M — ,    mais     elle     a    des 

plumes. 

Les  enfants  ont-ils  des  poires  ?      Non  M — ,  ils  ont  des  pomrnes. 
Qu'as-tu  sous  le  bras  (arm)  ?       J'ai  des  livres^ 
Pour  qui  sont  ces  livres  ?  Ils  sont  pour  mon  maitre. 

Ta  soeur  a-t-elle  du  sucre  ?  Elle  a  du  sucre  et  du  cafe. 

Ton  cousin  a-t-il  du  papier  ?          Mon    cousin   a    du    papier,   dea 

plumes  et  de  Fencre. 

Qui  a  du  fromage  ?  Le  gar9on  a  du  fromage. 

Y  a-t-il  des  fruits  ?  Oui  M — ,  il  y  a  des  fruits. 

Qu'y  a-t-il  chez  mon  oncle  ?          II  y  a  des  Iwres  et  des  images. 


42  VI.      SIXIEME  LEgON. 

VI.    SIXIEME    LE90N, 


FURTHER  USE  OF  DE. 

De  is  used  without  the  article. 

1 .  After  nouns  expressing  measure,  weighty  number,  as  : 

Une  bouteille  de  vin,  a  bottle  of  wine.    Une  livre  de  sucre,  a  pound  of  sugar. 
Un  morceau  de  pain,  a  piece  of  bread.    Une  paire  de  las,  a  pair  of  stockings. 

2.  After  adverbs  of  quantity. 

,  Ass&z,  enough.  violns,  less,  fewer. 

beaucoitp,  much,  many,  a  great  many,        ne  —  rien,  nothing. 

a  great  deal.  quelque  chow,  something. 

combien,  how  much,  how  many.  trop,  too,  too  much,  too  many. 

ne  —  guere,  but  little,  but  few.  trop  pen,  too  little,  too  few. 

pen,  little,  few.  taut,  so  much,  so  many. 

plus,  more.  autant,  as  much,  as  many. 

Ex. :  — Assez  de  vin,  wine  enough,  (assez  before  the  noun  and  adjective) 

Combien  d 'argent,  how  much  money  1 

Tant  dejleurs,  so  many  flowers.       Trop  defautes,  too  many  mistakes. 

REMARK.    But  after  lien,  much,  many,  and  la  plupart,  most,  the  article 
must  be  used.    Ex. :  — 

Bien  des  hommes,  many  men.  La  plupart  du  temps,  most  of  the  time, 

3.  After  pas,  point,  jamais,  de  alcne  must  be  used  instead  of 
the  partitive  du,  de  la,  des.     Ex.  :  — 

Je  n'ai  pasde  sucre,  I  have  no  sugar.  N*avez-vous  point  d'encre,  have  yoa  ca 

ink? 

4.  De  is  used  as  a  connective  of  a  word  denoting  a  material. 

Une  bague  d'or,  a  gold  ring.  Une  cuitter  d'argent,  a  sflver  spoon. 

Une  bourse  de  sole,  a  silk  purse.  Une  table  de  bois,  a  wooden  table. 

Cn  chapeau  de  i  £ours,  a  velvet  bonnet. 


PREPOSITIONS.  43 

VOCABULARY. 

Une  feuille,  a  sheet.  I'aune,  f.  the  ell,  yard. 

wn  verre,  a  glass.  une  douzainey  a  dozen, 

le  the*,  tea.  la  botte,  the  boot. 

une  boite,  a  box.  la  personne,  the  person. 

la  mon.re,  the  watch.  le  bois,  the  wood. 

le  drap,  the  cloth.  que,  than. 

re^u,  received.  bu,  drunk. 

la  chaine,  the  chain.  heureux,  happy. 

READING  EXERCISE  6. 

\oiciune  bouteille  de  vin.  Nous  avons  trois  livres  de  suere. 
Nous  aurons  aussi  deux  livres  de  cafe.  La  reine  avait  beaucoup  de 
bijoux.  Aviez-vous  assez  d'argent  ?  Mon  oncle  aura  une  douzaine 
de  bas.  -Avez-vous  re^u  la  boite  de  crayons?  Yous  aurez  une 
feuille  de  papier.  Aviez-vous  assez  de  pain  ?  Les  enfants  avaient 
moins  de  poires  que  de  noix*  s  Je  donne  assez  d'argent  &  mon  fils. 
II  a  bu  trop  de  vin.  STous  aurons  une  chaine  d'argent.  Yous  au- 
rez une  montre  d'or.  Ma  mere  a  un  chapcau  de  velours.  La  plu- 
part  des  hommes  sont  heureux. 

4         THEME  6. 

-Ste-c—- 

1.  I  have  a  dozen  (of)  pens.  2.  Thou  wilt  have  a  sheet  of  pa- 
per. 3.  She  has  cheese  and  butter  enough.  4.  We  had  a  glass  of 
wine.  5.  I  shall  have  also  a  piece  of  meat  and  two  glasses  of  wine. 
6.  He  had  a  bottle  of  oil.  7.  We  had  two  pounds  of  sugar,  six 
pounds  of  coffee,  and  five  pounds  of  tea.  8.  You  will  have  a  great 
many  pencils  and  books.  9.  I  have  bought  a  dozen  stockings  and 
two  pairs  of  shoes.  10.  In  this  (cette)  box  there  are  six  yards  of 
cloth.  11.  I  had  a  silver  watch  and  a  gold  ring.  12.  This  is  a 
wooden  table.  13.  How  many  persons  have  you  seen  (vues)  'i 
14.  We  have  seen  few  persons.  15.  My  cousin  had  a  wooden  box 
16.  Have  you  drunk  a  bottle  of  wine?  17.  Give  me  a  sheet 
of  paper.  18.  My  brother  will  have  something.  19.  My  sis- 
ter has  bought  two  gold  rings  and  three  silver  spoons.  20.  The 
child  has  as  many  pears  as  (que  de)  apples. 


44 


VL      SIXIEMB    LE£ON. 


CONVERSATION. 

Nous  avons  ua  verre  d'eau. 
J'ai  achete  deux  livres  de  suere, 
Oui  M — ,  j'ai  du  cafe. 
Avez-vous    de    1'argent,    mon     Oui  mon  pere,  j'ai  de  1'argent. 

fils? 

Combien  d'argent  avez-vous  ?        J'ai  six  francs. 
Est-ce  assez  pour  vous?  C'est  assez  pour  moi  (me). 

Oil  avez-vous  vu  le  maitre  de     J'ai  vu  mon  maitre  de  musiqua 

musique  ?  au  jardin. 

Avait-il  des  fleurs  ?  Oui  M — ,  il  avait  dcs  fruits  et  des 

fleurs. 

Combien  de  chevaux  avez-vous  ?     Nous  avons  trois  chevaux. 
Avez-vous  une  paire  de  bottes  ?    J'ai  une  paire  de  bottes  et  deus 

paires  de  souliers. 


Qu'&vez-vous  1^  ? 
Qu'avez-vous  achet^  ? 
Avez-vous  aussi  du  cafe  ? 


VII.    SEPTIEME    LE90N. 


PROPER  NOUNS. 

A  distinction  must  be  made  between  names  of  persons  and  town* 
and  names  of  countries,  provinces,  mountains,  rivers,  lakes. 
1.  jllie  former,  as  in  English,  take  no  article,  sucli  are  :  — 


CIIRISTIAN   NAMES. 
Ouillaume,  William.  Francois,  Erancis. 


Henri,  Henry. 
George,  George. 
Jean,  John. 


Elise,  Eliza. 
Hdene,  Helen,  Ellen. 
Jeanne,  Jane. 


NAMES   OP   TOWNS. 
Vienne,  Vienna.  Lyon,  Lyons. 


Geneve,  Geneva. 


Bmxelles,  Brussels. 


PROPER  NOUNS.  45 

2.  We  must  except  from  the  above  rule  the  names  of  several 
Italian  authors  before  which  the  article  is  used  :  le  Tasse,  Tasso  (cfo 
Tasse,  etc)  ;  VArioste,  Ariosto  ;  le  Dante,  Dante ;  —  titles  of  books 
or  plays,  as  :  le  Telemaque  de  Fenelon,  VAthalie  de  Racine,  etc.  ; 
some  names  of  towns,  as :  le  Havre,  Havre ;  le  Caire,  Cairo ;  le 
Nouvelle  Orleans,  New  Orleans. 

3.  Before  proper  names  of  countries,  provinces,  .rivers  and  moun- 
tains, the  definite  article  is  used  in  French,  as  :  — 

La  France,  Prance,  la  Prusse,  Prussia. 

la  Belgique,  Belgium.  I' Europe,  Europe. 

I*  Angleterre,  England.  I'Afrique,  Africa. 

Vltalie,  Italy.  I'Asie,  Asia. 

la  Suisse,  Switzerland.  I'Amtrique,  America. 

I'Allemagnej  Germany.  la  Seine,  the  Seine. 

I'Espagne,  Spain.  le  RUn,  the  Rhine. 

la  Suedz,  Sweden.  les  Alpes,  the  Alps,  etc. 
la  Russie,  Russia. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

4.  The  names  of  countries  and  provinces  take  no  article  when 
they  are  preceded  by  the  preposition  en,  which  corresponds  to  both 
to  and  in.     Ex.: — 

Je  vais  en  Italie,  I  am  going  to  Italy. 

77  demewfe-en  Allemagne,  he  lives  in  Germany. 

5.  To  and  at  or  in,  before  names  of  cities,   towns,   and  vil- 
lages, are  rendered  by  a.     Ex.:  — 

Nous  aliens  a  Londres,        a  Paris,  •        a  Bade,  etc. 

We  go  to  London  to  Paris,       to  Baden,  etc. 

Mon  oncle  demeure  a  Berlin  a  Lyon,  etc. 

My  uncle  lives  at  (in)  Berlin,      at  (in)  Lyons,  etc. 

(Further  explanations  will  be  given  in  the  second  part.) 
Most  names  of  towns  are  spelled  in  Trench  as  in  English,  with  a  few  ex« 
Options. 

VOCABULARY. 

Le  cahier,  the  copy-book.          la  ville,  the  city,  town. 

la  carte,  the  map.  le  cours,  the  course. 

la  fable,  the  fable.  le  marchand,  the  dealer,  tradesman. 


46  VH.    SEPTIEMB  LEQON. 

le  manteau,  the  cloak.  le  negotiant,  the  merchant. 

le  ganty  the  glove.  la  capitate,  the  capital. 

le  pays,  the  country.  donnez,  give,     votre,  your. 

ou,  where,    lu,  read.  €tait,  was.    tfiez-vous,  were  you  9  - 

BEADING  EXERCISE  7. 

J'ai  le  caMer  de  Frederic.  Voici  les  fables  de  La  Fontaine* 
J'ai  vu  le  chateau  du  roi  de  Belgique.  Donnez  la  boite  d  Sophie. 
Donnez  la  plume  d  Henri.  Oil  est  Monsieur  H?  C'est  le  cha- 
peau  de  mademoiselle  Ellse.  C'est  le  canif  de  George.  Nous 
gornmes  d  Paris.  Etiez-vous  a  Yienne?  Mon  cousin  est  en 
Amerique.  Le  cours  du  Ehin  est  long.  Yoici  une  carte  d'Alle- 
magne.  Louis  Phillippe,  roi  de  France,  est  raort  (died)  en  Angle- 
teiTe.  Yoici  les  chevaux  de  Charles.  Avez-vous  lu  les  oeuvres 
(the  works)  de  Corneille  ?  Donnez  ces  gants  a  Henri. 

THEME  7. 

1.  William  is  my  friend.  2.  I  am  William's  friend  (the  friend  of 
William).  3.  Here  is  John's  brother.  4.  Where  is  my  sister  Ellen  ? 
5.  She  is  with  Caroline.  6.  Where  are  Eliza's  gloves  ?  7.  Speak 
(parlez)  to  Henry  and  Francis.  8.  I  have  received  the  book  from 
Paris.  9  Brussels  is  the  capital  of  Belgium.  10.  Florence  is  a 
city  in  Italy.  11.  I  am  going  to  Switzerland.  12.  The  merchants 
of  New  York.  13.  My  uncle  lives  in  Germany.  14.  Are  you  go- 
ing (allez-vous)  to  Berlin  or  to  Yienna?  15.  I  am  going  to 
Frankfort  and  to  Yienna.  16.  Paris  is  the  capital  of  France.  17. 
Is  your  aunt  in  America?  18.  Yes;  she  is  in  New  Orleans. 
19.  My  brother  has  travelled  (voyage)  in  Russia,  in  Sweden,  and 
in  Germany.  20.  This  is  John's  hat.  21.  I  have  seen  Geneva, 
Lyons,  and  Rome.  22.  Give  me  Mary's  copy-book  and  George's 
23.  I  have  seen  the  apple-vender  (dealer  in  (de)  apples)  , 


CONVERSATION. 

Ou  etiez-vous?  J'etais  a  Paris. 

Et  ton  frere  oil  £tait-il  ?  H  etait  aussi  k  Paris. 


PROPER  NOUNS. 


47 


Ou  sont  les  gants  d'Helene  ? 

Quclle  est  la  capitale  de  la 
Belglcjue  ? 

Quclle  est  la  capitale  de  la 
Prusse? 

Qui  est  la? 

A.  qui  donnez-vous  ces  livres  ? 

A  qui  est  ce  chapeau? 

Oiitrouve-t-on  (is  found}  beau- 
coup  d'or? 

Ou  trouve-t-on  de  bon  fer? 

Quels  pays  avez-vous  vus  ? 
Avez-vous  lu  les  poemes  de  Be- 

ranger  ? 
Combien  de  crayons  Caroline 

a-t-elle  achetes  ? 

Ou  sont  les  enfants  de  Ma- 
dame L  ? 

Donncz  nioi  (me)  me3  gants 
s'il  vous  plait  (if  you 
.please). 

Avez-vous  lu  cette  (this)  fa- 
ble? 


Us  sont  sur  la  table. 
C'est  Bruxelles. 

C'est  Berlin. 

Les  enfants  de  madame  B. 
Je  les  (them)  donne  k  Marie. 
Ce  chapeau  est  h  Guillaume. 
En  Californie. 

En  Suede  (Sweden)  et  en  An- 

gleterre. 

J'ai  YU  la  Suisse  et  1'Italie. 
Non  M — ,  mais  j'ai  lu  les  poemes 

de  Victor  Hugo. 
Caroline  a  achete  quatre  crayons 

et    Jeannette     a    achet^    six 

plumes. 
Us  sont  au  jardin. 

Les  voici,  M — ,  (Here  they  are). 


Oui  M — ,  j'ai  lu  tontes  (aft)  leg 
fables  de  La  Fontaine. 


48 


VIII.      HUITlfiME   LEIJ'ON. 


VIII.    HUITIEME    LEyON, 


CONJUGATION  OF  AVOIR,  TO  HAVE,  —  AFFIRMATIVELY 

INDICATIVE   MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

COMPOUND   OF   THE   PRESENT. 

J'ai                                               /  have 

J'ai  eu,                                  1  have  had 

Tu  as,                                    thou  hast 

Tu  as  eu,                          thou  hast  had 

11  a  (elle  a,  on  a),                      he  has 
Nous  avons,                              we  have 
Vous  avez,                               you  have 

11  a  eu,                                  he  has  had 
Nous  avons  eu,                  we  have  had 
Vous  avez  eu,                   you  have  had 

Us  ont,                                     they  have 

Us  ont  eu,                        they  have  had 

IMPERFECT. 

COMPOUND    OF    THE    IMPERFECT. 

J'avais,  I  had,  was  having,  or  used  to 

J'avais  eu,                            I  had  had 

have 

Tu  avals,                               thou  hadst 

Tu  avals  eu,                    thou  hadst  had 

11  avait,                                        he  had 

11  avait  eu,                            he  had  had 

Nous  avions,                              we  had 

Nous  avions  eu,                   we  had  had 

Vous  aviez,                              you  had 
Us  avaient,                               they  had 

Vous  avicz  eu,                   you  had  had 
Us  avaient  eu,                   they  had  had 

PRETERITE. 

COMPOUND    OF    THE   PRETERITE. 

J'eus,                                           /  had 

J'eus  eu,                            ,     I  had  had 

Tu  eus,                           thou  hadst,  etc. 

Tu  eus  eu,                      thou  hadst  had 

11  cut,                                            he  had 

11  eut  eu,                               he  had  had 

Nous  eumes,                              we  had 

Nous  eumes  eu,                   we  had  had 

Vous  eutes,                               you  had 
Us  eurent,                                they  had 

Vous  eutes  eu,                   you  had  had 
Ils  eurent  eu,                     they  had  had 

FUTURE. 

COMPOUND   OF   THE   FUTURE. 

•T'anrai,                     /  shall  or  will  have 

J'aurai  eu,        I  shall  or  will  have  had 

Tu  auras,                         thou  wilt  have 

Tu  auras  eu,             thou  wilt  have  had 

11  aura,                                he  will  have 

11  aura  eu,                    he  will  have  had 

Nous  aurons,                     we  shall  have 

Nous  aurons  eu,         we  shall  have  had 

Vous  aurez,                      you  will  have 

Vous  aurez  eu,          you  will  have  had 

Us  auront,                        they  will  Jiave 

Ils  auront  eu,            they  will  have  Jiad 

CONTITIOXAL   MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

COMPOUND    OF    THE   PRESENT. 

J'aurais,                            /  should  have 

J'aurais  eu,                I  should  have  had 

Tu  aurais,                  thou  wouldst  have 

Tu  aurais  eu,      thou  wouldst  have  had 

11  aurait,                           he  would  have 

11  aurait  eu,               he  would  have  had 

Nous  aurions,                 we  should  have 

Nous  aurions  eu,     we  should  have  had 

Vous  auriez,                  you  would  have 

Vous  auriez  cu,      you  would  have*  h**d 

Us  auraieat,                  they  would  have 

Ils  auraicnt  eu,      they  would  hatis  tsul 

CONJUGATION  OF  AVOIB. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 

Aie,  have  (thou). 

Ayons,          let  us  have. 
Ayez,      have  (ye  or  you). 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


PRESENT. 


Quo  j'aie,  that  I  may 

Que  tu  aies,  that  thou  mayest 
Qu'ilait,  that  he  may 

Que  nous  ayons,  that  we  may 
Que  vous  ayez,  that  you  may 
Qu'ils  aient,  that  they  may 

IMPERFECT. 

Que  j'eusse,  that  I  might 

Que  tu  eusses,    that  thou  mightest 

Qu'il  e-iit,  that  he  might 

Que  nous  eussions,  that  we  might 

Que  TOUS  cussiez,  that  you  might 
Qu'ils  eussent,  that  they  might 


COMPOUND   OF   THE  PRESENT. 

Que  j'aie  eu,  that  I  may 

Que  tu  aies  eu,  that  thou  mayest 
Qu'il  ait  eu,  that  he  may 

Quo  nous  ayons  eu,  that  we  may 
Que  vous  ayez  eu,  that  you  may 
Qu'ils  aient  eu,  that  they  may  ^ 


COMPOUND   OP   THE    IMPERFECT. 


Que  j'eusse  eu, 
Que  tu  eusses  eu, 


that  I  might 
that  thou 
mightest 

Qu'il  eut  eu,  that  he  might 

Que  nous  eussions  eu,       that  we 

might  [might 

Que  TOUS  eussiez  eu,        that  you 
Qu'ils  eussent  eu,  that  they  might 


Avoir, 


j     INFINITIVE   MOOD. 
1 "  FSESENT.  COMPOUND   OF   THE   PRESENT. 

to  have  \  Avoir  eu,  to  have  Itad 


PARTICIPLE. 
PRESENT.  COMPOUND. 

having  \  Ayant  eu,  having  had 


PAST   OR   PASSIVE. 

Eu,  had 


It  would  be  a  good  plan  to  conjugate  the  whole  verb  avoir  together  with 
a  n*un,  as ;  J'ai  une  pomme,  f  avals  une  pomme,  etc.  —  After  that,  with  the 
pronoun  /'  (Ze),  it,  and  les,  them,  as  :  je  Vai,  I  have  it;  tu  /'as,  il  l'a,  etc.; 
\e  les  anrait  tu  les  auras,  etc. 


50  VIII.      HUITIEME 

VOCABULARY. 

Le  temps,  time.  demain,  to-morrow. 

Is  courage,  the  courage.  I'encrier,  rn.  the  inkstand. 

le  plaisir,   the  pleasure.  la  regie,  the  ruler. 

la  voiture,  the  carriage.  perdu,  lost,  fte,  been, 

/a  bourse,  the  purse.  aujourd'hui,  to-day. 

A/er,  yesterday,  c'esf,  it  is.  et,  and.        «/,  if. 

THEME  8. 

PEES.  1.  I  have  a  book.  2.  Ho  Las  a  hat.  3.  We  have  a 
house  and  (a)  garden.  4.  They  (masc.)  have  a  horse.  5.  They 
(fern.)  have  flowers  and  fruit. — IMPEKF.  6.  I  had  a  friend.  7. 
Thou  hadst  a  friend.  8.  Louisa  had  two  cats.  9.  You  had  money 
enough.  10.  The  children  had  bread.  —  PRET.  11.  He  had  the 
courage.  12.  You  had  the  pleasure.  13.  The  son  of  the  king  had 
a  carriage.  —  FUT.  and  COND.  14.  I  shall  have  apples.  15.  He 
would  have  seen  the  castle.  16.  We  shall  have  some  coffee  to-day. 
17.  We  would  have  some  sugar.  18.  You  will  have  two  horses. 

19.  They  would  have  an  inkstand  and  a  ruler.  —  COMPOUND  TENSES. 

20.  We  have  had  much  trouble  (peine).     21.  You  have  had  a  great 
(grand)  pleasure.      22.   She  has  had  a  great  many  nut's.      23. 
They  had  had  two  copy  books.     24.  I  shall  have  paper  and  pens. 
25.  You  will  have  had  my  horse.     26.  Charles's  sisters  will  have 
many  flowers.     27.  I  should  have  had  a  great  deal  of  (beaucoup 
de)  trouble.     28.  Thou  wouldst  have  had  more  pleasure.    '29.  You 
would  have  had  a  good  friend.     30.  The  boy  would  have  had  a 
penknife. 

ADDITIONAL   THEME   UPON   AVOIR. 

• 

1.  My  (ma)  aunt  has  apples,  I  have  many  plums  and  you  ha\e 
flowers  enough  (L.  VI.  2).  2.  The  merchant's  cousin  will  have  a 
ball  to-morrow.  3.  Yesterday  I  had  money,  but  I  have  lost  my 
purse  to-day.  4.  To-morrow  I  shall  have  the  pleasure  of  seeing 
(de  voir)  my  cousin,  (f)  my  aunt  and  my  sister ;  I  should  have  had 
the  pleasure  of  seeing  them  (de  les  voir)  yesterday  if  I  had  been  in 
(en  without  article)  town.  5.  We  shall  have  time  enough  to-mor- 
row. 6.  We  had  too  much  time  yesterday.  7.  Have  the  cour-* 


IDIOMATIC  USB   OF  AVOIR.  51 

ago  to  do  it  (de  le  faire)  ;  you  have  time  enough.  8.  Let  us  have 
the  carriage  and  we  shall  have  much  pleasure.  9.  We  should  have 
had  the  carnage  yesterday  if  we  had  wished  (voulu).  10.  Though 
(quoigue)  you  may  have  had  time,  you  have  not  had*  the  courage. 
11.  Though  we  have  (pres.  Subj.)  two  horses,  we  have  not 
(n^ avons  pas)  the  courage  to  ride  them  (de  les  monter).  12.  Wo 
have  money  to-day,  and  to-morrow  we  shall  have  bread,  meat,  and 
wine.  13.  It  is  you,  who  (#tw)  will  have  the  most  (le  plus  de) 
pleasure.  14.  I  do  not  think  (je  ne  crois  pas)  that  he  would  have 
had  the  courage.  15.  During  the  night  he  had  lost  his  (sd)  purse. 
16.  If  he  had  had  an  inkstand  he  would  have  had  ink.  17.  They 
will  have  silver  spoons  on  the  table.  18.  They  would  have  jewels 
if  (s?)  they  had  money. 


IX.    NEUVIEME    LE90N, 


USE  OF  AVOIR. 
1.   Avoir  is  used  idiomatically  with  the  nouns  chaud,  warmth ; 
froid,  cold;  faim,  hunger;    soif,   thirst;    raison,  reason;  tort, 
Wrong ;  peur,  fear ;  honte,  sharne ;    envie,  desire ;   somtfleil,  sleep ; 
n,  need  ;  as  :  — 

J'ai  chaud.  I  am  warm. 

J'avais  froid.  I  was  cold. 

II  aura  faim.  He  will  be  hungry. 

Elle  aurait  soif.  She  would  be  thirsty. 

Nous  avons  raison.  We  are  right. 

Vous  avcz  tort.  You  are  wrong. 

Nous  avons  eu  peur.  We  were  (hare  been)  afraid. 

Us  ont  honte.  They  are  ashamed. 

Ellcs  avaicnt  envie.  The;f  were  desirous. 

Avez-vous  sommcil  ?  Are  you  sleepy  ? 

Nous  avons  besoin.  We  need.    We  want. 
*  Vous  n'avcz  pas  eu. 


52  IX.      NEUVIE1IE  LEfON. 

2.  Avoir  quelque  chose,  literally,  to  have  something,  is  also  used 
idiomatically  in  the  sense  of  to  be  the  matter  with  ;  thus  :  — 

Qu'  avez-vous  ?  What  is  the  matter  with  you  ? 

J'ai  quelque  chose.  Something  is  the  matter  with  me. 

Vous  avez  quelque  chose.  "          "    "        "        "    you. 

II  a  "          "  "          "    "        "        "    him. 

Elle  a  "         "  "         "    "        "        "    her. 

Nous  avions    "          "  "          was  the  matter  with  us. 

Vousaviez      "          "  "  "     "         "        "    you. 

Ilsauront        "          "  "          will  be  the  matter  with 

them. 

REMARK.     The  opposite  of  avoir  quelque  chose  is  n' avoir  rien  (ne  before 
the  verb  and  rien  after  it.     See  L.  XI.  2).    As :  — 

Je  n'ai  rien.  Nothing  is  the  matter  with  me. 

Vous  n'avez  rien.  "      "    "        "        "    you. 

Iln'arien.  "      "    "        "        "    him. 

Elle  n'a  rien.  "      "    "        •'        "    her. 

Nous  n'avions  rien  "      was  the    "        "us. 

Vous  n'aviez  rien.  "        "    "     "        "    you. 

Ils  n'auront  rien.  "     will  be  the  matter  with  them. 

3.  Avoir  Pair  means  to  have  the  appearance,  to  look;  —  avoir 
r  intention  de,  to  have  the  intention,  to  intend ;  —  avoir  soin  de,  to 
take  care  of;  — avoir  mal  a,  to  have  a  sore,  an  ache,  or  a  pain  in. 

As:  — 

II  avait  rah*eontent.  He  looked  glad. 

Vous  avez  Tair  heureux.  You  look  happy. 

Ils  ont  Tair  malheureux.  They  look  unhappy. 

A-t-elle     Tintention     d'aller  en    Does  she  intend  to  go  to  France  ? 

France  ? 
Non,  Monsieur ;   elle  a  Tintention    No,  sir ;  she  intends  to  go  to  Italy. 

d'aller  en  Italic. 

Avez  soin  de  mon  chapeau.  Take  care  of  my  hat. 
J'aurai  soin  de  votre  chapeau  et  de    I  shall  take  care  of  your  hat  and  cane 

votre  canne. 

J'ai  mal  a  la  tete.  I  have  a  headache. 

Avez-vous  mal  aux  dents  ?  Have  you  the  toothache  ? 

J'avais  mal  au  bras.  I  had  a  sore  arm. 

II  avait  mal  au  genoa.  He  had  a  sore  knee. 


IDIOMATIC   USB   OP   AVOIR.  53 


VOCABULARY. 

Lechien,  the  dog.  content,  glad,  pfleased. 

la  tete,  the  head.  malade,  sick,  ill. 

le  6ms,  the  aim.  alter,  to  go. 

la  gorge,  the  throat.  votre,  your,  mon,  my. 

fo  dent,  the  tooth.  /«  demoiselle,  the  young  lady, 

fe  manteau,  the  cloak.  k  parapluie,  the  umbrella. 

HEADING  EXERCISE  9. 

A-t-il  peur?  Oui  Madame;  il  a  peur.  Avez-vous  honte  da 
parler  (to  speak)  frangais  ?  Non,  Mademoiselle ;  mais  j'ai  peur  de 
paiier  fran^ais.  Aviez-vous  froid  hier  ?  0  ui ,  Monsieur,  j  'avais  froid 
hier  mais  j'ai  chaud  aujourd  'Imi.  Avez-vous  eu  peur  du  ehien  ? 
Non,  nous  avons  eu  peur  du  cheval.  Votre  ami,  a-t-il  quelque 
chose?  Oui,  il  a  quelque  chose.  Qu'  a-t41?  II  a  mal  a  la  tete. 
Qu'  avez-vous  ?  J'ai  sommeiL  Yotre  ami  a-t-il  besoin  de  moi  ?  Au- 
rez-vous  soin  de  mon  cheval  ?  Oui,  Monsieur ;  j'aurai  soin  de  votre 
cheval.  Qui  a  besoin  de  1'encrier  ?  Yotre  cousine  a-t-elle  mal  au 
bras  ?  Elle  a  mal  au  bras.  Le  negociant  a  Fair  content.  Moa 
frcre  a  1' intention  d'aller  a  Paris  et  &  Londres.  Votro  fr^re, 
<ju'  a-t-il?  Ila  honte. 

THEME  9. 

1.  Where  do  you  intend  to  go  to-morrow?  2.  I  intend  to  go 
and  see  (voir)  the  merchant.  3.  I  was  wrong  and  you  were 
right.  4.  Was  he  sleepy?  5.  He  was  sleepy.  6.  Were  you  cold  ? 
7.  I  was  cold.  8.  What  is  the  matter  with  your  father?  9.  Noth- 
ing is  the  matter  with  him.  10.  What  was  the  matter  with  that 
(ce)  boy?  11.  He  was  ashamed.  12.  Was  he  afraid  of  the 
horse?  13.  No,  sir;  he  was  afraid  of  the  dog.  14.  I>o  I  look 
sick  ?  15,  Yes,  sir ;  you  look  sick.  16.  Have  you  a  headache  ?  17. 
No,  sir ;  I  have  a  sore  throat.  18.  Has  that  young  lady  the  tooth- 
ache? 19.  She  has  the  toothache.  20.  Take  care  of  my  watch. 
*21.  We  shall  take  care  of  your  watch,  your  cloak,  and  your  um- 
brella. 


X.      DIXIEME   LEgON. 


X.    DIXIEME    LEgON. 


CONJUGATION  OF  ETRE,   TO  BE— AFFIRM  ATI  VELY. 

INDICATIVE   MOOD. 


PRESENT. 

COMPOUND    OF 

THE   PRESENT. 

Je  suis,                                          /  am 

J'ai  e'te, 

/  have  been 

Tu  es,                                        ihou  art 

Tu  as  ete, 

tliou  hast  been 

11  est  (elle  est,  on  est),                 he  is 

11  a  etc, 

he  has  been 

Nous  sommes,                            we  are 

Nous  avons  e'te', 

we  hcwe  been 

Vous  etes,                        ye  or  you  are 

Vous  avez  etc', 

you  have  been 

Ils  sont,                                      they  are 

Ils  ont  ete, 

they  have  been 

IMPERFECT. 

COMPOUND   OF   THE   IMPERFECT. 

J'etais,                      /  was  or  used  to  be 

J'avais  ete, 

I  had  been 

Tu  etais,                                 them  wast 

Tu  avais  ete, 

thou  hadst  been 

11  etait,                                        he  was 

11  avait  ete, 

he  had  been 

Nous  (Stions,                               we  were 

Nous  avions  et^, 

v'e  had  been 

Vous  etiez,                               you  were 

Vous  aviez  ete, 

you  liad  b«>n 

Ils  e'taient,                              they  were 

Ils  avaient  ete, 

they  had  b^n 

PRETERITE. 

COMPOUND    OF   THE   PRETERITE. 

Je  fus,                                          I  was 

J'eus  etc, 

I  had  been 

Tu  fus,                                    ihou  wast 

Tu  eus  ete, 

thou  hadst  been 

11  fut,                                           he  was 

11  cut  e'te, 

he  had  been 

Nous  fumes,                              we  were 

Nous  eumes  e'te, 

we  had  been 

Vous  futes,                                 you  were 
Ils  furent,                                they  were 

Vous  eutes  ete, 
Ils  eurent  etc,    . 

you  had  been 
they  had  been 

FUTURE. 

COMPOUND   OF 

THE    FUTURE. 

Je  serai,                      /  shall  be,  will  be 

J'aurai  e'te', 

I  shall  ] 

Tu  seras,                              ihou  wilt  be 

Tu  auras  etc, 

thou  wilt        §* 

11  sera,                                     he  ivill  be 

11  aura  ete, 

he  will       «; 

Nous  serons,                        we  shall  be 

Nous  aurons  et^, 

we  shall  \    f 

Vous  serez,                          you  will  be 

Vous  aurez  ete, 

you  will       » 

Us  seront,                            they  will  be 

Ils  auront  e'te, 

they  will 

CONDITIONAL   MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

COMPOUND   OF 

THE   PRESENT. 

Jc  serais,                              I  should  be 

J'aurais  (fte*, 

I  should 

Tu  serais,                       thou  wouldst  be 

Tu  aurais  ete, 

thou  wouldst       g* 

[1  scrait,                               he  would  be 

11  aurait  e'te, 

he  would       « 

Xbus  serions,                      we  should  be 

Nous  aurions  ete', 

we  should       & 

Vous  seriez,                      you  would  be 

Vous  auriez  ete, 

you  would       ? 

Ils  seraient,                      they  would  be 

Ils  auraient  e'te, 

they  would 

CONJUGATION  OP  ETEE,  TO  BE. 


55 


IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 


Sois, 

Soyons, 

Soyez, 


be  (thou). 

let  us  be. 

be  (ye  or  you). 


SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 


PRESENT. 

COMPOUND   OF   THE   PRESENT. 

Que  je  sois,                      that  I  may  be 

Que  j'aie  etc,              that  I  may  ' 

Que  tu  sois,             that  thou  mayest  be 

Que  tu  aies  etc,  that  thou  mayest 

g- 

Qu'il  soit,                        that  he  may  be 

Qu'il'  ait  ete,             that  he  may 

r  | 

Que  nous  soyons,          that  we  may  be 

Que  nous  ayons  ete,  that  we  may 

Quo  vous  soyez,           that  you  may  be 
Qu'ils  soient,               that  they  may  be 

Que  vous  ayez  e'te',  that  you  may 
Qu'ils  aient  ete,     that  they  may 

§ 

IMPERFECT. 

COMPOUND   OF  THE   IMPERFECT. 

Que  jc  fusse,                  that  I  might  be 

Que  j'eusse  ete,        that  I  might  ' 

Que  tu  fusses,        that  thou  migldest  be 

Que    tu   eusses  etc,  that  thou 

mightest 

Qu'il  fut                       that  he  might  be 

Qu'il  cut  (5t£,           that  he  might 

SM 

Que  nous  fussions,      that  we  might  be 

Que  nous  eussions  ete,  that  we 

K     ^ 

might 

Que  vous  fussiez,        that  you  might  be 

Que  vous  eussiez  e'te,  that  you 

1 

might 

Qu'ils  fussent,          that  they  might  be 

Qu'ils   eussent    e'te,    that    they 
might 

fetre, 


INFINITIVE   MOOD. 

COMPOUND   OF   THE   PRESENT. 


to  be 


Avoir  <5tc, 


to  have  been 


CV 


Etant, 


PRESENT* 


PARTICIPLE. 

[COMPOUND. 
Ayant  e'te',  having  leoi 

PAST   OR   PASSIVE. 

( invariable J  been 


VOCABULARY. 


Ricfie,  rich. 
appliquif,  diligent* 
malheureux,  unhappy* 
content,  pleased,  contented* 
faible,  weak,  /res,  very. 
le  gouvernail,  helm. 


paresseux,  lazy,  idle. 
heureux,  happy. 
jeune,  young. 
sage,  good,  commenty  how, 
encore,  still,  again. 
Jules,  Julius. 


56  X.      DIXIEME 


THEME  10. 

I  am  ill,  Thou  art  young.  Charles  is  my  friend.  We  are  hap* 
py.  You  are  also  happy.  The  child  will  be  good.  Louisa  was  ill 
William  and  Julius  have  also  been  ill.  This  boy  has  been  idle. 
This  girl  was  very  good.  He  will  be  contented.  You  would  also 
be  contented.  She  has  been  at  Paris.  Her  (son)  brother  has  been 
in  London.  We  have  been  in  France.  Your  mother  may  (pent) 
have  been  (Comp.  Inf.)  ill.  Yes,  indeed  (en  effet)  she  has  been  ill 
long.*  Who  was  (has  been)  with  (chez)  your  father  ?  A  merchant 
has  been  with  my  father.  He  had  been  before  (auparavant)  with 
my  uncle. 

ADDITIONAL   THEME   ON   EIRE   CONJUGATED   AFFIRMATIVELY. 

1.  Having  been  sick,  he  is  still  weak.  2.  The  spoons  were  on 
the  table.  3.  We  were  still  sick.  4.  The  young  boy  was  at  the 
helm.  5.  I  am  among  my  (jnes)  friends.  6.  I  shall  be  with  my 
friends  to-morrow.  7.  I  was  at  your  (votre)  father's  house  yester- 
day (L.  IV.  8).  8.  She  is  in  the  room.  9.  My  neighbor's  name 
is  William.  10.  I  should  be  happy  if  you  were  pleased.  11.  If 
you  are  unhappy,  how  can  you  (pouvez-vous)\>Q  (inf.)  contented? 
12.  I  shall  be  pleased  to  see  you  (de  vous  voir)  to-morrow.  13. 
The  merchant  has  been  here  (ici)  to-day.  14.  He  had  been  at  his 
friend's  yesterday.  15.  Be  at  my  house  (cliez-moi)  to-morrow. 
16.  Let  us  be  happy.  17.  Though  he  is  (Pres.  Subj.)  rich,  he  is 
more  (plus)  unhappy  than  you. 

*  Translate,  she  is  ill  since  a  longtime  (depuis  lonytemps). 


NEGATIONS. 


XI.    ONZIEME    LEgON. 


NEGATIONS.  — THE    NEGATIVE    AND    INTEKROGA 
TIYE  FORMS  OF  THE  AUXILIARIES. 

1 .  The  negation  not  is  rendered  by  the  two  words  ne  .  . .  pas.    Ae 
is  placed  before  the  verb  and  becomes  n*  before  a  vowel  or  silent  k  ; 
pas  is  placed  immediately  after  the  verb.     In  compound  tenses  ]  -1.3 
is  placed  between  the  auxiliary  and  the  participle.     In  the  infiniu  .a 
ne  and  pas  generally  both  precede  the  verb.     Ex. 

Je  ne  suis  pas.  I  am  not. 

Je  w'ai  pas  eu.  I  have  not  had. 

Ne  pas  etre,  less  frequently,  n'etre  pas.  Not  to  be. 

2.  The  words  jamais,  ever,  personne,  person,  and  rien,  any- 
thing, used  with  a  verb  preceded  by  ne  mean  respectively  never, 
nobody,  nothing.     When  the  verb  is  understood,  as  in  answers,  the 
ne  is  omitted,  and  they  have  none  the  less  a  negative  meaning. 
When  used  with  a  verb  not  preceded  by  ne  they  are  always  affirma- 
tive.    Ex. 

Avez-vBitSL jamais  rien  vu  de  pareil  ?  Have  you  ever  seen  anything  similar  ? 

Je  n'ai  rien.  I  have  nothing. 

II  n'a  jamais  tort.  He  is  never  wrong. 

Personne  n'a  sommeil.  Nobody  is  sleepy. 

C'est  une  personne  qui  a  sommeil.  It  is  a  person  that  is  sleepy. 

Qui  a  sommeil  ?    Personne.  Who  is  sleepy  ?    Nobody. 

Qu'  avez-vous  1    Rien.  What  is  the  matter  with  you  ?  Noth- 
ing. 

3.  The  words  aucun,  nul,  no ;  nullement,  nowise,  not  at  all ;  ni  . .  . 
nit  neither  .  .  .  nor ;  guere,  but  little,  but  few ;  and  que  in  the 
sense  of  but  or  only  ;  also  require  the  verb  to  be  preceded  by  ne. 
Ne  (the  verb)  plus  means,  no  more,  not  any  more  left.     Ex. 

Je  n'ai  plus  de  pain.  I  have  no  more  bread. 

II  n'a  ni  pain  ni  yin.  lie  has  neither  bread  nor  wine. 

Elle  n'a  guere  de  patience*  She  has  but  little  patience* 

Nul  n'est  parfaifc*    .  No  one  is  perfect. 


58 


XI.      ONZIEME   LE^ON. 


REMARK.    After  ni  .  .  .  ni  nouns  used  in  a  partitive  sense  take  neither 
preposition  nor  article ;  as,  nipain  ni  vin. 
For  further  rules  on  the  negative  see  P.  I.  L.  33,  and  P.  II.  L.  15. 

4.  In  interrogations  the  pronoun  which  is  the  subject  of  the  verb 
is  placed  after  it,  and  both  are  joined  by  a  hyphen,  as :  aurez-vous  ? 
avez-vous  ea?  When  the  verb  ends  with  a  vowel,  -t-  is  placed 
between  the  verb  and  i7,  elk,  or  on,  as :  aura4-il?  a-t-on  ?  See  also 
L.  L  Rein.  5. 


5  AVOIR  AND  ETRE  CONJUGATED  NEGATIVELY. 

INDICATIVE   MOOD. 


PRESENT    TENSE. 


Je  n'ai  pas, 
Tu  n'as  pas, 
11  n'a  pas, 
Nous  n'avons  pas, 
Vous  n'avez  pas, 
Us  n'ont  pas, 


I  have  not 
thou  hast  not 
he  has  not 
we  have  not 
you  have  not 
they  have  not 

Je  ne  suis  pas, 
Tu  n'es  pas, 
11  n'est  pas, 
Nous  ne  sommes  pas, 
Vous  n'etes  pas, 
Us  ne  sont  pas, 

I  am  not 

thou  art  not 

he  is  not 

we  are  not 

you  are  not 

they  are,  not 


COMPOUND   OF   THE   PRESENT. 

Je  n'ai  pas  eu,      I  have  not  had,  etc.  |  Je  n'ai  pas  e'te,     7  have  not  been,  etc. 


IMPERFECT. 


Je  n'avais  pas,  I  had  not  or  did  not  I  Je  n'etais  pas, 
have,  etc. 


Twos  not,  etc. 


COMPOUND    OF    THE    IMPERFECT. 

Je  n'avais  pas  eu,  7  had  not  had,  etc.  |  Je  n'avais  pas  etc,  I  had  not  been,  etc 
And  thus  with  all  compound  tenses. 


Jc  n'eus  pas, 

Je  n'aurai  pas,  etc. 

Je  n'auraispas,  etc. 


PRETERITE. 

7  had  not,  etc.  |  Je  ne  fus  pas, 

FUTURE. 

I  Je  ne  serai  pas,  etc. 

CONDITIONAL    MOOD. 

|  Je  ne  serais  pas,  etc. 


7  was  not,  ei 


NEGATIONS. 


Que  je  n'aie  pas,  etc. 
Que  je  n'eusse  pas,  etc. 
N'aie  pas,  etc. 


Ne  pas  avoir. 
(N'avoir  pas.) 


N'ayant  pas. 
N'ayant  pas  eu. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 
PRESENT. 

|  Que  je  ne  sois  pas,  etc. 

IMPERFECT. 

|  Que  je  ne  fusse  pas,  etc. 
IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 

|  Ne  sois  pas,  etc. 

INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

INe  pas  etre. 
(N'etre  pas.) 

PARTICIPLES. 

N'e'tant  pas. 
N'ayant  pas  ete'. 


INTERROGATIVE   CONJUGATION. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 
PRESENT  TENSE. 


Ai-je, 
As-tu,    **&* 

A-t-n, 


Ai-je  eu, 
Arais-je,  etc. 
Eus-je,  etc. 
Aurai-je,  etc. 
Aurais-je,  etc. 


%     have  I? 

'hast  thou? 
has  he  ?  etc. 


Suis-je, 

Es-tu, 

Est-il, 


COMPOUND   OP   THE   PRESENT, 

have  I  had?  etc.  |  Ai-je  et£, 

IMPERFECT. 

|  Etais-je,  etc. 

PRETERITE. 

|  Pus-je,  etc. 

FUTURE. 

Serai-je,  etc. 

CONDITIONAL   MOOD. 

|  Serais-je,  etc. 


ami? 

art  thou  1 
is  he?  etc. 


have  I  been  ?  etc. 


60 


XI.      ONZIEME  LEgON. 


NEGATIVE  AND  INTERROGATIVE  CONJUGATION. 

PRESENT. 


N'ai-je  pas, 
N'as-tu  pas, 
IS'a-t-il  pas, 


have  I  not  9 

hast  tkou  not  ? 

has  he  not  ?  etc. 


Ne  suis-je  pas, 
N'es-tu  pas, 
N'est-il  pas, 


am  I  not  1 

art  thou  not  1 

is  he  not  ?  etc. 


N'arais-je  pas,  etc, 
N'ens-je  pas,  etc. 
N'aurai-je  pas,  etc. 
N'aurais-je  pas,  etc. 


IMPERFECT. 

|  N'etais-je  pas,  etc. 

PRETERITE. 

|  Ne  fus-je  pas,  etc. 

FUTURE. 

|  Ne  serai-je  pas,  etc. 

CONDITIONAL. 

I  Ne  serais-je  pas,  etc. 


La  nouvellc,  the  news. 
la  lettre,  the  letter. 
le  chagrin,  the  grief. 
les  parents,  the  parents. 
le  tailleur,  the  tailor. 
le  bottier,  the  boot-maker. 
la  cerise,  the  cherry. 


VOCABULARY. 

tres,  very,  du  tout,  at  all. 
pauvre,  poor. 
me'content,  discontented. 
mange',  eaten. 
autrefois,  formerly. 
longtemps,  long,  a  long  time. 
vos,  plural  of  votre,  your. 

THEME  11. 


1.  I  have  a  friend.  2.  Hast  thou  also  a  friend  ?  8.  We  have 
friends.  4.  Have  you  also  friends?  5.  I  am  happy.  6.  lam 
not  happy.  7.  Are  you  happy?  8.  Are  you  not  happy?  9. 
No,  we  are  not  happy  ;  we  are  poor.1  10.  Formerly  we  were  very 
happy.  11.  You  are  not  rich.1  12.  Thou  hast  been  poor.  13. 
She  has  been  rich.  14.  Have  you  had  any  cherries?  15.  You 
have  been  idle.  16.  Hast  thou  been  ill  ?  No,  I  have  not  been 
ill  at  all.  17.  They  have  not  received  the  letter.  18.  Were  you 
(have  you  been)  at  (chez)  the  tailor's  ?  19.  I  have  not  been 
at  the  tailor's.  20.  I  have  been  at  tho  boot-maker's;  but  (mats) 

i  TLiCBe  adjectives  take  s  in  the  plural  (pauvres  —  riches}. 


LEGATIONS.  61 

he  was  not  at  home  (a  la  maison).  21.  How  many  horses  had 
you  ?  22.  I  had  two  horses.  23.  Charles  would  not  have  been 
ill,  if  he  had  not  eaten  too  much  (trop).  24.  Be  contented.  25. 
Take  care  of  your  books. 


COiSTERSATIOST. 

Quand  (when)  avez-vous  dtd     Nous  avons  e*te  hier  au  spectacle. 

au  spectacle  (theatre)  ? 

Charles,  seras-tu  content  ?  Oui,  M — ,  je  serai  content. 

Avez-vous  un  ami  ?  Nous  avons  beaucoup  d'amis. 

Avez-vous  regu  une  lettre  ?  J'ai  regu  une  lettre  de  Paris. 

Ou  <5tait  ton  ami  Louis  ?  n  £tait  a  Berlin. 

Yos  parents  sont-ils  riches  ?  Non,  M — ,  ils  sont  pauvres. 

Ou  avez-vous  6i6  hier?  Nous  avons  ete  a  1'eglise. 

Ou  serez-vous  demain?  Nous  serons  a  1'ecole. 

Ta  soeur  a-t-elle  ete  malade  ?        Oui,  elle  a  ^te  longtemps  malade. 
Avez-voua des  affaires  (business)'!  Oui,  M — ,  nous  avons   beaucoup 

d'affaires. 
N'etes-Ygus  pas  contents  ?  Non,  M — ,  nous  sommes  me'con- 

tents. 
Pourquoi  (why)  etes-vous  me-    Nous  avons  eu  une  triste  (sad) 

contents  ?  nouvelle. 

Pourquoi  avez-vous  du  chagrin  ?    Notre  mere  est  tres -malade. 
Serais-tu  content,   si   tu  avais   Oui,  M — ,  je  serais  bien  content. 

beaucoup  de  livres? 


62  XII.      DOUZIEME 


XII.    DOUZIEME    LEgON. 


DEMONSTRATIVE  AND  INTERROGATIVE  ADJEC- 
TIVES. 

Adjectives  in  French  agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the  nouns  they 
limit ;  — form  the  plural  according  to  the  rules  given  for  nouns  (L.  n.) ;  — « 
form  the  feminine  by  adding  e  mute  to  the  masculine.  If  the  masculine 
ends  in  e,  the  feminine  is  the  same.  Irregular  formations  will  be  given  in 
the  vocabularies  until  the  full  rules  are  given,  L.  xvu. 

1.  The  Demonstrative  Adjectives  are :  — 

Ce,  fern,  cette,  this,  that ;  plur.  ces,  these,  those. 
Ce — ci,  fern,  cette — <ci,  this  (here) ;  plur.  ces — ci. 
Ce — la,  fern,  cette  —  la,  that;  plur.  ces  —  la,  those. 

2.  As  ce  means  either  this  or  that :  whenever  in  English  the 

,      o 

v;ords  this,  that,  these,  those  are  emphatic,  either  ci  (abbreviated  form 
of  id,  here)  or  la  (there)  are  appended  to  the  noun.     Ex. :  — 

Ce  cliapeau,  this  hat.  ces  homines,  these  men. 

cette  ville,  this  town.  ce  meme  livre,  this  same  book. 

Ce  garcon-ci,  this  boy  (here).  -  ce  gar  con-la,  that  boy. 
cette  femme-ci,  this  womaa  (here).        cette  femme-la,  that  woman. 
ces  arbres-ci,  these  trees.  ces  arlres-la,  those  trees. 

3.  Before  a  masculine  noun  which  begins  with  a  vowel  or  h  mute> 

cet  is  used  instead  ce.     Ex. :  — 

• 

Get  arbre,  this  tree  (instead  ofce  arbre.) 

Cet  liabit,  this  or  that  coat  (instead  of  ce  habit). 

4.  The  Interrogative   Adjective  is,  in  the  singular,  quel,  fern, 
quette;  plur.  quels,  quelles,  which  or  what?     Ex.:  — 

Quel  livre,  which  book  ?  plur.  quels  livres,  which  or  what  books  ? 
QueUe  Jieur,  which  or  what  flower  ? 
It  answers  also  to  the  exclamative  what  a  —  /    Ex. :  — 
Quel  beau  tableau  I  what  a  beautiful  picture  1 


DEMONSTRATIVE   ADJECTIVES.  63 

VOCABULARY. 

La  plante,  the  plant.  I'ceuf,  m.  the  egg. 

h  champ,  the  field.  haut,  f.  haute,  high. 

la  couleur,  the  color.  beau,  f.  belle,  beautiful. 

lafilk,  the  girl.  grand,  f.  grande,  large,  great. 

le  bceuf,  the  ox.  bon,  f.  6orcwe,  good, 

fa  vache,  the  cow.  frop,  too.    mais,  but. 

Vheure,  f.  the  hour.  connaisscz-vous,  do  you  know  ? 
Ja  ro&e,  the  dress. 

READING  EXERCISE  12. 

Cevcrre.  Cette  pomme-ci.  Cethomme.  Cesbas.  Cesbottes- 
1k.  Cette  boite  est  haute.  Ces  enfants  sont  pauvres.  Le  frere  de 
ce  gar9on.  Deux  livres  de  ce  cafe.  Jo  donne  ces  poires  h  cette 
fille-ci.  La  meme  couleur.  Nous  avons  achete  les  memes  plumes. 
J'ai  vu  ces  chiens-la.  Quels  chiens  avez-vous  vus  ?  Quel  beau 
cheval !  Quelle  belle  maison  !  Le  fils  de  cet  homme-la  est  trea 
grand.  Quelle  heure  est-il?  II  est  trois  heures  (o'clock).  II  est 
une  heure. 

THEME  12. 

1.  This  king  js  rich.  2.  This  queen  is  also  rich.  3.  This  man 
is  poor.  £  'These  men  are  poor.  5.  That  child  is  not  good  (sage). 
6.  That  woman  is  not  contented.  7.  This  tree  is  very  high.  8. 
Those  trees  are  not  very  high.  9.  Whose  (a  qui)  is  this  pencil  ? 
10.  Whose  are  these  pens?  11.  The  color  of  that  dress  is  beauti- 
ful (Idle).  12.  The  field  of  that  man  is  large.  13.  These  oxea 
are  larger  (plus  grands)  than  those  cows.  14.  I  give  the  bread 
to  this  boy.  15.  I  give  these  flowers  to  those  girls.  16.  The 
parents  of  those  children  are  very  good.  17.  Which  boy?  13. 
Which  apples?  19.  What  a  beautiful  picture  !  20.  The  pleasure 
of  those  girls  was  not  very  great.  21.  What  o'clock  is  it  (transL 
whicL  hour  is  it?)  22.  It  is  four  o'clock  (trans! .  four  hours).  23 
We  have  read  (lu)  the  same  books. 


XIH.      .TKEIZEME 


CONVERSATION. 


A  ^ui  (whose)  est  co  canif  ? 

A  qui  sont  cos  gants  ? 

Ou  est  la  fille  de  cette  femmo  ? 

Connaissez-vous  cette  flour  ? 

Connaissez-vous  le  pere  de  ce 
gar^on-la  ? 

Quel  papier  voulez-vous  ? 

Ces  plumes-ci  sont-elles  bonnes  ? 

Cette  e'glise  est-elle  haute  ? 

A  qui  donnez-vous  ces  fleurs  ? 

A  qui  donnez-vous  ces  crayons  ? 

Trouve-t-on  de  1'or  dans  ce 
pays? 

Voulez-vous  (do  you  wish,  lit- 
erally, wish  you)  ces  bas-ci 
ou  ces  gants-la  ? 

Trouvez-vous  ces  couleurs  belles  ? 

Quelle  heure  est-il  ? 


II  est  a  ma  scour. 

Ils  sont  a  Mademoiselle  Julie. 

Elle  est  au  jardin. 

C'est  une  rose. 

Non  M — ,  mais  je    connais  (/ 

know)  sa  mere. 
Donnez-moi  ce  papier-Ik. 
Oui,  M — ,  elles  sont  tres-bonnes. 
Oui,  elle  est  tres-haute. 
Je  les  donne  a  cette  fille-ci. 
Je  les  donne  a  ce  gargon-la. 
Oui,   M — ,   ce  pays-ci    est  riche 

en  or. 
Donnez-moi  ces  gants-la. 


Oui,  ces  couleurs  sont  tres-belles. 
II  est  quatre  heures. 


XIII.    TREIZIEME    LEgON. 


POSSESSIVE  ADJECTIVES, 

I»  The  Possessive  Adjectives  are  :  — 

mon,  fern.  may  plnr.  mes,  my. 
ton,      "    ta,       "      tes,thy. 
son,     "    sa,      "     ses,  his.  her,  its. 
noire    "    noire,  "      nos,  our. 
votre,  "    votre,  "      vos,  your. 
leur,     "    Igur,   "     leurs,  their. 
Ex.  :  —  Mon  pere,  ta  mere,  ses  freres,  notre  ami, 


,  leurs  parents. 


POSSESSIVE  ADJECTIVES.  65 

2.  The  possessive  adjectives  are  repeated  in  French  before  each 
substantive,  and  agree  with  it  in  gender  and  number :  — 

Monfrere  et  ma  sceur,  my  brother  and  sister. 

3.  Mon,  ton,  son,  are  used  instead  of  ma,  ta,  sa,  before  feminine 
words  beginning  with  a  vowel  or  h  mute,  in  order  to  avoid  the  hiatus 
•which  would  result  from  the  meeting  of  the  two  vowels.     Ex.  :  — 

Mon  amie,  my  (female)  friend;  sondme,  his  soul. 

4.  Son,  sa,  ses,  each  mean  his,  her,  and  its;  they  agree  in  gen- 
der with  the  following  noun,  as :  — 

Lepere  aime  son  fits,  the  father  loves  his  son. 

La  mere  aime  sonjils  et  safille,  the  mother  loves  her  son  and  her  daughter. 

5.  In  French,  votre  is,  from  politeness,  often  preceded  by  the 
words :  Monsieur,  Madame,  Mademoiselle  ;  plur.  Messieurs,  Mes- 
dames,  Mesdemoiselles,  which  are  not  expressed  in  English,  as,  — 

Monsieur  votre  pere,  your  father. 
Mademoiselle  votre  sozur,  your  sister. 
Messieurs  vosfreres,  your  brothers. 

6.  In  expressions  such  as  "  a  friend  of  yours/'  the  possessive  ad- 
jective .mist,  be  used  in  French,  preceded  by   de,  as,  un  de  vos 
amis,  une  de  mes  tantes,  an  aunt  of  mine. 

7.  A  possessive  adjective  must  always  precede  a  noun  denoting  a 
degree  of  relationship  when  a  relative  or  friend  is  addressed,  though 
none  is  used  m  English.     Ex.  JBonjour  ma  sceur,  good  morning, 
sister;   adieu,  won  cousin,  good-by,  cousin.      The  words  papa, 
maman,  and  a  few  terms  of  endearment  are  excepted,  as,  lonjour 
papa,  lonsoir  maman. 

VOCABULARY. 

La  demoiselle,  tlie  young  lady.  la  grand1  mere,  the  grandmother. 

la  tante,  the  aunt.  la  poclie,  the  pocket. 

la  canne,  the  cane.  arrive',  e,  arrived. 

la  casquette,  the  cap.  parti,  e,  departed,  gone. 

le  grand-peret  the  grandfather,  perdu,  lost. 

vieux,  old.  trouve',  found, 
5 


66  XIII.      TBEIZIEME  LE£ON. 

BEADING  EXERCISE  13. 

Mon  pere  est  bon.  Ma  mere  cst  bonne.  Ton  frere  est  grand. 
-Ta  socur  n'est  pas  grande.  Notre  oncle  a  ete  riche.  Votre  tanta 
est  pauvre.  Leui's  parents  seront  contents.  Mes  cousins  et  mea 
cousines  sont  arrives.  Les  peres  aiment  (love)  leurs  enfants.  No- 
tre grand'mere  a  perdu  sa  bourse.  J'ai  trouve  la  bourse  de  votre 
grand 'mere.  Mon  amie  est  arrivee.  Madame  votre  mere  est-ello 
ici  (here)  ?  Non,  elle  n'cst  pas  ici ;  elle  est  h  Londres.  Mesde* 
moiselles  vos  soeurs  sont  parties. 

THEME  13. 

1.  My  dog  is  old.  2.  Thy  book  is  good.  3.  My  book  and 
(my)  pen.  4.  My  books  and  pens.  5.  Your  garden  is  beautiful. 
6.  Your  flowers  are  beautiful  (belles).  7.  My  sister  has  lost  her 
watch.  8.  Our  sisters  have  found  their  letters.  9.  These  children 
have  lost  their  father.  10.  These  parents  have  lost  then*  children. 
11.  Here  is  (void)  thy  stick.  12.  Your  cousins  (f.)  have  been 
in  our  garden.  13.  My  soul  is  immortal  (immortelle).  14.  We 
have  received  this  letter  from  our  aunt.  15.  Our  uncle's  horse  (the 
horse  of  our  uncle)  is  old.  16.  Where  is  your  father  ?  17.  Where 
is  your  sister?  18.  I  have  found  the  purse  of  your  mother. 

CONVERSATION. 

Oil  est  rnon  frere?  II  est  all<£  (gone)  au  jardin. 

Ou  est  ton  livre  ?  Le  voila  sur  la  table. 

Qui  a  perdu  sa  casquette  ?  Charles  a  perdu  sa  casquette. 

•  Qui  a  trouve  nos  crayons  ?  Henri  les  (them)  a  trouve's. 

Que  ^herchez-vous    (are  you  Je  cherche  mes  plumes. 

looking  for)  t 

A  qui  est  cette  canne?  Elle  est  h  Monsieur  votre  oncle, 

A  qui  sont  ces  gants  ?  Us  sont   h    Mademoiselle    votra 

soeur. 

Voulez-vous  mes  crayons  ?  Non,  mcrci  (thank  you) . 

Connaissez-vous  mon  amie  ?  Oui,  je  la  coonais  (know  her) . 


CAEDINAL  NUMBERS. 


67 


Oil  etait  Monsieur  votre  pere  ?      II  etait  h  Berlin. 

Ou  as-tu  trouve'  ta  bourse  ?  Elle  etait  dans  ma  poche. 

Qui  est  arrive  aujourd'hui  ?  La  fille  de  mon  oncle. 

A vcz-vous  etc  dans  votre  champ  ?  Non,    Monsieur,  nous  avons   e*t^ 

dans  notre  jardin. 

De  qui  avez-vous  recji  cette  "belle  C'est  un  cadeau  (present)  de  ma 
canne  ?  grand'mere. 

"7 


XIV.    QUATORZIEME 


CARDINAL  NUMBERS. 


I*  The  Cardinal  Numbers  are  :  — 


Un,  une,  one. 

deux,  two.. 

trois,  three. 

quatre,  four. 

cinq,  fi«9^ -  " 

six,  six. 

sept,  seven. 

huit,  eight. 

neuf,  nine. 

dix,  ten.         f 

onze,  eleven. 

douze,  twelve. 

treize,  thirteen. 

quatorze,  fourteen, 

quinze,  fifteen. 

seize,  sixteen. 

dix-sept,  seventeen. 

dix-huit,  eighteen. 

dix-neuf,  nineteen. 

vingt,  twenty. 

vinqt  et  unt  twenty-one. 


vingt-deux,  twenty-two. 
vingt-trois,  twenty-three. 
vingt-quatre,  twenty-four. 
vingt-cinq,  twenty-five,  etc. 
trente,  thii'ty. 
quarante,  forty. 
cinquante,  fifty. 
soixante,  sixty. 
soixante-dix,  seventy. 
soixante-onze,  seventy-one. 
soixante-douze,  seventy-two. 
soixante-treize,  seven ty- three- 
soixante-quatorze,  seventy-four . 
soixante-quinze,  seventy-five. 
soixante-seize,  seven  ty-six . 
soixante-dix-sept,  seventy-seven, 
soixante-dix-huit,  seventy-eight. 
soixante-dix-nevf,  seventy-nine. 
quatre-vingts,  eighty. 
quatre-vingt-un,  eighty-one. 
quatre-vmgt-deux,  eighty-two. 


68  XIV.      QUATOHZIEME     LEQCN. 

quaire-vingt-dix,  ninety.  cent  deux,  a  hundred  and  two,  etc* 

quatre-vingt-onze,  ninety-one.  deux  cents,  two  hundred. 

qncdrt-wngt-douse,  ninety-two.          trols  cents,  three  hundred,  etc. 
quatre-vingt-treize,  ninety-three,  etc.  quinze  cents,  fifteen  hundred. 
cent,  a  hundred.  milk,  mil,  a  thousand. 

cent  un,  a  hundred  and  one.  un  million,  a  million. 

Ex.:  Cinq  enfants,  five  children. 

Trenie-six  chevaux,  thirty-six  horses. 
Trois  cent  quatre-vingt-quinze  aunes,  395  yards. 
L'an  mil  huit  cent  soixante-cinq,  the  year  1865. 

Et,  and,  must  be  expressed  before  un  after  vingt,  trente,  quarante,  ciniftante\ 
toixante,  as :  vingt  ct  un,  etc.    Et  is  also  often  used  in  soixante  et  onze. 

2.  The  cardinal  numerals  do  not  admit  of  change  in  their  termi- 
nations except  un,  which  takes  an  e  in  the  feminine,  and  cenj  and 
quatrwingts.    Cent  takes  an  s  when  several  hundreds,  not  followed 
by  another  number,  are  mentioned,  as  :  — 

Trois  cents  francs,  300  francs. 

Sept  cents  personnes,  700  persons.  — But : 

Sept  cent  vingt  personnes,  720  persons. 

3.  Quatre-vingts  loses  its  s  when  followed  by  another  numeral. 

Ex.:—  r 

Quatre-vingts  e'coliers,  80  pupils.  —  But: 
Quatre-vingt-deux  aunes,  82  yards. 

4.  Cent  and  mille  are  not  accompanied  by  the  indefinite  article 
as  in  English.     Ex. :  — 

A  hundred  or  a  thousand  pounds,  cent  ou  mille  livres. 

5.  When  one  thousand  is  used  for  dates  it  is  rendered  in  French 
by  mil,  with  one  I  only,  thus  :  — 

L'an  or  en  mil  huit  cent  cinquante.-liuit,  in  the  year  1P5S. 

6.  The  expression,  "I  am  20,  30,  40,  etc.,  years  old,"  cannot 
be  rendered  literally,  but  must  be  expressed  thus  :  <Tai  vingt  ans,  — 
trente  ans,  etc.     How  old  are  you  ?  is  translated  thus :    Quel  ags 
avez-vous  ?    Ex. :  — 

Quel  agt  a  votrefrere,  how  old  is  your  brother  ? 
IL  a  dix-huit  ans,  he  is  eighteen  years  old 


CARDINAL  NUMBERS.  69 

7.    Collective  numbers  are : 

Une  huitaine,  a  series  of  eight.  Une  vingtaine,  a  score* 

Une  dizaine,  a  series   of  ten,  Une  centaine,  a  hundred. 

half  a  score.  .  Un  millier,  a  thousand. 

Une  douzaine,  a  dozen.  Un  million,  a  million* 

VOCABULARY. 

Lafille,  the  daughter.  chasse,  hunting. 

le  veau,  the  calf.  lejour,  the  day. 

le  cochon,  the  pig,  swine.  fa  nuit,  the  night. 

lei  brebis,  the  sheep.  le  mois,  the  month. 

le  Uevre,  the  liare.  lafievre,  the  fever. 

le  chevreuil,  the  deer,  the  roc.  ran,  m.  and  I'annec,  f.  the  year, 

n£,  f.  n<fe,  born.  "  Vheure,  the  hour. 

la  rue,  the  street.  la  minute,  the  minute. 

I'habitant,  m.  the  inhabitant.  /e  pied,  the  foot, 

v         ''%e,  ni.  the  age.  vivait,  lived,    mourut,  died. 

/a  semaine,  the  week.  combien,  how  much,  how  many. 

encore,  still.    ,/ctV,  times.  ,/o?i£,  make,     ow,  or. 

compte,  contains.  vendue,  sold,   es£  w^-e,  was  born 

environ,  about.  en,  in.    en,  of  them. 

KEADIXG  EXERCISE  14. 

« 

J'ai  trois  fils.  Vous  avez  quatre  filles.  Mon  oncle  a  eu  dix  en- 
faats.  irS^perclu  cinq  fils  et  deux  filles.  Nous  avons  vu  35  bceufs, 
42  vachcs,  88  veaux,  et  76  cochons.  Notre  voisin  a  'eu  495 
brebis.  Combien  de  lievres  avez-vous  tues  (killed)  ?  Nous  avons 
tue  23  lievres  et  14  chevreuils.  Sept  et  buit  font  quinze.  24  et 
36  font  60.  —4  fois  8  font  32.  —7  fois  9  font  63.  — 21  fois  32 
font  672.  Jo  suis  ne  en  1814,  et  mon  frere  en  1818.  Ma  mere 
cst  nee  en  1829.  La  ville  de  Londres  compte  10,000  rues,  600 
^glises,  249,500  maisons  et  plus  de  (more  than)  deux  millions 
^'habitants.  Lycurgue  vivait  en  880  avant  Jesus-Christ,  Qucl 
age  avez-vous  ?  J'ai  quinze  ans. 

THEME  14, 

1.  I  have  had  three  horses  and  five  dogs.  2.  My  cousin  has  34 
sheep.  3.  My  neighbor  (m.)  had  36  oxen.  4.  A  week  has  7 


70 


XIV.      QUATORZIEME   LEC;ON. 


days.  5.  30  days  make  a  month.  6.  12  months  or  52  weeks 
make  a  year.  7.  A  year  has  365  days.  8.  I  was  (je  suis)  born 
in  the  year  (en)  1828.  9.  I  am  35  years  old.  10.  My  sister  was 
born  (f.)  in  the  year  1841 ;  she  is  17  years  old.  11.  How  much 
is  (font)  three  times  nine  ?  12.  3  times  9  make  27.  13.6  times 
8  are  48.  14.  35  and  42  are  77.  15.  How  much  is  125  and 
264?  16.  My  mother  has  had  the  fever  during  6  weeks.  17.  A 
(the)  day  has  24  hours,  an  (the)  hour  60  minutes.  18.  Give 
(to)  Charles  32  florins  and  (to)  Louis  33  florins.  19.  Here  are 
200  pounds  of  sugar. 

CONVERSATION. 


Combien   de   fils    votre   oncle 

a-t-il? 

Combien  d'enfants  a-t-il  eus  ? 
Ou  sont  vos  deux  cousines  ? 
Quelle    est    la    hauteur    (the 

height)  de  cette  eglise  ? 
Combien  font  5  et  7  ? 
Combien  font  15  et  25? 
Combien  font  20,  35  et  45  ? 
Combien  font  6  fois  8  ? 
Combien  font  12  fois  24  ? 
Quel  age  avez-vous  ? 
Quel  age  a  votre  scaur  ? 
Combien  de   florins   avez-vous 

rec.us  de  votre  pere  ? 
Combien  de  jours  a  une  annee  ? 

Combien  de  semaines  font  un 

mois? 
Combien  de  mois  font  une  an- 

ne'e? 
Avez-vous     ate*    a   la    chasse 

hier? 


II  a  encore  trois  fils. 

11  a  eu  sept  enfants. 
Elles  sont  a  1'eglise. 

Elle  a  327  pieds  de  hauteur. 

5  et  7  font  12. 
15  et  25  font  40. 

20  et  35  et  45  font  cent. 

6  fois  8  font  48. 

12  fois  24  font  288. 
J'ai  quatorze  ans. 
Elle  a  18  ans. 

J'ai  re9u  50  florins. 

Une  annee  a  365  jours  et  six 

heures. 
Quatre  semaines  et  deux  ou  trois 

jours  font  un  mois. 
Douze  rnois  font  une  annee. 

Oui,   Monsieur,  toute  la  journee 
(all  day). 


OXIDINAL  NUMBERS.  7] 

Avez-vous    tue    bcaucoup    de    Nous  avons  tue  35  lievres. 

lievres  ? 
Charles  a-t-il  assez  d'argent  ?        Oh,  oui,  il  a  22  francs. 


XV.     QUINZIBME    LEgON, 


ORDINAL  NUMBERS. 

1.  Except  le  premier  and  le  second,  fche  ordinal  numbers  are 
formed  from  the  cardinal  by  changing  e  mute  into  ieme  ;  and  by  add- 
ing this  syllable  to  those  which  end  in  another  letter.  But  cinq 
takes  u  before  ieme  (cinquieme),  and  neuf  changes  the  f  into  v 
(neuvieme).  They  are  as  follows  :• — 

I^e  premier,  ")  ,,     «    .  le  vingtieme,  the  20th. 

la  premiere  y  )  le  vingt  et  unieme,  the  21st. 

le  second,           \  le  vingt-deuxieme,  the  22d,  etc. 

la  seconde,          >-  the  second.  le  trentieme,  the  30th. 

le,  la  deuxieme,  }  le  quarantieme,  the  40th. 

le  troisteme,  the  third.  le  cinquantiemey  the  50tti- 

k  quatrieme,  the  fourth.  le  soixantieme,  the  60th. 

le  cinquieme,  the  fifth.  le  soixante-dixieme,  the  70th. 

le  Kixi'eme,  the  sixth.  le  soixante-onzieme,  the  71st. 

le  septieme,  the  seventh.  le  soixante-douzieme,  the  72d,  etc. 

le  huitieme,  the  eighth.  le  quatre-vingtieme,  the  80th. 

le  neuvieme,  the  ninth.  le  quatre-vingt-uniemet  the  81st. 

le  dixieme,  the  tenth.  le  quatre-vingt-dixieme,  the  90th. 

le  onzieme,  the  eleventh.  le  centieme,  the  100th. 

le  douzieme,  the  twelfth.  le  cent  et  unieme,  the  101st. 

le  treizieme,  the  thirteenth.  le  cent  deuxieme,  the  102dretc. 

le  quatorzieme,  the  fourteenth  le  cent  vingtieme,  the  120th. 

le  quinzicme,  the  fifteenth.  le  deux  centieme,  the  200th. 

le  seiziems,  the  16th.  le  six  cent  soixante-quinziemey   the 

le  dix-septieme,  the  17th.  675th. 

le  dix-huitieme,  the  18th.  le  mittieme,  the  1000th. 

le  dix-neuvieme,  the  19th.  le  dernier,  the  last. 


72  XV.      QUINZIEME   LEfON. 

**t ' 

2.  Unieme  is  used  only  after  vingt,  trente,  quar ante,  etc.,  os: 
Charles  est  le  vingt  et  unieme  de  sa  classe. 

3.  Days  of  the  month  (except  le  premier  and  le  dernier)  are 
expressed  by  cardinal  numbers,  as  :  — 

The  first  of  April,  le  premier  Avril  — But : 

The  2d,  3d,  4th,  etc.,  of  May,  le  deux,  trois,  quatre,  €tc.,  mai  for  de  jnai). 

The  eleventh  of  March,  le  onze  (without  apostrophe)  mars. 

The  twentieth  of  June,  le  vingt  juin. 

The  question,  "  What  day  of  the  month  is  it  to-day?  "  is  trans- 
lated :  Quel  quantieme  avons-nous  aujourd'hui  ?  or,  Quel  jour  du 
mois  avons-nous  ? 

The  English  "  on  the  sixth,"  etc.,  is  rendered  in  Trench,  without  prepo- 
sition, le  six Ex. :  On  the  sixth  of  May,  le  six  mai. 

4.  Proper  names  of  princes,  etc.,  take  in  French  the  cardinal 
numbers  without  the  article,  except  the  first  and  sometimes  the  sec- 
ond, as :  — 

Henri  premier,  Henry  the  first. 
Henri  second  or  deux,  Henry  the  second. 
Henri  quatre,  Henri  the  fourth. 
Louis  quatorze,  Louis  the  fourteenth. 

Note.  The  German  Emperor,  Charles  V.,  bears  in  French  the  name  of  Charles* 
Quint,  and  the  Pope  Sixtus  V.  that  of  Sixte-  Quint. 

5.  Numeral  adverbs  are  formed  from  ordinal  numbers  by  adding 
•ment  or  -ement  to  the  final :  — 

Premierement,  firstly.  Deuxiemement,  secondly.    Troisiemement,  thirdly,  etc. 

6.  Fractional  numbers  are  expressed  by  ordinal  numbers,  as  in 
English,  but  only  from  five  upwards,  as :  — 

Un  cinquieme,  a  fifth.  Un  sixieme,  a  sixth. 

Un  huitieme,  an  eighth.  Un  dixieme,  a  tenth- 

Tho  others  are  as  follows :  — 


Half  (adj.),  demi.  f.  demie.     The  half,  la  moitie'  (noun). 
A  third,  itn  tiers.     A  quarter  or  fourth,  un  quart. 
One  pound  and  a  half,  une  livre  et  demie. 


ORDINAL   NUMBERS.  73 

7.  The  hours  of  the  day  or  night  are  expressed  thus  :  — 

Two  o'clock,  deux  heures. 

A  quarter  past  two,  deux  heures  et  (un)  quart. 

Half  past  two,  deux  heures  et  demie. 

A  quarter  to  three,  trois  heures  moins  un  quart. 

At  twelve  o'clock  (at  noon),  a  midi. 

At  twelve  o'clock  (midnight),  a  minuit. 

8.  Proportional  numbers  which  express  a  quantity   multiplied, 

are :  — 

Simple,  simple.  quadruple,  fourfold. 

double,  double,  twofold.  centuple,  centuple,  a  hundred-fold. 

triple,  triple,  threefold. 

VOCABULARY. 

Janvier,  January.  Dimanche,  Sunday. 

Fevrier,  February.  Lundi,  Monday'. 

Mars,  March.  Mardi,  Tuesday  (and  on  Tuesday). 

Avril,  April.  .  Mercredi,  Wednesday. 

Mai,  May.  Jeudi,  Thursday. 

Jain,  June.  Vendredi,  Friday. 

Juillet,  July.  Samedi,  Saturday. 

Aout,  August.  le  siede,  the  century. 

Sq&ewbre;  September.  Vincendie,  m.  a  fire,  conflagration. 

Octobre,  October.  lapartie,  the  part,  portion. 

Novembre,  November.  la  place,  the  place. 

Decembre,  December.  la  classe,  the  class. 

en  Janvier,  in  January.  a  present,  at  present. 

nous  vivons,  we  live.  numero,  number  (denoting  order,  as 
nombre,  number.  number  of  a  house,  of  a  rule,  of  a 

page). 

9.  RULE  FOR  il  AND  ce  AS  EXPLETIVE  SUBJECTS  OF  etre.     Use  il 
if  the  verb  is  followed:  1.  by  an  adjective  limiting  something  which 
comes  after  it  in  the  sentence ;  2.  by  temps  or  by  the  hour  of  (he 
day.     In  all  other  cases  use  ce.     Ex.  Faites  cela,  c'est  facile,  do 
that,  it  is  easy.     But,  II  est  facile  de  faire  cela,  it  is  easy  to  do 
that.     II  est  temps  de  le  faire,  ifc  is  time  to  do  it.     II  est  six  heures, 
it  is  six  o'clock.      C'est  vous,  ce  n 'est pas  mpi,  it  is  you,  it  is  not  T. 


74  XV.      QUINZIEME 

READING  EXERCISE  15. 

Je  suis  dans  ma  soixante-douzieme  annee.  Charles  cst  le  pre- 
mier de  sa  classe.  Louis  est  le  neuvieme,  Henri  le  dix-huitieme  et 
Jules  le  dernier.  Le  pape  ( pope)  Gregoire  VII  etait  Fenneini  de 
Henri  IV.  Nous  vivons  dans  le  dix-neuvieine  siecle.  Romulus 
fut  le  premier,  Numa  Pompilius  le  second  roi  de  Rome.  Pierre 
premier  fut  surnomme  (was  surnamed)  le  grand.  Avril  est  le 
quatrieme,  Juin  le  sixieme  et  Decembre  le  dernier  mois  de  F  annee. 
La  semaine  est  la  cinquante-deuxieme  partic  de  1'annee.  Ma  sosur 
Elisabeth  est  nee  le  vingt-huit  juillet,  mil  huit  cent  trente-cinq. 
J'ai  re9u  trois  livres  et  demie  dc  cafe  ct  cinq  livrcs  et  un  quart  de 
sucre.  Charles  XH  ctait  roi  de  Suede.  Le  27  (dc)  septembre 
1829,  un  incendie  detruisit  (destroyed)  a  Constantinople  11,000 
inaisons;  700  personnes  perirent  (perished)  dans  les  flammes. 

THEME  15. 

1.  A  month  is  the  twelfth  part  of  a  year.  2.  What  day  of  the 
month  is  it  to-day?  3.  It  is  the  24th  [of]  June.  4.  I  am  the 
third,  my  cousin  John  the  seventh.  5.  January  is  the  first,  Febru- 
ary the  second,  March  the  third  month  of  the  year.  6.  Napoleon 
died  at  St.  Helena  (Sainte-Helene)  the  5th  of  May,  1821.  7.  My 
grandmother  is  at  present  in  her  78th  year.  8.  What  o'clock 
(quelle  heure)  is  it  now  ?  It  is  four  o'clock,  or  half  past  four. 
9.  Louis  the  Sixteenth,  king  of  (de)  France,  was  beheaded  (fut  de" 
capite)  at  Paris  the  21st  of  January,  1793.  10.  Frederick  the 
Second  was  king  of  Prussia.  11.  Peter  the  Great  of  Russia  died  at 
St.  Petersburgh  (St.  Peterslodrg)  the  8th  of  February,  1725,  in 
the  53d  year  of  his  age.^  12.  We  have  received  6J  pounds  cf  cof- 
fee, li  pounds  of  sugar,  and  2J  pounds  of  tea. 

CONVERSATION. 

Quand  etes-vous  arrive  ?  Je  suis  arrive  le  premier  jum. 

Quand  avez-vous  vu  votre  mere  ?  Hier  a  cinq  heures. 

Mademoiselle  Sophie  cst-ello  la  Je  crois  (/  think)  qu'elle  est  la 
premiere  ou  la  deuxieme  ?  deuxieme. 

v  Translate,  in  his  53d  year. 


INDEFINITE   ADJECTIVES. 


75 


Quel  age  a-t-elle  ? 

Dans  quelle  annee  est-elle  nee  ? 

Dans  quel  mois  ? 

Quel  jour  ? 

De  quel  roi  parlez-vous  ? 

Quand  mourut-il  ? 

Quelle  heure  estril  ? 

A  quelle  heure  etes-vous  parti  ? 

Quel  quantieme  avons-nous  au-  i 
jourd'hui  ?  \ 

Corabien  d'aunes  voulez-vous  ? 
Quand  mourut  Charlemagne  ? 
Quel  age  a  votre  grand-pere  ? 


Elle  a  quinze  ans. 

Elle  est  nee  en  1851. 

Au  mois  d'Octobre. 

Le  onze. 

Nous  parlons  do  Louis  XVI. 

En  1793. 

II  est  sept  heures  et  (un)  quart  cu 

sept  heures  et  demie. 
Je  suis  parti  a  huit  heures  moins 

un  quart. 

Nous  avons  le  vingt-cinq. 
C'est  le  vingt-einq. 
Donnez-moi  seize  aunes  et  demio 
II  mourut  en  814,  le  28  Janvier. 
II  est  a  present  dans  sa  quatre 

vin£tiemo  anne'e. 


XVI.    SEIZIEME    LEyON. 


INDEFINITE  ADJECTIVES. 

1.  The  Indefinite  adjectives  precede  the  noun  to  which  they  be- 
long, and  agree  with  it  in  number  and  gender.  They  are  sometimes 
used  pronominally  without  a  nouir .  They  are  as  follows  :  — 


Chaque>  m.  and  f. 
tout,f.toute, 


every,  all. 


nul,  mule,   ) 
maint,  e,  man}*  a. 
quelque,  some,  any. 


quelques,  pi.  some. 
certain,  e,  a  certain. 
plusieurs,  pi.  m.  and  f.  several. 

divers,  f.  -es,          )    , 

fc  -7.  different 


76  XVI.      SEIZIEME  LEgON. 

Ex .  Chaque  maison,  every  house.  quelques  pommes,  some  apples. 

toute  ville,  every  town.  plusieurs  tfcoliers,  several  pupils. 

aucun  pays,  no  country.  certains  mots,  certain, words. 

nulle  regie,  no  rule.  diffe'rentes  enlreprises,  different  en 
maint  homme,  many  a  man.  terprises. 

quelque  argent,  some  money. 

2.  Tout  has  the  double  meaning  of  every  and  all  or  whole ;  in 
tbe  latter  case  it  is  accompanied  by  an  article  or  a  possessive  adjec- 
tive.     Toute  ville  (witbout  article)   signifies  every  town;  toute  la 
ville  means  all  the  town  or  the  whole  town.     Tbe  plural  of  tout  is 
masc.  tous,  fern,  toutes.     Ex. :   Tons  les  hommes,  all  men ;  toutes 
les  lettres,  all  tbe  letters ;   Tous  ses  enfants,  all  bis  cbildren. 

3.  Aucun  and  nul  can  only  be  used  of  individual  tbings,  and  an- 
swer to  tbe  Englisb  not  one.     They  require  tbe  particle  ne  to  be 
prefixed  to  tbe  verb.     (In  most  cases  tbe  Englisb  no  is  translated 
point  de  or  pas  de.)     Ex.  :  — 

Je  n'ai  aucunefaute,  I  have  not  one  mistake. 

Je  n'ai  pas  de  (OT point  de)faute,  I  have  no  mistake. 

4.  Quelconque,  whatever,  takes  its  place  after  tbe  noun.     Ex. 
Un  livre  quelconque,  a  (any)  book  "whatever. 

VOCABULARY. 

L'fyine,  f.  the  thorn.  mortel,  -le,  mortal. 

la  chose,  the  thing.  lafemme,  the  woman. 

le  temps,  time,  weather.  le  motif,  the  motive. 

la  nouvelle,  the  news.  I'enncmi,  m.  the  enemy. 

le  nom,  the  name.      .  rare,  rare. 

le  paysan,  the  peasant.  froid,  e,  cold., 

pretez,  lend.  le  meme,  the  same. 

lafaute,  the  fault,  mistake.  dcpuis,  since. 

Vcrreur,  f.  the  error.  a ime,  loves. 

la  version,  the  translation.  quelque  chose,  something. 

BEADING  EXERCISE  16. 

•  Nulle  rose  n'est  sans  epines.  Notre  maitre  de  musique  donne 
chaque  jour  six  lemons.  Plusieurs  personnes  sont  arrivees  <lG~yicn- 
ne.  Dieu  est  le  pere  de  tous  les  bommes.  Cbaque  ug6  a  ses  plai- 
sirs  et  ses  chagrins.  Tous  les  hommes  sont  mortels.  ^olit'  ce  phya 
est  pauvrc.  Toute  chose  a  son  temps.  Je  n'ai  aucune  nouvelle  de 


INDEFINITE  ADJECTIVES.  77 

mon  frere.  Je  connais  quclques  families  riches  dans  cette  ville. 
Nous  avons  re$u  aujourd'hui  diverscs  lettres.  Plusieurs  hommes 
ont  le  meme  nom.  Maint  paysan  est  tres-pauvre.  On  a  parle 
(spoken)  de  diffe  rentes  entreprises.  Pretez-moi  quelques  livres. 

THEME  16. 

1.  Every  child  likes  playing  (le  jeu).  2.  Each  town  has  a 
church.  3.  You  have  several  faults  in  your  translation.  4.  Every 
man  is  liable  (sujet)  to  error.  5.  My  brother  has  found  some  pen- 
cils, whoso  (d  qui)  are  they?  6.  The  whole  house  was  cold 
(froide).  7.  All  the  houses  of  this  town  are  very  high  (hautes). 
8.  I  do  not  know  the  names  of  all  animals.  9.  John  has  lost  sev- 
eral pens.  10.  The  king  had  different  motives.  11.  This  father 
has  lost  all  his  children.  12.  No  rule  without  exception  (excep- 
tion). 13.  Certain  books  are  not  good  for  young  people  (la  jeun- 
esse).  14.  I  have  not  one  enemy.  15r~Every  mother  loves  her 
children.  16.  All  the  children  love  (aiment)  their  parents.  17. 
It  is  rare  to  (d? )  have  several  good  friends. 

CONVERSATION. 

Ai-je  des  fautes  dans  ma  ver-  Oui,  mon  ami,  vous  avez  plusieurs 

sion  ?  v '  fautes. 

Quelles  sont  les  fautes  ?  Les  voiei. 

Qui  a  dit  cela  (said  so)  ?  Tous  les  enfants  1'ont  dit. 

Ou  trouve-t-on  cette  plante?  On  la  (it)  trouve  dans  tous  les 

pays  de  1'Europe. 

A  qui  sont  ces  maisons  ?  Toutes  ces  maisons  sont  a  mon  on- 

cle. 

Quels  motifs  avcz-vous  eus  ?  Nous  avons  eu  divers  motifs. 

As-tu  beaucoup  de  fautes  ?  Non,  M  — ,  je  n'ai  aucune  faute. 

Qui  cst  mortel  ?  Tous  les  hommes  sont  mortels. 

A-t-elle  trouve'  qnelque  chose  ?  Oui,  elle  a  trouve  une  bourse. 

Ou  avez- vous   eie   la  semaino  J'ai   etc   dans  plusieurs  endroits 

d  erniere  ?  (  places) . 

A  quoi  (to  what)  les  homines  Us  sont  sujets  h  1'erreur. 

sont-ils  sujets  ? 


78  XVII.      DIX-SEPTIEME   LE^ON. 


XVII.    DIX-SEPTIEME    LEgON, 


A DeTECTIVES.  — FORMATION  OP  THE  FEMININE 
AND   OF  THE  PLURAL. 

1.  GENERAL  RULE.     The  feminine  of  adjectives  is  formed  by 
adding  an  e  to  the  masculine  termination,  if  this  does  not  end  in  e 
mute.     Ex.:  Petit,  small,  little,  fern,  petite;  joli,  pretty,  fern 
iolie ;  applique,  diligent,  appliquee. 

2.  PARTICULAR  RULES.     Adjectives   which   end  in  e  mute  are 
alike  in  the  masculine  and  feminine  gender :  facile,  easy,  fern,  fa- 
cile ;  sage,  wise,  fern.  sage. 

3.  Adjectives  ending  in  el,  eil,  andtt, — further,  monosyllables 
ending  in  s  and  t,  double  their  final  consonant  before  e  mute  of  the 
feminine, as:  Cruel,  cruel,  fern,  crudb* ; pareil,  like,  such,  fern,  pa- 
reille ;   bon,  good,  fern,  bonne ;  gros,  big,  fern,  grosse  /  bas,  low, 
fern,  basse  ;  sot,  stupid,  fern,  sotte. 

4.  Adjectives  which  cud  in  f  become  feminine  by  changing  f 
into  ve,  as :  vif  quick,  lively,  f.  vive  ;  neuf,  new,  f.  ncuve ;  actift 
active,  f.  active;  bref,  short,  f.  breve. 

5.  Adjectives  ending  in  x,  change  this  x  into  se,  as  :  Henreux, 
happy,  lucky,  f.  heureuse  ;  jaloux,  jealous,  f.  jalouse. 

6.  Adjectives  which  end  in  er  and  et,  take  in  the  feminine  the 
grave  accent,  as  :  Leger,  light,  f.  leg  ere  ;  complet,  complete,  f.  com- 
plete.    Those  in  gu  have  gue  in  the  fern,  to  preserve  the  sound  of  u 
(see, p.  17,  Excep.),  as:  aigu,  acute,  f.  aigue. 

7.  Of  the  adjectives  ending  in  c,  three  change  this  c  into  che, 
viz  :  Blanc,  white,  f.  blanche  ;  franc,  frank,  f.  franche  ;  sect  dry, 
f.  seche. 

The  others  ending  in  c  take  -que,  as :  Turc,  Turkish,  f.  turque  / 
public,  public,  f.  publique  ;   Grec,  Greek,  has  in  the  fern,  grecque* 


ADJECTIVES.  79 

8.  The  following  adjectives  do  not  quite  agree  with  th^  foregoing 
rules :  — 

Long,  long,  f.  longue.  expres,  express,  f.  exprrsse. 

frais,  fresh,  f.  fraiche.  muet,  dumb,  mute,  f.  muette. 

€paisy  thick,  f.  tfpaisse.  sujet,  subject,  f.  sujette. 

doux,  sweet,  soft,  f.  douce.  maliny  wicked,  f.  maligne. 

faux,  false,  f.fausse.  btfnin,  benign,  f.  b&nigne. 

9.  The  following  are  more  irregular  in  the  formation  of  then:  fem- 
inine, as :  — 

Beau  (Id),  beautiful,  f.  belle, 
nouveau  (nouvd),  new,  f.  nouvelle. 
mou  (mol),  soft,  f-  molle. 
fou  (fol),  mad,  foolish,  f.fotte. 
vieux  (vieil),  old,  f.  vieille. 

Note.  The  forms  in  parentheses,  bd,  nouvd,  etc.,  are  used  before  mascu- 
line nouns  beginning  with  a  vowel  or  h  mute,  as  :  un  Id  arbre,  a  fine  tree; 
un  nouvel  oi'dre,  a  new  order;  unfol  espoir,  a  mad,  wild  hope. 

10.  The  rules  given  for  the  plural  of  substantives  apply  also  to 
adjectives.     Ex.  :  — 

Grand,  f.  grande ;  plur.  grands,  f.  grandes. 
applique",  f.  appliquee ;  plur.  applique's,  f.  appliqudes. 
gras,  f.  grasse,  fat ;  plur.  gras,  f.  grasses, 
royal,  f.  royale,  royal ;  plur.  royaux,  f.  royales. 
beau,  f.  belle,  beautiful ;  plur.  beaux,  f.  belles, 
vieux,  f.  vieille,  old,  plur.  vieux,  f.  vieilles. 
Fou,  mou,  and  bleu  make  in  the  plural  fous,  mous,  and  Ueus. 

11.  The  adjective  must  agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the 
substantive  which  it  qualifies,  as  :  — 

La  grande  maison,  the  large  house. 

La  maison  est  grande,  the  house  is  large. 

La  jolie  rose,  the  pretty  rose. 

Ces  roses  sont  tres-jolies,  these  roses  are  very  pretty. 

The  adjective  is  more  frequently  used  substantivcly  in  French  than  in 
English.  Ex.  Le  parcsscux,  the  lazy  (one). 


80  XVII.      DIX-SEFTIEME    LE^ON. 

VOCABULARY. 

La  mtdccine,  the  medicine.  agreable,  agreeable. 

I'iioire,  m.  ivoiy.  amer,  amere,  bitter. 

la  vioklte,  the  violet.  mur,  e,  ripe. 

la  montagne,  the  mountain.  aimable,  amiable. 

la  liberty  liberty.  immortcl,  -le,  immortal. 

la  robe,  the  dress,  gown.  chcr,  chere,  dear. 

I'herbe  f.  the  grass.  obtfissant,  e,  obedient. 

rrat,  e,  true.  precieux,  -se,  precious. 

la  voix,  the  voice.  corps,  m.  body. 

utile,  useful.  oie,  f.  goose. 

READING  EXERCISE  17. 

Get  arbrc  est  tres-gros.  Yoici  deux  gros  arbres.  La  m^decine 
n'etait  pas  bonne ;  ello  etait  tres-amere.  Nos  enfants  sont  heureux. 
Yos  filles  ne  sont  pas  heureuses;  elles  sont  tres-malheureuses. 
Yous  scricz  aimable,  si  (if)  vous  etiez  appliquee.  Yoici  une  tres- 
jolie  maison,  clle  est  encore  neuve.  Cette  eglise  est  vieille.  Yos 
chevaux  sont  vieux.  Les  chateaux  royaux  sont  tres -beaux.  Les 
dents  longues  et  blanches  de  1' elephant  fournissent  (furnish) 
1'ivoire.  La  fille  de  notre  voisin  est  muette.  Us  ne  sont  pas 
obeissants.  J'avais  une  oie  qui  (which)  etait  grosse  et  grasse. 

THEME  17. 

1.  The  rose  is  pretty ;  the  violets  are  also  pretty.  2.  My  room 
is  small ;  your  house  is  large.  3.  This  news  is  not  true.  4.  My 
father  is  good;  my  mother  is  also  good.  5.  These  geese  are  big 
and  fat.  6.  What  beautiful  houses  !  7.  Henry's  books  are  useful 
and  agreeable.  8.  Your  windows  are  very  small  and  low.  9.  My 
body  is  mortal,  but  my  soul  is  immortal.  10.  Our  town  is  very  old. 
11.  Her  sister  is  not  handsome.  12.  This  house  is  well  situated 
(bien  situee).  13.  This  apple  is  not  ripe,  but  these  pears  are  too 
(trop)  ripe.  14.  Is  this  butter  fresh  ?  15.  The  grass  is  very  thick. 
16,  Ivory  is  white ;  my  teeth  are  not  so  (si)  white.  17.  Her  voico 
is  very  sweet.  18.  I  have  received  a  long  letter  from  my  father. 
19.  What  a  foolish  (§  9,  Note)  hope  !  20.  That  medicine  was  very 


ADJECTIVES. 


81 


bitter.  21.  Louisa's  dress  is  beautiful,  but  her  bonnet  is  not  very 
beautiful  22.  My  shoes  are  very  old.  23.  The  leaf  is  dry.  24. 
My  mother  is  happy ;  my  sisters  are  also  happy.  25.  Your  letter 
was  too  short.  26.  That  girl  is  very  foolish  and  idle. 

CONVERSATION. 


L'ame  de  Fhomme  est-elle  mor- 

telle? 

Qui  est  malade  chez  vous  ? 
Prend-elle  (does  she  take)  de  la 

medecme  ? 
Qui  est  arriv£  ? 
A-t-il  apporte  quelque  chose  ? 

Etes-vous  heureux  ? 

Comment  trouvez-vous  (how  do 

you  like)  cette  rose  ? 
Votre  robe  est-elle  vieille  ou 

neuve  ? 

Notre  version  est-elle  Ipngue  ? 
Commeni  h-ouvez-vous  ces  deux 

e'coliers  ? 
Sont-ils  obeissants  ? 

A  vez-vous  perdu  quelque  chose  ? 


Non,  elle  est  immortelle. 

C'est  ma  tante  qui  est  malado. 
Oui,  M — ,  elle  prend  uno  m61e- 

cine  tres-amere. 
Mon  oncle  Richard. 
II  a  apport4  un  bel  oiseau,   UQ 

perroquet  (parrot). 
Oh !  non,  nous  sommes  malheu- 

reux! 
Jo  la  trouve  tres-belle. 

Elle  n'est  pas  vieillo;    ello  est 

toute  neuve. 

Non,  elle  n'est  pas  bien  longue. 
Us  sont  tres-paresseux. 

Non,  M — ,  ils  no  sont  pas  obdis- 

sants. 
Oui,   Monsieur,   j'ai    perdu  ma- 

vieille  casquette  (cap). 


82  XVIII.      DIX-HUITIEME   LE£ON. 

XVIII.    DIX-HUITIEME    LE£ON. 


THE  PLACE  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

1.  GENERAL  RULE.      ADJECTIVES   GENERALLY  FOLLOW   THEIR 
NOUNS. 

2.  PARTICULAR   RULES.     The  following  generally  precede   the 
substantive : 

Beau,  fine.  me'chant,  wicked. 

bon,  good.  meilleur,  better. 

grand,  great,  large.  moindre,  less,  least. 

gros,  big.  petit,  little. 

jeune,  young.  saint  holy. 

mauvais,  bad.  vieux,  old.    rrai,  true. 

Ex. :  —  Un  beau  pays,  a  fine  country. 

Une  granite,  ville,  a  large  town  or  city. 
Un  jeune  lion,  a  young  lion. 
Un  mauvais  lit,  a  bad  bed. 
Un  meilleur  avis,  a  better  advice. 
Un  vieux  soldat,  an  old  soldier,  etc. 

Note.  Grand  is  placed  after  its  noun,  when  it  signifies  tall :  un  homrM 
grand,  a  tall  man. 

N.  B.  It  is  to  be  observed,  that  substantives  preceded  by  an  adjective, 
when  used  in  the  partitive  sense,  take  only  de  before  them,  instead  of  du,  de, 
la,  or  des.  (See  L.  v.,  4.)  Ex. :  De  bon  vin,  (some)  good  wine;  de  bdles 
fleurs,  beautiful  flowers. 

Note.  Exceptions  to  this  rule  are :  du  bon  sens,  good  sense ;  des  jeunes 
gens,  young  men ;  des  petitspois,  green  peas ;  and  other  expressions  in  which 
the  noun  and  adjective  form  really  but  one  compound  word. 

3.  Monosyllabic  adjectives,  except  those  denoting  some  physical 
property  (color,  taste,  form,  etc.),  precede  the  noun.     Ex.:   Un 
long  discours,  unfol  amour. 

4.  Adjectives  qualifying  a  noun  followed  by  a  limiting  phrase  or 
clause,  precede  the  noun.     Ex.  :  L'immortel  auteur  du  Paradis 
perdu. 

\ 


THE    PLACE    OF    ADJECTIVES.  83 

5.  Many  adjectives,  when  taken  in  their  literal  sense,  follow, 
when  taken  figuratively,  preoede  the  substantive,  as  :  — 

FIGURATIVELY.  LITEKALLT. 

Une  tendre  amide",  a   tender  friend-    De  la  viande  tendre,  tender  meat. 

ship, 
mon  pauvre  enfant,  my  poor  child.         un  enfant  pauvre,  a  poor  (indigent) 

child. 
un  profond  silence,  a  deep  silence.          un  fosse" prof ond,  a  deep  ditch. 

6.  Many  adjectives  take  their  place  sometimes  before,  sometimes 
after  the  noun,  without  changing  their  signification,  simply  for  the 
sake  of  euphony  or  stress.     This  is  mostly  to  be  seen  when  the  ad- 
jective is  preceded  by  the  definite  article  or  by  ce,  cette.     We  say, 
for  instance  :  une  verite  ajfreuse,  a  frightful  truth,  but,  Yqff reuse  or 
cp.tte  affreme  verite: 

L' inflexible  durete  dcs  riches. 

The  inflexible  hardness  of  the  rich. 

Cette  ajjligeante  nouvelle  se  re'pandit  dans  la  vitte. 

This  afflicting  news  spread  (soon)  in  the  town. 

7.  Some  adjectives  have  a  different  meaning,  according  as  they 
Btand  before  or  after  their  noun  :  — 

Mon  cher  ami,  my  dear  friend  (do-     Un  livre  cher,  a  dear  book  (denoting 

noting  affection ) .  the  price ) . 

un  brave  homme,  a  worthy  man.  un  homme  brave,  a  brave  (courageous) 

man. 
un  honnete  homme,  an  honest  man.        un  homme  honnete,  a  civil  or  polite 

man. 

la  derniere  annexe,  the  last  year  (of  a    Vannte  derniere,  last  year  (the  past 
certain  space  of  time).1  year). 

VOCABULARY. 

Le  soldat,  the  soldier.  ame'ricain,  e,  American. 

les  gens,  people.  simple,  simple. 

attentif,  -ve,  attentive.  modcste,  modest. 

vert,  e,  green.  vertueux,  -se,  virtuous. 

bleu,  e,  blue.  labor ieux,  -se,  laborious 

1    For  instance:  He  spent  the  last  year  of  his  life  at  Paris,  ilpassa  la  derniere 
annee  de  sa  vie  &  Paris. 


84  XVIII.      DIX-HU1TIEME   LE£ON. 

aveugk,  blind.  naturel,  -le,^  natural. 

la  n.usique,  the  music,  le  sentiment,  the  sentiment. 

noir,  e,  black,  rond,  round.  la  fum€e\\hQ  smoke. 

romain,  e,  Roman.  incroyabU,  incredible. 

Varme'e,  f.  the  army.  I 'application,  f.  the  application 

le  malheur,  misfortune.  deja,  already. 

le  vaisseau,  the  vessel.  nuisible,  hurtful. 
NOTE.    Adjectives  denoting  nationality  are  not  written  with  a  capital. 
E  x. :  La  langue  fran$aise. 

READING  EXERCISE  18. 

J'ai  des  raisins  doux.  Ce  sont  des  jeunes  gens  attentifs.  La 
coulcur  verte  est  la  couleur  de  la  nature.  Notre  voisin  a  un  habit 
blett  et  une  casquette  rouge.  Voici  une  jeune  fille  aveugle.  Vou- 
Icz-vous  cette  petite  boite  ?  Elle  a  re9u  une  lettre  amusante  de 
sa  vieille  (old)  cousine.  Avezrvous  de  bonne  encre?  J'aime  la 
rausique  italienne.  Voici  deux  aunes  de  drap  vert  et  quatre  aunes 
de  drap  noir.  Les  soldats  romains  etaient  tres-braves.  Un  &£  sec 
est  tres-nuisible  aux  plantes.  Mon  maitre  de  rnusique  est  un  brave 
homme.  Voici  de  grands  vaisseaux  americains.  Les  colibris 
(humming  birds)  sont  de  beaux  petits  oiseaux.  J'aime  les  jeunes 
filles  douces,  simples  ct  modestes. 

THEME  18. 

1.  France  is  a  fine  country.  2.  "We  have  a  large  house. 
3.  Henry  has  a  bad  pen.  4.  My  aunt  is  a  virtuous  woman.  5.  She 
is  also  very  active  and  laborious.  6.  Frank  is  an  attentive  boy. 
7.  Miss  B.  is  an  amiable  young  lady.  8.  Is  Mr.  A.  a  polite  man? 
9.  Yes,  he  is  very  polite.  10.  The  wasp  (la  guepe)  is  a  hurtful 
insect.  11.  Our  neighbor  has  three  small  horses.  12.  This  is  a 
natural  sentiment.  13.  The  ycung  man  studies  (etudie)  with  (an) 
incredible  application.  14.  I  have  bought  a  round  table.  15.  Give 
me  some  red  paper  and  four  black  pencils.  16.  Yesterday  we  had 
an  easy  translation,  but  our  exercise  for  to-morrow  is  difficult.  17.  I 
like  the  blue  sky,  (the)  high  trees  and  (the)  green  fields.  18.  Have 
you  ripe  pears?  10.  No,  sir,  the  pears  are  not  yet  (pas  encore) 


THE  PLACE   OF  ADJECTIVES. 


85 


ripe,  but  we  have  ripe  cherries.  20.  Italian  music  is  very  agreea- 
ble. 21.  The  French  soldiers  under  Napoleon  the  first  were  very 
brave.  22.  Here  are  beautiful  flowers  and  beautiful  fruit  {pi.). 
23.  The  English  have  large  vessels.  24.  The  rose  and  [the]  lily 
are  beautiful  flowers. 

CONVERSATION. 


Avez-vous  des  noix  mures  ? 
Qaand  seront-elles  mures? 
Aimez-vous  la    musique    alle- 

raande  ? 
Ce    marchand    a-t-il    de    bon 

beurre  ? 
Comment      trouvez-vous      ces 

jeunes  lions  ? 

Votre  fh-eme  est-il  difficile  ? 
Combicn  coufee  cet  habit  ? 

Ou  est  mon  cher  ami  Lucien? 
A  qui  est  ce  livre  amusant  ? 
Qui    a    perdu    une   casquette 


Avez-vous  de  bon  pain  et  du 
fromage  ? 


Elles  ne  sont  pas  encore  mures. 

Dans  huit  jours. 

J'aime  mieux  (better)  la  musiquo 

italienne. 
Son  beurre  n'est  pas  frais,  mais  sa 

creme  (cream)  est  fraiche. 
Us  sont  tres-beaux. 

Non,  Monsieur,  il  est  facile. 

II  coute   cent  francs.     CTcst  un 

habit  cher. 
II  est  alle  au  concert. 
II  est  &  mon  oncle. 
C'est  Jules  qui  1'a  perdue. 

Yoici  un  gros  morceau  de  pain  et 
du  fromage. 


86  XIX.      DIX-NEUVIEME  LEgON. 

XIX.    DIX-NEUVIEME 


DEGREES   OF   COMPARISON. 

1.  The  comparative  is  conned  by  placing  tbe  adverb  plus,  more, 
before  an  adjective.     Tbe  superlative  by  placing  tbe  article  before 
tbe  comparative,  as : 

Haut,  e,  high;  comp.  plus  haul,  higher;  sap.  le  plus  haut,  the  highest; 
fern,  haute,  comp.  plus  haute,  sup.  la  plus  haute. 

Mauvais,  e,  bad;  comp.  plus  mauvais,  e,  worse;  sup.  le  plus  mauvais,  f.  la 
plus  mauvaise,  the  worst. 

REM.  When  a  possessive  adjective  is  placed  before  the  superlative,  tho 
article  le,  la,  les,  is  dropped,  as  :  Monplusjeunefrere,  my  youngest  brother. 

2.  Tbere  is  in  Frencb  also  a  lower  and  lowest  degree  wbicb  is  ef- 
fected by  tbe  words  moms,  less,  for  tbe  comparative  degree,  and  le 
moms,  f.  la  moins,  tbe  least,  for  tbe  superlative,  as: 

Cruel,  -le,  cruel;  comp.  mains  cruel,  f.  moms  cruelle,  less  cruel  or  not  so 
cruel ;  sup.  le  moins  cruel,  f.  la  moins  cruelle,  the  least  cruel. 

3.  Tbe  following  adjectives  bave  an  irregular  comparison : 

Bon,f.  bonne,  good;  comp.  meilleur,  e,  better;  sup.  le  meilleur,  f.  la  meii- 
leure,  the  best. 

(Mauvais,  e,  in  the  sense  of  wickedj,  comp. pire,  worse;  sup.  lepire,  f.  la 
pire,  the  worst. 

(Petit,  e});  comp.  moindre,  less;  sup.  le  moindre,  f.  la  moindre,  the  least. 

Petit  and  mauvais  are  also  regular. 

4.  As  before  an  adjective  is  rendered  aussi  ;  as  after  it,  and  than 
are  botb  translated  que.    Ex. :  —  II  est  aussi  heureux  que  moi,  bo 
is  as  bappy  as  I  am.      Charles  est  plus  fort  que  son  fr ere,  Cbarles 
is  stronger  tban  bis  brotber. 

5.  In  after  a  superlative  and  before  tbe  name  of  a  place  is  ren- 
dered by  de  and  not  by  dans.     Ex. :  Les  plus  belles  eglises  DE 
Paris,  tbe  finest  cburcbes  in  Paris. 


DEGREES   OF  COMPARISON.  87 

VOCABULARY. 

La  ffollande,  Holland.  fort,  e,  strong. 

Pabeille,  f.  the  bee.  chaud,  warm. 

le  mental,  the  metal.  encore,  still. 

Vei(fpJiant,  the  elephant.  toujours,  always. 

Jidele,  faithful.  I'autre,  the  other. 

pevpfc,  e,  peopled,  populous.  le  matin,  the  morning. 

le  pays,  the  country.  le  soir,  the  evening, 

pesant,  e,  heavy.  court,  short. 
/*•     .-•;>// ^'A 

READING  EXERCISE  19. 

L'Europe  est  plus  petite  quo  TAsie.  L'Allemagne  est  plus  fer- 
tile que  la  Hollande.  L'abeille  est  1'insecte  le  plus  utile.  L'or  est 
le  metal  le  plus  pesant.  Ta  robe  est  moins  belle  quo  la  robe  de  ta 
socur.  Monsieur  S  est  un  bomme  tres-fort.  Son  frere  ain6  (elder) 
est  encore  plus  fort ;  c'est  1'homme  le  plus  fort  quo  (that)  je  con- 
naisse.  L' elephant  est  le  plus  grand  de  tous  les  animaux  terrestres. 
Les  livres  d'Emilie  sent  plus  amusants  que  les  notres  (ours).  Les 
chats  sont  moins  fideles  que  les  cbiens.  Ces  pommes-ci  sont  meil- 
leures  que  vos  poires.  Les  notres  sont  les  meilleures.  Votre  tante 
est  plus  laborieuse  que  sa  fille.  Londres  et  Paris  sont  les  villes  les 
plus  grandes  et  les  plus  peuplees  de  FEurope. 

THEME  19. 

• 

1.  The  coffee  was  warm;  the  tea  was  still  warmer.  2.  This 
church  is  higher  than  the  other.  3.  Mary  is  the  happiest  girl  in  the 
world.  4.  She  is  prettier  than  Louisa ;  she  is  the  prettiest  of  the 
sisters.  5.  This  house  is  not  so  (si)  old  as  (que)  the  other.  6. 
This  mountain  is  very  high,  higher  than  all  the  other  mountains  of 
this  country.  7.  The  22d  [of]  June  is  the  longest,  and  the  22d 
of  December  the  shortest  day  of  the  year.  8.  The  rose  is  the  finest 
of  all  (the)  flowers.  9.  This  wine  is  worse  than  water.  10.  Have 
you  any  (de)  better  wine?  11.  Yes,  the  red  wine  is  better.  12. 
My  wine  is  the  best.  13.  John  is  my  best  friend. 


88 


XX.      VINGTIEMU   LEgON. 


CONVERSATION. 

Mademoiselle  Ma.ie,  etes-vous  Oh  !  oui,  je  suis  tres-hemeuse, 
heureuse  ?  plus  heurcuse  quo  ma  soeur. 

Votrc  voisin  est-il  malheureux  ?  II  est  moins  malheureux  quo  son 

frere  qui  est  en  Amerique. 

Quol  cstle  metal  le  plus  utile?  C'est  le  fer. 

Quelfl  mctaux  sont  les  plus  pe-  L'or,  le  platine  et  le  plomb  sont 
sants  ?  les  plus  pesants. 

Quelleestla  plus  attentive  do  C'est  Madeleine,  la  fille  de  Mon- 


toutes  vos  ecoliercs  ? 


sieur  13. 


Quel  est  le  plus  fort  des  ani-     C'est    Telepliant;    c'est   le   plug 
maux  terrestres.  grand  et  le  plus  fort  de  tous  les 

animaux  terrestres. 

Quel  est  le  mois  le  plus  froid  de     C  'est  le  mois  de  Janvier. 
1'annee  ? 

Votre  robe  cst-elle  aussi  belle     Non,  elle  est  moins  belle. 
que  la  robe  de  Julie  ? 

Le  tire  cst-il  cruel? 


*       Oil  trouve-t-on  le  meilleur  fer? 


Oui,  c'est  le  plus  cruel  de  tousles 

animaux. 

Le    meilleur  fer  se   trouye    (is 
found)  en  Suede. 


XX.    VINGTIEME 


REGULAR  VERBS.  — FIRST  CONJUGATION.— 
DONNER. 

1.  There  are  in  French  three  regular  conjugations,  viz. :  in  er,  tV,  and  re. 
Verbs  in  -oir  belong  to  the  irregular  ones,  as  their  root  undergoes  manifold 
changes.*  The  Infinitive  mood  is  to  be  considered  as  the  radical  part  oi 

*  Only  six  other  verbs  are  conjugated  like  recevoir,  which  is  often  given  as  the 
model  of  oiie  conjugation.  They  will  all  be  found  L.  XLIV.  p.  189. 


REGULAR  VERBS.  89 

ground-form  on  which  the  conjugation  depends.  What  precedes  the  ter- 
mination er,  ir,  or  re,  is  the  root,  which,  with  regular  verbs,  always  remains 
unaltered.  To  this  are  added  the  different  terminations,  by  which  persons, 
tenses,  and  moods  are  distinguished,  and  which  are  common  to  all  the  verbs 
of  that  same  conjugation. 

FORMATION  OF  THE  TENSES  OF  REGULAR  VERBS. 

2.  There  are  primitive  tenses  and  derived  tenses.  The  primitive  tenses 
are  :  the  infinitive,  the  participle  present,  the  past  participle,  the  present  indica* 
tive,  the  preterite. 

?.  From  the  present  infinitive  are  formed  :  the  future,  by  adding  ai,  and 
the  conditioned,  by  adding  air,,  as  :  Inf.  donner:  Fut.  je  donnerai,  and  Cond. 
je  donnerais;  finir :  Fut.  je  finirai,  Cond.  je  finirais.  In  the  third  conju- 
gation the  final  e  is  dropped :  vendre :  Fut.  je  vendrai,  Cond.  je  vendrais. 

4.  From  the  participle  present  are  formed :  the  present  of  the  subjunctive, 
by  changing  ant  into  e,  as  :  donnant:  queje  donne;  finissant:  que  je  finisse; 
rendant:  que  je  vende ;  and  the  Imperfect  Indicative  by  changing  ant  into 
ais,  as  :  finissanl:  jefinissais,  etc. 

5.  With  the  participle  past  are  formed  all  the  compound  tenses,  by  means 
of  the  auxiliaries  avoir  or  etre,  as:  Part,  past:  donne",  fini,  vendu — :  j'ai 
donne*,  j'avais  fini,  j'aurai  vendu,  etc. 

6.  From  the  present  of  the  Indicative,  viz. :  from  its  1st  person  singular 
and  the  1st  and  2d  persons  plural,  the  Imperative  is  formed,  by  suppress- 
ing the  pronouns ,/e,  nous,  vous,  as:  donne  (give),  donnons,  donnez;  finis  (&n- 
ish),fini'&&ris,jihissezf  etc. 

7.  From  the  preterite  is  formed  the  Subjunctive  imperfect,  by  changing  the 
final  ai  into  asse  for  the  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation,  and  is  into  isse  for 
the  second  and  third  conjugations.    Ex.:  je  donnai:  que  je  donnasse ;  jt 
Jims:  que  je  finisse  ;  je  vendis :  queje  vendisse. 


CONJUGATION  OF  DONNER,  —  TO  GIVE. 

INDICATIVE. 
PRESENT   TENSE. 

Je  donno,  I  give,  nous  donnons,  we  give. 

tu  donnes,  tliou  givest.  vous  donncz,  you  give. 

il  donne,  he  gives,  ils  donnent,         )  ,, 

v  they  give. 
<jlle  donne,  she  gives.  elles  donnent,     \ 


90  XX.      VINGTIEME  LEgON. 

IMPERFECT. 

Jo  donnais,  I  gave  or  was  giving,  nous  donnions,  we  gave. 
tu  donnais,  thou  gavest.  vous  donniez,  you  gave. 

il  donnait,  he  gave.  ils  donnaient,  they  gave. 

PRETERITE. 

Je  donnai,  I  gave  or  did  give.      nous  donnames,  we  gave. 
tu  donnas,  thou  gavest.  YOUS  donnates,  you  gave. 

il  donna,  he  gave.  ils  donnerent,  they  gave. 

FUTURE. 

Je  donnerai,  I  shall  give.  nous  donnerons,  we  shall  give. 

tu  donneras,  /Aow  «^7£  $riVe.  vous  donnerez,  you  will  give. 

il  donnera,  he  will  give.  ils  donncront,  they  will  give. 

CONDITIONAL. 

Jc  donnerais,  I  should  give.          nous  donncrious,  we  should  giie 
tu  donnerais,        efc.  vous  donneriez,  efc. 

il  donnerait,          etc.  ils  donncraient,  e^c. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Donne,  give.  donnons,  let  us  give. 

(donnes-en),*  give  (of  it).  donnez,  give. 

INFINITIVE. 

Donner,  to  give.  (de  or  h  donncr) ,  to  give. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT. 

Que  je  donne,  that  I  (may)  give,  que  nous  donnions,  that  we  (may) 
que  tu  donnes,  etc.  que  vous  donniez,        etc.      [give. 

qu'il  donne,  etc.  qu'ils  donnent,  etc. 

*  The  Imperative  mood  of  the  first  conjugation  takes  an  .«,  in  the  singular,  when 
followed  by  en  (of  it,  of  them,  some)  or  y  (to  or  of  it,  to  them).  Ex. :  offres-cr^ 
offer  some,  penses^/y  think  of  it. 


REGULAR   VERBS.  91 


IMPERFECT. 


Que  je  doanasse,  that  I '(might)  quo  nous  donnassions. 
quo  tu  donnasses,      etc.     [give,  quo  vous  donnassiez. 
qu'il  donnat,  etc.  qu'ils  donnassent. 

PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT.  PAST. 

I)onnant,^iWn<7.  Donnd,  f.  donn^o,  given. 

(en  donnant),  by  or  in  giving,  etc. 

COMPOUND  TENSES. 

In  active  verbs  these  are  formed  with  the  Part,  past  and  the  auxiliary 
avoir,  to  have. 

INFINITIVE. 

Avoir  donne,  to  have  given. 

INDICATIVE. 
COMPOUND    OP   THE   PRESENT. 

J'ai  donne,  Iliave  given. 
^^tu  as  donne,  thou  hast  given. 
il  a  donne,  he  has  given. 
nous  avons  donne,  we  have  given,  etc. 

COMPOUND  OP  THE  IMPERFECT. 

J'avais  donne',  I  had  given,  etc. 

COMPOUND  OP  THE  PRETERITE. 

J'eus  donne,  I  hid  given,  etc. 

COMPOUND   OP   THE   FUTURE. 

J'aurai  donne,  /  shall  have  given,  etc. 
CONDITIONAL. 


J'aurais  donne,  )  7  T     7 , , 

'   L  /  should  have  given. 
tPeusse  donne*,     ) 


92  XX.      VTNGTIEME   LE£GN. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
COMPOUND   OF   THE   PRESENT. 

Que  j'aie  donne,  that  I  (may)  have  given,  etc. 

Que  tu  aies  donne,  that  thoit  (mayest)  have  given,  etc. 

COMPOUND   OP   THE   IMPERFECT. 

Que  j'eusse  donne,  that  I  (might)  Jiave  given,  etc. 

PARTICIPLE. 

Ayant  donn£,  e,  having  given. 

REMARK  1 .    There  is  but  one  way  to  render  the  expressions :  /  give,  1 
do  give.,  I  am  giving ;  viz. :  je  donne :  —  /  was  giving  ;  je  donnais,  etc. 

2.  In  the  interrogative  and  negative  form  the  auxiliary'  do  is  not  ex- 
pressed.    (See  also  the  llth  Lesson,  4.)     Ex. : 

PRESENT. 
INTERROGATIVELY. 

v        Est-cc  que  je  donne,  do  I  give?  donnons-nous,  do  we  give? 

donnes-tu,  dost  thou  give  ?  donnez-vous,  do  you  give  f 

donne-t-il,  does  he  give  f  donnent-ils,      |  ^  ^       .     , 

donne-t-elle,  does  she  give  ?  donnent-efles,  j" 

NEGATIVELY. 

Je  ne  donne  pas,  7  do  not  give. 

tu  ne  donnes  pas,  thou  dost  not  give. 

il  ne  donne  pas,  he  does  net  give,  etc. 

NEGATIVE-INTERROG  ATIVE. 

Est-ce  que  je  ne  donne  pas,  do  I  not  give  f 
ne  donnes-tu  pas,  dost  thou  not  give  ? 
ne  donne-t-il  pas,  does  he  not  give? 

3.  The  forms  donne'-je  (acute  on  the  e),  donnais-je,  donnai-je,  are  little 
used,  except  in  poetry  and  in  studied  prose ;  they  are  replaced  by  Est-ce  que 
(is  it  that)  prefixed  to  the  common  form,  as:  est-ce  queje  donne,  do  I  give; 
est-ce  queje  donnais,  did  I  give  (was  I  giving),  etc.     The  future  and  condi 
tional  donnerai-je,  donnerais-je  are  more  common,  though  est-ce  que  may  be 
used  in  all  cases  to  form  an  interrogation,  especially  in  common  conversa- 
tion, as  :  est-ce  que  je  donnerai,  shall  I  give ;  est-ce  qu'il  donne,  does  he  give  ; 
est-ce  que  vous  donnez,  est-ce  que  tu  ne  donnes  pas,  etc. 


REGULAR   VERBS.  93 

COMPOUND   OP   THE   PRESENT. 

Ai-je  donne  ?    as-tu  donne?    a-t-il  donne?  etc. 
Je  n'ai  pas  donne,     tu  n'as  pas  donne,  etc. 
N'ai-je  pas  donne  ?    n'as-tu  pas  donne  ?  .•etc. 

Conjugate  in  the  same  manner :  parler,  to  speak ;  porter,  to  cany,  to  take ; 
admirer,  to  admire ;  aimer,  to  love,  etc. 

VOCABULARY. 

Leprochain,  the  neighbor.  magnijique,  magnificent 

apporter,  to  bring,  to  take.  manger,  to  eat. 

twnber,  to  fall.  chercher^  to  look  for. 

I'escalier,  m.  the  stairs.  trouver,  to  find. 

la  sant^y  health.  penser,  to  think. 

h  cocur,  the  heart.  jouer,  to  play,    pleurer,  to  cry. 

le  canif,  the  penknife.  arriver,  to  arrive. 

les  gens,  the  people.  prier,  to  pray. 

la  chasse,  the  chase.  Vautre,  the  other. 

le  chasseur,  the  hunter.  ^       pas  encore,  not  yet. 

la  poste,  the  post-office. 

READING  EXERCISE  20. 

Aimez  Dieu  et  votre  prochain.  Les  parents  aiment  leurs  enfants. 
Portez  cette  lettre  &  la  poste.  Tu  porteras  cette  robe  &  ta  soeur. 
J'apporterai  ces  livres  a  mon  maitre.  Apportez-lui  (him)  aussi 
cette  boite.  L 'enfant  tomba  de  I'escalier.  J'ai  pense  a  mon  ami. 
Pensez  a  votre  cousin.  Jouons.  Nous  cherchions  longtemps  votre 
cMen,  Vous  ne  le  (him)  trouverez  pas.  Les  jeunes  gens  parlaient 
souvent  de  leurs  amis.  Les  chasseurs  parlerent  de  la  chasse.  Tu 
ne  mangeras  pas  cette  poire-ci ;  elle  n'est  pas  mure.  Qui  a  mang(S 
1'autre  ?  N'admirez-vous  pas  cette  magnifique  coulcur  ? 

THEME  20. 

1.  I  love  my  father.  2.  Thou  lovest  thy  mother.  3.  He  loves 
his  sister.  4.  We  love  our  parents.  5.  Do  you  like  flowers  ?  6. 
I  give  an  apple  to  my  brother.  7.  We  were  speaking  of  your  aunt. 
8.  I  admired  the  beautiful  palace  of  the  king.  9.  We  played  yes- 
terday. 10.  The  child  cried.  11.  The  children  cried.  12.  The 


XX.      VINGTIEMB   LE£ON. 


boy  will  look  for  his  copy-book.  13.  The  boys  will  look  for  their 
copy-books.  14.  I  have  found  my  knife.  15.  Have  you  found 
your  gloves?  16.  We  have  nofc  found  ovvr  gloves.  17.  Play,  my 
child.  18.  Eat  these  apples.  19.  Do  not  eat  these  pears ;  they 
are  not  ripe.  20.  She  would  fall.  21.  We  should  admire  your 
garden.  22.  They  would  have  eaten  some  bread  and  butter.  23. 
I  think  that  our  friends  will  arriye  to-day.  24.  They  will  ar- 
rive to-morrow.  25.  Will  you  take  this  letter  to  the  post-office  ? 
26.  Pray  to  God  every  morning  and  every  evening.  27.  Why 
do  you  cry  ?  28.  Why  have  you  not  brought  your  money  ?  29.  I 
have  not  brought  my  purse. 

CONVERSATION. 


Avcz-vous  cherche  votre  mon- 

tred'or? 
Qu'avez-vous  apporte  ? 

Voulez-vous  (will  you)  manger 
du  pain? 

Votre  .  mere  parle-t-ello  fran- 
gais? 

Quel  commandement  Jesus- 
Christ  a-t-il  donne  ? 

Qui  est  notre  proch&n? 

Qui  portera  cette  fettre  &  la 
poste,  Antoine  ou  Theodore  ? 

Qu'apporte  le  chasseur? 

Avez-vous  aussi  ete  h,  la  chasse  ? 

A  quo!  pensez-vous  ? 
A  quol  jcu  jouerons-nous  de- 
main  ? 

Quo  chcrchcz-vous  ? 
Qu'admirez-vous  la  ? 


Je  la  (it)  cherche  encore. 

J'ai  apporte  les  gants  de  Ma- 
demoiselle Mathilde. 

J'ai  deja  mange  un  gros  morceau 
de  pain. 

Oui,  elle  parle  fran^ais  et  anglais. 

II  a  dit:   Aimez  Dieu  et  votre 

proehain. 
Tous  les  homines. 
Ce  sera  Theodore. 

II  apporte  d°ux  lievres. 

Oui,  Monsieur,  nous  avons  e*te*  a 

la  chasse  hier. 

Je  pense  a  mon  theme  franyais. 
Nous  jouerons  h  la  balle  (ball) . 

Jc  cherche  mes  gants 
Nous     admirons    ce     magnifiqua 
vaisseau  anglais. 


REGULAR   VETIBS.  95 

READING  LESSON. 
LE    CHAMEAU   ET   LE    CHAT. 

Le  chat  au  chameau.     Soyez  le  bien-venu,  mon  frere. 

Le  chameau.     Comment,  moi  (/)  ton  frere  ! 

Le  chat.  Oui,  certes.  Voyez  un  peu  (see  a  little) :  no  puis-je 
pas  (cannot  I)  faire  une  aussi  jolie  bosse  que  vous  ? 

Le  chameau.  Cela  pent  (can)  etre ;  mais  peut-elle  aussi  porter 
autaat  que  la  mienne  (mine)  ?  • 

Le  chat.  La  sotte  demande  !  donnez-moi  seulement  (only)  votre 
petit  paquet,  je  le  porterai,  comme  si  ce  n'etait  rien. 

Le  chameau.  Mais  penses-y  bien :  n'est-il  pas  trop  gros  pour  toi 
(you)? 

Le  chat.     Ah  !  quel  conte  !  donnez-moi,  vous  dis-je,  donnez. 

Le  chameau.     C'est  bien;  approche  un  peu,  le  voila 

Le  chat.     Ah  !  quelle  charge  !  je  suis  ecrase  ! 

Le  chameau.     Tu  as  ce  que  (what)  tu  me'rites  ! 

Celui  qui  veut  entreprendre  de  grandes  choses,  doit  (must)  au* 
paravant  eprouver  ses  forces. 

Le  chameau,  the  camel.  y,  of  it  (to  it). 

le  ck^t-f  the  cat.  le  conte,  the  tale. 

le  bien-venu,  e,  welcome.  approcher,  approach. 

comment,  how.  la  charge,  the  weight. 

certes,  to  be  sure.  Ecrase',  crushed. 

faire,  to  make.  me'riter,  to  deserve. 

une  bosse,  a  hump.  entreprendre,  to  undertake. 

la  demande,  the  question  auparavant,  before. 

le  paquet,  the  pack.  e'prouver,  to  try. 

comme  si,  as  if.  la  force,  the  strength. 


96  XXI.      VINGT  ET  UNIEME 

XXI.    VINGT  ET  UNIEME 


REMARKS  ON  THE  ORTHOGRAPHY  OF  SOME 
VERBS  OF  THE  FIRST  CONJUGATION. 

Some  regular  verbs  in  -er  are,  for  the  sake  of  euphony,  liable  to  the  fol- 
lowing modifications : 

1.  Some  verbs  ending  in  -ter,  as  :  Jeter,  to  throw ;  rejeter,  to  throw  back  •, 
and  those  polysyllabic  verbs  ending  in  eler,  as:  appeler,  to  call;  renouveler, 
to  renew,  etc.;  double  the  t  or  /,  when  they  are  followed  by  an  e  mute. 

This  is  the  case  in  some  persons  of  the  Present,  Future,  and  Imperative, 
viz.:  — 

PRESENT.  IMPERATIVE.  FUTURE. 

Je  jetfe  —  nous  jetons.  Jette.  Je  jetterai. 

tu  jeftes  —  vous  jetez.  pi.  jetons.  tu  jetferas. 

il  jette    —  ils  jeftent.  jetez.  etc. 

J'appe#e    —  nous  appelons.  Appe//e.  J'appe/Zerai. 

tu  appe//es —  vous  appelez.  pi.  appelons.  tu  appe//eras. 

il  appe#e    —  ils  appe/Zent.  appelez.  etc. 

Except  the  verb  acheter,  to  buy,  and  a  few  others  that  seldom  occur, 
which  never  double  the  t,  but  take  the  grave  accent  e  : 

Pres.  J'achete,  tu  achetes,  il  achete,  nous  achetons,  vous  achetez,  ils 
ache  tent.  * 

Put.  J'acheterai.     Imper.  achete,  pL  achetez. 

2.  Dissyllabic  verbs  ending  in  -der,  as  :  gder,  to  freeze,  and  all  others 
that  have  an  e  mute  in  the  last  syllable  but  one,  such  as:  semer,  to  sow; 
mener,  to  lead  ;  lever  to  lift  up,  take  the  grave  accent,  e,  when  the  final  con- 
sonant of  the  root  is  followed  by  an  e  mute  : 

Infinitive:  Mener,  to  lead,  to  conduct. 

Pres.  Je  mene,  tu  menes,  il  mene,  nous  menons,  vous  menez,  ils  m^nent. 

Imperf.  Je  menais,  tu  menais. 

Fut.  Je  menerai,  tu  meneras.    Imp.  men9,  menons,  menez. 

The  same  change  takes  place  with  those  verbs  which  have  ^  in  the  last 
s;,  liable  but  one.  They,  however,  retain  the  £".iri  'the  Future  and  Condi- 
tional. 


ORTHOGRAPHY  OF   SOME  VERBS.  97 

Infinitive:  JSsperer,  to  hope. 

Pres.  J'espere,  tu  esperes,  il  esperc,  nous  esperons,  vous  esperez,  ils  es- 
perent.  Imperf.  J'esperais. 

Imper.  Espere,  esperons,  esperez.    Fut.  J'espe'rerai. 
Verbs  in  €ger  retain  the  e,  as :  je  protege. 

3.  In  verbs  ending  in  -ger,  as  :  juger,  to  judge ;  partager,  to  share,  divide, 
the  e  is  retained  in  those  tenses  where  g  is  followed  by  the  vowels  a  or  o,  in 
oider  to  give  the  g  the  same  soft  sound  as  in  all  other  tenses  and  persons. 
Ex.: 

Infinitive:  Manger,  to  eat. 

Pfss.  Je  mange ;  pi.  nous  mangeons.    P.  pr.  Mangeant. 

Impf.  Je  mangeais,  tu  mangeais,  il  mangeait,  nous  mangions,  vous  man- 
giez,  ils  mangeaient. 

Pret.  Je  mangeai,  tu  mangeas,  il  mangea,  nous  mangeames,  vous  man- 
geates,  ils  mangcrent.  Imp.  Mangeons. 

4.  In  verbs  ending  in  -cer,  as  :  commencer,  to  begin,  a  cedilla  must  be 
placed  under  the  c,  when  this  letter  is  followed  by  a  or  o.    Ex. :  — 

I  n  f  i  n  i  t  i  v  e  :  Placer,  to  place. 

Pres.  Je  place,  tu  places,  etc.;  pi.  nous  pla^ons,  etc. 
Impf.  Je  plajais,  tu  plapais,  il  placait,  nous  placions,  vous  placiez,  ila 
placaient.    Imper.  Placons,  etc. 
Pret.  «J-£4>la£td,  tu  plazas,  il  plaf  a,  nous  plaf  umes,  etc. 

5.  Verbs  ending  in  -ayer,  -oyer,  -uyer  change  the  y  into  i,  whenever  the 
letter  y  would  be  immediately  followed  by  an  e  mute.     Such  are :  — 

Payer,  to  pay.  employer,  to  employ. 

effrayer,  to  frighten.  essuyer,  to  wipe. 

Pres.   Je  paz'e,  tu  paz'es,  il  paz'c,  pi.  nous  payons,  vous  payez,  ils  paz'ent, 

Part.  pr.  Payant. 
J'emploie,  tu  emploics,  il  cmploie,  pi.  nous  employons,  vous  em- 

ployez,  ils  emploient.    P.  pr.  Employant. 
J'essuie,  tu  essuies,  etc.;  pi.  ils  c&uient. 
Impf.  Je  payais,  etc.;  pi.  nous  payions,  vous  payiez,  etc. 
J'employais,  etc.;  pi.  nous  employions,  etc. 
J'essuyais,  etc.;  pi.  nous  essuyions,  etc. 
Fut.     Je  paierai,  etc.;  j'emploierai,  etc.;  j'essuierai,  etc. 
Imper.  Paie  —  payez.    Emploie  —  employez.    Essuie  —  essuyez. 

6.  Verbs  which  in  the  Infinitive  end  in  -ier,  as  :  prier,  to  pray ;  crier t  to 
cry,  are  in  some  cases  spelled  with  a  double  ii.    This  takes  place  in  the  1st 

7 


98  XXI.      VINGT  ET  UNIEMB 

and  2d  persons  plural  of  the  Imperfect  of  the  Indicative,  and  of  the  Present 
of  the  Subjunctive :  — 

Infinitive:   Oublier,  to  forget. 

2nd.  Imperf.  pi.  nous  onblzYons,  vous  oubhVez,  ils  oubliaient. 
Subj.  Pres.  pi.  que  nous  prizons,  que  vous  pnYez,  etc. 

VOCABULARY. 

La  vertu,  virtue.  la  farce,  strength. 

la  beaut^  beauty.  le  bruit,  the  noise. 

prtferer,  to  prefer.  la  servante,  the  servant. 

I'amitig,  f.  friendship.  la  chambre,  the  room. 

le  vent,  the  wind.  le  chemin,  the  way,  road. 

la  pluie,  the  rain.  nettoyer,  to  clean. 

la  terre,  the  earth.  la  pierre,  the  stone 

dever,  to  bring  up,  to  educate.  la  cuisiniere,  the  cook. 

sicker,  to  dry.  poss€der,  to  possess. 

bien,  well.  le  jardinier,  the  gardener. 

READING  EXERCISE  21. 

Le  sage  prefere  la  vertu  a  la  beaute.  L'amitid  se  paie  (is  paid) 
par  Famitie.  Les  parents  elevent  leurs  enfants.  II  gelera  cette 
nuit,  II  a  gele.  Elle  achete  un  L'vre.  Les  vents  sechent  la  terre 
trempee  (wet)  par  la  pluie.  Nous  achetons  des  fruits.  Yous 
acheteriez  cette  maison,  si  elle  n'etait  pas  si  chere.  Appelez  Jean. 
Nous  partageons  avec  nos  amis  tout  ce  que  (all  that)  nous  avons. 
Ce  jeune  homme  emploie  bien  son  temps.  Nous  emploierons 
toutes  nos  forces.  Cela  m'effraie.  Ce  bruit  m'a  effraye'.  La  ser- 
vante nettoie  les  chambres.  Les  maitres  aiment  les  ecoliers  qui 
emploient  bien  leur  temps. 

THEME  21. 

1.  The  boy  throws  a  stobe.  2.  You  always  throw  (throw  al- 
ways) stones.  3.  Call  thy  brother.  4.  Call  the  servant.  5.  1 
shall  call  John.  6.  The  cook  buys  eggs.  7.  I  buy  a  horse.  8. 
My  father  will  also  buy  a  horse.  9.  Where  dost  thou  take 1  this 
horse?  10.  I  hope  to  see  you  (vous  voir)  to-morrow.  11.  What 

1  Mener  is  applied  to  what  moves  of  itself, porter,  to  what  is  carried  by  lifting 
from  the  ground, 


ORTHOGRAPHY   OF  SOME  VERBS. 


99 


do  you  hope?  12.  We  hope  nothing.  13.  What  are  you  eating 
there  (la)  ?  14.  The  child  ate  an  apple.  15.  You  ate  walnuts. 
10.  I  placed  the  books  on  the  table.  17.  I  pay  everything  (tout) 
18.  Thou  payest  nothing.  19.  Let  us  well  employ  tour  time. 
20.  My  sons  pay  [for]  what  (ce  que)  they  buy.  21.  My  uncle  pos- 
sesses a  large  garden.  22.  The  gardener  cleans  the  ways,  23. 
Wipe  your  tears  (larmes).  24.  The  dog  frightens  the  children. 
25.  We  wiped  the  table.  26.  I  prefer  coffee  to  tea  (the). 

CONVERSATION. 


Qui  a  appele*  ? 

Avez-vous  nettoye  les  chemins  ? 

Qui  me  protegera  (protect)  f 
Nettoies-tu  la  chambre  ? 
Trouvez-vous  cela  cher  ? 
Que  mangeais-tu? 
Ou  mene-t-on.ce  chcval? 

Crois-tu   (do  you  think)   qu'il 

gele  cette  nuit? 
Aeheterez^vous  du  the   ou  du 

caf£? 

Ou  achetez-vous  cotte  farine  ? 
Qui  a  jete  cette  pierre  ? 
Que  fit  (did  —  do)  un  jour  un 

pere? 


Ton  pere  a  appele. 

Pas  encore;    jo  les  nettoierai  ce 

soir. 

Dieu  te  protegera. 
Je  nettoie  toute  la  maison. 
J'appelle  cela  tres-cher. 
Je  niangcais  des  noix. 
On  le  mene  chez  le  marechal-fer- 

rant  (farrier). 
II  a  deja  gele. 

Je  n'aime  pas  le  th6,  j'acheterai 

du  cafe. 

Chez  le  meunier  (miller). 
Je  crois  que  c'est  Richard. 
II  partagea  ses  biens  entro  ses  trois 

file. 


100  XXTT.      VINGT-DEUXIEME 


XXII.    VINGT-DEUXIEME    LE^ON. 


SECOND   CONJUGATION:  FINIR. 

INDICATIVE. 
PRESENT     TENSE. 

Je  finis,  I  finish.  nous  finissons,  we  finish. 

tu  finis,  thou  finishest.  vous  finissez,  you  finish. 

il  finit,  he  finishes.  ils  finissent,     )  .-,       /?   •  * 

n    «  •«.     7    ^    •  7  n     is  •  f  they  finish. 

elle  finit,  she  finishes.  elles  finissent,  ) 

IMPERFECT. 

Je  finissais,  I  finished  (was  fin-  nous  finissions,  wefini&ed. 
tu  finissais,         efc.       \ishing} .  vous  finissiez,  efc. 

il  finissait,          etc.  ils  finissaient,  efc. 

PRETERITE. 

Je  finis,  I  finished  (did  finish),  nous  finimes,  we  finished. 
tu  finis,        etc.  vous  finites,  cfc. 

il  finit,          etc*  ils  finirent,  e^c. 

FUTURE. 

Je  finirai,  I  shall  finish.  nous  finirons,  we  shall  finish. 

tu  finiras,          etc.  vous  finirez,  6^c. 

il  finira,  etc.  ils  finiront,  ei?c. 

CONDITIONAL. 

Jo  finirais,  I  should  finish.  nous  finirions,  we  should  finish. 

tu  finirais,  efc.  vous  finiiiez,  e^c. 

il  finirait,  etc.  ils  finiraient,  e^c. 

INFINITIVE. 

Fiuir,  to  finish.  de  or  a  finir,  to  finish^ 


I 


SECOND   CONJUGATION.  101 

IMPERATIVE. 

Finis,  finish.  finissons,  lee-  us  finish.  •    '  \  -  '  '• 

fmissez,  finish. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT. 

Que  jo  finisse,  that  I  (may)  fin-  que  nous  {missions,  thai  we  finish. 
quo  tu  finisses,  etc.  [ish.  quo  vous  finissiez,  etc. 

xi'd'il  finisse,  etc.  qu'ils  finissent,  etc. 

IMPERFECT. 

Quo  jo  finisse,  that  I  (might)  que,  n.  finissions,  that  we  (might) 
quo  tu  finisses,  etc.  [finish,  que  vous  finissiez,  etc.  [finish. 
qu'il  finit,  etc.  qu'ils  finissent,  etc. 

PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT.  PAST. 

Finissant,  finishing.  Fini,  f.  finie,  finished. 

en  finissant,  by  finishing. 

COMPOUND  TENSES, 
H         INFINITIVE. 

Avoir  fini,  to  have  finished. 

INDICATIVE. 
COMPOUND   OF   THE   PRESENT. 

J'ai  fini,  I  have  finished. 

tu  as  fini,  thou  hart  finished. 

il  a  fini,  he  has  finished. 

nous  avons  fini,  we  have  finished,  etc. 

COMPOUND  OF  THE  IMPERFECT. 

J'avais  fini,  /  had  finished,  etc. 

COMPOUND  OF  THE  PRETERITE. 

J'ous  fini,  I  had  finished,  etc. 

COMPOUND    OF   THE    FUTURE. 

J'aurai  fini,  I  shatt  have  finished,  etc. 


102  XXII.      V1NGT-DEUXIEME  LEQON.. 

CONDITIONAL. 

•J,'*CTais  frji,  I  !  sllould  have  finished,  etc. 
J'eusse  fim,   ) 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
COMPOUND   OF   THE   PRESENT. 

Que  j'aie  fini,  that  I  (may)  have  finished,  etc. 

COMPOUND   OP   THE    IMPERFECT. 

Que  j'eusse  fini,  that  I  (might)  have  finished,  etc* 

PARTICIPLE. 

Ayant  fini,  having  finished,  etc. 

Conjugate  in  the  same  manner :  bat ir,  to  build ;  choisir,  to  choose ;  rempfir, 
to  fill,  etc. 

EEM.  1.  The  verb  hair,  to  hate,  loses  in  the  Present  and  Imperative  sin- 
gular its  diaeresis.  Otherwise  it  is  quite  regular  and  retains  the  two  dots. 

Pres.  Je  hais,  tu  hais,  il  hait,  nous  ha'issons,  vous  haissez,  etc. 

Imper.  Hais;  pi.  haissons,  haissez.     Pret.  Je  hais,  I  hated. 

HEM.  2.  The  verbjtfewnr,  to  flourish,  has  a  second  form  for  the  Imperfect 
tense :  Jefivrissais ;  and  also  a  second  for  the  Part,  present :  fiorissant,  e,  — 
both  of  which  are  only  used  in  a  figurative  sense,  as  :  une  ville  fiorissante, 
etc. 

VOCABULARY. 

Nourrir,  to  feed,  nourish.  saisir,  to  seize. 

che'ir,  to  obey.  rendre,  to  render,  return. 

remplir,  to  fill,  fulfil.  la  tdche,  the  task. 

bdtir,  to  build.  la  pomme  de  terre,  the  potato. 

embettir,  to  embellish.  I'occasion,  f.  the  opportunity. 

punir,  to  punish.  salir,  to  soil. 

le  vice,  vke.  le  palais,  the  palace. 

le  devoir,  the  duty.  choisir,  to  choose. 

lafiatterie,  flattery.  la  couleur,  the  color. 

IP.  menteur,  the  liar. 

READING  EXERCISE  22. 

Le  pain  nourrit  les  hommss.  Les  bons  enfants  obeissent  k  leurs 
parents  et  &  leurs  maitres.  E-emplis  ce  verre.  Remplissez  ces  ver- 
res.  Qui  a  rempli  les  boutcilles?  Homulus  et  llemus  batirent 


SECOND   CONJUGATION.  105 

la  ville  de  Rome,  Fan  753  avant  Jesus-Christ.  Lcs  fleurs  embel- 
lissent  les  jardins  et  les  prairies.  On  punira  les  enfants  qui  n'obeis- 
sent  pas  a  leur  maitre.  J'espere  que  vous  aurez  puni  ce  mdchant 
ga^on.  Le  maitre  a  puni  le  petit  menteur.  Notre  voisin  batit  uno 
graude  maison.  Nos  voisins  batissent  de  grandes  maisons.  Jo 
batirais  aussi,  si  j'avais  plus  d'argent.  Je  bais  le  vice,  j'aimerai 
toujours  la  vertu.  Hai'ssez  le  vice,  il  vous  rend  malbeureux.  J'ai 
ton  jours  bai'  le  vice.  Nous  bai'ssions  la  flatterie.  Ne  salissez  pas 
vos  habits.  Les  sciences  nourrissent  la  jeunesse  et  rejouissent  la 
vieillesse. 

THEME  22. 

1.  I  finish  my  exercise.  2.  Tbe  pupils  finish  their  translations. 
3.  We  seize  the  opportunity.  4.  We  seized  the  opportunity.  5. 
Why  have  you  not  seized  the  good  opportunity  ?  6.  The  chil- 
dren soil  their  clothes.  7.  Bread  and  pofatoes  nourish  a  great 
many  men.  8.  Do  not  punish  Henry ;  he  has  been  ill.  9.  Fill 
the  glasses.  10.  We  should  fill  the  bottles,  if  we  had  wine  enough. " 
11.  The  king  builds  a  new  palace.  12.  Will  you  build  a  house? 
13.  I  should  build  a  large  house,  if  I  were  rich.  14.  Here  are 
two  colors  :  choose.  15.  Which  (laquelle)  will  you  choose  ?  16.  I 
shall  choose  the  blue.  17.  If  I  had  to  (a)  choose,  I  should  choose 
the  green  color.  18.  Obey  your  (a  vos)  parents  and  (your)  mas- 
ters. 19.  I  hate  nobody.  20.  Hate  nobody.  21.  We  hate  vice. 
22.  We  have  always  hated  vice. 

CONVERSATION. 

Voici  deux  couteaux :  un  grand  Je  choisirai  le  petit  qui  cst  le  plus 

et  un  petit.     Lequel  (which)       joli. 

choisirez-vous  ? 
Get    homme    remplit-il  ses  de-  Pas  toujours. 

voirs? 
Avez-vous  rempli  toutes  les  bou-  Non,  Monsieur,  je  n'avais  pas  as< 

teilles  ?  sez  de  vin  pour  les  remplir. 

Qui  batit  cette  bello  maison?         (Test  mon  voisin  qui  la  batit. 


104  XXII.      VINGT-DEUXIEME 

Ne  batirez-vous  pas  aussi  ?  Oui,  je  batirai  aussi  Tannde  pro 

chaine  (next). 
Pourquoi  ne  batissez-vous  pas  a  Je  batirais  encore  cette  amide,  si 

present  (now}**  j'avais  assez  d'argent. 

Qui  a  sali  ce  livre  ?  C'est  Martin. 

Comment  as-tu  fait  (done)  cela  ?  La  plume  est  tombee  dessus  (up- 
on it). 

Avez-vous  fini  votre  theme  ?          Nous  finirons  notre  theme  cc  soir. 
Qui  a  bad  la  ville  de  Rome  ?         Romulus  et  Remus. 
Qui  a  puni  mon  fils  ?  Le  maitre  de  musique. 

Ne  trouvez-vous  pas  quo  j'ai  em-  Certainement,  ce  jet  d'eau  (fowl- 

belli  mon  jardin  ?  tain)  embellit  beaucoup  votra 

jardin. 

Ilai'ssez-vous  le  vice  ?  Oui,  je  hais  tous  les  vices. 

Pourquoi  hai'ssez-vous-votre  yoi-  Je  ne  le  (him)  hais  pas ;  je^hais 

sin  ?  seulement  ses  flatteries. 


BEADING  LESSON. 
LE   MOINEAU    ET   SES   PETITS. 

Un  moineau  avait  place*  son  nid  dans  le  trou  d'un  mur.  E 
elevait  tranquillement  sa  famille.  II  aurait  ete  bien  hcureux,  si  ses 
petits  eussent  voulu  1'ecouter :  mais  a  chaque  instant  ils  yenaient 
sur  le  bord  du  nid.  Le  pauvre  oiseau  tremblait  dans  la  crainte  do 
los  voir  tomber.  II  leur  disait  de  rester  dans  le  fond  du  nid,  mais 
ils  ne  le  voulaient  point  (would  not  do  so.) 

Un  jour  qu'il  etait  sorti,  ils  proSterent  de  son  absence  et  s'avan- 
eerent  tant  qu'ils  tomberent  k  terre.  Ils  n'avaient  pas  encore  de 
plumes  aux  ailes ;  ainsi  ils  ne  purent  (could  not)  se  sauver.  Un 
gros  chat,  qui  passait  par-la,  les  vit  (saw  them)]  il  n'avait  pas  dine, 
il  les  saisit,  et  les  mangea  sur-le-champ.  C'est  ainsi  qu'ils  furont 
punis  dc  (for)  leur  desob&ssance. 


THIRD   CONJUGATION.  105 

Le  moinwu,  the  sparrow.  Tester,  to  remain. 

les  petits,  the  young  ones.  lefond,  the  bottom. 

le  nid,  the  nest.  tant,  so  much. 

le  iron,  the  hole.  I'aile,  f.  the  wing. 

le  mur,  the  wall.  sauver,  to  save ;  se — ,  to  fly  away, 

tranquittement,  quietly.  passer,  to  pass  by. 

€coutert  to  listen,  obey.  par-la,  there. 

I'instant,  m.  the  moment.  diner,  to  dine. 

ils  venaient,  they  came.  sur-le-champ,  at  once,  immediate  1 7. 

la  ci'ainte,  the  fear.  la  d&obtfissance,  disobedience. 


XXIII.    VINGT-TROISIEME    LEgON, 


THIRD   CONJUGATION:    VENDEE. 

INDICATIVE. 
\      PRESENT   TENSE. 

Je  vends,  I  sell.  nous  vendons,  we  sett. 

tu  vends,  thou  sellest.  vous  vendez,  you  sett. 

il  vend,  he  sells.  ils  vendent,      ) 

elle  (on)  vend,  she  (one)  sells,  elles  vendent,  j     e^ 

IMPERFECT. 

Je  vcndais,  Isold  (ivas  selling),  nous  vendions,  we  sold. 
tu  vendais,  thou  soldst,  vous  vendiez,  you  sold. 

il  vendait,  he  sold.  ils  vendaient,  they  sold. 

PRETERITE. 

Je  vendis,  I  sold  (did  sell).         nous  vendimes,  we  sold. 
tu  vendis,     etc.  vous  vendites,      etc. 

il  veiidit,      etc.  ils  vendirent,        etc. 


106  XXIII.      V1NGT-TROISIEME 


FUTURE. 

Je  vendrai,  I  shall  sell.  nous  vendrons,  we  shall  sell. 

tu  vendras,          etc.  vous  vendrez,          etc. 

il  vendra,  etc.  ils  vendront,  etc. 

CONDITIONAL. 

.Je  vcndrais,  I  should  sell.  nous  vendrions,  we  should  sell. 

tu  vendrais,          etc.  vous  vendriez,  etc. 

il  vendrait,  etc.  ils  vcndraicnt,  etc. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Vends,  sell.  vendons,  let  us  sell. 

vendez,  sell. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
PRESENT. 

Que  je  vende,  that  I  (may)  sell,  que  n.  vendions,  that  we(rnay)seU> 
que  tu  vendes,  etc.  que  vous  vendiez,  etc. 

qu'il  vende,  etc.  qu'ils  vendent,  etc. 

IMPERFECT. 

Que  je  vendisse,  that  Imight  sell,  que  nous  vcndissions. 
que  tu  vendisses,  etc.          que  vous  vendissiez. 

qu'il  vendit,  etc.          qu'ils  vendissent. 

PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT.  PAST. 

Vendant,  selling.  Yendu,  f.  vcndue,  sold. 

en  vendant,  by  selling. 

COMPOUND  TENSES. 
INFINITIVE.  i 

Avoir  vendu,  to  have  sold. 

INDICATIVE. 
COMPOUND   OF   THE   PRESENT. 

J'ai  vendu,  /  have  sold. 

tu  as  vendu,  thou  hast  sold. 

il  a  vendu,  he  has  sold. 

nous  avons  vendu,  we  have  sold,  etc. 


THIRD    CONJUGATION.  107 

COMPOUND    OF    THF    I3IPERFECT. 

J'avais  vendu,  /  had  sold,  etc.       % 

COMPOUND   OF   THE   PRETERITE. 

•J'eus  vendu,  I  had  sold,  etc. 

COMPOUND    OF   THE   FUTURE. 

•J'aurai  vendu,  /  shall  have  sold,  etc. 

CONDITIONAL. 

J'aurais  vendu, 
^T'eusse  vendu, 

PARTICIPLE.  ^ 

Ayant  vendu,  having  sold. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
COMPOUND   OF   THE   PRESENT. 

Que  j'aie  vendu,  that  I  (may)  have  sold,  dc. 

COMPOUND   OF   THE   IMPERFECT. 

Que  j'eusse  vendu,  that  I  (might)  have  sold,  etc. 

Conjugate  after  this  model :  perdre,  to  lose ;  attendre,  to  wait,  to  expect ; 
rtfpondre,  to  answer,  etc. 

HEM.  1.  The  verb  battre,  to  beat,  is  regularly  conjugated,  except  that  in 
the  singular  of  the  Present  Indicative  and  in  the  Imperative  it  loses  one  t. 

Pres.  Je  bats,  tu  bats,  il  bat,  nous  battons,  vous  battez,  etc.  Imp.  bats, 
Part,  battu. 

REM.  2.  The  verb  rompre^  to  break,  is  conjugated  in  the  Pres.  Indicative 
as  follows : 

Je  romps,  tu  romps,  il  rompt,  nous  rompons,  etc.      (All  the  rest  is  regular.) 

REM.  3.  The  verb  rire,  to  laugh,  is  of  the  3d  conjugation :  Pres.  Je  m, 
til  rist  il  rit,  nous  rions,  etc.  But  the  Part,  past  is  ri,  and  the  Pret.  Je  ris,  tu 
ris,  il  rit,  nous  rimes f  vous  rites,  Us  rirent.  Fut.  Je  rirai,  etc. 

REM.  4.  Conclure,  to  conclude,  is  regular,  as :  Pres.  Je  conclus,  tu  con' 
dus,  il  conclut,  nous  concluons,  etc.  Fut.  Je  conclurai.  Except  that  in  the 
JPrcterite,  it  has  Je  conclus  (notje  concluis). 


103  XXIIL      V1NGT-TEOI3IEME 

YOCABULARY. 

La  lague,  the  ring.  droit,  e,  right. 

rfyandre,  to  spread,  to  shed.  les  armes,  the  arms. 

le  bruit,  the  report,  the  noise.  la  sagesse,  "wisdom. 

la  mort,  death.  la  Grece,  Greece. 

defendre,  to  forbid,  to  defend.  I'honneur,  m.  the  honor. 

entendre,  to  hear.  perdre,  to  lose. 

fumcr,  to  smoke.  attendre,  to  wait  for,  expect. 

repondre,  to  answer.  vnpeu,  a  little. 

le  sang,  the  hlood.  le  tonnerre,  the  thunder. 

I'ceil,  the  eye.  le  travail,  the  work. 

gauche,  left,  prendre,  to  take.  de'sirer,  to  wish. 

HEADING  EXERCISE  23. 

J'ai  vcndu  mon  cheval.  Nous  avons  vendu  nos  clievaux.  Je 
pcrdis  hier  ma  bourse.  Yous  perdites  votre  bague.  La  vieille 
femme  ycndait  des  cerises.  Nous  vendions  du  fromage  et  du  beurre. 
On  a  repandu  le  bruit  de  la  mort  du  roi.  II  est  defendu  de  fumer 
ici.  Qui  defend  cela  ?  Entendez-vous  le  bruit  ?  Qui  a  battu  mon 
cliien?  II  bat  son  cheval.  Repondez-moi  (me),  mon  fils.  Ke- 
ponds  h,  ton  maitre.  Je  repondis  quo  j'etais  malade.  Ce  tyran 
cruel  a  repandu  beaucoup  de  sang  innocent.  Jules  a  deja  perdu 
son  ceil  gauche,  il  pcrdra  aussi  son  ceil  droit.  Tu  perds  ton  argent. 
Nous  perdons  tout  notre  temps.  Le  bataillon  prit  les  armes  et  de- 
fendit  la  ville.  Socrate  repandit  beaucoup  de  sagesse  a  Athenes  et 
dans  toute  la  Grece.  Pourquoi  riez-vous?  Je  ne  ris  pas.  Je  n'ai 
pas  ri. 

THEME  23. 

1.  I  sell  my  dogs.  2.  My  friend  sells  Ms  horses.  3.  We  sell 
our  houses.  4.  I  defend  my  honor.  5.  Do  you  defend  your 
friends  ?  6.  Thou  losest  thy  time.  7.  You  lose  your  time.  8.  I 
lost  my  money.  9.  My  brother  has  lost  his  cane.  10.  He  will 
lose  everything.  11.  The  pupils  will  lose  their  places.  12.  We 
expect  a  letter  from  our  grandfather.  13.  Do  you  also  expect  a 
letter?  14.  No,  sir,  I  expect  nothing.  15.  James  (Jacques)  and 
William  expect  (a)  good  news.  -16.  We  have  waited  an  hour. 


THIRD   CONJUGATION. 


109 


17.  Wait  a  little.  18.  Why  don't  you  wait?  19.  Do  you  heat 
the  music?  20.  I  hear  nothing.  21.  I  did  not  hear  the  thunder, 
22.  Have  you  answered  (to)  her  letter?  23.  I  have  not  yet  an- 
swered. 24.  I  shall  answer  to-morrow.  25.  Answer  me  (moi). 
26.  When  (quand)  I  heard  the  thunder,  I  came  down  fromf  tho 
mountain.  27.  The  poor  children  have  lost  their  father.  28. 
They  will  lose  also  their  mother  ;  she  is  very  ill.  29.  Do  not  break 
my  stick. 

CONVERSATION.       • 


Qui  a  perdu  cctte  bourse  ? 

A-t-il  aussi  perdu  de  F  argent  ? 
Pourquoi     perdez-vous     votre 

temps  a  jouer  ? 

A  quoi  (at  what)  jouez-vous  ? 
Qui  defend  les  brebis  (sheep)  ? 
As-tu  fini  ton  travail  ? 
Ton  frere  a-t-il  fini  sa  version  ? 

Avez-vous  cntcndu  le  bruit  du 

vent  (wind)  ? 
Qui  a  defendu  de  manger  de 

ces  pommcs? 
Comment  etcs-vous  descend u  ? 


Je  crois  (/  think)  que  Jules  a 
perdu  une  bourse. 

Jc  crois  qu'il  a  perdu  deux  francs. 

Nous  n'avons  rien  a  faire  (to  do), 
nous  avons  fini  notre  tache. 

Nous  battons  le  cerceau  (hoop). 

Le  chien  du  berger  (shepherd). 

Oui,  M1 — ,  mon  travail  est  fini. 

Jo  ne  cro's  pas;  il  la  (it)  finira 
demain. 

Lo  vent  est  terrible. 

Notre  mere  1'a  defendu  ce  matin. 

Je   suis  descendu  par-  Tescaher 

(stairs) . 
Pourquoi      salissez-vous      vos     Nous  nettoyons  la  cage  de   nos 

mains  ?  oiseaux. 

Pourquoi  ne   punit-on   pas   ce     II  sera  puni  apres  la  le£on. 

mechant  enfant. 

Qui  (whom)  attendez-vous  ?         J'attcnds  Monsieur  le  profcsseur. 
Attcndicz-vousquclvp.'un(s0??2e     J'attendais  mon  cousin  de  Paris. 
one)  ? 

|  Jo  suis  descendu  do. 


110  XXIV.      7INGT-QUATRIEME 

READING  LESSON. 
LE     ROI     DE     PERSE. 

[Jn  roi  de  Perse  certain  jour 

Chassait  avec  toute  sa  cour ; 

II  cut  soif,  mais  dans  cette  plaine 

On  ne  trouvait  point  de  fontaine, 

Pres  de  Ih  seulement  etait  un  grand  jardin 

Rempli  de  beaux  cedrats,  d'orangcs,  de  raisins : 

"A  Dieu  ne  plaise  que  j'en  mange  I" 

Dit  le  roi ;  "  ce  jardin  courrait  trop  de  danger : 

Si  je  me  permettais  d'y  cueillir  une  orange, 

Mes  visirs  aussitot  mangeraient  le  verger." 

Certain  jour,  one  day.  le  ctfdrat,  the  lemon. 

chasser,  to  go  a  hunting.  a  Dieu  ne  plaise,  God  forbid. 

la  soif,  thirst.  courrait,  would  run. 

seulement,  only.  permettre,  to  permit. 

la  plaine,  the  plain.  cueillir,  to  gather,    y,  there. 

la  fontaine,  fountain,  spring.  aussitot,  immediately. 

pres  de  la,  in  the  neighborhood.  le  verger,  the  orchard. 


XXIV.    VINGT-QUATRIEME    LEgON. 


DISJUNCTIVE  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS.* 

With  personal  pronouns  it  must  be  observed  whether  they  are  intimately 
connected  with  or  governed  by  a  verb,  as  :  I  speak,  we  go,  I  give  you,  etc.;  if 
this  be  the  case,  they  are  conjunctive  (pronoms  conjoints) ;  or  if  they  are  em- 
ployed by  themselves  or  with  a  preposition;  in  this  case  they  are  termed  dis* 
junciive  (pronoms  disjoints).  We  begin  with  the  latter. 

1.  The  disjunctive  personal  pronouns  are:  moi  (I  or  me),  toi 
(thou  or  thee),  ncus  (we  or  us),  vous,  (you),  lid  (he  or  him),  elk 
(she  or  lier),  ev&  (they  or  them,  masculine),  ellcs  (tliey  or  them, 

*  See  P.  n,  L.  ix, 


DISJUNCTIVE  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS.  Ill 

feminine),  «md  soi  (self,  one's  self).  These  pronouns,  it  will  be 
perceived,  do  not  change  their  form  to  indicate  case,  the  nominative 
and  objective  being  the  same. 

Ex. :  Qui  a  dlt  cela  ?        Moi,  lui,  elle,  nous,  etc. 

Who  has  said  this  ?    I,  he,  she,  we,  etc. 

C'esl  pour  moi,  pour  toi,  pour  elle,  etc. 

That  is  for  me,  for  thce,  for  her,  etc. 

Je  parle  de  toi,  de  vous,  d'elles,  d'eux,  etc. 

I  speak  of  thee,  of  you,  of  them,  of  them,  etc. 

Nous  pensons  a  lui,  a  vous,  a  eux,  etc. 

We  think  of  him,  of  you,  of  them,  etc. 

2.  All  these  disjunctive  pronouns  may  take  the  word  -meme,  pi.  -rnemen, 
whenever  in  English  the  word  self  is  joined  to  a  pronoun.    Ex. :  — 

S.  moi-meme,  (I)  myself.  PI.  nous-memes,  ourselves. 

toi-meme,  thyself.  vous-memes,  yourselves. 

lui-mcme,  himself.  eux-memes,  [  themsclveg. 

elle-nieme,  herself.  elles-memes, ) 

soi-meme,  one's  self. 

3.  When  a  stress  is  laid  upon  personal  pronouns,  they  are  often  preced- 
ed by  c'est,  c'e'tait,  etc.,  as  in  English :  — 

S.  c'est  moi,  it  is  I.  PL  c'est  nous,  it  is  we. 

c'est  toi,  it  is  thou.  c'est  vous,  it  is  you. 

c'est  lui,  it  is  he.  ce  sont  eux,  )  it  .g  ^ 

c'est  elle,  it  is  she.  ce  sont  elles,  3 

The  verb  ctre  following  ce  is  put  in  the  plural  only  when  the  pronoun  or 
noun  which  follows  that  verb  is  in  the  third  person  plural :  c'e'taient  mes  amis 
ce  sont  eux,  but,  c'est  nous. 

4.  Soi  is  only  used  of  mankind  in  a  general  sense,  and  of  inanimate  ob- 
jects in  the  singular.    Ex. :  — 

Doit-on  toujours  penser  a  soi,  ought  one  always  to  think  of  one's  self7 

VOCABULARY. 

Inconstant,  inconstant.  la  pelote,  tho  ball. 

ressembler,  to  resemble.  venez,  come. 

envoyer,  to  send.  casser,  to  break. 

demeurer,  to  live.  sorti,  gone  out. 

la  corbeille,  the  basket.  age",  old. 

I'aimant,  m.  the  loadstone.  ni  —  ni,  neither,  nor. 
attirer,  to  attract. 


112  XXI Y.     VINGT-QUATRIEME  LEgON. 

READING  EXERCISE  24. 

Qui  dit  (says)  cela  ?  Moi,  —  lui,  —  clle,  —  cux-memes,  —  elles- 
memes.  Pcnscs-tu  a  inoi  ?  Jc  pense  a  toi.  Jo  pense  a  vous,  —  a  clles, 
—  a  eux.  Jc  n'ai  pas  pense  a  toi,  nion  pauvre  enfant.  L'hommo 
inconstant  ne  resscmble  jamais  a  lui-meme.  Nous  nous  souvenons 
(ive  remember')  de  vous,  —  de  lui,  —  d'elles,  —  d'eux.  Envoyez- 
moi  de  1'argent.  Sans  moi,  elle  serait  tombee.  Je  suis  plus  grand 
quo  toi,  —  quo  lui,  —  qu'clle.  Qui  a  ete  ici,  lui  ou  elle  ?  Venez 
avec  moi,  —  avec  nous.  Joue  avec  lui.  Joucz  avee  elles.  On 
parle  de  nous.  Tu  paries  de  lui  et  d'ello.  Nous  parlons  souvent 
(often)  de  vous.  Je  defends  mon  honneur  moi-nieme.  L'aimant 
attire  le  fer  a  soi.  Nous  nous  moquons  (we  mock  at)  d'eux.  Ah  ! 
vous  vous  moquez  de  nous ! 

THEME  24. 

1.  My  brother  and  I  (we)  have  heard  the  noise.  2.  Who  will 
have  the  ball,  thouorhe?  3.  Who  has  broken  the  stick?  4.  Not 
I !  5.  You  and  he,  (you)  were  not  attentive.  6.  She  and  Emily 
have  f  gone  out.  7.  Who  hast  gone  out  with  them  ?  8.  Come  with  me. 
9.  Come  to  our  house  (cliez  nous) .  10.  Who  speaks  of  me  ?  11. 
I  speak  of  you.  12.  You  speak  of  her  and  of  her  sister.  13.  For 
whom  is  the  medicine?  14.  Ii-(elle)  is  for  yourself.  15.  Does 
she  live  with  you?  16.  She  lives  with  us.  17.  He  is  older  than 
I.  18.  I  think  of  (a)  you.  19.  You  do  not  think  of  me.  20. 
You  always*  think  of  yourself.  21.  One  must  not  (il  ne  faut 
pas)  always  think  -of  one's  self.  22.  Have  you  brought  the  book 
yourself?  23.  Yes,  I  myself.  24.  Does  she  play  with  us  ?  25. 
She  plays  with  them  (in.)  2G.  Is  it  himself?  27.  Yes,  it  is  him- 
self. 28.  It  is  I ;  it  is  not  he. 

CONVERSATION. 

Q ui  a  dit  cela  ?  Moi.  —  Lui.  —  Elle. 

Qui  vient  la  ?  C'cst  nous, 

Pensez-vous  a  vos  amis  ?  Je  pense  souvent  a  eux. 

*  In  French,  the  adverb  usually  follows  the  verb,   f  sont    J  cst. 


DISJUNCTIVE   PERSONAL   PRONOUNS. 


113 


Est-elle  tombee  ? 

Pour  qui  sont  ces  bottes  ? 

A  qui  pensez-vous  ? 

DQ  qui  parle-t-on  ? 

Qui  a  apporte  ccttc  corbeille  ? 

Qui  a  fait  cela  ? 

Est-elle  arrivee  seule  ? 

Qui    a    ecrit    (written)    cetto 

lettre  ? 

Que  fait  1'aimant  ? 
Qui  a  battu  cet  enfant  ? 
Qui  est  venu  avec  toi  ? 
Ou  demeure-t-il  ? 
Est-ce  vous  qui  avez  perdu  cet 

argent  ? 


Hcureusement    non !    rnaig    sans 

moi  elle  serait  tombee. 
Elles  son£  pour  moi. 
Je  pense  a  vous  et  a  votre  mere. 
On  parle  d'eux,  —  d'clles. 
Ma  soeur  elle-meme. 
Ni  lui,  ni  elle,  ni  nous,  ni  eux. 
Non,  elle  est  aTrivee  avec  moi. 
Mon  pere  lui-meme. 

II  attire  le  fer  a  soi. 
Ce  n'est  pas  moi,  c'est  Leopold. 
Mon  ami  Jules. 
II  demeure  chez  son  oncle. 
Jtfon,  ce  n'est  pas  moi,  c'est  ma 
cousine  Emilie. 


READING  LESSON". 
LE  ROSIER.      C Tfte  rose-bush.) 

11  Qui  veut  (will)  me  donner  un  petit  arbre  pour  mon  jardin  ?" 
disait  Frederic  a  ses  freres  et  a  sa  soeur. 

Legar  "pere  leur  (them)  avait  donne  a  chacun  un  petit  coin  do  terra 
a  planter. 

<{  Ce  n'est  pas  moi !  "  dit  Auguste.  —  "  Ni  moi !  "  s'ecria  Louis. 
—  "Go  sera  moi !  "  dit  la  bonne  Charlotte ;  "  do  quelle  e.specc  lo 
(it)  veux-tu?" 

"Je  voudrais  (I  should  like)  avoir  un  rosier,"  rcpondit  Fi  > 
deric  ;  *'  le  mien  est  tout  jauni." 

"  C'est  bon,"  rdpliqua  Charlotte.  Puis  elle  prit  (then  she  took) 
une  pelle  et  alia  (went)  le  retirer  de  terre. 

"  Que  vois-je  (what  do  I  see)  ?"  dit  Frederic,  "  tu  ra'en  as  toi- 
m&me^que  (only)  deux,  et  encore  (besides)  il  y  en  a  un  si  petit  I 
Du  moins  no  me  donne  pas  le  plus  grand." 


114  XXV.      TINGT-CINQUIEME 

"Non,  non  !  "  s'ecria  sa  soeur,  "  il  pourraib  encore  (could  again) 
se  secher ;  je  puis  jouir  du  plaisir  de  le  voir  fleurir  dans  ton  jardin.'1 

(To  be  continued,) 

Chacun,  e,  each.  puis,  then. 

un  petit  coin  de  terre,  a  corner  of  Land,  la  pelle,  the  spade. 

nf  moi,  nor  I  either.  retirer,  to  take  out. 

sVcner,  to  call  out,  to  cry.  du  moins,  at  least. 

Vespece,  f.  the  sort,  kind.  se'cher,  to  dry. 

le  mien,  mine,     tout,  quite.  se  se'cher,  to  get  dry,  to  wither. 

jauni,  e,  yellow,  withered.  jepuis,  I  can  (from  pouvoir). 

rtpliquer,  to  reply.  jouir,  to  enjoy,    voir,  to  see. 


XXV.     VINGT-CINQUIEME    LEgON 


CONJUNCTIVE  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 

These  are ^'0  (I),  nous  (we),  tu  (thou),  vous  (you),  il  (he),  plu. 
ils  (they,  m.),  elk  (she),  plu.  elles  (they,  f.).* 

Unlike  the  disjunctive  personal  pronouns,  these,  except  vous  and 
nous,  vary  to  express  different  cases. 

Je  has  me  when  used  either  as  the  direct  or  indirect  object  of  the 
verb  :  tu  has  te  in  the  same  cases  - 

Of  him,  of  her,  of  them,  of  it  (m.  or  f.),  are  each  represented  by 
the  pronoun  en,  generally  referring  to  things :  to  him,  to  her,  each 
by  lid:  to  them  (m.  or  f.),  by  leur. 

The  objective  case  (direct  object)  of  il,  is  le  (him) ,  and  of  eUet  ifl 
la,  (her):  les  (them)  is  the  obj.  plu.  of  both  genders. 

POSITION  OF  CONJUNCTIVE  PRONOUNS. 

GENERA.L  RULE.  Conjunctive  pronouns  precede  the  verb  except 
in  the  Imperative  affirmative.  In  the  interrogative  form  the  subject 
comes  after  the  verb. 

*  For  on,  of  which  se  is  used  as  the  object  and  sot  as  the  disjunctive,  see  Part  IL 
L.  xii. 


O9NJUNCTIVE  PERSONAL   PRONOUNS.  115 

SPECIAL   RULES. 
A.    WITH   ONE   PRONOUN. 

1.  The  nominative  cases  je,  tu,  il,  elle,  nous,  vous,  Us,  or  elles, 
usually  precede  the  verb  of  which  they  are  the  subject :  in  an  inter- 
rogative sentence,  however,  they  are  placed  immediately  after  the 
verb.     Ex. :  — 

Je  pense,  I  think.  nous  parlons,  we  speak. 

tu  esper&if  thou  hopest.  vous  jouez,  you  play. 

Interrogative: 

Finis-tUy  dost  thou  finish  ? 
Vient-elle,  does  she  come  ? 

2.  The  dtfect  and  indirect  objects  are  placed  immediately  before 
the  verb  in  ft  simple  tense,  and  before  the  auxiliary  in  a  compound 
one.     Ex. :  — 

Tu  me  dis,  you  tell  me. 

Je  vous  donne,  I  give  you. 

Elle  m'a  repondu,  she  has  answered  me. 

Charles  nous  a  dit,  Charles  has  told  us. 

3.  If  the  sentence  is  negative,  ne  is  put  directly  after  the  subject, 
before  the  governed  pronoun,  as  : 

Je  ne  vous  donne  past  I  do  not  give  you. 

Vous  ne  les  avez  pas  vus,  you  have  not  seen  them. 

ne  m'a  pas  repondu,  she  has  not  answered  me. 
Charles  ne  nous  avail  pas  dit,  Charles  had  not  told  us. 

4.  In  the  interrogative  form,  the  object  begins  the  sentence,  then 
follows  the  verb  with  its  subject.     If  the  question  is  a  negative  one, 
ne  begins  the  sentence  : 

Me  connaissez-vous,  do  you  know  me  ?         % 

Me  Udme-t-il,  does  he  blame  me  ? 

Les  vois-tu,  do  you  see  them  ? 

Vous  a-t-il  repondu,  has  he  answered  you  ? 

Ne  vous  a-t-il  pas  repondu,  has  he  not  answered  you? 

6.  When  the  verb  is  in  the  Imperative  affirmative,  the  governed 
pronouns  are  put  after  it,  in  French  as  in  English.     In  this  case  me 


116  XXV.      YINGT-CINQUIEME  LEgON. 

and  te  are  changed  into  moi  and  toi  for  the  direct  and  indirect 
objects.     Ex. :  — 

Donncz-moi,  give  me.  Apportez-lui,  bring  (to)  him. 

Manyez-les,  eat  them.  Parlez-leur,  speak  to  them. 

G.    But  when  the  Imperative  is  negative,  the  governed  pronoun 
precedes  the  verb.     Ex.  :  — 

Ne  me  donnezpas,  do  not  give  me. 
Ne  lui  apportez  pas,  do  not  bring  him. 
Ne  les  mangez  pas,  do  not  eat  them. 
Ne  leur  parlez  pas,  do  not  speak  to  them. 

B.    WITH   TWO   PRONOUNS. 

1.  When  a  verb,  which  is  not  in  the   Imperative   affirmative, 
governs  two  pronouns,  they  are  both  placed  immediately  before  the 
verb,  so  that  the  indirect  object  comes  first,  and  the  direct  follows. 
Ex.:  — 

Je  te  le  donne,  I  give  it  to  thee  (you). 

Vous  I'apporte-t-ette,  does  she  bring  it  ,  to ,  yon  ? 

Ne  nous  l'apportera-t-il  pas,  will  he  not  bring  it  to  us  ? 

On  vous  le  dira,  they  will  tell  (it)  yon. 

On  ne  vous  le  dira  pas,  they  will  not  tell  (it  to)  you. 

2.  An  exception  to  the  foregoing  rule  are  the  two  indirect  objects, 
lui  (to  him,  to  her),  and  leur  (to  them),  which  always  follow  the 
other  governed  pronoun.     Ex.  :  — 

Je  le  lui  donne,  I  give  it  to  him  or  her. 

Je  ne  le  lui  donne  pas,  I  do  not  give  it  him. 

La  lui  donne-t-elle,  does  she  give  it  him  ? 

La  leur  donnera-t-il,  will  he  give  it  to  them1? 

Je  ne  la  leur  ai  pas  donne',  I  have  not  given  it  to  them. 

Ne  le  lui  donnezpas,  do  not  give  it  him. 

Pourquoi  ne  la  leur  pretez-vous  pas,  why  do  you  not  lend  it  to  them  ? 

3.  Of  tw:>  personal  pronouns  governed  by  the  Imperative  affimia- 
live  the  indirect  object  always  stands  last : 

Donnez-le-moi,  give  it  me. 

Apportez-les-lui  (leur)t  bring  them  to  him  (to  them). 

4.  If  the  Imperative  is  negative,  both  of  them  precede  the  verb 


CONJUNCTIVE   PERSONAL   PRONOUNS.  117 

according  to  §  6,  and  lid  and  leur  follow  the  direct  object,  according 
toB,  §2.     Ex.:  — 

Ne  me  le  donnez  pas,  do  not  give  it  me. 

Ne  la  lui  apportez  pas,  do  not  bring  it  to  him. 

Ne  les  leur  envoyez  pas,  do  not  send  them  to  them. 

VOCABULARY. 

Pardonner  (a),*  to  pardon.  tattler,  to  cut,  mend. 

prefer  (a),  to  lend.  loner,  to  praise;  to  let. 

r&ompcnser,  to  reward.  accompagner,  to  accompany. 

corriger,  to  correct.  je  promets,  I  promise. 

e'couter,  to  listen  to.  l'histoire,f.  history. 

la  vfrite',  the  truth.  volontiers,  willingly. 

READING  EXERCISE  25. 

Jo  vous  cntends.  II  me  pardonnera.  Elle  m'a  pardonne.  Al- 
fred m'a  prete  un  livre  aniusant.  Pretez-moi  votre  livre.  Je  vous 
le  pretcrai.  II  mo  le  donne.  Tu  me  Fas  donne.  Elle  me  les  don- 
nerait,  si  elle  les  avait  encore.  Vous  a-t-il  pardonne  ?  Lui  as-tu 
dit  (told)  ccla  ?  Jo  le  lui  ai  dit.  Leur  a-t-on  repondu  ?  Appelez 
ces  ecoliers.  Je  les  recompcnserai ;  je  leur  donnerai  de  belles 
images.  Tu  les  leur  donneras  demain.  Ne  te  loue  pas  toi-meme. 
On  ne  se  loue  pas  soi-meme.  Elle  nc  vous  ecoute  pas.  Elle  ne 
m'ajDas  ecoute.  £Tous  ecoutera-t-il  ?  Yous  ne  me  dites  pas  la 
veritev"1  Je  vous  la  dis.  Cette  plume  cst  trop  molle ;  voulez-vous 
avoir  la  bonte  (kindness)  de  me  la  tailler  ?  Je  vous  la  taillerai  vo- 
lontiers. 

THEilE  25. 

1.  I  praise  thee.  2.  Thou  praisest  me.  3.  Do  you  play?  4. 
Do  you  hear?  5.  Do  you  hear  me  ?  6.  I  hear  you.  7.  I  do  not 
Sell  my  house.  8.  I  do  not  sell  it.  9.  Do  you  sell  your  horses  ? 
10.  I  do  not  sell  them.  11.  We  hear  thee.  12.  I  call  him.  13. 
Will  you  accompany  me?  14.  My  father  will  accompany  you. 

*  This  mark  (a)  denotes  that  the  verb  after  which  it  is  placed  takes  an  indirect 
personal  otiject. 


118  XXV.      VINGT-CINQUIEME    LEQON. 

15.  Have  you  mended  my  pen?  16.  I  have  mended  it.  17. 
Lend  me  a  pencil.  18.  Lend  him  a  pen.  19.  Do  not  give  him 
my  book.  20.  Do  not  give  it  him.  21.  I  promise  you.  22.  I 
promise  it  [to]  you.  23.  Tell  (dites-}  him  (to  him).  24.  Tell 
them.  25.  Tell  it  him.  26.  Do  not  tell  it  [to]  them.  27.  I 
should  give  you  some  money,  if  you  were  more  industrious.  28. 
Has  she  given  him  the  gloves  ?  29.  She  has  given  them  to  him. 
80.  She  has  not  given  them  to  him;  she  has  given  them  to  his 
brother.  31.  Your  translation  is  badly  done  (malfaite)  ;  correct 
it  (/em.).  32.  Pardon  (me)  my  mistakes.  33.  Have  you  cor- 
rected them?  '34.  Yes,  I  have  (corrected  them). 

CONVERSATION. 

M' entendez-vous  ?  Oui,  je  vous  entends. 

Ne  m' entendez-vous  pas  ?        /  Je  ne  vous  ai  pas  entendu. 

Me  pardonnerez-vous  ?  Je  ne  vous  pardonnerai  pas. 

De  cjui  avez-vous  re^u  cc  livre  C'cst  Alfred  qui  me  1'a  prete'. 

amusant  ? 

Voulez-vous   preter  ce  livre   h  Je  le  lui  preterai  volontiers. 

ma  soeur  ? 

Qui  veut  cettc  plume  ?  Donncz-la-moi,  s'il  vous  plait  (if 

you  please). 

Les  aimez-vous  ?  Oui,  je  les  aimo  beaucoup. 

Dites-vous  la  verite  ?  Je  la  dis  toujours. 

Qui  vous  accompagnera  ?  Mon  cousin  m'accompagnera  jus- 

qu'a  (as  far  as)  Bruxelles. 

Vous  a-tK>n  raconte  (told)  une  Oui,  notre  gvand'mere  nous  a  ra- 

histoire  ?  conte  une  trcs-belle  histoire. 


READING  LESSON. 
SUITE    DU    RO  SIEIl. 

transporte  de  joie,  ernporta  le  rosier;  et  Charlotte  le 
suivit  plug  joyeuse  encore  que  lui. 

Le  jardinier  avait  vu  le  trait  d'amitie  de  la  petite  fille.     H  alia 
cnercLer  (he  went  for*)  un  fceau  Bureau 


DEMONSTRATIVE   PRONOUNS.  119 

"  Voulez-vous  quo  je  mettc  (put)  ccci  &  la  place  do  votre  rosier?  " 
demanda-t-il  h  Charlotte. 

"  Si  vous  n'en  avez  pas  besom."  . 

"  Non,"  rdpondit-il,  "  je  n'en  ai  pas  besom."  — H  le  planta. 

Lc  mois  de  Mai  suivant,  le  rosier  de  Frederic  porta  les  plus  belles 
mscs,  et  tons  les  matins,  Charlotte  recevait  un  bouton  h  moitie  ou- 
vcrt,  pour  le  mettre  dans  ses  cheveux. 

Lc  sureau  prit  (took)  racine  aussi  et  devint  (became)  bientot  si 
grand  ct  si  e'pais  que  Charlotte  y  trouva  de  Tombrage  dans  la  grande 
chalcur  du  jour. 

Transport^,  enraptured.  demander,  to  ask. 

emporter,  to  carry  off.  un  bouton,  a  bud. 

le  suivit,  followed  him.  la  moitie',  half. 

joyeux,  joyful.  ouvert,  open,  opened. 

le  trait,  the  trait.  la  racine,  the  root. 

ramitie,  friendship.  bientot,  soon. 

un  sureau  d'Espagne,  a  lilac-tree.  I'ombrage,  the  shade, 

ceci,  this.  la  chakur,  the  heat. 


XXVI.    VINGT-SIXIEME 


DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS. 

1.   These  are : 

masculine.  feminine. 

Celui,  tette,  that, 

pi.  ceuxt  celles,  those. 

celui-ci,  celle-ci,  this,  the  latter, 

pi.  ceux-ci,  celles-ci,  these^ 

celui-la,  celle-la,  that  (one),  tne  former, 

pi.  ceux-laf  celles-la,  those. 

2*  The  pronouns  /*£,  sJiei  they,  preceding  a  relative",  must  be 
translated  by  celui,  celle,  ceiuS,  celles.     Ex.  :  celui  qui,  t 
telle  qui,  she  who ;  ccux  qui,  celles  qui,  they  who* 


120  XXVI.      YINGT-SIXIEME  LEgON. 

3.  Celui,  celle,  ceux,  celles,  are  used  with  the  preposition  de,m* 
stead  of  the  English  possessive  case,  when  the  governing  noun  is  not 
expressed.     Ex. :  mon  chapedu  et  celui  de  monfrere,  my  hat  and 
my  brother's ;   ma  plume  et  celle  de  ma  sceur,  my  pen  and  my 
sixer's. 

REMARK.  Cdui,  celle,  $-c.,  are  used  only  before  a  relative  or  the  prepo- 
sition de;  in  all  other  cases  cdui-ci,  cdle-ci,  cdui-la,  celle-la,  $c.,  must  be 
ased.  Ex. :  J*ai  cdui-ci,  je  n'ai  pas  cdui-la,  I  have  this  one,  I  have  not 
that  one. 

4.  Ce}  which  we  have  seen  as  an  adjective,  is  also  a  pronoun. 
It  is  then  invariable,  meaning  this,  that,  it.  — It  is  used  before  the 
relative,  as :  ce  qui  (subj.),  ce  que  (obj.),  that  which  (what) ;  ce 
dont,  that  of  which. 

For  the  use  of  ce  or  il  before  the  verb  to  be,  sec  Rule  after  the  vocabulary 
of  Lesson  xv.  See  also  Lesson  xxiv.  3. 

5.  The  compounds  of  ce,  ceci,  this,  and  cela,  that,  are  used  abso- 
lutely, without  reference  to  any  particular  noun. 

Ex. :  Je  ne  veux  pas  ceci,  je  veux  cda. 
I  do  not  want  this,  1  want  that. 
Ce  queje  dis,  what  I  say. 
Que  dites-vous  de  cela,  what  do  you  say  of  that  ? 
Est-ce  la  votre  plume,  is  this  your  pen  ? 
C'est  ma  plume,  that  is  my  pen. 
Sont-ce  la  vos  gants,  are  these  your  gloves  ? 
Ce  sont  mes  gants,  these  are  my  gloves. 

6  In  place  of  de  and  a  with  ce,  ceci,  cela,  ceux-ci,  and  ceux-la, 
two  other  conjunctive  pronouns  are  used,  viz. :  en  and  y.  En  is 
rendered  in  English  by  some,  of  it,  of  them,  about  it,  about  them 
etc.  T  corresponds  to  the  English  to  it,  to  them,  in  it,  in  them, 
there,  therein,  etc.  Ex.  :  — 

Void  du  jamboji :  en  voulez-vous  ? 
Here  is  ham,  will  you  have  some  ? 
tPen  prendrai  un  petit  morceau. 
I  shall  take  a  little  piece  of  it. 

Votre  pere  est-il  aujardtn? Om,  il  y  esi. 

Is  your  father  in  the  garden  ?    Yes,  lie  is  there. 


DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS.  121 

J'y  vats  aussi,  I  am  going  there  also. 

Donnez-m'en  —  donnez-lui-cn. 

Give  me  some  —  give  him  some. 

Ypenses-tu,  do  you  think  of  that  ? 

Je  lui  en  ai  domuf,  I  have  given  him  some  of  them  (it). 

VOCABULARY. 

Le  porte-feuille,  the  pocket-book.  la  recompense,  the  reward. 

lapeur,  fear.  bfnir,  to  bless. 

I'dme,  the  soul.  pers&uter,  to  persecute. 

la  noblesse,  nobility.  souliaiter,  to  wish. 

le  corps,  the  body.  enrichir,  to  enrich. 

commode,  comfortable.  Vagricultwre,  f.  agriculture. 

le  conqugrant,  the  conqueror.  fyalement,  equal!/. 

jaune,  yellow.  tout  de  suite,  directly. 

joli,  e,  nice,  pretty.  promet,  promises. 
le  commerce,  the  commerce. 

READING  EXERCISE  26. 

Voici  mon  porte-feuille  et  celui  de  mon  perc.  Voici  mes  gants 
et  ceux  de  ma  soeur.  Voulez-vous  ceux-ci  ou  ceux-la  ?  Celui 
qui  remplit  ses  devoirs  est  un  honnete  homme.  Voulez-vous  ceci 
ou  cela  ?  Ceux  qui  sont  contents,  sont  toujours  heureux.  Heu- 
reux  celui  qui  trpuve  un  vrai  ami !  Je  prefere  la  noblesse  de 
FuiS&lrcelie  de  la'  naissance  (birth).  On  croit  (believes)  ce  qu'on 
espere.  Ce  que  vous  dites  me  fait  peur.  Qui  vient  la  ?  C'est 
moi.  —  Ce  sont  eux.  Ce  qui  est  beau  n'est  pas  toujours  utile. 
Ne  parlez  pas  de  ce  qui  ne  vous  regarde  (concern)  pas.  Alex- 
andre-le- Grand  et  Jules  Cesar  furent  de  grands  conquerants  ;  ce- 
lui-la  mourut  dans  sa  jeunesse,  celui-ci  fut  assassine  (murdered}. 

THEME   26. 

1.  Here  is  your  hat  and  your  brother's.  2.  I  shall  sell  my 
house  and  my  uncle's.  3.  We  speak  of  these,  you  speak  of  those. 
4.  Give  me  that  one.  5.  This  is  my  pen.  6.  These  (ce)  are  your 
pencils.  7.  Is  this  the  garden  of  your  aunt?  8.  Are  these  the  shoes 


122  XXVIL      VINGT-SEPTIEME 

of  your  sister?  9.  No,  these  are  the  shoes  of  my  cousin  Eliza.  10. 
This  ink  (cette  encre-ci)  is  blacker  than  that.  11.  These  gloves  are 
white,  those  are  yellow.  12.  I  prefer  the  "beauty  of  the  soul  to  that 
(/.)  of  the  body.  13.  Agriculture  and  commerce  are  equally  use- 
ful to  man;  the  former  nourishes  us,  the  latter  enriche^us.  14. 
My  mother  prefers  this  house  io  that ;  this  is  smaller,  but  that  is 
more  comfortable.  15.  Havo  you  (any)  butter  ?  16.  Yes,  I  have 
some.  17.  Give  me  some.  18.  Here  is  black  cloth.  19.  I  shall 
take  ten  yards  of  it  (fen  prendrai  .  .  .).  20.  Were  you  at  the 
theatre  yesterday  ?  21.  Yes,  I  was  there.  22.  Is  your  master  iu 
that  room?  23.  Yes,  he  is  there. 


XXVII.    VINGT-SEPTIEME 


INTEKBOGATIVE  PEONOUNS. 

They  are  :  1.  lequel  f.  laquelle,  which  (of)  ?  2.  qui,  who?  que 
and  quoiy  what  ? 

1.  Lequel,  when  not  used  alone,  is  separated  by  de  from  the 
noun  with  which  it  agrees  in  gender. 

When  the  pronoun  which  is  used  interrogatively,  it  is  always 
expressed  by  lequel,  laquelle,  etc.,  as :  — 

Void  deux  appartements,  lequel  choisirez-vous  ? 
Here  are  two  apartments,  which  will  you  choose  ? 
Une  de  ses  sccurs  est  marine.    Laquelle  est-ce  ? 
One  of  his  sisters  is  married.    Which  is  it  ? 
Laquelle  de  vos  ecolieres  est  malade  ? 
Which  of  your  pupils  is  ill  ? 

The  same  contractions  take  place  in  the  article  le  compounded  with  quel, 
as  when  used  by  itself:  thus,  by  contraction  with  the  prepositions  a  and  det 
arc  formed  auqucl,  auxquels,  av,xqudlest  duquel.  desquels,  and  desquelles. 


INTERROGATIVE   PRONOUNS.  123 

2.    The   interrogative   pronoun   qui?   is  only  used  of  poisons. 

Ex.:  — 

Qui  est  la,  who  is  there  ? 

A  qui  pretez-vous  cela,  to  whom  do  you  lend  this  ? 
Qui  cherchez-vous,  whom  are  you  looking  for  ? 
Pour  qui  est  ce  crayon,  for  whom  is  this  pencil  ? 

8.  WJiose,  v?hcn  used  interrogatively,  must  be  rendered  in 
French  by  a  qui.  Ex. :  — 

Whose  book  is  this  ?     a  qui  est  ce  litre  ? 

4.  Que  and  quoi  are  neuter.1*     Quoi,  what,  is  disjunctive,  and 
used  either  by  itself  or  after  a  preposition,  as  :  — 

De  quoi  parlez-vous,  of  what  are  you  speaking  ? 
Sur  quoi,  upon  what  ?    uduec  <?wo/,  with  what  ? 

5.  $we,  what,  is  conjunctive,  and  is  only  used  before  verbs :  it 
never  follows  a  preposition.     Ex. :  — 

Que  voulez-vous,  what  do  you  wish  or  want  1 
Que  dit-on,  what  do  people  say  ? 
Que  demande-t-il,  what  does  he  ask  ? 

VOCABULARY. 

Marie',  e,  married.  le  caJiier,  the  copy-book. 

Zez;^  got  up,  risen.  la  niece,  the  niece. 

frapper,  to  strike,  to  beat.  le  porte-plume,  the  penholder. 

1 

READING  EXERCISE  27. 

Lequel  de  vos  fils  est  malado  ?  Laquclle  de  vos  soeurs  est  ma- 
riee  ?  Lesqucls  do  vos  ccolicrs  n'ont  pas  fait  leurs  themes  ?  Yoici 
plusieurs  canifs  :  Icqucl  voulez-vous  achetcr  ?  Qui  est  arrive  ?  Qui 
a  trouve  ma  bourse  ?  De  qui  avez-vous  parle  ?  A  qui  est  la  gram- 
maire  que  vous  avcz  a  la  main  ?  Que  souhaitez-vous,  Monsieur  ? 
Qu' avez-vous  porte  h  la  posto?  Quoi!  vous  etcs  dejh,  leve !  A 
quoi  pensez-vous  done  ?  Auquel  de  ces  ecoliers  avez-vous  promis 
une  recompense  ? 

*  The  neuter  gender  is  recognized  as  existing  in  French  only  by  very  few  gram, 
marians.  But  que  and  quoi,  the  pronoun  ce,  and  sometimes  le,  are  certainly 
neither  masculine  nor  feminine. 


XXVII.      VIXGT-SEPTIEME   LEgON. 


124 


THE3IE  27. 

1.  "Wliich  of  your  horses  havo  you  sold?  2.  Which  of  these  col- 
ors is  the  finest?  3.  Which  of  my  copy-books  will  you  have?  4. 
To  which  of  your  nieces  dp  you  write  (ecrivez-vous)  a  letter?  5. 
Which  of  your  pupils  are  the  most  diligent  «  6.  Here  are  several 
pictures,  which  will  you  choose  ?  7.  Who  is  at  (a)  the  door  ?  8. 
Whom  do  you  love  most  (le  mieux)  ?  9.  From  whom  have  you 
received  this  ring?  10.  To  whom  do  you  speak?  11.  To  whom 
will  you  give  th|s  nice  pcn-l*ol$er  ?  12.  What  do  you  carry  under 
your  arm  (&ras)  ?  13.  With  ~what  has  he  beaten  the  dog?  14. 
What  !  are  you  still  (encore)  in  bed  (cut  lit)  ? 


Lequel  de  ces  deux  porte-feuil- 

les  est  a  vous  ? 
Laquelle    de   ces   deux    robes 

preferez-vous  ? 
Est-ce  la  votre  bague  ? 
Sont-ce  la  vos  gants  ? 


Avez-vous  ICQU  ma  lettre  ? 

Le  commerce   estril  utile   aux 

liommes  ? 
Quelle  maison  vendcz-vous  ? 


A  qui  donnercz-vous  ce  canif  ? 
Voici  du  jambon  ct  du  pain,  en 

voulez-vous  ? 

Avez-vous  apporte  les  vcrres  ? 
Madame  votre  mere  est-ellc  a  la 

maison  (or  chez  ellc)  ? 


CONVERSATION. 


Celui  quo  vous  avez  a  la  main. 
Je  prefero  ccllc-ci  a  celle-la. 

Oui,  M — ,  c'est  ma  bague  d'or. 
Non,   M — ,  co  ne  sont  pas  mes 

gants,  ce  sont  ceux  de  rna  cou- 

sine. 
Je  n'ai  regu  ni  la  votre  (jjours) 

ni  celle  de  votre  pere. 
Oui,  tres-utile ;  il  les  enrichit. 

J'ai  deux  maisons  a  vendrc,  celle 
de  mon  oncle  et  celle  de  moa 
grand-pere. 

Je  le  donnerai  a  Guillaume, 
Mcrci,  nous  en  avons  deja. 

Non,  M — ,  je  n'y  ai  pas  pense^. 
Oui,  M — ,  elle  y  est» 


POSSESSIVE   AND   RELATIVE   PRONOUNS.  125 


XXVIII.     VINGT-HUITIEME    LEgON, 


POSSESSIVE  AND  RELATIVE  PRONOUNS. 

1 .  The  possessive  pronouns  are  formed  from  the  possessive  adjec- 
GVCB  mon,  ton,  son,  etc.  They  are  :  — 

SIXG.  PLUR. 

Masc.  Fern.  Masc.  Fern. 

*       le  mien,        la  mienne,  Ics  miens,        les  miennes,    mine. 

le  tien,          la  tienne,  les  tiens,          les  tiennes,      thine. 

le  sien,         la  sienne,  les  siens,          les  siennes,      his,  hers,  its. 

le  notre,       la  notre,  les  notres,  ours. 

le  votrc,       la  votre,  les  votres,  yours. 

le  leur,         la  1  cur,  les  leurs,  theirs, 

These  are  not,  as  in  English,  of  the  same  gender  as  the  possessor.     They 
agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the  object  possessed.     Ex. :  — 
Cette  dame  a  mon  crayon  et  le  sien. 
That  lady  has  my  pencil  and  hers. 
Avez-vous  ma  montre  OIL  la  votre  ? 
Have  you  my  watch  or  yours  ? 
J*ai  la  mienne,  I  have  mine. 
Ma  scaur  a  la  sienne,  my  sister  has  hers. 

IST'The  interrogative  pronouns  qui,  quoi,  and  lequel,  serve  at tfi& 
same  time  as  relative  pronouns,  when  they  have  a  reference  to  some 
other  noun  or  pronoun  preceding. 

8.  As  a  relative  qui  is  a  subject  and  que  the  direct  object.  Qui 
and  que  are  used  for  persons  and  things  of  both  genders  and  num- 
bers, Ex.:  — 

Un  enfant  qui  pleure,  a  child  that  cries. 
Laporte  qui  est  ouverte,  the  door  which  is  open. 
Le  voyageur  quefai  quitfe*,  the  traveller  whom  I  have  left. 
Le  c/tapeau  quefai  achete',  the  hat  (which)  I  have  bought. 
Les  maisons  que  vous  avez  vues,  the  houses  (which)  you  have  seen. 
The  relative  que,  whom,  which,  or  that,  is  sometimes  understood  in  Eng- 
lish, but  it  must  always  be  expressed  in  French. 


126  XXVIII.      VINGT-HUITIEME 

4.  Dont,  whose,  of  which,  is  used  for  pei^ons  and  things   of 
both  genders  and  numbers;  but  de  qm,  from  whom   or  of  whom, 
which  is  sometimes  required  instead  of  dont,  has  only  reference  to 
persons. 

REMARK.  When  dont  signifies  whose  the  noun  which  it  limits  must  be 
preceded  by  the  article ;  if  the  noun  is  the  object  of  a  verb  it  must  come 
after  tkat  verb,  and  not  immediately  after  dont  as  in  English.  Ex. :  — 

Je  connais  lafemme  dont  vous  avez  recu  la  Icttre. 

I  know  the  woman  whose  letter  you  have  received. 

Je  connais  lafemme  de  qui  vous  avez  recu  la  lettre. 

I  know  the  woman  from  whom  you  have  received  the  letter. 

L'homme  —  les  homines  dont  vous  parlez. 

The  man  —  the  men  of  whom  you  speak. 

La  lettre  —  les  Itttres  dont  vous  parlez. 

The  letter  —  the  letters  of  which  you  speak. 

5.  After  prepositions,  qui  refers  to  persons,  lequel,  to  things  and 
animals.     Ex. :  — 

Le  marchand  avec  qui  ^ai  voyage". 
Th&  merchant  with  whom  I  travelled.    But : 
L'arbre  sur  lequel  (not  sur  qui)  je  montai. 
The  tree  upon  which  I  climbed. 
La  clef  avec  laquelle  on  ouvrit  la  porte. 
The  key  with  which  they  opened  the  door. 
Voila  I'homme  a  quifai  prvtf  mon  iivre. 
There  is  the  man  to  whom  I  have  lent  my  book, 
v     ,  (Test  le  chien  auquel  vous  avez  donne  a  manger. 
•  *\  .          That  is  thc-dqg  to  which  }*ou  gave  to  eat. 

t).  Lequel,  laqu'elle^etc.,  must  also  be  used  instead  of  qui  in  the 
Nominative,  when  the  relative  is  separated  from  its  noun  by  another 
substantive  to  which  it  might  seem  to  relate.  Ex.  :  — 

La  tante  de  mon  ami  laquelle  demeure  a  Paris. 

My  friend's  aunt  who  lives  at  Paris. 

(qui  demeure  a  Paris  might  relate  to  mon  ami.) 

7.    That  whichy  and  what,  meaning  the  thing  ivhich,  are  ex* 


POSSESSIVE   AND   RELATIVE  PRONOUNS.  127 

pressed  by  ce  qui  for  the  Nominative,  and  ce  que  for  the  Objective. 
All  that  is  rendered :  Nom.  tout  ce  qui,  Obj.  tout  ce  que.     Ex.  :  — 

"\Vhat  renders  men  miserable,  is  cupidity. 
Ce  qui  rend  les  hommes  mise'rdbles,  c'est  la  cupidit€. 
I  like  all  that  is  fm.Q,faime  tout  ce  qui  est  beau. 
Do  what  I  tell  you,faites  ce  queje  vous  dis. 

VOCABULARY. 

L'vgr&nent,    m.    the    comfort,  inviter,  to  invite. 

pleasure.  chatier,  to  chastise. 

le  tigre,  the  tiger.  demeurer,  to  live. 

h  talent,  the  talent.  vanter,  to  praise. 

I'amiral,  the  admiral.  fertiliser,  to  fertilize. 

la  victoire,  the  victory.  de'chirer,  to  tear. 

le  propri&aire,  the  owner.  g^gner,  to  win,  gain. 

les  mceurs,  f.  the  manners.  s'appelle,  is  called. 

le  repas,  the  meal,  tout,  adv.  quite. 

cdebre,  celebrated.  trop,  adv.  too  much. 

aussi,  as.  maintenant,  —  a  present,  now* 
nfyliger,  to  neglect. 

READING  EXERCISE  28. 

Mon  frere  est  aussi  grand  que  le  tien.  Ma  socur  est  du  meire 
age  que  la  votre.  Vos  roses  sonL  tres-belles,  mais  cllcs  sont  moms 
belles  que  les  mipnnes.  Nos  chiens  sont  aussi  fideles  que  les  lours. 
Chaque  plante  a  sa  propricte  {peculiarity)  •  la  violetto  a  la  sicnno, 
les  roses  ont  les  lours.  Lc  petit  gar9on  dont  le  pere  est  mort,  cle- 
mcure  maintenant  chez  nous.  Les  moeurs  des  anciens^peuples 
etaicnt  tres-differentes  des  notres.  La  ville  a  ses  agremcnts,  et  la 
campagne  a  les  siens.  Le  marchand  que  vous  avez  vu  hier  chez 
inoi,  et  chez  qui  demeure  mon  ami  E,.,  est  parti  pour  Paris. 

THEME  28. 

1.  Your  house  is  finer  than  mine,  but  my  garden  is  finer  than 
yours.  2.  I  have  read  (lu)  your  letter  and  his.  3.  Do  you  prefer 
your  knife  to  mine?  4.  Yes,  I  prefer  mine  to  yours.  5.  Which 
bonnet  is  thine  ?  6.  Your  rooms  are  more  spacious  (grandes)  than 


128 


XXVIII.      VINGT-IIUITIEME 


ours,  but  ours  arc  higher.  7.  I  think  (trouve)  your  garden  very 
small.  8.  I  beg  your  pardon  (je  vous  demande  pardoii),  Sir,  it  is 
not  smaller  than  yours;  it  is  quite  as  (aussi)  largo  as  that  of  my  neigh- 
bor. 9.  Where  is  your  pen  and  where  is  mine ?  10.  Which  one? 
11.  Tha£  which  I  have  made  (taillee)  this  morning.  12.  The  man 
of  whom  you  are  speaking,  is  dead  (inort).  13.  Is  this  the  book 
(which)  you  have  lost?  14.  No,  it  was  a  French  book.  15.  You 
speak  of  the  lady  whose  husband  (le  mari)  has  been  so  ill.  16. 
The  horse  to  which  you  have  given  some  drink  (a  boire)  is  mine, 
17.  The  window  upon  which  you  lean  (vous  vous  appuyez)  is 
broken. 

CONVERSATION. 


Trouvez-vous  mon  jardin  plus 

grand  que  le  votrc  ? 
Est-il  aussi  plus  petit  quo  celui 

de  votre  tante  ? 
Comment  s'appelle  cet  amiral 

qui  a  remporte  la  victoire  de 

Trafalgar? 
Que  fait  le  tigre  ? 
Ta  socur  est-elle  plus  ague  que 

la  mienne  ? 

Quel  age  a-t-elle  done  ? 
Avec  quoi  le  voleur  a-t-il  ouvert 

(opened)  la  porte  ? 
Comment    s'appelle    le   fleuve 

dont     Ids     eaux     fcrtiliscnt 


Au  contraire,  je  le  trouve  plus  pe- 
tit que  le  mien. 
Non,  le  sien  est  moins  grand. 

Le  nom  de  ce  celebre  amiral  an- 
glais est  Nelson. 

II  dechire  la  main  qui  le  chatie. 
Elle  est  plus  jeune  que  la  votre. 

Ello  a  onze  ans  et  derm. 

II  Fa  ouvcr to  avec  une  fausse  clef. 

Ce  fleuve  s'appelle  le  Nil. 


Avez-vous  recllcment  une  bonne    Je  vous  assure  que  mon  intention 
intention  ?  est  aussi  bonne  que  la  yotre. 


INDEFINITE   PRONOUNS.  129 


XXIX.    VINGT-NEUVIEME 


INDEFINITE  PEONOUNS. 

1.  These  arc  used  by  themselves,  -without  a  noun.    They  are  ;  — • 

On  or  Von,  one,  they,  people. 

Chacun,  f.  chacune,  each,  every-one. 

Aucun,  f.  aiicune  (with  ne),  none,  not  one. 

Quelqu'un,  f.  quelqu'une,  some  one,  somebody,  anybody,  pi.  quel<j"?$> 

uns-  f.  quelques-unes,  some. 
Personne,  (with  ne),  nobody.  ! 
L'un,  e  —  I'autre,  the  one — the  other,  pi.  les  uns  (unes) — les  autres, 

the  ones  —  the  others. 
L:un  (I'une)  et  I'autre,  both. 
L'un  (I'une)  ou  I'autre,  either. 
Ni  I'un  (I'une)  ni  I'autre,  neither. 
L'un  (I'une)  I'autre,  —  pi.  les  uns  (les  unes)  les  autres,  each  other,  one 

another. 

Un  autre,  f.  une  autre,  another. 
D'autres,  pi.  others,  other  people. 
Autrui,  others,  another. 
Tel,  f.  idle,  many  a  man.     ' 
Plusieurs,  several. 
La  plupart,  most,  followed  by  de  with  the  def.  art.,  as  f  La  plupart  des 

nomm.es,  most  men. 
Quiconque,  whoever. 

Tout,  f.  toute,  all,  everything,  pi.  tons,  toutest  all. 
Quelque  chose,  f.  something,  anything :  when  followed  by  de  and  an 

adj.  it  is  masc.  ^ 

Rien  (with  ne),  nothing. 
Le,  la  meme,  the  same. 

2.  Uon  is  used  for  euphony  instead  of  on  after  et,  ou,  ou,  si,  unloss 
the  next  word  begins  with  Z;  also  after  que  if  the  next  word  begins 
with  a  c  or  q.     Ex. :  si  Von  volt,  if  one  sees ;  et  Von  dit,  and  they 
guy.     But :  si  on  le  voit,  not  si  Von  le  volt. 

L'on  is  also  sometimes  used  after  mais,  ni,  qui,  and  other  vowel  sounds, 
9 


130  XXIX.      VINGT-NEUVIEME  LEgON. 

3.  Several  of  the  indefinite  adjectives  have  been  enumerated  here 
again  among  the  indefinite  pronouns,  because  they  may  be  used  as 
such,  viz. :  aucun,  plusieurs,  tout,  and  le  meme.     Ex. :  — 

Cambien  de  plumes  avez-vous,  how  many  pens  have  you  ? 

Je  n'en  ai  aucune,  I  have  none. 

J>en  ai  plusieurs,  I  have  several. 

Avez-vous  appeltf  tons  les  enfants,  have  you  called  all  the  children  ? 

Ouifje  les  ai  appel&  tons,  yes,  I  have  called  them  all. 

4.  When  personne  and  rien  are  used  by  themselves,  they  do  not 
take  ne,  but  they  retain  their  negative  meaning,  as : 

Qui  avez-vous  rencontre*?    Personne. 
Whom  have  you  met1?     Nobody. 

VOCABULARY. 

Le  defaut,  the  fault.  chanter,  to  sing. 

le  verbe,  the  verb.  bldnier,  to  blame. 

le  camarade,  the  comrade.  rire,  to  laugh. 

la  confiance,  the  confidence.  arricer,  to  arrive. 

venu,  come  (part.  p.).  gatcr,  to  spoil. 

m&liant,  e,  naughty.  secourir,  to  assist. 

jaloux,  -se,  jealous.  nuire,  to  hurt,  injure. 

r€gulicrt  -ere,  regular.  je  veux,  I  will. 

rencontrer,  to  meet.  pourri,  e,  rotten. 

READING  EXERCISE  29. 

On  chante,  on  joue  et  Ton  danse.  Tout  le  monde  veut  (wishes) 
etre  heureux.  Chacun  vcut  avoir  raison.  L'un  etait  richc,  Tautre 
dtaitpauvre;  Tun  et  Fautie  etaient  malhcurcux.  Les  unes  dan- 
saient,  les  autres  jouaient.  Ne  blamez  pas  les  travaux  d'autrui. 
Avez-vous  vu  quelqu'un?  Je  n'ai  \n  pcrsonne.  Nous  avons 
quelque  chose  de  meillcur.  Tel  rit  aujourd'hui  qui  ne  rira  plus  de- 
main.  Chacun  a  ses  defauts.  Tout  le  monde  (everybody)  a  son 
faible  (weakness) .  La  plupart  dc  ces  pommes  sont  pourries.  Ne 
savez-vous  (do  you  know)  rion  de  nouveau?  Nous  ne  savons 
(know)  rien.  Nous  n'avons  rencontre  personne.  Quiconque  salira 
ges  cahiers,  sera  puni.  Donnez-moi  quelquos-uncs  de  vos  belles 
poires.  Quclques-uns  do  mes  camarades  sont  malades.  ' 


INDEFINITE    PRONOUNS. 


131 


TIIEME  29. 

1.  One  is  happy  when  one  is  contented.  2.  They  speak  of 
peace  (delapaix).  8.  They  say  so  (7e).  4.  Everybody  likes 
him.  5.  Every  one  thinks  of  himself  (asoi).  6.  Everybody  has 
bis  [own]  faults.  ,1 .  Somebody  has  told  (dit)  it  to  me.  8. 
Those  apples  are  fine,  I  will  take  some.  9.  Whoever  knows  (con- 
naif)  this  man,  has  little  (peu  de)  confidence  in  him.  *  10.  No- 
body knows  that  woman.  11.  Henry  thinks  of  (a)  nobody.  12. 
(The)  one  arrives,  the  other  sets  out  (part  ).  13.  These  two 
girls  love  one  another.  14.  I  do  not  know  them  all,  but  I  know 
several  of  them  (en).  15.  Most  verbs  are  regular. t7  16.  The 
princes  were  jealous  of  one  another.  17.  Will  you  have  anything  ? 
18.  I  thank  you,  I  will  have  (je  ne  veux)  nothing.  19.  These 
people  (gens)  speak  ill  (nial)  of  one  another  (i.  e.  the  one  of  the 
other). 

CONVERSATION. 


•Que  fait-onla? 

Qui  a  dit  cela  ? 

Qui  veut  ce  papier  ? 

Yos    deux     neveux      sont-ils 

riches  ? 
As-tii   vu   qucleju'im   dans  ce 

jardin  ? 
Qu  *y  a-t-il  de  nouveau  ? 

Ou  &ont  vos  deux  fils  ? 

Youlez-vous  quelquo  chose  ? 
Avez-vous  retrouve  les  lettrcs 

perdues  ? 

Avcc  qui  etes-vous  vcnu  ? 
Qui  est  la  ? 
Avcz-vous  toutcs  les  boites  ? 


On  joue  et  Ton  danse. 

Tout  le  monde  lo  dit. 

Chacun  le  veut. 

L'un  est  richo,  Tautre  est  pauvre. 

Non,  je  n'y  ai  vu  personno. 

Jc  ne  sais  (knoiv)  rien  du   tout 

(at  all). 
Us  sont  partis  tous  les  deux.    (Ils 

sont  partis  Fun  et  Fautre.) 
Non,  merci ;  je  ne  veux  ricn. 
J'en  ai  retrouve  quelqucs-unes  ; 

la  plupart  sont  perdues. 
Jc  ne  suis  vcnu  avec  personne. 
Pcrsonne. 
Je  n'cn  ai  aucuno. 


132  XXIX.      VIXGT-NEUVIEME    LE<JON. 

Comment  etaicnt  les  princes?       Us  etaient  jaloux  Fun  de  1'autre 

(or  les  uns  des  autrcs.) 

Avez-yous  d'autres  plumes?          Non,  ce  sont  encore  les  memcs. 
Avez-vous      rencontre      qucl-     Je  n'ai  rencontre  personne. 
qu'un  ? 


READING  LESSON. 
PUISSANCE   DE   LA    CONCORDE. 

Un  homme  qui  avait  douze  fils,  les  fit  (had  them)  rassembler  au- 
tour  de  son  lit  de  mort,  et  conune  (as)  ils  attendaient  sa  derniere 
benediction,  il  leur  montra  un  faisceau  de  fleches  et  ordonna  a  clia- 
cun  d'essayer  de  les  rompre  ainsi  liees,  toutes  k  la  fois.  Aucun 
d'eux  ne  put  (could)  j  parvenir.  II  leur  dit  ensuite  de  faire  le 
meme  essai,  en  les  prenant  (by  taking  them)  Tune  apres  Tautre. 
Us  les  rompirent  de  cette  maniere  avec  facilite.  Le  pere  les  rendit 
alors  attentifs  a  cet  embleme  du  pouvoir  de  la  Concorde.  "  Ob- 
servez,  mes  enfants,"  leur  dit-il,  "  qu'aussi  longtemps  que  vous 
rcsterez  unis,  personne  ne  pourra  (ivill  le  able)  vous  vaincre." 

Le  pouvoir t  the  power,  might.  a  la  fois y  at  once. 

rasseinller,  to  assemble.  parvenir,  to  succeed. 

autour  de,  round,  about.  ensuite,  at  length,  finally. 

le  lit  de  mort,  the  death-bed.  Vessai,  the  attempt. 

la  benediction,  the  blessing.  la  facility  (the)  easiness. 

un  faisceau,  a  bundle.  alors,  then. 

lajleche,  the  arrow.  V embleme,  the  emblem. 

rompre,  to  break.  unir,  to  unite. 

ainsi  lie,  thus  bound  together.  vaincre,  to  conquer,  vanquish. 


PASSIVE  AND  NEUTER  VERBS.  133 


XXX.    TRENTIEME    LEgON, 


PASSIVE  AND  NEUTER  VEUBS. 

1 ,  Passive  verbs  are  formed,  in  French  as  in  English,  by  joining 
the  Participle  past  of  an  active  verb  to  the  auxiliary  verb  etre,  to  be ; 
for  instance,  of  the  verb  donner,  the  passive  voice  is  etre  donne,  to 
be  given ;  of  firdr :  etre  fini,  to  be  finished,  etc.  The  Participle 
past  varies  according  to  the  gender  and  number  of  the  noun  or  pro- 
noun which  stands  as  the  nominative  to  the  verb. 


CONJUGATION  OE  A  PASSIVE  VERB. 

INFINITIVE., 

Eire  loue,  to  be  praised. 

INDICATIVE. 
PRESENT   TENSE. 

Jc  suis  lou£  JT  louee,  /  am  praised. 
tu  cs  loue  or  louee,  thou  art  praised. 
il  est  loue^  he  is  praised. 
^elle  est  louee,  she  is  praised. 
nous  sommes  loues  or  louees,  we  are  praised. 
vous  etes  loues  or  loue'es,  you  are  praised. 
ils  sont  loues,        ~) 
elles  sont  louccs,   |  ""*  are  Praised- 

IMPERFECT. 

J'^tais  loue'  or  louce,  /  was  praised,  etc. 

PRETERITE. 

Je  fus  loue'  or  loue'c,  /  was  praised,  etc, 

FUTURE. 

Je  serai  loud  or  loue'e,  I  shall  be  praised,  etc. 


134  XXX.      TRENTIEME  LEgON. 

CONDITIONAL. 
Je  serais  lone  or  louee,  1  should  be  praised,  etc. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Sois  loud  or  louce,  be  praised. 

soyons  loues  or  louees,  let  us  be  praised. 

BOyez  loues  or  louees,  be  praised. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT. 
Que  je  sois  loud  or  louee,  that  I  (may)  be  praised,  etc. 

IMPERFECT. 

Que  je  fusse  loud  or  louee,  that  I  (might)  be  praised,  etc. 

PARTICIPLE. 
E tan t  loud  or  louee,  being  praised. 

COMPOUND  TEXSES, 
INFINITIVE. 

Avoir  ete  loud,  e,  to  have  been  praised. 

INDICATIVE. 
COMPOUND   OP   THE   PRESENT. 

tPai  dte  loud,  e,  /  have  been  praised,  etc. 

COMPOUND   OF   THE   IMPERFECT. 

J'avais  dte  loud,  e,  /  had  been  praised,  etc. 

COMPOUND    OF   TUB   PRETERITE. 

J'eus  dtd  loud,  e,  I  had  been  praised,  etc. 

COMPOUND   OF   TOE   FUTURE. 

tPaurai  dte  loud,  e,  I  shall  have  been  praised,  etc* 

CONDITIONAL. 
J'aurais  etc  loud,  e,  ) 
J'eusse  etc  loud,  e,     f  7  should  or  I  ™dd  hace  b(:en  J}raised}  ac' 


PASSIVE  AND  NEUTER  VERBS.  185 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
COMPOUND   OF   THE   PRESENT. 

Que  j'aie  etc  loue,  e,  that  I  (may)  have  been  praised,  etc. 

COMPOUND   OF   THE   IMPERFECT. 

Que  j'eusse  etc  louc,  e,  that  I  (might)  have  been  praised, 

PARTICIPLE. 
Ayant  £te  loue,  e,  having  been  praised. 

2.  The  English  preposition  by,  with  the  passive  vace,  is  to  be 
rendered  by  de,  when  the  verb  denotes  a  sentiment  or  an  inward 
act  of  soul,  and  by  par,  when  it  expresses  an  outward  action. 
Ex. :  He  is  esteemed  by  everybody,  H  est  estime  de  tout  le  monde  ; 
the  city  of  Troy  was  taken  by  the  Greeks,  La  ville  de  Troie  fat 
prise  par  les  Grecs. 

NEUTER  VERBS. 

3.  There  are  about  six  hundred  neuter  verbs  in  French,  of  which 
about  five  hundred  and  fifty  are  conjugated  with  avoir  in  the  com- 
pound tenses.     Of  the  remainder,  some  take  either  etre  or  avoir, 
according  as  the  idea  expressed  is  condition  or  state,  or  action. 

4    The  following  neuter  verbs  invariably  require  etre: 

Aller,  to  go.  venir,  to  come. 

-  -wrriver,  to  arrive,  to  happen.  deveniry  to  become. 

Jioir^  to  fall  (rarely  used).  intervenir,  to  intervene. 

d€c€dert  to  decease.  parvenir,  to  succeed. 

tfclore,  to  hatch.  provenir,  to  arise. 

mourir,  to  die.  revenir,  to  come  back. 

naitre,  to  be  born.  svrvenir,  to  happen. 
tomber,  to  fall. 

Examples: 

COMPOUND   OF   THE   PRESENT. 

Je  suis  arrive  or  arrived,  7  have  (am)  arrived. 
ta  es  arrive'  or  arrived,  etc. 

COMPOUND  OF  THE  IMPERFECT. 

JMtais  arrive'  or  arrivdc,  7  had  arrived ',  etc 


13G  XXX.      TRENTIEME   LEgON. 

COMrOUND   OF   THE   FUTURE. 

Jc  serai  arrive  or  arrivee,  I  shall  have  arrived,  etc. 

CONDITIONAL. 
Jc  serais  arrive  or  arrivee,  I  should  have  arrived,  etc. 

5.  A-scourir,  cesser,  croitre,  dechoir,  degc'nercr,  desccndre,  disparaitre, 
e'chapper,  e'choir,  crapirer,  entrer,  grandir,  montcr,  partir,  passer,  perir, 
rester,  sortir,  vicillir,  and  a  few  others,  are  conjugated  with  avoir  when  it  is 
the  action  or  fact,  with  etre  when  it  is  the  state  or  condition  expressed  by  the 
verb,  which  is  uppermost  in  the  mind.  Ex. :  La  riviere  a  mont€  rapidement, 
the  river  has  risen  rapidly.  //  est  monte",  he  has  (is)  gone  up. 

VOCABULARY. 

La  lataille,  the  battle.  qffenser,  to  offend. 

la  lot,  law.  envoyer,  to  send. 

le  voleur,  the  thief.  mordre,  to  bite. 

le  voyageur,  the  traveller.  blesser,  to  wound. 

lejlatteur,  the  flatterer.  d&nolir,  to  demolish. 

la  langue,  the  language.  rebdtir,  to  rebuild. 

la  cour}  the  court.  maltraiter,  to  treat  ill,  abuse. 

le  chemin,  the  road.  enlever,  to  take  away 

vertueux,  -se,  virtuous.  sauver,  to  save. 

inconnu,  unknown.  attaquer,  to  attack. 

restert  to  remain.  assassin?,  murdered. 

tuer,  to  kill.  parce  que,  because. 

enrage",  mad. 

READING  EXERCISE  30. 

Mon  fils  Theodore  cst  aime  ct  loue  do  scs  maitrcs,  parce  qu'il  est 
applique*  et  attcntif.  Gustave  Adolplie,  roi  de  Suede,  fut  tue  a  la 
bataille  do  Lutzen,  a  1'age  de  trente-sept  ans.  Si  vous  etes  vcr- 
tueux,  vous  serez  aimes  et  estimes  de  tout  le  monde.  Ayez  SOID 
que  les  lois  soicnt  ponctuellement  observees.  Quiconque  les  ^rans- 
gresse,  sera  puni.  Le  soldat  qui  a  ete  blesse,  cst  mort.  La  mai- 
son  qui  a  ^te  demolie,  a  ete  rcbatie.  Ce  pauvra  chien  est  bien 
maltraite  par  son  maitre.  Hier  je  fas  attaque  par  un  voleur.  IMon 
argent,  ma  montre,  tout  me  fut  enleve.  Deux  des  voyageurs  sont 
restes  en  chemin ;  ils  no  sont  pas  encore  arrives. 


PASSIVE  AND  NEUTER  VERBS.          137 
THEME  30. 

1.  I  am  bved  by  my  parents.  2.  Mr.  Bell  is  esteemed  by 
everybody.  3.  The  French  language  is  spoken  in  all  the  courts  of 
Europe.  4.  Charles  was  bitten  by  a  mad  dog.  5.  That  dog  must 
(doit)  be  killed.  6.  This  ring  was  given  me  by  my  grandfather. 
7.  By  whom  was  this  letter  written  (ecrite)  ?  8.  It  was  written 
by  a  little  boy.  9.  Frederic  has  been  punished  by  his  teacher.  10. 
Have  you  been  invited  to  the  ball?  11.  No,  sir,  I  have  not  been 
invited.  12.  I  shall  perhaps  (peut-etre)  be  invited  to-morrow. 
13.  This  letter  must  be  sent  to  the  post-office.  14.  Flatterers  are 
not  esteemed.  15.  The  child  has  not  been  saved.  16.  It  would 
have  been  saved j  if  it  had  cried  for  help  (au  secours).  17.  The 
castle  was  built  in  the  year  1620.  18.  Those  brave  soldiers  will  be 
praised  and  rewarded.  19.  "Will  Mr.  B.'s  garden  be  sold?  20.  It 
is  already  sold. 

CONVERSATION. 

Etes-vous  aime's  de  vos  amis  ?       Nous  avons  toujours  ete  aime's  de 

tous  nos  amis. 

Croyez-vous    quo    mcs    ordres     Je  no  le  crois  pas. 
soient  executes  ? 

Par  qui  as-tu  ete  offense  ?  Par  un  homme  inconnu. 

Lcs:fcen3~r~6is  sont-ifs  aimes  ?          Us    sont    toujours    aimes   et  eft- 
times. 

Ccs  objets  seYont-ils  vendus  ?         Non,  M  — ,  ils  no  scront  pas  ven- 

dus. 

Par  qui  Henri  IV  fut-il  assas-    II  fut  assassin^  par  Eavaillac. 
sine*  (murdered)  ? 

Dans  quelle  annee?  Henri  IY.  fut  assassine*  en  1610. 

Quel  fiit  le  sort  de  Charles  X  ?      Ce   roi  fut  exile  (banished)    de 

France  en  1830. 

Par  qui  ces  jeunes  gens  ont-ils     Jo  crois  qu'ils  ont  ete  blames  par 
e*te  blames  ?  leur  maitre. 


138 


XXXI.      TRENTE  ET   UNIEME 


La  bataille  de  Leipsic  fut-cllo 
sanglante  (bloody)  ? 


Voyez  cette  pauvre  fillc  !   QuV 

t-elle  done? 
N'a-t-on  pas  tue  ce  chien  ? 

Que  va-kon  (are  they  going} 
faire  de  cette  vieille  maison  ? 
Avez-vous  bien  dormi  ? 


Tres-sanglante.  Bcaucoup  de 
soldats  et  d'offieiers  furent  tues, 
et  encore  (still)  un  plus  grand 
nombre  furent  blesses. 

Elle  a  ete  mordue  par  un  chien 
enrage. 

On  ne  Ta  pas  encore  tue,  mais  il 
sera  tue  tout  de  suite. 

Elle  sera  demolie  et  puis  rebfitio 
ii  neuf  (aneiv) . 

Non,  je  n'ai  pas  bien  dormi. 


XXXI.  TEENTE  ET  UNIEME 


REFLECTIVE  VERBS. 

Some  verbs  are  called  reflective,  because  their  subject  and  object 
are  the  same  person  or  thing,  so  that  the  subject  acts  upon  itself, 
and  is,  at  the  same  time,  the  agent  and  the  object  of  the  action. 
Reflective  verbs,  therefore,  have  always,  besides  the  subject,  another 
personal  pronoun,  viz.  :  me,  te,  se,  myself,  thyself,  himself,  herself, 
itself,  for  the  singular ;  nous,  vous,  se,  ourselves,  yourselves,  them- 
selves, for  the  plural.  But  it  frequently  happens  that  in  English 
the  second  pronoun  is  only  implied,  \vhercas  it  must  be  expressed 
in  French.  Ex. :  to  repent,  se  repeniir ;  Pres.  I  repent,  je  me 
rcpens,  etc. 

Observe  that  all  reflective  verbs,  without  exception,  are  conjugat- 
ed with  the  auxiliary  etre,  as :  I  have  hurt  myself,  je  me  suis 
llesse,  and  not  ye  nCai  Hesse. 

The  conjugation  of  the  following  verb  may  serve  as  a  model  for  all  tho 
reflective  verbs. 


REFLECTIVE   VERBS.  139 

Sc  rejouir,  to  rejoice* 

INDICATIVE. 
PRESENT    TENSE. 

Je  me  rejouis,  /  rejoice. 

tu  te  rcjouis,  tliou  rejoicest. 

il  (cllc)  sc  rejouit,  he  (she)  rejoices. 

nous  nous  rejouissons,  we,  rejoice. 

vous  vous  rejouissez,  you  rejoice. 

ils  (elles)  se  rejouisscnt,  tJiey  rejoice. 

IMPERFECT. 

Jc  me  rejouissais,  I  rejoiced,  etc. 

PRETERITE. 

Je  mo  rejouis,  I  rejoiced,  etc. 

FUTURE. 

Je  me  rejouirai,  I  shall  rejoice,  etc. 

CONDITIONAL. 
Je  me  rcjouirais,  I  should  rejoice,  etc. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Rejouis-toi,  rejoice. 
rejouissons-nous,  let  us  rejoice. 
rejouissez-vous,  rejoice. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT. 
Quo  jc  me  rcjouisse,  that  I  (may)  rejoice,  etc. 

IMPERFECT. 

Que  je  me  rejouisse,  that  I  (might)  rejoice,  dc. 

PARTICIPLE. 
Se  (me,  te,  etc.)  rcjouissant,  rejoicing. 

COMPOUND  TENSES. 
INFINITIVE. 

4 

S'£tre  r^joui,  o,  to  have  rejoiced. 


HO  XXXI.      TRENTE   ET   UNIEME   LEgON. 

INDICATIVE. 
COMPOUND    OP   THE   PRESENT. 

Je  me  suis  rcjoui,  e,  /  have  rejoiced. 

tu  t'cs  rcjoui,  e,  thou  liast  rejoiced. 

il  s'est  rcjoui,  fw  has  rejoiced. 

elle  s'est  rejouie,  she  has  rejoiced. 

nous  nous  sommcs  rejouis,  ies,  we  have  rejoiced. 

vous  vous  etcs  rejoui(s),  ic(s),  you  have  rejoiced. 

ils  sc  sont  rejouis, 

elles  se  sont  rejouics, 

COMPOUND    OF   THE    IMPERFECT. 

Je  m'etais  rejoui,  e,  /  had  rejoiced. 

tu  t'etais  rejoui,  e,  thou  hadst  rejoiced,  etc. 

COMPOUND    OF   THE    PRETERITE. 

Je  me  fus  rejoui,  e,  I  had  rejoiced. 
tu  to  fus  rejoui,  e,          etc. 

COMPOUND   OF   THE   FUTURE. 

Je  me  serai  rejoui,  e,  I  shall  have  rejoiced. 
tu  te  seras  rejoui,  e,  etc. 

CONDITIONAL. 

Je  me  serais  rej'oui,  e,  I  should  have  rejoiced. 
tu  te  serais  rejoui,  e,  etc. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
COMPOUND    OF    THE    PRESENT. 

Que  je  me  sois  rejoui,  e,  that  I  (may)  have  rejoiced. 
quo  tu  te  sois  rejoui,  e,  etc. 

qu'il  se  soit  rejoui,  (qu'elle  se  soit  rejouie),  etc. 

COMPOUND   OF   THE    IMPERFECT. 

Que  je  me  fusse  rejoui,  e,  that  I  (might)  h&ve  rejoiced. 
que  tu  te  fusses  rejoui,  e,  etc. 

PARTICIPLE. 
S'etant  (mMtant,  etc.)  rejoui,  e,  having  rejoiced. 


REFLECTIVE   VERBS.  141 

WITH   INTERROGATION. 
PRESENT. 

(Me  rejoufs-jc),  letter:  est-ce  qne  je  me  rejouis,  do  I  rejoice? 
te  rejouis-tu  (or  est-ce  quo  tu  te  rejouis),  dost  thou  rejoice? 
SG  rejouit-il  (or  est-ce  qu'il  se  rejouit)  ?  etc. 

nous  rejouissons-nous  ?  etc, 

vous  rejouissez-vous  ?  etc. 

se  rejouissent-ils  (elles)  1  etc* 

COMPOUND   OF   THE   PRESENT. 

Me  suis-js  rejoui,  e,  have  I  rejoiced? 

t'cs-tu  rejoui,  e/  hast  thou  rejoiced  ? 

s'est-il  rejoui,  has  he  rejoiced  ? 

s'cst-elle  rejouie,  has  she  rejoiced  ? 

nous  sommes-nous  rejouis,  ies,  have  we  rejoiced? 

WITH   NEGATION. 

PRESENT. 

Je  no  me  rejouis  pas,  /  do  not  rejoice* 
tu  ne  te  rejouis  'pas,  'etc. 

il  (elle)  ne  se  rejouit  pas,        etc. 
nous  ne  nous  rejouissons  pas,  etc. 

COMPOUND   OF   THE   PRESENT. 

Je  ne  me  suis  pas  rejoui,  e,  /  have  not  rejoiced. 
tu  ne  t'es  pas  rejoui,  e,  etc. 

il  (ellc)  ne  s'est.pas  rejoui,  e,  etc. 

nous  ne  noua  sommes  pas  rejouis,  ies,  etc. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Ne  te  rejouis  pas,  do  not  rejoice. 

ne  nous  rejouissons  pas,  let  us  not  rejoice* 

ne  vous  rejouissez  pas,  do  not  rejoice. 

INFINITIVE. 

Ne  pas  se  rcjouir,  not  to  rejoice. 

ne  pas  s'etre  rejoui,  e,  not  to  have  rejoiced. 


WITH  NEGATION  AND  INTERROGATION: 
PRESENT. 

Est-ce  que  je  ne  me  rejouis  pas,  do  I  not  rejoice  ? 
ne  te  rejouis-tu  pas,  dost  thou  not  rejoice  ? 
ne  se  rejouit-il  pas,  does  he  not  rejoice  ?  etc. 


XXXI.      TRENTE   ET  UNIEME  LEQON. 

COMPOUND   OP   THE   PRESENT. 

Ne  me  suis-je  pas  rejoui,  e,  have  I  not  rejoiced? 
ne  t'es-tu  pas  rejoui,  e  ?  etc. 

ne  s'est-il  (-elle)  pas  rejoui,  e?  etc. 

ne  nous  sommes-nous  pas  rejouis,  ies  ?  etc. 

Many  verbs,  neuter  or  passive  in  English,  have  in  French  the  reflective 
form.    The  principal  are:  — 

S'affliger,  to  be  sorry.  se  figurer,    \t    * 

s'apercevoir,  to  perceive.  s'imaginer,  )     •*     ™' 

s'approcher,  to  come  near.  se  hater,        )          .,    , 

s'arreter,  to  stop.  se  depecher,  ; 

s'asseoir,  to  sit  down.  se  lever,  to  rise,  to  get  up. 

se  baisser,  to  stoop.  se  marier,  to  marry. 

se  coucher,  to  go  to  bed.  se  moquer,  to  mock,  scoff. 

se  depecher,  to  make  haste.  se  plaindre,  to  complain. 

s'e'crier,  to  exclaim,  cry  out.  se  promener,  to  take  a  walk. 

s'en  aller,  to  go  away.  se  repentir,  to  repent. 

s'endormir,  to  fall  asleep.  se  reposer,  to  rest. 

s'enrhumer,  to  catch  cold.  se  soumettre,  to  submit. 

s'entretenir,  to  discourse  with.  se  souvenir,  to  remember. 

s'etonner,  to  wonder.  se  taire,  to  be  silent. 

s'eveiller,  to  awake.  se  tromper,  to  be  mistaken. 

se  fier,  to  trust.  se  vanter,  to  boast. 

Ex.  —  I  rise,  I  get  up,  je  me  leve. 

I  have  risen  or  got  up,  je  me  suis  lev€. 

We  have  perceived,  nous  nous  sommes  apercus,  etc. 

Observe  also  these  expressions  :  — 

How  are  you,  comment  vous  portez-vous  ? 

I  am  well,  je  me  porte  bien. 

I  am  mistaken,  je  me  trompe. 

I  have  been  mistaken,  je  me  suis  trompe'. 

He  is  silent,  i7  se  tail. 

VOCABULARY. 

Laconduite,  the  behavior.  vaillamment,  bravely. 

la  foret,  the  forest.  fondre,  to  cast. 

le  boulet,  the  ball.  bien,  well ;  mieuxt  better. 

le  litre,  the  right.  se  venger  de,  to  revenge  on. 

la  Boheme,  Bohemia  se  conduire,  to  behave. 


REFLECTIVE   VERBS.  143 

tardf  late.  se  distinguer,  to  distinguish. 

le  maly  the  evil.  enfermer,  to  shut  in. 

se  rendrej  to  surrender.  sauver,  to  save. 
se  coucher,  to  go  to  bed. 

READING    EXERCISE    31. 

Yous  vous  trompez,  Monsieur.  Je  me  suis  trompe  aussi.  II  y 
a  (it  is)  tres-longtemps  qne  nous  ne  nous  (each  other)  sommes 
vus.  Le  general  Ostermann  s'est  distingue"  beaucoup  a  I'affairc 
(batik)  de  Culm.  S'il  ne  s'etait  pas  defendu  si  vaillamment,  Far- 
nice  alliee  aurait  ete  enfermee  dans  les  montagnes  de  la  Boheine. 

Dans  une  bataille  ou  les  boulets  ennemis  volaient  (flew)  autour 
de  lui,  Napoleon  s'ecria :  Le  boulet  qui  doit  (is  to)  me  tuer,  n'est 
pas  encore  fondu  (cast) .  Pourquoi  vous  etes-vous  leve  si  tard  ?  Je 
me  suis  leve  a  sept  hcures.  Ne  vous  affli-gez  pas  tant,  mes  amis ; 
habituez-vouz  a  souffrir  avec  courage  les  maux  de  la  vie.  Yous 
auriez  ete*  sauve,  si  vous  vous  etiez  refugie  au  camp. 

THEME  31. 

1.  I  rejoice  greatly  (beaucoup)  to  see  you  (de  vous  voir). 
2.  Charles  has  wounded  himself  with  a  penknife.  3.  The  enemies 
have  surrendered.  4.  A  good  ^Christian  does  not  -revenge  himself 
on  (de)  his  enemy.  5.  The  soldier  has  distinguished  himself;  he 
will  be  rewarded.  6.vGet  up.!  7.  I  shall  get-up  directly.  8.  Has 
my  broker  got  up  ?  &.  He  (has)  got  up  at  six  o'clock.  10.  Be 
not  sorry,  children,  exclaimed  he,  we  shall  all  be  saved  !  11.  You 
are  mistaken,  Sir.  12.  Yes,  it  is  true  (yrai),  I  have  been  mista- 
ken. 13.  Why  do  you  rejoice  at  the  (du)  misfortune  of  others? 
.14.  When  do  you  go  "to  bed  ?  15.  I  go  to  bed  at  eleven  o'clock"; 
but  yesterday  I  went  (have  gone)  to  bed  at  ten  o'clock.  16.  Make 
haste  !  17.  Where  is  your  mother?  18.  She  is  not  at  home  (a  la 
maisoii)  ;  she  is  taking  a  walk.  19.  I  have  taken  a  walk  this 
morning.  20.  When  will  you  take  a  walk?  21.  I  shall  take  a 
walk  this  evening.  22.  How  are  you  to-day?  23.  I  am  well,  but 
my  brother  is  not  well.  24.  I  (have)  stopped  at  tho  gate  (porte). 
25.  Eest  a  little,  and  come  near  the  fire  (du  feu). 


144: 


XXXI.       TKEXTE   ET    U2OEME   LEQO2T. 


CONVERSATION. 


Vous  vous  etes  trornpe",  nion  ami,  Jc  ne  me  suis  pas  trompe. 

n'est-ce  pas  ? 

Quand  vous  coucherez-vous,  mes  Nous  nous   coucherons  tout  de 

enf  ants  ?  suite. 

A    quelle   heure  vous    etes-vous  Je  me  suis  couche  a  dix  hcures. 

couche  hier  ? 

Et  votre  frere  ?  Mon  frere  s'est  couche   a  onzo 

heures. 

Monsieur  votre  pe*re  est-il   deja  Oui,   il    s'est    leve*    aujourd'hui 

leve"  ?  de  bonne  heure  (early). 

Oh  £tes-vous  done  restes  si  long-  Nous  nous  somines  e"gares  (icent 

temps  ?  astray)  dans  la  f  oret. 

Ta  soeur  s'est-elle  lavee  (washed)  ?  Je  crois  qu'elle  ne  s'est  pas  en- 

core  lav^e. 

Qui  s'est  lave*  dans  cette  eau  ?  Moi. 

Pourquoi  vous  ^tes-vous  leves  si  Nous  ne  nous  sornmes  pas  6veil- 

tard  ?  les  plus  tot  (earlier). 

Qui  veut  se  promener  avec  moi  ?  Ma  sceur  et  moi. 

Vous  etes-vous  Men  amuse"  ?  Oui,  assez  (pretty)  bien. 


READING   LESSON. 
LE   SANSONNET. 

Le  vieux  chasseur  Maurice  avait  dans  sa  chambre  un  saiisonnet 
qu'il  avait  61eve,  et  qui  avait  appris  (learned)  a  articuler  quelques 
mots.  Quand  il  disait  par  exemple :  "  Sansoiinet,  oil  es-tu  ?  "  Toi- 
seau  repondait  tou jours  :  "  Me  voila  !  " 

Le  petit  Charles,  ills  du  voisin,  aimait  beaucoup  Toiseau  et  lui 
faisait  (paid)  souvent  des  visites.  Un  jour  il  vint  voir  le  sansonnet 
pendant  que  le  chasseur  etait  absent ;  il  s^empara  bien  vite  de  Toi- 
seau,  le  mit  (put  it)  dans  sa  poche  et  voulait  s'csquiver  avec  son 
larcin. 

]\Iais  dans  ce  moment  le  chasseur  entra  cliez  lui.     II  cmt  (thought) 


IMPERSONAL  VERBS.  145 

faire  plaisir  an  petit  gargon  en  demandant  (?y  asking)  comme  do 
coutume :  "  Sansonnet,  ou  es-tu  ?  "  —  "  Me  voila ! "  cria  de  toutes 
ses  forces  (his  might)  1'oiseau  qui  etait  cache  dans  la'  poche  du 
petit  gargon. 

C'est  ainsi  quo  le  petit  voleur  fut  tralii. 

Le  sansonnet,  the  starling.  vite,  quick. 

le  mot,  the  word.  la  poche,  the  pocket. 

me  voila,  here  I  am.  s'esquiver,  to  run  away. 

il  vint,  he  came.  le  larcin,  the  larceny.* 

pendant  que,  whilst.  de  coutume;  as  he  used  to  do* 

s'emparer,  to  lay  hold  of  traliir,  to  betray* 


XXXII.    TRENTE-DEUXIEME 


IMPERSONAL    VERBS. 

1.  Verbs  which  arc  always  impersonal  form  their  compound  tenses 
by  means  of  the  auxiliary  avoir.     The  principal  arc  : 

Neiger,  to  snow ;     ^  Pros,  il  neige,  it  snows. 

j>/*TOwrpfd  rain  J  H  pleut,  it  rains. 

greler,  to  hail ;  il  grele,  it  hails. 

tonner,  to  thunder ;  il  tonne,  it  thunders. 

faire  des  Eclairs,  to  lighten ;  il  fait  des  e'clairs,  it  lightens. 

geler,  to  freeze  ;  il  gele,  it  freezes. 

deyeler,  to  thaw ;  il  dfyele,  it  thaws. 

importer,  to  matter ;  il  importe,  it  matters. 
Third  singular  negative  is  n'importe,  no  matter. 

2.  Other  verbs  may  become  impersonal.     Ex. : 

//  siiffit,  it  suffices.  il  convient,  it  is  convenient. 

il  semble,  it  seems.  il  arrive,  it  happens  (takes  ctrc). 

il  vaut  mieux,  it  is  better.  il  s'agit,  it  is  the  question,  etc. 

il  metarde,  I  long.  il  reste,  there  remains. 
10 


146 


XXXII.      TBENTE-DEUZIEME 


MODELS    OF    CONJUGATION. 

1.  Neiger,  to  snow. 


SUBJUNCTIVE 


INDICATIVE. 

Present.  77  neige. 

Imperfect.          H  neigeait. 
Preterite.  H  neigea. 

Future^  H  neigera. 

Comp.  of  Pres.  H  a  neige". 

"       "  Imp.  H  avait  neigc". 

"      "  Pret.  II  mi  neige'. 

"       "  Put.   H  aura  neige". 

Interrogatively :  Neige-t-il  ~?  ncigeait-il  1  a-t-il  neige'?  etc. 


Qa'il  neige. 
qu'il  neigeut. 


qu'il  ait  neige". 
qu'il  eut  neigf. 


Pres.  H  neigeralt. 


Pres.  Neigeant. 


CONDITIONAL. 

Comp.  H  aurait  neige". 

PARTICIPLE. 

Comp.  Ay  ant  neige'. 


2.  II  y  a,  there  is,  there  are. 

INFINITIVE    MOOD. 

Y  avoir,  there  to  be. 


INDIC. 


Present. 

Imperfect 
«lIV 

Pretente. 

Future. 


II  y  a,  there  is,  there  are. 

H  y  avait,  \ 

,,  r  there  was,  there  were. 


,, 

//  y  eut,     ) 

H  y  aura,  there  will  be. 
Comp.  of  Pres.    77  y  a  eu,  there  has  or  have  been. 

"        Imp.    Ey  avait  eu,  }    ,        ,    ,. 
t<        -n    *      TJ  c  there  had  been. 

Prct.    77  y  eut  eu,     ) 

COND.    Present.  II  y  aurait,  there  would  be. 

Comp.  H  y  aurait  eu,  there  would  have  been. 

Interrogatively  :          Y  a-t-il,  is  there  ?  are  there  ? 
Negatively  :  U  n'y  a  pas,  there  is  or  are  not. 

Negat.  interrogat.  :      N'y  a-t-il  pas,  is  or  are  there  not  ? 
STTBJ.     Present.  Qu'il  y  ait,  that  there  (may)  be. 

Imperfect.  Qu'il  y  eut,  that  there  (might)  be. 

Comp.  of  Pres.   Qu'il  y  ait  eu,  that  there  (may)  have  been. 
"      Imp.    Qu'il  y  eut  eu,  that  there  (might)  have  been, 


IMPERSONAL   VERBS.  147 

NOTE  1.     This  verb  in  English  is  used  in  tlw  plural,  when  followed  by  a 
plural  substantive;  in  French,  it  remains  always  in  the  singular;  as, 
There  are  birds  which,  etc. ;  il  y  a  des  oiseaux  qui,  etc. 

NOTE  2.    It  often  happens  that  the  verb  il  y  a  is  rendered  ago,  these,  or 
for  these.    Ex. : 

I  saw  him  two  months  ago. 
Je  I'ai  vu  il  y  a  deux  mois. 

II  y  a  huit  jours  que  je  suis  malade. 
I  have  been  ill  these  eight  days. 

77  est  is  also  used  impersonally,  particularly  in  poetry,  in  the  sense  of 
il  y  a. 

3.     11  fait  froid. 

Present,  //  fait  froid,  it  is  cold. 

Imperfect.  //  faisait  froid.  \  . 

_  A     .  „•*          *.       '\  it  was  cold. 

Preterite.  11  jit  froid,        ) 

Future.  //  fera  froid,  it  will  be  cold,  etc. 

Comp.  of  Pres.    //  a  fait  froid,  it  has  been  cold,  etc. 
Thus  other  expressions  denoting  the  state  of  the  weather:  E  fait  beau, 
it  is  fine  weather ;  il  fait  chaud,  it  is  warm ;  il  fait  jour,  it  is  daylight ,  etc. 
The  English  "  it  is  said  "  is  rendered  in  French,  on  dit. 

4.   Ilfaut. 
INFINITIVE  :  Falloir,  to  be  needful,  necessary. 

INDIC.     Present.  77  faut,  it  is  necessary. 

Imperfect.  II  fallait,  j  ifc  wflfi  nece 

Preterite,  II  fallut,    ) 

,- ^Future.  Il'fandra,  it  will  be  necessary. 

Comp.  of  Present.  //  a  fallu,  it  has  been  necessary. 

«        "  Imperfect,  *Il  avait  fidlu,  \  h  had  bccn  noce          . 

"        "  Preterite.  //  eut  fallu,      ) 

"        "  Future.  //  aura  fallu,  it  will  have  been  necessary. 

COND.      Present.  //  faudrait,  it  would  be  neccssaiy,  (  .  .  .  ought  to). 

Comp.  II  aurait  fallu,  it  would  have  been  necessary. 

INTERROGATIVELY. 

Faut-il?  fallait-il?  fallut-il?  a-t-il  fallu  ?  (is  it  necessary?  was  it  necessa- 
ry T  has  it  been  necessary  ?) 
SCBJ.        Present.      Qii'il  faille,  that  it  (may)  be  necessary. 

Imperfect.  Qii'il  fallal,  that  it  (might)  be  necessary. 
Comp.  of  Present.      Qii'il  aitfalln,  that  it  (may)  have  been  necessary. 

"        "  Imperfect.  Qu'il  eut  fall  a,  tliat  it  (might)  have  been  necessary. 


148  XXXII.      TRENTE-DEUXIEME  LEQCN. 

PARTICIPLE. 
Present,  wanting.  Compound.  Ayantfallu. 

REM.  1.  The  verb  falloir  is  absolutely  impeisonal  throughout  all  its 
tenses.  When  its  subject  is  a  personal  pronoun,  as  :  /  must,  you  must,  etc., 
we  may  add,  for  the  first  person  me,  for  the  second  tc,  for  the  third  lui,  in 
the  plural  nous,  vous,  leur.  More  frequently,  however,  que  with  the  Sub- 
junctive mood  is  preferred.  Ex. :  — 

I  must  read :  il  mefaut  lire,  or  il  faut  queje  Use. 
thou  must  read  :  il  te  faut  lire,  or  il  faut  que  tu  Uses. 
he  must  read :  >  (  il  faut  qu'il  Use. 

she  must  read :  J il  luifant  lire>  or  \  il  faut  qu'dle  lite. 
we  must  read :  il  nous  faut  lire,  or  il  faut  que  nous  lisions. 
you  must  read  :  il  vous  faut  lire,  or  ilfaut  que  vous  lisiez. 
they  must  read :  il  leur  faut  lire,  or  il  faut  qu'ils  lisent. 

I  have  been  obliged  to  read :  il  m'a  falla  lire,  etc. 

2.  "When  the  subject  is  a  noun,  que  with  the  Subjunctive  mood  must  be 
used.     It  must  further  be  observed  that,  when  the  verb  falloir  is  used  in  the 
Present  or  Future  tense,  the  following  verb  must  be  put  in  the  Present  of 
the  Subjunctive ;  but  when  it  is  in  the  Imperfect,  Preterite  or  Conditional, 
the  verb  following  it  must  be  rendered  by  the  Imperfect  of  the  Subjunctive. 
Ex.:  — 

The  boy  must  work,  il  faut  que  le  gargon  travaille. 
The  boy  will  be  obliged  to  work. 
//  faudra  que  le  gargon  travaille. 
The  soldiers  were  obliged  to  retire. 

II  fallait  or  il  fallut  que  les  soldats  se  retirassent. 

3.  When  the  verb  il  faut  is  followed  immediately  by  a  noun  substantive, 
it  signifies  to  want ;  here  also  one  of  the  pronouns  me,  te,  luit  nous,  vous,  leurt 
according  to  the  person,  must  be  inserted.     Ex. :  — 

I  want  (must  have)  a  hat,  il  me  faut  un  chapcau. 
lie  wants  some  money,  il  lui  faut  de  V argent. 
We  want  some  bread,  il  nous  faut  du  pain. 
Did  you  want  some  books,  vous  fallait-il  des  livres  ? 

VOCABULARY. 

Lecompte,  the  account,  bill.  la  chaise,  the  chair. 

la  redingote,  the  coat.  cesser,  to  leave  off,  to  cease. 

le  depart,  the  departure.  quitter,  to  leave. 


IMPERSONAL   VERBS.  149 

la  ruey  the  street.  dessiner,  to  draw. 

le  sort,  (the)  fate.  partir,  to  set  out,  depart. 

la  clianibre,  the  room.  honnete,  honest. 

manquer,  to  be  wanting.  m&ontent,  e,  discontented. 

gouverner,  to  govern.  sagement,  adv.  wisely. 

READING  EXERCISE  32. 

11  plcut.  Jo  crois  qu'il  pleuvra  domain.  J'entends  tonner.  H 
vaut  mieux  (it  is  better)  qu'il  pleuve.  II  a  neige  toute  la  nuit. 
II  y  a  des  hommes  qui  sont  toujours  mecontents.  II  fait  chaud ; 
11  faisait  trop  chaud  dans  votre  chambre.  II  n'y  avait  ni  hommes, 
ni  fcmmes,  ni  enfants.  II  faut  partir.  II  vous  faut  partir.  II 
fallai t  venir  plus  tot  (earlier).  Ne  faudra-t-il  pas  lui  pardonner? 
II  faut  quo  Charles  reste  a  la  maison.  II  fallut  que  Charles  restat 
a  la  maison.  II  mo  fallut  lui  pardonner.  II  y  aura  cette  annee 
beaucoup  do  cerises.  II  faut  quo  les  enfants  obeissent,  &  1'instant 
(instantly) .  II  y  a  eu  de  (at)  tout  temps  des  flatteurs.  II  a  fallu 
qu'elle  payat  son  comptc.  II  y  a  un  Dieu  qui  gouverno  tout 
sagement.  Qu'cst-ce  qu'il  vous  faut  ?  II  me  faut  une  autre  cham- 
bre. 

THEME  32. 

1.  Does  it  snow?  2.  No,  it  does  not  snow,  it  rains.  3.  It  is 
cold  to-day.  4.  I  shall  not  leave  the  room.  5.  Yesterday  it  was 
(ha9%aerr)~rery  cold,  and  it  (has)  snowed  a  great  deal  (beaucoup). 
6.  It  thunders  and  lightens.  7.  There  are  too  many  chairs  in  this 
room.  8.  There  was  much  wine  on  the  table.  9.  Is  there  money 
in  the  purse?  10.  There  are  six  francs  (francs)  in  it.  11. 
There  will  be  a  great  many  nuts  this  year.  12.  There  are  streets  in 
London,  which  are  very  long.  13.  It  is  necessary  to  begin.  14. 
It  was  necessary  to  set  out.  15.  You  must  begin.  16.  He, must 
read.  17.  We  were  obliged  to  set  out.  18.  Ho  has  been  obliged 
to  speak.  19.  The  boy  must  work.  20.  The  girls  must  draw. 
21.  My  father  has  been  obliged  to  go  to  Paris.  22.  Your  uncle 
will  be  obliged  to  leave  London.  23.  The  soldiers  were  obliged  to 
leave  the  town.  24.  I  want  a  good  pen.  25.  Do  you  want,  an- 


150 


XXXII.      TRENTE-DEUXIEME 


other  room?     26.  Yes,  I  want  a  larger  room.     27.  What  do  you 
want?     28.  I  want  or  I  must  have  (fa  Z')  money. 

CONVERSATION. 


Quel  temps  fait-il  aujourd'hui  ? 

Pleut-il? 

Plcuvra-t-il  ? 

La  pluie  a-t-elle  cesse  ? 

Que  vous  faut-il  ? 

Y  a-t-il  assez  de  vin  ? 

Y  avait-il  de  1'argent  dans  cette 
bourse  ? 

As-tu  paye  le  compte  ? 

Faut-il  que  je  me  leve  maintc- 
nant? 

Yous  a-t-il  fallu  partir  de  si 
bonne  heure  (so  early)  ? 

Qui  a  paye  le  diner  ? 

Faut-il  lui  rendre  (return)  Tar- 
gent? 


II  fait  beau  (mauvais)  temps. 
Oui,  il  pleut  tres-fort. 
Je  ne  crois  pas  .qu'il  pleuve. 
Pas  encore ;  il  pleut  sans  cesse. 
II  me  faut  une  rcdingote  neuve. 
Oui,  Monsieur,  il  y  en  a  assez. 
II  y  avait  deux  francs. 

Oui,  il  rn'a  fallu  le  payer. 

Oui,  il  faut  vous   lever   tout  do 

suite. 
Le    depart    etait    fixe*   a   quaire 

heures  et  demie. 
Mon  pere  1'a  paye. 
Oui,  rendez-le-lui. 


READING   LESSON. 
PRODUCTIONS    DE   DIVERS    CLIMATS. 

La  providence  a  si  sagement  arrange*  toutes  choses,  quo  chaque 
climat  fournit  aux  habitants  ce  qui  leur  est  le  plus  indispensable. 
Dans  les  contrees  polaires  il  fait  si  froid,  qu'il  ne  peut  y  croitrc  ni 
fruits,  ni  cere*ales,  ni  legumes.  La  nature  y  a  supplee  par  la 
grande  quantite  de  poissons  quo  Ton  peche  dans  la  mer  et  dans  les 
lacs,  et  par  1'abondance  des  quadrupedes  qui,  a  la  verite  (indeed), 
sont  la  plupart  (mostly)  sauvages  et  feroces,  mais  qui  fournissent  aux 
habitants,  aguerris  (accustomed)  a  les  poursuivre  a  la  chasse,  de 
tres-belles  fourrures,  de  la  chair  rnangeable,  des  os  et  des  nerfs  qu'ils 
emploient  pour  leurs  arcs  (bows)  et  pour  divers  ustensiles. 


FORMATION  OP  ADVERBS.  151 

Les  peuples  des  climats  chauds  ont  le  ver  h  soie  (silkworm), 
qui  so  nourrit  des  feuilles  du  murier  et  qui  leur  file  (spins)  un  le- 
gcr  tissu  dont  on  fait  des  etoffes  convenables  h  la  temperature  du 
pays. 

Le  cotonnier  porte  des  gousses  renfermant  le  coton  dont  le  tissu 
fournit  egalement  (likewise)  les  plus  beaux  vetcments.  Et  pour 
preserver  les  habitants  do  la  zone  torride  de  I'mflammation  d'un 
sang  trop  echauffe,  leurs  campagnes  et  leurs  jardins  leur  fournisscnt 
les  oranges,  les  citrons  et  les  olives  qui  les  rafraichissent. 

Fournir,  to  supply,  furnish.  la  chair,  the  flesh,  meat. 

le  bcsoin,  the  need,  want.  I'os,  the  bone. 

la  contre'e,  the  region.  I'ustensile,  the  tool. 

croitre,  to  grow.  le  murier,  the  mulberry-tree. 

les  ce'reales,  corn.  filer,  to  spin,    le'ger,  light. 

les  legumes,  vegetables.  le  tissu,  the  texture. 

pecher,  to  fish,    la  mer,  the  sea.  convenable,  convenient,  fit. 

sauvage,  wild.  le  cotonnier,  the  cotton-plant. 

fe'roce,  ferocious.  la  gousse,  the  pod,  husk. 

aguerris,  hardened.  le  vetement,  clothing. 

poursuivre,  to  pursue.  echauffe",  heated,  hot. 

lafourrure,  fur,  pelt.  rafraichir,  to  cool,  refresh. 


XX^tlY.    TRENTE-TROISIEME 


FORMATION   OF  ADVERBS. 

Most,  cf  ilio  French  adjectives  become  adverbs  by  adding  the  syl- 
lable -ment,  according  to  the  following  rules :  — 

1.   Adjectives  ending  in  a  vowel,  simply  add  the  final  syllable 
-went,  as  :  — 

Facile,  easy ;  &&v.facilement,  easily. 
poll,  polite ;  adv.  poliment,  politely. 
vrai}  true ;  adv.  vraiment,  truly* 


152  XXXIII.      TRENTE-TROISIEME 

2.  Adjectives  which  do  not  end  in  a  vowel,  add  the  syllable 
-merit  to  their  feminine  termination,  as  :  — 

llaut,  f.  haute,  high ;  adv.  liautement,  aloud. 
doux,  f.  douce,  soft,  mild ;  adv.  doucement,  softly. 
franc,  f.franche,  frank;  &&v.franchement,  frankly,  freely. 
heureux,  f.  heureuse,  happy ;  adv.  hcureusement,  happily. 

So  also  the  adjectives,  nouveau,  new ;  fou,  foolish,  and  mou,  soft ;  adv. 
nouvellement,  follcment,  mollement. 

3.  Adjectives  which  end  in   -ant  or  -ent,  become  adverbs  by 
changing  the  final  -ant  into  -amment,  and  -ent  into  -emment,  as  :  — 

Constant,  constant ;  adv.  constamment. 
prudent,  prudent ;  adv.  prudemment. 
patient,  patient ;  adv.  patiemment. 

Exceptions  to  this  rule  are:  lent,  slow,  adv.  lentement;  and  present,  pres- 
ent, adv.  pr€seniement,  actually,  at  present. 

4.  The  following  adjectives  take  an  e  accented  before  the  final 
-ment.      Profond,  deep,  profondement ;    commode,  comfortable, 
commodemcnt ;  commun,  common,  communement ;  precis,  precise, 
precisement ;   enorme,  enormous,  enormement ;   expres,  express, 
expressement ;  impuni,  unpunished,  impunement. 

5.  All  these  derived  adverbs,  as  well  as  some  others,  are  com- 

pared,  as :  — 

COMP.  SUP. 

Facilement,  plus  facilemcnt,  le  plus  f  aril  ement. 

commode'ment,  moms  commod&nent,       le  moins  commode'ment, 

souvent,  often ;  plus  souvent,  le  plus  souvent. 

longtemps,  long ;  plus  longtemps,  le  plus  longtemps. 

loin,  far ;  plus  loin,  le  plus  loin. 

6.  The  following  adverbs  are  irregular  in  the  formation  of  their 
comparatives  and  superlatives  :  — 

COMP.  SUP. 

Z?ien,well;  mieux,  better;  le  mieux,  (the)  best 

mal,  badly ;  pis,  worse  ;  le  pis,  the  worst. 

pen,  little ;  mains,  less  ;  le  moins,  the  leo^st. 

beaucoup,  much ;  plus,  more;  leplus,  most. 

tout  mieux  is  rendered :  so  much  the  better. 
tant  pis,  so  much  the  worse. 


FORMATION  OF  ADVERBS.  153 

7.  When  cither  le  plus  or  le  moms  qualifies  a  verb,  adverb,  or  participle 
not  used  adjcctively,  le  retains  the  masculine  form.     Ex. :  Une  lettre  tcrtic 
lev!  us  soiyneusement. 

8,  The  following  adjectives  are  used  adverbially  without  taking  an  addi- 
tional termination,  as :  — 

Vite,  quick,  fast,  fort,  very.  expres,  purposely. 

haul,  loudly.  soudain,  suddenly. 

bos,  in  a  low  voice.  droit,  straightways. 

VOCABULARY. 

L'tfat,  m.  the  state.  ponctudlement,  punctually. 

fdchf*  sorry,  angry.  avouer,  to  confess. 

tgal,  equal.  entretenu    (part.),   entertained, 

g&i&reusement,  generously.  propre,  clean.  [amused. 

eloquemment,  eloquently.  rarement,  seldom. 

tternd,  eternal,    agir,  to  act.  malheureusement,  unfortunately. 

marcher,  to  walk.  modestement,  modestly. 

nfyliyer,  to  neglect.  probablement,  likely. 

occuptf,  occupied.  extremement,  extremely. 

dessiner,  to  draw.  la  fortune,  property. 
oubtier,  to  forget. 

READING  EXERCISE   33. 

Yous  lo  trouvercp  facilemcnt.  Lcs  gens  parcsscux  negligent 
ordiria&eincnt  leurs  affaires.  Agissez  genereusement  cnyers  vos 
cnnemis.  Dicu  a  sagement  distribue  ses  dons.  Parlcz  modestement 
do  vos  merites.  Get  homme  a  parle  tres-eloquemment.  Henri  IV, 
etait  constamment  occupe  de  la  prosperite  do  ses  etats.  Le  voleur 
marcha  doucement ;  il  avait  probablement  pour  d'etre  entendu.  Je 
Buis  extremement  facbe  d'apprendre  cette  nouvelle.  Nettoyez 
raioux  vos  habits.  Vous  n'etes  pas  proprcmcnt  habille.  JSTe  mar- 
chez  pas  si  lentement.  Les  enfants  qui  aiment  passionnemont  le  jcu, 
negligent  souvent  leurs  taclies  (tasks). 

*  When  meaning,  sorry,  it  takes  de  before  its  obj. :  meaning,  angry,  centre. 


154 


XXXIII.      TRENTE-TEOISIEME   LE£ON. 


THEME    33. 

1.  This  pupil  learns  (apprend)  easily,  but  he  forgets  as  (aussi) 
easily  that  which  ho  learns.  2.  The  king  has  generously  pardoned 
(to)  his  enemies.  3.  Nobody  is  constantly  happy  in  this  world. 
4.  The  name  of  Shakspeare  will  live  (vivrd)  eternally.  5.  Speak 
frankly.  G.  My  brother  is  constantly  occupied.  7,  Confess  freely 
your  faults.  8.  Unfortunately  I  have  not  found  him  at  home. 
9.  Speak  softly.  10.  The  artist  plays  admirably  (well).  11.  I 
have  seldom  received  letters  from  my  brother-in-law  (Jbeau-frere). 
12.  Everybody  must  punctually  observe  the  laws.  13.  If  you  fulfil 
faithfully  your  duties,  you  will  be  esteemed  by  (de)  everybody. 
14.  You  have  stayed  longer  than  your  brother.  15.  The  little  girl 
draws  very  well ;  she  draws  better  than  her  sister. 


CONVERSATION. 


Comment  parle  cet  homme  ? 

Avaz-vous  des  nouvellcs  dc  votre 
frere  a  Paris  ? 


A-t-il  perdu  quelque  chose  ? 

Monsieur  M.  est-il  fache  ? 
Pourquoi  est-il  faclie*  ? 

Comment    faut-il    agir  ?      (How 

must  people  act  ?  ) 
Charles,  tu  es  maladc  ;  qu'as-tu  ? 


Vous  etes  probablement  le  frcrc 
de  Monsieur  Richard  ? 


H  parle  trcs-eloquemment  et 
tres-franchement. 

II  m'ecrit  (writes)  rarement. 
Heureuserncnt  je  sais  (know) 
par  un  de  ses  amis  qu'il  so 
porte  bien. 

II  a  probablement  perdu  une 
partie  de  sa  fortune. 

Oui,  il  est  extrernement  fache'. 

H  est  fache  contre  son  fils  qui 
a  etc  me  chant. 

II  faut  toujours  agir  prudem- 
ment  et  honnetement. 

J'ai  mal  a  la  tete  (head-ache) ; 
mais  heureusement  ce  n'est 
pas  grand'chosc  (conse- 
quence). 

Non,  Madame,  mais  jc  suis  son 
cousin. 


ADVERBS    OF   PLACE    AND    OF   TIME. 


155 


Comment  co  general  a-t-il  agi  en-    II  a  agi  lixs-genereusement. 


vers  scs  ennemis  : 


Pourqpoi   marchez-voTis   si   lente-     J'ai  mal  au  pied. 

ment? 

Oette  loi  est-elle  obscrvee  ?  Elle  est  ponctuellcment  obser- 

vee  de  tout  le  mondc. 


XXXIY.    TBENTE-QUATBJEMB 


ADVERBS   OF  PLACE  AND   OF   TIME. 


1.  The  principal  adverbs  of  place  are  : 

Ou,  where  ?  whither  ?  d'ou,  whence  7 

par  ou,  which  way  ?  dedans,       1  .     .. 

,    '      f  within,  inside. 
ici,  here,     a  ici,  hence.  en  dedans,  ) 

la,  there,    de  la,  thence. 
la-bas,  there  below,  yonder. 
y,  there,  therein. 


dedans, 
,  , 
en  dedans, 

deliors,  without,  out  of  doors. 
derriere,  behind. 
devant,  before. 


par  id,  this  way.    par  la,  that  way.     deca,  en  dega,  on  this  side. 


dda,  au  dela,  on  that  side. 
prcs,  aupres,  near. 
proche,  close  by. 
alentour,  round, about. 
pariout,  everywhere. 
nulle  part,  nowhere. 
jusqu'a,  as  far  as. 
jusqu'ou,  how  far  ? 
loin,  far,  far  off. 

2.  The  principal  adverbs  of  time  are  : 

Quand,  when  ?  ,  un  jour,  one  day. 

aujourd'hui,  to-day.  autrefois,  jadis,  formerly. 

hier,  yesterday.  auparavant,  previously,  before. 

avant-hier,  the  day  before  yesterday,  alars,  puis,  then. 

demain.  to-morrow.  apres,  after,  afterwards. 


par-ci,  par-la,  here  and  there. 

$aet  la,  to  and  fro.' 

ailleurs,  elsewhere. 

dessous,  underneath. 

dessus,  above. 

en  haut,  up,  up  stairs. 

en  bas,  down  stairs,  below. 

quelque  part,  somewhere. 


156  XXXIV.      TRENTE-QUATRIEME   LEgON. 

apres-demain ,  the  day  after  to-mor-    jusqu'a,  until, 
row.  ensuite,  aftenvards. 

enfm,  at  last,  at  length.  a  present.    \ 

i    ;  -.  (  now,  at  present. 

tot,  soon,    plus  tot,  sooner.  maintenant,  ) 

bientot,  soon,     trap  tot,  too  soon.  quelquefois,  sometimes. 

tantot,  by  and  by.  souvent,  often. 

aussitot,  directly.  longtemps,  long, 

fare/,  late.  toujours,  always. 

d'abord,  at  first.  dernierement,  \  . 

7  -         .      ,  f  lately,  of  late. 

d€sarmaist    l  '  naguere,         )         J 

,    A         '    f  henceforth.  T%  ^ 

aortfnavant,  )  dfya,  already. 

des-lors,  from  then.  encore,  still,  yet. 

depuis,  since.  jamais,  ever,    ne jamais,  never 

IFAerc  and  m  irA«cA  arc  rendered  by  ow,  after  a  noun  signifying  f  t'me  or  place. 

PLACE   OP   ADVERBS. 

REM.  1.  In  the  simple  tenses,  the  adverb  is  generally  placed  immediately 
after  the  verb  which  it  modifies  : 

She  always  cries,  die  pleure  toujours. 
I  often  take  a  walk  with  my  friend. 
Je  me  promene  souvent  avec  mon  ami. 

REM.  2.  When  the  verb  is  in  a  compound  tense,  the  adverb  generally 
comes  between  the  auxiliary  and  the  participle ;  as, 

Je  Vai  toujours  respect^,  I  have  always  esteemed  him. 
Je  me  suis  souvent  promentf  avec  mon  maitre. 
I  have  often  taken  a  walk  with  my  master. 

N.  B.  — Hier,  avant-hier,  aujourd'hui,  demain,  apres-demain,  tantot,  tot,  and 
tardt  always  follow  the  participle,  unless  placed  before  the  auxiliary. 

VOCABULARY. 

Le  temps,  the  weather.  le  brouillard,  the  fog,  mist. 

le  village,  the  village.  I'ouvrage,  m.  the  work. 

la  grammaire,  the  grammar.  diner,  to  dine. 

content,  satisfied.  venir,  to  come. 

le  chemin  de  fer,  the  railroad.  laisser,  to  leave. 

READING   EXERCISE   34. 

Le  temps  estbiendoux  aujourd'lmi.    Mon  cousin  cst  enfin  arrivd. 
L'autre  jour  je  me  suis  <5gar6  dans  la  foret.     Travaillcz  d'abord  et 


-  \ 
ADVERBS   OP  PLACE   AND    OF   TIME.  157 

ensuitc  jouez.  Avez-vous  jamais  vu  un  enfant  comme  eelui-la?  En 
effet,  il  est  extremement  gros.  Le  brouillard  aura  bientot  disparu. 
D'ou  venez-vous  maintenant,  et  ou  avez-vous  cte  hier?  Voyez-vous 
co  villago  la-bas?  Eh  bien  (well),  j'y  ai  etc  hier  et  aujourd'huL 
J'y  vais  quelquefois.  M'avez-vous  apporte  la  grammaire  dont  je 
vous  ai  parie  ?  Voulez-vous  venir  diner  avec  nous  domain  ?  Do- 
main je  ne  serai  pas  ici,  mais  apres-demain  ou  plus  tard.  .  Enfin 
inon  ouvrage  est  fini. 

THEME    34. 

1.  Where  is  my  brother?  2.  He  is  not  hero  ;  he  is  elsewhere; 
he  is  perhaps  yonder.  3.  I  will  go  (firai)  that  way.  4.  Carry 
all  that  up  stairs.  5.  How  far  did  you  go  yesterday  ?  6.1  went 
as  far  as  London.  7.  I  shall  go  nowhere  to-day.  8.  That  village 
is  not  far ;  do  you  see  (voyez-vous)  it  yonder  ?  9.  Where  is  my 
grammar?  10.  I  have  left  it  somewhere.  11.  Is  Edward  here? 
12.  No;  he  is  below.  13.  My  friend  will  not  stay  here  long.  14. 
I  saw  (have  seen)  your  sister  yesterday  at  the  play  (au  spectacle) . 
15.  He  will  always  be  satisfied.  16.  Come  back  (revenez)  soon. 
17.  Did  you  know  [have  you  known  (connu)~\  him  formerly?  18. 
Yes,  I  have  known  him  long.  19.  Whence  does  the  letter  come  ? 
20.  It  comes  from  America.  21.  Your  dog  is  out  of  doors.  22. 
How  is  (se  porte)  ^your  aunt  to-day  ?  23.  She  is  better  to-day  than 
[slie  was J yesterday,  24.  I  hope  you  will  dine  with  us  to-morrow. 
25.  I  shall  go  soon  into  the  country  (a  la  campagne).  26.  We 
expected  him  the  day  before  yesterday.  27.  Formerly  there  were 
no  railroads.  28.  Henceforth  I  shall  be  very  diligent. 


158  XXXV.      TRENTE-CIXQUIEME  LE£OX. 

XXXV.     TRENTE-CIXQUIEME 


ADVERBS  OF  NUMBER,  OF  QUANTITY,  OF 

NEGATION,   ETC. 
The  adverbs  of  number  are  : 

Premierement,  firstly.  sixiemement ,  sixthly,  etc. 

deuxi&nejn&it,  }  combien  de  foi's,  how  often  ? 

.  ( secondly.  .       J 

secondement,  une  fois,  once. 

troisiemement,  thirdly.  deitx  fois,  twice. 

qiiatricmement,  fourthly.  trois  fois,  three  times,  etc. 

cinqw'emement,  fifthly. 

The  principal  adverbs  of  quantity  and  comparison  arc  : 

Comment,  how  1  presque,  almost. 

combien,  how  much  ?  how  many  1        environ,        \    . 

,     ( about. 
beaucoitp,  much,  many.  a  pen  pres,  ) 

lien  (with  du,  de  V,  des  following)  a    si,  so.    aijisi,  thus. 

great  deal  or  many.  aussi,  as. 

tropt  too  much,  too  many.  (fgalemcnt,  likewise. 

tant,  so  much,  so  many.  autant,  as  much,  as  many. 

assez*  enough,  pretty.  d'autant  plus,  so  much  the  more. 

pen,  little,    tm  peu,  a  little.  pluiot,  rather. 

ne — guere,  hardly.  surtout,  above  all. 

bien, }  au  plus,          { 

,  '  /  ,      (  at  most. 

ires,  >  very.  tout  au  plus,  ) 

fort,  )  du  mains f  au-  mains,  at  least. 

plus,  more.  settlement,  ) 

davantoge,  still  more.  ne  —  que,  )       ^* 

mains,  less.  meme,  eyen. 

tout,  1  pas  meme,        ) 

taut  a  fait,    \  1mtC'  wholl-T' entird^  pas  s^nent,  \  DOt  "^ 

The  adverbs  of  affirmation  and  negation  are  : 

Oui,  yes.    si,  yeS.  ne — pas,  not. 

certcs,  certainly.  ne — plus,  no  more. 

peitt-ctre,  perhaps.  72071  plus,  nor  —  cither. 

*  Assez  precedes  in  FreDch  the  noun  or  adjectiye  it  limits.    Ex. :  Assez  de  via, 
bon.    See  p.  32. 


ADVERBS  OP  NUMBER,  OF  QUANTITY,  ETC.     159 


nt,  I  ne — point,  not  (at  all). 

(  certainly,  to  be  sure.  ,    .          > 

•>    *  pas  du  tout,     I... 


csrtainement, 

assure'ment.    i  *^wo  we*  tvi*t-,  ,. 

^  .      7       '    \  notataU. 
non,  no.  .  point  du  tout,  ) 

presque  jamais,  scarcely  ever.  ne  —  rien,  nothing. 

There  are  many  adverbial  locutions ;  those  most  in  use  are  : 

A  peine,  scarcely.  tout  a  coup,  suddenly. 

en  effet,  really.  tout  d'un  coup,  all  at  once. 

sur  le  champ,  directly.  a  droite,  to  the  right. 

peu  a  peu,  by  degrees.  a  gauche,  to  the  left. 

dans  peu  or  sous  peu,  soon.  ensemble,  together. 

a  dessein,  on  purpose.  pcle-mele,  pell-mell. 

en  meme  temps,  at  the  same  time.  d'avance,  beforehand,  in  advance. 

a  la  fois,  at  once,  at  a  time.  sans  doute,  no  doubt. 

de  bonne  heure,  early.  tout  a  I'heure, ")  directly,  immcdiate- 

de  meilleure  heure,  earlier.  tout  de  suite,    )      ly. 

a  Ion  marche",  cheap.  par  hasard,  by  chance. 

a  fond,  thoroughly.  en  attendant,  meanwhile. 

par  an,  yearly,    par  jour,  daily.  de  temps  en  temps, }  from  time  to 

par  mois,  monthly.  de  temps  a  autre,    j"      time. 

OF   NEGATION. 

1.  Not  is  translated  into  French  by  ne,  which  is  placed  before  the  verb, 
and  pas  or  point  after  it,  in  simple  tenses.    Ex. : 

Je  ne  veux  pas,  I  will  not,  I  do  not  wish. 
Je  ne  sais  pas,  I  do  not  know. 

2.  In  compound  tenses,  ne  comes  before  the  auxiliary,  and  pas  after  it. 
Ex.  :^c- 

Je  n'ai  pas  vu,  I  have  not  seen. 
Elle  n'a  pas  parle',  she  did  not  speak. 
Point  is  merely  a  stronger  negative  than  pas,  as  : 
Je  nyai  point  parle",  I  did  not  speak  (at  all). 

3.  Ne  is  employed  without  pas,  if  there  is  in  the  sentence  a  pronoun  or 
adverb  expressing  negation,  such  as  pcrsonne,  nul,  rien,  jamais,  ni,  ne — phis, 
point,  guere.    Ex. : 

Je  ne  connais  pcrsonne,  I  know  nobody. 

Je  ne  veux  rien,  I  wish  for  nothing. 

Je  ne  sais  plus,  I  know  no  more. 

Elle  n'a  jamais  dit  ccla,  she  never  said  so. 

4.  If  one  of  the  negations  is  followed  by  a  noun  in  the  partitive  sense, 
this  noun  is  simply  preceded  by  de : 


160  XXXV.      TRENTE-CINQUIEME 

Affirmative  :  J'ai  du  pain,  I  have  some  bread. 

Negative :  Je  n'ai  pas  de  pain,  I  have  no  bread. 

Affirmative :  Avez-vous  de  Vargent,  have  you  any  money  ? 

Negative :  Je  n'ai  point  d'argent,  I  have  no  money. 
5.   With  the  infinitive,  ne — pas,  ne — point,  ne  —  ricn,  etc.,  are  generally 
not,  separated,  as : 

Ne  pas  se  vcnyer,  not  to  revenge  one's  self. 

Ne  plus  €crire,  to  write  no  more. 

Ne  ricn  manger,  to  eat  nothing. 
G,   Without  a  verb,  the  negatives  stand  without  ne,  as  : 

Pas  a  la  fois,  not  at  once.    Pas  moi,  not  I. 

Pas  beaucoup,  pas  trop,  pas  tant,  pas  aujourd'hui, 

7.  Non  plus,  nor — either,  requires  the  full  negation  ne — pas  before  it,  as. 

Je  ne  le  veux  pas  non  plus,  nor  will  I  have  it  either. 

8.  If  nor  —  either  is  connected  only  with  a  noun  or  pronoun,  without  a 
verb,  the  noun  or  the  pronoun  is  preceded,  in  French,  by  ni,  as  : 

Nor  Charles  either,  ni  Charles  non  plus. 

9.  Observe  the  expression  ne  —  que  for  only,  as  : 

Je  n'ai  que  deux  socurs,  I  have  only  two  sisters. 
12  n'a  qu'un  morceau  de  pain,  he  has  only  a  piece  of  bread. 
Elle  nya  apporte"  qu'une  assiette,  she  brought  but  one  plate. 
L' enfant  n'a  que  dix  ans,  the  child  is  only  ten  years  old. 
H  n'est  que  six  heures,  it  is  only  six  o'clock. 

VOCABULARY. 

La  fois*  f.  the  time.  inoui,  e,  unheard  of. 

le  crime,  the  crime.  amicalement,  friendly. 

travailler,  to  work.  toiler,  to  shun. 

laconique,  laconic.  la  socie'te',  the  society. 

refuser,  to  refuse.  merci,  thank  you. 

READING  EXERCISE  35. 

Ce  crime  cst  tout-a-fait  inoui.  Comment  vous  portcz-vous  ?  Je 
ni3  porte  tres-bicn.  Combien  d'aunes  de  ce  drap  TOUS  faut-il  ?  II 
m'en  faut  beaucoup;  il  m'en  faut  au  moins  trento  aunes.  Ycus 
etes-vous  promene  longtemps  ?  Je  me  suis  promene  environ  deux 

*  When  the  noun  times  denotes  repetition,  as  the  number  of  times,  it  is  trans- 
lated by  fois. 


ADVERBS  OF  NUMBER,  OF  QUANTITY,  ETC.     161 

hcurcs ;  peut-etre  un  pen  moins.  Yotre  tante  va-t-ello  souvent  au 
spectacle  ?  Elle  n'y  va  (goes')  prcsque  jamais,  et  mon  oncle  n'y  va 
pas  du  tout.  Monsieur,  vous  avez  peu  de  fautes  dans  votre  traduc- 
tion.  Combien  en  ai-je  ?  Yous  en  avez  moins  que  votre  frere ; 
vous  n'en  avez  quo  deux  ou  trois,  tout  au  plus  quatre.  J'ai  appiis 
(learned)  ma  lefon  par  coeur.  Habillez-vous  tout  de  suite.  C'est 
en  vain  que  vous  chcrchez  a  le  sauver.  Marchez  a  droite ;  moi,  je 
marcherai  a  gauche.  Sans  doute,  cela  vaut  mieux.  J'ai  achete  ce 
tiibleau  a  bon  marche. 

THE3IE  35. 

1.  How  mucli  sugar  have  you  bought?  2.  How  many  lessons 
a  (par)  week  have  you  ?  3.  You  eat  too  much ;  you  must  eat  less. 
4.  That  young  man  works  too  much.  5.  Give  him  a  little  money. 
G.  Give  me  more  time.  7.  There  were  many  ladies,  and  we  had  a 
great  deal  of  pleasure.  8.  Have  you  not  played  enough?  9.  I 
think  (that)  you  will  not  have  it.  10.  Mr.  A.  is  a  very  laconic 
man ;  he  always  answers  yes  or  no.  11.  It  is  better  not  to  refuse 
him.  12.  I  have  only  one  brother,  and  my  cousin  has  only  one  sis- 
ter. 13.  She  is  only  five  years  old.  14.  I  have  never  seen  her. 
15.  She  never  comes  to  our  house  (cliez  nous).  16.  We  certainly 
shall  go  out  (sortirons)  together.  17.  My  father  has  bought  a 
horse  very  cheap.  .,,18.  Have  you  seen  anybody  ?  19.  I  have  seen 
nob'3?t^.~~20.  The  thunder-storm  came  on  suddenly.  21.  I  got  up 
early;  earlier  than  my  brother.  22.  You  must  always  shun  the 
society  of  these  bad  people.  23.  Go  (allez)  to  the  right.  24.  I 
shall  go  to  the  left ;  we  shall  arrive  at  the  same  time. 

CONVERSATION. 

Comment  trouvez-vous  lo  temps  Je  le  trouve  fort  beau  (or  bien 

aujourd'hui  ?  beau) . 

Voici  du  jambon.      En  voulez-  Donnez-m'en   un    peu,   s'il  vous 

vous?  plait  (please). 

En  voulez-vous  davantage  ?  Non,  merci,  j'en  ai  assez. 
11 


162 


XXXYI.      TRENTE-SIXIEME 


Serez-Yous  chez  vous  (at  home) 

deraain  matin  ? 
A  quelle  heure  avcz-vous  dine 

hier  ? 
Dinercz-Yous  aujourd'hui   a  la 

raeme  hcure  ? 
Que  ferez-vous  (will  you  do) 

pendant  cc  temps  ? 
AYCZ-YOUS  fait  cela  a  dessein  ? 
Avez-vous  fini  Yotre  theme  ? 

Que  fait  cctte  petite  fille  la-Las  ? 

Ccnnaisscz-Yous  cet  ouYrage 
(work)  f 

AYCZ-YOUS  lu  (read)  ce  livre  ? 

Quand  Youlez-Yous  Ycnir  jouer 
aYee  moi  ? 

Comment  YOUS  portez-Yous  ? 

Et  Monsieur  Yotre  pere,  com- 
ment se  porte-t-il  ? 


Assurement,  je  serai  chez  moi 
toutc  la  journee  (day). 

Hier  j'ai  dine  a  cinq  heures  pre- 
cises. 

Non,  aujourd'hui  je  ne  dmerai 
qu'a  six  heures. 

Jc  me  promenerai  en  attendant. 

Non,  je  ne  1'ai  pas  fait  expres. 

Je  nc  1'aurai  guere  fini  avant  sept 
heures. 

Elle  chcrche  des  fraises  (straw- 
berries) . 

Get  ouYrage  m'cst  tout-a-fait  in- 
connu. 

Je  Fai  lu  plus  de  deux  fois. 

Je  finirai  d'abord  ma  tache  et 
apres,  nous  joucrons. 

Je  me  porto  a  merYcille. 

II  se  porte  assez  bicn.  II  est 
sorti  hier  pour  la  premiere  fois. 


XXXVI.    TRENTE-SIXIEME 


CONJUNCTIONS. 

The  principal  simple  conjunctions  are  :  — 


Et,  and. 

et  —  et,  both  —  and. 

OM,  or. 

ou — OM,  either — or. 


pourtant,  yet,  still. 
nfanmoins,  nevertheless. 
si,  if,  whether. 
sinon,  if  not. 


CONJUNCTIONS.  163 

ni — m,  neither — nor.  comme,  as. 

que,  that,  than  (after  a  comp.).  or,  now. 

car,  for.  done,  consequently,  then. 

mais,  but.  puisque,  since,  as. 

toutefois,     )  quoique  (with  the  Subj.),  though. 

cependant,  }  however. 

1.  Among  these  simple  conjunctions,  only  one  governs  the  Sub- 
junctive mood,  viz.  :  quoique,  though  or  although.     Ex. :  quoique 
je  sois  malade,  though  I  am  ill. 

Eor  the  Subjunctive  after  que,  see  P.  II.  L.  19. 

2.  Si  denotes  a  condition  or  supposition :  s'il  vient,  if  he  comes ; 
si  vous  voulez,  if  you  like.     When  si  is  followed  by  an  Imperfect 
or  Pluperfect,  those  tenses  are  always  in  the  Indicative  mood.    (See 
P.  n.  L.  19.) 

If  I  had,  s/  f  avals  ;  If  I  were,  si  f&ais  ; 
If  I  had  seen  him,  si  je  V avals  vu. 

NOTE.  The  i  in  si  is  cut  off  before  il  and  Us,  but  nowhere  else,  as  :  s'il 
avait,  but  si  elle  avail,  etc. 

3.  The  conjunction  ni  —  ni  requires  ne  before  its  verb,  and  the 
noun  which  follows  it  takes  no  article,  if  used  in  the  partitive  sense, 

as:  — 

Je  n'ai  ni  perc  ni  mere,  I  have  neither  father  nor  mother. 

4.  The  .conjunction  que  serves  to  connect  two  ideas  so  as  to  form 
of  the'  two  one  sentence,  as  : 

Je  crois  que  vous  avez  raison,  I  believe  you  are  right. 

In  English  the  conjunction  that  is  almost  always  understood,  whereas 
que  is  not  only  always  expressed  in  French,  but  repeated  before  each  mem- 
ber of  the  proposition,  as :  — 

Je  crois  que  vous  avez  raison  et  que  vous  rfussirez. 

I  think  you  are  right  and  that  you  will  succeed. 

5.  When  a  conjunction  governs  several  verbs,  it  is  placed  before 
the  first  verb  only,  and  que  is  used  before  the  other  verbs.     Ex. : 
As  he  is  diligent  and  takes  pains,  comme  il  est  applique  ct  qu^il 
prend  de  la  peine. 


1G4  XXXVI.      TRENTE-SIXIEME    LE^ON. 

6.  Done  is  often  used  like  the  English  auxiliary  Jo,  to  urge  or  incite.  Ex., 
Taisez-vous  done,  do  be  silent.  It  is  also  used  interrogatively :  C'est  dona 
vcus  qui  avezfait  cela  ? 

VOCABULARY. 

Plier,  to  bend.  le  lien,  the  good. 

lever,  to  lift  up .  plus  — plus,  the  more  —  the  more. 

Veloile,  f.  the  star.  plus  —  moins,  the  more  —  the  less. 

fyuist,  e,  exhausted.      '  moins — moins,  the  less  —  the  less. 

avare,  avaricious.  soil — soil,  be  it  —  or. 

savant,  learned.  tantot — tantot,  sometimes  —  some- 

rompre,  to  break.  times,  now  —  then. 

habiter,  to  inhabit.  ni — non  plus,  nor  —  either. 

READING  EXERCISE  3(3. 

L'ambition  ct  1'avarice  sont  deux  grandes  sources  du  malheur  hu- 
main.  Les  discours  impies  (impious)  gatent  h  la  fois  1'esprit  et  le 
creur.  Cette  eau  est  froide  comme  de  la  glace.  Yotre  tableau  est 
precieux,  mais  il  'ne  me  plait  (please)  pas.  II  arriva  comme  je 
sortais.  Elle  n'est  ni  laide  ni  belle.  Vous  vous  amusez,  et  cepen- 
clanfc  le  temps  fuit  (flies).  Get  homme  est  tres-fort,  et  pourtant  il 
ne  peut  pas  lever  ce  fardeau  (weight).  Ou  vous  me  paierez,  ou 
vous  irez  en  prison.  Donnez-moi  de  Feau,  s'il  vous  plait.  Martin 
est  encore  bien  jeune,  neanmoins  il  est  fort  sage.  Bienheureux  sont 
ceux  qui  aiment  la  paix,  car  ils  seront  appeles  les  cnfants  de  Dieu. 
Vous  ne  le  savez  pas  ?  Ni  moi  non  plus.  Tantot  il  veut  une  chose, 
tantot  il  en  veut  une  autre. 

THEME  36. 

1.  Gold  and  silver  are  metals.  2.  Silver  is  less  useful  than  iron. 
3.  Mr.  A.  is  very  inconsistent  (inconsequent)  ;  he  is  sometimes  of 
one  opinion  (avis,  m.)  and  sometimes  of  another.  4.  I  like  you,  as 
I  know  (sais)  that  you  are  always  attentive.  5.  This  man  is  es- 
teemed by  everybody,  even  by  his  enemies.  6.  I  am  very  glad  to 
see  that  you  do  not  love  flattery.  7.  Some  one  has  done  it,  either 
you  or  your  brother.  8.  The  more  you  will  work,  the  more  you  will 
gain.  9  This  horse  may  be  very  strong,  nevertheless  it  does  not 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


1G5 


please  me.  10.  The  longer  the  days  (are)  (constr.  the  more  the 
d.  are  long),  the  shorter  (are)  the  nights.  11.  Though  he  said 
(dit)  (that)  he  had  no  appetite,  yet  he  ate  all  the  meat  and  bread. 
12.  Nobody  knows  whether  the  stars  are  inhabited  orjiot.  13.  The 
reed  bends,  but  does  not  break.  14.  Do  not  bend  the  bow  too 
much,  otherwise  it  will  break.  15.  The  more  I  sang,  the  less  em- 
barrassed I  was.  16.  If  you  do  (faites)  it,  you  will  be  punished, 
17.  He  appeared  (paraissait)  very  modest,  although  he  was  very 
learned.  18.  In  order  to  be  learned,  you  must  study  much.  19. 
I  punish  him  as  he  deserves  (it).  20.  You  must  stay  at  home, 
since  you  are  not  quite  well.  21.  When  he  had  done  speaking 
(fini  de  parler),  he  was  quite  exhausted.  22.  If  I  had  had  faith- 
ful friends,  I  should  not  be  so  unhappy.  23.  You  will  be  happy, 
if  you  do  your  duty  (devoir).  24.  I  was  sleeping  when  your  ser- 
vant entered  (entra). 

CONVERSATION. 

r   *> 

Etes-vous  heureux,  mon  ami  ?       Je  lo  serais,  si  j'avais  de  bona 

livres. 
Si  ce  n'cst  que  cela,  je  peux    Je  vous  en  serais  tres-oblige. 

vous  en  dormer.    En  voulez- 
.  vous  ? 
Quelles  sont  les  deux  grandcs    L'ambition  et  Favarice. 

sources    du     malheur    des 
,    hommes  ? 
Que  fait-on  souvent,  quand  on     On  fait  souvent  des  sottises. 

est  jeune  ? 
Quo  dit  J^sus-Christ  de  ceux    H  dit  qu'ils  seront  appeles  "en 

qui  aiment  la  paix  ?  fants  de  Dieu." 

Que  veut  cet  enfant?  II  veut  tantot  ceci,  tantot  ccla. 

Comment     trouvez-vous    cette     Elle  n'est  ni  belle  ni  laide. 

demoiselle  ? 
Ne  pouvcz-vous  pas  lever  cette     Je  ne  peux  pas  la  lever,  quoiquo 

pierre  ?  je  sois  tres-fort. 


1G6  XXXVI.      TRENTE-SIXIEME   LEgON. 

Comment    Dicu    traltc-t-il    Ics  II  Ics  traite  comme  un  pere  traite 

homines  ?  ses  enfants. 

Quelle  proprietd  a  le  roscau  ?  II  (se)  pile  et  ne  rompt  pas. 

Quand  faut-il  forger  le  fer  ?  Quand  il  est  chaud. 


READING  LESSON. 
LAFITTE. 

Lorsquc  Jacques  Lafitte  vint  (came)  a  Paris,  il  so  presenta  chez 
M.  Perregaux  dans  1'esperance  d'obtenir  une  place ;  mais  le  banquier 
lui  annon$a  qu'il  etait  dans  1'impossibilite  de  satisfairc  a  sa  demande, 
puisque  les  bureaux  etaient  au  complet. 

Lafitte,  decourage  par  ce  refus,  s'eloignait  tristement,  lorsqu'en 
traversant  la  cour  de  Y hotel,  il  apergut  a  terre  une  epingle ;  il  la  ra- 
massa  et  la  piqua  sur  sa  manche.  M.  Perregaux  ayant  vu  Faction 
clu  jeune  solliciteur,  en  fut  frappe  (struck),  &  pensa  qu'il  devait 
etre  doue  d'un  esprit  d'ordre  et  d' economic.  II  le  fit  rappeler  et  lui 
dit  qu'il  pouvait  compter  sur  une  place  dans  sa  maison.  En  effet, 
peu  de  jours  apres,  le  jeune  Bayonnais  cntra  chez  le  riche  banquier, 
et  chacun  sait  que,  plus  tard,  il  cst  devenu  un  honnoc  riche  et  cele« 
bre. 

L'esp&rance,  hope.  ramasser,  to  pick  up. 

le  bureau,  the  office.  la  manche,  the  sleeve. 

r,  to  retire.  doue*,  endowed. 

j  a  pin.  en  effet,  indeed. 


CONJUNCTIVE   PHRASES.  167 

XXXVII.    TRENTE-SEPTIEME    LEgON. 


CONJUNCTIVE  PHRASES. 

Most  of  these  are  adverbs  or  prepositions  united  with  que  or  dc. 
Some  require  the  following  verb  in  the  Indicative  mood,  others  in 
tic  Infinitive,  and  others  again  in  the  Subjunctive. 

1 .  Conjunctive  phrases  with  the  Indicative :  — 

On  bien,  or,  else.  Aussi  bien  que,  as  well  as. 
ni —  non  plus,  neither,  nor  either.        aussitot  quet ") 

au  contraire,  on  the  contrary.  des  que,        >  ^  so011  QS' 
non  seulement — mats  encore,   not        de  meme  que,} 

only  —  but  also.  ainsi  que,       ) 

de  plus,  moreover.  au  reste,  ) 

autant  que,  as  much  as.  da  reste,  )    owever» 

apres  que,  after,  after  that.  de  la,  hence  it  follows. 

quand  meme,  although.  a  peine  —  que,  scarcely — as. 

si  toutefois,  if  however.  c'est  pourquoi,  therefore. 

c'est-a-dire,  namely.  par  consequent,  consequently. 

c'est  que,    ")  comme  si,  as  if. 

parce  que,  )    ecausc<  de  mcme,  thus,  in  the  same  way. 

tandis  que,  whereas.  sans  cela,  otherwise,  else. 

pendant  que,  while,  whilst.  depuis  que,  since. 

tant  (pastas  long  as .  tout  —  que,  however  —  as. 

2.  With  the  Infinitive  mood:  — 

A/in  de,  in  order  to,  to.  de  peur  de,     ") 

a  mohis  de,  unless.  de  crainte  de,  >   or  ear  °  • 

avant  de,  before.  loin  de,  far  from. 

au  lieu  de,  instead  of.  plutot  que  de,  rather  than. 

3.  With  the  Subjunctive  mood:  — 

Afin  que,  ~)  .  non  que,  not  that. 

pour  que,  \  that)  m  ordcr  that  nonobstant  que,  notwithstanding 

avant  que,  before.  that. 

a  moins  que,  t  )  pour  peu  que,  however  little. 

que  —  ne,       >  unlcss>  tlU-  pourvu  que,  provided  (that). 

t  Those  marked  with  a  t  require  ne  before  the  following  verb. 


168  XXXVII.      TRENTE-SEPTIEME  LEgON. 

bien  que, ")  though,  quelque  —  que,  however — though. 

quoique,  )  although.  sans  que,  without  that. 

jusqu'a  ce  que,  till,  until.  si  ce  n'est  que,  unless,  till. 

loin  que,  far  from.  soit  que,  whether — or. 

4.  Besides  the  above-in cntioued  conjunctions,  there  are  other  con- 
junctive expressions  (locutions  conjonctives),  winch  nave  been 
liu;  rowed  from  other  classes  of  words,  and  to  which  the  conjunction 
que  is  added.  Such  are : 

A  condition  que,  on  condition  that 

depeurque*^ 

de  crainte  que,*^ 

de  maniere  que,      )  .,    . 

}-  so  as  to,  so  that.  .  .  ,  . 
de  or  en  sorte  que,  ) 

au  cos  que,  in  case  that.*  .... 
suppose"  que,  supposing  that.*  .... 
malgre'que,  for  all  that,  notwithstanding.* 
toutes  les  fois  que,  as  often  as. 

peut-etre  que,  perhaps  that 

attendu  que,  considering  that 

a  ce  que,  according  as,  as  far  as,  etc. 
N.  B.  —  Those  marked  with  an  *  govern  the  subjunctive. 

VOCABULARY. 

La  suite,  the  consequence.  pret,  ready. 

la  machine  a  vapeur,  the  engine.  la  princesse,  the  princess. 

la  me'moire,  the  memory.  la  guerre,  war. 

occuper,  to  occupy.  ambitieux,  ambitious. 

mettre,  to  put,  place.  I 'education,  f.  education. 

preserver,  to  preserve.  regarder,  to  look  at. 

READING   EXERCISE  37. 

Aussitot  que  la  machine  a  vapeur  fut  construite  (built),  elle  fat 
rnise  en  mouvement  (put  in  motion),  pour  1'essayer.  Quelque 
grande  que  soit  cette  faute,  il  faut  cependant  la  pardonner,  Des 
qu'il  me  vit  (saw)  il  courut  (ran)  a  moi.  Pendant  que  nous  etions 
occupes  h  faire  notre  tachc,  on  cria  au  feu  (fire)  !  La  memoire  de 
Henri  IV.  sera  toujours  chere  aux  Franc ais  parce  qu'il  mettait  ga 
gloke  a  les  rendre  heureux.  Que  le  ciel  vous  preserve  d'un  parcil 


CONJUNCTIVE  PHEASES.  169 

(such)  malheur  J  Le  malado  ne  bolt  (drinks)  ni  ne  mange.  Taut 
quo  ma  mere  sera  k  la  campagne,  je  resterai  avec  elle.  Tandis  que 
nous  parlons,  le  temps  fuifc.  Depuis  que  j'ai  perdu  mon  pere,  tout 
me  manque. 

THEME  37. 

1.  I  am  not  sorry,  on  the  contrary,  I  am  very  glad  (lien  aise) 
to  (de)  have  done  it.  2.  I  will  play,  as  soon  as  I  (shall)  have 
finished  my  exercise.  3.  There  will  always  be  wars  among  men, 
as  long  as  they  are  ambitious.  4.  After  (that)  you  were  gone 
(sorti),  I  began  writing  (a  ecrire).  5.  As  soon  as  my  education 
is  finished,  I  shall  go  to  Italy.  6.  In  order  to  learn  well,  we  must 
(on  doit)  study  with  a  great  deal  of  attention.  7.  In  order  to 
have  friends,  we  must  be  honest.  8.  It  will  be'  impossible  to  learn 
French,  unless  you  be  (Inf.)  diligent.  9.  Let  us  pray,  before  we 
begin  (Inf.).  10.  Rather  than  study,  he  loses  his  time.  11.  Far 
from  blaming  you,  I  praised  you.  12.  Come  here,  that  I  may 
speak  to  you.  13.  Send  me  your  book,  (in  order)  that  I  may  read 
it.  14.  I  will  be  ready  before  they  come.  15.  Unless  you  accom- 
pany me,  I  will  not  take  a  walk.  16.  Cato  killed  himself,  lest  he 
should  fall  into  (entre)  the  hands  of  Cajsar.  17.  Tfwugh  that 
young  man  is  not  very  diligent,  [yet]  he  improves.  18.  Before 
you  begin  an  action^  consider  well  its  consequences.  19.  You  will 
never%e  respected  unless  you  fulfil  your  duties.  20.  He  will  give 
it  to  you,  on  condition  that  you  give  it  back  to  him.  21.  They 
beat  him  so  that  they  almost  killed  him. 


170  XXXVIII.      TRENTE-HUITIEME  LEgON. 

XXXVIII.   TRENTE-HUITIEME 


IRREGULAR   VERBS.  — FIRST    CLASS. 

Those  verbs  are  commonly  called  irregular  which  deviate  from  the  three 
regular  conjugations.  This  deviation  is  of  three  kinds. 

1.  Such  verbs   as  take   the  termination  corresponding  to  the  ending 
of  their  Infinitive  mood,  but  change  their  root.    Ex. :  Of  the  verb  coudre, 
to  sew,  the  radical  is  coud-,  this  final  d  is,  in  some  persons  and  tenses, 
changed  into  s,  for  instance  in  the  plural :  nous  cous-ons,  we  sew.    These  are 
the  least  difficult,  and  are  therefore  put  in  the  first  class. 

2.  Verbs  which  preserve  their  radical  syllable  throughout  unchanged, 
but  take  flexions  that  do  not  accord  with  the  ending  of  their  Infinitive' 
For  instance,  the  verb  cour-ir,  to  run,  ending  in  -ir,  ought  to  take  the  flex- 
ions of  the  second  conjugation  (finir).    But  this  is  not  the  case;  it  takes 
the  flexions  of  the  third  conjugation  (vendre) ;  the  Present  is  not  je  couris, 
tu  couris,  etc.,  but  je  cours,  tu  cours,  etc. ;  P.  p.  couru  like  vendu.   Verbs  of 
this  kind  we  assign  to  the  second  class. 

3.  A  certain  number  of  verbs  offer  both  these  anomalies  at  the  same 
time ;  i.  e.  they  undergo  some  changes  in  their  root,  and  are  conjugated 
with  other  flexions  than  those  corresponding  with  the  ending  of  their  Infin- 
itive.   For  instance,  the  verb  mourir,  to  die,  ought,  according  to  its  Infini- 
tive termination,  -zr,  to  take  the  flexions  of  finir.     This  is  not  the  case ;  it 
is,  in  most  tenses,  conjugated  like  vendre;  and,  besides,  its  root  mour-  is,  in 
certain  tenses  and  persons,  changed  into  meur-,  as  :  Pres.je  meurs,  tu  meurs, 
etc.     Such  verbs,  among  which  are  included  those  ending  in  -oir,  consti- 
tute the  third  class. 

To  facilitate  the  study  of  the  irregular  verbs,  it  is  essential  to  dis- 
tinguish the  primitive  tenses  from  the  derived  ones.  The  latter  have 
generally  a  regular  inflexion,  whereas  the  former  alone  are  subject  to 
irregularity.  As  already  mentioned,  the  primitive  tenses  are  : 

1.  Tlie  Infinitive  mood. 

2.  TJie  Participle  present. 

3.  The  Participle  past. 

4.  TJie  Present  of  the  Indicative  inood. 

5.  The  Preterite. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS.  171 

From  these  the  other  tenses  and  moods  are  derived,  as  it  is  explained,  L. 
XX.  The  derivative  tenses  are  formed  regularly,  and  therefore  seldom 
mentioned  in  the  following  list. 

To  aid  the  pupil's  memory,  the  following  hints  will  prove  useful : 

1.  The  Present  of  the  Subjunctive  may  bo  found  by  dropping  the  final 
nt  of  the  third  person  plural  Indicative,  as :  from  Us  e'crivent  —  que  j'&rive ; 
from  Us  prennent  —  que  je  prenne  ;  from  Us  boivent  —  que  je  boive. 

2.  The  plural  of  the  Present  Indicative,  the  Participle  Present  and  the 
Imperfect  of  the  Indicative  have  the  same  radical,  as :  nous  mourons,  we 
die;  P.  pr.  mourant;  Imperf.  je  mourais; —  nous  craignons  ;  P.  pr.  craignant; 
Imperf.  je  craignais ;  —*•  nous  allons  ;  P.  pr.  allant ;  Imperf.  j'allais,  etc. 

3.  The  Future  and  Conditional  are  formed  from  the  Infinitive ;  the  fol- 
lowing, however,  have   an  irregular  formation,  —  je  courrai  (instead  of 
courirafyf  je  mourrai,  je  verrai,  j'enverrai,  j'acquerrai,  je  pourrai,  je  saurai, 
je  voudmi,  il  faudra,  je  viendrai,  je  tiendrai,  je  ferai,  and  j'irai. 

4.  When  the  Participle  past  ends  with  the  sound  of  i  (i,  is,  it,)  the  Pre- 
terite generally  ends  in  is.    Ex. :  Part.  p.  sorti,  gone  out;  Pret.  je  sortis ; 
—  Part.  p.  dit,  said;  Pret.  je  dis;  —  Part.  p.  pris,  taken  ;  Pret.je  prist  etc. 

5.  But  when  the  Participle  past  ends  in  u,  the  Preterite  usually  ends  in 
us.     Ex. :  P.  p.  cru,  believed;  Pret.je  cms;  P.  p.  lit,  read;  Pret.  je  lus;  — 
P.  p.  connu,  known ;  Pret.  je  connus,  etc. 


A  LIST  OF  ALL  THE  IRREGULAR  VERBS  ACCORD- 
ING TO  THE  THREE  CLASSES  OF  IRREGULARITY. 

FIRST   CLASS. 

Containing  the  verbs  in  -re  which  take  the  terminations  of  the 
third  conjugation,  but  whose  radical  is  somewhat  changed. 

a.     (1  — 7.  Insertion  of  an  s.) 

1.  Luirc,  to  shine.     Part.  pres.  luisant.     Part.  pa$t,  Im. 
Pres.  Je  luis,  tu  luis,  il  luit,  nous  luisons,  tons  luisez,  ils  luisent. 
Sultj.  Pres.  Que  je  luise.     Imperf.  Je  luisais. 

Pret.  wanting.     Fut.  Je  luirai. 

Conjugate  in  the  same  manner:  Reluire,  to  glitter. 

2.  Suffire,  to  suffice.     P.  pr.  suffisant.  P.  p.  suffi. 
Pres.  Je  sufHs,  tu  suffis,  il  suffit,  nous  suffisons,  etc. 


172  XXXVIII.      TRENTE-HUITIEME   LECON. 

Subj.  Pres.  Que  je  suffise.     Imperf.  Je  sufFisais. 
Pret.  Je  suffis,  tu  suffis,  il  suOis,  nous  suffimes,  etc. 
Fut.  Je  suffirai. 

In  tlie  same  manner :  Conjire,  to  preserve,  to  pickle ;  and  circoneire,  to 
circumcise,  except  in  the  Part.  past.  The  Participle  of  the  former  is  confii, 
of  the  latter  circoncis. 

3.  Nuire,  to  liurt.     P.  pr.  iraisant.     P.  p.  nui. 

Pres.  Je  nuis,  tu  nuis,  il  nuit,  nous  nuisons,  vous  nuisez,  ils  nui- 
sent.     Subf.  Pres.  Que  je  nuiso.     Imperf.  Je  nuisais. 
Pret.  Je  miisis.     Fut.  Je  nuirai. 

4.  Cuire,  to  boil,  to  bake  (bread).     P.  pr.  cui^ant.     Pvjp. 
cui£. 

Pres.  Je  cuis,  tu  cuis,  il  cuit,  nous  cuisons,  etc. 
Pret.  Je  cuisis.     Fut.  Je  cuirai. 
Thus  also  :  Recuire,  to  boil  once  more. 

5.  Conduire,  to  conduct,  to  lead.     Se  conduire,  to  behave. 
P.  pr.  conduisant.     P.  p.  conduit 

Pres.  Je  conduis,  tu  conduis,  il  conduit,  nous  ccnduisons,  etc. 
Pret.  Je  conduisis.     Fut.  Je  conduirai. 

Thus  :  Rcconduire,  to  reconduct,  to  see  home;  drfduire,  to  deduct;  enduire, 
to  plaster;  induire,  to  lead  into;  introduce,  to  introduce;  produ-ire,  to  pro- 
duce ;  reproduire,  to  produce  again ;  reduire,  to  reduce ;  seduire,  to  seduce ; 
traduire,  to  translate. 

6.  Instruire,  to  instruct.     P.  pr.  instruisant.     P.  p.  instrui*. 
Pres.  J'instruis,  tu  instruis,  il  instruit,  nous  instruisons,  vous  in- 

Btnii^ez,  ils  instruisent. 

Pret.  J'instruisis.     Fut.  J'instruirai. 

In  the  same  manner :  Constndre,  to  build ;  de'truire,  to  destroy. 

7.  Dire,  to  say,  to  tell.     P.  pr.  disant.     P.p.  dit. 

Pres.  Je  dis,  tu  dis,  il  dit,  nous  disons,  vous  dites,  ils  disent. 

Subj.  Pres.  Que  je  disQ. 

Pret.  Je  dis,  tu  dis,  il  dit,  nous  dimes,  vous  elites,  ils  dirent. 

Imperf.  Subj.  Que  jc  disse. 

Fut,  Je  dirai.     Imper.  Dis,  disons,  dites. 


n.         17 

IRREGULAR  VERBS./    T^  173 

Conjugate  in  the  same  manner:  redire,  to  say  again,  to  object. 

.As  for  the  other  compounds  of  dire,  viz. :  Contredire,  to  contradict;  de- 
dire,  to  unsay;  and  se  dedire,  to  retract ;  interdtre,  to  forbid ;  me'dire,  to  slan- 
der ;  and  pr€dire,  to  foretell,  they  do  not  form  their  second  person  plural  of 
the  Present  Indicative  with  the  termination  -tes,  but  -sez,  as :  vous  contre~ 
disez,  vous  me'disez,  vous  interdisez,  etc. —  Maudire,  to  curse,  takes  ss  in  the  fol- 
lowing forms :  Pres.  plur.  nous  maudissons,  vous  maudissez,  ils  maudissent. 
Part.  pr.  maudissant.  Iniperf.  je  maudissais. 


VOCABULARY. 

Le  soldi,  the  sun.  moderne,  modern. 

un  rayon,  a  ray.  la  peche,  the  peach. 

I'espoir,  m.  hope.  la  verite",  the  truth. 
la  dette,  the  debt. 

THEME  38. 

1..-  •  The  sun  shines.  2.  Everything  slimes  j(glitters)  in  that 
nonse.  3.  It  is  not  sufficient  (it  does  not  suffice)^  to  understand  the 
ancient  languages,  it  is  also  necessary  to  study  the  modern  ones. 
4.  We  preserve  these  peaches  in  sugar.  5.  Have  you  pickled 
cucumbers  (des  concomfoes')  ?  6.  Does  he  not  hurt  you  in  this  af- 
fair ?  7.  AH  his  property  will  not  suffice  to  (pour)  pay  his  debts. 
8.  Where  do  you  conduct  this  blind  [man]  ?  9.  I  conduct  him  to 
the  physician  (chez  le  medecin).  10.  I  instruct  (the)  youth.  11. 
We  translate  English  into  Drench.  12.  The  boys  behaved  very 
well.  "TLS.  You  will  hurt  me  more  than  any  other  |terson.  14.  This 
bread  is  well  baked.  15.  What  do  you  say  ?  16.  I  say  that  you 
are  (have)  right.  ITJWe  say  the  truth.  ,18.  Tell  him  that  I  am 
here.  19.  I  shalHell  (it)  him  directly.  20.  Never  contradict  any 
one \pcrsonne)  irr\eii)  public.  21.  We  foretold  those  disasters 
(dcsastres).  22.  Let  us  curse  nobody. 

*  See  p.  343, 10. 


174  XXXIX.      TRENTE-NEUVIEME 


XXXIX.     TRENTE-NEUVIEME     LECON. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS.  — FIRST   CLASS   CONTINUED. 

b.     (8  — 17.  Change  of  tho  final  consonant.) 
8.    Traire,  to  milk.     P.  pr.  trayant.     P.  p.  trait. 
Pres.  Je  trais,  tu  trais,  il  trait,  nous  trayons,  vous  tra^ez,  ils 
liaicnt. 

Imperf.  Jo  trayais.     Pret.  wanting.     Fut.  Je  trairaL 

Thus  also  :  Distraire,  to  distract ;  extraire,  to  extract ;  soustraire,  to  sub- 
tract, to  withdraw. 

0.    Suivre,  to  follow.     P.  pr.  suivant.     P.  p.  sum. 
Pres.  Je  suis,  tu  suis,  il  suit,  nous  suivons,  vous  suivez,  ils  sui- 
vent.     Subj.  Pres.  Que  je  suive. 
Pret.  Je  suivis.     Fut.  Je  suivrai. 
Imper.  Suis,  suivons,  suivez. 
Thus :  S'ensuivre,  to  ensue ;  poursuivre,  to  pursue. 

10.  Vainer e,  to  conquer.     P.  pr.  vainj'Mant.     P.  jp.,.vaincu. 
Pres.  Je  vaincs,  tu  vaincs,  il  vainc,  nous  vain^wons,  vous  vain- 

quez,  ils  vaingwent. 

Pret.  Je  vain^wis.     Fut.  Je  vaincrai. 
Imper.  Vaincs,  vain^wons,  vain^z^ez. 

la  the  same  manner :  Convaincre,  to  convince. 

11.  Coudre,  to  sew.     P.  pr.  cousant.     P.  p.  cousu. 

Pres.  Je  couds,  tu  couds,  il  coud,  nous  coupons,  vous  couscz,  ils 
consent.     Subj.  Pres.  Que  je  couse. 
Pret.  Jc  cousis.     Fut.  Je  coudrai. 
Thus :  D&oudre,  to  unsew ;  recoudre,  to  sew  over  again. 

12.  Moudre,  to  grind.     P.  pr.  mou/ant.     P.  p.  mouZa. 
Pres.  Je  mouds,  tu  mouds,  il  moud,  nous  moufons,  vous  mou/ez, 

ils  mouZent.     Subj.  Pres.  Que  je  moufe. 
Pret.  Je  moulus.     Fut.  Je  moudrai. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS.  175 

In  the  same  manner:  Emoudre,  to  grind  (knives,  etc.),  to  sharpen,  and 
remoudre,  to  grind  again. 

13.  Resoudre,  to  resolve,  P.  pr.f  resonant.      P.  p.  lesolu  (or 
resous) . 

Pres.  Je  resous,  tu  resous,  il  resout,  nous  rvsoliwns,  vous  resolvez, 
Us  resolvent.     Subj.  Quo  je  resolve. 
Pret.  Je  resous,  tu  resets,  etc. 
Fut.  Je  resoudrai.     Imper.  Resous,  resolvons,  resolvez. 

Thus  :  Absoudre,  to  absolve,  and  dlssoudre,  to  dissolve. 
These  two  compounds  have  no  Preterite,  and  make  their  Participles :  a&« 
sous,  f.  absoute,  and  dissous,  f.  dissoute. 

14.  Peindre,  to  paint.     P.  pr.  pei^want.     P.  p.  peinZ. 

Pres.  Je  peins,  tu  peins,  il  peint,  nous  pei^wons,  vous  pei^wez, 
ils  peigrwent.     Subj.,  Quo  je  peigwe. 
Imperf.  Je  pci^rwais. 

Pret.  Je  peigwis,  tu  pelvis,  il  pei^mt,  nous  pei^wimes,  etc. 
Fut.  Je  peindrai.     Imper.  Peins,  pei^rcons,  peiywez. 

Thus :  Cdndre,  to  gird.  Feindre,  to  feign ;  ddpeindre,  to  depict.  Teindre, 
to  dye;  d&eindre,  to  discharge  color ;  atteindre,  to  attain,  to  reach;  fteindre, 
to  extinguish.  Restreindre,  to  restrain.  Enfreindre  to  infringe,  to  trans- 
gress. 

15.  Craindre,  to  fear.     -P.  jpr.  crai^want.     -P.  />.  erain^. 
5.  Je  crams,  tu  crains,  il  craint,  nous  crai^wons,  etc. 

crai^mi.     Fut.  Je  craindrai,  etc. 

Thus  also:  Plaindre,  to  pity;  se  plaindre,  to  complain;  contraindre,  to 
compel,  to  constrain. 

16.  Joindre,  to  join.     P.  pr.  joi^nant.     P.  p.  joint. 

Pres.  Je  joins,  tu  joins,  il  joint,  nous  joijwons,  vous  joi#?zez,  ils 
joi^rncnt.     Subj.  Quo  je  joignc. 
Pret.  Je  joi^rnis.     J^w^.  Je  joindrai. 

Thus :  Ilcjoindre,  to  rejoin ;  enjoindre,  to  enjoin ;  disjoindre,  to  disjoin  ; 
Poindre,  to  dawn,  break ;  Oindre,  to  anoint. 

17.  Ecrire,  to  write.     P.  jf?r.  dcrivant.     P.  J9.  ecri^. 

Pres.  J'ecris,  tu  dcris,  il  dcrit,  nous  dcrirons,  vous  ecrlrcz,  ils 
^crircnt.  Subj.  Quo  j'e'crire,  eto. 


176  XXXIX.      TREXTE-NEUVIEME  LEgON. 

Pret.  J'ccriris,  tu  ecriws,  il  £crivit,  etc. 

Fut.     J'ecrirai.     Imper.  ]£cris,  ecm;ons,  ecrivez. 

Thus :  D&rire,  to  describe ;  circonscrirc,  to  circumscribe ;  inscnre,  to  in- 
scribe; prescrire,  to  prescribe,  to  order;  r&rire,  to  write  again,  to  answer; 
v~f-'n*ire9  to  subscribe ;  transcrirey  to  transcribe. 

VOCABULARY. 

La  vache,  the  cow.  partir,  to  set  out. 

le  pr&epteur,  the  tutor.  la  marcJie,  course,  the  course. 

la  difficult^  the  difficulty.  la  cendre,  the  ashes. 

la  vie,  the  life.  la  fame'e,  the  smoke. 

attemand,  German.  la  chanddle,  the  candle. 

le  meunicr,  the  miller.  la  grandeur,  the  greatness. 

THEME  39. 

1.  We  milk  the  cows.  2.  Soldiers !  follow  me.  3.  I  will  lead 
you  to  (the)  victory.  4.  I  shall  follow  you.  5.  This  dog  follows 
me  everywhere.  6.  You  did  not  follow  the  lessons  of  your  tutor. 
7.  The  enemies  were  conquered.  8.  You  conquer  all  the  difficul- 
ties. 9.  That  did  not  convince  me.  10.  They  pursued  (Pret.)  the 
slave,  but  in  vain  (en  vain).  11.  She  was  sewing  her  gown.  12. 
These  handkerchiefs  are  badly  sewed.  13.  I  sewed  them  myself. 
14.  Does  the  miller  grind  the  corn?  15.  He  has  not  ground  it  this 
morning.  16.  He  will  grind  it  this  evening.  17.  I  fear  the  rain. 
18.  We  do  not  fear  death ;  why  should  we  fear  it?  19.  I  resolved 
(de)  to  set  out.  20.  We  pursued  our  course.  21.  I  have  at  last 
(enfiri)  convinced  him  of  the  greatness  of  his  fault.  22.  The  wood 
which  is  burnt  (  qifon  Irule)  resolves  itself  (se)  into  (en)  ashes 
and  smoke.  23.  We  pity  the  unfortunate.  24.  You  paint. 
25.  Tho  young  girl  feigned  to  be  ill.  26.  Put  out  the  candle  and 
go  to  bed  (allez  vous  coucher).  27.  The  servant  feared  (de)  to 
displease  his  master  (a  son  maitrc).  28.  Charles  wrote  his  trans- 
lation last  night  (hier  au  soir). 


IRREGULAR  VERBS.  177 


XL.    QUARANTIEME    LECON. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS.  —  FIRST  CLASS  CONTINUED. 

c.  (IS — 26.   The  vowel  of  the  root  is  changed  into  u,  in  the 
Part,  past  and  in  the  Preterite.) 

18.  Lire,  to  read.     P.  pr.  lisant.     P.p.lu. 

Pres.  Je  lis,  tu  lis,  il  lit,  nous  lisons,  vous  lisez,  Us  lisent. 
Pret.  Je  lus,  tu  lus,  il  lut,  nous  lumes,  vous  lutes,  etc. 
Imperf.  Subj.  Que  je  lusse. 
Fut.  Je  lirai,  tu  liras,  il  lira,  etc. 

Thus  also  :  dire,  to  elect;  r&lire,  to  reelect ;  retire,  to  read  over  again. 

19.  13oire,  to  drink.    P.pr.buvant.     P.p.bu. 

Pres.  Je  bois,  tu  bois,  il  boit,  nous  bisons,  vous  bwvez,  ils 
boirent. 

Subj.  Que  je  boive,  que  tu  boi^es,  qu'il  boivo,  que  nous  bwwons, 
quo  vous  bwt'iez,  qu'ils  boivent. 

Imperf.  Je  buvais. 

Pret.  Je  bus,  tu  bus,  il  but,  nous  bumes,  vous  butes,  ils  burent. 

J§5$.  Je  boirai,  6u  boiras,  etc. 

Imper.  Bois,  bwrons,  bwvez. 

20.  Oroire^  to  believe,  to  think.     P.  pr.  croyant.     P.  p.  cru. 
Pres.  Je  crois,  tu  crois,  il  croit,  nous  croyons,  vous  cro^ez,  ils 

croient. 

Subj.  Quo  je  croie,  que  tu  croies,  qu'il  croie,  que  nous  croyions, 
c[ue  vous  croyiez,  qu'ils  croient. 

PrcL  Je  crus,  tu  eras,  il  crut,  nous  crumes,  vous  crutes,  iln 
crurent. 

Fut.  Je  croirai,  etc. 

Fcure  accroire  qch.  a  qn.t  to  make  one  believe. 
N.  B.  accroire  is  only  used  in  the  Infinitive^ 
12 


178  XL.      QUARANTIEME   LEgON. 

21.  Oroitre,  to  grow.     P.  pr.  croissant.     P.  p.  cru. 

Pres.  Je  crois,  tu  crois,  il  croit,  nous  croissons,  vous  croissez,  Us 
croissent. 

Pret.  Je  crus,  tu  crus,  il  crut,  nous  crumcs,  etc. 

Fut.  Je  croitrai,  etc. 

Thus :  Accroitrc,  to  increase ;  d&roitre,  to  decrease ;  recroitre,  to  grow 
again. 

22.  Plaire,  to  please.     P.  pr.  plaisant.     P.  p.  plu. 

Pres.  Je  plais,  tu  plais,  il  plait,  nous  plaisons,  vous  plaisez,  ils 
plaiscnt.  Subj.  Que  je  plaise,  etc. 

Pret.  Je  plus,  tu  plus,  il  plut,  nous  plumes,  vous  plutes,  ils  plu- 
rent.  Fut.  Je  plairai,  tu  plairas,  etc. 

Thus  :  Se  complaire,  to  Delight  in  .  .  . ;  deplaire,  to  displease.  (S'il  vous 
plait  —  if  you  please.) 

23.  Taire,  to  conceal.     P.  pr.  taisant.     P.  p.  tu. 

Pres.  Je  tais,  tu  tais,  il  tait,  nous  taisons,  vous  taiscz,  ils  talent. 

Subj.  Que  je  taise,  que  tu  tai^es,  qu'il  taise,  etc. 

Pret.  Je  tus,  tu  tus,  il  tut,  nous  tumes,  vous  tutos,  ils  turcnt. 

Fut.  Je  tairai. 

Thus :  Se  taire,  to  be  silent.  Pres.  Je  me  tciis,  I  am  silent.  Imper.  Tais-toi, 
taisez-vous.  Pret.  Je  me  tus,  I  was  silent.  Comp.  of  tlie  Pres.  Je  me  suis  tu, 
I  have  been  silent. 

24.  Paraitre,  to  appear.     P.  pr.  paraissant.     P.  p.  paru. 
Pres.  Je  parais,  tu  parais,  il  parait,  nous  paraissons,  vous  parais- 

5ez,  il  paraiwent.     Subj.  Que  je  paraisse. 

Pret.  Je  pants ,  tu  parus,  il  parut,  etc.  • 

Fut.  Je  paraitrai. 

Thus :  Apparaitre,  to  appear ;  comparaitre,  to  appear  before  the  judge ; 
disparaitre,  to  disappear ;  reparaitre,  to  reappear. 

25.  Paitre,  to  graze.     P.  pr.  paissant. 
Like  varaitre,  but  no  Pret. 

Thus  :  Rcpaitre,  to  feed ;  with  the  Pret.  Je  repus.    Part.  rcpu. 

28.    Oonnaitre,*  to  know.     P.  pr.  connaissant.     P.  p.  connu. 

*  Con-naitre  is  used  in  connection  with  knowledge  obtained  through  cue  of  the 
five  senses,  —  savoir  in  other  cases. 


IRREGULAR   VERBS.  170 

Prcs.  Je  connais,  tu  coanais,  il  eonnait,  nous  connaissons,  vous 
connaisscz,  etc. 

PreL  Je  connus.     Fut.  Je  connaitrai. 

Thus :  M&onnaitre,  to  mistake,  not  to  acknowledge ;  reconnoitre,  to  recog- 
nize, to  know  again,  to  acknowledge. 

VOCABULARY 

La  conduite,  the  conduct.  lejour,  the  daylight. 

triste,  sad.  sombre,  dark. 

le  traitement,  the  treatment.  impossible,  impossible. 

THEME  40. 

1.  What  are  you  reading  there?  2.  Why  did  you  read  my  let- 
ter? 3.  I  have  not  read  it,  and  I  shall  not  read  it.  4.  Eead  over 
again  your  lesson.  5.  Post  thou  drink  water  ?  6.  No,  I  drink 
wine  and  water.  7.  When  you  are  thirsty,  what  do  you  drink? 
8.  We  drink  fresh  water.  9.  Do  you  believe  that?  10.  No,  I  do 
not  believe  it.  11.  I  thought  (that)  you  had  written  your  exercise, 
but  I  see  (je  vois)  that  I  am  mistaken.  12.  She  grows  every  day. 
13.  These  trees  have  grown  rapidly  (rapidemenf) .  14.  He  did 
not  believe  what  I  said.  15.  I  (have)  thought  that  we  would  be 
here  before^  six  o'clock.  16.  The  young  gentleman  pleased  by  his 
conduct.  17.  Be  silent,  Frederick.  18.  Tell  (to)  your  sister,  if 
you  please,  to  bring  me  her  French  grammar.  19.  Do  you  know  my 
brother?  20.  No,  I  do  not  know  him.  21.  You  appear  sad,  what 
is  the  matter  with  you  (qu' '  avez-vou-s)  ?  22.  Such  a  treatment 
(has)  appeared  to  me  very  cruel.  23.  The  daylight  has  disap- 
peared. 


180  XLT.      QUARANTE  ET  UNIEME    LEQON. 

XLI.     QUARANTE   ET    UNIEME    LE(;ON, 


IRREGULAR  VERBS.  — FIRST  CLASS   CONTINUED. 

27.  Faire,  to  do,  to  make.     P.  pr.  faisant.*  P.  p.  fait. 
Pres.  Je  fais,  tu  fais,  il  fait,  nous  faisons,  vous  faites,  ils  font. 
Pres.  Subj.  Que  jo  fasse,  quo  tu  f asses,  qu'il  fasse,  quo  nous 

fassions,  quo  YOUS  fassiez,  qu'ils  fassent. 

Imperf.  Je  faisais  (fesais),  tu  faisais,  il  faisait,  etc. 

Pret.  Je  fis,  tu  Jls,  il  fa,  nous  fimes,  vous  fitcs,  ils  firent. 

Imperf.  Subj.  Que  je  j^55e,  quo  tu  fisses,  qu'il  fit,  que  nous  fis- 
sions, que  vous  fissiez,  qu'ils  fissent. 

Fut.  Je  feral,  tu  feras,  etc. 

Imper.  Fais,  fa/sons,  faites. 

Conjugate  in  the  same  manner  the  compounds  of  faire,  viz. :  dtfaire,  to 
undo,  to  loosen;  contrefaire,  to  counterfeit;  rcfaire,  to  do  again;  satmfaire, 
to  satisfy ;  surfaire,  to  exact,  ask  too  much. 

28.  Mettre,  to  put.     P.  pr.  mettant.     P.  p.  mis. 

Pres.  Je  mcts,  tu  mets,  il  met,  nous  mettons,  vous  mcttez,  ils 
mettent.     Pres.  Subj.  Que  je  mette. 
Imperf.  Je  mettais. 

Pret.  Je  mis,  tu  mis,  il  mit,  nous  mimes,  vous  wiifes,  ils  mirent. 
Imperf.  Subj.  Que  je  misse,  que  tu  misses,  qu'il  mit,  etc. 
Fut.  Je  mettrai,  tu  mettras,  etc. 

Thus :  Admettre,  to  admit ;  commettre,  to  commit ;  dcfmettre,  to  turn  out ; 
otnettre,  to  omit ;  permettre,  to  permit,  to  allow ;  promettre,  to  promise  ;  com- 
promcttre,  to  compromise,  to  expose ;  remettre,  to  put  again,  to  replace,  to 
hand  over ;  soumettre,  to  submit ;  transmettre,  to  transmit,  to  send. 

Se  mettre  a  signifies  to  begin,  as :  L* enfant  $e  mit  a  pleurer,  the  child  began 
crying. 

20.    Prcndre,  to  take.     P.  pr.  preraant.     P.  p.  pns. 

*Por  the  pronunciation  of  faisantnud  its  derivatives  sec  p.  13. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS.  181 

Pres.  Je  prends,  tu  prcnds,  il  prend,  nous  prewong,  vous  prewczv 
ils  present.  Pres.  Sulj.  Que  je  premie,  que  tu  premies,  qu'il 
prerarae,  que  nous  premons,  que  vous  prewiez,  qu'ils  present. 

Imperf.  Je  prewais. 

Pret.  Je  pris,  tu  pris,  il  prit,  nous  primes,  vous  prites,  ils  pri- 
rent.  Imperf.  Subj.  Que  je  prisse. 

Fut.  Je  prendrai.     Imper.  Prends,  prewons,  prewez. 

Conjugate  in  the  same  manner  the  compounds  of  prendre  :  Apprendre,  to 
learn  ;  d&apprendre,  to  unlearn  ;  rapprendre,  to  learn  over  again  ;  compren- 
dre,  to  understand  ;  entreprendre,  to  undertake  ;  mtfprendre,  to  mistake  ;  re- 
prendre,  to  take  again,  to  reply,  to  chide  ;  surprendre,  to  surprise. 

30.   Naitre*  to  be  bora.     P.  pr.  naissant.     P.  p.  ne. 

Pres.  Je  nais,  tu  nais,  il  naifc,  nous  naissons,  yous  naissez,  ils 
naissent.  Imperf.  Je  namais. 

Pret.  Je  naquis  (I  was  bora),  tu  naquis,  il  naquit,  nous  naqui- 
mes,  vous  naqultes,  ils  naquirent. 

Fut.  Je  naitrai,  tu  naitras,  etc. 

Thus  also  :  Renaitre,  to  be  born  again. 

REMARK.  When  the  person  used  as  subject  of  the  verb  is  living,  the 
present  instead  of  the  past  of  the  auxiliary  is  used  with  the  past  participle. 
Ex.  :  Mon  pere  est  n€  en  Angleterre,  My  father  (still  living)  was  born  in 
England. 


31.  ^Viw^  to  live:*    P.  pr.  vivant.     P.  p.  vecu. 

Pres.  Je  vis,  tu  vis,  il  vit,  nous  vivons,  vous  vivez,  ils  vivent. 
Subj  .  Que  je  vive  ;  hence  the  expressions  :  Vive  !  pi.  vivent  !  long 
live  ! 

Imper.  Vis,  vivons,  vivez.     Imperf.  Je  vivais. 

Pret.  Je  vecus,  tu  vecus,  il  vecut,  nous  vecumes,  etc. 

Fut.  Je  vivrai. 

Thus  also:  Survivre  (a  qn.)t  to  survive;  revivre,  to  live  again. 

*  Verbg  marked  thus  *  take  ctre  for  an  auxiliary,  instead  of  avoir. 


182  XLI.      QUARANTE   ET   UNIEME  LEgON. 

VOCABULARY. 

L'apres-midi,  f.  the  afternoon.  une  ligne,  a  line. 

le  ruban,  the  ribbon,  un  compagnon  de  voyage,  a  fellow- 

une  fois,  once«  traveller. 

paien,  pagan*  la  decision ,  the  decision. 

d&ormais,  henceforward.  I'dbondance,  f.  abundance. 

obtissant,  obedient. 

THEME   41. 

1*  What  are  you  doing  there?  2.  I  am  writing  my  exercise. 
3.  Have  you  written  it?  4.  Yes,  I  have  written  it.  5.  Charles 
will  write  it  this  afternoon.  6.  These  pupils  make  a  great  many 
mistakes  in  their  exercises,  7.  Put  this  book  on  the  table.  8. 
Where  have  you  put  your  penknife  ?  9.  I  have  put  it  in  my  drawer 
(tiroir,  m.).  10.  Did  your  father  permit  you  to  go  to  the  theatre? 
11.  Yes,  he  has  allowed  it.  12.  He  allows  me  to  go  there 
(d?y  aller)  once  a  (par)  week.  13.  The  servant  promised  hence- 
forward to  be  faithful  and  obedient.  14.  All  the  children  began  to 
cry.  15.  I  take  medicine.  16.  He  takes  coffee.  17.  We  take 
tea.  18.  The  children  take  milk.  19.  I  took  a  pen  and  wrote  a 
few  lines  to  my  father.  20.  Who  has  taken  my  pencil?  21.  I 
have  not  taken  it.  22.  Take  mine.  23.  Do  not  take  this  chair ; 
it  is  broken  (cassee).  24.  Do  you  understand  what  I  say?  25. 
I  understand  every  word.  26.  I  should  undertake  that  journey,'  if 
I  had  a  fellow-traveller.  27.  We  submit  ourselves  to  your  decision. 
28.  Formerly  we  lived  in  the  country,  but  for  (depuis)  several 
years  we  have  lived  (Pres.  tense)  in  Geneva  (Geneve).  29.  Many 
rich  people  live  in  abundance. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS.  183 


XLII.    QUARANTE-DEUXIEME    LEgON. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS.  — SECOND   CLASS. 

(32  —  41.    Verbs  ending  in  ir,  having  the  flexions  of  the  Third 
Conjugation.) 

32.  Fuir,  to  shun,  to  flee.     P.  pr.  fuyant.     P.  p.  fiw. 

Pres.  Je  fuis,  tu  fuis,  il  fuit,  nous  fuyons,  vous  fujez,  ils  fuiem. 
Imperf.  Je  fuyais. 
Pret.  Je  fuis.     Fut.  Je  fuirai. 

Conjugate  in  the  same  manner :  S'enfuir,  to  run  away.    Pres.  Je  m'en- 
fuis.    Comp.  of  the  Pres.  Je  me  suis  enfui,  I  have  run  away. 

33.  Vetir,  to  clothe,    P.  pr.  vetant.     P.  p.  vetw. 
Pres.  Je  vets,  tu  vets,  il  vet,  nous  vetons,  etc. 
Pret.  Je  vetis.     Fut.  Je  vetirai. 

Thus  also :  D&etir,  to  divest ;  revetir,  to  invest. 

34.  Servir  (qn.),  to  serve,  to  help.     P.  pr.  servant.     P.  p. 
servi. 

Pres.  Je  sers,  tu  sers,  il  serf,  nous  servons,  vous  servez,  ils  scr- 
vent.     Sub}.  Quo  je  serve. 

Pret.  Je  servis.     Fut.  Je  servirai. 

..* 

Thus  also :"  Desservir,  to  clear  the  table;  se  servir  de,  to  make  use  of,  to 
use. 

35.  Dormir,  to  sleep.     P.  pr>  dormant.     P.  p.  dorrni. 

Pres.  Je  dors,  tu  dors,  il  dort,  nous  dormons,  vous  dormcz,  ils 
dorment.     Subj.  Que  je  dorme. 
Pret.  Je  dormis,  etc.,  like  servir. 

Thus :  Endormir,  to  lull  asleep ;  s'endormir,  to  fall  asleep ;  se  rendonfiir, 
to  fall  asleep  again. 

36.  Partir,  to  set  out,  to  leave.     P.  pr.  partant.     P.  p.  parti. 
Pres.  Je  pars,  tu  pars,  il  part,  nous  partons,  etc.,  like  servir. 

Thus:  JRepartir,  to  set  off  again,  to  reply.    Not  to  be  confounded  with 
rcpartir,  to  distribute,  which  is  regular 


184  XLII.      QUARANTE-DEUXIEME 

37.    Mcntir,  to  lie.     P.  pr.  mentant.     P.  p.  inenti. 

Pres.  Je  mens,  tu  mens,  il  ment,  nous  inontons,  etc.,  like  servir. 

Thus  also  :  D&nentir,  to  give  the  lie. 

88.    Sentir,  to  feel,  to  smell.     P.  pr.  sentant.     P.  p.  seati. 
Pres.  Je  sens,  tu  sens,  il  sew£,  nous  scntons,  etc.,  like  servir. 

Thus  :    Consentir,  to  consent  ;  pressentir,  to  foresee  ;  ressentir,  to  feel. 

39.  /Se  repcntir  de  qch.,  to  repent.    P.  jpr.  se  repentant.    P.  p. 
repenti. 

Pr<?s.  Jo  me  repens,  I  repent,  etc.,  like  sentir. 

40.  Sortir,  tc  go  out.     P.  j?r.  sortant.     P.  p.  sorti. 
s.  Je  sors,  tu  sors,  il  sort,  etc.,  like  servir. 


Thus  :  Ressortir,  to  go  out  again.  Hessortir,  to  resort,  and  ass&rtir,  to 
assort,  are  regularly  conjugated  like  ./?«*>. 

41.  Courir,  to  run.     P.  jor.  courant.     P.  p.  courw. 

Prcs.  Je  cours,  tu  cours,  il  court,  nous  courons,  YOUS  coui'ez,  ils 
courent.  Subj.  Que  jo  coure. 

Pret.  Je  courws,  tu  courus,  il  courut,  nous  courumes,  vous  cou- 
rutes,  ils  courarent. 

Fut.  Je  courrai,  tu  courras,  il  courra,  nous  coun'ons,  vous  cour- 
rez,  ils  courront.  Imper.  Cours,  courons,  courez. 

Thus:  Accourir,  to  run  to;  concourir,  to  compete;  discourir,  to  dis- 
course ;  encourir,  to  incur  ;  parcourir,  to  run  over  ;  recourir,  to  have  re- 
course ;  secourir,  to  relieve,  to  assist. 

42.  Cueillir,  to  gather.     P.  pr.  cueillant.     P.  p.  cueilli. 
Pres.  Je  cueille,  tu  cueilles,  il  cueille,  nous  cueillons,  vous  cueil- 

lez,  ils  cueillent.     Subj  .  Que  je  cueille. 

Pret.  Je  cucillis.     Imper.  Cueille,  cueillons,  cucillez. 

Fut.  Je  cueillerai. 

Thus  :  Accueillir,  to  receive  ;  recueittir,  to  gather. 

43.  Offrir,  to  offer.     P.  pr.  offraut.    P.  p.*  effort. 
Pres.  J'oSre,  tu  oUrcs,  il  offre,  nous  ofirons,  etc. 

Pret.  J'ofiris.     Impcr.  Ofire,  offi-ons,  ofircz.     Fut.  J'ofiriral. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS.  185 

44.  Souffrir,  to  suffer.     P.  pr.  souflrant.     P.  p.  souffert. 
Prcs.  Je  souffre,  tu  souffres,  etc.,  like  ojfrir. 

45.  Ouvrir,  to  open.     P.  pr.  ouvrant.     P.  p.  ouvert. 
Pres.  J'ouvre,  etc.,  like  offrir. 

Thus :   Ifouvrir,  to  open  again ;  entr'ouvrir,  to  open  a  little. 

46.  Couvrir,  to  cover.     P.  pr.  couvrant.     P.  p.  convert. 
Thus :  D&ouvrir,  to  discover ;  recouvrir,  to  cover  over. 

47.  Tressaittir,  to  start,  to  tremble.     P.  pr.  tressaillant.     P. 
p;  tressailli. 

Pres.  Je  tressaille,  tu  tressailles,  il  tressaille,  etc. 

Pret.  Je  tressaillis,  etc. 

FuL  Je  tressaillerai  and  je  tressailKrai. 

Thus  :   Assaillir,  to  assault. 

48.  Saillir,  to  put  out,  project.     P.  pr.  saillant.     P.  p.  sailli. 
Pres.  third  person,  il  saille,  pi.  ils  saillent.     Like  tressaillir  ; 

but  it  is  used  only  in  the  third  person  singular  and  plural. 
Saillir  (—jaillir),  to  gush,  is  regular. 

VOCABULARY. 

Du  mouton,  mutton.  fatigut,  tired. 

la  voiture,  the  coach.  la  violette,  the  violet. 

mdpriser,  to  despise.  la  livre,  the  pound. 

*£"~~" 

THEME  42. 

1.  The  enciny  flee.  2.  Let  us  shun  these  places.  3.  We  clothe 
the  poor.  4.  The  young  girl  was  clad  in  black.  5.  I  cannot  meet 
him ;  he  shuns  me.  6.  Avoid  bad  company.  7.  Your  friend,  Mr, 
A.,  does  not  servo  me  well.  8.  I  made  use  of  your  coach.  9. 
Tell  me  what  he  has  done  to  you ;  but,  above  all  (surtouf),  do  not 
lie.  1.0-  He  who  lies  deserves  to  be  despised.  11.  I  go  out  every 
day.  12.  Do  not  go  out,  Robert;  it  is  too  cold.  13.  If  I  were 
as  ill  as  you,  I  would  not  go  out  of  my  room.  14.  I  feel  the  cold. 

15.  Do  not  make  any  (de)  noise,  for  my  mother  is  asleep  (sleeps). 

16.  I  hope  she  will  sleep  better  to-night  (cette  nuit).     17.  If  I  do 


186  XLIII.      QUARANTE-TBOIS1EME   LEQON. 

not  walk  a  little,  I  shall  fall  asleep.  18.  Do  you  not  repent  of 
what  (de  ce  que)  you  have  done?  19.  I  always  repent  when  I 
have  done  wrong  (mal).  20.  Do  not  run  so  fast  (yite),  you  will 
be  tired.  21.  They  always  run  when  they  go  to  see  their  aunt. 
22.  I  ran  faster  than  you.  23.  If  she  is  unhappy,  I  shall  relieve 
her.  24.  For  whom  are  you  gathering  these  violets  ?  25.1  gather 
them  for  my  mother.  26.  The  young  lady  has  been  received  with 
the  greatest  kindness.  27.  I  always  offer  him  my  services.  28. 
lie  offered  me  a  hundred  pounds  for  my  garden.  20.  What  are 
you  doing  there  ?  30.  I  cover  the  plants  with  (de)  snow. 


XLIII.   QUARANTE-TROISIEME 


IRREGULAR  VERBS.  — THIRD   CLASS. 

(49  —  53.   Verbs  in  ir  changing  their  radical  vowel  and  taking  the  flexions 
of  the  third  Conjugation.) 

49.  Mburir*  to  die.     P.  pr.  mourant.     P.p.  mort. 

Pres.  Je  meurs,  tu  meurs,  il  meurt,  nous  mourons,  vous  mourez, 
ils  meurent.  Subj.  Que  je  meure,  que  tu  meures,  qu'il  meure,  que 
nous  mourions,  que  vous  mouriez,  qu'ils  meurent. 

Tmper.  Meurs,  mourons,  mourez. 

Pret.  Je  rnourus,  tu  mourus,  il  mourut,  nous  mourumes,  vous 
mourutcs,  ils  moururent. 

Fut.  Je  mourrai,  tu  mourras,  il  rnourra,  etc. 

Thus  also  :  Se  mourir,  to  be  near  dying,  to  be  fainting.  Pres.  Je  me 
mcurs,  etc. 

50.  BouiUir,  to  Tboil,  neut.  v.    P.  pr.  bouillant.    P.  p.  bouilli. 
Pres.  Je  bous,  tu  bous,  il  bout,  nous  bouillons,  vous  bouillez,  ils 

bouillent.     Subf.  Que  je  bouille. 


IRREGULAR   VERBS.  187 

Pret.  Je  bouillis. 
Fut.  Je  bouilKrai. 

To  boil,  as  an  active  verb,  is  rendered  falre  louittir,  as  :  To  boil  potatoes, 
faire  bouillir  des  pommcs  de  terre. 

51.  Venir*  to  come.     P.  pr.  vcnant.     P.  p.  venw. 

Pres.  Je  viens,  tu  viens,  il  v^ent,  nous  venons,  vous  venez,  ils 
V^ennent.  Pres.  Subj.  Que  je  v^enne,  que  tu  v^nnes,  qu'il  vienne, 
que  nous  venions,  que  vous  veniez,  qu'ils  v^nnent.  Imperf.  Je 
venais. 

Pret.  Je  vins,  tu  vins,  il  vint,  nous  vmmes,  vous  v?ntes,  ils  v^n- 
rent.  Imperf.  Subj.  Que  je  vinsse,  que  tu  vinsses,  qu'il  vmt,  que 
nous  vinssions,  etc. 

Fut.  Je  viendrai,  tu  vzendras,  etc. 

Cond.  Je  vi'endrais. 

Imper.  Viens,  venons,  venez. 

Conjugate  in  the  same  manner:  Convenir,  to  agree,  to  suit ;  devenir*  to 
become ;  intervenir*  to  intervene ;  parvenir*  to  attain,  to  reach ;  prtfvenir, 
to  be  beforehand  with,  to  inform  ;  provenir*  to  arise,  spring  from,  to  pro- 
ceed ;  se  souvenir,  to  remember ;  survenir*  to  happen ;  subvenir,  to  relieve. ; 
revenir*  to  come  back  (again). 

52.  Tenir,  to  hold.     P.  pr.  tenant.     P.  p.  tern*. 
This  verb  is  conjugated  like  venir,  as : 

Pres.  Je  tiens,  tu  tafens,  il  tzVnt,  nous  tenons,  vous  tenez,  ils  tien- 
nent.  tSuij.  Que  je  t/enne. 

jPre^.  Je  tins,  tu  tins,  il  tz'nt,  nous  tmnies,  vous  tmtes,  ils  t/n- 
rent.  jPw^.  Je  ti'endrai. 

Imper.  Tiens,  tenons,  tenez. 

Thus  also  :  Appartenir,  to  belong ;  s'abstenir,  to  abstain ;  contenir,  to  con- 
tain ;  d£enir,  to  detain ;  entretenir,  to  keep  up ;  maintenir,  to  maintain  ;  cb- 
tenir,  to  obtain ;  retenir,  to  retain ;  soutenir,  to  sustain,  uphold,  support. 

53.  Acquerir,  to  acquire.     P.  pr.  acquerant.     P.  %)•  acqu?'s. 
Pres.  J'acquiers,  tu  acqm'ers,  il  acquzert,  nous  acquerons,  vous 

acquerez,  ils  acquzerent.  Pres.  Subj.  Que  j'acqwere,  que  tu  ac- 
quires, qu'il  acquiere,  que  nous  acquerions,  que  vous  acqueriez, 
qu'ils  acquzerent. 


188  XLIII.     QUARANTE-TROISIEME  LEQCN. 

Pret.  J  'acquw,  tu  acqms,  il  acqmV,  nous  acqiumes,  vous 
ils  accpiirent.     Impf.  Subj.  Que  j'acquisse. 

Fut.  J'acquerrai,  tu  acquerras,  il  acquerra,  etc. 

Impcr.  Acqm'ers,  acquerons,  acquerez. 

Conjugate  in  the  same  manner:  Conqufrir,  to  conquer ;  reconquer,  to 
conquer  again ;  rcqu&rir,  to  request,  and  s'enque'rir,  to  inquire.  Qitfrir,  to 
seek,  is  used,  in  familiar  conversation,  after  alter,  venir,  envoyer,  as  :  a//es 
qu€rir,  go  and  seek. 

VOCABULARY. 

Ze  chagrin,  grief.  I' assiduity  f.  assiduity. 

maladie,  f.  disease,  illness.  efes  connaissanccs,  f.  knowledge. 

douloureux,  -se,  painful.  /a  chaleur,  the  heat. 

continuer,  to  continue.  /a  partie,  the  part. 

Za  parole,  the  word. 

THEME  43. 

1.  Your  friend  is  dying.  2.  Mrs.  A.  died  of  (de)  grief.  3. 
The  old  general  died  at  Paris  of  a  very  painful  disease.  4.  Take 
the  water  off  the  fire ;  it  boils.  5.  Boil  that  meat  again,  it  has  not- 
boiled  long  enough.  6.  Miss  Emily  is  corning.  7.  Dost  thou 
come?  8.  Yes,  I  come.  9.  Why  do  you  not  come  when  I  call 
you?  10.  He  came  to  see  me  every  morning.  11.  Come  back 
soon.  12.  I  shall  be  (come)  back  in  an  hour.  13.  Mrs.  B.  would 
have  come  to  us  if  it  had  not  rained  (plu).  14.  I  hope  you  will 
keep  your  word  and  (will)  come  to-morrow.  15.  I  maintain,  and 
will  always  maintain,  that  you  will  not  be  happy  without  virtue.  16. 
I  agree  that  Miss  L.  is  the  prettiest  of  the  family ;  but  she  is  so 
proud,  that  I  know  (sais)  not  what  will  become  of  her  (ce  qu'ette 
.  .  .).  17.  My  uncle  will  not  come  back  to-day.  18.  Mr.  S.  will 
not  obtain  that  situation  (place).  19.  If  you  study  much,  you  will 
acquire  knowledge.  20.  I  do  not  think  (that)  this  color  suits  (to) 
your  sister.  21.  That  hat  would  suit  you  very  well,  if  you  -\pere  a 
little  taller.  22.  Alexander  the  Great  conquered  the  greatest  part 
of  Asia.  23.  Your  uncle  has  acquired  a  great  name  in  America. 

24.  The  young  man  did  not  survive  (outlive)  (to)  that  misfortune. 

25.  You  will  become  a  great  man,  if  you  continue  to  study  with  the 
same  assiduity. 


IRREGULAR  VERB3.  189 

XLIY.   QUARANTE-QUATRIEME  LEgON. 


IRREGULAR    VERBS.  —  THIRD    CLASS  -CONTINUED. 

(54  —  66.    Verbs  in  -oir.     Contraction  of  the  root  and  the  terminations, 
Part,  past  and  Pret.  in  w.) 

54.  Devoir,  to  owe,  (ought  to).     JP.  pr.  devant.     P.p.  du. 
Pres.  Je  dois*  tu  dois,  il  doit,  nous  dcvons,  vous  devez,  ils 

doivent.     Pres.  Subj.  Que  je  doive. 

Pret.  Je  dus,  tu  dus,  il  dut,  nous  duines,  YOUS  diites,  ils  durent. 
Tmperf.  Subj.  Que  je  dusse. 

Fut.  Je  devrai,  tu  dcvras,  etc.     Oond.  Je  devrais.* 

Thus  also  :  redevoir. 

55.  Recevoir,  to  receive.     P.  pr.  recevant.     P.  p.  repu. 
Pres.  Je  repois,  tu  re$ois,  il  regoit,  nous  recevons,  vous  rccevez, 

ils  regozvent. 

Pret.  Je  lequs,  tu  IQ^US,  il  requt,  nous  TQqiunes,  vous  refutes, 
ils  requrent. 

Fut.  Je  recevrai,  tu  recevras,  etc. 

Thus  also  :  Decevoir,  to  deceive  ;  apercevoir,  to  perceive  ;  concevoir,  to  con- 
ceive ;  percevoir,  to  collect. 

56,-s.D^oiV,  to  fall,  to  decay.     (Np  P.  pr.)     P.p.  dec/m. 

Pres.  Je  dechois,  tu  dechois,  il  dechoit,  nous  dechoyons,  vous 
declioi/ez,  ils  dechoient.  Subj.  Que  je  dechoie. 

Pret.  Je  dechus,  tu  declius,  il  dechut,  nous  dechumes,  vous  dc^ 
chutes,  ils  dechurent. 

Fut.  Je  decherTm',  tu  decherra^,  ils  decherra,  nous  dvoherrons, 
vous  deeherre^,  ils  dudoh 


Thus  ••  Echoir,  to  fall  to,  to  expire  ;  P.  pr.  (fchtfant;  P.  p.  &hu.  It  is  now 
only  used  in  the  third  pers.  sing.:  il  or  -die  tfchoit,  il  €cliuty  etc.  Choir  is  only 
used  in  the  Infinitive  mood. 

*  Jc  dois,  followed  by  a  verb,  corresponds  to  the  English  j  lam  to,  Iinusl.  Je 
dcvrais,  I  ought  to,  I  should. 


190  XLIY.     QUARANTE-QUATRIEME   LE^ON. 

57.  Falloir,iQ\)Q  necessary,  is  an  impersonal  verb,  the  conjuga- 
tion of  which  has  been  given  p.  147. 

Pres.  II  faut.     Imperf.  II  fallait,  etc. 

58.  Afpuvotr,to  move.     P. pr.  mouvant.    P. p.  mu. 

Pres.  Je  meus,  tu  meus,  il  meut,  nous  mouvons,  vous  mouvez, 
ils  meuvent.  Subj.  Que  je  mewve,  c[ue  tu  mewves,  qu'il  mewve, 
que  nous  mouvions,  que  vous  mouviez,  qu'ils  mewvent. 

Pret.  Je  mus,  tu  mus,  il  mut,  nous  mumes,  vous  mutes,  ils 
murent. 

Fut.  Je  mouvrai.  \ 

Thus  also :  iZmouvoir,  to  move,  to  excite,  stir  up ;  s*£mouvoirt  to  be  moved, 
rJrected. 

59.  Pleuvoir,  to  rain  (impers.*).     P.  pr.  pleuvant.     P.  p.  plu. 
Pres.  II  pleut.     Subj.  Qu'il  plcuve.     Imperf.  II  pleuvait. 
Pret.  II  plut.     Subj.  Imperf.  Qu'il  plut. 

Fut.  II  pleuvra. 

CO.   PourvQirj*  to  provide.    P.  pr.  pourvo^ant.    P.  p.  pourvu. 
Pres.  Je  pourvois,  tu  pourvois,  il  pourvoit,  nous  pourvoyons,  vous 
pourvo?/ez,  ils  pourvoient. 

Pret.  Je  pourvus.     Fut.  Je  pourvoirai. 

Thus  :  Pr€voir,  to  foresee,  which  makes  in  the  Pret.  je  prfvis. 

61.   Pouvoir,  to  be  able.     P.pr.  pouvant.     P.  p.  pu. 

Pres.  Je  pcux  (or  je  puts) ,  tu  peux,  il  pent,  nous  pouvons,  vous 
pouvez,  ils  peuvent.  Pres.  Subj.  Que  je  2}U^se^  quo  tu  puisses, 
qrf'Apuisse,  que  nous  pmssions,  quo  vous  puissiez,  qu'ils  puissent. 

Impf.  Je  pouvais. 

Pret.  Je  pus,  tu  pus,  il  put,  nous  pumes,  vous  putes,  ils  purent. 

Imperf.  Subj.  Que  jvpusse.^ 

Fut.  Je  pourrai,  tu  pourras,  il  pourra,  nous  pourrons,  vous 
pourrez,  ils  pouTTont.  Cond.  Jc  pourrais. 

NOTE.  May,  expressing  a  wish,  is  rendered  by  the  Present  tense  of  the 
Subjunctive.  Ex.:  Puisse-t-il  etre  heureux,  may  he  be  happy  1 

*  Like  65  —  Voir,  except  the  Pret .  and  Fut. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS.  191 

62.  •  Savoir,  to  know.     P.  pr.  savant.     P.  p.  su. 

Pres.  Je  sais,  tu  sais,  il  sail,  nous  savons,  vous  savez,  ils  savenfc. 
Subf.  Que  je  sache,  que  tu  sac/2  es,  qu'il  sac^e,  que  nous  sac/aons, 
que  vous  sac/iiez,  qu'ils  sacAent.  Imperf.  Je  savais,  tu  savais,  etc. 

Pret.  Je  sus,  tu  sus,  il  sut,  nous  sumes,  vous  sutes,  ils  surent. 

Fut.  Je  sawrai,  tu  sawras,  etc.  j 

Imper.  Sache,  sachons,  sachez. 

When  the  word  can  means  to  know  how,  it  is  rendered  in  French  by  savoir, 
instead  of  pouvoir.  Ex.:  Savez-vous  parler  francais?  Can  you  speak 
French  ? 

KOTE.  There  is  also  an  old  form  of  the  Pres.  Ind.  Je  sache.  The  Cond. 
Je  ne  saurais  (without  pas)  signifies,  I  cannot,  as  :  Je  ne  saurazs  vous  dire, 
I  cannot  tell  you. 


G3.    Valoir,  to  be  worth.     P.  pr.  valant.     P.  p. 

Pres.  Je  vaux,  tu  vaux,  il  vaut,  nous  valons,  vous  valez,  ils  va- 
lent.  Subj.  Que  je  vaille,  que  tu  vailles,  qu'il  vaille,  que  nous 
valions,  que  vous  valiez,  qu'ils  vaillent. 

Imperf.  Je  valais. 

Pret.  Je  valus,  tu  valus,  il  valut,  nous  valumes,  etc. 

Fut.  Je  vaudrai,  tu  vaudras,  etc. 

Cond.  Je  vaudrais. 

Observe  the  expression  :  II  vaut  mieux,  it  is  better,  etc.  Conjugate  in  the 
same  manner:  pre'valoir,$o  prevail;  but  it  makes  the  Subj.  pres.:  Que  je 
prtfvale  (not  prevaille),  que  tu  privates,  qu'il  private,  que  nous  privations,  que 
vous  pre'valiez,  qu'ils  prevalent. 

64.    Vouloir,  to  be  willing.     P.  pr.  voulant.    P.  p.  voulu. 

Pres.  Je  veux,  tu  veux,  il  veut,  nous  voulons,  vous  voulez,  ils 
veulent.  Subj.  Que  je  veuille,  quo  tu  veuilles,  qu'il  veuille,  que 
aous  voulions,  que  vous  vouliez,  qu'ils  veuillent.  Imper.  (  Veuille), 
veuillez,  be  so  kind  as. 

Imperf.  Je  voulais. 

Pret.  Je  voulus,  tu  voulus,  il  voulut,  nous  voulumes,  etc. 

Fut.  Je  voudrai,  tu  voudras,  etc. 

Cond.  Je  voudrais,  I  should  like  to. 


192  XLIY.      QUAKANTE-QCJATRIEME   LEgON. 

The  first  person,  je  veux,  is  mostly  used  to  imply  authority,,  command. 
Je  d&ire  is  substituted  as  a  more  polite  expression  for  the  affirmative.  Je 
ne  veux  pas,  is  used,  however,  for  the  necj  \itive. 

65.  Voir,  to  see.     P.  pr.  volant.     P.  p.  vu. 

Pres.  Je  vois,  tu  vois,  il  voit,  nous  voyons,  vous  voyez,  ils  voient. 

fmperf.  Je  voyais,  tu  voyais,  etc. 

PreL  Je  vis,  tu  vis,  il  vit,  nous  vimes,  vous  vites,  etc. 

Fut.  Je  vcrrai,  tu  verras,  il  verra,  etc. 

Tmper.  Yois,  voyons,  voyez. 

Thus  :  Revoir,  to  see  again  ;  entrevoir,  to  have  a  glimpse  of.  For  pour- 
voir  and  pr&oir  see  No.  60.  Alter  voir  and  venir  voir  qn.  are  rendered  :  to 
call  upon  a  person. 

66.  S'asseoir,  to  sit  ckmn.     P.  pr.  s'asse?/ant.     P.  p.  assis.  « 
Pres.  Je  m'assieds,  tu  t'assieds,  il  s'assied,  nous  nous  asseyons, 

vous  vous  asseyez,  ils  tfasseient.    Or,  je  m'assois,  etc. 

Imperf.  Je  m'asseyais.     Or,  jc  m'assoyais,  etc. 

Pret.  Je  m'assis,  tu  t'assis,  il  s'assit,  nous  nous  assimes,  vous 
vous  assites,  ils  s'assirent. 

Fut.  Je  m'assierat,  tu  i'assiera*,  il  &yassierat  etc.  Or,  je  m'as- 
seierai,  tu  t'osseieras,  il  s'asse^ra,  etc. 

Imper.  Assieds-ioi,  asse^ows-nous,  asse?/e?-vous. 

VOCABULARY. 


C/7i  panier,  a  basket.  ^/)a/s,  thick. 

?e  danger,  the  danger.  rherbe,  f.  the  grass. 

Ze  ressort,  the  spring,  humide,  damp. 

/e6eat/^ere,the  brother-in-lavr.  Ze  lruit>  la  nouvelle,  the  report. 

rtp&er,  to  repeat.  arreter,  to  stop. 

coupable,  criminal.  Vadresse,  f.  the  direction, 
tf,  the  looking-glass. 


THEME   44. 

1.  I  am  to  copy  my  exercise.  2.  We  must  set  out.  3.  You 
ought  to  come  at  two  o'clock.  4.  I  receive  a  letter  every  clay.  5. 
We  receive  our  money  from  the  banker  (du  lanquier).  6.  My 
friend  received  a  basket  filled  with  grapes  (de  raisins).  7.  The 


IRREGULAR   VERBS.  193 

hunter  perceived  a  bird  on  a  tree.  8.  They  did  not  perceive  the 
clanger.  9.  The  spring  which  moves  the  whole  machine  is  very 
ingenious  (ingenieux).  10.  Does  it  rain?  11.  No,  it  does  not 
rain ;  but  it  will  rain  this  evening.  12.  If  men  do  not  provide  for 
it  (#),  God  will  provide  for  it.  18.  Before  he  left  (avant  de  par* 
ftr),  he  provided  for  (a)  all.  14.  Can  you  come?  15.  I  cannot 
come,  but  my  brother  can  (come).  16,  We  could  see  nothing,  for 
it  was  dark  (il  faisait  nuit).  17.  I  could  do  it  myself,  if  I  had 
time.  18.  May  you  be  happy !  I  could  do  no  better.  19.  I  know 
that  he  is  your  friend,  but  I  did  not  know  that  he  was  your  brother- 
in-law.  20.  Do  you  know  why  he  has  (is)  not  come?  V21.  No,  I 
do  not  know  (it).  22.  When  you  know  (Put.)  your  lesson,  come 
and  repeat  it  to  me.  23.  These  pens  are  worth  nothing.  24.  It 
is  (yauf)  better  to  be  unfortunate  than  guilty.  25.  Can't  you  see 
that  star?  26.  I  do  not  see  it.  27.  Sit  down  there  a  minute.  28. 
Why  do  not  you  sit  down  ?  29.  Let  us  sit  upon  the  grass.  30.  I 
would  sit  down  upon  the  grass,  if  it  were  not  so  damp.  31.  Can 
you  speak  French  ?  32.  I  can  read,  but  I  cannot  speak  [it].  33. 
Is  this  report  true?  34.  I  cannot  (Cond.)  tell  (it)  you.  35.  He 
does  not  choose  to  (will  not)  cat.  36.  If  I  chose  (would),  I  should 
tell  you  where  he  lives.  37.  What  would  you  have  me  do  (that  I 
should  do)  (Imperf.  Subj.)  ?  38.  We  could  have  stopped  him,  if 
we  had  chosen.  39.  I  send  you  herewith  (ci-joinf)  the  direction 
of  Mr.  L.  40.  I  have  found  the  ring  which  my  cousin  has  lost, 
and  I  shall  send  it  to  her. 
13 


194  XLV.      QUARANTE-CINQUIEME   LEgON. 

XLV.    QUARANTE-CINQUIEME    LEgON, 


UlEEGULAIl  VERBS.  —  THIRD  CLASS    CONTINUED. 

67.  Hire,  to  laugh.     P.  pr.  riant.     P.  p.  ri. 
Prcs,  Je  ris.     Imperf.  Je  rials. 

Prct.  Je  ris,  tu  ris,  il  rit,  etc.     Fut.  Je  rirai. 

68.  Envoyer,  to  send.     P.  pr.  envoyant.     P.  p.  envoye*. 
Pres.  J'envoie.     Imperf.  J'envoyais.     Pret.  J'cnvoyai. 
Fut.  J'envemu,  tu  enverras,  etc.      Cond.  J'enverrais. 

69.  Aller*  to  go.     P.  pr.  allant.     P.  p.  alle. 

Pres.  Je  vais,  tu  vas,  il  va,  nous  allons,  vous  allez,  ils  vont. 
Prcs.  Sidy.  Que  faille,  que  tu  ailles,  qu'il  ewYfo,  que  nous  allions, 
^ue  vous  alliez,  qu'ils  aillent. 

Imperf.  J'allais,  tu  allais,  il  allait,  etc. 

Pret.  J'allai,  tu  alias,  il  alia,  nous  allames,  vous  allates,  ils 
allerent. 

Imperf.  Sulj.  Que  j'allasse,  que  tu  allasses,  etc. 

Imper.  Ya,  allons,  allez.     Perf.  Je  suis  alle,  I  have  gone. 

Fut.  J'irai  (IthaUgo),  tu  iras,  il  ira,  nous  ii-ons,  vous  irez,  ils 
iront.  Cond.  J'ii-ais,  tu  irais,  etc. 

Conjugation  of  S'en  alter,  to  go  away. 

"We  give  the  reflective  verb  S'en  aller,  to  go  away,  at  full  length,  because 
its  conjugation  is  rather  difficult  on  account  of  its  two  pronouns.  Observe 
that  en  is  never  separated  from  the  objective  m',  t\  s',  nous,  etc. ;  hsnce  it 
follows,  that  the  compound  or  Perfect  must  not  be  written :  Je  me  suis  en 
atif,  but  je  m'en  suis  alle',  tu  t'en  es  edit,  etc. 

INDICATIVE   MOOD. 

• 
PRESENT   TENSE. 

Je  m'en  vais,  I  go  away.  nous  nous  en  allons,we  go  away. 

tu  t'en  vas,          etc.  vous  vous  en  allez,         etc. 

il  s'en  va,  etc.  ils  s'en  vent,  etc. 


IRREGULAR   VERBS. 


195 


Neg.  Je  no  m'en  vais  pas. 
tu  ne  t'en  vas  pas,  etc. 


M'en  vais-je,  do  I  go  awayt  etc. 
Ne  m'en  vais-je  pas  ?  etc. 


IMPERFECT. 

Jc  m'en  allais,  tu  t'cn  allais.  M'en  allais-je,  did  I  go  away  1 

Jo  ne  m'en  allais  pas.  Ne  m'en  allais-je  pas  ? 


Je  m'en  allai. 

Je  ne  m'en  allai  pas. 

Je  m'en  irai. 

Je  ne  m'en  irai  pas. 

AFFIRMATIVE. 

Va-t'en. 

(qu'il  s'en  aille). 

allons-nous-en. 

allez-vous-en. 

(qu'ils  s'enaillent). 


PRETERITE. 

M'en  allai-je  ? 

Ne  m'en  allai-je  pas  ? 

FUTURE. 

M'enirai-je? 

Ne  m'en  irai-je  pas  ? 


IMPERATIVE. 


NEGATIVE. 


Ne  t'en  va  pas. 
(qu'il  ne  s'en  aille  pas), 
ne  nous  en  allons  pas. 
ne  vous  en  allez  pas. 
(qu'ils  ne  s'en  aillent  pas). 


.;.._.._—  COMPOUND   OP   TIIE  PRESENT. 

Je  m'en  suis  alle,  I  have  gone  away,  nous  nous  en  sommes 

tu  t'en  es  al!6.  vous  vous  en  etes  all^(s). 

il  s'en  est  alle.  ils  s'en  sont  alles. 

elle  s'en  est  allde.  elles  s'en  sont  allees. 


NEGATIVELY. 


Je  ne  m'en  suis  pas  all(5. 
tu  ne  t'en  es  pas  alle. 
il  ne  s'en  est  pis  alle. 


nous  ne  nous  en  sommes  pas 

alles. 
vous    ne    vous    en    £tes    pas 

alie(s). 
ils  ne  s'en  sont  pas  alle's. 


196 


XLV.      QUARANTE-CINQUlfiME 


M'en  suis-je  alle  ? 
t'en  es-tu  alle? 
e'en  est-il  alls'  ? 


INTERROGATIVELY. 

nous  en  sommes-nous  alles? 
vous  en  etes-vous  alle(s)  ? 
s'en  sont  ils  alles  ? 


NEGATIVE-INTERROGATIVE. 

Ne  m'en  suis-je  pas  alle  ?  ne  nous  en  sommes-nous  p.  alleys  ? 

ne  t'en  es-tu  pas  alle?  ne  vous  en  etes-vous  pas  alles? 

ne  s'en  est-il  pas  alle  ?  ne  s'en  sont-ils  pas  alles  ? 

COMPOUND  OP  THE  IMPERFECT. 

Je  m'en  ^tais  alle.  M'en  e'tais-je  alle  ?, 

Je  ne  m'en  e'tais  pas  alle.  No  m'en  etais-je'pas  alld  ? 


Que  je  m'en  aille. 
que  tu  t'en  ailles. 
qu'il  s'en  aille;. 

IMPERFECT. 

Que  je  m'en  allasse. 
que  tu  t'en  aUasses* 
qu'il  s'en  allat,  etc. 

S'en  aller. 


S'en  allant. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT. 

que  nous  nous  en  allions. 
que  vous  vous  en  alliez. 
qu'ils  s'en  aillent. 

PERFECT* 

Que  je  m'en  sois  alld. 

PLUPERFECT. 

Que  je  m'en  fusse  all^. 

INFINITIVE. 

S'en  etre  alle. 

PARTICIPLES. 

S'en  etant  alle*. 


VOCABULARY. 

^f  obliged.  sonner,  to  strike. 

Jeudi  dernier,  last  Thursday.  la  santf,  health. 

la  musique,  music.  importuner,  to  importune. 

le  pavilion,  the  flag.  hissf,  hoisted. 


DEFECTIVE  VERBS.  197 

THEME   45. 

1.  I  go  to  London.  2.  Thou  goest  to  Paris.  3.  He  goes  to 
Berlin.  4.  My  brother  has_  also  gone  to  Berlin.  5.  Where  are 
you  going?  6.  I  am  going  to  the  play  (an  spectacle).  7.  I  would 
go  with  you,  if  I  had  time.  8.  Why  are  they  going  away  so  soon? 
9.  They  are  obliged  to  _go_away,  10.  Will  not  your  mother  be 
angry  (fdchee'),  if  you  go  away  before  her  ?  11.  I  told  her  that  I 
would  go  away  before  her,  and  she  has  permitted  (it  to)  me.  12. 
My  sister  and  I  (we)  went  to  the  concert  last  Thursday.  13.  If 
*you  l^d  gone  (there,  y)  also,  you  would  have  heard  fine  music.  14. 
These  men  went  yesterday  from  house  to  (en)  house.  15.  At  what 
o'clock  will  you  go  (away)  ?  16.  I  should  have  already  gone,  if  it 
had  not  rained  so  fast  (fort).  17.  Is  he  really  gone  (away)? 
Yes,  he  went  (has  gone)  away  this  morning.  18.  Let  us  go  (away), 
it  is  going  to  (il  vd)  strike  three  o'clock.  19.  How  is  (va)  your 
health?  20.  Thank_you, Jt_ l^JiotjTery  good.  21.  I  wish  (should 
like  that)  the  boy  would  go  (away)  (Imperf.  Subj.).  22.  I  wish 
they  would  go  away.  23.  Begone  (go  away),  you  importune  me. 


XLYI.     QUARANTE-SIXIEME     LE90N. 


DEFECTIVE    VERBS. 

Verbs  whereof  some  tenses  or  persons  are  wanting  are  defective 
verbs.     They  are  as  follows :  — 

70.  Braire,  to  bray. 

Pres.  H  brait,  ils  braient.     Fut.  II  braira, 
Cond.  n  brairait.. 

71.  Bruire,  to  roar.     P.  pr.  bruyant. 
Imperf.  II  bruyait,  pi.  ils  bruyaient. 

72.  Choir,  to  fall.     P.p.  chu. 


198  XL VI.  -    QUARANTE-SIXIEME  LE£QN. 

73.  Clore,  to  close.     P.  p.  clos. 
Pres.  Je  clos,  tu  clos,  il  clot. 

Fut.  Je  clorai,  tu  cloras,  etc.      Cond.  Je  clorais. 

74.  Edore*  to  be  hatched.     P.  p.  eclos. 

Pres.  II  eclot,  pi.  ils  eclosent.     Subj.  Qu'il  eclose,  pi. 
eclosent. 

Fut.  II  eclora,  pi.  ils  ecloront.     Its  compound  tenses  are  formed 
with  etre. 

75.  Faittir,  to  fail.     P.  pr.  (faiUant.)     P.  p.  failli. 
Pres.  II  faut. 

Pretf.  Je  faillis,  tu  faillis,  il  faillit,  nous  faillimes,  YOUS  faillites, 
ils  faillirent. 

Perf.  J'ai  failli,  I  had  nearly. 
Thus  :  Dtfaillir,  to  faint. 

76.  Ferir  is   used  only  in  the  expression :    Sans  coup  ftrir, 
without  striking  a  blow. 

77.  Frire,  to  fry.     P.  pr.  wanting.     P.  p.  frit. 
Pres.  Je  fris,  tu  fris,  il  frit.     Plur.  wanting. 

Fut.  Je  frirai.      Cond.  Je  frirais.     Perf.  J'ai  frit,  etc. 

78.  Gesir,  to  lie.     P.  pr.  gz'sant. 

Pres.  ci-git,  here  lies;  pi.  ci-gisent  (used  on  tombstones*).     Far 
ther :  nous  gisons,  YOUS  gisez,  ils  gisent. 
Imperf.  ci-gisait;  pi.  ci-gisaicnt. 

79.  Issir,  to  be  born,  is  used  only  in  the  P.  p.  issu. 

80.  Omr,  to  hear.     P.  p.  ou'i. 

Pret.  J'ouls,  tu  ou'is,  etc.     Imperf.  Subj.  Que  j'ouisse,  etc. 
Further  the  compound  tenses,  as  :  J'ai  oui',  etc. 

81.  Sourdre,  to  rush  out  of  the  ground,  as  water,  has  only  tie 
Infinitive  and  the  Present,  elle  sourd,  elles  sourdent: 

82.  Seoir,  to  fit.     P.  pr.  scant.     P.  p.  sis. 

Jhd.  pres.  II  sied.     Fut.  II  siera.      Cond..TL  sierait. 

83.  Surseoir,  to  put  off.     P.  p.  sursis. 
Pres.  Je  surseois.     Pret.  Je  sursis. 

NOTE.  —  Most  of  these  verbs  are  not  much  in  use. 


IRREGULAR  AND  DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


199 


AN   ALPHABETICAL    LIST    OF    ALL    THE    FRENCH 
IRREGULAR,    AND    DEFECTIVE   VERBS  * 

CONTAINING   THEIR   FIVE   PRIMITIVE   TENSES. 


Infinitive. 

Pres. 

Part.  pr. 

P.P. 

Pret. 

No. 

AbsOudre 

j'absous 

absolvant 

absous,  to 

wanting 

13. 

Acque'rir 

j'acquiers 

acquerant 

acquis,  e 

j  'acquis 

53. 

Aller 

je  vais 

allant 

alle,  e 

j'allai 

69. 

Assaillir 

j'assaille 

assaillant 

assailli,  e 

j'assaillis 

47. 

S'asseoir 

je  m'assieds 

s'asseyant 

assis,  e 

je  m'assis 

66. 

Atteindre 

j'atteins 

atteignant 

atteint,  e 

j'atteignis 

14. 

Battre,  see  L.  xxm.  ,Rem.  1. 

Boire 

je  bois 

buvant 

bu,  e 

je  bus 

19. 

Bouillir 

je  bous 

bouillant 

bouilli,  e 

je  bouillis 

50. 

Braire 

il  brait 

— 

wanting 

wanting 

70. 

Bruire           Imp. 

il  bruyait 

bruyant 

— 

— 

71. 

Ccindre 

je  ceins 

ceignant 

ceint,  e 

je  ceignis 

14. 

Choir,  see  dechoir 

— 

— 

— 

56. 

Circoncire 

je  circoncis 

— 

circoncis 

je  circoncis 

2. 

Clore 

je  clos 

— 

clos 

— 

73. 

Conclure 

je  conclus 

concluant 

conclu,  e 

je  conclws 

L.  23. 

Concevoir 

je  con9ois 

concevant 

con^u,  e 

je  congus 

55. 

Conduire 

je  conduis 

conduisant 

conduit,  e 

je  conduisis 

5. 

Confire 

je  confis 

confisant 

confit,  e 

je  confis 

2. 

Connaitre 

je  connais 

connaissant 

connu,  e 

je  connus 

26. 

Coudrc- 

je  couds 

cousant 

cousu,  o 

je  cousis 

11. 

Courir 

je  cours 

courant 

couru,  e 

je  courus 

41. 

Couvrir 

je  couvre 

couvrant 

convert,  e 

je  couvris 

46. 

Craindre 

je  crains 

craignant 

craint,  e 

je  craignis 

15. 

Croire 

je  crois 

croyant 

cm,  e 

je  crus 

20. 

Croitre 

je  crois 

croissant 

cru,  e 

je  crus 

21. 

Cueillir 

je  cueille 

cueillant 

cueilli,  e 

je  cuellis 

42. 

Cnire 

je  cuis 

cuisant 

cuit,  e 

je  cuisis 

4. 

Dechoir 

je  dechois 

— 

de'chu,  e 

je  dechus 

56. 

Devoir 

je  dois 

devant 

da 

je  dus 

54. 

Dire 

je  dis 

disant 

dit,  o 

je  dis 

7. 

Dormir 

je  dors 

dormant 

dormi 

je  dormis 

^5. 

*  The  derivatives  which  are  not  in  this  table  will  be  found  with  the  primitives, 
under  their  respective  number. 


200 


XLVI.      QUARANTE-SIXIEME  LE^ON. 


IS  choir 

il  echoit 

echeant 

echu 

il  e'chut 

56t 

Eclore 

il  eclot 

— 

eclos 

— 

74. 

Ecrire 

j'ecris 

ecrivant 

ecrit,  e 

j'e'crivis 

17. 

Envoyer 

j'envoie 

envoyant 

envoye 

j'envoyai 

68, 

Paire 

je  fais 

faisant 

fait,  e 

jo  fis 

27. 

Faillir 

— 

faillant 

failli 

je  faillis 

75. 

Ealloir 

il  faut 

— 

fallu 

il  fallut 

57, 

Eeindre 

je  feins 

feignant 

feint,  e 

je  feignis 

14. 

Ferir 

— 

— 

— 

— 

76. 

Frirt 

je  fris 

— 

frit,  e 

— 

77. 

Euir 

je  fuis 

fuyant 

fui 

je  fuis 

32. 

Gesii 

il  git 

gisant 

— 

— 

78. 

Joindre 

je  joins 

joignant 

joint,  e 

je  joignis 

16. 

Issir 

— 

— 

issu,  e 

— 

79. 

Instruire 

j'instruis 

instruisant 

instruit,  e 

j'instruisis 

6. 

Lire 

jelis 

lisant 

lu,  e 

je  lus 

18. 

Xiiiire 

je  luis 

luisant 

lui 

— 

I. 

Mentir 

je  mens 

mentant 

menti 

je  mentis 

37. 

Mettre 

je  mets 

mettant 

mis,  e 

je  mis 

28. 

Moudre 

je  mouds 

moulant 

moulu,  e 

je  moulus 

12. 

Mourir 

je  meurs 

mourant 

mort,  e 

je  mourus 

49. 

Mouvoir 

je  meus 

mouvant 

mu,  e 

je  mus 

58. 

Naitre 

je  nais 

naissant 

ne,  e 

je  naquis 

30. 

Nuire 

je  nuis 

nuisant 

nui 

je  nuisis 

3. 

Offrir 

j'offre 

offrant 

offert,  e 

j'onris 

43. 

Oindre 

j'oins 

— 

oint 

j'oignis 

16. 

Ouir 

— 

— 

ou'i 

j'ou'is 

80. 

Ouvrir 

j'ouvre 

ouvrant 

ouvcrt,  e 

j'ouvris 

45. 

Paitre 

je  pais 

paissant 

pu 

— 

25. 

Paraitre 

je  parais 

parais  sant 

paru 

je  parus 

24. 

Partir 

je  pars 

partant 

parti 

je  partis 

36. 

Peindre 

je  perns 

peignant 

peint 

je  peignis 

14. 

Plaindre 

je  plains 

plaignant 

plaint 

je  plaignis 

15. 

Plaire 

je  plais 

plaisant 

plu 

je  plus 

22. 

Pleuvoir 

il  pleut 

pleuvant 

plu 

il  plut 

59. 

Prendre 

je  prends 

prenant 

pris 

je  pris 

29. 

Poindre 

je  poins 

poignant 

(point) 

(je  poignis) 

16. 

Pourvoir 

je  pourvois 

pourvoyant 

pourvu,  e 

pourvus 

60. 

3J>uvoir                jc  pcux  (puis  )  pouvant 

pu 

je  pus 

61. 

Kepentir,  se 

je  me  repens  repentant 

repenti 

je  me  repcntis 

39. 

Restreindrc 

jc  rcstreins 

— 

rcstrcint 

je  restreignis 

14. 

Hire 

je  ris 

riant 

ri 

je  ris 

67« 

SUPPLEMENTARY  TENSES. 


201 


Rorapre,  see  L.  xxin.,  Eem.  2, 

Sailiir 

il  saille 

saillant 

sailli 

il  saillit 

48, 

Savoir 

je  sais 

sachant 

su,  e 

je  sus 

62, 

Sentir 

je  sens 

sentant 

send,  e 

je  sentis 

38, 

Seoir 

il  sied 

scant 

sis,  e 

— 

82. 

Scrrir 

je  sers 

servant 

servi,  e 

je  servis 

34. 

Sortir 

je  sors 

sortant 

sorti 

je  sortis 

40, 

Souffirir 

je  souffre 

souffrant 

souffert,  e 

je  souffris 

44. 

Sourdre 

elle  sourd 

— 

— 

— 

81. 

Suivre 

je  suis 

«uivant 

suivi,  e 

je  suivis 

9. 

Suffire 

je  suffis 

isuffisant 

suffi 

je  suffis 

2. 

Surseoir 

je  surseois 

sursoyant 

sursis 

je  sursis 

M. 

Taire 

je  tais 

taisant 

tu,  e 

je  tus 

2n. 

Teindre 

je  teins 

teignant 

teint,  e 

je  teignis 

!  l. 

Tcnir 

je  tiens 

tenant 

tenu,  e 

je  tins 

b-2. 

Traire 

je  trais 

trayant 

trait 

— 

8. 

Tressaillir 

je  tressaille 

tressaillant 

tressailli 

je  tressaillis 

47. 

Valoir 

je  vaux 

valant 

valu 

je  valus 

63. 

Vaincre 

je  vaincs 

vainquant 

vaincu,  e 

je  vainquis 

10. 

Venir 

je  viens 

venant 

venu,  e 

je  vins 

51. 

Vetir 

je  vets 

vetant 

vetu 

je  vetis 

33. 

Vivre 

je  vis 

vivant 

ve'cu 

je  v£cus 

31. 

Voir 

je  vois 

voyant 

vu,  e 

je  vis 

65. 

Vouloir 

je  veux 

voulant 

voulu,  e 

je  voulus 

64. 

XLVII.    QUARANTE-SEPTI&ME 


HOW  TO  RENDER  DO,  DID,  SHALL,   WILL,  ETC.— 
SUPPLEMENTARY  TENSES. 

The  auxiliaries  do,  will,  shall,  etc.,  in  answers,  are  often  used  in 
English  in  an  elliptical  manner,  when  in  French  the  principal  verb 
must  be  repeated,  and  a  noun  or  pronoun  supplied. 

St,"yes"  is  generally  used  in  answers  instead  of  oui  in  replying  to  a 
question  in  which  there  is  a  negation,  or  in  contradiction  to  a  negative 
statement. 


202  XLVII.      QUARANTE-SEPTIEME   LEgON. 

EXAMPLES  I 

Avcz-voas  du  pain?     Oui,  fen  ai.  Have  you  any  bread?     Yes,  I  have. 

Avez-vous  rcpondu  ?      Oui,  j'ai  r€-  Have  you  answered?     Yes,  I  have. 

pondu  ? 

Achcteront-ils  cc  beurre?     Oui,  ils  Will  tlieij  buy  \.\at  butter?     Yes}lhe$ 

Vacheteront.  will. 

Voulez  vous  Ic  lui  demandcr  ?   Oui,  Will  you  ask  him  for  it  ?     Yes,  I  will. 

je  veux  bicn. 

Etes-vous  Anglais?    Non  jc  nc  le  Are  you  an  Englishman?     No,  I  am 

suis  pas.  not. 

Avez-vous  etc  a  Rome?    Non,  je  Have  you  been  in  Rome?    No,  I  have 

n'y  ai  pas  &€.  not. 

Est-ce  vous  qui  etcs  vcnu  hicr  soir  ?  Was  it  you  who  came  last  ni-jht  ?      No, 

Non,  ce  n'est  pas  moi.  it  was  not  I. 

Cc  n'est  pas  ce  peintre  qui  a  fait  That  painter   did  not  take  your  like' 

votre  portrait  ?     Si,  c'est  lui.  ness,  did  he,  ?     Yes,  he  did. 

Lui  rendrez-vous  son  portrait  ?  CeJa  Will  you  return  her  likeness    to    her? 

va  sans  dire.  Of  course  I  will. 

Partira-t-il  ?     Oui,  il  partira.  Will  he  set  out  ?     Yes,  he  will. 

Inez  vous  s'il  y  allait  ?    Mais  oui,  Should  you  go  there  if  he  did  ?      Why, 

je  leferais.  yes,  I  should. 

Est-cc  la  mode  ?      Oui,    c'cst  la  Is  it  the  fashion  ?     Yes,  it  is. 

mode. 

Pourquoi  vous  plaignez-vous  ?    Je  "Why  do   you  complain  ?     I  do  not 

ne  me  plains  pas ;  c'cst  mon  frere  complain ;     my     brother    does.  — 

qui  se  plaint.    II  so  plaint!   Oui,  Does  he?     Indeed   he   does,   and 

vraimcnt,   et  il  y  a   longtemps  he    has    complained    for    a    long 

qu'il  se  plaint.  time. 

J'ai  faim.     Vraiment?     Oui,  bien  I    am    hungry.      Are    you?      Yes, 

faim.  very. 

Doit-elle  vcnir  ce  soir  ?     Oui,  elle  Does  she  intend  to  come  this  even- 

doit  venir.  ing  ?     Yes,  she  docs. 

In  exclamations  the  auxiliary  must  be  translated  by  some  words 
expressive  of  the  meaning  implied  by  the  English  ellipsis.    Ex. :  — • 

Son  associe  cst  revenu  des  Indes.  His  partner  has  returned  from  India. 

Est-ce    possible,  vous    me    sur-  Has  he  ? 

prenez,  or  simply,  Ah !  vraiment ! 

J'ai  sommeil.    Ah !  vraiment  ?  or,  lam  sleepy.    Are  you  ? 

Allons  done,  vous  plaisantcz. 


SUPPLEMENTARY   TENSES. 


203 


SUPPLEMENTARY    TENSES. 

The  verbs  aller,  devoir,  and  venir  de  are  idiomatically  used,  forming,  with 
an  infinitive,  what  some  grammarians  have  called  "  Supplementary 
Tenses." 

Alter  and  devoir  hefore  an  infinitive  form  idiomatic  futures,  and  corre- 
spond to  tke  English  verbs  to  go  and  to  be  (to  be  about  to),  in  a  like  position. 

Venir  de  forms  idiomatic  past  tenses,  and  corresponds  to  the  English  tt 
kav6  just. 


CONJUGATION  OF  THE  SUPPLEMENTARY  TENSES. 


Je  vais 

avoir, 

Tu  vas 

chanter, 

11  va 

danser, 

Nous  allons 

finir, 

Vous  allez 

rcndre, 

Us  vont 

recevoir, 

J'allais  avoir,  etc. 

Je  dois 

'   avoir, 

Tu  dois 

chanter, 

11  doit 

danser, 

Nous  devons 

'  finir, 

Vous  devez 
Us  doivcnt 

*  rendre, 
recevoir, 

Je  devais  avoir,  etc. 
Je  dcvrais  avoir,  etc. 
J'aurais  du  avoir,  etc. 


Je  vicns  dc  (d')  ' 

avoir, 

Tu  viens        " 

chanter, 

11  vient          " 

danser, 

Nous  vcnons  " 

finir, 

Vous  vcncz    " 

rendre, 

Us  vicnncnt   "    , 

recevoir, 

/  am  going 
Thou  art  going 
He  is  going 
We  are  going 
You  are  going 
They  are  going 


to  have, 
to  sing, 
to  dance, 
to  Jinish. 
to  render, 
to  receive. 


I  ivas  going  to  have,  etc* 


I  am 
Thou  art 
He  is 
We  are 
You  are 
They  are 


to  have, 
to  sing, 
to  dance, 
to  finish, 
to  render.  v 
to  receive. 


I  was  to  have. 

I  should  or  ought  to  have. 

I  should  or  ought  to  have  had. 


Je  venais  d'  avoir,  etc. 


/  have  just 

had. 

Thou  hast  just 

sung. 

lie  has  just 

danced. 

We  have  just 

finished. 

You  have  just 

rendered. 

They  have  just 

received. 

I  had  just  had,  etc. 

XLVII.      QUARANTE-SEPTIEME  LEgON, 

These  last  tenses  may  be  expressed  by  faire  preceded  by  ne  and  followed 
by  the  conjunctive  que,  with  an  infinitive  preceded  bycfe  (ne  faire  quede). 
e.  g.  II  ne  fait  que  d'arriver.  He  has  but  just  arrived.  Je  ne  fais  que  dc. 
sortir.  I  have  but  just  gone  out. 

N.  B.  The  particle  de  is  here  indispensable,  because,  without  it  the  ex- 
pression would  have  quite  another  sense,  and  would  denote  a  continuation 
or  a  frequent  repetition  of  the  aoCon.  Ex. :  Vous  nefaites  que  sortir.  You 
do  nothing  but  go  out.  Elle  ne  fait  que  jotter.  She  does  nothing  but  play. 


II. 


ELISION. 

The  vowels  a,  e,  i,  when  final,  are  sometimes  elided  before  a  word 
beginning  with  a  vowel  or  h  mute ;  thus :  Vdme,  rhomme,  s'il,  in< 
stead  of  la  ame,  le  homme,  si  il. 

ELISION  OF  a.    A  is  elided  only  in  the  word  la.   Ex. :  Tamitie. 

ELISION  OF  e.  E  is  elided  in  the  nine  monosyllables  je,  me,  te, 
le,  de,  ne,  ce,  se  and  que.  Ex.:  faime;  c'est  rhomme  qu'il  rfestime 
pas. 

EXCEPTIONS.  —  1.  The  vowels  of  the  pronouns  fa,  la,je,  and  ceare  never 
elided  when  they  come  after  the  verb.  Ex. :  Ai-je  un  livre ;  est-ce  die.  The 
e  in  y^and  ce^is  not  pronounced,  however,  though  the  e  and  a  of  le  and  la 
are  in  voyez-la  aujourd'hui,  voyez-le  aujourd'hui. 

2.  Before  oui  and  onze  no  elision  takes  place :  je  crois  que  oui;  le  onze. 

The  E  is  elided  in  lorsque,  when;  puisque,  since;  quoique, 
though,  only  before  il,  elle,  on  and  un.  Ex.:  lorsqu'il,  puisqrfon, 
etc.  In  quelque  the  e  is  elided  only  before  un,  une,  and  autre.  Ex. : 
quelqu'un ;  quelqu* autre.  In  entre  m^presque,  e  is  elided  only  when 
they  form  part  of  a  compound  word.  Ex.:  entr'acte,  presqu'ile. 

ELISION  or  i.  I  is  elided  only  in  the  conjunction  s£  before  il 
*nd  ils.  Ex.:  s'il,  s'ils. 


206  I.      PHEMIEKE   LEgON. 

I.     PREMIERE    LE90N. 


ON  THE  GENDER  OF   SUBSTANTIVES. 

I.   RULES   ON  THE   GENDER  OF   SIMPLE  NOUNS. 
$1.  MASCULINE  BY  TIIEIH  SIGNIFICATION  ARE  : 

1.  The  names  of  all  masculine  beings,  as :  Henri,  Henry ;  Tern- 
pcreur,  th£  emperor ;    le  maitre,   the  master ;    le  Frangais,  the 
Frenchman;  le  taureau,  the  bull,  etc. 

2.  The  names  of  metals,  trees,  shrubs,  seasons,  months,  and  days, 
as:  le  fer,  iron;  le  dune,  the  oak;  le  printemps,  spring;  le  joli 
Mai,  (the)  fine  May ;  (le)  Inndi,  Monday,  etc. 

3.  All  words  that  arc  made  substantive  by  prefixing  the  article, 
as:  le  vert,  the  green  (color);  le  lien,  the  good;    le  boire  et  le 
mmiger,  drinking  and  eating;  le  oui  et  le  non,  the  yes  and  no. 

4.  Nouns  expressing  professions,  titles,  or  qualities  which  belong 
generally  to  men  :  philosophe,  orateur,  etc. 

5.  The  names  generally  used  in  natural  history  to  designate  the 
different  species  of  animals :  un  quadmpede,  un  mam:nifere,  un 
herbivore,  etc. 

0.  The  names  employed  in  Chemistry  to  designate  simple  bodies 
and  most  of  their  compounds  :  I'or,  le  cuivre,  I'hydroyene,  Voxy- 
gene. 

7.   The  names  of  the  decimal  nomenclature  :  le  metre,  le  francy 
le  centime,  etc. 

$2.  MASCULINE  BY  TERMINATION: 

1.  Nouns  ending  in  a  consonant  (except  those  in  aison,  ion,  and 
eur). 

2.  Nouns  ending  in  any  vowel  except  e  rnute  and  e  preceded  by 
t  or  ti.    ' 

3.  Nouns  ending  in  e  mute  preceded  by  o,  g,  I  (not  double),  m, 


ON  THE  GENDER  OP  SUBSTANTIVES.        207 

^ 

r  (except  rr  not  preceded  by  u),  s,  t  (not  double),  or  u  (except 
those  in  ique) . 

To  any  rules  for  terminations,  there  will  be  found  many  exceptions. 
These  rules  are  general.  Most  of  the  exceptions  in  common  lue,  the  pu- 
pil will  learn  as  they  occur  in  this  grammar. 

$3.  FEMININE  BY  SIGNIFICATION: 

1.  All  names  of  female  persons  and  animals,  as  :  Marie,  Mary ; 
la  reine,  the  queen ;  la  Jille,  the  girl ;  la  jument,  the  marc,  etc. 

2.  The  names  of  fruits,  flowers,  and  herbs,  as  :    la  poire,  tho 
pear ;  la  pomme,  the  apple ;  la  rose,  the  rose ;  l]herbc>  the  grass. 

Except:  Le  marron,  the  chestnut;  le  citron,  the  lemon;  le  raisin, the 
grape ;  un  abricot,  an  apricot ;  un  ceillet,  a  pink ;  le  Us,  the  lily,  and  a  few 
more,  on  account  of  their  masculine  termination. 

3.  The  names  of  countries,  places,  and  rivers  ending  in  e  mute, 
as :  la  France,  la  Prusse,  V  ancienne  Rome,  la  Loire,  la  Seine, 
etc. 

Except :  Le  Hanovre,  le  Mexique,  le  Danube,  le  Rhone. 

• 

$  4.    FEMININE  BY  TERMINATION: 

1.  Nouns  ending  with  e  mute,  not  included  in  the  masculine  ter- 
minations, as  :  la  vie,  life ;  Vcpec,  the  sword. 

2.  .^hoso-  ending  in  aison,  ion,  and  eur,  as :    la  maison,  the 
house  ;  la  religion,  la  grandeur. 

3.  Those  ending  in  6  preceded  by  t  or  ti,  as  :  la  beaute,  beauty. 

4.  These  five  words  ending  in  i  are  feminine  :  la  foi,  fuith ;  la 
loi,  law ;  la  fourmi,  the  ant ;  la  merci,-  mercy ;  Vapres-midi. 

5.  Most  nouns  ending  in  oire  (not  oir)  are  feminine,  as  :    la 
gloire,  glory ;  Vhistoire,  history ;  la  victoire,  victory  ;  la  machoire, 
the  jaw. 

6.  Gens.     This  word  presents  an  anomaly  in  gender.      It  is 
masculine,  but  when  an  adjective  precedes  it,  that  adjective  takes 
the  feminine  form,  if  its  termination  is  not  e  mute.     If  a  definitive, 
as  tout  or  certain,  precedes  this  adjective,  the  definitive  also  takes 


208  I.      PREMIERE 

the  feminine  form.  In  all  other  cases,  gens  takes  a  masculine 
adjective,  as:  Toutcs  les  vieittes  gens  sont  soup$onneux,  all  old 
people  are  suspicious.  But,  Tons  les  jeuncs  gens. 

II.   GENDER  OF   COMPOUND   SUBSTANTIVES. 

This  depends  upon  the  manner  of  their  composition. 

1.  "When  the  first  component  is  a  noun,  it  determines  the  gender 
of  the  whole,  as :  Le  chou-fleur,  the  cauliflower ;  un  arc-en-ciel,  a 
rainbow ;  la  fete  Dieu. 

2.  When  they  consist  of  a  preposition  or  an  adjective  and  a  noun, 
the  gender  of  the  noun  remains  for  the  whole,  as :  Le  contre-coup, 
the  counter-buff;  Vavant-bras,  m.  the  fore-arm. 

3.  Those  nouns  compounded  with  a  verb  and  noun  are  always  of 
the  masculine  gender,  as :  Le  porte-manleau,  the  portmanteau :  h 
tire-bouchon,  the  corkscrew ;  le  portefeuitte,  the  portfolio  (though 
feuille  is  feminine). 

THEME  1. 

Indicate  the  gender  of  the  following  nouns,  by  placing  an  article, 
either  the  definite  or  the  indefinite,  before  them : 

The  horse,  —  cheval.  The  pear, — poire.  The  metal, — metal. 
A  whiter, — hirer.  Italy,  —  Italic.  The  cherry,  —  cerise.  The 
cherry-tree,  —  cerisier.  The  house,  —  maison.  The  vapor,  — 
vapeur.  The  walnut,  —  noix.  A  leaf,  — feuille.  The  truth,  — 
verite.  The  van-guard,  —  avant-garde.  The  cart,  —  charette. 
The  work,  —  travail.  The  shell,  —  coquille.  The  hat,  —  cha- 
peau.  The  shoe, — soulier.  The  honey,  —  mid.  The  carpenter, 
—  charpentier.  The  nurse,  —  nourrice.  The  sun,  —  soleil.  The 
earth,  —  terre.  A  year,  —  annee.  The  life,  —  vie.  The  feast, — 
fete.  The  beauty,  —  bcaute.  The  master-key, — passe-partout. 
The  spit,  —  tourne-broclie.  Christianity,  —  cJiristianisme. 

III.  DOUBLE  GENDER  OF  SOME  NOUNS. 

1.   The  following  nouns  have  a  double  gender  : 
L'aide,  m.  the  assistant.  L'aide,  f.  the  help,  support. 

Taigk,  m.  the  eagle.  I'aiglc,  f.  the  standard. 


ON  THE  GENDER  OF  SUBSTANTIVES.       209 

lyaune,  m.  the  aider-tree.  I'aune,  f.  the  ell,  yard. 

un  couple,  a  couple,  husband  and  wife,     une  couple,  a  brace,  two  of  a  sort. 

un  cnscigne,  an  ensign.  une  enscigne,  a  sign. 

le  garde,  the  keeper.  la  garde,  the  guard,  watch. 

le  guide,  the  guide.  la  guide,  the  rein  in  driving. 

le  livre,  the  book.  la  litre,  the  pound. 

le  manche,  the  handle.  la  manclie,  the  sleeve. 

le  m&noire,  the  memorandum.  la  m€moire,  the  memory. 

le  mousse,  the  cabin-boy.  la  mousse,  the  moss. 

V  argue,  m.  sing,  the  organ.  les  orgues,  pi.  organ,  or  organs. 

le  page,  the  page  (of  a  prince).  la  page,  the  page  (of  a  book). 

un  paillasse,  a  merry  andrew.  une  paillasse,  a  straw-bed. 

Pdques,  pi.  m.  Easter.  la  pcique,  the  Passover. 

le  poelc,  the  stove.      ->  la  poelc,  the  frying-pan. 

le  poste,  the  post,  military  post.  la  poste,  the  post-offce. 

un  somme,  a  nap,  slumber.  la  somme,  the  sum. 

le  tour,  the  trick,  turn.  la  tour,  the  tower. 

le  trompette,  the  trumpeter.  la  trompette,  the  trumpet. 

un  voile,  a  veil.  une  voile,  a  sail. 

2.  There  are  in  French  some  nouns  which  have  no  particular 
form  for  the  feminine,  and  remain  always  masculine,  even  when 
applied  to  a  woman.     Such  are  : 

Un  auteur,     ") 

-TT    *    •     •      r  ni.  and  t.  an  author,  a  writer. 

Un  ecnvam,  ) 

Un  orateur,  m.  and  f.  an  orator. 
Un  peintre,  m.  and  f.  a  painter. 
Un  sculptcuv,  m.  and  f.  a  sculptor. 
:    Un  ttmoin,  m.  and  f.  a  witness. 

NOTE.  Sometimes  the  word  fcmme  may  precede,  as:  Une  femme  auteur, 
les  femmcs  poctes. 

3.  On  the  contrary,  there  arc  a  few  feminine  nouns  which  apply 
also  to  male  individuals  : 

La  caution,  the  bail.  la  basse,  the  base. 

la  pratique,  the  customer.  la  sentinelle,  the  sentry. 

IV.  FORMATION  OF  FEMININE  APPELLATIONS. 

1.  Male  appellations  which  are  originally  adjectives,  form  their 
feminine  according  to  the  rules  on  the  adjectives  (see  Part  L,  L. 
XVIL),  as : 

14 


210                                   I.  PREMIERE   LEgON. 

MASCULINE.  FEMININE. 

Le  Frangais,  the  Frenchman.  La  Fran$aise,  the  Frenchwoman, 

un  Russe,  a  Russian.  line  Russe,  a  Russian  lady. 

?<?i  Jtiif,  a  Jew.  uneJuiue,  a  Jewess. 

I'epoux,  the  husband.  Vepouse,  the  wife. 

le  veufj  the  widower.  la  veuve,  the  widow. 

2.  Those  ending  in  one  of  the  nasal  sounds  an,  on,  ien  (not  in), 
and  those  in  t  double  their  n  or  t  before  the  feminine  e,  as : 

Le  paysan,  the  peasant.  La  paysanne,  a  peasant  woman. 

le  lion,  the  lion.  la  lionne,  the  lioness. 

le  chretien,  the  Christian.  /a  chretienne,  the  Christian  woman, 

/e  baron,  the  baron.  /a  baronne,  the  baroness. 

3.  Many  nouns  ending  in  c  mute  form  their  feminine  in  esse,  as : 

Le  comte,  the  count.  La  comtesse,  the  countess. 

/e  negre,  the  negro.  /a  nfyresse,  the  ncgress. 

/e  maitre,  the  master.  /a  ma#resse,thQ  mistress, 

/e  prince,  the  prince.  Za  princessc,  the  princess. 

4.  Those  in  -eur  change  this  termination  into  -euse: 

Le  danseur,  the  dancer.  La  dcinseitse,  the  dancer,  f. 

le  chasseur,  the  hunter.  la  chasseuse*  the  huntress. 

5.  Many  in  -teur  change  it  into  -trice,  as  : 
L'acteur,  the  actor.  L'actrice,  the  actress. 

le  bienfaiteur,  the  benefactor.  la  bienfaitrice,  the  benefactress. 

le  tuteur,  the  guardian.  la  tutrice,  the  guardian,  f, 

G.    The  following  nouns  form  their  feminine  in  an  irregular  way : 

Le  (lieu,  the  god.  La  de'esse,  the  goddess. 

le  due,  the  duke.  la  duchcsse,  the  duchess. 

Vempereur,  the  emperor.  Vimptratrice,  the  empress. 

le  roi,  the  king.  7a  reine,  the  queen, 

/e  7^/Y>s,  the  hero.  rhe'roine,  the  heroine. 

le  gouverneur,  the  tutor.  la  gouvernante,  the  governess, 

/e  serviteur,  the  man-servant.  /a  scrvante,  the  maid-servant. 

7e  pdcheur,  the  sinner.  Zcz  pe'cheressc,  the  sinner  /*. 

Ze  compagnon,  the  companion,  /a  compagne,  the  companion  ^/l 

/e  /owp,  the  he-wolf.  /a  /cwre,  the  she-wolf. 

le  mulet,  the  mule.  la  mule,  the  mule  /. 

le  dindon,  the  turkey-cock.  /a  dinde,  the  turkey -hen. 
*  Ckasseresse  is  a  poetical  form. 


ON   THE   GENDER   OF   SUBSTANTIVES.  211 

THEME   2. 

Form  and  write  tlio  feminine  of  tlio  following  masculine  nouns, 
according  to  the  above  rules  : 

The  neighbor,  le  voisin ;  f.  — .  The  hunter,  le  chasseur ;  f. 
— .  The  dwaif,  le  nain ;  f. — .  The  talker,  le  lavard ;  f  — . 
Tho  prisoner,  le  prisonnicr .;  f.  — .  The  dumb  man,  le  miict ;  f. 
— .  The  teacher,  linstituteur  •  f.  — .  The  patient,  le  malade ; 
f.  — .  The  husband,  Yepoux;  f.  — .  The  master,  le  rnaltre ;  f. 
— .  A  musician,  un  music i en ;  f.  — .  The  founder,  le  fonda- 
teur ;  f.  — .  The  Englishman,  V Anglais  ;  f.  — .  The  German. 
V Allemand ;  f.  — .  The  actor,  Tacteur;  f.  — .  The  inventor, 
rinventeur ;  f.  — .  The  liar,  le  mentcur  (root  ment-,  termination 
-eur)  ;  f.  — .  The  traitor,  le  traltre  ;  f.  — .  The  singer,  le  clian- 
teur ;  f.  — .  The  idler,  le  paresscux  ;  f.  — .  The  lion,  le  lion  ; 
f.  — .  The  tiger,  le  tigre  •  f.  — . 

READING  LESSON. 

Un  honnete  pere  do  famille,  charge1  do  biens  et  d'annees,  vculut 
regler  d'avance2  sa  succession  entre  scs  trois  fils,  ct  Icur  partager 
ses  biens,  le  fruit  de  ses  travaux  et  do  son  Industrie.  II  en  fit  trois 
portions  egales,  et  assigna  a  chacun  son  lot.  —  Puis  il  lour  dit :  "  II 
me  rcste  encore  un  diamant  de  grand  prix ;  je  le  destine  a  celui  de 
vous  qui  saura  le  mieuxje  meritcr  par  quelque  action  noble  ct  ge- 
nereuse,  %-- je~~  vous  donne  trois  ninis  pour  vous  mcttro  en  ctat  de 
1'obtenir." 

Aussitot  les  trois  fils  se  disperscnt,  mala  ils  sc  rasscmblcnt  an 
temps  present.3  Ils  se  presentent  devant  leur  juge^  et  voici  ce  quo 
raconte  1'aine4 :  **  Mon  pere,  un  etranger  s'cst  trouve  dans  dcs  cir- 
constances  qui  Tont  oblige  de  me  confier5  toute  sa  fortune  :  il  n'avait 
de  moi  aucune  surete,  par  ecrit,6  ct  n'aurait  pu  produire  coritre  moi 
aucune  preuve  clu  depot  ;  mais  je  lui  ai  tout  rein  is  fideleraent. 
Cette  fidelite  n'cst-elle  pas  quelque  chose  de  louable7?  "  "  Tu  as 
fait,  mon  fils,"  lui  repondit  le  vieillard,"  ce  quo  tu  devais  faire.  II 
serait  honteux  d'en  agir  autrement,  car  la  probitu  cst  un  devoir." 

1.  Laden.     2.  Beforehand.     3.  Prescribed,  appointed.     4.  The  eldest.     5.  To 
trust.    C.  In  writing,    7.  Laudable. 


212 


I.  PREMIERE  LEgON. 


CONVERSATION. 


Qui  voulut  reglcr  sa  succession  ? 
Que  fit-il  a  cct  effet  (for  this  pur- 
pose') ? 

Que  lui  restait-il? 
A  qui  le  dcstina-t-il  ? 


Combien  de  temps  leur  donna-t-il 

pour  cela  ? 
Que  firent  ensuite  les  fils  ? 


Quelle  avait  e'te  Faction  de  Taine  ? 


Que  lui  dit  le  vieillard  ? 


Un  honnete  pere  de  famille. 
II  partagea  ses  biens  entre  ses 

trois  fils. 

Un  diamaut  de  gi'and  prix. 
A  celui  d'cntre  eux  qui  ferait 

une  action  noble    et    gene*- 

reuse. 
H  leur  donna  trois  mois    pour 

obteuir  ce  prix. 
Us  se  disperserent,  mais  au  bout 

du  temps  present,  ils  rovin- 

rent  a  la  maison. 
II  avait  remis  fidelement  a  un 

etranger  la  fortune  que   ce- 

lui-ci  lui  avait  confiee  sans 

re$u  (receipt). 
Tu  n'as  fait,  mon  fils,  que  ce 

que  tu  devais  faire. 


FIN. 

Le  second  fils  plaida1  sa  cause  a  son  tour,  h  peu  pres  en  ces 
tonnes :  "  Je  me  suis  trouve,  pendant  rnon  voyage,  sur  le  bord  d'un 
lac ;  un  enfant  venait2  imprudemment  de  s'y  laisscr2  tomber ;  il  al- 
lait  se  noyer  ;3  je  Ten  ai  tire,  et  je  lui  ai  sauve  la  vie,  aux  yeux  dcs 
habitants  d'un  village  situd  au  bord  de  ce  lac ;  ils  pourront  attester 
la  verite  du  fait."4 — "A  la  bonne  heure,"  interrompit5  le  pere. 
" mais  il  n'y  a  point  encore  de  noblesse  dans  cetto  action;  il  n'y  a 
que  de  Plramanitd." 

Enfin,  le  dernier  des  trois  freres  prit  la  pai'ole.  "  Mon  pere," 
dit-il,  "  j'ai  trouve  mon  ennemi  mortel,  qui,  s'etant  egare.  la  nuit, 
s'etait  endormi,  sans  le  savoir,  sur  le  penchant6  d'un  abime  /  le 
moindre  mouvement  qu'il  eut  fait,  au  moment  de  son  reveil,8  no 


ON   THE   GENDER   OF   SUBSTANTIVES. 


213 


pouvait  manquer9  de  le  precipiter ;  sa  vie  etait  entre  mes  mains ; 
j'ai  pris  soin  de  1'eveiller10  avec  Ics  precautions  eonvcnables,  et  1'ai 
tire  de  cet  endroit11  fatal." 

"  Ah  !  mon  fils,"  s'ecria  le  bon  pere  avec  transport,  et  en  1'em- 
brassant  tendrement,  "c'est  a  toi,  sans  contredit,12  que  la  bague13 
est  due." 

1.  To  plead.  2.  Had  just  fallen.  3.  To  be  drowned.  4.  The  fact.  5.  To  inter- 
rupt. 6.  The  slope.  7.  Abyss.  8.  Of  his  awakening.  9.  Fail.  10.  To  wake. 
11.  Place,  spot.  12.  "Without  doubt.  13.  The  ring. 


CONVERSATION. 


Qu'avait  fait  le  second  fils  ? 
Qui  avait  vu  ccla  ? 

Enfin,  quelle  avait  dte  Faction 
du  dernier  des  trois  freres  ? 


Laquelle  de  ccs  trois  actions 

dtait  la  plus  noble  ? 
Les    actions  des    deux  autres 

n'etaient-clles  pas  nobles  et 


Et  qu'est-ce  que  lui  dit  le  pere  ? 


II  avait  sauve  un  enfant  qui  allait 

se  noyer. 
Les  habitants  d'un  village  situe  au 

bord  du  lac. 
II  avait  retire'  son  ennemi  endormi 

au    bord    d'un    abime,  ou  le 

moindre  mouvement  Teut  pre- 

cipite. 
Cello  du  plus  jeune  fils. 

Non,  la  premiere  etait  une  action 

de  justice,  la  secondo  une  action 

d'humanite. 
II  s'ecria  avec  transport :  "  Mon 

fils,  c'est  h  toi,  sans  contredit, 

que  la  bague  est  due." 


214  II.      DEUXIEME 


II.    DEUXIEME    LEgON. 


PLURAL    OF    NOUNS. 

(Sec  Part  I.  Lesson  2,  p.  SO.) 

The  general  rules  on  tins  subject  have  already  been  given  in  the  second 
lesson  of  Part  I.  We  have  to  add  here  the  following  particulars. 

1.  Nouns  of  two  and  more  syllables,  ending 'in  -ant  and  -ent,  arc 
spelled  by  some  French  writers  in  the  plural  -ens  and  -am,  instead 
of  -ents  and  -ants,  as  :  momens  for  moments,  enfans  for  enfants. 
This  orthography,  however,  is  not  to  be  recommended. 

2.  The  following  nouns  in  al  and  ail  do  not  form  their  plural  in 
aicx,  but  take  an  s. 

Le  bal,  the  ball.  Vevenlail,  m.  the  fan. 

le  col,  callus.  Vtpouvantail,  m.  the  scarecrow. 

le  narval,  the  narwhal.  un  portail,  a  portal,  front  gate. 

le  carnaval,  the  carnival.  le  poitrail,  the  poitrcl. 

le  r€gal,  the  regale,  treat.  le  serail,  the  seraglio. 

le  detail,  the  particulars.  Vail,  garlic  (has  in  Plur.  both  les 

le  gouvernail,  the  helm,  rudder.  ails  and  les  aulx). 

Plural :  Les  bah,  les  cah,  les  details,  les  eveiitaih,  etc. 
NOTE.   Le  be'tail,  cattle,  makes  in  the  plural  les  lestiaux. 

8.  The  usual  plural  of  del  is  deux,  the  heavens ;  there  is,  how- 
ever, a  regular  plural,  les  dels,  meaning:  1,  the  testers;  2,  the  cli- 
mats;  3,  the  skies  of  pictures. 

4.  L'ceil,  the  eye,  has  in  the  plural  les  yeux.   Des  ceils  de  Iceuf 
arc  oval  or  round*yindows.    Aieul,  has  a'ieuls  wlien  it  means  grand- 
fathers,-  and  a'ieux  in  the  sense  of  ancestors. 

5.  How  compound  words  form  their  plural :  — 

1 .  When  a  word  is  composed  of  a  substantive  and  an  adjective,  or  of  two 
substantives,  both  take  the  mark  of  the  plural  Ex.:  — 


PLUR.AL   OF  NOUNS.  215 

Les  bcauiL-freres,  the  brothers-in-law. 

Les  belles-sceurs,  the  sisters-in-law. 
Les  choun-fleurs,  the  cauliflowers. 
Les  chefs-lieux,  the  chief- towns  (of  counties). 

2.  But  when  a  word  is  composed  of  two  substantives  separated  by  a  pre- 
position, the  first  alone  takes  the  plural  termination.    Ex.:  — 

Les  chefs-d'oeuvre,  the  masterpieces. 
Les  arcs-en-ciel,  the  rainbows. 

3.  When  a  word  consists  of  a  substantive  and  a  verb  or  preposition,  the 
substantive  alone  can  take  the  sign  of  the  plural,  if  required  by  the  sense. 
Ex.:  — 

Les  tire-bottes,  the  boot-jacks. 
Les  essuie-mains,  the  towels. 
Les  garde-fous,  the  balusters. 

4.  When  there  is  no  substantive  in  the  compound  word,  none  of  the 
components  can  take  the  mark  of  the  plural.    Ex.:  — 

Les  passe-partout  (not  passe-partouts) ,  the  master-keys. 
Les  forte-piano,  the  pianos. 

5.  The  words:  la  grand'mere,  the  grandmother;  la  grand'tante,  grand- 
aunt;  la  grand' rue,  the  main  street;  la  grand' route,  the  highway, — have,  in 
the  plural,  les  grand' meres,  les  grand'tantes,  etc. 

6.  The  following  nouns  take  in  the  plural  another  meaning  than 
in  the  singular : — 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

Le  clseau,  the  chisel.    n  les  ciseaux,  the  scissors. 

la  lunette,  the  telescope*.  les  lunettes,  the  spectacles. 

le  fer,  iron.  les  fers,  the  fetters,  chains. 

la  grace,  grace,  pardon.  les  graces,  grace,  charms. 

le  gage,  the  pawn,  pledge.  les  gages,  the  wages. 

la  mesure,  the  measure.  les  mesures,  the  measures. 

la  viande,  meat.  les  viandes,  food. 

la  troupe,  the  troop.  les  troupes,  the  troops. 

la  lumiere,  the  light.  les  lumieres,  knowledge. 

I'aboi,  the  barking.  les  abois,  agony. 

la  defense,  the  defence.  les  defenses,  the  tusks,  fangs. 

7.  Substantives  which  have  no  singular  in  French:  — 
Les  annales,  f.  annals.  les  gens,  m.  people* 

les  ancetres,  m.  ancestors.  les  hardes,  f.  clothes. 


216  II.      DEUXIEME 

les  alentours,  m.  )  m  les  legumes,  m.  vegetables. 

les  environs,  m.  }  tllc  cnvirons-  les  mathematiques,  f.  mathematics. 

les  broussaillcs,  f.  brushwood.  les  mate'riaux,  materials. 

les  decombres,  m.  rabbish.  les  mccurs,  f.  the  manners. 

les  debris,  m.  the  remains.  les  mouchcttes,  f.  the  snuffers. 

les  dcpens,  m.  cost.  des  mouchettes,  a  pair  of  snuffers. 

les  entrailles,  f.  the  entrails.  les  pleurs,  f.  the  tears. 

les  Jrais,  in.  expenses.  les  tenebres,  f.  darkness. 

les  fungrailles,  f.  funeral  rites.  les  vivres,  m.  victuals. 

THEME  3. 

1.  We  bad  many  balls  last  winter.1  2.  Are  these  fans  dear? 
3.  No,  tbey  are  not  dear.  4.  The  beavens  declare2  tbe  glory  of 
God.  5.  Tbe  great  portals  of  those  churches  are  beautiful.  6.  We 
honor3  the  virtues  of  our  ancestors.  7.  The  eyes  of  (de  Z')  man 
are  the  mirror4  of  his  soul.  8.  The  eyes  of  a  mother  watch5  over 
ber  child's  life.  9.  I  have  two  brothers-in-law  and  three  sisters-in- 
law.  10.  Those  pictures  are  masterpieces.  11.  I  want8  two  or 
three  towels.  12.  These  master-keys  must  be  very  old.  13.  Both 
my  (?nes  deux)  grandaunts  are  dead ;  but  my  grandmothers  are 
still  ab've  (en  vie).  14.  Lend  me  your  scissors,  if  you  please. 
15.  The  fetters  are  made  of  iron.  16.  Do  you  know  the  environs* 
of  London?  17.  Yes,  I  know  them.  18.  Bring  me  a  pair  of 
snuffers.  19.  Do  you  like  vegetables  ?  20.  I  like  them,  when  they 
ate  dry.  21.  I  found  this  ring7  under  the  rubbish  in  my  garden. 
22.  The  little  humming-birds  (oiseaux-mouches)  are  the  jewels8  of 
nature*  (Dtf.  art.).  23.  I  study9  mathematics. 

1.  Use  tbe  article,  see  Lesson  3.  2.  To  declare  —  Annonccr.  3.  IToncror.  4.  Mi~ 
roir.m.  5.  Veiller.  6.  II  me  faut  (see  Part  I.  p.  148,  3).  7.  Bqgue^  f.  8.  Bjjou,m. 
9.  Etudlcr. 


HEADING  LESSON. 
LE  CASTOR.      The  Beaver. 

Dans  le  nord  de  1'Amerique,  sur  les  bords  dcs  ileuves  et  des 
grands  lacs  du  Canada,  loin  des  grand'routes,  habitc  le  castor.     La 

*In  these  Themes,  words,  the  last  letter  of  which  is  printed  in  italics,  are  tho 
same  in  French  and  English. 


PLURAL   OF  NOUNS.  217 

partic  la  plus  singuliere  de  son  corps  est  sa  queue.1  Ses  pattes  do 
devant  (fore-feet)  sont  des  especes  de  mains,  dont  il  se  sert  fort 
adroiternent2.  Les  castors  entreprennent  des  travaux  tres-conside- 
rables  pour  se  construire  des  habitations  solides  et  commodes.  ,  Ce 
sont  des  cabanes  (huts)  ou  plutot  des  especes  de  maisonnettes  bfi- 
ties  dans  1'eau,  avec  deux  issues,  1'une  pour  aller  a  terre,  1'autre 
pcur  se  jcter  a  1'eau.  La  forme  de  cet  edifice3  est  presque  toujours 
ovale  ou  ronde ;  il  y  en  a  depuis  quatre  ou  cinq  pieds  jusqu'a  huit 
ou  dix  de  diametre  et  de  deux  ou  trois  Stages.4  Les  murailles5  ont 
jusqu'a  deux  pieds  d'epaisseur;6  elles  sont  eleve'es  a  plomb7  sur  un 
pilotis,8  qui  sert  en  meme  temps  de  fondement  et  de  planchcr  a  la 
maison. 

Les  castors  ahnent  h  ronger9  continuellement  de  1'ecorce  (Jbarlc), 
et  ils  en  font  ample  provision  pour  se  nourrir  pendant  1'hiver. 
Chaque  cabane  a  sonjnagasin,  et  ils  no  vont  jamais  piller10  leurs 
voisins.  Ces  cabanes  contiennent  quelquefois  jusqu'a  trente  castors, 
qui  vivent  toujours  en  paix  ensemble.  Si  quelque  castor  aperQoit 
un  ennemi,  il  donne  un  grand  coup,  de  sa  queue,  sur  Feau.  A  ce 
signal,  tous  les  autres  plongent  dans  1'eau,  ou  se  refugient  dans  les 
cabanes. 

1.  Tail.     2.  Skilfully.    3.  Building.     4.  Floor,   story.    5.  Tlie  walls.    6.  Thick- 
ness.   7.  Perpendicularly.    8.  Pale,  post.    9.  To  gnaw.    10.  To  plunder. 


CONVERSATION. 

Ou  liabite  le  castor.  II  liabite  dans  le  nord  de  1'Ame- 

rique,  sur  les  bords  des  fleuves 
et  des  lacs. 
Quelle  est  la  partie  la  plus  re-     C'est  sa  queue. 

marquable  de  son  corps  ? 
Comment  sont  ses  pattes  de  de-     Ce  sont  des  especes  de  mains  dont 

vant  ?  il  se  sert  fort  adroitemcnt. 

Les  castors  quo   font-ils  de  cu-    Ils  batissent    des   cabanes   dans 
rieux  ?  1'eau. 


218 


III.      TROISIEME  LEgON. 


De  quelle  nianiere  Ics  batissent- 
ils? 

Quelle  est  la  forme  de  ces  mai- 
sonnettes ? 
Y  a-j>il  plusieurs  etages  ? 

Les  murailles  sont-elles  solidcs  ? 

Y   a-t-il  plusieurs  castors  dans 
un  tel  edifice  ? 

Que  font-ils  quand  un  enncmi 
approche  ? 


Us  font  deux  issues,  Tune  pour 

aller  a  terre,  1'autre  pour  se  je- 

ter  a  1'cau. 
La    forme  en   est   ordinairement 

rondo  ou  ovale. 
Oui,  les  cabanes  sont  do  deux  ou 

trois  etages. 
Tres-solides ;    elles    ont    jusqu'k 

deux  pieds  d'epaisseur. 
Ces  cabanes  conticnnent  quelque- 

fois  jusqu'a  trcnte  castors  qui 

vivent  ensemble  en  paix. 
Us  se  jettent  tous  dans  Feau,  ou 

se  refmnent  dans  les  cabanes. 


III.    TROISIEME    LEgON. 


USE  OF   THE  ARTICLE. 

I.    THE   DEFINITE   ARTICLE   IS   USED   IX   FRENCH   AND   NOT   IN 
ENGLISH  : 


L'amitif,  f.  friendship. 
la  paresse,  idleness. 
I'amour,  in.  love, 
/a  vieillesse,  old  age. 


1 .    Before  abstract  nouns,  when  taken  in  their  whole  extent,  as  : 

la  bont£,  goodness. 

V occupation f  f.  employment. 

la  patience,  patience. 

la  jeunesse,  youth. 
Examples :  — 

Le  temps  est  pr&ieux,  time  is  precious. 
Le  vice  est  odicux,  vice  is  odious. 
La  modestie  est  une  belle  vertu,  modesty  is  a  fine  virtue. 
Inoccupation  est  le  meillcur  remede  contre  V ennui. 
Occupation  is  the  best  remedy  against  wcarisomeness. 


USB   OF  THE   ARTICLE.  219 

2.  Before  collective  names  of  corporations,  bodies,  governments, 
sciences,  religious  creeds,  seasons,  metals,  etc.,  as: 

La  noblesse,  nobility.  le  christianisme,  Christianity. 

le  gouvernement,  government.  le  judalsme,  Judaism. 

la  monarchic,  monarchy.  I'hiver,  m.  winter. 

riiistoire,  f.  history.  l'or,  m.  gold. 

la  geographic,  geography.  le  fer,  iron. 

3.  -Before  words  which  represent  a  whole  genus  or  species,  as  : 

L'homme  est  mortel,  man  is  mortal. 

Les  voix  des  animaux  sont  tres-differentes. 

The  voices  of  animals  are  very  different. 

4.  Before  the  following  and  other  nouns  taken  in  a  general  sense : 

L'homme,  man.  la  loi,  law. 

les  liommcs,  men.  le  sort,  fate. 

le  del,  heaven.  I' usage,  la  coutume,  custom. 

la  terre,  earth.  les  mceurs,  manners. 

la  vie,  life.  la  faim,  hunger. 

la  mort,  death.  la  soif,  thirst. 

le  temps,  time.  le  diner,  dinner. 

le  mal'ieur,  misfortune.  le  dejeuner,  breakfast. 

5.  When  particular  parts  or  qualities  of  an  organic  body  are 
mentioned,  as : 

Ce  garqon  a  la  tete  tres-jpetite. 

This-^y  has  a  very  liltle  head.  * 

Cette  femme  a  la  louche  petite  et  les  ycux  Ileus. 

This  woman  has  a  little  mouth  and  blue  eyes. 

Le  loup  a  la  tete  longue,  le  nez  effile'  et  les  oreiUes  tftroites. 

The  wolf  has  a  long  head,  a  thin  nose,  and  smallears. 

La  Jille  aux  yeux  Ueus,  the  blue-eyed  girl. 

6.  When  in  English  the  possessive  case  is  used,  as: 
My  father's  house,  la  maison  de  mon  pere. 

Tlie  king's  palace,  le  palais  du  rot. 

7.  Before  adjectives  used  substantively,  as : 
J'aime,  le  -cert,  I  am  fond  of  green. 

Les  riches  ne  donnent  pas  toujours. 
Rich  men  do  not  always  give. 


220  III.      TROISIEME 

8.  Before  proper  names  of   countries,  provinces,  rivers,  moun- 
tains, and  winds,  as : 

L'Angleterre  est  riche,  England  is  rich. 
Le  mont  Vesuve,  Mount  Vesuvius. 
La  France  est  plus  grande  que  I' Italic. 
France  is  larger  than  Italy. 

NOTE.  Further  particulars  on  proper  names  will  be  found  in  the  sixth 
lesson. 

9.  Before  nouns  of  dignity,  and  titles,  followed  by  proper  names, 
as : 

Admiral  Nelson,  I'amtral  Nelson. 
Professor  A.,  \e  professeur  A. 

10.  The  definite  article  replaces  the  English  indefinite  article, 
when  the  price  of  things  is  indicated,  as  : 

Three  francs  a  pound,  trois  francs  la  livre. 
Five  francs  a  yard,  cinq  francs  le  metre. 

11.  In  the  following  phrases  the  definite  article  is  used  : 
A  I'&ole  —  a  I'fglise,  at  or  to  school;  at  or  to  church. 

H  s'est  cusse*  la  jambe,  he  has  broken  his  leg. 

L'tytfe  a  la  main,  a  sword  in  his  hand. 

Je  vous  souJiaite  le  bon  jour,  I  wish  you  good  morning 

Je  n'ai  pas  le  temps,  I  have  not  time. 

H  n'a  jws  le  sou,  he  has  not  a  farthing. 

J'ai  mat  a  la  tete,  I  have  a  headache. 

•Pa^mal  aux  dents,  I  have  a  toothache. 

Soyez  le  bienvenu, —  la  bienvenue,  etc.,  be  welcome. 

La  semaine  pass€e  (derniere),  last  week. 

12.  After  dont  between  nouns,  as : 

Un  Jiomnie  dont  la  reputation  est  perdue,  est  malheureux. 
A  man  whose  good  reputation  is  lost  is  unhappy. 

II.      REPETITION    OF   THE   ARTICLE. 

The  article  must  be  repeated  in  French  before  every  substantive. 
Examples  : 

The  mind  and  heart,  1'espnt  ct  le  cccur. 

The  shoemaker,  hatter,  and  tailor. 

Le  bottier,  le  chapelier,  et  le  tailleur. 

I  have  bought  meat,  cheese,  and  fruits. 

cTat  achete'  de  la  viande,  da  fromage  et  des  ^fruits. 


USE   OF  THE   ARTICLE.  221 

THEME  4 

1.  Virtue  is  the  highest1  good  (lien,  m.).  2.  Men  are  mortal. 
3.  Modesty  adorns2  youth.  4.  Human  life  is  short.  5.  Man  is 
liable3  to  a  variety  of  (a  lien  des)  changes.4  6.  Gold  and  silver 
cannot  render5  man  happy.  7.  Men  of  (d'un)  real  genius6  are 
scarce.  8.  Black  and  white  are  two  opposite7  colors.  9.  Beauty 
and  wit8  are  valuable9  endowments  (avantages) ,  when  heightened 
(rekves)  by  modesty.  10.  Iron  and  steel  are  more  useful  than 
gold  and  silver.  11.  How  much  a  pound  ?  12.  The  love  of  glory 
(Dcf.  art.),  the  fear  of  shame,10  are  of  ten  the  cause  of  great  deeds.16 
13.  Summer  is  warm,  but  winter  is  cold.  14.  The  instructions  of 
adversity  are  wholesome  (salutaires) ,  though  unpleasing ; u  the  les- 
sons of  prosperity  are  pleasing,  but  often  pernicious.  15.  Geogra- 
phy is  a  very  useful  science.  16.  Painting,12  sculpture,  and  poe- 
try13 belong  to  the  imagination.  17.  Good  and  bad  seem  to  be 
blended  (meles)  together  through  all  nature.  18.  Hypocrisy  is  an 
honlage  which  vice  pays  (rend)  to  virtue.  19.  Do  you  know  Gen- 
eral Knox?  20.  Yes,  I  know  him.  21.  White  garments14  are 
the  symbol  of  innocence.  22.  The  knife  and  fork  are  broken.  23. 
Let  us  go  to  church.  24.  The  boys  were  at  school  this  morning. 
25.  Fear15  and  ignorance  arc  the  sources  of  superstition.  26.  Good 
wine  is  sold  (se  vend)  [for]  four  shillings  a  bottle. 

1.  Gi%fii(L-  -2.  Orner.  i  Sujet.  4.  Changemerit,  m.  5.  ficndre.  6.  Vrai  genie. 
7.  Oppose.  8.  Esprit.  9.  Prccieux.  10.  La  Iwnte.  11.  Desagredble.  12.  La 
pemture.  13.  La  poesie.  14.  Vetements.  15.  Peur,  f.  16.  Action,  f. 

III.       THE   DEFINITE   ARTICLE   IS    OMITTED  : 

1 ,  Before  the  cardinal  numbers  which  come  after  the  names  of 
sovereigns,  as: 

J.Ienry  the  Fourth,  Henri  quatre. 

Louis  the  Eighteenth,  Louis  XVIII  (dix-Jluit). 

George  the  Third,  George  trois. 

2.  Before  the  cardinal  numbers  used  in  quotations,  as : 
Book  the  first,  chapter  the  fifth. 

Livre  premier,  chapitre  cinq. 


222  III.      TROISIEME  LEgON. 

3.    Before  plus,  used  in  the  sense  of  the  more.     Ex.  : 
Plus  je  la  vois,  plus  je  Vaime,  the  more  I  see  her,  the  more  I  love  her. 

IV.       THE    INDEFINITE   ARTICLE   IS    OMITTED   IN   FRENCH  I 

1.  Before  national  and  professional  names,  when  the  subject  is  a 
noun  or  personal  pronoun,  as  : 

Je  suls  Anglais,  I  am  an  Englishman. 

Mon  pere  etait  mededn,  my  father  was  a  physician. 

NOTE.  But  it  is  expressed  after  c'est  and  void  or  voila,  and  also  when  the 
noun  is  qualified. 

C'cst  un  Anglais,  he  is  an  Englishman. 

Void  un  offider,  here  is  an  officer. 

M.  Dubois  €lait  un  medecin  distingue",  Mr.  Dubois  was  a  distinguished  phy- 
sician. 

2.  It  is  also  omitted  in  appositions,  that  is,  when  a  substantive 
is  used  to  qualify  another,  as : 

L'avare,  comedie  par  Moliere,  the  Miser,  a  comedy  by  Moliere. 
Auguste,  fils  de  M.  S.,  Augustus,  a  son  of  Mr.  S. 
Munich,  ville  d'Allemagne,  Munich,  a  city  of  Germany. 

3.  In  the  title  of  a  book  : 

A  French  grammar,  Grammaire  fran^aise. 
A  history  of  England,  Histoire  d' Anglcterre. 

4.  After  the  word  qnel,  used  to  express  surprise  : 
"What  a  noise  you  make  !  quel  bruit  voits  faites! 

5.  Before  the  words,  quantite,  a  quantity;  nombre,  a  number; 
force,  a  great  number,  when  they  are  used  adverbially.     Ex. : 

Je  I'ai  vu  nombre  de  fois,  I  have  seen  him  many  times. 
//  m'a  donne*  quantity  de  jolies  clioses. 
He  gave  me  a  great  many  pretty  things. 

6.  The  indefinite  article  is  left  out  in  French  and  supplied  by 
par,  before  substantives  that  denote  time,  or  in  mentioning  what  is 
paid  for  salary,  wages,  etc.  : 

Five  guineas  a  month,  dnq  guineas  par  mots. 
So  much  a  lesson,  tant  par  lecon. 

7.  Sometimes  after  jamais,  never,  as  : 
Jamais  general  ne  s'est  plus  distingue". 

Never  has  a  general  distinguished  himself  more. 


USE  OP  THE  ARTICLE.  223 

8.  In  the  following  and  other  expressions,  in  which  the  noun  and 
verb  are  inseparably  connnected  : 

Trouver  moyen,  to  find  (a)  means. 
Faire  signe,  to  make  a  sign. 
Faire  present,  to  make  a  present. 
Mettre  fin,  to  put  an  end  or  stop. 
Livrer  bataille,  to  fight  a  battle. 
Prendre  exemple,  to  take  an  example. 
Rendre  service,  to  render  a  service. 
Ne  dire  mot,  to  say  not  a  word. 

THEME    5. 

1.  Book  the  tenth,  chapter  the  third.  2.  Charles  the  Secono?s 
king  of  (d')  Spain,  son  of  Philip  the  Fourth,  left  his  kingdom  (roy- 
aume)  to  Philip  the  Fifth-.  3.  William  the  Third,  king  of  Eng- 
land, married  (epousa)  the  princess  Marj,  daughter  of  James 
(Jacques)  the  Second.  4.  Apelles  was  a  painter.1  5.  Socrates2 
was  a  philosopher,  Cicero3  an  orator  (-teur).  6.  Is  your  father  a 
physician?  7.  No,  sir;  he  is  a  lawyer  (avocat).  8.  Henry's 
uncle  is  a  skilful4 physician.  9.  Who  is  that  gentleman?5  10.  He 
is  (c'esf)  an  officer.  11.  How  much  do  you  charge  (demandez- 
vous)  for  your  lessons?  12.  I  charge  ten  francs  a  lesson.  13.  A 
German  Grammar.  14.  A  Roman  history,  from  the  foundation6  of 
Rome  Jo  (Jusqda)  »the  destruction  of  the  Roman  empire.  15. 
What  tin  unhappy  situation  !  16.  How  much  does  the  bookseller7 
pay  you  for  your  novels?8  17.  He  pays  me  five  crowns  (ecus)  a 
sheet.9  18.  We  went  to  Caera,  a  large  town  of  Normandy.10  19. 
The  Duke  of  York,  a  prince  of  the  blood  royal.  20.  I  am  read- 
ing the  "  Misanthrope,"  a  comedy  by  Moliere.  21.  I  shall  find  a 
moans  to  satisfy11  him.  22.  He  said  not  a  word.  23.  Our  neigh- 
bor made  us  a  sign  to  leave12  the  room. 

1.  Peintre,  2.  Socrate.  3.  Ciceron.  4.  Habile.  5.  Monsieur.  6.  Fondation. 
7.  &ibraire.  8.  Roman,  m.  9.  Feuille.  10.  De  Normandie.  11.  Satisfaire.  12. 
Quitter. 


224  III.      TROISIEME 


V.       THE   ARTICLE   IS    OMITTED   IN   BOTH    LANGUAGES!  - 

1.  In  many  proverbs,  as  : 

Contentement  passe  richesse,  content  surpasses  wealth. 
Pauvrete  n'est  pas  vice,  poverty  is  no  disgrace. 
Mauvaise  herbc  croit  toujours. 

2.  In  enumerating  several  substantives  in  the  partitive  sense, 
-when  summed  up  by  tons  or  rien,  as  : 

Homines,  femmes,  cnfants,  tons  voulaient  le  voir. 
Men,  women,  children,  all  wished  to  sec  him. 

3.  After  ni  —  ni,  soit  —  soit,  when  the  nouns  are  taken  in  the 
partitive  sense,  as  : 

Ni  or  ni  argent,  neither  gold  nor  silver. 
Ni  prieres,  ni  menaces  ne  pouvaient  V  engager  a,  etc. 
Neither  prayers  nor  threats  could  induce  him  to,  etc. 
Soit  crainte,  soit  ignorance,  il  ne  voulait  rien  dire. 
Be  it  fear  or  ignorance,  he  would  say  nothing. 

4.  The  partitive  article  is  further  omitted  after  prepositions  wliea 
the  noun  following  forms  with  them  an  adverbial  phrase,  as  : 

Avec  plaisir,  with  pleasure.  par  jour,  daily,  a  day. 

avec  patience,  with  patience.  par  an,  yearly,  a  year. 

avec  soin,  with  care.  par  mois,  monthly,  a  month. 

avec  elegance,  elegantly.  sur  mer,  }  . 

>•  by  water,  hy  sea. 
sans  argent,  without  money.  par  mer,  )    * 

sans  facons,  without  ceremonies.  sur  terre,  )  . 

.         .  ,  >  by  land. 

sans  peine,  without  trouble.  par  terre,  ) 

sans  peril,  without  danger.  sous  peine  de  mort,  on  pain  of  death. 

5.  No  article  is  used  before  a  substantive  which  is  repeated  with 
a  preposition,  as  : 

Promesses  sur  promesses,  promises  upon  promises. 
De  temps  en  temps,  from  time  to  time. 
De  siecle  en  siecle,  from  age  to  age. 

6.  In  the  following  expressions,  where  the  noun  forms  but  one 
idea  with  the  verb  antecedent,  as  : 

Avoir  faim,  to  be  hungry.  prendre  patience,  to  have  patience. 

avoir  soif,  to  be  thirsty.  prendre  soin,  to  take  care. 


OF   TUB   ARTICLE.  225 

avoir  sow,  to  take  care.  fa  ire  grace,  to  grant  pardon. 

avoir  peur,  to  be  afraid.  faire  attention,  to  pay  attention. 

avoir  bonne  mine,  to  look  well.  faire  grand  cas,  to  value. 

avoir  pilie,  to  have  pity.  faire  peur,  to  frighten. 

avoir  honte,  to  be  ashamed.  faire  mention,  to  mention. 

avoir  raison,  to  be  right.  faire  fortune,  to  make  one's  fortune. 

avoir  tort,  to  be  wronff.  rendre  comptf., 


r  sujet,  to  have  occasion  for.  rendre  raison,  $  °  accc 
avoir  dessein,  to  intend.  rendre  visite,  to  visit. 
avoir  envie,  to  have  a  desire,  a  mind.       porter  envie,  to  envy. 
avoir  besoin,  to  want.  courir  risque,  to  run  risk. 
avoir  coutume,  to  be  in  the  habit,  to    demander  pardon,  to  beg  one's  par- 
use,  don. 

prcndrepart,  to  join.  demander  grace,  to  beg  for  grace. 

prcndre  garde,  to  take  care.  ajouler  foi,  to  give  credit. 
prendre  conge',  to  take  leave. 

7.   Further,  after  many  verbs  which  are  followed  by  de,  a,  or  en, 
as:  — 

Combler  de  bicnfaits,  to  load  with  benefits. 

Vivre  de  pain,  to  live  upon  bread. 

Monter  a  cheval,  to  mount  (get)  on  horseback. 

Monter  en  voiture,  to  enter  a  carriage.  • 

Tomber  de  cheval,  to  fall  from  horseback. 

Descendre  de  cheval,  to  alight. 

Se  mettre  a  table,  to  go  to  dinner. 

Se  lever  de  table,  to  rise  from  dinner. 

Per^re  d&v.ue,  to  lose!  sight  of. 

Mourir  de  faim,  to  die  of  hunger. 

Mourir  de  froid,  to  die  of  cold,  to  freeze. 

Trembler  de  peur,  to  tremble  with  fear. 

Eire  malade  de  chagrin,  to  be  ill  with  grief. 


THEME  0. 

1.  Charity1  begins  at  home  (par  soi-meme).  2.  Necessity  Las 
no  law  (loi).  3.  Games,2  conversation,  theatre,  nothing  diverts 
(distrait)  him.  4.  Nobody  was  satisfied ;  father,  uncles,  aunts  and 
brothers,  all  thought  themselves  (se  crurent)  neglected.3  5.  This 
man  has  neither  vices  nor  virtues ;  neither  talents  nor  defects.4  6. 
15 


226  III.      TROISIEME 

We  expected  our  friend  from  day  to  day.  7.  It  does  not  suffice  to 
heap  (d* entasser)  facts5  upon  facts, to  load0 your  memory;  you  must 
exercise7  also  your  judgment.8  8.  I  shall  do  it  with  pleasure.  9. 
One  florin  a  day.  10.  Ten  pounds  a  year.  11.  The  poor  woman 
was  starving  with  hunger  and  (with)  cold.  12.  You  are  always 
right,;  I  have  been  wrong.  13.  Have  pity  on  (de)  my  weakness.9 
14.  The  least  noise10  frightens  me.  15.  Those  who  speak  without 
reflection,  are  exposed  to  many  (a  lien  des)  errors.  16.  I  must 
take  leave  of  you.  17.  Many  poor  people  live  on  (do)  bread  and 
potatoes  only. 

1.  Charitd.     2.  Jeu,  m.     3.  Negliges.     4.  Dcfaut.    5.  Le  fait,    6.  Charger.    7. 
Exercer,    8.  Jugement.    9.  Faiblesse.    10.  Bruit,  m. 


HEADING  LESSON. 
DEMOSTIll^NE. 

Dcmosthene,  jeune  homme  d'Athenes,  avait  grande  envie  de  de- 

venir  orateur  habile ;  mais  la  nature  semblait  lui  en  avoir  refuse  tous 

»  ' 

les  moyens. 

D'abord  il  begayait1  a  1'exces ;  puis  il  no  pouvait  prononcer  la 
lettre  R  ;  ensuite  il  avait  une  voix  desagreable  ct  glapissante,2  et  do 
faibles  poumons.3  D'autres  ajoutent  qu'il  avait  encore  la  mauvaise 
habitude  de  lever  Fepaule4,  quand  il  avait  prononce  trois  ou  quatre 
mots.  Aussi,  la  premiero  fois  qu'il  harangua  le  peuple,  il  s'en  tira 
si  mal,  qu'il  fut  siffle5. 

Tout  autre  que  lui  aurait  &  jamais  perdu  courage.  Mais  Demos- 
thene  prit  patience  et  resolut,  en  depit6  de  la  nature,  de  devenir  bon 
orateur,  et  il  le  devint.  Ecoutez  comment  il  s'y  prit.7 

Quelquefois  il  allait  au  bori  de  la  mer,  dans  1'cndroit  ou  les 
vagues8  venaient  se  briser  (break)  avec  fracas.9  La,  il  debitait10  un 
discours  a  haute  voix,  pour  s'accoutumer  a  clominer  le  tumultc  d'une 
assernblee  populaire. 

D'autres  fois,  il  mottait  dans  sa  bouche  de  petits  cailloux  ( peb- 
bles') ;  puis  ilcourait  en  gravissant11  une  montagne  et  en  declamant, 


USE    OP   THE   ARTICLE.  227 

aim  clc  se  contraindro12  a  prononccr  claircmont  jusqu'a  la  moindrc 
Bjllabe. 

Enfin,  on  difc  qu'il  s'exerc,ait  h  parler  clans  une  cliambre  souter- 
raine,13  et  quo  pour  se  mettrc  dans  la  necessite  de  roster  longtcmps 
en  forme,  il  s'etait  fait  rascr14  la  moitie  do  la  tete. 

II  se  plagait  des  heures  entieres  devant  un  miroir,  pour  se  donner 
une  bonne  contenance  et  des  gestes  convenables.  On  dit  qu'il  so 
mettait  aussi  1'epaule  nue  immediatement  sous  la  pointe  (Tune 
epee,15  afin  qu'elle  le  piquat,16  toutes  les  fois  quo,  d'apres  sa  mau- 
vaise  habitude,  il  ferait  son  mouvement  d'epaule. 

C'est  par  des  exercices  soutenus17  de  ce  genre,  joints  a  une  etude 
profonde  des  sciences,  qu'il  se  rendit  enfin  le  plus  grand  orateur  qui 
ait  existe ;  et  aujourd'hui  encore,  apres  tant  de  siecles,18  ses  ha- 
rangues sont  adimrees  comrae  des  chefs-d'oeuvre  d'eloquence. 

1.  To  stammer.  2.  Shrill.  3.  Lungs.  4.  Shoulder.  5.  To  hiss.  6.  In  spite  of. 
7.  To  manage.  8.  The  waves.  9.  Noise.  10.  To  deliver.  11.  To  climb.  12.  To 
force.  13.  Subterranean.  14.  To  shave.  15.  A  sword.  1G.  To  sting.  17.  Con- 
tinued. 18.  Century. 

CONVERSATION. 

La  nature    avait-clle    favorise     Au    contraire,    elle    scmblait   lui 
Dcmosthene?  avoir  refuse  tous    les    moyens 

de  devcnir  orateur. 

Quels'lfe&faTits  avait-il  'done?          II  begayait  ct  ne  poavait  pronon- 
ccr la  lettre  r. 
Comment  etaitsa  voix?  Ello  etait  desagreable  ct  glapis- 

santc. 

Comment  s'cn  tira-t-il,  lorsqu'il     II  s'en  tira  si  mal  qu'il  fut  siffle 
prononQa    son    premier   dis-         (hissed). 
cours  ? 

Futril  de  courage  par  cc  resul-     Non,  il  ne  perdit  pas  courage ;  au 
tat?  contraire,  il  pefsista   dans   son 

dessein. 

Et  comment  s'y  prit-il  ?  II  s'exer^ait  continuellemcnt  et  de 

difierentes  manieres. 


228  IV.      QUATPJfiME  LEgON. 

Dites-moi  comment.  H  mettait  de  petits  cailloux  dans  sa 

bouche  pour  so  defaire  (rid  of  ) 
de  1'habitude  debegayer. 

Est-co  qu'il  rdussit  dans  scs  ef-  II  reussit  si  parfaitement  qu'il  de- 
forts  ?  vint  a  la  fin  le  plus  grand  ova- 

teur  qui  ait  cxiste. 

Ses  harangues  existent-ellcs  en-  Oui,  elles  ont  ete  eonservees,  et 
coro  ?  elles  sont  encore  aujourd'hui  ad* 

mirees  comme  des  cliefs-d'ocuyrc 
d'eloquence. 


IV.     QUATRIEME 


SPECIAL  USE  OF  DE  AND  A. 

In  general  we  may  say  de  is  used  when  made  of,  composed  ofy  coming 
from,  belonging  to,  can  be  understood ;  whereas  a  is  employed  when  for  the 
purpose  of  is  meant. 

I.    DE   IS   USED  I 

1.  After  adverbs  of  quantity,  as:  leaucoup,  peu,  plus,  moins, 
tant,  etc.     (See  Part  I.  L.  6,  p.  42.) 

2.  Before  a  limiting  word  which  follows  a  noun  used  partitively 
and  preceded  by  a  word  denoting  quantity.  Ex.:  — 

II  y  cut  deux  homines  DE  tu€s,  there  were  two  men  killed. 
Void  quelque  chose  DE  plus,  here  is  something  more. 
Void  un  liomme  DE  trop,  here  is  a  man  too  many. 
J'ai  deux  chambres  DE  loupes,  I  have  two  rooms  let. 

NOTE.  Tho  noun  may  be  understood.  Ex.:  J'en  ai  unc  de  loute.  Or 
rien  orpersonne  may  supply  the  place  of  the  noun  and  its  preceding  word. 
Ex.:  II  Ji'y  a  personne  de  malade  chez  nous,  there  is  no  one  sick  at  our  house. 
Rien  de  bon,  nothing  good. 


SPECIAL  USE   OF  DE  AND   A.  229 

3.  As  in   English,   after  nouns  expressing   quantity,  number, 
measure,  weight,  etc.,  as  :  — 

Une  quantity  de  noix,  a  quantity  of  walnuts. 
Unepaire  de  bas,  a  pair  of  stockings. 
Une  livre  de  beurre,  a  pound  of  butter. 
Une  piece  de  toile,  a  piece  of  linen. 
Un  morceau  de  fromage,  a  piece  of  cheese. 
Une  main  de  papier,  a  quire  of  paper. 
Une  bouteille  de  vin,  a  bottle  of  wine. 

4.  After  adjectives  denoting  dimension  or  age,  as :  — 

A  wall  twenty  feet  high :  un  mur  haul  de  vingt  pieds  or  un  mur  qui  a  vingt 
pieds  DE  haut  or  DE  hauteur. 

A  boy  ten  years  old,  un  (petit)  garcon  de  dix  ans. 

A  table  six  feet  long,  une  table  longue  de  six  pieds  or  de  six  pieds  de 
longueur. 

NOTE.  It  may  be  observed  here  that  with  adjectives  of  dimension,  the 
verb  to  be  may  be  rendered  in  French  by  avoir,  as :  — 

This  tower  is  120  feet  high. 

Cette  tour  A  cent  vingt  pieds  DE  hauteur. 

5.  When  an  English  adjective  is  rendered  in  French  by  a  noun, 
the  order  of  the  substantives  is  inverted  in  English.     In  French  the 
latter  is  preceded  by  de.     Ex. :  — 

A  witty  man,  un  Jiomme  ftesprii. 

A  gold  watch,  une  montre  d'or. 

Sill?  stockings,  des  bas  de  sole. 

The  Russian  Ambassador,  I'ambassadcur  de  Russie. 

Irish  linen,  la  toile  d'lrlande. 

Spanish  wool,  la  laine  d'Espagne. 

Burgundy  wine,  le  vin  de  Bourgogne. 

6.  De  is  used,  as  in  English,  after  a  common  noun  followed  by 
its  proper  name.     Ex. :  — 

Le  royaume  d'Espagne,  the  kingdom  of  Spain. 
L'ile  de  Make,  the  island  of  Malta. 
La  ville  de  Londres,  the  city  of  London. 
Le  lac  de  Geneve,  the  lake  of  Geneva. 

Except  the  combinations  vriih.mont,  ruCj  place,  and  e'glise,  as:  le  fifoni 
"Blanc,  le  Mont  Etna,  rue  Richelieu,  place  Vendome,  Vfylise  Saint- Sul pice,  etc. 


230  IV.      QUATRIBME    LEQCN. 

7.  After  many  adjectives  it  takes  the  place  of  the  English  with, 
from,  of,  by,  in,  etc.     (See  L.  8,  compl.  of  adj.  1.)      Ex.:  — 

Full  of  ardor,  plein  de  feu. 

Greedy  after  money,  avide  d'argent, 

Dressed  in  black,  vetu  de  noir. 

1  am  pleased  with  my  situation. 

Je  suis  content  de  ma  position. 

I  am  deprived  of  every  tiling,  je  suis  priv€  de  tout. 

8.  De  is  used  for  than,  instead  of  que,  after  plus,  more,  and 
moms,  less,  when  these  adverbs  are  followed  by  a  numeral  adjective 
or  substantive :  — 

H  a  phis  de  six  cms,  he  is  more  than  six  years  old. 

9.  For  in,  after  a  superlative,  before  the  name  of  a  place :  — 

Une  dcs  meilleures  institutions  DE  Boston,  one  of  the  best  institutions  in 
Boston. 

Le  premier  DE  noire  €cole,  the  first  in  our  school. 

FRENCH  COMPOUND  NOUNS  WITH  DE. 

10.  English  nouns  compounded  with  two  substantives  are  gener- 
ally rendered  in  French  by  two  separate  substantives  joined  by  de, 
when  one  expresses  the  nature,  species,  or  quality  of  the   other. 
(Compare  p.  240,  2.)     In  French  the  order  must  be  altered,  the 
last  coming  first,  and  a  preposition  inserted.     Westminster  bridge, 
for  instance,  must  be  translated  as  if  it  were  bridge  of  Westminster : 
le  pout  de  Westminster. 

1 .   Deis  used  -when  coming  from,  belonging  to,  made  of  can  be  understood, 
as :  — 

A  toothache,  un  mat  de  dents. 
A  headache,  un  mat  de  tete. 
The  town-hall,  V hotel  de  ville. 
A.  sea-fish,  un  poisson  de  mer. 
A  feather-bed,  un  lit  de  plumes. 
A  holiday,  un  jour  d&  fete* 
A  gold  mine,  une  mine  d'or. 
The  moon-light,  le  clair  de  lune. 
A  masterpiece,  un  chcf-tfcsuvre. 


SPECIAL  USB  OF  DE  AND  A.  231 

2.  When  in  the  English  word  the  second  component  denotes  a  person  oi 
an  animal,  in  French  de  is  always  used,  as :  — 
A  schoolmaster,  un  maitre  CL'ecok. 
A  chambermaid,  une  femme  de  chambre. 
The  dancing-master,  le  maitre  de  danse. 
The  music-mistress,  la  maitresse  de  musique. 
A  saddle-horse,  un  cheval  de  selle. 
A  sea-fish,  un  poisson  de  mcr. 

THEME   7. 

1.  Give  me  much  bread  and  little  meat.  2.  You  must  use  more 
prudence.  3.  I  Lave  bought  a  quantity  of  apples  and  pears.  4. 
You  make  too  much  noise.  5.  How  many  children  has  your  aunt? 
6.  She  has  four  children.  7.  You  have  eaten  too  many  cherries. 
8.  We  have  not  bread  enough.*  9.  Mr.  Henry  has  a  great  many 
friends.  10.  We  had  a  great  deal  of  pleasure.  11.  I  bought  a 
pound  of  cheese.  12.  We  want  a  dozen  pens,  a  bottle  of  ink,  and 
two  quires  of  paper.  13.  A  great  number  of  friends  remained 
attached1  to  me.  14.  They  have  built  a  wall  eighty  feet  long  and 
ten  feet  high.  15.  How  many  boys  were  these  killed  ?  16.  There 
were  six  killed  (see  §  2).  17.  How  many  soldiers  were  there 
wounded?  18.  There  were  six  books  lost.  19.  How  many  were 
there  found?  20.  How  many  rooms  are  there  let  in  that  house? 
21.  H^e  you  anything  good?  22.  I  have  nothing  bad.  23. 
When  my  sister  was  a  girl  of  seven  years,  she  lived  with  my  mother 
in  Italy.  24.  'Have  you  a  gold  or  a  silver  watch?  25.  My  watch 
is  of  gold.  26.  Irish  linen  is  as2  good  as  Dutch3  linen.  27.  I 
prefer  Burgundy  wine  to  Spanish  wine.  28.  The  kingdom  of  Spain 
is  larger  than  the  kingdom  of  Portugal  29.  The  city  of  Paris  is 
older  than  the  city  of  Berlin.  30.  Is  that  gentleman4  your  music- 
master?  31.  No ;  he  is  my  writing-master. 

1.  Attaches.    2.  Aussi.    3.  D'HoUande.    4.  Monsieur.    5.  JEcrUure}f. 

*Assez,  enough,  is  placed  after  the  substantive  in  English,  and  always  before  in 
Trench. 


232  IV.      QUATPJEME   LEgON. 

THEME  8. 

1.  To-morrow  is  (Jest)  a  holPday;  it  will  bo  a  day  of  happi- 
ness.2 2.  Human  life  is  full  of  disappointments.3  3.  Mr.  E. 
is  a  young  man  endowed4  with  (cP)  wit5  and  judgment.  4.  We 
were  very  much  pleased  with  his  behavior.6  5.  I  was  in  England, 
but  I  have  not  seen  Westminster  bridge.  6.  Burgundy  wine  is 
very  dear.  7.  Spanish  wool  is  better  than  German  wool.  8.  I 
have  sold  my  gold  watch.  9.  Mr.  B.  always  wears7  silk  stockings. 

10.  My  sisters  and  I  (we)  have  taken8  a  walk  by  (an)  moonlight. 

11.  The  battle-field  was  covered  with  the  dead  and  dying.     12. 
This  girl  is  the  chambermaid  of  the  Duchess  of  L.     13.   Who  are 
these  gentlemen?     14.    One  is  my  music-master,  and  the  other  is 
my  sister's  dancing-master.     15.   Let  us  go  to  gallons  dans)  the 
dining-room;  dinner  is  served  (servf).     16.   I  shall  not  dine  to- 
day ;  I  have  a  bad9  headache. 

1.  Fete.    2.  Borihear.    3.  Revers.    4.  Dou&.    5.  Esprit.    G.  Conduite,  f.    7.  Por- 
ter.   8.  To  take  a  walk  =  se  promener.    9.  Violent. 

II.       SPECIAL   USE    OF    a. 

1.  The  preposition  a  alone  (without  article)  is  used  after  a  verb 
in  the  following  expressions  : 

Condamncr  a  mart,  to  condemn  to  death. 

Fermer  a  clef,  to  lock. 

Tomber  a  terre,  to  fall  to  the  floor  or  ground. 

Alter  a  pied,  to  go  on  foot,  to  walk. 

Alter  a  cheval,  to  ride,  to  go  on  horseback. 

Montcr  a  cheval.,  to  get  or  mount  on  horseback. 

Tomber  a  qenoux.    ~)       .       ,   , 

J-  to  kneel  down, 
oe  mettre  a  (jenoux>  ) 

Se  mettre  a  table,  to  sit  down  to  dinner. 

2.  When  two  substantives  make  a  compound  word  in  English, 
their  order  is  inverted  in  French,  and  the  preposition  a  intervenes, 
when  the  one  expresses  the  use  of  the  other,  or  when  for  the  pur- 
pose of,  by  means  of,  may  be  understood : 

The  silk-worm,  le  ver  a  soie* 


SPECIAL   USE    OF  BE   AND   A.  233 

A  milk-pot,  un  pot  a  lait.* 

A  teacup,  une  tasse  a  the". 

A  repeater,  une  montre  a  repetition. 

A  windmill,  un  moulin  a  vent. 

A  paper-mill,  un  moulin  a  papier. 

A  powder-mill  (a  mill  for  powder),  un  moulin  a  poudre. 

Gunpowder,  de  la  poudre  a  canon. 

A  dining-room,  une  salle  a  manger. 

A  bedroom,  une  chambre  a  couclier. 

A  wineglass,  un  verre  a  vin.* 

A  coffee-cup,  une  tasse  a  cafe'. 

A  steam-engine,  une  machine  a  vapeur. 

A  steamboat,  un  bateau  a  vapeur. 

Fire-arms,  des  armes  a  feu. 

3.  If  the  second  word  begins  with  a  vowel  or  h  mute,  the  article 
is  commonly  inserted,  as  : 

An  ink-bottle,  une  bouteille  a  Yencre  for  a  encre). 
A  water-jug  (pitcher),  une  cruche  a  Veau  (or  a  eau). 

4.  When  the  compound  word  denotes  a  place  where  certain  things 
are  sold  or  kept  in  quantities,  the  article  is  also  used  with  «,  as  : 

The  horse-market,  le  marclie"  aux  chevaux. 
The  fish-market,  le  marchtf  aux  poissons. 
The  corn-market,  la  lialle  aux  lies. 

5.  A  together  vvith  the  article  is  further  used  to  call  a  dish  or 
drink  after  its  principal  ingredient,  as  : 

A  milk-soup,  une  soupe  an  lait. 
Coffee  with  milk,  da  caf€  au  lait. 
A  cream-tart,  une  tarte  a  la  creme. 
A  pancake  with  herbs,  une  omelette  aux  fines  herbes. 

NOTE.    But  we  say  du  syrop  de  groseille,  not  sijrop  a  groseille,  currant- 
syrup,  because  this  is  made  entirely  of  currants. 

G.    To  denote  the  different  kinds  of  hunting,  shooting,  etc.,  as  : 

A  deer-hunt,  la  chasse  aux  chevreuils. 
Fox-hunting,  la  cliasse  aux  renards. 

7.  A  is  generally  employed  to  translate  expressions  in  which  with 

*  Un  pot  de  lait,  un  vcrre  de  vin,  signify  a  pot  of  milk,  a  glass  of  wine;  pot  au 
lait  refers  both  to  the  vessel  and  to  its  contents. 


234  IV.      QUATRIEME   LEgON. 

is  expressed  or  could  be  employed,  or  when  having  could  "be  used- 
Ex.  : 

Une  maiscn  a  deux  etagcs,  a  two-story  Iiouse. 
Un  chapeau  a  grands  lords,  a  broad-brimmed  liat. 
Une  voiture  a  deux  places,  a  double-seated  carriage. 

THEME    9. 

1..  I  have  bought  six  teacups ;  take1  them  into  the  dining-rocm. 
2.  Where  is  the  oiP-bottle  ?  3.  Who  has  broken  this  flower-pot  ? 
4.  Bring  me  a  wineglass  and  two  teaspoons.  5.  Why  has  he 
been  condemned  to  death  ?  G.  He  has  committed3  a  murder.9  7. 
Your  room  is  locked.  8.  Is  this  an  ink-bottle  ?  9.  No ;  it  is  a 
vinegars-bottle.  10.  Let  us  sit  down  (rnettons-nous)  to  dinner.  11. 
Did  you  observe5  that  man  with6  black  hair?  12.  You  must  buy 
another  milk-pot.  13.  Is  this  the  corn-market?  14.  I  always 
keep  (keep  always)  fire-arms  in  my  bedroom  for  my  safety7  during 
the  night;  but  I  have  no  gunpowder  at  present,  thus  (ainsi)  my 
fire-arms  are  useless.8 

1.  Portez.    2.  ffuile,  f.    3.  Commis,  P.  p.  of  commettre.    4.  Vinaigre.    5.  Remar- 
qiter.    6.  Aux,  pi.     7.  Surety  f.    8.  Inutile.    9.  Meurtre,  f. 

THEME    10. 

1.  Whom  have  you  called?  2.  I  have  been  to  the  fish-market; 
however  I  have  bought  no  fish,  because  it  was  too  dear.1  3.  I  went 
fox-hunting  yesterday,  and  to-morrow  I  shall  see  a  deer-hunt.  4. 
What  had  you  for  dessert?  5.  We  had  cherry-pie21  and  a  cream* 
tart.*  6.  Can  you  tell  rne  where  the  hay-store  is?  7.  It  is 
near  the  horse-market.  8.  Who  invented  gunpoivdert  9.  Ber- 
thold  Schwarz,  a  German  monk  5  10.  The  poor  girl  has  broken  a 
milk-pot,  two  wineglasses,  and  several  teacups.  11.  The  Great 
Eastern  is  the  largest  steamship  in  the  (au)  world.  12.  Call  the 
milk- woman  ;6  I  must  buy  a  pot  of  milk. 

1.  Cher.    2.  Gateau.    3.  Creme,  f.    4.  Tourte,  f.    5.  Home.    6.  Laitiere. 


NAMES   OF   COUNTRIES,   TOWNS,   ETC.  235 


V.     CINQUIEME    LE90N. 


PECULIARITIES  IN  THE  USE  OF  NAMES   OF 
COUNTRIES,   TOWNS,  ETC. 

(See  Part  I.,  L.  VII.) 

1.  As  mentioned  in  the  First  Part  (7th  lesson),  the  definite  ar- 
ticle is  put  before  the  names  of  countries,  provinces,  rivers,  and 
mountains.     But  the  names  of  countries  and  islands,  which  have  the 
same  name  as  cities  situated  in  them,  such  as  Naples,  Bade,  Genes 
(Genoa),  Matte,  Candle,  etc.,  are  used  without  the  article. 

Except,  however :  le  Hanovre  and  le  Luxembourg. 

2.  .Further,  the  definite  article  is  always  retained  with  names  of 
countries  which  are  only  used  in  the  plural,  and  in  those  which  are 
compounded  with  an  adjective.     Ex.:  — 

The  productions  of  India,  les  productions  des  Indes. 
The  governor  of  the  Netherlands. 
Le  gouverneur  des  Pays-bas. 
The  queen  of  Great  Britain. 
La  reb»4ela  Grande-Bretagne. 

3.  In  the  following  cases  de  only,  without  the  article,  is  used  be- 
fore names  of  countries  :  — 

1.   When  sovereigns,  courts,  and  titles  are  spoken  of.    Ex.:  — 
La  reine  d'Angleterre,  the  queen  of  England. 
Le  Grand-due  de  Bade,  the  grand-duke  of  Baden. 
NOTE.  With  the  names  of  some  countries  that  are  not  European,  t.h 
article  is  generally  used,  as  :  — 
L'empereur  de  la  Chine,  da  Bre'sil,  etc. 
The  emperor  of  China,  of  Brazil,  etc. 

However,  with  Persia,  la  Perse,  and  Egypt,  I'Egypte,  only  de  is  used  :  — 
Le  roi  de  Perse,  the  king  of  Persia. 


236  V.      CINQUIEilE   LEgON. 

2.  "Where  the  names  of  countries  have  the  meaning  of  an  adjective  (see 
alsoL.  IV.  4),  as:  — 

L' urgent  dc  France,  French  money. 

La  Koifi  d'ltalie,  the  silk  of  Italy. 

Da  fromage  de  Suisse,  Swiss  cheese  (de  may  be  omitted). 

3.  After  the  verbs  :  venir,  to  come  ;  revenir,  to  come  back,  to  return;  ar- 
ru'cr,  to  arrive,  and  the  noun  le  retour,  if  the  name  of  the  country  is  femi- 
nine, as :  — 

//  est  vcnu  de,  France,  he  has  come  from  France. 

Lorsque  je  reiins  d'Espagne,  when  I  returned  from  Spain. 

A  mon  retour  d'ltalie,  on  my  return  from  Italy. 

But  if  the  same  is  masculine,  the  definite  article  is  used,  as :  — 

JP  arrive  da  Tyrol,  da  Mcxique,  dn  Portugal,  etc. 

4.  After  words,  such  as  empire,  royaume  (kingdom),  ducluf,  viUc,  He  (isle), 
as  in  English  (see  L.  IV.  G) :  — 

L 'empire  d'Autriche,  the  Empire  of  Austria. 
La  ville  de  Paris,  the  city  of  Paris. 

4.  Both  to  and  in  used  after  a  word  signifying  going,  coming, 
sending,  living,  being,  etc.,  before  names  of  countries  in  the  singu- 
lar, must  be  rendered  in  French  by  the  preposition  en,  without  any 
article.     Ex. :  — 

AVe  are  going  to  America,  nous  allons  en  Ame'rique. 

He  is  to  go  back  to  Belgium,  il  doit  rctourner  en  Bclgique. 

I  send  him  to  Switzerland,  je  I'envoie  en  Suisse. 

My  brother  is  in  America,  mon  frere  est  en  Ame'rique. 

Rouen  is  in  France,  Rouen  est  situes  en  France. 

5.  If  tho  name  of  the  country  be  accompanied  by  an  adjective, 
dans  with  the  definite  article  must  be  used  : 

Dans  la  Suisse  frangaise,  in  French  Switzerland. 
Dans  VAllemagne  mgridionale,  in  southern  Germany. 

6.  The  article  is  omitted  before  names  of  towns,  villages,  etc., 
as:  — 

Anverst  Antwerp.  Livaurne,  Leghorn. 

Athcnes,  Athens.  Lisbonne,  Lisbon. 

Bruxettes,  Brussels.  Londres,  London. 

Douvres,  Dover.  Lyon,  Lyons. 

Geneve,  Geneva.  Venise^  Venice. 


NAMES  OF   COUNTRIES,  TOWNS,  ETC.  237 

NOTE.  A  few  names  of  towns  are  preceded  by  the  article  :  — 
Le  Havre,  Havre.  la  RocMle,  Eochelle. 

la  Haie,  the  Hague.  .  le  Caire,  Cairo,  etc. 

7.  The  names  of  rivers  and  mountains  are  preceded  by  the* 
definite  article,  as  in  English  : 

La  Seine,  the  Seine.  le  Tibre,  the  Tiber. 

le  Rhone,  the  Rhone.  le  Danube,  the  Danube. 

le  Rhin,  the  Rhine.  la  Moselle,  the  Moselle. 

les  Alpes,  the  Alps.  le  Right,  the  Righi. 

8.  Both  to  and  at  or  in  before  names  of  places  are  rendered 
by  a.     Ex. :  — 

Are  you  going  to  Brussels,  allez-vous  a  Bruxelles  ? 

He  was  at  Rome  and  Naples,  il  &ait  a  Rome  et  a  Naples. 

9.  After  partir,  to  set  out,  to  leave,  the  preposition  pour  must 
be  used  before  names  of  countries  with  the  article,  before  names 
of  cities  without  it :  — 

Nous  partirons  pour  I'Espagne  et  le  Portugal. 

We  will  set  out  (or  leave)  for  Spain  and  Portugal. 

Elle  est  partie  pour  Paris  et  Lyon. 
She  left  for  Paris  and  Lyons. 

THEME  11. 

1.  J  prefer  the  wfiies  of  Germany  to  the  wines  of  Spain.  2. 
We  shall  soon  go  to  Switzerland  and  Italy.  8.  Naples  may  (pent) 
be  called  a  paradise,1  from  its  (a  cause  de  so)  beauty  and  fertility.2 
4.  This  merchant  has  bought  Italian  silk,  Spanish  wool,  and  French 
wines.  5.  My  grandfather  lives  in  the  West  Indies.3  6.  I  set  out 
for  Egypt  to-morrow.  7.  This  cheese  comes  from  Switzerland.  8. 
Cologne  is  situated*  on  (sur)  the  Rhine.  9.  The  Alps  are  higher 
than  the  Pyrenees.  10.  The-  emperor  of  Russia,  Peter5  the  Great, 
died  at  St.  Petersburgh  in  the  year  (en)  1725.  11.  Sicily  is  the 
granary6  of  (§  1)  Italy,  and  Italy  the  garden  of  Europe. 

1.  Paradis,  m.     2.  Fertility.    3.  Les  Indes  occidentales.    4.  Situee.   5.  Pierre. 
6.  Orenier,m. 


238  V.      CINQUIEMB 

READING  LESSON. 
CHARLES    XII.     (Douze.) 

Charles  XII,  roi  de  Suede,  naquit1  a  Stoekliolm  le  27  Juin  1682. 
II  perdit  sa  mere  dans  sa  onzieme  annee,  ct  avait  a  peine  quinze  ans 
lorsque  son  pere  mourut.  Selon2  le  testament  du  feu3  roi,  il  ne  de- 
vait  etre  majeur4  qu'apres  avoir  passe  sa  dix-huitieme  annee,  mais 
sur  la  proposition  du  ministre  Piper,  les  etats  lui  defercrent5  le 
gouvernement  deja  en  1697.  L'an  1700,  Pierre  I,  empereur  de 
Russie,  Frederic  IY,  roi  de  Danemark,  et  Auguste,  electeur  de 
Saxe,  lui  declarerent  la  guerre. 

II  les  attaqua  1'un  apres  1'autre  et  remporta  d'abord6  dcs  victoircs 
eclatantes,7  entre  autres  ceBe  de  Narva,  ou  il  dent8  avec  moins  de9 
8,000  Suedois,  quatre-vingt  mille  Husscs,  dont  il  resta  plus  de  vingt 
mille  sur  le  champ  de  bataille,  tandis  qu'il  ne  perdait  que  six  cents 
hommes.  Mais  plus  tard,  lorsqu'il  penetra  en  Eussie,  il  perdit  la 
bataille  decisive  de  Pultawa,  ct  fut  contraint  de  se  refugier  sur  le 
territoire  turc  avec  une  faible  escorte  de  deux  cent  cinquante 
Suedois. 

1.  Was  born.     2.  According  to.     3.  Late.     4.  Of  age.     5.  To  transfer.     6.  At 
first.    7.  Splendid.    8.  To  defeat.    9.  Than.  • 

CONVERSATION. 

Ou  naquit  Charles  XII  ?  Ce  roi  naquit  a  Stockholm. 

Dans  quelle  annee  ?  En  1682,  le  27  Juin. 

Perdit-il  ses  parents  dc  bonne  Oui,  il  perdit  sa  mere,  quand  il 
heure  ?  avait  11  ans,  et  son  pere,  quand 

il  avait  15  ans. 

Quand  fut-il  declare  majeur  ?  En  1697,  a  1'fige  de  quinze  ans  et 

demi. 

Qu'arriva-t-il  trois  ans  apres  ?  Pierre  I,  empereur  de  Eussie, 

Frederic  IY,  roi  de  Danemark, 
et  Auguste,  electeur  de  Saxe, 
lui  declarerent  la  guerre. 

Que  fit  Charles  XII  ?  II  les  attaqua  1'un  apres  Tautre  et 

les  cleat. 


POSSESSIVE   ADJECTIVES. 


239 


Quclle   est   sa    plus   eclatante 

victoire  ? 

Avait-il  beaucoup  de  soldats  ? 
Y  eufc-il  beaucoup  de  tues  ? 


A-t-il  toujours  et^  heureux  dans 

scs  batailles? 
A  quoi  fut-il  contraint  ? 


Celle    de    Narva,    ou    il    battit 

80,000  Kusses. 
II  n'avait  que  8,000  Suedois. 
Les  Russes  perdirent  plus  de  vingt 

mille   hommes,  les   Suedois   h 

peine  six  cents. 
Non,  il  perdit  la  bataille  de  Pul- 

tawa. 
H  fut  contraint  de  se  refugier  sur 

le  territoire  turc,  avec  une  faiblo 

escorte. 


VI.     SIXIEME    LEgON. 


POSSESSIVE  ADJECTIVES, 

(See  the  First  Part,  L.  XII.) 
1.    Possessive  adjectives  must  be  repeated  :  — 

1.  Before  every  noun  of  the  same  sentence,  as  :  — 
My  brothers  and  sisters  have  arrived. 

Mes  freres  et  mes  sceurs  sont  arrives* 

2.  Before  two  or  three  adjectives  qualifying  different  things :  — 
I  love  your  great  and  your  little  children. 

.Palme  vos  grands  ct  vos  petits  enfants. 

NOTE.  But  when  the  two  substantives  relate  to  the  same  person,  and 
when  the  two  or  three  adjectives  are  of  the  like  signification*  and  qualify 
the  same  object,  the  possessive  adjective  is  not  repeated.  Ex.:  — 

My  teacher  and  friend,  mon  prfcepteur  et  ami. 

His  good  and  useful  advice,  scs  bons  et  utiles  consefls. 

*  If  they  have  a  contrary  signification,  the  possessive  adjective  must  be  repeated, 
as  :  Scs  bonnes  et  ses  mauvaises  pensees  (thoughts). 


240  VI.      SIXIEME   LEgON. 

2.  Custom  requires  the  use  of  the  possessive  adjective  "before  the 
names  of  relations  in  addressing  them  or  speaking  of  them.    Ex.:  — 

Aunt,  when  do  you  leave  ? 
Ma  tante,  quand  partez-vous? 

Cousin,  will  you  go  with  me  ? 

Mon  cousin  (ma  cousine),  voulcz-vous  alter  avcc  inoi  ? 

]  Bather  is  not  at  home,  mon  pere  n'est  pas  a  la  maison. 

3.  When  in  English  the  possessive  pronouns  mine,  thine,  Ms, 
hers,  etc.,  preceded  by  the  preposition  of,  are  placed  after  a  noun  to 
which  they  relate,  they  are  rendered  in  French  by  mes,  tes,  ses,  etc., 
before  the  noun,  which  is  put  in  the  plural.     Ex.:  — 

A  book  of  mine,  un  de  mes  livres. 
A  friend  of  yours,  un  de  vosamis. 

4.  When  the  verb  to  be  is  found  before  a  possessive  adjective  fol- 
lowed by  a  noun  in  the  possessive  case,  and  signifies  to  belong,  in 
French  a  must  be  used.     Ex.:  — 

This  book  is  my  father's,  ce  livre  est  a  mon  pere. 

That  house  is  our  uncle's,  cette  maison-la  est  a  noire  oncle. 

5.  When  parts  of  the  body,  or  physical  and  intellectual  faculties 
are  spoken  of,  the  French  generally  use  the  definite  article  where  in 
English  the  possessive  adjective  is  used  (see  L.  III.  5.)     Ex.:  — 

I  have  a  pain  in  my  head,  fai  mal  a  la  tete. 

He  has  lost  his  senses,  il  a  perdu  Vesprit. 

NOTE  1 .  If,  however,  there  were  an  ambiguity  to  be  feared,  the  posses- 
sive adjective  should  be  used  in  French  as  in  English. 

NOTE  2.  When  a  habitual  complaint  is  spoken  of,  the  possessive  ad- 
jective is  also  properly  used.  Ex.:  — 

His  headache  has  returned,  sa  migraine  Va  repris. 

6.  After  the  verbs  changer  and  redoiibler  the  possessive  adjec- 
tive is  dropped  and  replaced  by  the  preposition  de,  as  :  — 

He  has  changed  his  religion,  il  a  cJiang&de  religion. 

We  have  changed  our  opinion. 

Nous  avons  change"  &' opinion  or  d'avis. 

They  redoubled  their  activity,  Us  redoullerent  d'activite. 


POSSESSIVE  ADJECTIVES.  241 

THEME  12. 

1.  My  father,  mother  and  sisters  aro  In  the  country.  2.  His 
uncle  and  aunt  know  it.  3.  I  thank  you  for  (de)  your  good  and 
useful  services.  4.  He  is  a  friend  of  mine.  5.  I  found  a  pencil 
of  yours.  6.  Where  are  you,  daughter?  7.  Here  I  am,  mother. 
8.  Come,  friend,  let  us  work.  9.  He  will  never  betray1  me,  for  he 
is  my  friend  and  protector.2  10.  We  changed  our  mind3  when  we 
heard  that  news.  11.  He  tells4  a  falsehood4  as  often  as  (toutes  les 
fois  qii?)  he  opens  his  mouth.  12.  A  cousin  of  ours  came  yes- 
terday to  see  us.  13.  Give  me  my  dictionary  and  grammar.5  14. 
My  mother  has  a  pain  in  (a)  her  head.  15.  I  have  a  pain  in 
my  ear.6  16.  The  man  who  fell  from  the  roof 7  of  our  house,  dislo- 
cated (se  demit)  his  wrist.8  17.  In  (a)  the  last  battle9  our  gen- 
eral lost  his  right  leg,  and  I  was  wounded10  in  my  shoulder.11 

1.  TraMr.  2.  Protecteur.  3.  Avis,  m.  4.  Dire  un  mensonge.  5.  Grammaire, 
f.  6.  Oreille.  7.  Toit,  m.  8.  Polgnet,  m.  9.  Batallle^.  10.  Blcsser,  reg.  v.  11. 
Epaule,  f. 

7.  When  in  English  the  word  own  is  found  alone,  i.  e.  without 
a  noun,  after  a  possessive  adjective,  the  latter  is  rendered  by  a  pos- 
sessive pronoun  :  le  mien,  le  tien,  le  si  en  (propre),  etc.,  or  in  the 
feminine  by  la  mienne,  la  tienne,  la  sicnne  (propre),  etc.    Ex.:  — 

The  daughter  of  his  friend  and  his  own. 
La  fiilede  son  ami  et  la  sienne  (propre). 

8.  The  indefinite  pronoun  one's  denoting  a  possession  is  trans- 
lated in  French  son,  sa,  ses.     Ex. :  — 

One  is  glad  to  find  one's  money  again. 
On  est  content  de  retrouverson  argent. 

9.  When  its  and  their  refer  to  a  thing  which  is  not  the  subject 
of  a  proposition  they  are  rendered  by  en  unless  preceded  by  a  prep- 
osition, in  which  case  son,  sa,  ses,  leur,  leurs  must  be  used.   Ex.:  — 

I  like  this  country,  its  air  (Nom.)  is  healthy,  its  soil  fruitful,  etc. 
•Palme  ce  pays ;  Vair  en  est  sain,  le  sol  en  est  fertile. 
What  plant  is  this  ?  —  I  do  not  know  its  name. 
Quelle  est  cette  plantel — Je  n'en  connais pas  le nom, 
16 


242  VI.      SIXIEME  LEgON. 

Look  at  these  trees  ;  what  is  their  height? 

Voyez  ces  arbres;  qudle  en  est  la  hauteur  (not  leur  h.)  ? 

But  we  must  say  : 

Paris  a  ses  beautds. 

Paris  has  its  beauties. 

J*  admire  la  grandeur  de  ses  rues. 

I  admire  the  size  of  its  streets. 

Ces  arbres  sont  remarquables  par  leur  hauteur. 

These  trees  are  remarkable  for  their  height. 

10,    Observe  the  following  gallicisms  :  — 

Let  me  soon  hear  of  you. 

Donnez-moi  bientot  de  vos  nouvettes. 

I  shall  go  to  meet  you,  j'irai  a  votre  rencontre. 

They  are  cousins  of  mine,  ce  sont  de  mes  cousins. 

With  regard  to  me,  —  to  you,  —  to  us. 

A  mon  e'gard,  a  votre  e'gard,  a  notre  e'gard. 

THEME    13. 

1.  He  has  worked  much  more  for  our  good1  than  for  his  own.  2. 
Paris  is  a  large  city,  its  streets  are  too  narrow.2  3.  I  particularly3 
admire  (I  adm.  p.)  its  rich  stores.4  4.  Windsor  is  a  fine  town  ;  I 
admire  its  situatic/i,  walks5  and  streets.  5.  London  has  its  beau- 
ties. 6.  I  like  the  size6  of  its  streets.  7.  This  illness7  is  danger- 
ous ;  I  know  its  origin8  and  effects.9  8.  This  is  (void)  a  fine  tree ; 
its  fruit  is  delicious.10  9.  Every  science  has  its  principles.  10. 
An  illustrious  ( — tre)  birth11  receives  from  virtue  its  most  shining12 
lustre.  11.  Mr  Dubois  has  sold  his  father's  house  and  his  own. 

1.  Le  Men.  2.  Etroit,  e.  3.  Surtout.  4.  Magasin.  ra.  5.  Promenade,  f.  6. 
Grandeur,  f.  7.  Maladie,  f.  8.  Origine,  f.  9.  Effet,  m.  10.  Delidcux.  11. 
Naissance,f.  12.  Beau. 


READING  LESSON. 
EUDAMIDAS. 

Eudamidas  de  Corinthe  fit,  en  mourant,  un  testament  qui  semble- 
rait  ridicule  h  tout  autre     u'&  un  ami.     II  touchait  a  sa  derniere 


POSSESSIVE  ADJECTIVES.  243 

heure,  et  laissait  sa  mere  et  sa  fillo  exposees  a  la  plus  cruelle  indi- 
gence, n'ayant  pour  tout  bien  que  deux  fideles  amis,  Carixene  et 
Are  thus,  Eudaraidas  ne  fut  point  alarme ;  il  jugea  des  cosurs  de 
ses  amis  par  le  sien  propre,  et  il  fit  ce  testament  qui  ne  doit  jamais 
etro  oublie.  "  Je  legue1  a  Are  thus  le  soin  de  nourrir  ma  mere,  et 
de  Pentretenir  dans  sa  vieillesse  ;  a  Carixene  le  soin  de  marier  ma 
Ulle,  et  delui  donner  une  dot2  convenable." 

Carixene  etant  mort  quelque  temps  apres,  Arethus  exe*cuta  la 
commission  de  tous  les  deux ;  et,  pour  rendre  son  action  plus  il- 
lustre,  il  maria  la  fille  de  son  ami  et  la  sienne  en  un  meme  jour, 
et  leur  donna  a  toutes  deux  une  memo  dot.  Quant  a  (as  to)  la 
mere,  il  la  nourrit  jusqu'a  la  mort.  Si  la  generosite  d'  Are  thus  est 
digne  d'admiration,  la  noble  hardiesse3  et  la  confiance  du  testateur4 
Test  encore  davantage;  car  celui  qui  a  la  resolution  de  faire  un 
semblable5  testament,  est  capable  non-seulement  de  1'executer, 
mais  de  quelque  chose  encore  de  plus,  et  il  n'est  pas  douteux  qu'il 
n'eut  nourri  la  mere  de  son  ami,  et  marie  sa  fille,  aussi  bien  que  la 
sienne  propre,  meme  sans  en  etre  prie. 
1.  I  bequeath.  2.  Dowry,  portion.  3.  Boldness.  4.  Testator.  5.  Such,  similar. 

CONVERSATION. 

Que  fit  Eudamidas  de  Corinthe    H  fit  un  testament  remarquable. 

en  mourant  ? 

Etait-il  riehe  ?  Au  contraire,  il  etait  tres-pauvre, 

mais  il  avait  deux  fideles  amis. 

Que  legua-t-il  done  a  ses  amis  ?     II  legua  a  son  ami  Arethus  le  soin 

de  nourrir  sa  vieille  mere,  et  a 
Carixene  le  soin  de  marier  sa 
fille. 

Devait-il  la  marier  sans  dot  ?        Non,  avec  une  dot  convenable. 
Les  deux  amis  executerent-ils    L'un    d'eux,    Carixene,    monrufc 
cc  que  le  testament  leur  im-        quelque  temps  apres. 
posa? 

Et  Tautro  que  fit-il  ?  Are*thus  executa  la  commission  de 

tous  les  deux. 


244:  VIL      SEPTIEME  LEgON. 

De    quelle    maniere    Fexecu-    H  maria  la  fille  de  son  ami  et  la 
ta-t-il?  sienne   en  un  memo  jour,    et 

leur  donna  h  toutes  deux  une 
dot  egale. 
Et  comment  agit-il  envers  la    E  la  nourrit  jusqu'a  la  mort. 

mere  d'Eudamidas  ? 

Comment  trouvez-vous  la  gene-    Elle  est  digne  d'admiration. 
rosite  d' Arethus  ? 


VII.     SEPTIEME    LE90N. 


NUMERALS. 

(See  the  First  Part,  L.  XIV.) 

• 

1.  When  the  cardinal  numbers  are  used  substantively  they  take 

the  masculine  article,  as : 

Un  un,  a  one.    Le  trois,  the  three. 

Ce  huit  est  mcd  fait,  this  eight  is  badly  made. 

2.  A  and  one  before  hundred  and  thousand  are  not  translated. 
Ex.: 

A  hundred  and  twenty  horses,  cent  vingt  chevaux. 
In  the  year  one  thousand  one  hundred  and  sixty. 
L'an  (or  simply  en)  mil  cent  soixante. 

3.  Observe  the  following  expressions  with  numerals : 
Un  a  un,  one  by  one. 

Deux  a  deux,  two  by  two. 

Uun  apres  I'autre,  one  after  the  other. 

Vers  six  heures  or  vers  les  six  heures,  by,  about  six  o'clock. 

Vers  midi  or  vers  le  midi,  towards  (by)  twelve  o'clock. 

Une  heure  et  demie,  one  hour  and  a  half  or  half-past  one. 

Deux  heures  moins  un  quart,  a  quarter  to  two. 

Trois  heures  (et)  un  quart,  a  quarter  past  three. 


NUMERALS.  245 

Tows  les  deux  jours,  every  other  day. 

D'aujourd'hui  en  huit,  to-day  week. 

D'aujourd'hui  en  quinzc,  to-day  fortnight. 

Dans  qulnze  jours,  in  a  fortnight. 

II  y  a  huit  jours,  a  week  ago. 

II  y  a  un  an,  a  year  or  a  twelvemonth  ago. 

4.  More  than,  and  less  than,  before  numbers  are  rendered  plus  de 
aad  moins  de,  instead  of  plus  que  and  mains  que.     Ex. : 

I  have  spent  more  than  a  hundred  francs. 

JFai  de'pense"  plus  de  cent  francs. 

You  have  not  less  than  ten  mistakes  in  your  exercise. 

Vbus  n'avez  pas  moins  de  dix  fautes  dans  votre  theme. 

5.  Nearly,  before  a  number,  is  translated  pres  de.     Ex. : 
It  is  nearl^  five  o'clock,  il  est  pres  de  cinq  heures. 

THEME  H. 

1.  This  six  is  well  made,  but  this  nine  is  badly  made.  2.  Henry 
the  Fourth  was  one  of  the  greatest  kings  of  France.  3.  Numa 
was  one  of  the  seven  kings  of  Rome.  4.  America  was  discovered1 
in  the  year  one  thousand  four  hundred  and  ninety-two.  5.  The 
shepherd2  has  sold  a  hundred  sheep.  6.  When  do  you  dine  ?  7. 
I  dine  at  twelve  o'clock,  sometimes  at  one  o'clock.  8.  I  suj/'  at 
half-past  eight,  and  I  go  to  bed4  at  midnight.  9.  Is  it  four  o'clock? 
10.  No,  sir ;  it  is  a  quarter  to  four.  11.  I  must  go  out  at  a  quar- 
ter past  four.  12.  We  went  in  (entrdmes)  one  by  one.  13.  My 
brother  will  set  out  this  day  week,  and  will  come  back  in  a  fortnight. 
14.  Has  Mr.  L.  three  children?  15.  No;  he  has  (en  a)  more 
than  three :  he  has  four  or  five.  16.  This  book  costs  less  than 
ten  francs.  17.  How  old  is  your  son  Charles  ?  18.  He  is  nearly 
tourtcen  years  old.  19.  I  have  a  French  lesson5  every  other  day. 

1.  Fut  decouverte.     2.  Le  Merger.     3.  Souper.     4.  Se  coucher.     5.   Une  leqon 
de  fran^aia. 


246  vm.    HUITIEME 


VIII.     HUITIEME    LEgON. 


ADJECTIVES. 

See  Part  I.,  Lesson  XVII. 

AGREEMENT   OF   TIIE   ADJECTIVE   WITH   TUB   NOUN. 

1.  In  French,  the  adjective  agrees  in  gender  and  number  with 
the  noun  to  which  it  relates  : 

Une  feuille  verte,  a  green  leaf.  • 

De  bons  amis,  good  friends. 

Les  prunes  sont  mures,  the  plums  are  ripe. 

1.  If  it  belongs  to  two  or  more  nouns  in  the  singular,  it  must  be  in  the 
plural: 

Le  pauvre  ct  le  riche  sont  €gaux  devant  Dieu. 

The  poor  and  the  rich  are  alike  before  God. 

*Tai  trouve"  la  porte  et  la  femtre  femn&s. 

I  found  the  door  and  the  window  shut. 

La  clemence  ct  la  majeste*  ttaient  peintes  sur  son  front. 

Clemency  and  majesty  were  imprinted  on  his  brow. 

2.  If  the  substantives  are  of  different  genders,  and  joined  by  et,  and,  the 
adjectives  must  be  in  the  masculine  plural  : 

Mon  frere  et  ma  sceur  sont  tres-hciireux. 
My  brother  and  sister  are  very  happy. 

3.  When  the  two  nouns  are  joined  by  ou,  or,  or  when  the  conjunction 
is  left  out,  the  adjective  agrees  only  with  the  latter  noun  : 

Un  chateau  ou  une  maison  ruincQ. 
A  ruined  castle  or  house. 
Le  fer,  laflamme  €tait  toute  pr&e. 
The  sword,  the  flame  was  quite  ready. 

2.  The  adjectives  demi,  half;  nu,  bare  ;  except c,  except;  y  conir 
pris,  included;  suppose,  supposed;  ci-joint,  inclosed,  annexed, 
are  invariable  when  they  precede  the  noun ;  demi  and  nu  are  then 
joined  with  their  noun  by  a  hyphen.  Ex. : 

Une  demi-heure}  half  an  hour. 


ADJECTIVES.  247 

Marcher  nu-pieds,  to  walk  barefooted. 
Marcher  nu-tete,  to  walk  bareheaded. 
Except^  les  deux  premieres  pages. 
Except  the  two  first  pages. 
Y  compris  la  somme  de  cent  francs. 
The  sum  of  a  hundred  francs  included. 
Suppose"  ces  fails,  these  facts  supposed. 

But  they  must  agree  with  their  noun  when  they  follow  it,  as : 

Une  Jieure  et  demiQ,  an  hour  and  a  half. 

Avoir  les  jambes  nues,  to  have  bare  legs. 

Les  deux  premieres  pages  exceptcvs. 

The  two  first  pages  cxcepted. 

Copie  de  ma  lettre  est  ci-jointQ. 

A  copy  of  my  letter  is  annexed. 

3.  Feu,  late,  is  invariable,  like  the  preceding  ones,  when  it  is 
before  the  article  or  possessive  pronoun ;  when  it  follows,  it  varies,  as : 

Feu  la  reine  or  la  feiie  reine,  the  late  queen. 
Feu  mes  tantes  or  mes  feues  tantes,  my  late  aunts. 

4.  Some  adjectives,  as  bon,  vite,  las,  etc.,  may  be  used  adverb- 
ially :  then,  of  course,  they  are  invariable.     Ex. : 

Ces  roses  sentent  tres-bon  (not  bonnes). 

These  roses  smell  very  sweet. 

Les  cerfs  courent  tres-vite,  the  stags  run  very  fast. 

5.  If  the  expression  avoir  I" air,  to 'look,  is  followed  by  an  adjec- 
tive, this  latter  remains  unchanged  when  a  moral  or  intellectual 
quality-is  spoken  of,  as  : 

Ces  dames  ont  Vair  bon. 

These  ladies  look  good-natured. 

But  if  a  bodily  or  organic  quality  is  mentioned,  or  when  the  adjec- 
tive refers  rather  to  the  subject  than  to  the  word  air,  the  adjective 
agrees  with  the  subject  of  tho  sentence.  In  this  latter  case>  the 
verb  tire  is  understood,  as : 

Ces  pierres  ont  Vair  tres-durzs. 

These  stones  seem  to  be  very  hard. 

Madame  F.  a  Vair  mecontente  (i.  e.  d'etre  m&ontente). 

Mrs.  F.  appears  to  be  discontented. 

6.  If  a  noun  is  accompanied  by  an  adjective  in  the  superlative, 


248  VIII.      HUITIEME  LEgON. 

the  latter  always  agrees  with  it  in  gender  and  number.     When  the 
superlative  follows,  the  article  must  be  repeated  : 

La  plus  belk  femme,  the  handsomest  woman. 
Les  gens  les  plus  riches,  the  richest  people. 

THEME   15. 

1.  I  have  a  good  friend.  2.  The  leaves  are  green.  3.  Thcso 
pears  are  riper  than  those  apples.  4.  His  brother  and  cousin  have 
arrived.  5.  Charles  and  Louisa  are  very  industrious.  6.  Men 
and  women  are  mortal.  7.  My  son  and  daughter  are  happy.  8. 
His  uncle  and  aunt  are  dead.  9.  Louis  XIV.  had  in  France  an 
absolute1  power2  and  authority  (autoritf).  10.  She  left  her  room 
and  her  trunk3  open.  11.  I  found  the  windows  and  the  shutters4 
shut.  12.  Give  these  presents  to  the  most  industrious  pupils.  13. 
Miss  Emma  is  the  daughter  of  the  richest  man  in  (de)  this  town. 
14.  I  remained  there  (y)  for  half  an  hour.  15.  The  child 
slept  two  hours  and  a  half.  1G.  I  have  read  the  whole  book,  ex- 
cept the  two  last  chapters.5  17.  The  late  queen  was  opposed6  to 
that  measure.7  18.  Why  do  you  go  barefooted  ?  19.  These  pears 
appear  to  be  ripe. 

1.  Absolu.     2.  Pouvoir,  m.     3.    Cojfre,  m.     4.   Volet,  m.     5.   Ckapitrc,  in.     6. 
tfopposait.    7.  Mesure. 

B.       PLACE    OF    THE   ADJECTIVE. 

The  principal  rules  have  already  been  given  in  the  eighteenth 
Lesson  of  Part  I.  We  have  to  add  here  only  the  following. 

TThcn  two  adjectives  refer  to  the  same  noun,  we  should  examine 
what  kind  of  adjectives  they  are. 

1.  If  both  of  them  are  such  as  precede,  when  single,  they  may 
both  remain  before  the  noun  if  one  of  them  forms  with  the  noun,  as 
it  were,  but  one  idea.  Ex. : 

Une  jolle  petite  file*  a  pretty  little  girl. 

Un  beau  jeune  JiommeJ  a  handsome  young  man. 

» 
*  In  Latin  flliola.  t  Youth  O'uvenis). 


ADJECTIVES.  249 

2.  If  both  preceding  adjectives  are  taken  in  their  full  sense,  they 
must  be  joined  by  et,  and,  as  : 

Un  grand  et  beau  jardin,  a  large,  beautiful  garden. 

3.  An  adjective  usually  placed  before  the  noun,  when  connected 
by  a  conjunction  with  another  adjective  which  is  to  be  put  after  it, 
is  itself  placed  after  the  noun.     Ex. : 

Une  action  belle*  et  courageuse. 
A  fine,  courageous  action. 
Une  femme  petite,  mais  bien  faite. 
A  short  but  well-made  woman. 

4.  In  English,  two  or  more  adjectives  may  qualify  a  substanth1", 
without  a  conjunction ;  but  in  French,  et  (or .  sometimes  mais^  is 
always  placed  before  the  last  of  the  adjectives,  if  these  follow  their 
noun.     Ex. : 

Une  dame  riche,  jeune  et  aimable. 

A  young,  rich,  amiable  lady. 

Un  homme  instruit,  modeste  et  estime'  de  tout  le  monde. 

A  well-instructed,  modest,  and  generally-esteemed  man. 

THEME  10. 

1.  Charles  is  a  handsome  young  man.  2.  Henry  is  a  pretty 
little  boy.  3.  This  is  a  long  (and)  tedious1  book.  4.  My  friend 
is  an  amiable  and  virtuous  man.  5.  He  has  a  large  and  beautiful 
house.  6.  This  is  a  drowned2  man  or  woman.  7.  For  this  place 
I  want  an  aged  man  or  woman.  8.  Is  it^  the  elder  brother  or 
Bister  ?  9.  The  savage  lived  in  a  large,  damp3  cavern.  10.  Spain 
is  a  fertile  country,  but  badly  cultivated.4  11.  A  plain,5  simple, 
and  natural  style  is  the  only  one  to  be  recommended?  12.  Brave 
and  trusty7  men  are  generally  humane8  and  merciful.9  13.  Tliis  is 
an  interesting10  and  instructive  study.11 

1.  Ennuyeuz.    2.  Noyd  e.    3.  ITumide.   4.  Cultive  e.   5.  Uni.   6.  Recommandablc, 
?.  Constant.    8.  Ifumain.    9.  MisAricordieiix.    10.  Interessant.    11.  Etude,  f. 

*  "  A  fine  action  "  would  be,  Une  belle  action. 


250  VIII.      HUITIEME   LEgON. 

C.       COMPLEMENT   OP   ADJECTIVES. 

The  complement  of  an  adjective  is  either  a  substantive  or  a  verb, 
preceded  by  one  of  the  prepositions  de,  a,  en,  etc. 

1.  Adjectives  and  participles  which  denote  plenty,  desire,  scar* 
city  or  want,  and  most  of  those  followed  in  English  by  of,  with  and 
from, govern  in  French  by  means  of  the  preposition  de,  as  : 

La  vie  est  j)leine  de  miseres,  life  is  full  of  miseries. 

Le  jsurx  fomme  fat  comble Khonneurs,  (loaded  with  honors). 

2.  The  following  adjectives  govern  also  by  means  of  de : 

Capable,  capable.  las,  tired,  wearied. 

content,  contented,  pleased.  libre,  free. 

digne,  worthy.  me'content,  discontented. 

exempt,  free.  satisfait,  satisfied. 

honteux,  ashamed.  sur,  sure,  etc. 

jalouxt  jealous. 

Ex. :  H  est  digne  de  recompense,  he  is  worthy  of  reward. 
3.*  Adjectives  denoting  fitness,  unfitness,  disposition,  inclination, 
readiness,  or  any  habit,  require  a  before  the  object.     Ex. : 

H  est  propre  k  tout,  he  is  fit  for  anything. 

Le  cheval  est  utile  a  I'homme,  the  horse  is  useful  to  man. 

NOTE  1 .  The  following  adjectives  are  followed  by  a  in  French  and  of  ia 
English : 

Attentifa,  heedful  of;  sensible  a,  sensible  of;  insensible  a,  insensible  of  or  to. 

Ex. :  Soyez  attentifs  au  danger,  be  heedful  of  (the)  danger. 

Je  suis  sensible  &  votre  bonte",  I  am  sensible  of  your  kindness. 

NOTE  2.  Some  adjectives  are  followed  in  French  by  the  preposition  a, 
and  in  English  by  in ;  such  are : 

Habile  a,  skilful  in.  patient  a,  patient  in, 

exact  a,  punctual  in.  impatient  a,  impatient  in. 

Ex. :  E  est  habile  a  tout,  he  is  skilful  in  doing  all. 

Elh  z£  sxacte  a  son  service,  she  is  punctual  in  her  service. 

4.  The  following  adjectives,  which  are  followed  in  English  by  to 
or  towards  when  they  express  behavior,  require  in  French  the  prop- 
osition envers  : 

*To  this  rule  must  h. 


ADJECTIVES.  251 

Affable  cnvers,  affable  to.  poll  cnvers,  polite  to. 

bon  envers,  (or  pour)  kind  to.  reconnaissant  envers,  thankful  to. 

juste  cnvers,  just  to.  respectueux  envers,  respectful  to. 

cruel  envers,  cruel  to.  gcnereux  envers,  generous  to. 

honnete  envers,  civil  to,  liberal  envers,  liberal  to. 

Ex. :  //  a  et€  tres-bon  envers  moi  (or  pour  71101). 

He  has  been  very  kind  to  me. 

Soyez  poli  envers  tout  le  monde. 

Be  polite  (civil)  to  everybody. 

5.  All  others  not  mentioned  in  the  foregoing  sections,  and  which 
lake  in  English  the  preposition  to,  are  followed  in  French  by  «. 
Ex.: 

That  is  ea*sy  to  say,  cela  cst  facile  a  dire. 

Religion  is  necessary  to  man,  la  religion  est  ne'cessaire  a  Vhomme. 

He  was  deaf  to  my  prayers,  il  etait  sourd  a  mes  prieres. 

THEME    17. 

1.  We  were  loaded1  with  honors.  2.  The  basket2  is  full  of  fruit. 
3,  Do  not  be  so  greedy  of  (after)  riches.  4.  My  cousin  is  worthy 
of  your  friendship.  5.  Are  you  pleased  with  your  horse  ?  6. 
Human  life3  is  never  free  from  troubles.4  7.  Voltaire  was  always 
greedy  of  praise  and  insatiable  of  glory.  8.  I  am  not  satisfied  with 
your  exercise.  9.  That  old  man  is  not  fit  for  that  place ;  he  is  not 
punctual  in  his  engagements.  10.  My  servant  is  always  ready  to 
do  his  duty.5  11.  Nature3  is  content  with  little.  12.  Many 
people  are  dissatisfied  with  their  condition.  13.  Let  us  be  kind  to 
everybody.  14.  These  children  are  inclined6  to  idleness.7  15. 
That  is  easy  to  say,  but  difficult  to  do.  16.  Scipio  Africanus8  was 
respectful  to  his  mother,  liberal  to  his  sisters,  good  to  his  servants, 
just  and  affable  to  everybody.  17.  Children  must9  not  be  cruel  to 
animals.  18.  He  is  insensible  to  all  the  remonstrances10  of  his 
friends. 

1.  Coiribtt.    2.  Le  panier.     3.  Put  the  article.    4.  Peine,  f.     5.  Devoir,  m.     6. 
Enclin.    7.  Paresse,  f.    8.  Scipion  VAfricain.    9.  Doivent.    10.  Remontrance,  f. 

D.      ADJECTIVES   OF   DIMENSION. 

1.  Adjectives  relating  to  the  dimenson  or  size  of  objects  are 
expressed  in  French  either  by  an  adjective  or  a  substantive.  Thus 


252  VIII.      HUITIEME  LEgON. 

long  can  bo  rendered  by  the  adjective  long  or  longue  (f.)  de,  or  by 
the  noun  de  longueur.  Observe  that  in  the  first  case  de  follows,  in 
the  second  precedes,  and  that  these  adjectives  are  placed  after  the 
substantive  and  before  the  dimension.  Ex.  : 


A  *  ui    ±      r    n         7  une  ta^e  tongue  de  dix  pieds. 
A  table  ten  feet  long,  >•  77     .  *         .  ,  %  , 

0  )  une  table  de  dix  pieds  de  longueur. 

wne  towr  Aaute  cfe  cenf  mob. 

,  .  ,  *,  , 

wrte  tour  ae  cent  pieds  de  hauteur. 


.  .  •..-.} 

A  tower  a  hundred  feet  high,  >- 

} 


2.  The  verb  to  be  connected  with  such  adjectives,  must  be  ex- 
pressed by  etre  when,  in  French,  the  adjective  of  dimension  is  pre- 
ferred to  the  noun,  as  : 

This  table  is  ten  feet  long. 
Cette  table  est  longue  de  dix  pieds. 
That  tower  is  a  hundred  feet  high. 
Cette  tour-la  est  haute  de  cent  pieds. 

3.  But  the  verb   to  be  must  be  rendered  by  avoir  when  the 
dimension  is  expressed  by  a  noun.     Ex.  : 

This  table  is  ten  feet  long. 
Cette  table  a  dix  pieds  de  longueur. 
That  tower  is  a  hundred  feet  high. 
Cette  tour-la  a  cent  pieds  de  hauteur. 

4.  In  a  similar  manner   age  is  expressed   either   with   age  de 
and  the  verb  etre,  or  with  the  verb  avoir  without  the  verb  age. 
Ex.: 

A  boy  eight  years  old,  un  garcon  ag(fde  huit  ans. 

T  )  je  suis  an€  de  vingt  ans. 

I  am  twenty  years  old,  >  .,  .    .   J. 

)  j  at  vingt  ans. 

(The  latter  is  much  preferred.) 

5.  The  word  by,  which  is  sometimes  used  in  English  after  a  com- 
parative, to  denote  how  much  a  thing  exceeds  another,  is  rendered 
by  de,  not  by  par.     Ex.  : 

Charles  is  taller  than  I  by  three  inches. 
Charles  est  plus  grand  que  moi  de  trois  ponces. 


ADJECTIVES.  253 

THEME   18. 

1.  I  have  seen  a  tree  ninety  feet  high.  2  We  have  a  house 
eighty  feet  long  and  forty-five  high.  8.  This  stick  is  three  feet 
long.  4.  This  plank1  is  two  inches2  thick.3  5.  This  tree  is  -fifty 
feet  high.  6.  London  bridge4  is  nine  hundred  and  twenty  feet 
long,  fifty-five  high,  and  fifty-six  wide.5  7.  The  monument  of  Lon- 
don stands  (est  place)  on  a  pedestal6  twenty  feet  high.  8.  This 
ditch  is  twelve  feet  deep.7  9.  The  famous  mine  of  Potosi  in  (dans 
le)  Peru  is  more  than  (de)  fifteen  hundred  feet  deep.7  10.  My 
room  is  forty  feet  long  and  thirty  wide.  11.  The  walls  of  Algiers8 
are  fourteen  feet  thick  and  thirty  feet  high.  12.  King  Street9  is 
about10  a  mile11  and  a  half  long  and  sixty-five  feet  wide.  13.  My 
brother  is  elder  than  I  by  two  years.  14.  I  am  taller  than  Robert 
by  seven  inches.  15.  Westminster  bridge  is  forty-four  feet  broad  f 
the  free-way12  under  the  arches  of  this  bridge  is  eight  hundred  and 
seventy  feet ;  it  consists13  of  fourteen  piers,14  thirteen  large  arches, 
and  two  small  ones;  the  two  middle15  piers  are  each  (chacuri)  sev- 
enteen feet  wide,  and  contain  two  hundred  tons16  of  solid  stones. 

1.  Planche,  f.  2.  Pouce,  m,  3.  Epais,  epaisse.  4.  Le  pont  de  Londres.  5, 
Largem — largeur.  6.  Piedestal.  7.  Profondeur.  8.  Alger.  9.  La  rue  royale. 
10.  Environ.  11.  Mille,  m.  12.  The  free- way  =  le  passage.  13.  II  consiste.  14, 
Pile}  f.  15.  Du  milieu.  16.  Tonncau,  m. 


READING  LESSON. 

L'ELEPHANT. 

L'elephant  est  le  plus  gros  des  quadrupedes ;  il  habite  les  forets 
epaisses,1  les  bords  des  fleuves  et  les  lieux  humides.  Ses  jambes 
informes  soutiennent  un  corps  epais  et  lourd.2  On  aper^oit  a  peine 
sa  petite  queue,3  tandis  que  de  larges  orcilles  ombragent4  les  deux 
cotes  de  sa  tete.  Ses  yeux  sont  petits  en  proportion  de  son  corps 
£norme.  Son  nez,  qui  se  prolonge  de  plusieurs  pieds  et  qui  est  tres- 
flexible,  lui  sert  do  main.  A  Faide  de  ce  nez,  qu'on  appelle  trompe,5 
il  puise  (draivs)  de  Feau,  cueille  les  herbcs  et  les  fleurs,  denoue6 
les  eordes,  ouvre  ct  fennc  les  portes,  debouche  les  bouteilles,  ramasse 


254 


VIU.      HUITIEME   LEgON. 


par  tciTO  la  plus  pctito  piece  de  monnaie ;  en  un  mot,  il  fait  presque 
tout  ce  que  nous  faisons  avec  nos  doigts.  Quand  il  a  soif,  il  remplit 
d'eau  cette  trompe,  et  boit  ensuite  cornme  s'il  vidait7  une  bouteille. 
II  se  nourrit  d'herbes,  de  feuilles,  de  fruits  et  de  riz  (rice).  II 
mange  environ  cent  cinquante  livres  d'herbes  par  jour. 

De  chaque  cute  de  sa  trompe  sortent  deux  enormcs  dents  qu'on 
appelle  defenses.  Ccs  defenses  sont  des  armes  terriblcs,  dont  il 
tipouvante8  les  plus  feroces  animaux.  Elles  fournissent  une  matiere 
preeieuse,  qu'on  appelle  ivoire,  et  pesent9  jusqu'a  cent  livres 
chaeune. 

1.  Thick.    2.  Heavy.    3.  Tail.    4.  To  shade,  over- shade.    5.  Trunk  or  proboscis. 
6.  To  untie.    7.  To  empty.    8.  To  terrify.    9.  To  weigh. 


CONVERSATION. 

Que  savez-vous  de  Telepbant  ?      L'elephant  est  le  plus  gros  des 

quadrupedes. 

Od  babite-t-il?  II  habite  les  forets  epaisses,  les 

bords  des  fleuves  et  les  lieux 
bumides. 

Qu'est-cc  qu'il  a  de  particulicr  ?     II  a  une  trompe,  a  Taide  de  la- 

quelle  il  puise  de  Teau,  cueille 
les  berbes  et  les  fleurs,  denouo 
des  cordes,  etc. 
II  se  nourrit  d'herbes,  de  feuilles, 

de  fruits  et  de  riz. 
II  remplit  d'cau  sa  trompe  et  belt 

ensuite. 

Environ  150  livres  d'herbes. 
L 'ivoire  se  fait  des  defenses  de 
Felephant   qui  pesent  jusqu'h 
cent  livres  chacune. 


De  quoi  se  nourritril  ? 
Quand  il  a  soif,  que  fait-il  ? 

Combien  mange-t-il  par  jour  ? 
D'ou  vient  Fivoire  ? 


ONAL  PRONOUNS.  255 


IX.    NEUVIEME    LEgON. 


I.   PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 

(See  Part  L,  L.  XXIV.) 

1.  Conjunctive  pronouns,  in  the  first  and  second  persons,  should 
be  repeated  before  every  verb  in  a  simple  tense.     Ex.:  — 

Je  vous  aime  et  je  vous  aimer  ai  tou  jours. 

I  love  you  and  (I)  shall  always  love  you. 

Vous  dites  et  vous  direz  toujours. 

You  say  and  (you)  will  always  say. 

Je  le  vois  et  je  Ventends. 

I  see  and  hear  it. 

H  nous  ennuie  et  nous  obscde  sans  cesse. 

He  wearies  (us)  and  besets  us  unceasingly. 

NOTE.  With  a  compound  tense,  or  when  the  pronouns  are  in  the  third 
person,  they  are  rarely  repeated,  though  more  frequently  than  in  English, 
as  :  — 

Je  Vai  vu  et  entendu. 

I  have  seen  and  heard  it. 

II  c'coute  et  ne  peut  comprendre,  etc. 
He  listens  and  cannot  conceive,  etc. 

2.  When  an  emphasis  is  laid  upon  the  personal  pronoun,  it  must 
be  repeated  in  French,  but  then  ;  the  first  is  disjunctive.     Very  of- 
ten it  is  then  preceded  by  c'est,  or  for  the  third  person  plural,  by  ce 
sont.     Ex.  :  — 

<  moiy  je  le  dis. 
I  say  so,  |  jegtnuritquiledis. 

f  lult  il  a  pr&endu  cela. 
He  has  pretended  this,  j 


(nous  n'avons  pas  dit  cela,  nous. 
We  have  not  said  so,      j  mm>  ^  n>amns        ^  ^ 

It  is  not  we  who  said  so,  ^  ^  ^  pas  nmls  qu{  avms  du  cefa 


256  IX.      NEUVIEME 


<  eux,  Us  Vont  fait. 
They  have  done  it,  j  CQ  ^  ^  qu  . 


NOTE.  Observe  that  in  such  cases  the  verb  is  put  in  the  same  numbet 
and  person  as  the  pronoun  which  is  the  antecedent  of  the  relative  qui, 
as  :  — 

Is  it  I  who  told  this  news  ? 

Est-ce  moi  qui  ai  dit  cette  nouvdle  ? 

3.  When  a  verb  relates  to  subjects  of  different  persons,  it  is  put 
in  the  plural  with  nous,  if  one  of  the  several  subjects  is  in  the  first 
person,  —  or  with  vous,  if  the  subjects  are  in  the  second  and  third 
persons.     Ex.:  — 

My  brother  and  I  shall  go  into  the  country. 
Mon  frere  et  moi,  nous  irons  a  la  campagm,  or, 
Nous  irons  a  la  campagne,  mon  frere  et  moi. 
I  told  you  and  him  or  both  you  and  him. 
Je  vous  I'ai  dit  a  toi  et  a  lai. 
You  and  your  friend  will  come  with  me. 
Vous  et  votre  ami,  vous  viendrez  avec  moi. 

4.  When  the  verb  governs  two  pronouns  (both  being  persons) 
one  in  the  Direct  Objective,  the  other  in  the  Indirect,  the  Indirect 
is  a  disjunctive  (see  p.  110).    Ex.:  — 

Je  vais  vous  presenter  a  lui. 

I  am  going  to  introduce  you  to  him. 

5.  A  personal  pronoun,  used  as  subject,  may  follow  the  verb 
after  aussi,  peut-etre,  encore,  toujours,  en  vain,  du  moins,  or  au 
mo  ins. 

TUE3IE  19. 

1.  I  believe  and  shall  always  believe  that  you  were  {avez  cu) 
wrong.  2.  He  says  so,  but  he  does  not  believe  it.  3.  I  honor 
and  respect  him,  but  I  do  not  love  him.  4.  We  come  and  go.  5. 
A  passionate1  temper2  renders  a  man  unfit3  for  business,4  deprives1 
him  of  his  reason,  and  makes  him  unfit  (makes  that  he  is  not  fit) 
(propre)  for  society.4  6.  I  have  always  loved  and  esteemed  her. 
7.  They  (on)  flatter6  and  praise  us.  8.  It  is  I  who  have  written  it. 


PERSONAL   PBONOUNS.  257 

&  It  is  they  who  have  seen  it.      10.  They  and  my  brother  have 
come.     1 1    You  like  the  town  and  I  the  country. 

3.  Passionne'.    2.  Caractere.    3.  Inepte.    4.  Tut  the  definite  article.    5.  Friver. 
6,  Flatter. 

0.    "\Vhen  two  personal  pronouns  limit  a  verb,  both  should  be  dis- 
junctive, and  therefore  after  the  verb.     Ex.:  — 

I  forgive  both  you  and  her. 
Je  pardonne  a  vous  et  a  elle.* 

I  speak  to  him  and  not  to  you. 
Je  parle  a  lid  et  non  a  vous. 

7.  The  pronouns  himself,  herself,  themselves,  when  with  a  re- 
flective verb,  are  expressed  in  French  by  se  ;  otherwise  by  lui-meme, 
elle-meme,  eux-memes,  elles-memes.     Ex.:  — 

He  (she)  does  not  know  himself  (herself). 

II  (die)  ne  se  connait  pas. 

They  highly  distinguished  themselves. 
Us  (dies)  se  distinguerent  beaucoup.    But : 

Has  he  done  it  himself?    Yes,  himself. 
L'a-t-il  fait  lui-meme  ?     Oui,  lui-meme. 

8.  Soi,  self,  is  of  both  genders,  and  is  used  of  things  as  well  as 
of  persons.     Ex.:  — 

II  est  sage  de  parler  rarement  de  soi. 
It  is  :wise  to  talk  seldom  of  one's  self. 

9.  The  pronoun  itself,  preceded  by  a  preposition  and  relating  to 
an  inanimate  object,  is  expressed  by  soi,  when  the  'antecedent  noun 
is  taken  in  an  abstract  sense.     Ex.:  — 

L'aimant  attire  le  fer  a  soi. 
The  loadstone  attracts  iron  to  itself. 
La  vertu  est  aimable  en  soi. 
Virtue  is  amiable  in  itself. 


*  Tliis  sentence  may  better  be  translated  thus :  Je  vous  pardonne  ainsi  qu'a  die, 
and  the  following,  c'est  a  vous  que  je  parle,  etc. 


258  IX.      NEUVIEME  LEgON. 

10.    But  it  is  rendered  by  ette,  when  the  inanimate  object  is  of  an 
individual  nature  and  of  the  feminine  gender.     Ex.:  — 
La  riviere  entraina  tout  avec  elle. 
The  river  carried  everything  away  with  itself. 

Ces  raisons  sont  solides  en  elles-memes. 
Those  reasons  are  solid  in  themselves. 

11.  The  English  personal  pronouns  are  always  rendered  by 
the  disjunctive  (moi,  toi,  lui,  etc.),  when  they  are  used  alone,  or 
when  after  a  preposition  or  after  que,  than.     Ex. :  — 
Qui  a  fait  cela  ?    Moi,  lui,  die,  etc. 
Who  has  done  that  ?    I,  he,  she,  etc. 
Voulez-vous  oiler  avec  moi,  avec  lui,  avec  eux  f  etc. 
Will  you  go  with  me,  with  him,  with  them  ?  etc. 
Je  parle  de  toi,  d'elle,  d'elles,  de  vous,  etc. 
I  am  speaking  of  thee,  of  her,  of  them,  of  you,  etc. 
H  est  phis  jeune  que  moi. 
He  is  younger  than  I. 

THEME  20. 

1.  I  speak  to  you  and  to  him.  2.  I  forgive  [both]  you  and  him, 
because  I  hope  (that)  you  will  behave1  better  for  the  future  (a  Vave- 
nir).  3.  The  governor  is  your  enemy;  if  you  apply2  to  him,  you 
will  never  succeed.3  4.  I  do  not  trust4  (to)  him,  but  I  should  trust 
(to)  his  brother.  5.  That  man  works  for  himself.  G.  Each  acts 
for  himself.  7.  If  you  do  this  for  him  and  for  her,  you  will  greatly 
oblige  me.  8.  One  ought  not5  [to]  speak  of  one's  self,  unless  (qur) 
with  modesty.  9.  That  man  is  too  proud ;  he  does  not  know  him- 
self. 10.  The  moon  brought6  a  change7  of  weather. 

1.  Seconduire.    2.  S'addrsser  a  qn.    3.  K&issir.    4.  Sefieraqn.  5.  Onnedmi 
pas*    6.  Amena.    7.  Changement,  m. 


H.    PARTICULAR  USE  OF  EN  AND   Y. 

1.  The  pronouns  it  and  them,  used  with  regard  to  inanimate 
objects,  are  rendered  by  en,  when  the  French  verb  requires  de 
before  an  object  which  follows,  whatever  preposition  may  be 


used  in  English.     Ex. :  — 


PERSONAL   PRONOUNS.  259 

A-t-on  parle*  de  mon  ouvrage  ?     Om,  on  en  a  parle~. 
Did  they  speak  of  my  work  ?    Yes,  they  spoke  of  it. 
Vous  m'avez  rendu  service.    Je  vous  en  remercie. 
You  have  done  me  a  service.    I  thank  you  for  it. 

2.  En  is  further  used  to  express  the  words  some  and  any,  "when 
tliey  como  after  a  verb,  and  supply  the  place  of  an  antecedent  sul>  < 
stantive,  as  :  — 

Void  du  jambon ;  en  veux-tu  ?    Donncz-m'en,  s'il  vous  plait. 

Here  is  ham,  will  you  have  some  ?     Give  me  some,  if  you  please, 

J'ai  des  noix,  en  voulez-vous  ?    Donnez-m'en  trois. 

I  have  some  walnuts ;  will  you  have  any  ?     Give  me  three  of  them. 

Donnez-lui-en,  give  him  some. 

Offrez-leur-en,  offer  them  some. 

NOTE.  Observe  1,  that  when  used  with  another  personal  pronoun,  en  fol- 
lows that  pronoun ;  and  2,  that,  in  the  affirmative  Imperative,  moi  and  tci 
are  changed  into  m'  and  t'  before  en,  as :  donnez-m'en. 

3.  T" stands  for  in  it,  into  it,  at  it,  to  it,  there,  and,  with  the 
verb  penser,  for  of  it,  about  it,  of  them.     Like  the  other  conjunc- 
tive pronouns,  it  is  placed  immediately  before  the  verb,  except  with 
the  affirmative  Imperative,  where  it  follows  it.*     Ex.:  — 

Votre  pere  est-il  an  jardln  ?     Oui,  il  y  est. 

Is  your  father  in  the  garden  ?    Yes,  he  is  in  it  (there). 

Allez-vous  ait  spectacle  $    Non,  Monsieur,  je  n'y  vais  pas. 

Are  you  going  to  the  theatre  ?    No,  sir,  I  am  not. 

Y  pensez-vous  ?    Je  n'y  pense  plus. 

Do  you  think  of  it  ?     I  do  no  more  think  of  it. 

Allez-y,  go  there. 

N'y  allez  pas,  do  not  go  there. 

NOTE.   Y  must  always  refer  to  an  antecedent. 

*  Except  moi  and  toi  which  follow  the  word  ?/,  with  the  affirmative  Imperative, 
as :  Canduisez-y-moi,  rends-y-toi  (go  there),  whereas  we  say :  Conduisez-nous-y. 
When  both  en  and  y  happen  to  be  governed  by  the  same  verb,  y  stands  before  en. 
Ex.:  Jevous  y  enporterai,  I  will  bring  you  some  there.  But  conduisez-moi  l&is 
preferable  to  conduisez-y-moi. 


260  IX.      NEUVIEMB   LEgON. 

THEME  21. 

1.  We  speak  of  it.  2.  You  speak  of  them.  3.  I  am  sorry  for 
it.  4.  I  have  heard  that  your  uncle  has  arrived,  and  I  am  very 
glad  of  it.  5.  She  spoke  to  him  of  it.  6.  Talk1  no  more  of  it,  for 
I  will  not.  hear  of  it.  7.  Have  you  [any]  books?  8.  Yes,  I  have. 
*  9.  Have  you  bought  some  flowers?  10.  Yes,  I  have  bought  some. 
11.  Give  me  three  of  them,  if  you  please.  12.  You  have  bread, 
give  some  to. the  poor.  13.  I  thank  you  for  it.  14.  Do  not  thank 
me  for  it.  15.  I  study  that  language,2  I  know  its  rules  well. 
16.  Since3  you  have  no  apples  in  your  garden,  I  will  send  you 
some.  17.  If  I  had  money,  I  would  give  you  some.  18.  Send 
us  some.  19.  Send  me  none.  20.  Mr.  A.  is  a  true*  friend ;  I 
shall  never  forget  the  services  which  I  have  received*  from  him. 
21.  Is  your  father  in  his  garden?  22.  Yes,  he  is  (in  it).  23. 
Do  you  agree5  to  it?  24.  Yes,  I  agree  to  it.  25.  Have  you6  just 
returned  from  the  country?  26.  No,  I  am  going  there.  27.  We 
shall  think  of  it.  28.  We  have  forced7  them  to  it.  29.  There  is 
a  ditch,8  take  care9  not  to  fall  into  it.  30.  Our  orchard10  is  very 
fruitful,  we  see  all  sorts11  of  fruits  in  it.  31.  It  is  (c^est)  a  good 
book,  one  (on)  reads  excellent  things  in  it. 

1.  Parlef.   2.  Langue,f.   3.  Puisque.   4.  Requ.   5.  Consentir.   6.  Revenez-vous  ? 
7.  Forces.    8.  Un  fosse.    9.  Prenez  garde,    ID.  Verger.    11.  Tsutes  sortes  de. 


III.     THE   SUPPLYING  PBONOUNS  LE,  LA,  LES. 

1.  The  pronouns  le,  la,  les  are  used  in-  French  to  supply  the 
place  of  an  antecedent  substantive  or  adjective,  or  of  a  phrase.     In 
such  case,  their  equivalent  in  English  is  so  or  it,  either  expressed  or 
understood. 

2.  When  le  refers  to  a  noun  with  the  definite  article  or  possessive 
adjective,  it  takes  the  gender  and  number  of  that  noun.     Ex. :  — 

Etes-vous  la  mere  de  ces  enfants.     Oui,  je  la  suis. 
Are  you  the  mother  of  these  children  ?    Yes,  I  am. 
Mesdemoisdles,  etes-vous  les  nieces  de  Madame  B.  ?     Oui,  Madame,  nous  les 
sofiimes 


PERSONAL   PHONOUN3.  261 

Ladies,  are  you  Mrs.  B.'s  niecos  ?    Yes,  madarae,  we  are. 
Sont-ce  la  vos  domestiques  ?     Oui,  ce  les  sont. 
Are  those  your  servants  ?    Yes,  they  are.   . 
Sont-ce  la  vos  gants  neufs  ?    Non,  ce  ne  les  sont  pas. 
Are  those  your  new  gloves  ?    No,  they  are  not. 

3.  But  when  le  supplies  the  place  of  an  adjective,  of  a  noun 
used  adjectively,  or  of  a  phrase,  it  remains  unchanged.     Ex. :  — 

Depuis  quand  etes-vous  malade  ?    Je  le  suis  depuis  huit  jours. 
How  long  have  you  been  ill  1    I  have  been  (so)  these  eight  days. 
Ces  dames  sont-elles  rnariees  ?     Out,  dies  le  sont 
Are  these  ladies  married  1    Yes,  they  are  (it  or  so). 
Etes-vous  chr^tiens  ?     Out,  nous  le  sommes. 
Are  you  Christians  ?     Yes,  we  are. 
//  le  fern,  s'il  le  peut,  he  will  do  it,  if  he  can. 

NOTE.  Le,  la,  les  must  be  used  (§  2)  when  the  adjective  is  used  substan- 
tively,  as : 

Mademoiselle,  etes-vous  la  malade  ?     Out,  je  la  suis. 
Miss,  are  you  the  sick  one  ?    Yes,  I  am  (she). 

4.  Le  should  also  be  inserted  in  sentences  containing  a  compara- 
tive, after  que  —  ne,  as : 

Jl  est  maintenant  plus  actif  qu'il  ne  V&ait  auparavant. 
He  is  now  more  active  than  he  was  before. 
Elle  est  moins  riche  qu'on  ne  le  pense. 
She  is  not  so  rich  as  one  would  think. 

THEME   22. 

1.  Is  that  your  book  ?  2.  Yes,  it  is.  3.  Are  those  your  books? 
4.  Yes,  they  are.  5.  Are  you  the  mistress  of  the  house  ?  6.  No, 
I  am  not.  7.  Are  these  boys  the  pupils  of  Mr.  M.  ?  8.  Yes,  they 
are.  9.  Are  you  my  friend's  sisters?  10.  Yes,  we  are.  11.  You 
want  some  men  of  good  will?1  12.  We  are  all  so.  13.  Are  these 
your  horses?  14.  Yes,  they  are.  15.  Are  the  brothers  rich?  16. 
No,  they  are  not.  17.  Are  the  house  and  garden  large?  18. 
Yes,  they  are.  19.  Is  not  this  pretty  girl  your  gardener ?s 
daughter  ?  20.  Yes,  madam,  she  is.  21.  We  need2  only  think 
ourselves  happy,  and  we  shall  be  so.  22.  Young  ladies,  are  you 
English?  23.  Yes,  we  are.  24.  Are  you  physicians  ?  25.  Yes, 


262  IX.      NEUVIEME  LEgON. 

sir,  we  are.  26.  Are  you  the  physicians?  27.  Yes,  sir,  wo  are. 
28.  Is  he  sad?3  29.  No,  he  is  not.  30.  Is  she  rich?  31.  Yes, 
she  is.  32.  Are  those  gentlemen  brothers?  33.  Yes,  they  are, 
34.  Are  you  still  ray  friend?  35.  Yes,  I  am.  36.  Are  you  the 
sister  of  Mrs.  A.  ?  37.  Yes,  I  am.  38.  Are  you  the  ladies  whom 
my  mother  expects  ?  39.  Yes,  we  are.  40.  Because  she  is  pretty, 
she  must  not  imagine4  that  she  will  always  be  so.  41.  We  were 
embarrassed,5  and  are  so  yet  (encore).  42.  Children  ought  to 
(doivent)  apply8  themselves  to  their  studies  as  much  as  they  can. 

1.  De  bonne  volonte.    2.  Nous  rtavons  qu'a  nous  croire.    3.  Triste.    4.  II  nefaut 
pas  qu'elle  sHmagine.    5.  Embarrasses.    C.  S'appliquer. 


READING  LESSON. 
L'ELEPIIANT.     ( Continuation.) 

L'elephant  vit  (lives)  au  dela  de  cent  cinquante  ans,  quand  il 
est  libre.  Ces  animaux  marchent  ordinairement  de  compagnie ;  le 
plus  age  conduit  la  troupe  ;  le  second  d'age  marche  le  dernier ;  les 
jeunes  et  les  femelles  sont  au  milieu  des  autres ;  les  meres  portent 
leurs  petits  et  les  tiennent  embrasses  de  leurs  trompes. 

L'elephant  dompte1  est  le  plus  doux  et  le  plus  patient  de  tous 
les  animaux.  II  s'attache  a  celui  qui  le  soigne ; 2  il  le  caresse,  efc 
semble  deviner3  tout  ce  qui  peut  lui  plaire.  En  peu  de  temps  il 
comprend  les  signes  et  meme  la  parole.  II  re9oit  les  ordrcs  de  son 
maitre  avec  attention  et  les  execute  avec  prudence.  Un  Elephant 
domestique  rend  autant  de  service  que  six  bons  chevaux. 

Us  ne  cassent  rien  de  ce  qu'on  leur  confie.  Us  posent  doucement 
los  paquets  qu'ils  portent,  et  les  rangent  dans  1'endroit4  qu'on  leur 
montre.  Us  essaient  avec  leurs  trompes  flexibles,  s'ils  sont  bion  si- 
tues,  et  quand  un  tonneau5  commence  a  rouler,  ils  vont  d'eux-memes 
chercher  des  pierres  pour  Tetablir  solidement. 

1.  To  tome.    2.  To  take  care.    3.  To  guess.    4.  Place.    5.  Cask. 


INTERROGATIVE   PRONOUNS. 


263 


CONVERSATION. 


Quel  age  I'&ephant  atteint-il  ? 
Se  laisse-t-il  dompter? 


L'dlephant  est>il  intelligent  ? 
Se  rend-il  utile  aux  homines  ? 


Les  elephants  sont~ils  maladroits 
(awkward)  ? 

Quo  font-ils   quand  un   tonneau 
commence  a,  rouler  ? 


Ilvit  au  dela  de  150  ans. 
Oui;  et  quand  il  est  dompte',  il 

est  le  plus  doux  de  tous  les 

animaux. 
Tres-intelligent ;    il     comprend 

les  signes  et  memo  la  parole. 
Tin  seul  elephant  rend  autant 

de  service  quo  six  bons  che- 

vaux. 
Non,  pas  du  tout ;  ils  ne  cas- 

sent  rien  de  ce  qu'on  lour 

confie. 
Us  vont  chercher  des  pierres 

pour  Fetablir  solidement. 


X.    DIXIBME    LEgON. 


INTERROGATIVE    PKONOUNS. 

See  Part  I.,  Lesson  xxv. 

In  regard  to  the  interrogative  pronouns  lequel  ?  qui  ?  que  ?  and  quoi  ?  the 
bllowing  observations  are  to  be  made :  — 

1.  Lequel ',  which?  always  refers  to  some  noun  either  preceding 
or  immediately  following,  and  agrees  with  it  in  gender  and  number. 
Ex.:  — 

Void  deux  routes,  laquelle  prendrez-vous  ? 
Here  are  two  routes ;  which  will  you  take  ? 
Lesquds  de  vos  souliers  sont  dechirts  ? 
Which  of  your  shoes  are  worn  out  1 


264  X.      DIXIEME 

NOTE.   The  interrogative  adjective  what  joined  to  a  noun  is  always  ex- 
pressed by  quel,  f.  quelle.    Ex. :  — 

What  book  do  you  read  ?  qud  Hvre  lisez-vous  ? 
What  are  your  reasons  ?  quelles  sont  vos  raisons  ? 

2.  The  interrogative  pronouns  who  ?  whose  ?  to  whom  ?  whom  ? 
are  expressed  by  qui  ?  de  qui  ?  (not  dont  ?  )  a  qui  ?  and  for  the 
objective  qui?  (que  as  an  interrogative  means  what,  never  whom). 
Ex.:  — 

Who  comes  ?  qui  vient  ? 

Of  whom  do  you  speak  ?  de  grt«  parlez-vous  ? 

Whom  do  you  seek  ?  gw"  cherchez-vous  ? 

3.  Instead  of  the  simple  qui?  the  form  gm  esl-ci  qui,  who?  is 
often  used  for  the  Nom.,  and  qui  est-ce  que,  whom?  for  the  Dir. 
Obj.     Ex. :  — 

Qui  est-ce  qui  vient  la,  who  comes  there  ? 

Qui  est-ce  que  vous  clierchez,  whom  are  you  looking  for  ? 

4.  The  same  is  the  case  with  que  ?  for  which  qu*  est-ce  qui  ?  is 
often  used  in  the  Nona.,  and  qu' est-ce  que  ?  in  the  Dir.  Obj.     The 
latter  has  a  still  stronger  form,  qu 'est-ce  que  c'est  que     .  .  ?     This 
compound  form  is  generally  used  in  the  expression  what  is  that  ? 
and  also  when  a  simple  noun  follows,  e.  g.  :  — 

Qu' est-ce  que  cela  ?  ")  . 

Qu'est-ce  que  c'est  que  cela  ?  ) 

Qu' est-ce  que  la  vie  ?  ) 

,      .  0  >•  what  is  life  ? 
Qu  est-ce  que  c  est  que  la  vie  ?  ) 

5.  The  pupil  must  be  careful,  however,  not  to  confound  qui  est- 
ce  qui,  who  ?  with  qu' est-ce  qui,  what  ?     The  latter  is  used  for  the 
wanting  Nominative  of  the  conjunctive  pronoun  que.     We  gay  :  — • 

„  7  qui  est-ce  qui  vous  a  offense'? 
Who  has  offended  you  !  >•     . 

)  qui  vous  a  offense^? 

Whereas : 

What  (Nom. )  makes  you  so  sad  ? 

Qu'est-ce  qui  vous  rend  si  triste  ? 

^rr,    A  „  7  qu' est-ce  que  vous  faites  la  ? 

What  are  you  doing  there  !  >  *       - .. 

)  que  faites  vous  la  ? 

What  is  the  news  1  j  ^  *^  *»«««"  ? 

3  qu  est-ce  qu  it  y  a  de  nouveau  ? 


INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS. 


\ 

\ 


6.  Qtw,  what?  as  the  conjunctive  form,  can  only  be  used  before 
the  verb  or  in  close  connection  with  it;  but  the  disjunctive  form 
quoi,  what?  stands  either  alone  or  after  a  preposition,  or  is  even 
used  as  an  interjection.     Ex. :  — 

Vous  cherchez  quelque  chose  ;  quoi  done  ? 
You  are  looking  for  something ;  what  is  it  ? 
A  quci  pense-t-il,  of  what  does  he  think  ? 
De  quoi  parle-t-on,  of  what  do  people  talk  ? 
Quoi  !  vous  etes  marie'!  what !  you  are  married  ! 
NOTE.    Quoi  is  also  used  instead  of  qu'y  a-t-il ,  as :  — 
Quoi  de  plus  magnifique  qu'une  belle  nuit  d'ete!   (instead  of  qu'y-  a-t-il  de 
plus  magnifique  !) 
What  is  there  more  splendid  than  a  beautiful  summer's  night  ? 

7.  In  antithetical  questions  with  or  (as  you  or  /?),  the  French 
usage  departs  very  widely  from  the  English,  inasmuch  as  the  con- 
trasted persons  or  objects,  instead  of  standing  in  the  Nominative 
as  in  English,  usually  follow  de.     Ex. :  — 

Qui  de  vous  ou  de  moi  remportera  le  prix  ? 
Who  will  take  the  prize,  you  or  I  ? 
Qui  a  &€le  plus  applique  de  toi  ou  d'Emile  ?  or 
Qui  de  toi  ou  d'Emile  a  &€le  plus  applique*? 
Who  has  been  the  most  diligent,  you  or  Ernile  ? 

8.  De  may  be  omitted,  however,  when  two  or  more  ou's  occur, 
and  also  when  de  or  des  with  lequel  precedes.     Ex. :  — 

LaqueHedexdeux  nations  &ait  la  plus  vertueuse,  les  Grecs  ou  les  Romains  ? 
Which  of  the  two  nations  was  the  more  virtuous,  the  Greeks  or  the 
Romans  ? 

THEME   23. 

1.  Which  of  your  brothers  is  married  ?  2.  Which  of  your  sisters 
has  (est)  gone  to  England  ?  3.  Of  all  these  pictures,  which  should 
you  like  best  ? l  4.  Which  of  your  daughters  learns  Italian  ?  2  5. 
Here  are  two  pencils  ;  which  will  you  take  ?  6.  What  countries 
did  Alexander  the  Great  conquer  ?  8  7.  What  are  your  terms  ?  4  8. 
Who  goes  there  ?  9.  To  whom  do  you  speak  ?  10.  For  whom  does 
a  miser5  hoard0  riches?7  11.  Who  will  be  bold8  enough  to  attack 
him  ?  12.  Who  are  these  women  ?  13.  Whose 9  gloves  are  these  ? 


266  X.      DIXIEME  LECON. 

14.  Here  are  two  grammars ;  to  which  do  you  give  tlio  preference  K 

15.  Who  sustains10  this  globe  in  the  air?     16.  What  is  more  pleas- 
ant  than  to  do  good?11     17.  What  is  human  life?      18.  What 
should  prevent12  your  father  from  buying  (cl* acheter)  this  house? 
19.  A  little  more  fame,13  a  little  more  wealth,  —  what  does  all  this 
signify?14     20.  What  are  you  speaking  of?     21.  Of  what  do  you 
accuse  me?     22.   On  (sur)  what  will  you  interrogate15  him ?     23. 
What !    Charles  has  been  arrested  ! 16     24.  Which  of  you  has  been 
sick,  Emily  or  Emma  ?     25.  Which  was  the  greatest  man,  Alexan- 
der, Caesar,  or  Napoleon  the  First  ? 

1.  Lemieux.  2.  Put  the  article.  3.  Tut  has  conquered,  a  conquis.  4.  Condition, 
f.  5.  L'avare,  m.  6.  Amasser.  7.  JKichesse.  8.  Hardi.  9.  See  p  2G4,  $  2,  2,  &  qui. 
10.  Soutenir.  11.  Du  Men.  12.  Empeclier.  13.  Gloire.  14.  Signifier.  15.  Inter- 
roger.  10.  Arrtte, 


BEADING  LESSON.* 
SERVILIUS    SE  DEFEND   DEYANT   LE   PEUPLE. 

"  Si  Ton  m'a  fait  venir  ici  pour  me  demander  compte1  de  ce  qui 
s'est  passe  dans  la  derniere  bataillo  ou  je  commandais,  je  suis  pret 
&  vous  en  instruire ;  mais  si  ce  n'est  qu'un  pretexte  pour  me  faire 
perir,  comme  je  le  soupgonne,2  epargnez-moi3  des  parole-s  inutiles : 
voila  mon  corps  et  ma  vie  que  je  vous  abandonne,  vous  pouvez  en 
disposer. 

"Quel  est  done  mon  crime?  Quelle  faute  ai-je  commise  jus- 
qu'ici?  On  m'accuse  d'avoir  perdu  beaucoup  de  monde  dans  le  der- 
nier combat.  Mais  *quel  est  le  general  qui  puisse  livrer  des  ba- 
tailles  contre  une  nation  aguerrie,4  qui  se  defend  courageusement, 
sans  qu'il  y  ait  de  part  et  d'autre5  du  sang  de  repandu  ?  Quelle  di- 
vinite  s'est  engagee  envers  le  peuple  remain,  a  lui  faire  remporter 
des  victoires  sans  aucune  pcrte  ? 6  A  qui  fera-t-on  croire  que  la 
gloire  s'acquiert7  autrement  que  par  de  grands  perils  ?  J'en  suis 

*The  Conversation  on  tliis  Heading  Lesson  will  be  found  at  the  end  of  the  fol- 
lowing lesson. 


RELATIVE   PRONOUNS.  267 

venu  aux  mains  avec  des  troupes  plus  noinbreuses  quo  celles  que 
vous  m'aviez  confiees ;  j'ai  mis  en  deroute  leurs  legions,  qui,  a  la 
fin,  ont  pris  la  fuite.  Que  me  restait-il  a  faire  ?  Qui  d'entre  voug 
cut  pu  se  refuser  a  la  victoire  qui  marcliait  devant  moi  ?  Etait-il 
meme8  en  mon  pouvoir  de  retenir  vos  soldats,  que  leur  courage  ern- 
portait,  et  qui  poursuivaient  avec  ardeur  un  ennemi  efiraye  ?  Que 
dis-je?  Si  j'avais  fait  sonner9  la  retraite,  si  j'avais  ramene  nos 
soldats  dans  leur  camp,  de  quoi  ne  m'accuserait-on  pas  aujourd'hui  ? 
Lequel  de  vos  tribuns  aurait  approuvre  ma  conduite  ?  Ne  m'accu- 
Bcraient-ils  pas  d'inteUigence  avec  les  ennemis  ?  " 

1.  Account.    2.  Suspect.    3.  Spare.  4.  "Warlike.    5.  On  both  sides.    6.  LOBS.    7^ 
Can  be  gained,    8.  Even.    9.  To  sound. 


XI.    ONZIEME    LEgON. 


RELATIVE  PRONOUNS. 
( See  Part  I.,  L.  XXIV.) 

1.  The  relative  pronouns  who,  which  and  that  are  rendered  by 
q  ui,  when  they  are  inv  the  Nominative  case,  whether  they  refer  to 
persons  or  things,  as  :  — 

The  man  who  works,  Vliomme  qui  travaille. 
The  pen  which  is  on  the  table. 
La  plume  qui  est  sur  la  table. 

2.  The  same  pronouns  when  in  the  Direct  Objective,  whom, 
which,  that,  are  expressed  by  que,  as  :  — 

The  man  whom  you  know,  I'homme  que  vous  connaissez. 

The  book  which  I  have  lost,  le  livre  que  j'ai  perdu. 

NOTE.  Sometimes,  however,  lequel  must  be  employed  instead  of  qui  or 
que,  when  by  the  use  of  the  latter  an  ambiguity  might  arise.  In  such  a 
case  as  this  for  instance  :  Le  frere  de  Madame  Lebeau  qui  lidbite  Paris, 
where  two  persons  being  mentioned,  it  would  be  doubtful  whether  we  mean 


268  XI.      ONZ1EME  LEgON. 

to  say  that  the  brother  or  the  lady  lives  in  Paris.    In  the  first  case,  we 
must  say :  — 

Le  frere  de  Mad.  Lebcau  lequel  halite  Paris, 
or  if  the  lady  is  meant : 

Le  frere  de  Mad.  Leleau  laquelle  or  qui  halite  Paris. 
For  the  latter  of  the  two  persons  qui  can  generally  be  used. 

3.  When  the  relative  pronouns  whom  or  which  follow  a  preposi- 
tion, they  are  usually  expressed  by  qui  in  speaking  of  persons,"* 
and  by  lequel  or  laquelle  (pi.  lesquels,  lesquelles)  in  speaking  of 
animals  and  things,  as  :  — 

The  little  boy  to  whom  I  give  the  book,  is  diligent. 

Le  petit  garcon  a  qui  je  donne  le  livre,  est  applique'. 

The  Englishman  with  whom  I  travelled. 

L' Anglais  avec  qui  fai  voyage". 

The  glory  to  which  heroes  sacrifice,  etc. 

La  gloire  a  laquelle  les  htfros  sacrifient,  etc. 

The  cane  with  which  he  struck  me,  etc. 

La  canne  avec  laquelle  il  m'afrappe',  etc. 

4.  The  relative  pronouns  whose,  of  whom  or  of  which  are  com- 
monly expressed  in  French  by  dont,  both  for  persons  and  for  ob- 
jects, as  :  — 

The  Frenchman  whose  brother  arrived  yesterday. 
Le  Francais  dont  le  frere  est  arnve'hier  (see  L.  III.,  12). 
I  have  seen  the  garden  of  which  you  speak. 
•Tai  vu  le  jardin  dont  vous  paiiez. 

5.  But  lequel  must  be  employed  when  the  noun  which  follows 
whose  is  governed  by  a  preposition. 

We  can  consequently  say :  — 

The  man  whose  merits  are  known. 
L'homjne  dont  les  me'rites  (Nom.)  sont  connus. 
The  author  whose  works  you  have  read. 

*  After  entre,  between,  andparmi,  among,  we  must  always  write  lesquels  or  les- 
qzcelles  whether  persons  or  things  be  spoken  of. 


RELATIVE   PRONOUNS.  2G9 

L'auteurdont  vous  avez  lu  les  ouvrages  (Dir.  Obj.).* 
Bat  we  must  say: 

The  man  of  whose  modesty  people  talk  so  much. 
L'homme  de  la  modestie  duquel  on  parle  tant. 
The  friend  to  whose  honesty  I  have  trusted,  has  deceived  me. 
L'ami  a  la  probite*  duquel  je  me  suis  fie,  m'a  tromp€. 

0.  The  relative  pronouns  whom,  which,  and  that,  are  often  left 
out   in  English,  but  in  French  qui  and  que  are   never  omitted. 
Example :  — 

The  boy  I  saw  with  you  yesterday. 

Le  gar son  que  fai  vu  hier  avec  vous. 

I  shall  send  you  the  books  you  have  chosen. 

Je  vous  enverrai  les  livres  que  vous  avez  choisis. 

THEME   24. 

1.  The  man  who  has  done  this  is  generally1  esteemed.     2.  The 
flocks2  which  graze3  in  those  meadows4  are  mine  (a  moi).     3.  The 
watch  which  I  had  is  broken.    4.  The  books  which  you  read  are  good, 
but  difficult5  to  be  understood.     5.  The  sister  of  my  friend  who.  ar- 
rived here  last  week,  is  very  ill.     6.  The  physician's  daughter  of 
whom  I  spoke  to  you  the  other  day,  has  married  Mr.  B.     7.  A  Lird 
whose  wings  have  been  clipped,6  cannot  fly  any  more.     8.  Bees7 
among  which  we  find  such  admirable  order,8  are  very  useful  insects. 
9.  The  professor9  to  whom  I  write,  is  very  learned.      10.  The  man 
you  respect  is  my  friend.     11.  Idleness  is  a  vice  to  which  young 
people  are  much  inclined.     12.  The  country  we  inhabit10  is  beauti- 
ful arid  fruitful.     13.  The  reasons  upon  which  I  rely,11  are  unan- 
swerable.12    14.  Mr.  B.  is  a  man  to  whose  discretion  I  dare13  not 
trust.     15.  Ho  who  gets14  riches,  knows  not  for  whom  he  gets 
them.     16.  The  daughter  of  Minos  gave  a  thread15  to  Theseus,16  by 
means   (au  may  en)    of   which  he   went   out17   of  the   labyrinth 
(le  labyrinthe). 

*  Observe  here  the  position  of  the  noun.    If  the  word  depending  upon  dont  is  a 
Direct  Objective,  it  must  stand  after  the  active  verb. 


XI.      ONZIEMB 

I. ,  CMnfrdtement.    2.  Troupeau,  m.    3.  Paitre,  (see  p.  178,  No.  25).    4.  Pr 
£,    5.  Z>f0cfei  a  comprendre.     6.  Jto^nAr.    7.  ies  abeiUes.    8.  Ordre,  m.    9   Pr 
fesseur.    10.  Habiter.     11.  Jemefonde.     12.  Sans  repllque.     13.  Je  n'ose  me  tier. 
U.Amasser.    15.  Un  fil.    1G.  Thesee.    17.  Sortir. 

7.  Quoi,  what,,  is  also  used  as  a  relative,  but  only  in  connection 
with  a  preposition.     It   is   generally  used  absolutely;  and  when 
the  noun  to  which  it  refers  has  been  expressed  the  use  of  lequel, 
laquelle,  &e.,  is  preferable. 

Savez-vous  a  qnoi  il  s'occupe  a  present  f 
Do  you  know  what  he  busies  himself  with  now  ? 
Apres  quol,  after  which.     Sans  quoi,  otherwise. 
C'est  pourquoij  on  that  account,  therefore. 

8.  The  adverbs  of  place  ou,  d'ou  and  par  ou,  are  also  often 
employed  instead  of  the  relative  pronouns  dans  lequel,  duquel,  par 
lequel,  etc.,  when  things  are  spoken  of,  as  :  — 

U 'embarras  ou  ffor  dans  lequel)  se  trouve  mon  pere. 
The  embarrassment  in  which  my  father  finds  himself. 
Le  village  par  ou  ffor  par  lequel)  nous  venons  de  passer. 
The  village  through  which  we  have  just  passed. 

9.  The  correlative  pronouns  he  ivho,  fern,  she  who,  pi.  they  who 
or  those  who,  are  rendered  by  celui  qui,  fern,  celle  qui,  pi.  masc. 
ceux  qui,  pi.  fern,  celles  qui.     Ex. :  — 

He  who  is  contented,  is  happy. 

Celui  qui  est  content  est  heureux. 

They  (or  those)  who  are  discontented,  are  unhappy. 

Ceux  qui  sont  me'contents,  sont  malheureux. 

NOTE  1.  Both  or  either  may  vary  according  to  the  verb  they  depend  on, 
(celui  qui,  celui  que,  etc. )  as  :  — 

I  shall  give  it  to  him  whom  I  love  most. 

Je  le  donnerai  a  celui  que  faime  le  mieux. 

NOTE  2.  In  French  both  pronouns  must  be  joined,  and  no  inversion  can 
take  place  as  in  English.  Ex.:  — 

He  is  a  bad  citizen  who  rebels  against  his  country. 

Celui  qui  se  rgvolte  contre  sa  patrie  est  un  mauvais  citoyen. 

10.  The  English  what,  when  not  an  interrogative  pronoun,  but  a 


RELATIVE  PRONOUNS.  271 

compound  relative  in  the  sense  of  that  which,  is  translated  by  ce 
qui  for  the  Nominative,  ce  que  for  the  Direct  Objective,  and  by  ce 
dont,  when  the  verb  takes  the  preposition  de,  as :  —— 

What  is  fine,  is  not  always  good. 
Ce  qui  est  beau  n'est  pas  toujours  bon. 
I  shall  do  what  I  have  promised. 
Je  ferai  ce  que  fai  promts. 
I  have  sent  him  what  he  needed. 
Je  lui  ai  envoye"  ce  dont  il  avail  besoin. 

11.  When  ce  qui,  ce  que  or  ce  dont  begins  the  sentence,  c'est 
must  be  placed  before  the  second  clause,  except  (as  in  the  first  sen- 
tence above)  when  an  adjective  or  a  participle  follows,  as  :  — 

Ce  que  vous  pouvez  faire  de  mieux,  c'est  de  partir  tout  de  suite. 
The  best  thing  for  you  to  do,  is  to  leave  immediately. 
Ce  qui  me  chagrine,  c'est  la  perte  de  mon  domestique. 
What  grieves  me,  is  the  loss  of  my  servant. 

12.   Proverbial  and  general  expressions  usually  commence  with  qui, 
whoever,  instead  of  celui  qui.    Ex.:  — 
Qui  court  deux  lievres,  n'en  prend  aucun. 
He  who  chases  two  hares  catches  none. 
Qui  casse  les  verves,  les  paie. 

Who  (ever)  breaks  the  glasses  must  pay  for  them. 
Sauve  qui  peut !  let  him  save  himself  who  can ! 

THEME  25. 

1.  This  is  the  object1  at  which  he  aims.2  2.  The  study  to  which 
I  am  devoted,3  gives  me  great  pleasure.  3.  Nature,  whose  beauty 
we  daily4  admire,  is  an  inexhaustible5  source  of  enjoyment6  for  us. 
4.  Your  pupil's  mother,  with  whom  I  was  speaking  yesterday, 
left7  this  morning.  5.  What  sort  of  a  book  is  that  in  which  you 
are  reading?  6.  It  is  a  Roman  History.  7.  There  is  nothing 
upon  (a)  which  I  think  more  frequently8  than  the  sad  fate9  of  my 
poor  friend.  8.  What  is  true  is  also  good.  9.  Virtue  and  freedom 
are  the  conditions  without  which  we  cannot  be  happy.  10.  Is  the 
house  in  which  you  live  on  the  highway?10  11.  No,  it  is  tolerably 


272  XI.      ONZIEME   LEgON. 

far u  from  it  (en).  12.  That  is  the  thing  about  which  I  would 
speak  with  you.  13.  The  thing  the  miser  thinks  least  about  (a)  is 
to  aid12  the  poor.  14.  That  is  the  thing  with  which  he  struck  me. 
15.  It  is  an  illness  to  the  progress13  of  which  (§  5)  one  cannot  ap- 
ply14 too  prompt  remedies.15  16.  He  who  cannot  keep  a  secret,  is 
incapable  of  governing.18  17.  That  which  most  deserves  our  respect 
is  virtue.  18.  What  I  most  wish,  is  to  see  you  happy.  19.  What 
I  like  most,  is  to  be  alone. 

1.  Le  but.  2.  Tendre.  3.  Dtvou4.  4.  Journellement.  5.  Intpuisdble.  6.  Le 
plaisir.  7.  Esl  partie.  8.  Souvent.  9.  Le  sort.  10.  La  route.  11.  Assez  tloignt. 
12.  Assister.  13.  Progrcs,  m.  14.  Apporter.  15.  De  trap  prompts  remedes.  10. 
De  gouverner. 


READING  LESSON. 
SUITE   DE    *  *  SEKVILIUS . ' ' 

"  Si  vos  emiemis  so  sont  rallies,  s'ils  ont  ete  soutenus  par  un  corps 
de  troupes  qui  s'avan$ait  h  leur  secours ;  enfin,  s'il  a  fallu  recom- 
mencer  tout  de  nouveau  le  combat,  et  si,  dans  cette  derniere  action, 
j'ai  perdu  quelques  soldats,  n'est-ce  pas  le  sort1  ordinaire  de  la 
guerre  ?  Trouverez-vous  des  generaux  qui  veuillent  se  charger  du 
commandement  de  vos  armees,  h  condition  de  ramener  h  Eome  tons 
les  soldats  qui  en  seraient  sortis  sous  leur  conduite  ?  N'examinez 
done  point  si,  h  la  fin  d'une  bataille,  j'ai  perdu  quelques  soldats, 
mais  jugez"  de  ma  conduite  par  ma  victoire. 

"S'il  est  vrai  que  j'ai  chasse2  les  ennemis  de  votre  territoire,  que 
je  leur  ai  tu^  beaucoup  de  monde  dans  deux  combats,  que  j'ai  force 
les  debris3  de  leurs  arme'es  de  s'enfermer  dans  leurs  places,4  que  j'ai 
enrichi  Rome  et  vos  soldats  du  butin5  qu'ils  ont  fait  dans  le  pays 
enncmi :  que  (Jet)  vos  tribuns  s'elevent,  et  qu'ils  me  reprochent  en 
quoi  j'ai  manque6  centre  les  devoirs7  d'un  bon  general. 

"  Mais  ce  n'est  pas  ce  que  je  crams:  ces  accusations  ne  servent 
que  de  pretexte  pour  pouvoir  exercer  impunement  leur  haine8  et  leur 
animosite  centre  le  senat  et  contre  1'ordre  des  patriciens.  Faut-il 
que  vous  ne  demandiez  jamais  rien  au  senat  qui  ne  soit  pre*judiciable 


RELATIVE   PRONOUNS.  273 

au  bien  connnun  do  la  patrie,  ct  que  vous  ne  lo  deiuandiez  que  par 
des  seditions  ?  Si  un  secateur  ose9  vous  reprdsenter  Finjastice  de 
vos  preventions,  si  un  consul  no  parle  pas  le  language  se*ditieux  de 
vos  tribuns ;  s'il  defend  avec  courage  la  souveraine  puissance  dont  il 
est  revetu,  on  crie  au  tyran.10  A  peine  est-il  sorti  de  charge,  qu'il 
Be  trouve  aecable  d'accusations.  C'est  ainsi  que,  par  votre  injuste 
plebiscite,  vous  avez  ote  la  vie  a  Me*nenius,  aussi  grand  capital :io 
que  bon  citoyen.  Ne  devriez-vous  pas  mourir  de  honte  d'avoir  per- 
secute si  cruellement  le  fils  de  ce  Menenius  Agrippa,  a  qui  vous 
devez  vos  tribuns  et  ce  pouvoir  qui  vous  rend  a  present  si  furieux? 

"  On  m'en  voudra  peut-etre  de  la  liberte  avec  laquelle  je  vous 
parlc  dans  Fetat  ou  je  me  trouve  a  present ;  mais  je  ne  crains  point 
la  mort :  condamnez-moi,  si  vous  Fosez ;  la  vie  ne  pent  etre  qu'a 
charge  a  un  general  qui  est  reduit  a  se  justifier  de  ses  victoires. 
Apres  tout,  un  sort  pareil  a  celui  de  Menenius  ne  peut  me  disho- 
norer." 

1.  The  fate.    2.  Driven  out.    3.  Remains.    4.  Fortresses.    5.  Booty.    6.  To  fail. 
7.  Duties.    8.  Hatred.    9.  Dare.    10.  Behold  the  tyrant. 

CONVERSATION. 

Qui  etait  Servilius  ?  Un  fameux  general  romain. 

Pourquoi    Fa-t-on    fait    venir    a    Pour  se  justifier  devant  le  peu- 

Rome  ?  pie. 

De  quoijjavait-on  accuse*  ?  On  Favait  accuse  d'avoir  perdu 

trop  de  soldats  dans  un  com- 
bat. 

Est-il    possible    de   livrer    (une)     Non,  ce  n'est  pas  possible.     II 

bataillc,    sans  qu'il  y    ait   du         doit  y  avoir  de  part  et  d'au- 

sang  de  repandu  ?  tre  du  sang  de  repandu. 

Teuton    remporter    une   victoire     H  est  impossible  de  defaire  un 

sans  aucune  perto  ?  ennemi  nombreux  et  aguerri 

sans  perdre  du  monde. 

Comment  se  justifia  Servilius  du     II  rappela  aux  Bomains  qu'il 
reproche  qu'on  lui  faisait  ?  avait  remporte   une  victoire 

decisive,  et  mis  en  dei-oute 
18  les  legions  des  ennemis. 


214: 


XII.      DOUZIEME   LEgON. 


Etait-il  en  son  pouvoir  de  retenir 
ses  soldats  ? 

Avait-il  manque  centre  les  devoirs 
d'un  bon  general  ? 

Si  Servilius  avait  fait  senner  la 
retraite,  de  quoi  l'aurait-on  ac- 
cuse? 

Quels  services  avait-il  rendus  k 
(to)  Rome  ? 


Quand  un  senateur  etait  sorti  de 

charge,  que  faisaient  les  tribuns 

du  peuple  ? 
Quel    exemple     d'injustice     leur 

reprocha-t-il  ? 
Servilius  s'attendait-il  h  un   sort 

semblable  k  celui  deMen&iius? 


Non,  leur  courage  les  euiportait, 
et  ils  poursuivaient  avec  ar- 
deur  Tennemi  efiraye'. 

Non,  on  ne  lui  put  rien  ro- 
procher. 

Les  tribuns  du  peuple  Fauraient 
accuse  d'intelligence  avec  les 
ennemis. 

II  avait  chassd  les  ennemis  du 
territoire  remain  et  enrichi 
Rome  du  butin  qu'il  rappor- 
tait  du  pays  ennemi. 

Es  Taccablaient  d'accusations. 


Celui  dc  Menenius. 

Oui,  mais  il  dit  qu'un  sort  pa- 
reil  k  celui  de  Menenius  ne 
pourrait  le  deshonorer. 


XII.     DOUZIEME    LE£ON. 


INDEFINITE    PRONOUNS. 

In  regard  to  the  indefinite  pronouns  treated  of  in  Lesson  XXIX.,  Part 
I.,  the  following  peculiarities  are  to  be  observed :  — 

1.  The  word  on  derived  from  homme,  man  (Latin  homo),  serves 
to  render  all  vague  and  general  reports  expressed  in  English  by  they 
say,  people  say,  it  is  said,  ive  say,  etc.  The  verb  which  follows  is 
always  in  the  third  person  singular,  as  :  — 


INDEFINITE   PRONOUNS.  275 

People  say,  it  is  said,  on  dit. 

One  cannot  have  everything,  on  ne  pent  pas  avoir  tout. 

NOTE  1.  When  in  English  the  passive  voice  is  used  in  this  sense,  the 
verb  must  be  changed  in  French  into  the  active  voice  with  on,  as  :  — 

It  is  said,  on  dit.  It  is  believed,  on  croit. 

I  was  told,  on  m'a  dit.  I  am  deceived,  on  me  trompe. 

Letters  have  been  received,  on  a  recu  des  lettres. 

NOTE  2.  [For  the  cases  where  Von  is  used  instead  of  on,  see  Lesson 
XXIX.,  2. 

2.  Chacun,  e,  each,  has  for  the  English  his,  her,  or  its,  which 
follows  it,  son,  sa,  ses,  and  leur,  leurs,  for  their,  as :  — 

Put  these  books  each  in  its  place. 

Remettez  ces  litres  chacun  a  sa  place. 

The  judges  have  given  sentence  each  according  to  his  conscience. 

Les  juges  ont  opines  chacun  selon  sa  conscience. 

The  bees  build  each  their  cells. 

Lcs  dbdlles  bdtissent  chacune  leur  cellule. 

When  chacun  means  every  one,  everybody  (including  all),  it  is  always  mas- 
culine. Example  :  Chacun  a  son  tour.  But  when  used  relatively,  i.  e.,  in 
reference  to  a  part  of  mankind,  it  may  be  feminine.  Example :  Chacune 
de  nous  (femmes)  se  pre'tendait  superieure  aux  autres. 

3.  Aucun,  personne,  and  ricn  do  not  require  ne  before  the  verb, 
in  a  sentence  interrogative  or  of  doubt :  aucun  then  stands  for  any, 
personne  for  anybody,  and  rien  for  anything.     Ex.*:  — 

Je  ne  crois  pas  qu'il  y  ait  aucun  ho?nme  sans  dtffaut. 

I  do  not  think  there  is  any  man  without  a  fault. 

Jc  doiite  qu'il  y  ait  rien  de  plus  beau. 

I  doubt  whether  there  is  anything  more  beautiful. 

NOTE.  Aucun  and  nul  are  not  used  in  the  plural,  except  before  nouns 
which  have  no  singular,  or  which  are  used  in  a  different  sense  in  the 
plural. 

4.  When,  however,  these  three  pronouns  serve  to  answer  a  ques- 
tion without  repeating  the  verb  used  by  the  inquirer,  they  retain 
their  negative  meaning,  as  :  — 

Qu'avez  vous  ?  Rien.  Rien  da  tout. 

What  is  the  matter  with  you  ?  Nothing.  Nothing  at  all. 

5.  None,  not  one,  are  rendered  by  aucun  ne  and  pas  un  ne. 
Examples :  — 


276  XII.     DOUZIEME 

None  of  you  were  there,  aucun  de  vous  u'y  fiait. 

I  have  four  sisters ;  none  (not  one)  of  them  is  married. 

J'ai  quatre  sceurs,  aucune  or  pas  une  n'est  marine. 

6.  Somebody,  some  one,  anybody,  and  any  one,  are  expressed  by 
quclqu'un  singular  and  masculine.     Ex. :  — 

Somebody  told  me  so,  quelqu'un  me  Va  dit. 

Do  you  know  any  one  here  ?  Connaissez-vous  quelqu'un  id  ? 

7.  Laplupart,  most,  is  properly  a  collective  noun,  and  like  most 
other  collective  nouns  takes  the  plural  after  it.     This  requires  the 
verb  and  attribute  which  follow  to  be  put  in  the  plural.     Ex. :  — 

La  plupart  de  ces  pommes  ne  sont  pas  encore  mures. 
Most  of  these  apples  are  not  yet  ripe. 

8.  Another  is  usually  expressed  by  un  autre,  and  others  (Nom. 
and  Direct  Obj.)  by  d' autres  or  les  autres.     Ex. :  — 

Another  would  not  have  acted  so. 

Un  autre  ?i'auraii  pas  agi  ainsi. 

Charity  is  contented  that  others  be  preferred. 

La  charite*  est  contente  que  les  autres  soient  prcfer€s. 

Buy  some  others,  achetez-en  d'autres. 

9.  Autrui,  others,  only  applies  to  persons ;  it  is,  however,  also 
taken  as  a  singular  in  the  sense  of  another.     It  is  employed  only 
after  a  preposition.     Consequently,  when  in  English  the  indefinite 
pronoun  others  occurs  in  the  Nom.  or  Dir.  Obj.,  it  must  not  be 
translated  by  autrui,  but  by  d'autres  or  les  autres  (§  8).     Ex.  :  — 

Charity  rejoices  in  the  happiness  of  others. 

La  charite  se  rejouit  du  bonheur  d' autrui. 

Attendez  d' autrui  ce  que  vous  faites  a  autrui. 

Expect  from  others  the  same  treatment  which  you  give  them. 

10.  When,  however,  the  verb  in  the  latter  clause  governs  the  Dir. 
Obj.",  en  is  used  instead  of  son  or  ses.     Ex.:  — 

Souvent  nous  bldmons  les  defauts  d' autrui  sans  en  reconnaitre  les  bonnes  qua- 
lite's  (without  acknowledging  their  good  qualities). 

11.  Tel  has  two  significations :  such,  and  many  a  (man) .    In  the 


INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS.  277 

former,  it  is  an  adjective  and  agrees  "with  its  noun,  in  the  latter 
it  is  often  a  pronoun,  i.  e.  is  used  without  a  substantive.     Ex.:  — 

Telle  &ait  la  difficult^  da  terrain  que,  etc. 

Such  was  the  difficulty  of  the  ground,  etc. 

Tel  park  de  choses  qu'il  n'entend  pas. 

Many  a  man  speaks  of  things  which  he  does  not  understand. 

12.  Such  a  must  be  rendered  by  un  tel,  une  telle.     Ex.:  — 

Un  id  homme,  such  a  man. 

Une  telle  femme,  such  a  woman. 

Un  tel  has  also  the  meaning  of  so  and  so,  as  :  — 

Chez  Monsieur  un  tel;  Madame  une  telle. 

13.  Tel  que  has  the  meaning  such  as  or  just  as,  and  agrees  in 
gender  and  number  with  the  noun  to  which  it  refers.     Ex.:  — 

Telles  que  vous  Ics  voyez,  such  as  you  see  them  (fern.). 

14.  Notice  also  the  expression  :  II  rfy  a  run  de  tel  que  ...  or 
il  n'est  rien  tel  que  .  .  .,  there  is  nothing  like.     Ex.:  — 

//  n'y  a  rien  de  tel  que  d' avoir  une  bonne  conscience. 
There  is  nothing  like  having  a  good  conscience. 

THEME  26. 

1.  They  speak  of  peace.  2.  People  are  not  always  fortunate. 
3.  French  is  spoken  here.  4.  The  invention  of  gunpowder  is  at- 
tributed1'to  to  Berthold  Schwarz  of  Friburg.2  5.  It  is  said  that' 
the  queen  is  in  London.  6.  Everybody  has  his  faults.  7.  "What 
is  the  price  of  each  of  these  medals?3  8.  My  children  have  each  a 
good  place.  9.  Every  one  has  his  [own]  manner  of  thinking4  and 
acting.  10.  I  do  not  know  any  of  his  friends.  11.  Would  any- 
body dare5  deny6  it?  12.  None  of  the  judges  were  against  you. 
13.  Of  all  the  nations  of  the  earth,  there  is  none  (not  one)  but  has 
(qui  rfait)  an  idea7  of  God.  14.  I  expect  somebody.  15.  Those 
apples  are  fine,  I  will  take  some.  16.  When  we  are  in  (en)  town, 
we  have  almost  every  day  somebody  to  dine8  with  us.  17.  I  have 
lost  my  stick,  I  must  buy  another.  18.  Most  of  ray  books  are 


278  XIII.      TREIZIEME   LE^ON. 

new.  19.  Do  not  speak  ill  (jnaT)  of  others.  20.  Do  not  unto  (a) 
others  what  thou  wouldst  not  they  should9  do  unto  thee.  21.  Many 
a  man  sows10  who  does  not  reap.11  22.  There  is  nothing  like  being 
(que  d'etre)  an  honest  man.  23.  You  must  take  them  such  as 
thoy  are. 

3.  Attribuer.  2.  Fribourg.  3.  MddaiUc,  f.  4.  De  penscr  et  cTagir.  5.  Oscr. 
6.  Xier.  7.  Idee,f.  8.  A  diner.  9.  Qtfils  le  fissent  d  toimeme.  10.  Scmer.  11. 
Ricolter. 


XIII.     TREIZIEME 


INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS,  CONTINUED. 

1.  L\m  et  I'autre,  fern,  rune  et  Fautre  (plur.  les  uns  et  Jes  au- 
tres,  fern,  les  uncs  et  les  autres),  loth.     These  pronouns  agree  in 
gender  and  number  with  the  noun  to  which  they  refer ;  if  they  aro 
preceded  by  a  preposition  in  English,  that  preposition  must  be  re- 
peated in  French  before  each  part.     Ex.:  — 

Both  are  gone,  run  ct  l'ai(tre  sont  partis. 

I  will  do  it  for  them  both. 

Je  le  feral  pour  I'un  et  pour  I'autre. 

NOTE  1.  "When  in  English  the  word  both  is  followed  by  a  noun,  it  is  ren- 
dered in  Ercnch  by  les  deux.  Ex.:  — 

I  use  both  hands,  je  me  sers  des  deux  mains. 

NOTE  2.  Doth  followed  by  and  is  a  conjunction  and  is  commonly  omit- 
ted in  Erench,  as  :  — 

She  is  both  handsome  and  rich,  die  est  belle  et  riche. 

2.  ISun  ou  Fautre,  fern.  Fune  ou  Fautre,  either,  also  requires 
the  repetition  of  the  preposition,  as  :  — 

I  will  do  it  for  either. 

Jc  le  ferai  pour  I'un  ou  pour  I'autre. 


INDEFINITE  PKONOUNS.  279 

3.  Ni  Tun  ni  Vautre,  fern,  ni  Tune  ni  Vautre,  neither,  requires 
ne  before  the  verb,  as  :  — 

Neither  has  obtained  the  prize. 

Ni  I'un  ni  Vautre  n'a  gagn€  le  prix. 

I  will  do  it  for  neither  of  them  (fern.). 

Je  ne  le  ferai  ni  pour  Vune  ni  pour  Vautre. 

4.  ISun  Vautre,  fern.  Vune  Vautre  (plur.  les  uns  les  centres,  fern. 
les  unes  les  autres) ,  one  another,  each  other.     The  first  of  the  two 
pronouns  is  always  the  subject  and  consequently  stands  in  the  Nom- 
inative in  French.     Active  verbs  then  require  se,  nous  or  vous  to 
be  prefixed,  although  no  reflective  pronoun  appears  in  English. 
When  they  are  preceded  by  a  preposition  in  English,  that  preposi- 
tion must  come  between  them  in  French.     Ex.:  — 

These  two  girls  love  each  other  tenderly. 

Ces  deux  jeunes  filles  s'aiment  (I'une  Vautre)  tendrement. 

Charles  and  Henry  speak  ill  of  each  other. 

Charles  et  Henri parlent  mat  I'un  de  I'autre  (not  de  I'un  I'autre.) 

5.  The  word  the  same  is  expressed  by  le  meme  or  la  meme  for 
the  singular  and  by  les  memcs  for  the  plural  of  both  genders,  wheth- 
er it  be  connected  with  a  noun  or  not,  as :  — 

Is  that  the  same  pencil  which  I  have  lent  you. 
Est-ce  le  meme  crayon  que  ceh(i  que  je  vous  ai  prete"} 
Yes,  it  is  the  same,  oui,  c'est  le  meme. 

G.    The  same,  meaning  the  same  thing,  is  expressed  by  la  meme 
chose.     Ex. :  — 

lie  did  the  same,  il  a  fait  la  meme  chose. 

7.  When  meme  signifies  even,  it  is  an  adverb  and  invariable. 
It  may  bo  placed  before  or  after  the  nouns.     Ex.:  — 

Vos  freres,  vos  amis,  vos  ennemis  meme. 

Your  brothers,  your  friends,  your  enemies  even. 

8.  Everything,  all,  are  expressed  by  tout  without  any  article, 
placed,  in  compound  tenses,  between  the  auxiliary  and  the  partici- 
ple, as :  — 


280  XIII.      TEEIZIEME   LE£ON. 

I  have  lost  everything,  fai  tout  perdu. 
Everything  falls,  tout  tombe. 
All  have  perished  there,  tons  y  ont  peri. 
I  have  seen  them  all,  je  les  ai  toutes  vues. 

9.  Le  tout  stands  for  a  substantive  singular  and  masculine,  and 
answers  to  the  English  the  whole,  as  :  — 

Le  tout  est  plus  grand  que  la  partie. 

The  whole  is  greater  than  a  part. 

Je  prendrai  le  tout,  I  will  take  the  whole. 

10.  The  English  words  all  that,  everything  that  and  whatever, 
are  rendered  in  French  by  tout  ce  qui  (Norn.),  or  tout  ce  que  (Dir. 
Obj.),  always  singular  and  masculine.     Ex.:  — 

I  like  all  that  is  fine,  faime  tout  ce  qui  est  beau. 
All  that  he  says  is  true,  tout  ce  qu'il  dit  est  vrai. 

11.  In  the  sense  of  quite,  entirely,  before  an  adjective  or  a  par- 
ticiple masculine  of  both  numbers,  and  before  an  adjective  feminine 
beginning  with  a  vowel  or  h  mute,  tout  remains  uninflected ;  but  it 
is  declinable  before  an  adjective  or  a  participle  feminine  which  be- 
gins with  a  consonant,  and  agrees  with  it  in  gender  and  number. 
Examples :  — 

Nous  fumes  tout  surpris,  we  were  quite  surprised. 

Ma  sceur  €tait  tout  fionne'e. 

My  sister  was  quite  astonished. 

Elle  fut  toute  surprise,  she  was  quite  surprised. 

12.  When   tout  in  connection  with   que   stands  for   ...  as, 
although,  however,  it  is  used  as  a  conjunction  with  the  Indicative 
mood;  and  in  this  use  the  above-mentioned  rule  (§11)  also  holds 
good  (see  also  §  13).     Ex.:  — 

Tout  riches  que  vous  etes,  rich  as  you  are. 

Toutes  savantes  que  sont  ces  dames. 

Learned  as  these  ladies  are  (however  learned  these  ladies  arc,  etc.). 

THE3IE   27. 

1.  Both  arc  (ont)  right.     2.  Both  serve  the  same  purpose.1     3. 
Do  you  speak  of  my  brother  or  of  my  sister  ?    4.  I  speak  of  both. 


INDEFINITE   PRONOUNS.  281 

5.  Both  his  uncle  and  aunt  are  dead.    6.  Either  of  you  can  dome  a 
great  favor.     7.  Yesterday  I  expected  my  two  best  friends,  but 
neither  of  them  came.     8.  Both  suspect2  him,  but  neither  will  say 
why.     9.  Fire  and  water  destroy3  each  other.     10.  Love4  one  an- 
other, said  our  Lord.5   11.  They  speak  ill  of  one  another.    12.  It  is 
rare  to  hear  two  authors6  speak  well  of  each  other.     13.  This  poem 
is  the  same  that7 1  was  mentioning8  to  you.     14.  How  much  do  you 
ask  for  the  whole  ?     15.1  will  not  sell  the  whole ;  I  must  keep9  a 
part  for  myself.     16.  All  is  mutable10  in  this  world.     17.  Every- 
thing displeases11  you.     18.  He  has  taken  everything  for  himself. 
19.  All  is  not  gold  that  glitters12  (transl:  All  that  (L.  XL,  §  10) 
glitters  is  not  gold).     20.  Whatever  is  good  in  itself  (en  soi),  is 
not  always  approved.13     21.    His  mother   was  (/^O   quite  cast 
down14  at  that  news;  however,  sorry15  though  she  was,  she  received 
me  kindly,  and  desired16  me  to  dine  with  her.     22.  This  fashion17 
is  quite  new.     23.  My  friend,  however  learned  he  may  be,  is  some- 
times mistaken.18 

1.  Usage,  m.     2.  Soup<;onner.     3.  Se  detruisent.     4.  Aimez-vous.     5.  Seigneur. 

6.  Auteur.     7.  Que  celui  dont.     8.  Parle.      9.  Garder.      10.  Variable.     11.  De- 
plcdre.    12.  Brille.     13.  Approuver.     14.  Abattue.     15.  Affligee.     16.  Frier.     17. 
Mode,  f.    18.  Se  tromper. 


13.  Quelque  ~r  que,  however,  though  —  ever  so,  is  used  in  the 
same  s^ise  as  tout  —  que,  with  this  difference,  that  tout  —  que  sup- 
poses something  more  true  or  real,  whereas  quelque — que  implies 
something  as  possibly  assumed,  and  on  this  account  always  governs 
the  Subjunctive.  Quelque,  when  before  an  adjective  or  participle, 
remains  unchanged.  The  construction  of  the  sentence  .is  as  fol- 
lows :  quelque  begins  the  clause,  the  second  place  is  taken  by  the 
adjective  or  participle,  then  follows  que,  then  the  pronoun,  then  the 
verb  in  the  Subjunctive  mood.  Ex. :  — 

1  2345 

Quelque  habiles  que  vous  soyez. 
However  skilful  you  may  be. 

But  when  the  subject  is  not  a  pronoun,  but  a  substantive,  then  the 
verb  takes  the  fourth  place  and  the  noun  the  fifth.  Ex.:  — 


282  xni.    TREIZIEME  LEQON. 

1  2  34  5 

Qudque  louable  que  soit  votre  co?iduite,  elle  sera  condamrufe. 
However  praiseworthy  your  conduct  maybe  —  or  though  your  conduct 
be  ever  so  praiseworthy,  —  it  will  be  condemned. 

14.  Quelque,  followed  by  a  substantive  and  any  other  verb  than 
to  be,  is  an  adjective,  and  therefore  takes  an  s  before  a  noun  plural. 
It  corresponds  with  the  English  whatever.     The  construction  is  : 
1,  qwlque(s);  2,  the  substantive;  3,  que;  4,  the  pronoun;  5,  the 
verb  in  the  Subjunctive  mood ;  the  rest  as  in  English.     Ex.:  — 

1  2  3    4         5 

Qitclqucs  rickcsses  qu'ils  aient  amasscfes,  Us  ne  sont  pas  heureux. 
Whatever  riches  they  may  have  collected,  they  are  not  happy. 

Quelques  fautes  qu'il  ait  commises,  je  lui  pardonnerai. 
Whatever  faults  he  has  committed,  I  will  forgive  him. 

15.  Qael  que,  fern,  quelle  que,  must  be  divided  when  it  is  im- 
mediately followed   by   the  verb  to  be;   it  agrees  in  gender  and 
number  with  the  noun  to  which  it  relates ;  it  likewise  requires  the 
verb  to  be  put  in  the  Subjunctive  mood.     Ex.:  — 

Quelle  que  soit  votre  faute,  on  vous  pardonnera. 
Whatever  your  fault  may  be,  they  will  forgive  you. 
Qaels  que  soient  les  talents  de  votre  frere,  il  ne  re'ussira  pas. 
Whatever  your  brother's  talents  may  be,  he  will  not  succeed. 

16.  The  English  whoever  and  whosoever  are  usually  rendered  by 
quiconque  when   they  mean   every    one   who   or   all  those   who. 
Examples :  — 

Qniconque  n'observera  pas  cette  loi,  sera  puni. 
Whoever  does  not  observe  this  law,  will  be  punished. 
Je  parle  a  quiconque  veut  m'emendre. 
I  speak  to  whomsoever  will  hear  me. 

17.  The  same  two   pronouns  ivhoever  and  whosoever  are  ex- 
pressed in  French  by  qui  que  ce  soit  (or  fut)  qui,  when  they  mean 
whatever  may  be  the  person  ivho.     The  verb  is  in  the  Subj.  mood. 
Examples  : 

Whoever  has  done  that,  he  is  a  man  of  talent. 

Qui  que  ce  soit  qui  ait  fait  cela,  c'est  un  homme  de  talent. 


INDEFINITE   PRONOUNS.  283 

Whomsoever  you  meet  with,  do  not  say  what  you  have  seen. 
Qui  que  ce  soit  que  (Dir.  Obj.)  vous  rencontricz,  ne  dites  pas  ce  que  vous 
avez  vu. 

18.  A  shorter  expression  for  qui  que  ce  soit  que  (not  qui)  is 
qui  que,  which  is  often  used,  except  before  il  and  Us : 

Qui  que  vous  soi/ez,  vous  etes  le  bienvenu. 
Whoever  you  may  he,  you  are  welcome. 
Qui  que  vous  rencontriez,  ne  dites  pas,  etc. 
Whomsoever  you  meet  with,  do  not  say,  etc. 

19.  Nobody  whatever,  is  expressed  by  qui  que  ce  soit  and  ne 
before  the  verb.     Ex. :  — 

Let  nobody  whatever  enter  my  room. 

Ne  laissez  entrer  qui  que  ce  soit  dans  ma  chamlre. 

I  trust  nobody  whatever. 

Je  ne  me  jie  a  qui  que  ce  soit. 

NOTE.  But  when  nobody  whatever  begins  the  sentence,  personne  is  used, 
as  :  — 

Nobody  whatever  has  spoken  ill  of  you. 
Personne  n'a  parltf  mal  de  vous. 

20.  When  the  English   indefinite   pronoun   ivhatever  does  not 
mean  all  that  which  or  everything  which,  but  whatever  may  be  the 
thing  which,  it  is  rendered  into  French  by  quelque  chose  qm,  quoi 
que,  or  quoi  que  ce  soit  (or  fut)  qui  or  que.     Ex.:  — 

Whatever  may  be  said  to  you,  do  not  believe  it. 
Quelque  chose  qu'on  vous  dise,  ne  le  croyez  pas.     Or : 
Quoiqu'on  vous  dise,  ne  le  croyez  pas.     Or  : 
Quoi  que  ce  soit  qu'on  vous  dise,  ne  le'croyez  pas. 
Whatever  you  may  order,  I  will  do  it. 
Quelque  chose  que  vous  commandiez,  je  le  feral.     Or : 
Quoi  que  ce  soit  que  vous  commandiez,  je  le  ferai. 

21.  Nothing  ivhatever,  not  anything  whatever,  is  translated  by 
quoi  que  ce  soit  or  fut,  and  ne  before  the  verb.     Ex. :  — 

Without  application,  it  is  impossible  to  succeed  in  anything  whatever. 
Sans  application  on  ne  peut  re'ussir  en  quoi  que  ce  soit. 


284  XIV.   QUATORZIEME  LEgON. 

THEME  28. 

1.  The  wise  man  does  not  fear  men,  however  powerful  they  may 
be.  2.  Men,  however  great  or  small  they  may  be,  are  never  suffi- 
ciently1 sensible  how  necessary  they  are  to  each  other.  3.  What- 
ever wealth2  you  may  have,  you  will  never  be  happy,  unless  you3 
restrain  your  passions.  4.  Do  not  lose  [your]  courage,  whatever 
may  happen  to  you.  5.  Distrust4  every  one  who  (§  16)  speaks  ill 
of  his  friends.  6.  The  laws  condemn5  all  criminals,6  whoever  (§  15) 
they  may  be.  7.1  tell  it  to  every  one  who  will  hear.  8.  I  hope  that 
you  will  not  tell  my  secret  to  anybody  whatever.  9.  Regulus  did 
not  allow  himself  to  be  moved,7  whatever  the  promises  were  that  the 
Carthaginians8  made  him.  10.  Unfortunate  [man]  !  whoever 
(§  18)  you  are,  I  will  not  betray9  you.  11.  Whatever  (§20) 
may  happen  to  you  in  this  world,  never  murmur10  against  Divine 
Providence ;  for  whatever  we  may  suffer,  we  deserve11  it.  12.  Of 
whomsoever  you  speak,  always  speak  the  truth.  13.  I  have  found 
nothing  whatever.  14.  I  complain12  of  nothing  whatever.  15. 
Young  men  ! 13  whatever  the  destiny14  may  be  that  awaits15  you,  in 
whatever  region  of  the  earth  your  days  may  be16  spent,  nature  will 
continually  offer  to  you  her  products17  and  her  wonders ; 18  you  will 
continually  be  surrounded19  with  the  objects  of  your  study. 

1.  Assez.  2.  Eichesse,  f.  3.  A  moins  que  vous  ne  reprimiez.  4.  Mefiez-vous  de. 
5.  Condamner.  6.  Oriminel.  7.  Ne  se  laissa  pas  ebranler.  8.  Cartliaginois.  9. 
Trahir.  10.  Murmurer.  11.  Aferiter.  12.  Se  plaindre  de.  13.  Gens.  14.  Le  sort 
15.  Attendre.  16.  Doivent  s'ecouler.  17.  Produits,  m.  18.  Mcrvcilles.  19.  Eniou- 
res  de. 


XIV.     QUATORZIEME    LE90N, 


ADVERBS. 

See  Part  I.,  Lessons  XXI  and  XXXII. 

1.  As  already  observed,  the  manner  or  mode  of  the  action  13 
expressed  by  the  adverbs  of  quality  or  manner,  as  : 


ADVERBS.  285 

H  agit  sagement  (not  sage),  he  acts  wisely. 
//  e'crit  mal  (not  mauvais),  he  writes  badly. 

2.  There  are  certain  adjectives,  however,  which  are  used  instead 
of  the  adverb.     This  is  the  case  in  the  following  expressions  :  — 

Alter  vite,  to  walk  fast.  rester  court,       )  to    .       ^^ 

couter  cher,  to  be  expensive.  demeurer  court,  ) 

vendre  cher,  to  sell  dear.  payer  comptant,  to  pay  cash. 

senlir  bon,  to  smell  sweet.  marcher  droit,  to  walk  straight. 

sentir  mauvais,  to  smell  badly.  chanter  jus  e,  to  sing  correctly. 

trouver  bon,  to  approve.  chanter  faux,  to  sing  false. 

trouver  mauvais,  to  take  ill.  parler  haut,  to  speak  loud. 

voir  clair,  to  see  clearly.  parler  bas,  to  speak  low. 

tenir  ferine,  to  hold  fast.  faire  expres,  to  do  on  purpose. 

3.  The   adjectives   in  tliis   case  remain,  of  course,  unchanged. 
Examples :  — 

Cette  montre  coute  trop  cher  (not  chere). 

This  watch  is  too  dear. 

Les  enfants  parlent  trop  haut  (not  hauts). 

The  children  speak  too  loud. 

La  ckanteuse  a  chante*  faux  (not  fausse). 

The  songstress  has  sung  false. 

NOTE  1.  In  speaking  of  the  state  of  the  health,  however,  the  adverb 
bien  or  mal  is  employed.  Ex. :  — 

Je  suis  bien,  I  am  well. 

Elle  se  trouve  mal,  she  finds  herself  ill. 

NOTE  2.  Observe  also  "the  expressions,  Elle  cst  bien,  she  is  pretty;  and 
elle  n'est  pas  mal,  she  is  not  bad-looking. 

4.  Some  adverbs  take  after  them  an  object  with  de  or  «,  in  case 
the  adjective  from  which  they  are  derived  also  takes  one.     Ex :  — '  • 

Conforme'ment  a  vos  ordres. 

In  conformity  with  your  orders. 

Indtfpendamment  de  mcs  instructions. 

Independently  of  my  instructions 

Cette  riviere  coule  parallelement  a  la  Vistule. 

That  river  flows  parallel  with  the  Vistula. 

THEME   29. 

1.  Do  not  go  so  fast.  2.  The  night  is  approaching  ;  I  no  longer 
(plus)  see  clearly.  3.  The  rose  smells  sweet,  but  the  pink1  smells 


286  XIV.      QUATORZIEME 

better.  4.  Do  not  speak  low  (in  a  whisper)  in  the  presence  of 
others.  5.  How  does  the  singer2  sing?  G.  She  sings  false  (incor- 
rectly). 7.  Do  not  speak  so  low ;  speak  louder,  so  that  you  can3  be 
understood.  8.  You  do  not  read  well,  and  you  write  no  (pas) 
better.  9.  To-day  I  am  not  very  well.  10.  Do  not  cat  so  fast. 
11.  This  merchant  sells  his  goods4  very  dear.  12.  It  is  dark ;  I  do 
not  see  clearly.  13.  *[  have  distributed5  the  money  according  to  (in 
conformity  with)  your  orders. 

1,  L1 (eillet.    2.  La  chanteuse.    3.  Qu'on  puisse  vous  comprendre.     4.  Marchaiir 
discs.    5.  Distribuer. 


ADVERBS    OF    TIME,  ETC. 

1.  Observe  the  distinction  between  the  following  adverbs  :  —  1. 
Plutot  means  rather  (of  inclination)  ;  plus  lot,  sooner  (of  time). 

2.  Tout  a  coup  means  at  once,  suddenly,  unexpectedly ;  tout  d'un 
coup  means  at  once,  i.  e.,  at  one  time ;  a  la  fois  means  altogether. 

3.  Immediately  is  translated  by  tout  de  suite,  tout  a  rheure,  and 
also  by  sans  delai.      De  suite  means  successively,  one  after  the 
other.     4.    L'autre  jour  means  the  other  day,  lately,  synonymous 
with  dernierement.     On  the  nest  day  is  le  lendemain.     5.  A  little 
while  ago  is  iantot ;  just  is  expressed  by  the  verb  venir  (see  Part 
I.  Lesson  XL  VII.) .   Ex.:  — 

He  has  just  gone  out,  il  vient  de  sortir. 

2.  Tres,  fort,  and  lien,  all  mean  very,  right ;  and  whether  one 
or  the  other  is  to  be  used  before  the  adjective  depends  upon  euphony 
alone.      Very  much,  with  verbs  is  generally  translated  by  beaucoup, 
and  sometimes  also  by  lien ;  but  never  by  ires  or  tres  beaucoup. 
13icn,  with  a  noun  in  the  sense  of  much  or  a  great  many,  must  bo 
followed  by  de  with  the  definite  article  (see  Lesson  IV.,  §  1). 

3.  Wlien,  in  interrogative  phrases,  is  rendered  by  quand.     In' 
other  cases,  quand  refers  to  a  possible,  probable  fact ;   lorsque  to  a 
positive,  real  fact.      Quand  is  vague ;  lorsque  is  precise,  as  its  ety- 
mology shows,  alorsque,  i.  c.,  a  rheure  gue. 


ADVERBS.  287 

4.  Plus  and  davantage  both  moan  more.      The  latter  always 
stands  at  the  end  of  a  sentence,  and  consequently  can  bo  followed 
neither  by  a  noun  nor  by  a  comparison  with  than.     Than  after  plus 
and  moms  is  usually  que,  but  before  a  numeral  it  is  translated  by  de 

5.  Adverbs  follow  the  simple  verb.     Do  not  say,  Ma  sceur  rare- 
mmt  sort  le  matin  ;  but,  ma  sceur  sort  rarement  le  matin,  my  sis- 
ter seldom  goes  out  in  the  morning.     Je  pense  souvent  a  vous,  I 
often  think  of  you. 

In    connection  with  the   compound  tenses  of  the  verb,   the  adverb  is 
gcncnil]y  placed  between  the  auxiliary  and  the  Participle  Past.    Ex.  : 
]\  fa  sceur  a  beaucoup  voyag£. 
My  sister  has  travelled  a  great  deal. 

6.  But  adverbs  of  time  can  also  be  placed  at  the  beginning  of 
the  sentence,  when  an  emphasis  it  laid  upon  them.     Ex. :  —  * 

Bientot  je  le  vis  reparaitre,  I  saw  him  soon  reappear. 

THEME   30. 

1.  We  often  put  off1  till  the  next  day  what  we  ought  to  do  at 
once.  2.  Fortune  is  so  fickle2  that  she  often  suddenly  deserts3  those 
that  she  has  favored4  the  most.  3.  A  single5  drop  of  vinegar  con- 
tains more  than  a  hundred  animalcule.6  4.  This  man  has  a  great 
many  faults.  5.  Children  must  obey  immediately.  6.  This  man 
has  been  very  much  regretted.7  7.  One  does  not  arrive  at  once  at 
the  highest  pinnacle8  of  fame.  8.  Mr.  M.  (has)  won  a  thousand  dol- 
lars at  one  time.  9.  He  undertakes  too  many  things  at  once.  10. 
Did  you  believe  this  man?  11.  At  first  (d'abord)  I  was  not  will- 
ing to  believe  him.  12.  Good  taste9  is  rather  a  gift10  of  nature, 
than  an  acquirement11  of  art.  13.  How  much  money  have  you  lent 
him  ?  14.  I  have  lent  him  more  than  eighty  florins. 

1.  Jlenvoyer  or  diflfoer.  2.  Inconstant.  3  Abandonner.  4.  Favoriste.  5.  Una 
seule  goutte.  6.  Animalcule,  m.  7.  Itegretter.  8.  Degrt,  m.  9.  Gout,  m.  10, 
JDon,  m.  11.  Acquisition,  f. 


288  XIV.      QUATOEZIEME  LEgON. 

READING  LESSON. 

LB   CONNETABLE  DE  BOUHBON   ET  BAYARD. 
(Dialogue.) 

Le  ConnetaUe.  N'est-ce  pas  le  pauvre  Bayard  que  je  vois  an 
pied  de  cet  arbre,  etendu  sur  1'herbe,1  et  perce  d'un  grand  coup  ? 
Oui,  c'est  lui-meme.  Helas !  je  le  plains.  En  voila  deux  qui  p£- 
rissent  aujourd'hui  par  nos  armes :  Yandenesse  et  lui.  Ccs  deux 
Fran9ais  etaient  deux  ornements  de  leur  nation  par  leur  courage. 
Je  sens  que  mon  cceur  est  encore  touche*  pour  sa  patrie.  Mais  avan- 
9ons  pour  lui  parler.  Ah  !  mon  pauvre  Bayard,  c'est  avec  douleur 
que  je  te  vois  en  cet  etat. 

Bayard.     C'est  avec  douleur  que  je  vous  vois  aussi. 

Le  Con.  Je  comprends  bien  que  tu  cs  fache  de  te  voir  dans 
mes  mains  par  le  sort2  de  la  guerre ;  mais  je  ne  veux  point  te  trailer 
en  prisonnier,  je  te  veux  garder  comme  un  bon  ami,  et  prendre  soin 
de  ta  guerison,3  comme  si  tu  e*tais  mon  propre  frere.  Ainsi  tu  ne 
dois  point  etre  fache  de  me  voir. 

Bay.  He  !  croyez-vous  que  je  ne  sois  point  faclie  d' avoir  obli- 
gation au  plus  grand  ennemi  de  la  France  ?  Ce  n'est  point  de  ma 
captivite,  ni  de  ma  blessure,4  que  je  suis  en  peine  : 6  je  meurs  dans 
un  moment,  la  mort  ya  me  delivrer  de  vos  mains. 

Le  Con.  Non,  mon  cher  Bayard,  j'espere  que  nos  soins  reussi- 
ront  a  te  gu^rir. 

Bay.  Cc  n'est  point  1£  ce  quo  je  clierclie,  et  je  suis  content  de 
mourir.  (To  be  continued.) 

1.  Grass.    2,  Fate.    3.  Recovery.    4.  Wound.    5.  Sorry. 


SYNTAX   OF  NEGATIONS.  289 

XV.     QUINZIEME 


SYNTAX  OF  NEGATIONS. 
(SceP.I.,L.XXXII.) 

1.  It  is  necessary  in  the  first  place  to  distinguish  whether  the  ne- 
gation belongs  to  a  verb  or  not ;  if  not,  the  negative  particle  stands 
without  ne.    Not,  without  a  verb,  before  nouns,  is  translated  by  non 
or  non  pas.     Ex.:  — 

His  cruelty  and  not  his  pride. 

Sa  cruaute'et  non  for  non  pas)  son  orgueil. 

Not  in  connection  with  other  words  is  simply  pas:  — 
Not  much,  pas  beaucoup.  Not  I,  pas  moi. 

Not  so  much,  pas  tant.  Why  not,  pourquoi  pas. 

Not  at  all,  pas  du  tout  or  point  da  tout. 

N.  B.  Observe  the  following  expressions :  — 

Not  (nor)  —  cither,  non  plus. 

Nor  his  brother  either,  ni  son  frcre  non  plus. 

Nor  I  cither,  ni  moi  non  plus. 

Not  only  —  but,  non-seulement  —  mais.     (See  §4.) 

2.  But  if  the  negation  belongs  to  the  verb  the  negative  particle, 
whateverot  maybe,  is  invariably  accompanied  by  ne.     Ex.:  — 

Ne  lid  parlez  pas,  do  not  speak  to  him. 

Je  n'ai  rien  vu,  I  have  seen  nothing. 

Je  ne  Vai  plus,  I  have  it  no  more. 

Aucun  de  vous  n'y  &ait,  none  of  you  were  there. 

Le  pauvre  homme  n'a  point  d 'argent. 

The  poor  man  has  no  money. 

Je  ne,  connals  personne  ici,  I  know  nobody  here. 

Ni  prieres  ni  *  menaces  ne  purent  I'attendrir. 

Neither  prayers  nor  threatenings  could  move  him. 

*  If  neither — nor  come  before  two  verbs  in  the  Indicative  mood,  the  former  is  ex- 
pressed simply  by  ne  before  the  first,  and  nor  by  ni  ne  before  the  second.    Ex.  :— 
I  neither  praise  nor  blame  him. 
Je  ne  le  loue.  ni  ne  le  blame. 
19 


290  XV.      QUINZIEME  LEgON. 

H  ne  sait  ni  lire  ni  e'crire. 
He  knows  neither  how  to  read  nor  write. 
Nous  n'approuvons  nullement  votre  dessein. 
We  by  no  means  approve  of  your  design. 

NOTE.   When  the  verb  is  in  the  simple  Infinitive  ne  pas  or  ne  point  (also 
ne  jamais)  are  not  separated,  as  :  — 

Not  to  study,  ne  pas  gtudier  or  ne  point  c'ludier. 

But  when  it  is  in  the  compound  Infinitive  it  is  optional  to  separate  them 
or  not,  as :  — 


C  ne  pas  (point}  avoir  (Huditf. 
Not  to  have  studied,  -j    ,      .          /  .  .N  -    ,.. 
'  (  n  avoir  pas  (point)  &udi€. 


3.  The  words  no  more  or  not  any  more  (meaning  not  more)  are 
expressed  by  ne  before  the  verb  and  pas  plus  after,  when  more  is 
followed  by  than :  — 

He  is  no  more  than  fifteen  years  of  age. 
//  n'a  pas  plus  de  quinze  ans. 

But  they  are  rendered  by  ne  — plus  without  pas,  when  more  is  not  fol- 
lowed by  than.  Ex.:  — 

I  shall  read  no  more  (no  longer),  je  ne  lirai  plus. 

4.  Non  settlement,  not  only,  takes  no  ne  with  the  verb.     Ex.:  — 

Je  Vai  fait  non  seulement  pour  lui,  mats  aussi  pour  ses  enfahts. 
I  have  done  it  not  only  for  his  sake,  but  also  for  his  children's. 

THEME   31. 

1.  I  do  not  speak.  2.  I  have  not  spoken.  3.  Have  you 
bought  this  book ?  4.  No,  sir,  I  have  not  (P.  I.,  L.  XL VII.) .  5. 
It  is  your  friendship  which  I  seek,  not  my  interest.1  6.  Not  I.  7. 
Not  we.  8.  Are  you  tired  ?  9.  Not  at  all.  10.  I  was  not  there ; 
nor  my  sister  either.  11,  This  peasant2  can  neither  read  nor  write. 
12.  The  boy  has  neither  paper3  nor  pens.  13.  I  have  never 
had  such  a  (un  si)  good  book.  14.  We  have  no  desire  at  all4 
to  do  it.  15.  The  speaker5  has  convinced0  not  only  his  friends 
but  also  his  adversaries.  16.  Charles  XII.  persisted  in7  never 
speaking  (never  to  speak)  French.  17.  I  have  no  more  hope. 

1.  Intertt,  m.    2.  Paysan,  m.    3.  gee  p.  224,  $  3.     4.  NuUement  envie.   5. 
teur*    6.  Convaincre.    7.  S'obstina  &, 


SYNTAX   OF  NEGATIONS.  291 

NE  USED  ALONE  WITHOUT  PAS. 

5.  The  negative  not  is  expressed  by  ne  without  pas  or  point 
with  the  three  verbs :  cesser,  to  cease ;  oser,  to  dare ;  pouvoir,  to 
be  able ;  when  followed  by  an  Infinitive,  as  :  — 

Elle  ne  cesse  de  pleurer,  she  does  not  cease  crying. 
//  n'ose  revenir,  he  dares  not  come  back. 
Je  ne  puis  le  croire,  I  cannot  helieve  it. 

NOTE  1.    Cesser  takes  pas,  however,  when  a  time  is  specified,  as  :  — 
H  ne  cesse  pas  de  travailler  avant  huit  Jieures  dit  soir. 
NOTE  2.  In  regard  to  pouvoir,  use  in  the  first  person  of  the  Present 
tense  either :  — 
Je  ne  puis  ( without  pas),  or :  Je  ne  peux  pas. 

G.  When  the  negative  nse  of  savoir  means  to  le  uncertain,  i.  e. 
in  doubt,  it  does  not  take  pas.  In  the  same  way  pas  is  always 
omitted  in  the  expression  je  ne  saurais,  I  cannot.  Ex.:  — 

Je  ne  savais  que  dire,  I  did  not  know  what  to  say 

Je  ne  saurais  vous  donner  une  garantie. 

I  cannot  give  you  a  security. 

But  if  "  not  know  "  has  the  signification  of  not  to  have  learned,  not  to 
know  (a  language,  etc.),  then  savoir  always  takes  ne  and  pas.  Ex.:  — 

Je  ne  sais  pas  nager,  I  cannot  swim. 

Ne  savez-vous  pas  I'allemand,  do  you  not  know  German  ? 

7.  I&_  sentences  depending  upon  prendre  garde,  to  take  care, 
there  is  no  pas.     Ex.: — 

Prenez  garde  qu'il  ne  vous  trompe. 
Pas  is  used  however  if  an  infinitive  follows.    Ex.:  — 
Prenez  garde  de  ne  pas  tomber. 

8.  Of  two  negative  sentences  standing  in  immediate  connection 
with  each  other,  the  latter  loses  its  pas.     Ex.:  — 

Je  ne  connais  personne  qui  ne  fasse  quelquefois  des  fautes. 

NOTE  1.  Also  pen  and  sans  are  here  regarded  as  a  negation,  as  :  — 

Pen  s'en  faut  qidl  ne  soil  tombe",  he  was  very  near  falling. 

/Sans  rim  faire,  without  doing  anything. 


292  XV.      QUINZIEME    LEgON. 

KOTE  2.  The  former  sentence  may  also  be  interrogative  if  only  the  idea 
of  negation  be  contained  in  it,  as  :  — 

Y  a-t-il  for  cst-il)  un  liomme  qui  tie  croie  en  Dieu  f 

9.  Do.  not  put  pas  after  que  ne,  when  used  instead  ot  pourquoi 
pas.     Ex.: — 

Si  vous  avez  froid,  que  ne  mettez-vous  votre  mante.au  ? 
If  you  are  cold,  why  not  put  on  your  cloak  1 

10.  Nor  after  voila,  ily  a  and  depuis  que,  when  the  verb  which 
has  the  idea  of  negation  is  in  the  compound  of  the  Present  or  in  the 
compound  of  the  Imperfect.     Ex.:  — 

II  y  a  deux  mois  que  je  ne  lui  ai  parU. 
H  a  bien  change'  depuis  que  je  ne  I'ai  vu. 

11.  Pas  is  not  used  when  ne  is  connected  with  d'autre  followed 
by  que,  as :  — 

Je  n'ai  d'autre  ambition  que  de  vous  rendre  lieureux. 
I  have  no  other  ambition  than  to  make  you  happy. 

12.  Further  in  the  following  idioms :  — 

N 'avoir  garde,  to  take  care  not  to,  to  be  on  one's  guard. 

N'importe,  it  does  not  matter. 

Ne  voir  goutte,  to  see  nothing  (at  all). 

Ne  dire  mot,  to  say  not  a  word. 

a. Dieu  neplaise  que,  etc.,  God  forbid,  etc. 

13.  A  mains  que  and  conjunctions  expressing  fear,  take  ne  before 
the  following  verb  (in  the  subjunctive).     Ex.: —  . 

A  moins  que  vous  ne  le  fassiez,  Unless  you  do  it. 

THEME    32. 

1.  Alcibiades  could  not  suffer  that  his  country  should  obey1  a 
lival.2  2.  I  dare  not  enter3  his  room.  3.  It  is  no  more  than  a 
week4  since  I  saw  (que  fai  vu)  your  uncle ;  he  has  gone  to  Amer- 
ica, you  will  see  him  no  more.  4.  I  cannot  (§  6)  tell  you  whether 
(si)  my  father  is  at  home  or  not  (72 on);  I  have  not  seen  him  this 
morning.  5.  Take  care  lest  (que,  §  7)  he  steal  your  money.  6. 


SYNTAX  OF  NEGATIONS.  293 

Take  care  not  to  be  (to  come)  too  late.  7.  We  daro  not  tell  him  tins 
news.  8.  There  is  no  enemy  who  is  (soit)  not  able5  to  injure.6  9. 
God  forbid  that  I  should  betray7  your  secret 

1.  Iraperf.  Subj.  2.  A  une  rivale,    3.  Entrer  dans.    4.  Jluit  jours.    5.  En  itat. 
0.  De  nmre.    7.  Trakir. 


NEGATION  USED  IN  FRENCH,  AND  NOT  IN  ENGLISH.* 

14.  Ne  is  moreover  often  employed  in  French  when  in  English 
no  thought  of  negation  is  to  be  discovered.     This  is  the  case  :  — 

With  the  affirmative  verb  of  a  comparative  clause  introduced 
by  que,  than,  when  the  verb  closely  follows  que.  Also  after 
verbs,  nouns,  and  conjunctions  expressing  fear  and  apprehension. 
Ex.:  — 

II  est  plus  ag€  que  je  ne  croyais. 

He  is  older  than  I  thought. 

Je  crains  qu'il  ne  vienne. 

I  fear  he  may  come. 

77  parle  autrement  qu'il  n'agit. 
He  speaks  otherwise  than  he  acts. 
A  moms  que  vous  ne  le  fassiez. 
Unless  you  should  do  it.  - 

NOTE.  But  if  the  first  clause  of  the  sentence  be  negative,  que  of  the  lat- 
ter clause  is  not  followed  by  ne,  if  the  compared  action  is  not  doubtful,  as  : 

II  n'&rit  pas  mieux  qii'il  parle. 

15.  The  verbs  douter,  to  doubt  ;  nier  and  disconvenir,  to  deny  • 
contester,  to  contest,  require  ne  before  the  verb  (in  the  Subjunctive) 
of  the  dependent  sentence,  yet  only  when  these  verbs  themselves 
are  used  simply  negatively  or  simply  interrogatively.     Ex.:  — 

Je  ne  doute  pas  > 


Doutez-vous  1™  cda  ne  soit  ™*'  W 

I  do  not  doubt  (do  you  doubt)  that  this  is  true. 

Niez-vous 

Je  ne  nie  pas 

Do  you  deny  (I  do  not  deny)  that  he  is  guilty? 

*  The  pupil  should  learn,  in  connection  with  this  lesson,  $0,  L.  XIX.  p.  330. 


294  XV.      QUINZIEME  LEgON. 

16.  But  when  these  verbs  are  affirmative,  or  negative-interroga- 
tive, ne  is  not  inserted  in  the  second  clause.     Also  when  ne  pas 
douter  has  the  force  of  etre  sur.     Ex.:  — 

Je  doute  que  cela  soil  vrai  (without  ne). 
Ne  niez-vous  pas  qu'il  soit  coupable  ? 

17.  If  the  dependent  sentence  in  English  is  negative,  it  takes, 
of  course,  ne — pas.     Ex.:  — 

I  fear  he  will  not  come,  je  crams  qu'il  ne  vienne  pas. 
They  fear  the  fortress  will  not  have  ammunition  enough. 
On  craint  que  la  forteresse  n'ait  pas  assez  de  munition. 

18.  Empecher,  to  prevent,  to  hinder,  requires  ne  before  the  fol- 
lowing verb  in  the  Subjunctive  mood,  as  :  — 

J'empecherai  qu'il  ne  sorte. 

I  will  hinder  him  from  going  out. 
EmpecJiera-t-il        1 

II  n'empeckera  pas  }  *m  VOUS  ne  le  fassiez' 

Will  he  prevent  you  (he  will  not  prevent  you)  from  doing  it  ? 

THEME  33. 

1.  He  is  more  wicked  than  I  thought.  2.  Henry  is  stronger 
than  he  was  last  year.  ^.  Ireland  is  more  powerful,  at  present,  than 
were  the  three  kingdoms  at  («)  the  death  of  queen  Elizabeth.  4. 
A  traveller  often  relates1  things  otherwise  than  they  are.  5.  I  fear 
lest  (que)  some  misfortune  has  befallen2  my  son.  6.  I  fear  our 
master  will  come ;  do  you  not  fear  he  will  come?  7.  He  denies 
that  his  brother  is  mixed  up3  in  that  affair.  8.  The  city  of  Paris 
has  become  much  more  beautiful  since4  you  saw  (have  seen)  it.  9. 
Do  you  fear  he  will  write  to  your  father?  10.  I  do  not  fear  it, 
11.  We  do  not  fear  that  the  battle  is  lost.  12.  Do  you  deny  that 
you  have  procured  [for]  him  the  means  of  flight?5  13.  I  do  not 
deny  that  I  have  given  him  some  clothes  and  some  money.  14.1  will 
hinder  him  from  coming  back.  15.  I  doubt  whether  the  letter  has 
been  sent  to  him  (see  p.  275,  §  1,  Note  1).  16.  I  cannot  prevent 
him  from  loving  (that  he  loves)  pleasure6  better  than  work.6 

1.  Rapporter.     2.  Etre  arrive  d.      3.  Meier.    4.  Depuis  que.     5.  Fuite.  f.    6, 
Put  the  def.  article. 


SYNTAX   OP  NEGATIONS.  295 

HEADING  LESSON. 
LB   CONNETABLE   DE   BOUKBON   ET   BAYARD. 

(Suite.) 

Le  Con.  Qu'as-tu  done  ?  Est-ce  que  tu  ne  saurais  te  consoler 
d  'avoir  etc  vaincu  ct  fait  prisonnier  dans  la  retraite  de  Bonnivet  ? 
Ce  n'est  pas  ta  faute,  c'est  la  sienne :  les  armes  sont  journalieres 
(changing) .  Ta  gloire  est  assez  bien  etablie  par  tant  de  belles  ac- 
tions. Les  Imperiaux1  ne  pourront  jamais  oublier  cette  vigoureuso 
defense  de  Mezieres  contre  eux. 

Bay.  Pour  moi,  je  ne  puis  jamais  oublier  que  vous  etes  ce 
grand  connetable,  ce  prince  du  plus  noble  sang  qu'il  y  ait  dans  le 
monde,  et  qui  travaille  a  dechirer2  de  ses  propres  mains  sa  patrie  et 
le  royaume  de  ses  ancetres. 

Le  Con.  Quoi !  Bayard,  je  te  loue,  et  tu  me  condamnes !  Je 
te  plains,  et  tu  m'insultes  ! 

Bay.  Si  vous  me  plaignez,  je  vous  plains  aussi;  et  je  vous 
trouve  bien  plus  &  plaindre  que  moi.  Je  sors  de  la  vie  sans  taclie ; 
j'ai  sacrine  la  mienne  a  mon  devoir,  je  meurs  pour  mon  pays,  pour 
mon  roi,  estime  des  enncmis  de  la  France,  et  regrette  de  tous  les 
bons  Fran9ais.  Mon  etat  est  digne  d'envie. 

Le  Con.  Et  moi,  je  suis  victorieux  d'un  ennemi  qui  m'a  ou- 
trage, je  me  venge  de  lui ;  j-e  le  cliasse  du  Milanais  ;3  je  fais  sentir  a 
toute,Ja_ France  combien  elle  est  malheureuse  de  m'avoir  perdu,  en 
me  poussant  a  bout.4  Appelles-tu  cela  etre  h  plaindre  ? 

Bay.  Oui,  on  est  toujours  a  plaindre  quand  on  agit  contre  son 
devoir.  II  vaut  mieux  perir  en  combattant  pour  la  patrie,  quo  de 
la  vaincre  et  de  triompher  d'elle.  Ah  !  quelle  horrible  gloire  que 
celle  de  detruire5  son  propre  pays  !  ( To  le  continued.) 

1.  The  Imperialists,  Austrians.  2.  To  tear.  3.  From  the  Milanese  territory. 
4.  To  the  extreme.  5.  Destroy. 


296  XVI.      SEIZ1EME   LE£ON. 

XVI.     SEIZIEME    LEgON. 


REMARKS  ON  SOME  PREPOSITIONS. 

The  use  of  the  prepositions  is  of  too  various  a  nature  to  allow  of  its  being 
determined  by  definite  rules.  Their  departure  from  the  original  significa- 
tion can  only  be- shown  by  examples. 

Prepositions  must  generally  be  repeated  before  every  noun.  A, 
de,  and  en  must  always  be  repeated. 

All  prepositions  except  en  govern  the  infinitive ;  en  is  followed  by 
the  present  participle.  Ex. :  — 

Pour  oiler,  in  order  to  go.    En  allant,  in  going. 

I.  ON  THE  USE  OF  SOME  FRENCH  PREPOSITIONS. 

N 

«. 

A  denotes  1st  place,  and  is  used  before  names  of  places  (not 
countries),  and  common  names;  (in  English  at  or  in)  :  — 

a  Paris,  at  Paris,    a  I'tglise,  at  church. 

a  la  campagne,  in  the  country,    a  I'cmbre,  in  the  shade. 

an  theatre  or  au  spectacle,  at  the  theatre. 

a  la  poste,  at  the  post-office. 

frapper  a  la  porte,  to  knock  at  the  door. 

a  la  main,  in  the  hand,     a  droite,  to  the  right. 

2.  Time:  — 

a  quelle  heure,  at  what  o'clock  ? 

a  deux  heures,  at  two  o'clock,    a  midi,  at  twelve  o'clock. 

au  commencement  de  la  lecon,  at  the  beginning  of  the  lesson. 

a  temps,  in  time,    a  mon  arrivffe,  on  my  arrival, 

a  la  pointe  du  jour,  at  daybreak. 

3.  Manner  and  instrument :  — 
a  la  mode,  in  fashion,  fashionably. 

a  pied,  on  foot,    a  cheval,  on  horseback. 

a  bras  ouverts,  with  open  arms. 

travailler  a  l'ai(/uillef  to  work  with  the  needle. 


REMARKS   ON  SOME   PREPOSITIONS.  297 

peindre  a  Vlndle,  to  paint  in  oil. 

mesurer  a  I'aune,  to  measure  by  the  ell  (yard). 

deux  a  deux,  two  and  two. 

goutte  a  goutte,  drop  by  drop. 

a  bon  marche",  cheap. 

a  cinq  pour  cent,  at  five  per  cent. 

a  I'anglaise,  after  the  English  style. 

4.  Destination :  — 

Une  cuiller  a  the",  a  teaspoon. 

Une  montre  a  repetition,  a  repeater  (watch). 

5.  Direction,  especially  with  the  verb  alter  or  se  rcndre,  to  go 
(the  English  to)  :  — 

Aller  a  Vlenne,  to  go  to  Vienna. 

Nous  allons  a  la  campagne,  we  are  going  into  the  country. 

Aller  au  theatre,  to  go  to  the  theatre. 

Aller  a  la  chasse,  to  go  hunting,  etc. 

Dans,  en. 

Dans  means  both  in  and  into  a  (closed)  place ;  it  is  used  in  a 
more  determinate  sense  than  en,  and  is  always  followed  by  the  article 
or  another  determinate  word  (such  as,  this,  my,  which,  etc.) .  Ex. :  — 

Dans  la  (ma,  votre)  chambre,  in  the  (my,  your)  room. 

Dans  ma  poche,  in  my  pocket. 

Dans  I'hiver  de  1850,  in  the  winter  of  1850. 

Dans  une  colere  ajfreuse,  in  a  dreadful  passion. 

//  est  dans  la  prison,  he  is  in  (the)  prison  (of  that  place). 

Etre  dans  la  ville,  to  be  within  the  town  (not  in  the  country). 

Observe  also  the  difference  in  the  following  expressions  :  — 

II  est  au  jar  din  and  il  est  dans  son  jardin. 

Je  suis  a  la  maison  (at  home)  and  je  suis  dans  ma  maison. 

En  is  used  in  a  more  vague  sense,  and  is  followed  by  no  article.  It 
is  used  for  in  or  to  before  the  name  of  a  kingdom,  republic,  country, 
county,  or  province.  Ex. :  — 

En  liberty  in  liberty.    En  colere,  in  a  passion. 

En  France,  in  or  to  France. 

En  Avril  or  au  mois  d'  avril,  in  April. 

En  &{,  in  summer.    En  hiver,  in  winter, 


298  XVI.      SEIZIEME 

En  automne,  in  autumn  (but  an  printemps,  in  spring.) 

Eire  en  voyage,  to  travel  about. 

En  ccs  tennes,  in  these  words. 

Vivre  en  paix,  to  live  in  peace. 

Eire  en  ville,  to  be  out,  to  be  from  home. 

//  est  en  prison,  he  is  in  prison  (he  is  a  prisoner). 

NOTE.  There  are  a  few  expressions  in  which  the  article  is  retained  after 
en;  such  are,  en  I' absence,  in  the  absence;  en  I'honneur,  in  honor.  Only/' 
and  la  are  thus  found  after  en,  never  le. 

Dans  and  en,  relating  to  time,  are  differently  used.  Dans  de- 
notes the  point  of  time,  en  the  duration.  Ex. :  — 

Dans  dix  minutes,  ten  minutes  hence. 

En  dix  minutes,  within  the  space  of  ten  minutes. 

Je  partirai  dans  huit  jours,  I  shall  set  out  in  a  week. 

M.  B.  reviendra  dans  deux  mois,  Mr.  B.  will  return  in  two  months. 

J*ai  appris  le  francais  en  dix  mois,  I  learned  French  in  ten  months. 

Entre,  parmi. 

Mitre  answers  in  general  to  the  English  between,  betwixt,  and  is 
said  of  two  objects  only.  Ex.  :  — 

Entre  la  porte  et  la  fenetre,  between  the  door  and  the  window. 

Entre  autres,  among  others. 

La  mere  tenait  I' enfant  cntre  ses  bras. 

The  mother  held  her  child  in  her  arms. 

Parmi  is  said  of  several  objects,  as  :  — 

Parmi  les  rochets,  among  the  rocks. 
Votre  grammaire  se  trouva  parmi  mes  livres. 
Your  grammar  was  found  among  my  books. 

Devant,  avant. 

Devant  is  a  local  preposition,  and  is  also  used  for  in  presence  of} 
as:  — 

Nous  jouerons  devant  la  maison,  we  will  play  before  the  house. 
//  a  para  devant  le  juge,  he  appeared  before  the  judge. 
Sur  le  devant,  in  the  front ;  la  porte  de  devant,  the  front  door. 

Avant  denotes  priority  of  time  and  order,  as :  — 
Je  suis  arrive"  avant  vous,  I  arrived  before  you. 
U article  se  met  avant  le  nom,  the  article  is  put  before  the  noun. 


REMARKS   ON   SOME   PREPOSITIONS.  209 

Avant  tout,  above  all. 

Avant  is  also  used  before  an  infinitive  with  de  :  — 

Avant  de  partir,  before  leaving. 


vers. 

Envers,  towards,  to,  is  used  for  with  regard  to,  in  a  moral  sense, 
as:  — 

Soyez  charitdbles  envers  les  pauvres,  be  charitable  towards  the  poor. 
Comportez-vous  bien  envers  lui,  behave  well  towards  him  (with  regard  to 
him). 

Vers  expresses  motion  and  is  put  before  names  of  places  and 
persons  :  — 

Vers  la  colline,  towards  the  hill. 

//  s'avan$a  vers  mol,  he  advanced  towards  me. 

Chez. 

Chez  might  be  rendered  in  English  by  at  the  house  of,  with, 
among,  etc.     Ex.  :  — 

Chez  votre  pere,  at  your  father's. 

Chez  les  Romains,  among  the  Romans. 

Chacun  est  maitre  chez  soi,  everybody  is  master  in  his  own  house. 

Je  vi  ens  de  chez  vous,  I  come  from  your  house. 

Ilors  de,  hors. 

1.  Ilors  de  denotes  an  exclusion  from  a  place,  out  of,  outside  of, 
without'."    Ex.  :  — 

Uors  de  la  maison,  out  of  the  house. 
Hors  da  royaume,  out  of  the  kingdom. 

NOTE.  In  this  signification  de  may  be  left  out,  as  :  Hors  la  maison,  hors 
la  barriere,  etc. 

2.  Hors  de  is  also  used  in  a  figurative  or  temporal  sense,  as  :  — 
H  est  hors  de  danger,  he  is  out  of  danger. 

Hors  d'&at,  out  of  condition,  unable. 

3  .    Hors  (without  de)  signifies  except,  besides  :  — 
Hors  ccla  nous  sommes  d'accord,  with  the  exception  of  that  we  are  agreed. 
NOTE.  In  this  sense  hormis  is  sometimes  used  for  hors,  more  frequently 
except?. 


300  XVI.      SEIZIEME  LEQON. 

D'avec,  <Tentre,  de  dessous,  etc. 

Some  prepositions  are  preceded  by  de,  which  serves  to  indicate 
the  point  from  which  an  action  proceeds,  as  : — 

Ma  separation  d'avec  mon  pere. 

My  separation  from  my  father. 

On  arracha  V enfant  d'entre  les  bras  de  sa  mere. 

They  tore  the  child  from  the  arms  of  its  mother. 

On  le  lira  de  dessous  le  lit. 

They  drew  him  from  under  the  bed. 

Sans. 

Sans,  without,  is  sometimes  expressed  in  English  by  but  for. 
Example :  — 

Sans  lui,  je  serai  mort  de  faim. 
But  for  him,  I  should  have  starved. 

Us. 

This  word  is  a  contraction  for  en  les.     It  is  used  for  university 
degrees.     Ex. :  — 
Bachdier  es  Icttres,  bachelor  of  arts. 

THEME   34. 

1.  Where  are  you  going?  2.  I  am  going  into  the  country.  3. 
My  friend  arrived  in  the  beginning  of  summer;  he  was  received 
with  open  arms.  4.  Is  this  book  to  (a)  your  taste?1  5.  No,  I 
do  not  like  it.  (It  does  not  please  me) .  6.  I  met  that  gentleman 
on  my  journey  in  Italy.  7.  Is  Mr.  A.  at  home?  8.  Yes,  sir;  he 
is  in  the  garden.  9.  In  the  absence  of  the  king,  who  is  now  in 
Italy,  these  affairs  must  be  suspended.2  10.  The  poor  man  had  to 
choose  between  slavery3- and  death.  11.  Why  has  she  been  so 
unjust  towards  her  parents  ?  12.  Did  you  arrive  before  or  after 
four  o'clock?  13.  Before  the  church  there  are  three  high  poplars.4 
14.  My  neighbor  was  kindly  disposed  towards  me.  15.  I  found 
this  letter  among  my  papers.  16.  Brandy  (V eau-de-vie)  is  the 
source  of  great  evils  among  that  people. 
1.  Ovut,  m.  2.  Suspendre.  3.  L'esclavage,  m.  4.  Peuplier,  m. 


REMARKS   ON  SOME  PREPOSITIONS.  301 

THEME   35. 

1.  They  (on)  told  mo  amongst  other  things,  that  the  ship  had 
been  taken  by  the  enemy  (pi).  2.  The  old  man  was  unable  (not 
in  a  condition)  to  do  anything  for  her.  3.  He  has  sold  all  his 
horses,  except  one  or  two.  4.  Now  we  turn  to  (towards)  the  south. 
5.  Among  the  merchants  in  London,  there  are  many  beneficent1 
men.  6.  He  lives  with  his  brother.  7.  The  tailor  will  come  to 
your  house  to-morrow.  8.  Where  do  you  come  from  ?  9.  I  come 
from  my  aunt's.  10.  The  wooden  horse  was  outside  the  walls2  of 
Troy.  11.  The  patient3  is  at  present  out  of  danger.  12.  Nobody 
besides  myself  was  present.  13.  Out  of  (sur)  sixty  soldiers  who 
tried  the  attack,  twenty-five  fell  into  (entre)  the  hands  of  the  enemy 
(/>/.).  14.  One  must  distinguish  true  friendship  from  (d'avec) 
(the)  false.  15.  The  dog  sprang  out4  from  under  the  table. 

1.  Bienfaisant.    2.  Les  murs  de  Troie.    3.  Le  malade.    4.  Sauter, 

II.     HOW  TO   EXPRESS   SOME  ENGLISH  PREPOSITIONS. 

Above. 

Above,  when  it  expresses  time  or  number,  so  as  to  signify  more 
than  or  longer  than,  is  rendered  in  French  by  plus  de.  Ex. :  — • 

The  fight  lasted  above  four  hours. 
Le  combat  dura  plus  de  guatre  heures. 
It  is  abo.Ye  twenty  miles  from  here. 
II  y  a  plus  de  vingt  lieues  d'ici. 

About. 

1.  About,  in  the  sense  of  around,  is  to  be  rendered  by  autour 
de.  2.  In  the  signification  of  concerning,  it  is  touchant,  concer- 
nant,  sur,  or  simply  de.  3.  In  speaking  of  things  which  people 
carry  about  them,  it  is  translated  with  sur.  Ex. :  — 

1 .  All  thronged  about  the  prince. 

Tout  le  monde  se  pressa  autour  du  prince. 

2.  I  will  speak  to  him  about  our  affair  (business). 
Je  lui  parlerai  touchant  (or  sur  or  de)  notre  affaire. 

3.  I  Lave  no  money  about  me,  je  n'ai  pas  d' argent  sur  moi. 


302  XVI.      SEIZIEME  LEQON. 

At. 

1.  At  is  most  commonly  rendered  by  a  with  or  without  an  arti* 
cle.  2.  After  nouns  or  verbs  denoting  derision,  anger,  surprise, 
sorrow,  etc.,  at  is  rendered  by  de.  3.  It  is  translated  chez  when, 
in  English,  it  precedes  the  word  Ituuse,  either  expressed  or  under- 
stood. Ex.  :  — 

1 .  We  were  at  dinner,  nous  tfions  a  diner. 

Do  you  play  at  cards,  jouez-vous  aux  cartes  ? 

2.  She  laughed  at  him,  die  se  moqua  de  lui. 
I  am  surprised  at  what  you  say. 

Je  SKIS  surpris  de  ce  que  vous  dites. 

3.  We  were  at  your  aunt's,  nous  tfions  chez  votre  tante. 

By. 

1.  By  denoting  the  agent  or  cause  is  translated  de  or  par  (see 
p.  135,  2).     Ex.:- 

Mr.  Bell  is  respected  by  everybody. 
M.  Bell  cst  respecte  de  tout  le  monde. 
Troy  was  destroyed  by  the  Greeks. 
Troie  fut  de'truite  par  les  Grccs. 

2.  In  affirmations  and  swearing  by  is  translated  par: 
He  swears  by  his  honor,  il  en  jure  par  son  Jionneur. 

3.  By,  after  the  verbs  to  sell,  to  buy,  to  work,  etc.,  preceding  a 
noun  of  weight  or  measure,  day,  week,  month,  or  year,  is  rendered 
in  French  by  a  with  the  definite  article.     Ex.  :  — 

I  sell  the  tea  by  the  pound,  je  vends  le  the'  a  la  livre. 
We  work  by  the  hour  or  by  the  day. 
Nous  travaillons  a  Vheure  ou  a  la  jourme. 

4.  When  preceding  a  numeral  immediately  followed  by  an  adjec- 
tive of  dimension,  l>y  is  rendered  in  French  by  sur.     Ex. : 

This  room  is  fifteen  feet  long  by  ten  wide. 

Cette  chambre  a  quinze  picds  de  longueur  sur  dix  de  largeur. 

5.  By,  immediately  following  the  verbs  to  kill,  to  wound,  etc., 
is  translated  in  French  by  d\m  coup  de,  when  it  expresses  the  blow, 
wound,  firing,  etc.,  of  an  instrument  by  which  a  man  was  wounded, 
killed,  etc.     Ex. :  — 


REMARKS  ON  SOME  PREPOSITIONS.        303 

The  officer  was  wounded  by  a  bullet. 
L'officier  fat  blesstfd'un  coup  de  fusil. 
Achilles  was  killed  at  the  siege  of  Troy  by  an  arrow. 
Achille  fut  tu€  au  siege  de  Troie  d'un  coup  de  fleche. 

NOTE.   If  the  blows  have  been  repeated,  a  coups  de  is  used,  in  which  case 
It  is  most  commonly  rendered  in  English  by  with.    Ex. :  — 
They  knocked  him  down  with  a  stick. 
Us  V  assommerent  a  coups  de  baton. 

THEME  36. 

1.  My  father  was  not  above  twenty-two  years  old  when  ho  was 
married.1  2.  My  uncle's  country-house2  is  very  handsome ;  but  it 
cost  him  above  eighty  thousand  francs.  3.  It  is  above  a  year  since 
my  friend  set  off  for3  America.  4.  Rome  was  built  by  Romulus. 

5.  The  poor  man  has  been  driven  out4  of  his  house  by  his  creditors.5 

6.  I  will  get  up  to-morrow  at  six  o'clock.     7.  Were  you  at  Mrs. 
D.'s  ball  last  night?     8.  I  will  pay  you  at  the  end  of  this  month. 
9.  I  rejoice  greatly  at  your  good  luck.6     10.  She  always  smiles7  at 
everything  that  is  said.     11.  Where  was  your  sister  this  morning? 
12.  She  was  at  her  aunt's.     13.  My  box8  is  a  foot  and  a  half  deep 
by  two  wide  and  four  long.     14.  Harold  was  wounded  by  an  arrow.9 

15.  William  the  Second  was  killed  by  an  arrow  in  the  New-Forest. 

16.  He  is  so  strong  that  with  his  fist10  (5,  Note)  he  could  knock 
down11  an  ox.     17.  They  killed  the  dog  with  stones.     18.  The  sol- 
diers kill  'one  another  with  bayonets.12 

1.  To  be  married,  se  marier.  2.  La  maison  de  campagne.  3.  Pour.  4.  Chasse. 
5-  Creancier,  m.  6.  Bonlieur.  7.  Sourire.  8.  Le  coffre.  0.  Flechc,  f.  10.  LQ 
poing,  11.  Abattre.  12.  La  baionette. 

From. 

1.  From,  preceding  the  name  of  a  person,  or  a  possessive  adjec- 
tive, or  a  personal  or  interrogative  pronoun  after  the  verbs  to  go,  to 
come,  to  send,  etc.,  is  generally  rendered  by  de  la  part  de.  Ex.  :  — 

Many  compliment?  from  Dr.  O. 

Bien  des  compliments  de  la  part  de  Monsieur  le  docteur  0. 

I  come  from  him  or  her  (from  them),  etc. 

Je  vims  de  sa  part  (de  leur  part}. 


304:  XVI.      SEIZIEME 

2.  From,  meaning  from  some  one's  house,  is  in  French  de  chez. 
Example :  — 

I  come  from  my  uncle's,  aunt's,  etc. 

Je  viens  de  cJiez  mon  oncle,  —  de  chez  ma  tante,  etc. 

3.  From  —  to  is  rendered  by  de  —  en.    Ex. :  — 

He  went  from  street  to  street,  from  town  to  town,  etc. 
//  alia  de  rue  en  rue,  de  ville  en  ville,  etc. 

NOTE.  When  two  names  of  towns  or  villages  are  mentioned,  to  is  ren- 
dered by  a.    Ex. :  — 
From  Paris  to  Rouen,  de  Paris  a  Rouen. 

4.  From  is  rendered  by  depuis,  and  to  by  jusqiCa,  when  speak- 
ing of  extent  or  time.     Ex. :  — 

From  Easter  to  Christmas,  depuis  Pdques  jusqu'a  Noel. 

In. 

1.,   In  —  dans  or  en,  see  these  words  in  the  first  part  of  this  Les- 
son. 

2.  In,  after  worda  denoting  pain,  hurting,  etc.,  and  preceding  a 
possessive  adjective  with  any  part  of  the  body,  is  to  be  rendered  by 
a  with  the  definite  article.     Ex. :  — 

I  have  constantly  a  pain  in  my  head. 
J*ai  toujours  mal  a  la  tete. 

3.  In  adverbial  expressions  of   time,  in  is  not  expressed  in 
French.     Ex.  :  — 

In  the  morning,  le  matin.    In  the  evening,  le  soir. 

On  or  upon. 

1.  On  or  upon  is  most  generally  sur.     Ex.  :  — 
He  climbed  upon  the  tree,  il  grimpa  sur  Varbre. 

2,  After  the  verbs  to  play,  to  live,  to  depend,  and  the  like,  on 
cr  upon  is  rendered  by  de.     Ex.  :  — 

You  play  on  the  violin,  and  I  play  on  the  flute. 
Vous  jouez  du  violon  et  moi,  je  joue  de  la  flute. 
A  good  end  often  depends  on  a  good  beginning. 
Une  bonne  fin  depend  souvent  d'un  bon  commencement. 
The  prisoner  lives  on  bread  and  water. 
Le  prisonnier  vit  de  pain  et  d'eau. 


REMARKS  ON  SOME   PREPOSITIONS.  305 

3.  The  preposition  on,  before  the  days  of  the  week  and  with 
dates,  is  dropped  in  Trench.     Ex.  :  — 

Come  on  Sunday,  venez  dimanche. 
On  the  twelfth  of  May,  le  douze  mai. 

4.  On,  denoting  time,  in  other  cases  is  translated  by  en. 

Over. 

This  preposition  is  commonly  rendered  in  French  by  sur,  but  it 
must  be  expressed  by  the  Part.  Past  of  the  verbs  passer,  finir, 
achever,  when  it  denotes  an  action  ended.  Ex.  :  — 

As  soon  as  the  rain  will  be  over. 

Des  que  la  pluie  sera  pass€e. 

Ts  dinner  over,  le  diner  est-il  fini  ? 

With. 

1.  With  is  rendered  by  de  after  such  verbs  as,  to  die,  to  meddle, 
to  do,  to  dispense,  to  load,  to  cover,  to  fill,  and  after  some  adjec- 
tives, as :  pleased,  contented,  etc.  (see  p.  250,  §  1  and  2).    Ex.:  — 

He  died  with  cold,  il  mourut  de  froid. 

The  wagon  is  loaded  with  goods,  la  voiture  est  charge's  de  marchandises. 

2.  With  is  expressed  by  a  and  the  article  before  nouns  denoting 
in  what  manner  a  thiag  is  done  or  made.     Ex.  :  — 

To  drassr  with  a  pencil,  dessiner  au  crayon. 

To  fight  with  pistols,  se  battre  au  pistolet. 

NOTE.  Charger  takes  a,  and  se  lattre,  au,  a  la,  a  V  (as  the  noun  may 
require),  before  the  names  of  materials  or  weapons  generally  used  for  loading 
fire-arms  or  for  fighting ;  otherwise,  with  is  rendered  by  avec.  Ex. :  — 

Charger  un  fusil  a  balles,  avec  des  pierres.  Se  lattre  a  V€p€e,  au  pistolet, 
avec  des  haches,  avec  des  martaux. 

The  ambiguous  English  sentence,  He  struck  the  man  with  a  wooden 
leg,  would  be  translated  into  French  by  Ilfrappa  I'homme  a  lajambe  de  bois, 
if  the  man  was  crippled ;  but  if  the  wooden  leg  is  the  weapon  of  attack, 
avec  is  used. 

3.  With  must  not  bo  expressed  after  the  following  verbs  :   to 
meet  with,  rencontrer ;  to  trust  with,  confer  qch.  a  qn.  ;  to  supply 

20 


306  XYI.      SEIZlfiME  LE£ON. 

with,  fournir  qch.  a  qn.  ;  to  reproach  with,  reprocher  qch.  a  qn. 
Examples  :  — 

"We  will  supply  him  with  everything. 
Nous  lui  fournirons  tout. 
\  reproached  him  with  his  ingratitude. 
Jc  lui  reprochai  son  ingratitude. 

HEM  AUK.   Prepositions  are  placed  in  French  before  the  words  they  gov« 
em,  though  in  English  they  are  sometimes  placed  after.    Ex. :  — 
"Whom  do  you  speak  to,  a  qui  parlez-vous? 
"What's  that  for,  pour  quoi  cela  ? 
The  man  whom  you  are  interested  in. 
LShotnme  pour  qui  vous  vous  interessez. 


THEME   37. 

1.  Go  from  me  to  Mr.  S.,  and  tell  him  that  I  am  expecting  him. 
2.  From  whom  do  you  come  ?  3.  I  come  from  Miss  B.  4. 
Charles  was  wounded  in  his  arm,  and  not  (noil)  in  his  leg.  5.  I 
have  very  often  a  pain  in  my  teeth.  6,  I  will  call  upon  you  in  the 
afternoon,  and  in  the  evening  (I  will)  go  to  the  play.  7.  Upon 
what  instrument  does  your  sister  play?  8.  She  plays  the  piano. 
9.  That  happened1  on  the  12th  [of]  March.  10.  I  am  in  the 
habit2  of  taking  a  cup  of  coffee  as  soon  as  dinner  is  over.  11.  Do 
not  meddle3  with  my  affairs ;  attend  to  your  own.  12.  Is  that 
house  covered  with  slate4  or  tiles?5  13.  It  is  covered  with  tiles. 
14.  This  picture  seems  to  be  done  with  chalk.6  15.  When  you 
meet  a  poor  man,  never  reproach  him  [with]  his  poverty.  16. 
France  extends7  from  the  Rhine  to  the  Atlantic8  Ocean.  17.  "What 
does  he  complain9  of?  18.  We  have  travelled  from  Switzerland  'to 
Italy.  19.  You  spend  all  the  day  in  going  (a  after)  from,  house  to 
house,  from  street  to  street,  from  place  to  place.  20.  Those  labor- 
ers10 work  from  (depuis)  morning11  to  night.11  21.  I  walk  every 
day  from  twelve'  (nuidt)  to  three. 

1.  Se  passa.  2.  To  be  in  the  habit  of,  avoir  Vlwbitude  cle.  3.  Se  mcler.  4.  AT. 
doise,  iii  singular.  5.  Tuile,  in  plural.  G.  Crate,  f.  7.  S'etendre.  8.  V  Ocean  At- 
lantique.  9.  Se  plaindre  de  qch.  10.  Ouvrier,  in.  11.  Put  the  article. 


USES   OP  THE   CONJUNCTION  QUE.  307 


XVII.      DIX-SEPTIEME    LEgON. 


DIFFERENT  USES   OF  THE  CONJUNCTION    QUE. 

I.     QUE  WITH  THE  INDICATIVE. 

1.  The  conjunction  que  is  used  1.  to  join  the  two  terms  of  a 
comparison ;  2.  in  a  restrictive  sense,  for  but  or  only,  as  : 

Elle  n'a  que  deux  freres,  she  has  only  two  brothers. 

2.  The  que  of  admiration  or  exclamation  expresses  wonder  or 
surprise;  it  answers  to  the  English  words  how,  how  much,  how 
many.      Ex.  :  — 

Que  vous  etes  heureux  !  how  happy  you  are ! 
Que  la  terre  est  petite  en  comparaison  avec  le  soleil  I 
How  small  is  the  earth  compared  with  the  sun ! 
Que  de  peine  vous  prenez  pour  moi ! 
How  much  trouble  you  take  for  me ! 

3.  In  short  exclamations  que  is  inserted  after  the  noun  when  the 
verb  is  omitted.     Ex.  :  — 

Quel  beau  pays  que  I'ltalie  ! 

What  a  beautiful  country  Italy  is ! 

Quel  hovime  que  ce  Pension  ! 

What  a  man  that  Fenelon  is  (or  was)  ! 

4.  It  stands  for  pourquoi  in  negative  exclamations,  as :  — 
Que  ne  puis-je  vous  aider  !    why  can  I  not  assist  you ! 

5.  The  French  periphrase  of  a  sentence  with  Jest  is  followed  by 
que,  whereas  in  English  this  is  not  expressed.     Ex.:  — 

C'est  une  belle  chose  que  la  discretion. 
Discretion  is  a  good  thing. 
C'est  une  chose  detestable  que  la  haine, 
Hatred  is  a  detestable  thing. 

If,  however,  an  Infinitive  follows,  que  need  not  be  used :  — 


308  XVII.      DIX-SEPTIEME  LEQON. 

C'est  une  horde  (que)  d'ignorer  sa  langue  maternelle. 
It  is  a  shame  not  to  know  one's  mother  tongue. 

G.  Que  must  be  inserted  after  c'est-adire,  that  is  to  say,  when  a 
verb  follows.  Que  is  also  frequently  used  after  voila  and  peut-etre. 
Example :  — 

Vous  serez  parfaitement  libres,  c*  est-a-dlre  que  vous  ne  dfyendrez  de  personne. 
You  will  be  perfectly  free,  that  is  to  say,  you  will  depend  upon  nobody. 

7.  In  the  expressions  :  que  oui,  yes;  que  si!  0  yes  !  que  non, 
no;  que  is  used  pleonastically.     Ex.:  — 

Je  dis  que  oui,  I  say  yes. 

8.  Que  stands  for  since  instead  of  depuis  que : 

Comli-sn  y  a-t-il  que  votre  sceur  est  morte  ? 
How  long  is  it  since  your  sister  died  ? 

9.  Que  is  used  for  when  after  a  peine,  scarcely,  and  in  the  sig- 
nification of  as  or  when,  after  the  specification  of  a  time,  in  which 
case  the  use  of  lorsque  would  be  incorrect.     Ex. :  — 

A  peine  e'tait-il  sorti,  que  la  maison  s'&roula. 
Scarcely  was  he  gone  out,  when  the  house  fell. 
Un  matin  que  je  sortais  de  tres-bonne  lieure. 
One  morning  as  I  went  out  early. 
Maintenant  que  vous  etes  en  France,  etc. 
Now  that  you  are  in  France.  .  .  . 

10.  Que  corresponds  to  the  English  that  after  all  verbs  of  think- 
ing, feeling,   saying*  as :    dire,    affirmer,    repondre,   declarer, 
croire,  penser,  sentir,  etc. ,  and  usually  takes  the  Indicative  when 
these  words  are  used  affirmatively.     In  English  the  that  is  often 
omitted,  but  in  French  it  must  always  be  employed.     Ex. :  — 

Dltes-lui  que  je  I'attends. 

Tell  him  that  I  am  waiting  for  him. 

H  m'a  rfyondu  qu'il  nyen  savait  rien. 

He  answered  mo  that  he  knew  nothing  of  it. 

On  croit  qu'elle  est  tres-riche. 

She  is  supposed  to  be  very  rich. 

*  Where  in  Latin  the  Ace.  IB  used  with  the  Infinitive. 


USES   OF  THE   CONJUNCTION  QUE.  309 

NOTE.    Que  is  not  only  always  expressed  in  French,  but  repeated  before 
each  member  of  the  proposition.    Ex.:  — 
Je  crois  que  vous  vous  trompez  et  que  vous  ne  re'ussirez  pas. 
I  think  you  are  mistaken,  and  that  you  will  not  succeed. 

11.  In  many  cases  where  the  conjunction  is  repeated  in  English, 
the  French,  instead  of  repeating  it,  put  que  in  the  place  of  it.  This 
is  the  case  with  lorsque,  quandy  pendant  que,  tandis  que,  parce 
que,  tant  que  and  des  que.  Ex. :  — 

Lorsque  I'empereur  fut  revenu  ct  qu'il  (and  when  he)  eut  visits  le  camp,  il 
r€solut  de  livrer  bataille. 

Tandis  que  Charles  XII  donnait  un  roi  a  la  Pologne  soumise,  que  le  Dane- 
mark  n'osait  le  troubler,  ct  que  le  roi  de  Prusse  recherchait  son  amititf,  le  czar  de- 
venait  de  jour  en  jour  plus  redoutable. 


THEME  38. 

1.  I  am  much  younger  than  you.  2.  Caroline  is  only  seventeen 
years  old.  3.  How  pretty  she  is !  4.  How  I  hate  flatterers  I1  5. 
How  small  is  the  part  of  the  world  which  we  inhabit  !2  6.  What 
(<que  de)  misfortunes  you  have  undergone  !3  7.  If  you  are  (avez) 
cold,  why  (§  4)  don't  you  put  on  your  cloak?  8.  It  is  a  very  dif- 
ficult thing  to  know  (§  5)  [how  to]  keep  what  one  has.  9.  Look, 
it  rains!  10.  Perhaps  he  will  come.  11.  I  believe  (that)  you 
are  right.  12.  He  told  me  that  he  had  not  yet  received  a  letter 
from  his  uncle.  13.  Are  you  ready?  14.  0  no  !  (§  7)  I  cannot 
finish  before  an  hour.  15.  Have  you  not  been  there  ?  16.  0  yes  ! 
17.  How  long  is  it  since  you  lost  your  father?  18.  One  day  when 
the  two  sparrows4  had  flown  out,5  the  children  took  away6  their  nest. 
19.  Tell  me  the  day  (on  which,  §  9)  you  think7  of  leaving.  20., 
I  think  he  is  not  at  home.  21.  Scarcely  is  he  out  of  bed  before  he 
beings  to  work.  22.  Why  (§  4)  did  you  not  tell  it?  23.  When 
you  have  acknowledged  your  faults,  and  (§11)  have  repaired8 
them,  I  will  forgive  you. 

1.  Flatteur.    2.  Jlabiter.    3.  Eprouves.    4.  Le  moineau.    5.  Etaieni  sortis.    6. 
Enlever.    7.  Vous  comptez  partir.    8.  Spares. 


310  XVII.       DIX-SEPTIEME 


II.     QUE  WITII  THE   SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

1.  Que,  in  a  conditional  sense,  is  used  in  the  beginning  of  a  sen- 
tence for  the  word  whether,  and  in  the  middle,  to  avoid  the  repeti- 
tion of  si  ;  in  both  cases  it  governs  the  Subjunctive  inood.    Ex.  :  — 

Whether  he  come  or  not,  I  do  not  care. 

Qu'il  vienne  ou  non,  je  ne  m'cn  soucie  pas. 

If  somebody  calls  and  I  am  out,  send  for  me. 

Si  quelqu'un  vient  me  voir  et  que  je  sois  sorti,  envoyez-moi  cJiercher. 

If  you  meet  her,  and  (if)  you  have  time  to  speak  to  her. 

Si  vous  la  renconirez  et  que  vous  ayez  le  temps  de  lai  parler. 

2.  "FoT.till,  instead  ofjusqifa  ce  que  after  attendre,  to  wait 
Example  :  — 

Wait  till  it  gets  less  cold. 
Attendez  qu'il  fosse  moins  froid. 
You  must  wait  till  I  am  back. 
//  faut  attendre  que  je  sois  de  retour. 

3.  For  the  English  third  person  of  the  Imperative,  let  him  or  ht 
them.     Ex.:  — 

Let  him  come,  qu'il  vienne. 

Let  them  do  it,  qu'ils  (qu'elles)  le  fassent. 

4.  For  that,  instead  of  pour  que,  afin  que  :  — 

Come  here  that  I  may  speak  to  you. 
Venez  id  que  je  vous  parle. 

5.  Que  is  used  with  ne  for  the  English  lut  (or  but  that)  after 
verbs  expressing  doubt,  fear,  etc.  (see  p.  293,  §  15).     Ex.:  — 

I  don't  doubt  but  that  you  are  right. 
Je  ne  doute  pas  que  vous  n'aijez  raison. 

6.  In  the  same  manner  que  is  used  for  before,  instead  of  avant 
que  ;  for  unless,  instead  of  a  moins  que  ;  for  without,  instead  of  sans 
que,  and  for  yet,  instead  of  et  cependant.     Ex.  :  — 

I  shall  not  go  out  before  you  are  in. 
Je  ne  sortirai  pas  que  vous  ne  soyez  rentre. 


USES   OF  THE   CONJUNCTION  QUE.  311 

I  shall  not  pardon  you  unless  you  acknowledge  your  faults. 

Je  ne  vous  pardonnerai  pas  que  vous  ne  reconnaissiez  vos  fautes. 

He  takes  no  trip  without  some  accident  befalling  him. 

77  ne  fait  pas  de  voyage  qu'il  ne  lui  arrive  quelque  accident. 

Though  he  should  have  all  the  gold  in  the  world,  yet  he  would  not  ba 
satisfied. 

//  aurait  tout  I'or  da  monde,  qu'il  ne  serait  pas  content. 

(For  the  use  of  que  instead  of  repeating  compound  conjunctions,  and  af- 
ter verbs  governing  the  Subjunctive,  see  Lesson  19,  on  the  Subjunctive 
Mood,  §  12). 

THEME   39. 

1 .  Whether  it  rain  or  not,  I  must  go  out  directly.  2.  If  I  were 
rich  and  had  children,  I  would  give  them  a  good  educatkw.  3. 
Whether  you  be  rich  or  poor,  you  should  (devez)  be  a  man  of  prob- 
ity. 4.  He  had  not  a  doubt  (did  not  doubt)  but  that  this  was  his 
pursuer.1  5.  Wait  till  the  rain  is  over.  6.  A  miser2  might  have 
all  the  gold  in  the  world,  he  would  never  be  satisfied.  7.  You  shall 
not  go  out  before  it  is  light.3  8.  Let  him  have  his  share.4  9.  Come 
that  I  may  tell  you  the  reason  of  that  thing  (en).  10.  May  heaven 
bless5  you !  11.  May  the  earth  lie  lightly  on  him  (be  light6  to 
him).  12.  Let  him  employ  his  time  well.  13.  I  shall  not  leave 
the  house  (go  out)  before  you  pay  me.  14.  He  cannot  play  but 
he  hurts7  himself.  15.  If  you  go  to  Paris  and  (§1)  will  take  me 
with  you,  I  shall  be  most  happy.8  16.  My  friend  says  he  will  not 
pay  the  bookseller9  before  he  has  received  all  the  books  (which)  he 
(has)  ordered.  17.  I  shall  put  off10  my  journey;  I  shall  wait  till 
your  time  allows  you  to  accompany  me. 

1.  Persteuteur.  2.  A  rare.  3.  To  be  light  — faire  jour.  4.  Part,t.  5.  Binir. 
6.  Legere.  7.  Se  faire  mal.  8.  Most  happy  —  Enchant^.  9.  Le  libraire.  10, 
Rcmettre. 

READING   LESSON.     . 

LE    CONNETABLE   DE   BOURBON   ET   BAYARD. 
(Fin.) 

Le  Connet.  Mais  ma  patrie  a  etc  ingrate  apres  tant  do  services 
que  je  lui  avais  rendus.  Le  roi  m'a  fait  une  injustice  dnorme.  En 


312  XVII.      DIX-SEPTIEME  LEgON. 

me  depouillant1  de  mon  bien,  on  a  detache  de  moi  jusqu'k  (even) 
mes  domestiques,  Matignon  et  d'Argouges.  J'ai  ete  contraint, 
pour  sauver  ma  vie,  de  m'enfuir  presque  seul.  Que  voulais-tu  que 
je  fisse? 

Bay.  Que  vous  soufirissiez  toutes  sortes  de  maux,  plutot  quo  de 
ipinquer  a  la  France  et  a  la  grandeur  de  votre  maison.  Si  la  per- 
secution dtait  trop  violente,  vous  pouviez  vous  retirer :  mais  il  valait 
mieux  £tre  pauvre,  obscur,  inutile  h  tout,  que  de  prendre  les  armes 
centre  nous.  Votre  gloire  eut  6t6  au  comble2dans  la  pauvrete  et 
dans  le  plus  miserable  exil. 

Le  Conn.  Mais  ne  vois-tu  pas  que  la  vengeance  s'est  jointe  h 
1?  ambition  pour  me  jeter  dans  cette  extremite  ?  J'ai  voulu  que  le 
roi  se  repentit  de  m'avoir  traite  si  mal. 

Bay.  II  fallait  Ten  faire  repentir  par  une  patience  a  toute 
epreuve,  qui  n'est  pas  moins  lavertu  d'un  lieros  que  le  courage. 

Le  Conn.  Mais  le  roi,  &ant  si  in  juste  et  si  aveugle8  par  sa 
mere,  me*ritait-il  que  j'eusse  de  si  grands  e*gards  pour  lui  ? 

Bay.  Si  le  roi  ne  le  me'ritait  pas,  la  France  entiere  le  me'ritait. 
La  dignit^  meme  de  la  couronne,  dont  vous  etes  un  des  heritiers,  le 
meritait.  Yous  vous  deviez4  a  vous-meme  d'epargner5  la  France, 
dont  vous  pouviez  etre  un  jour  roi. 

Le  Conn.  Eh  bien !  j'ai  tort,  je  Tavoue ;  mais  ne  sais-tu  pas 
combien  les  meilleurs  coours  ont  de  peine  a  resister  a  leur  ressenti- 
ment? 

Bay.  Je  le  sais  bien :  mais  le  vrai  courage  consiste  &  resister. 
Si  vous  connaissez  votre  faute,  hatez-vous  de  la  reparer.  Pour  moi, 
je  meurs,  et  je  vous  trouve  plus  &  plaindre  dans  vos  prosperitds, 
que  moi  dans  mes  soufiranees.  Quand  1'empereur  ne  vous  trompe- 
rait  pas,  quand  meme  il  vous  donnerait  sa  sosur  en  manage,  et  qu'il 
partagerait  la  France*  avec  vous,  il  n'effacerait  point  la  tache6  qui 
deshonore  votre  vie.  Le  connetable  de  Bourbon  rebelle !  ah ! ' 
quelle  honte  !  Ecoutez  Bayard  mourant  comme  il  a  vecu,  et  ne  ces- 
sant  de  dire  la  verite. 

1.  Strip.    2.  The  highest.    3.  Blinded.    4.  To  owe.    6.  To  spare.    6.  The  stain. 


USB  OF  THE  TENSES  OF  THE  INDICATIVE.     313 

XVIII.    DIX-HUITIEME 


USE  OF  THE  TENSES   OF  THE  INDICATIVE. 

I.    PRESENT  TENSE. 

1.  The  Present  of  the  Indicative  corresponds  to  the  English  pres- 
ent.    In  French  there  is  only  one  form  of  this  tense,  as  :   Je  Us,  I 
read ;  faime,  I  like.    The  English  forms :  I  am  reading,  I  do  read, 
etc.,  must  therefore  always  be  translated  as  if  they  were :  I  read, ye 
Us.     Ex. :  — 

The  children  are  playing  in  the  garden. 
Les  enfants  jouent  au  jardin. 
Nous  dmons  toujours  a  deux  heures. 

2.  The  Present  tense  is  sometimes  employed  for  the  Future, 
when  speaking  of  actions  which  are  to  be  done  at  a  time  proximate 
or  near,  as  :  — 

Je  pars  demain,  I  (shall)  set  out  to-morrow. 

3.  It  is  also  used  in  a  narrative,  instead  of  the  Preterite,  in  or- 
der to  give  more  vivacity  to  the  description,  and  to  make  the  event, 
as  it  were,  present.     For  this  reason  it  is  called  also  the  historical 
or  narrative  Present.     Ex.:  — 

A  cetle  nouvdle,  qu'il  repousse  avec  irritation,  Napoleon  descend  de  la  mon- 
tagne  du,  Salut  et  s'approche  de  la  MosJcwa  et  de  la  porte  Dorogomilow.  II 
s'arrete  (stops)  encore  a  Ventrte  de  cette  barriere,  mais  inutilement.  Marat  h 
presse,  etc. 

,  Here  repousse,  descend,  s'approche,  s'arrete,  presse  are  historical  Presents  fin* 
Stead  of  repoussa,  descendit,  syapprocha,  s'arreta,  pressa).  It  is  particularly 
liked  for  euphony,  when  several  Preterites  of  the  first  conjugation  would  b$ 
used.  Example:  — 

Mentor  range  les  soldats,  il  marche  a  leur  tete  et  s'avance  vers  les  ennemis  (in 
stead  of  rangea,  marcha,  s'avan$a). 

4.  The  Present  tense  must  also  be  used  for  the  English  Perfect, 


o!4  XVIII.      DIX-HUITIEME 

when  a  duration  of  time  is  expressed  in  which  the  condition  is  still 
continuing :  — 

How  long  have  you  been  here  ? 

Df'puls  quand  ctes-vous  id  ? 

Ha  re  3-011  had  this  dog  long  ? 

Y  a-t-il  longtemps  que  vous  avez  ce  chienf 

I  have  had  him  these  two  years. 

Je  Vai  depuis  deux  ans. 

If  the  Compound  of  the  Present  were  used  in  these  sentences,  it  would 
imply  that  the  condition  no  longer  existed.  H  y  a  deux  ans  qu'il  a  &.& 
mort,  would  be  absurd  in  French,  as  it  would  imply  that  he  was  alive  again. 

THEME  40. 

1.  Do  you  speak  French?  2.  Yes,  sir,  I  do.  3.  Is  it  raining? 
4.  No,  it  does  not  rain.  5.  I  do  not  like  lazy  boys.  6.  I  cannot 
write  with  a  bad  pen.  7.  I  see  a  man  who  is  asleep.1  8.  What 
are  you  doing  ?  9.  I  am  reading  a  very  amusing  book ;  you  must 
read  it  also;  to-n:orrow  I  shall  send  it  to  you.  10.  I  set  out  to- 
morrow for  Germany.  11.  I  shall  be  ready  in  a  moment.  12. 
How  long  have  you  been  (§  4)  in  Paris?  13.  I  have  been  here 
for  (depui*)  three  months.  14.  Have  you  had  this  stick2  long? 
15.  I  have  had  it  for  more  than  (de)  four  years.  16.  Has  your 
father  known  that  gentleman  long?  IT.  I  think  he  has  known  him 
for  a  year  or  two. 

1.  Qui  dort.    2.  Canxe,  f. 


II.    PAST  TENSES. 

5.  The  Imperfect  tense  denotes  continuity  of  an  action  or  condi- 
tion, in  past  time.  It  is  therefore  used  to  express  what  was  custom- 
ary or  habitual.  It  is  also  used  in  descriptions  of  persons  and  of 
things,  an  expressing  physical  and  moral  qualities,  traits  of  charac- 
ter etc.*  Ex.:  — 

*  Hence  it  is  called  by  some  grammarians  the  simultaneous  past,  and  by  soma 
the  descriptive  tense. 


USE   OP  THE  TENSES   OP  THE  INDICATIVE.  315 

Henri  IV  elait  un  bon  prince,  il  avait  de  Idles  qualite's,  il  aimait  son  peuple  el 
MI  elait  aim?. 

Je  ne  savais  pas  ccla. 

Pendant  mon  scjour  a  la  campagne  je  me  levais  tons  les  matins  a  cinq  hcurcs 
et  je  falsais  de  longues  promenades. 

Calypso  ne  pouvait  se  consoler  du  depart  d'  Ulysse.  Sa  grotte  ne  r€sonnait 
plus  de  son  chant.  Les  nymphes  qui  la  servaient,  n'osaient  lui  parler.  Elle  s« 
promenait  souvent  seule,  etc. 

Lorsquefetais  en  pleine  mer,  je  m'amusais  quelquefois  a  dessiner  les  beaux 
nuages,  semblables  a  des  groupes  de  montagnes,  qui  voguaient  a  la  suite  les  uns  des 
autres,  sur  I'azur  des  deux. 

La  grotte  de  la  de*esse  etait  sur  le  penchant  d'une  colline:  de  la  on  d&ouvrait 
la  mer ;  d'un  autre  cote"  on  voyait  une  riviere  oil  se  rnontraient  des  iles  borde'esde 
kauts  peupliers  qui  portaient  leurs  tetes  superbes  jusque  dans  les  nues.  Les 
divers  canaux  qui  formaient  ces  iles,  semblaient  se  jouer  dans  la  campagne:  les 
uns  roulaient  leurs  eaux  claires  avec  rapidite*;  d'autres  avaient  une  eau  paisible 
et  dormante.  On  apercevait  de  loin  des  cottines  et  des  montagnes  qui  se  perdaient 
dans  les  nues.  Les  montagnes  voisines  dtaient  couvertes  de  pampres  verts  qui 
pendaient  en  jestons :  le  raisin, plus  eclatant  que  la  pourpre,  ne  pouvait  se  cacher 
sous  les  feuilles,  et  la  vigne  elait  accablee  sous  son  fruit. 

G.  When  two  occurrences  take  place,  that  which  is  interrupted 
by  the  other  and  which  was  lasting  before  the  other  happened,  must 
be  in  the  Imperfect  tense  :  — 

Je  dormais  (I  was  sleeping)  lorsquyil  entra. 

Je  le  surpris  pendant  qu'il  tfcrivait. 

From  this  we  see  that  whenever  in  English  the  Imperfect,  I  was,  with 
the  Part.  pres.  is  used  (I  was  sleeping,  I  was  writing,  etc.),  in  French  the 
Imperfect  tense  must  be  employed. 

7.  In  longer  narrations,  all  those  parts  which  do  not  form  the 
thread  of  the  narrative,  but  serve  only  to  illustrate  the  principal 
facts,  and  which  are  only  explanatory  additions  or  observations  of  the 
writer,  are  in  the  Imperfect  tense.  Ex.:  — 

Au  temps  que  Vltalie  &ait  francaise,  une  sedition  &lata  (broke  out)  dans  un 
des  regiments  en  garnison  a  Livourne.  C'&ait  une  affaire  grave:  c'elait  beau- 
coup  plus  qu'une  mutmerie  de  soldats.  L'empereur  parut  extremement  irritet 
lorsqu'il  apprit  cette  nouvelle.  Ses  ordres  €taient  precis  et  tcrriblcs;  il  ne  voulait 
pas  de  conseils  de  guerre,  etc. 


316  XVIH.      DIX-HUITIEME  LEgON. 

Etait,  tfaient  and  voulait  serve  as  illustrative  additions  and  explanatory 
observations  of  the  writer  on  the  facts  expressed  by  the  verbs  €data,  parut, 
apprit. 

8.  After  the  conjunction  si,  if,  the  Imperfect  is  used  to  denote  a 
condition  or  supposition  (see  §  18).     Ex.:  — 

Si  favais  de  V  argent.    Si  man  frere  venait,  etc. 
II  me  demanda  si  favais  des  heures  libres. 
He  asked  me  if  I  had  some  hours  to  spare. 

9.  Sometimes  the  Imperfect  is  used  instead  of  the  Conditional, 
to  denote  that  something  would  have  happened,  had  not  another 
occurrence  prevented  it,  as :  — 

J*€tais  perdu,  s'il  ne  m'avait  pas  retenu. 

I  should  have  been  lost,  if  he  had  not  held  me. 

NOTE.  In  a  similar  manner  the  expressions  :  should  have,  ought  to  have, 
and  could  have,  are  often  rendered  in  French  by  the  Imperfects :  H  fallait, 
je  devais,  il  pouvait,  etc.  Ex.:  — 

Vbus  deviez  me  le  dire  tout  de  suite. 

You  ought  to  have  told  me  directly. 

THEME  41. 

1.  Caesar  was  a  great  general.  2.  Henry  the  Fourth  was  a  good 
king,  he  loved  his  people.  3.  We  were  at  dinner  when  the  cou- 
rier1 arrived  (Pret.).  4.  Tranquillity  reigned  throughout  (dans) 
the  whole  country.  5.  The  general  was  waiting  for  troops2  which 
were  to  (devaient)  come.  6.  My  father  studied  (used  to  study) 
much  when  he  was  young.  7.  If  he  came  now,  he  would  find  me 
prepared.  8.  When  I  was  at  Paris,  I  went  every  morning  to 
take  a  walk  in  the  Champs-Elyseesy  or  in  the  Bois  de  Boulogne ; 
afterwards3  I  came  home,  where  I  employed4  myself  till  dinner, 
either  in  reading5  or  writing,  and  in  the  evening,  I  generally  went 
[for]  'amusement6  to  the  French  Theatre  or  the  Opera.  9.  If  I 
were  in  France,  I  would  learn  French.  10.  If  he  had  something, 
he  would  give  it  to  you.  11.  I  asked  him  if  his  father  was  at 
home.  12.  He  answered  that  he  did  not  know  it.  13.  I  thought 
you  were  wrong.  14.  I  observed  that  he  was  quite  pale.7 

1.  Le  courier.     2.  Troupes,  pi.  f.    3.  Apres  cela.    4.  S'occuper,    5.  A  lire.    6. 
£T amuser.    7.  Pdle. 


USE  OF  THE  TENSES   OF  THE  INDICATIVE.  317 

THE   PRETERITE. 

10.  This  tense  (as:  fallai,  je  vis,  je  regus,  etc.)  is  used  in 
French  to  express  a  particular  fact  or  event  entirely  elapsed,  which 
has  happened  but  once,  or  very  seldom,  at  a  definite  time.     It  is  the 
narrative  or  historical  tense.     Ex.:  — 

Je  fas  a  Rome  V&6  pass?. 

II  partit  le  20  Oclobre. 

Les  Romains  chasserent  Tarquin  de  Home. 

Apres  la  mort  d'Aristide,  Cimon  prit  les  renes  du  gouvernement. 

Ce  fat  l'€poque  ou  la  Grece  commenca  a  produire  les  grands  hommes. 

Quand  les  ordres  de  Criton  furent  executes,  un  domestique  apporta  la  caitpe 
(cup,  goblet)  fatale. 

Le  premier  Octobre  1714  Charles  XII  quitta  enfin  la  Turquie.  Les  Turcs 
accompagnerent  le  roi  jusqu'a  la  frontiers  et  comblerent  ce  monarque  de  tons  les 
signes  de  leur  respect  ct  de  leur  admiration.  Pendant  cinq  jours  Charles  sup- 
porta  la  lenteur  qu'entrame  naturellement  un  long  cortege;  le  sixieme  jour  ilper- 
dit  patience  et  concut  Vide'e  de  continuer  le  voyage  avec  deux  compagnons.  Ac- 
compagne  de  deux  colonels  sue'dois,  il  abandonna  le  cortege.  Tous  trois  fran- 
chirent  la  frontiers  et  continuerent  le  voyage  a  cheval  avec  une  vitesse  extraordi- 
naire. Apres  22  jours  Charles  arriva  devant  les  portes  de  Stralsund. 

11.  In  longer  narrations  all  the  facts  which  form  the  thread  of 
the  relation,  are  expressed  in  the  Preterite,  whereas  explanatory  re- 
marks serving  only  to  elucidate  or  complete  the  relation  of  the  facts, 
are  in  the  Imperfect  (see  §  7)  or  in  the  Pluperfect.     Ex.:  — 

Les  onze  magistrals  qui'veittaient  a  V execution  des  criminds  se  rendirent  a  la 
prison  de  Socrate  pour  lui  annoncer  le  moment  de  son  trepas  (death).  Plu- 
sieurs  de  ses  disciples  entrerent  ensuite;  Us  etaient  a  peu  pres  au  nombre  de 
vingt ;  Us  trouverent  aupres  de  lui  Xantippe,  son  Spouse,  qui  tenait  le  plus  jeune 
de  ses  enfants  entre  ses  bras.  Des  qu'elle  les  apercut,  die  s'ecria :  Ah !  voila 
vos  amis.  Socrate  pria  Criton  de  la  faire  remener  chez  elle  (to  take  her 
home). 

Here  the  Preterites  rendirent,  entrerent,  trouverent,  apercut,  sYena  and  pria, 
express  the  facts,  whereas  qui  veillaient,  Us  tfaient,  qui  tenait,  etc.,  are  inci- 
dental additions. 

12.  When  two  facts  occur  together  so  that  one  is  interrupted  by 
the  other,  the  verb  which  expresses  the  interruption  is  in  the  Preter- 
ite, the  other  in  the  Imperfect.     Ex.:  —  ' 


318  XVIII.      DIX-HUITIEME  LEgON. 

Je  dormals  quand  il  entra. 

Je  dejeunais  quand  vous  vintes  me  demander. 

I  was  breakfasting  when  you  came  to  ask  for  me. 

THEME  42. 

1.  I  saw  the  queen  of  England  last  year.  2.  My  aunt  died  the 
day  before  yesterday.  3.  Cato  killed  himself  lest  he  should  (de 
psur  de)  fall  into  the  hands  of  Caesar.  4.  Marius  was  ill-treated 
by  (de)  fortune;  however  he  did  not  lose  his  courage.  5.  Rome 
was,  for  (pendant)  more  than  two  hundred  years,  the  mistress  *  of 
the  world.  6.  King  Pepin  died  in  768 ;  Charlemagne,  his  son, 
succeeded  (him).  7.  We  set  off  as  soon  as  we  had2  the  order  for 
it  (en).  8.  My  brother's  servant  brought  me  a  letter  this  morning 
before  I  was  up.3  9.  Epaminondas  refused  the  presents  of  Darius, 
10.  The  Duke  of  Bouillon  was  obliged  to  give  the  town  of  Sedan 
to  Henry  the  Fourth ;  but  this  prince,  satisfied  with  his  submission,4 
gave5  it  him  back5  soon.  11.  Napoleon  was  born6  in  Corsica.7  12. 
When  some  one  represented  to  Napoleon  that  a  thing  was  impossi- 
ble, he  declared  that  this  word  was  not  French. 

1.  La  maitresse.  2.  Pret.  of  recevoir.  3.  Lev6.  4.  Soumission,  f.  5.  Rendre, 
6.  Pret.  of  the  verb  naitre,  p.  181.  7.  En  Corse. 

THE   COMPOUND   OF    THE   PRESENT. 

13.  The  Compound  of  the  Present  (fai  vu,  fai  regu,  etc.)  is 
used  to  express  a  thing  as  having  taken  place  at  a  time  not  specified, 
or  in  a  period  not  fully  elapsed.  Ex.:  — 

J'ai  perdu  tons  mes  enfants. 

M.  Laurent  a  beaucoup  voyage'. 

Nous  avons  renonce"  (given  up)  a  nos  droits. 

Alexandre  le  Grand  a  detruit  I' empire  des  Perses. 

L'avez  vous  vu  aujoud'hui? —  Oui  je  Vai  vu  ce  matin. 

Nous  avous  eu  beaucoup  de  pluie  celte  ann€e. 

NOTE.  The  French  Perfect  corresponds  to  the  same  form  in  English  in 
all  cases,  except  that  given  under  the  Present  tense,  §  4,  in  such  phrases  as 
Depuis  quand  etes  vous  id,  how  long  have  you  been  here  ?  But  the  French 
tense  is  much  more  frequently  used  than  the  English,  as  will  be  seen  in  the 
following  paragraphs. 


USE   OF  THE   TENSES   OP  THE  INDICATIVE.  31, 

14.  The  Compound  of  the  Present  translates  the  English  Imper- 
fect, whenever  this  does  not  denote  continuous  or  habitual  state  or 
action  (see  §§  5,  6,  7),  or  is  not  strictly  a  historical  past.     It  is  the 
tense  most  frequently  used  in  conversation.     Ex. :  — 

Did  you  sec  him  yesterday  ? 

L'avez-vous  vu  hier  (not  le  vites-vous)  ? 

No,  sir,  I  did  not  see  him. 

Non,  Monsieur,  je  ne  Vai  pas  vu. 

Did  they  tell  him  to  come  at  six  ? 

Lui  a-t-on  dit  de  venir  a  six  heures  ? 

Yes  -they  told  him  to  come  at  six  o'clock  precisely. 

Out,  on  lui  a  dit  de  venir  a  six  heures  pr&ises. 

Les  Francais  ont  gagne*  la  bataiUe  de  Marengo. 

In  this  last  sentence,  gagnerent  would  be  perfectly  correct,  but  would  refer 
merely  to  an  historical  event  in  the  past,  with  no  bearing  upon  the  present. 
Ont  gagn€  connects  the  fact  stated  with  something  present,  either  in  the 
speaker  or  in  the  hearer. 

15.  The  Compound  cf  the  Present  is  idiomatically  used  in  famil- 
iar conversation,  instead  of  the  Compound  of  the  Future,  as : 

Avez-vous  bientot  fini  votre  theme  f     Oui,  je  Vai  fini  dans  un  moment. 
Will  you  soon  have  done  your  exercise  3     Yes,  I  shall  have  finished  it  in 
a  moment ;  instead  of  the  more  formal  Aurez-vous  Jini J'aurai  fini. 

THEME  43. 

1.  The  horse,  when  ne  has  run1  his  course;  the  bee,  when  it  has 
made  its  honey ; 2  and  the  good  man,  when  he  has  done  good3  to 
others,  do  not  make  a  noisy  boast4  about  it,  but  go  on5  repeating  the 
action ;  as  the  vine,6  in  its  season,  produces  new  clusters7  again. 
2.  Fenelon  preached  with  success  from  the  age  of  nineteen,  and 
wrote  many  works  which  are  admired  for  their  beauty  of  style  ;  but 
that  which  has  gained8  him  the  greatest  reputation  is  his  "  Telma- 
chus,"9  where  he  has  displayed10  all  the  riches  of  the  French  lan- 
guage. 3.  No  work  had  ever  a  greater  reputation  ;  it  is  written  in 
a  lively,11  simple,  natural,  and  elegant  manner ;  its  fictions  are  well 
imagined,  the  moral12  sublime,  and  the  political  maxims  (which)  it 
contains,  all13  tend  to  the  happiness  of  mankind.14 


320  XTIII.      DIX-HUITIEME   LEQON. 

1.  Achev6.  2.  find,  m.  3.  Du  lien.  4.  Ne  s'en  vantent  pas.  5.  Continue?.  6. 
Vigne,  f.  7.  Grappc,  f.  8.  iwi  a  /«iZ.  9.  Telemaque.  10.  Deployer.  11.  Anime. 
12.  io  morale.  13.  Tendre  a.  14.  Z>es  hommes. 

THE    COMPOUNDS    OF    TILE   IMPERFECT  AND    OF   THE   PRETERITE. 

16.  These  tenses  are  formed  from  the  Imperfect  and  Preterite, 
and  correspond  to  them  fully ;  only  that  they  represent  their  action 
as  having  taken  place  previous  to  some  other  event  referred  to,  and 
cannot  be  used  entirely  independently,  but  usually  stand  connected 
with  a  conjunction  or  an  adverb  of  tune,     If  this  conjunctive  clause 
expresses  a  definite  past  time,  the  Compound  of  the  Preterite  is 
employed,  especially  after  the  conjunctions  aussitot  que,  lorsque, 
quand,  des  que,  a  peine,  lientot,  en  un  moment,  un  jour  quet  etc. 
Example :  — 

Aussitdt  que  feus  terming  mes  affaires,  je  repartis. 

A  peine  eut-il  prononce'  ce  mot,  qu'il  s'en  repentit. 

Des  que  le  parlement  se  fat  assemble*,  Ve"meute  cessa. 

As  soon  as  the  parliament  was  assembled,  the  riot  ceased. 

It  is  here  not  to  be  overlooked  that  in  the  use  of  the  Compound  Preterite 
a  more  immediate  relation,  a  closer  connection  must  exist  between  the  two 
past  events. 

17.  With  the  Compound  of  the  Imperfect,  this  close  connection 
fails,  and  this  is  the  distinguishing  feature  of  this  tense,  which  is 
also  used  like  the  Imperfect  for  descriptions,  for  continuous  events, 
and  frequently  repeated  or  customary  previous  actions.     Ex.  :  — 

Platon  avait  re$u  de  la  nature  un  corps  robuste. 

J' avals  deja  terming  mes  affaires,  quand  je  re$us  votre  lettre. 

A  la_campagne,  quand  j'avais  dine",  je  faisais  une  promenade  de  deux  lieues. 

18.  The  Compound  of  the  Imperfect  is  also  used  after  the  con- 
junction si,  if,  the  same  in  French  as  in  English  (see  §  9).     Ex. : 

Si  vous  &iez  venu  plus  tott  vous  m'auriez  trouve*  a  la  maison. 
tS'il  avait  parle"  plus  haut  (louder),  je  Vaurais  compris. 

THEME  44. 

1.  The  Tyrians  had,  by  their  pride,1  offended  the  great  Sesostris, 
who  ruled  in  Egypt,  and  who  had  conquered  so  many  kingdoms. 
2.  The  wealth  which  they  had  acquired2  by  commerce,  and  the  strength 


USB   OF  THE  TENSES   OP  THE  INDICATIVE.  321 

of  the  impregnable3  city  of  Tyre,  lying4  in  the  sea,  had  lifte.d  up5 
the  heart  of  these  people.  8.  They  had  refused  to  pay  Sesostris 
the  tribute6  which  ho  had  imposed  upon  them  (leur)  on  his  return 
from  his  conquests ; 7  and  they  had  furnished  troops  to  his  brother, 
who  had  attempted8  to  kill  him  in  the  midst  of  the  festivities9  of  a 
great  banquet.  4.  As  soon  as  Sesostris  learned10  this,  he  deter- 
mined11 to  humiliate  then:  pride  and  to  destroy  their  commerce  upon  « !l 
seas.  5.  Julius  Caesar,  having  disembarked12  in  Africa,  fell  [down] 
as  he  was  leaving  the  vessel ;  this  appeared  to  his  soldiers  a  very 
inauspicious13  omen:13  he,  however,  turned  the  feelings  of  the  arn<y 
to  his  advantage  by  exclaiming  (en  s'ecriant),  "It  is  now,  O 
Africa,  that  I  hold  thee." 

1.  Orgueil,  m.  2.  Acquises.  3.  Imprenable  (before  the  noun).  4.  Situ6e  dans* 
6.  Enfle.  6.  Le  tribut.  7.  Conquete,  f.  8.  Voulu.  9.  Joies.  10.  Apprendre.  11. 
II  resolut  cThumilier.  12.  Ay  ant  debar  que.  13.  Un  presage  de  mauvaise  augur  e, 

III.      THE  FUTURE   TENSES. 

19.  The  Future  (je  parlerai,  je  ferai,  etc.)  denotes  in  general 
future  events  or  circumstances,  as  :  — 

Charles  partira  demain. 

20.  It  must  sometimes  be  used  in  French  after  adverbs  of  time 
(quand,  lorsque,  etc.)  where  the  English  use  the  Present,  when  the 
idea  is  one  of  future  time.     Ex. :  — 

Vous  pouvez  venir  quand  vous  voudrez. 
You  may  come  when  you  like. 

21.  It  is  used  as  a  softened  form  of  the  Imperative,  implying  the 
expectation  of  fulfilment.     Ex.  :  — 

Vous  m'€crirez  demain,  (do)  write  to  me  to-morrow. 
Vous  ne  tuerez  point,  thou  shalt  do  no  murder. 
Quand  vous  viendrez,  vous  apporterez  mon  lime. 
When  you  come  you  will  bring  my  book. 

NOTE  1.  When  shall  and  will  imply  determination,  they  are  rendered  b/ 
voidoir,  as :  — 

I  will  do  it,  je  veux  le  faire. 
You  shall  do  it,  je  veux  que  vous  le  fassiez. 
21 


322  xvra.    DIX-HUITIEME 

22.  It  sometimes  has  the  eense  of  the  Imperative  in  sentence? 
like  the  following  :  — 

Croira  qui  voudra  Vhistorien  Capitolin  et  qudques  autres  tcrivains  qui  Jont 
danser  les  €l€pliants  sur  la  corde. 

Believe  who  will  the  historian  Capitolinus  and  several  other  writers,  who 
make  elephants  dance  on  a  rope. 

NOTE.  To  be  on  the  point  of  doing  something  is  expressed  in  French  by 
allcr,  which  corresponds  precisely  with  the  English  to  be  going,  etc.  (See 
Part  I.,  Lesson  XL VI.)  Ex. :  — 

Are  you  going  to  write  to  him  1  allez-vous  lui  e'crire  ? 

I  am  coming,  je  vais  venir. 

Napoleon  dlt  a  ses  soldats,  "  Nous  allons  entreprendre  la  conqutte  de  VEgypte. 
Les  peuples  avec  lesquels  nous  allons  vivre,  sont  Mahometans,"  etc. 

23.  The  Compound  of  the  Future  indicates  an  event  which  is  to 
precede  another  future  event  specified.     Ex  :  — 

Quand  f  aural  terming  mes  affaires,  je  partirai  tout  de  suite. 
Aussitot  que  je  serai  arrive',  firai  le  voir. 

24.  When  the  conjunction  si  signifies  whether,  expressing  uncer- 
tainty, the  future  can  be  used  after  it,  in  French  as  in  English.     Si 
is  never  followed  by  the  future,  unless  it  means  whether.     Ex.  :  — 

Je  ne  sais  si  mon  frere  viendra. 

T  do  not  know  if  my  brother  will  come. 

25.  When  si  signifies  on  condition  that,  the  English  Future  must 
be  rendered  by  the  Present.     Ex.  :  — 

Vous  deviendrez  savant,  si  vous  e'tudiez  lien. 

You  will  become  a  learned  man,  if  you  will  study. 

26.  The  Future  is  sometimes  used  to  imply  surmise.     Ex.  :  — 
Ob  est  mon  argent  ?    Uaurai-je  peut-etre  perdu,  ? 

Where  is  my  money  ?    Have  I  perhaps  lost  it  ? 

27.  The  Conditionals,  je  parlerais,  faurais  parle,  are  used  in 
French  as  in  English,  in  conditional  sentences  :  — 

Je  serais  heureux  si  j'avais  des  amis. 
I  should  be  happy  if  I  had  some  friends. 

NOTE.   The  English  I  wish,  when  it  docs  not  relate  to  something  past, 
is  often  translated  by  the  Conditional  of  vouloir,  je  voudrais.    Ex. :  — 
I  wish  he  would  come  soon,  je  voudrais  qu'il  vint  bientot. 


USE    OF   THE    TENSES    OF   THE    INDICATIVE.  323 

28.  A  Ft  or  s/,  when   it  means  suppose  that,  the  English  Condi- 
tional must  be  rendered  by  the  Imperfect  (see  §  8).     Ex.  :  — 

Si  je  continuais  mon  commerce,  je  deriendrais  riche. 
If  I  should  continue  my  trade,  I  should  become  rich. 

But  when  si  means  whether,  the  Conditional  is  also  used  in 
French :  — 

Je  nc  sais  si  mon  oncle  viendrait,  en  cas  que  vous  Vinvitassiez. 

29.  The  compound  Conditional  of  devoir,  pouvoir,  and  vouloir, 
followed  by  the  simple  Infinitive,  must  be  used  when,  in  English, 
the  auxiliaries  should,  ought,  could,  might,  are  followed  by  a  com- 
pound Infinitive     Ex.  :  — 

Vous  auriez  du  ecn're  line  lettre. 
You  ought  to  have  written  a  letter. 
iTaurais  pit  lui  donner  de  I' argent. 
I  could  hare  given  him  some  money. 

THEME   15. 

1.  I  shall  go  to  London.  2.  The  bookseller  will  send  you  the 
book  to-morrow.  3.  When  I  am  in  the  country,  will  you  come  to 
see  me  ?  4.  I  shall  play  as  soon  as  I  have  finished  my  lesson.  5. 
There  will  always  be  wars  among  men,  as  long  as  they  are  (§  20) 
ambitious.  6.  I  hope  you  will  not  refuse  me  this  favor.  7.  When 
you  are  ready,  we  will  go  and  take  a  walk.  8.  I  do  not  know  if 
my  sister  will  consent  to  it  (?/).  9.  If  your  person  were  as  gigan- 
tic1 as  your  desires,  the  whole2  world  could  not  contain  you ;  your 
right  hand  would  touch  the  east3  and  your  left  the  west4  at  the 
(CM)  same  time,  said  the  Scythian5  ambassador  to  Alexander.  10. 
I  could  have  kept6  the  book  ;  nobody  would  have  known  it. 

1.  Gigantesque.    2.  Entier  (after  the  noun).    3.  L'orient,  m.    4.  Uoccident,  m. 
5.  Uambassadeur  des  Scythes.    C.  Garder. 

THEME   46. 

1.  My  country  has  been  ungrateful1  to  me,  although  I  have  ren- 
dered it  (lui)  great  service  (/>/.).  2.  The  king  has  done  me  great 
injustice;  he  has  robbed2  me  of  my  entire  fortune,  he  has  even 


324  XVIII.      DIX-HUITIEMB   LE^ON. 

takon8  from  me  my  two  servants.  3.  I  have  been  compelled  to  fiee, 
in  order  to  preserve4  my  life,  which  was  seriously  threatened.  4. 
What  was  to  be  done  ? 5  5.  You  should  rather  have  endured8 
(§  20)  all  injuries  than  to  offend7  against  France  and  the  greatness 
of  your  house.  6.  If  you  were  persecuted,  you  could  have 
retired ; 8  it  would  have  been  (valu)  better  to  be  poor  and  unknown 
than  to  take  up10  arms  against  your  country.  7.  Even  in  poverty 
and  in  the  most  wretched11  exile,  your  fame12  would  not  have  been 
lost. 

1.  Ingrat.  2.  Prive.  3.  JUPa  depouilU  jusqu'ti.  4.  Pour  sauver.  5.  Que  vou- 
Liez-voits  qua  je  fisse  1  6.  Souffrir.  7.  Que  de  manqucr  a.  8.  Vous  retirer  (refleo* 
live  verb).  9.  Obscur.  10.  Prendre  les  armes.  11.  Miserable.  12.  Gloire,  f. 


READOG  LESSON. 
ALEXANDRE    SELKIRK. 

Pendant  la  guerre  pour  la  succession  d'Espagne,  quelques  parti- 
euliers1  equiperent  en  Angleterre  deux  vaisseaux  armateurs,  destines 
&  faire  des  prises2  dans  la  mer  du  sud.  Le  capitaine  Rogers  fut 
nomine  pour  les  commander.  Us  leverent3 1'ancre  de  Bristol  le  2 
Aout,  1708.  Au  inois  de  Janvier  de  Tannee  suivante  ils  se  trou- 
vaient  du  cote  du  pole  antarctique.4  Eogers  doubla  le  Cap-Horn 
sans  prendre  terre  en  aucun  lieu  de  ces  parages5  jusqu'a  File  de 
Juan  Fernandes,  situee  dans  la  nier  du  sud,  a  la  distance  de  cent- 
dix  lieues  du  Chili.  II  y  envoy  a  une  pinasse,6  qui  revint  au  vais- 
seau  avec  quantite  d'^crevisses,7  et  un  homme  vetu  de  peaux  de 
chevres8  qui  paraissait  plus  sauvage  que  ces  animaux  memes. 
C'etait  un  Ecossais,  nomme  Alexandra  Selkirk,  qui  avait  e*te  maitre 
a  bord  du  vaisseau  "  Les  Cinq-Ports,"  et  que  le  capitaine  Stradling 
avait  abandonne  sur  cette  ile  depuis  quatre  ans  et  quatre  mois. 
Voici  le  recit  que  ce  malheureux  fit  de  ses  aventures  au  capitaine 
Eogers. 

"  DCS  mon  enfance  j'ai  ete  ^leve9  dans  la  marine.  Ayant  suivi 
le  capitaine  Stradhng  dans  son  expedition,  j'eus  un  demele'10  aveo 


THE   SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD.  325 

ITU,  ce  qui  1'engagea  h  me  debarquer  sur  cette  ile.  Je  resolus 
d'abord  d'y  rester,  plutot  que11  de  m'exposer  h  de  nouveaux  cha- 
grins, d'autant  plus  que  le  vaisscau  etait  en  mauvais  e*tat.  Cepen- 
dant  rcvenu  a  moi-meme,  je  souhaitai  d'y  retourner,  mais  le 
capitaiue  n'y  voulut  pas  consentir." 

( To  be  continued.) 

1.  Private  men.    2.  Capture.    3.  To  weigh.    4.  South.    5.  Parts  of  the  sea.    6. 
Pinnace.    7.  Crab. .  8.  Goat-skins.    9.  Brought  up.    10.  Quarrel.    11.  Rather  than* 

QUESTIONNAIRE. 

Que  firent  quelques  particnliers  anglais  pendant  la  guerre  de  la 
succession  d'Espagne  ? 

Qui  commanda  les  deux  vaisseaux  ? 

Ou  prit-il  terre  pour  la  premiere  fois  ? 

Ou  est  situee  cette  ile? 

Qui  trouva-t-on  la  ? 

Qui  6tait  cet  homme  ? 

Comment  y  etait-il  venu  ? 

Combien  de  temps  y  etait-il  reste  ? 

Pourquoi  avait-il  ete  debarqu6  par  le  capitaine  ? 


XIX.    DIX-NEUVIEMB    LE90N. 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

1.  The  Subjunctive  is  in  most  cases  dependent,  and  is  therefore  used  in 
subordinate  clauses.  Whenever  in  French  a  subordinate  clause  is  depend- 
ent upon  a  leading  clause  which  contains  the  idea  of  something  not  yet 
having  an  actual  existence  for  the  speaker,  consequently  of  something  pos- 
sible or  uncertain,  its  verb  will  be  in  the  Subjunctive.  This  unreality  can 
apply  as  well  to  something  external,  i.  e.  to  actions  and  events,  as  to  some- 
thing internal,  i.  e.  to  conceptions  and  emotions.  This  is  the  general 


326  XIX.      DIX-NEUVIEME  LEQCN. 

ground  of  distinction  in  the  application  of  the  French  Subjunctive.  Th6 
two  languages  by  no  means  agree  in  this  point.  Many  verbs  in  English 
are  put  in  the  Future,  the  Conditional,  or  the  Present  Indicative,  which,  in 
French,  must  be  in  the  subjunctive.  Thus  for  instance :  — 

Je  ne  pense  pas  qu'il  soit  si  ag€. 
I  do  not  think  he  is  so  old. 
Nous  craignions  qu'il  ne  s'en  allat. 
"We  feared  he  would  go. 

2.  But  before  passing  to  the  rules  concerning  the  use  of  the  Sub- 
junctive, it  will  be  indispensably  necessary  to  understand  the  relation  of 
the  tenses  of  the  Subjunctive  to  those  of  the  Indicative  and  Conditional, 
without  which  the  clause,  dependent  upon  them,  cannot  be  properly  trans- 
lated. The  following  rules  are  here  applicable  :  — 

1.  If  the  verb  of  the  leading  clause  is  in  the  Present  or  Future  Indica- 
tive, that  of  the  dependent  clause  will  be  in  the  Present  or  Compound  of 
the  Present  of  the  Subjunctive.     Ex.:  — 

Je  veux  qu'il  vienne,*  I  wish  him  to  come. 

Connaissez-vous  quelqu'un  qui  sache  falre  cela  ? 

Do  you  know  anybody  who  knows  how  to  do  this  ? 

Je  ferai  en  sorte  que  tout  soit  pret. 

I  will  have  everything  ready. 

J'attendrai  que  mon  pere  soit  parti. 

I  will  wait  till  my  father  has  departed. 

2.  If  the  verb  of  the  leading  clause  be  in  a  past  tense  of  the  Indicative, 
or  in  the  Conditional,  the  Imperfect  of  the  Subjunctive  must  follow  in  the 
subordinate  clause ;  or  if  the  subordinate  clause  contain  an  event  which  has 
already  taken  place,  the  Compound  Imperfect  of  the  Subjunctive  must  be 
employed,  according  to  the  following  scheme :  — 

Je  craignais 
Je  craignis 


J'ai  craint 
J^avais  craint 
Je  craindrais 
J'aurais  craint 


qu'elle  n'arrivat    domain — aujourd'hui,  —  trop    tard,—* 
trop  tot,  etc. 


*  Observe  that  the  Present  and  Future  circ  the  same  in  the  Subjunctive  Mood  in 
French ;  the  context  alone  shows  of  which  of  the  two  we  speak.    Ex.:  — 
Je  ne  crois  pas  qu'elle  vienne. 
I  do  not  think  she  is  coming. 
Je  ne  crois  pas  qu'elle  vienne. 
I  do  not  think  she  will  come. 


Je  craignais 
Je  craignis 
J*ai  craint  * 
J'avais  craint 
Je  craindrais 
J'aurais  craint 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD.  327 


quails  nefussent  arrives  hier  —  avant-hiert — la  semaint 
derniere,  etc. 


3.  There  are  a  great  many  verbs  which  govern  the  verb  of 
the  subordinate  clause  in  the  Subjunctive  mood ;  they  may  bo 
divided  into  four  classes,  viz. :  — 

1.  Verbs  of  wishing,  willing,  desiring,  commanding,  or  permitting. 

2.  Verbs  of  thinking,  believing,  and  saying. 

3.  Verbs  expressing  fear,  doubt,  sorrow,  astonishment,  denial,  duty, 
necessity,  joy,  or  delight. 

4.  Impersonal  verbs  which  do  not  express  certainty  or  probability. 

4.  Verbs  of  wishing,  willing,  commanding,  etc.     Such  are  :  — 

Aimer,  to  like.  permettre,  to  permit,  allow. 

aimer  mieux,  to  prefer.  prier,  to  beg,  to  ask. 

defendre,  to  forbid.  recommander,  to  recommend. 
demander,  to  ask.                                 .     souhaiter,  to  wish. 

desirer,  to  wish  for,  to  desire.  souffrir,  to  suffer. 

exiger,  to  demand.  supplier,  to  beg,  request. 

ordonner,  to  order.  vouloir,  to  be  willing,  etc. 

Examples :  — 

J*ordonne  quil  sorte,  I  order  him  to  go  out. 
J'aimeipt'il  soit  courageux,  I  like  him  to  be  brave. 
H  vent  que  je  dise  la  ve'rite'  (Pres.  Subj.,  §  2,  1). 
He  wishes  me  to  say  the  truth. 
//  voulait  qm  je  lui  disse  la  ve"rit€  (Imperf.,  §  2,  2). 
He  desired  me  to  tell  him  the  truth. 
Le  roi  exigea  qne  je  partisse  tout  de  suite. 
The  king  demanded  that  I  should  leave  directly 

*  As  the  Compound  of  the  Present  belongs  to  Tresent  as  well  as  to  Past  time,  it 
can  be  followed  also  by  the  Present  of  the  iSubjuiictive,  when  the  dependent  clause 
refers  to  Present  time.  Ex.:  — 

Diwi  nous  a  donne  la  raison  pour  que  noux  nous  en  Servians, 
God  has  given  us  reason  that  we  may  make  use  of  it. 


328  XIX.      DIX-NEUVIEME 

5.    Verbs  of  thinking,  believing,  saying,  etc. 

These  verbs,  and,  in  general,  all  those  which  express  the  inteL 
lectual  faculties  of  the  mind,  govern  the  Indicative  when  they  are 
affirmatively  used,  and  most  commonly  the  Subjunctive  when  they 
are  used  negatively,  interrogatively,  or  are  preceded  by  the  conjunc 
tion  si.  If  I  say,  for  instance :  Je  crois  que  Charles  est  malade, 
I  represent  Charles's  illness  to  myself  as  a  reality,  and  consequently 
the  Indicative  is  required.  But  in  the  sentences  :  Je  ne  crois  pas 
que  Charles  soit  malade,  or,  croyez-vous  que  Charles  soil  malade  ? 
an  uncertainty  is  expressed  in  regard  to  Charles's  illness,  and  the 
Subjunctive  must  be  used.  Ex.:  — 

Je  ne  crois  pas  que  le  concert  ait  lieu  ce  soir. 

I  do  not  think  that  the  concert  will  take  place  to-night. 

Pensez-vous  qu'il  puisse  apprendre  tout  cela. 

Do  you  think  he  can  learn  all  that  ? 

Je  ne  dis  pas  qu'il  ait  tort. 

I  do  not  say  that  he  is  wrong. 

Partons,  si  vous  pensez  qu'il  fasse  beau  temps. 

NOTE  1 .  If  however  we  ask  a  question,  less  to  be  informed  of  a  thing 
than  to  inform  others  of  it,  the  second  verb  (having  the  sense :  Do  you 
know  ?)  is  put  in  the  Indicative,  and  not  in  the  Subjunctive.  Ex.:  — 

Vous  ai-je  dit  que  mon  frere  est  arrive'? 

NOTE  2.  Observe  that  the  verbs  of  knowing,  being  sure,  resolving,  etc., 
are  not  comprised  among  those  which  govern  the  Subjunctive.  They  gen- 
erally require  the  Indicative,  even  when  used  interrogatively  or  neg- 
atively :  — 

Je  savais 

Je  ne  savais  pas  J 

Je  ne  sais  s'il  le  feray  I  do  not  know  if  he  will  do  it. 

THEME  47. 

1.  I  wish  him  to  come  (that  he  c.).  2.  The  law  requires  that 
thieves1  [should]  be  punished.  3.  I  demanded  that  he  should  pay 
me.  4.  Has  he  demanded  that  you  should  pay  the  bill?2  5. 
I  forbid  that  he  should  go  there.  6.  God  wills  that  we  love  our 
enemies.  7.  Caligula  wished  that  the  Romans  should  render  him 
divine  honors.3  8.  Your  father  expects  that  you  should  give 4  an  ac- 


,  >  qu'il  €lait  id. 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD.  329 

count  of  what  you  have  done.  9.  My  aunt  wishes  that  I  should 
set  out  to-morrow.  10.  Tell  him  to  wait.  11.  Augustus  com- 
manded in  his  will5  that  they  should  not  seek  to6  extend  the  empire. 
12.  Allow  me  to  tell  you  (allow  that  I  tell  y.)  the  truth.  13.  I 
will  be  obeyed  (that  one  ob.  me).  14.  Do  you  think  your  aunt 
will  come  by  herself?7  15.  If  I  find  that  you  frequent  bad  com- 
pany, you  will  lose  my  friendship.  16.  Do  you  hope  they  (on) 
will  make  peace  ? 8 

1.  Les  voleurs.    2.  Le  compte.    3.  Des  honneurs  divins.    4.  To  give  an  account, 
rendre  compte.    5.  Testament,  m.    C.  A  etendre.    7.  Seule.    8.  La  paix. 


6.   The  Subjunctive  is  used  after  verbs  of  fear,  doubt,  sorrow, 
joy,  denial  or  hinderanco,  astonishment,  etc.     Such  are  :  — — 

Avoir  peur, ")  s'etonner,  to  wonder. 

craindre,      \  empecher,  to  hinder,  prevent. 

douter,  to  doubt.  nier,  to  deny. 

And  likewise  after : 

&tre  lien  aise,  to  be  glad.  etre  ajftige',  to  be  afflicted. 

etre  charm?,    ")  etre  fdche',  to  be  sorry. 

etre  enchant^  ]* to  bc  vcry  glad*  etre  etonne*,  to  be  astonished. 

etre  content,  to  be  satisfied.  etre  surpris,  to  be  surprised. 

se  rejouir,  to  rejoice.  regretter,  to  regret. 

trembler,  to  tremble.        ,  se  plaindre,  to  complain. 

Examples :  — 

Je  crams  que  ma  mere  ne  soit  malade. 

I  fear  my  mother  is  ill. 

Je  ne  doutais  pas  qu'il  n'arrivat  avant  vous. 

I  did  not  doubt  that  he  would  arrive  before  you, 

J'empcckerai  qu'il  ne  *  sorte. 

I  will  hinder  him  from  going  out. 

Je  regrette  qu'il  soit  venu  trop  tard. 

Man  pere  est  fdche'que  je  ne  lai  aie  pas  €crit  plus  t6t. 

Je  suis  charing  que  vous  soyez  venu  me  voir. 

Je  m'&onne  qu'il  n'ait  pas  re$u  ma  lettre. 

*  Concerning  the  particle  ne,  see  L.  XV.  $  15  - 18. 


330  XIX.      DIX-NEUYI&ME 

NOTE  1.  The  verbs  avoir  peur,  appreliender,  craindre  and  trembler  require 
the  particle  ne  before  the  verb  in  the  Subjunctive  mood,  but  only  when 
these  verbs  themselves  arc  affirmative  or  negative-interrogative.  Ex.:  — 

Je  crains  gu'il  ne  vlenne. 

Ne  craignez-vous  pas  qu'il  ne  vienne  ? 

But  if  the  sentence  be  simply  negative  or  simply  interrogative,  ne  is  not 
used,  as  :  — 

Je  ne  crains  pas  qu'il  vienne. 

Craignez-vous  qu'il  vienne  ? 

NOTE  2.  If  after  those  verbs  mentioned  in  §  6,  WQ  wish  to  express  our- 
selves with  dcfinitencss,  de  ce  que  is  used  instead  of  the  simple  quet  and  this 
is  followed  by  the  Indicative :  — 

//  est  fdclte'  de  ce  que  vous  ne  lui  avez  pas  e'crit. 

Je  me  plains  de  ce  qu'elle  m'a  oublie*. 

NOTE  3.  If  the  second  verb  is  negative  in  English,  ne  — pas  must  be 
used  in  French,  as  :  — 

Je  tremble  qu'il  n' arrive  pas  a  temps. 

I  tremble  lest  he  may  not  arrive  in  time. 

7.   Subjunctive  after  Impersonal  verbs. 

A  verb  preceded  by  que  is  always  put  in  the  Subjunctive  after  the 
following  Impersonate :  — 

77  est  surprenant,  it  is  surprising.  il  plait,  it  pleases,  suits. 

il  convicnt,  it  is  proper.  il  est  fdcheux,  it  is  sad. 

il  faut,  it  must.  il  est  juste,  it  is  just,  right. 
il  importe,  it  is  important,  it  matters,    il  est  difficile,  it  is  difficult. 

it  concerns.  il  est  possible,  it  is  possible. 

il  suffit,  it  is  sufficient.  il  est  naturel,  it  is  a  matter  of  courso. 

il  vaui  mieux,  it  is  better.  il  se  peutt  il  pent  se  faire,  it  may  be, 

And  likewise  after :  — 

H  est  temps,  it  is  time.  c'est  dommage^  it  is  a  pity. 

(rest  un  malheur,  it  is  a  misfortune,  etc.,  etc. 

Examples :  — 

Ft  f'lut  que  vous  partiez  tout  de  suite. 
You  must  leave  directly. 

II  est  possible  qu'il  rcvienne. 

It  is  possible  that  he  come  back. 


THE   SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD.  331 

Cfest  doomage  que  vous  ne  soijez  pas  venu  plus  tot. 

It  is  a  pity  that  you  have  not  come  earlier. 

II  suffit  qu'il  ait  avoue'  sa  faute. 

It  is  enough  that  he  has  confessed  his  fault. 

Ilest  juste  que  vous  soijez  puni. 

It  is  right  that  you  be  punished. 

Further,  after  il  y  a,  and  all  impersonal  verbs  with  an  adjective 
denoting  evidence,  certainty,  or  probability,  when  they  are  used  in  a 
negative,  interrogative,  or  conditional  manner.  Ex. :  — 

Ya-t-il  un  mortel  qui  puisse  dire  qu'il  est  toujours  heureux  ? 

Is  there  a  mortal  who  can  say  that  he  is  always  happy  ? 

Est-il  sur  qu'il  ait  tort  ? 

Is  it  certain  that  he  is  in  the  wrong  7 

H  n'est  pas  sur  qu'il  ait  tort. 

It  is  not  certain  that  he  is  in  the  wrong. 

THEME  43. 

1.  I  doubt  whether  that  is  true.  2.  I  doubt  whether  your  uncle 
will  arrive  to-morrow.  3.  The  Egyptians  did  not  doubt  (see  Les- 
son XV.,  §  15)  that  certain  plants  and  animals  were  divinities.1 
4.  We  question  whether  riches  can  afford2  happiness.  5.  I  did  not 
know  that  you  were  to  come.  G%  Do  you  doubt  that  I  arn  your 
friend?  7.  I  do  not  doubt  that  you  are  my  friend.  8.  He  denies 
that  he  had  been  told  that.  9.  -He  does  not  deny  that  he  has  been 
told  that----  10.  It  is  time  for  us  to  go  (that  we  go)  home,  for  it 
begins  to  («)  ram.  11.  It  is  evident  that  Greece  could  no  more 
defend  herself,  so  much  was  she  at  that  time  sunken.3  12.  It  is 
sufficient  if  you  tell  him  this.  13.  It  is  a  pity  that  you  did  not  go 
with  us;  you  would  have  enjoyed4 yourself  much.  14.  It  is  not 
probable  that  they  will  do  it.  15.  I  must  go  to  (en)  town. 

1.  Des  divinites.    2.  Accorder.    3.  Decline.   4.  S'amuser, 


8,  The  Subjunctive  is  used  in  relative  dependent  clauses  begin- 
ning with  qui,  que,  lequel  or  ou>  which  depend  upon  a  leading 
clause  in  which  a  wish,  doubt,  or  condition  is  implied,  especially 
after  an  Imperative.  Ex. :  — 


332  XIX.      DIX-NEUVIEME 

Lisez  des  ouvrages  qui  puissent  former  votre  gout. 

Read  sucli  books  as  can  form  your  taste. 

Choisissez  un  appartement  oil  vous  soyez  a  votre  aise. 

Choose  an  apartment  where  you  may  be  comfortable. 

Us  envoyerent  des  deputes  qui  consultassent  Apottoii. 

They  sent  deputies  who  were  to  consult  Apollo. 

If,  however,  no  such  requirement  or  expectation  is  contained  in  the  lead- 
ing clause ;  if,  on  the  contrary,  the  matter  is  rather  regarded  as  something 
which  is  actual,  or  which  has  already  taken  place,  then,  of  course,  the 
Indicative  is  used.  Ex. :  — 

JFai  lovtfun  appartement  cu  je  suis  lien  a  mon  aise. 

Us  envoyercnt  des  deputes  qui  consulterent  Apollon. 

9.  A  verb  preceded  by  the  relative  qui  or  que  is  put  in  the  Sub- 
junctive after  the  Superlative,  when  the  relative  clause  only  express- 
es an  opinion,  as  :  — 

C'est  le  plus  beau  jardin  que  je  connaisse. 
This  is  the  most  beautiful  garden  I  know. 
C'est  une  des  derniercs  lettres  que  St.  Paul  ait  (forties. 
This  is  one  of  the  last  letters  St.  Paul  has  written. 
La  meilleure  garde  qu'un  roi  puisse  avoir,  c'est  le  coeur  de  ses  siijets. 
The  best  guard  a  king  can  have  is  the  hearts  of  his  subjects. 
If,  however  the  thing  is  represented  as  certain  or  as  a  matter  of  fact,  the 
Indicative  follows.    Ex. :  — 

Souviens-toi  que  je  suis  le  seul  qui  t'a  de'pln  (displeased). 
Neron  est  le  premier  empercur  qui  a  persecute'  I'J&glise. 

10.  The  Subjunctive  is  used  further  after  the  ordinal  numbers 
(as,  le  premier,  le  second,  le  dernier,  etc.),  and  after  unique ,  seul, 
peu,  rien,  and  personne.     Ex.  :  — 

Vous  etes  le  premier  ami  que  f  ale  rencontre  a  Paris. 
You  are  the  first  friend  I  have  met  with  in  Paris. 
C'est  I'unique  espoir  qui  me  soit  reste. 
This  is  the  only  hope  that  remains  to  me. 
11  y  a  peu  d'hommes  qui  sachent  supporter  Vadversite*. 
There  are  few  men  who  know  how  to  bear  adversity. 
Je  ne  connais  personne  qui  soit  aussi  heureux  que  lui. 
I  know  nobody  who  is  so  happy  as  he  is. 

NOTE.   Qui  and  que  do  not  govern  the  Subjunctive,  when  they  are  pre- 
ceded by  de  and  its  object,  to  which  they  refer.    Ex. :  — 
Ne  dites  rien  de  ce  que  je  vous  ai  conjie'  (Ind.). 


_  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD.  333 

THEME  49. 

1.  You  are  the  most  learned  man  I  know  in  tins  town.  2.  Rob- 
ert is  the  only  friend  on  whom  I  can  depend.1  3.  Nero  was  tha 
first  emperor  that  (has)  persecuted  the  Christians.  4.  I  seek  a 
servant  who  is  faithful.  5.  The  diamond  is  the  most  valuable2  stone 
we  know.  6.  You  are  the  first  German  I  have  met  with  in  China. 
7.  There  is  no  one  who  does  it  more  easily3  than  she.  8.  Is  this 
the  first  time  you  have  been  mistaken  ?  4  9.  I  wish  it  were  the  first 
time.  10.  Lucretius5  and  Pliny  were  the  only  natural  philosophers6 
whom  the  Komans  had. 

I.  Compter.     2.  Precieux.     3.  Aisement.     4.  Se  tromper.    5.  Lucrece  et  Pline. 
6.  Naturalistes. 


11.  Subjunctive  after  conjunctions.     A  verb  is  put  in  the  Sub- 
junctive after  the  following  conjunctions  :  — 

Avant  que,  before.  non  que,         >      ^  ^  „ 

.  ,    ,       ,  J-  not  that. 

a  moms  que  (ne),  unless.  non  pas  que,  ) 

afin  que,  in  order  that.  pour  que,  in  order  that. 

bien  que,  although.  pour  pen  que,  )  . f 

f         f       V      M  lf  eyer  go  hftfa 

de  peur  que  (ne),  lest.  si  peu  que,       ) 

de  crainte  que  (ne),  for  fear  that.  pourvu  que,  provided. 

de  maniere  (sorte)  que,  so  that.  que  —  ne,  till,  before. 

en  attendant  que,  till.  quel — que,       ")  however.      (Seep. 

en  (au)  cas  que,  in  case.  quelque  —  que,  )  282.) 

encore  que,  although.  quoique,  although. 

jusqu'a  ce  que,  until.  sans  que,  without. 

loin  que,  far  from,  sinon  que,  but  that. 

malgre"  que,  for  all  that,   notwith-  si  tant  est  que,  if  so  be  that. 

standing  that.  soil  que  —  soit  que,  )  whether  —  or. 

nonobstant  que,  notwithstanding.  soit  que  —  ou  que,    >  be  it  that  —  or 

suppose"  que,  suppose  that. 

EXAMPLES. 

Kentrons  avant  qu'il  fasse  nuit. 
Let  us  go  home  before  it  gets  dark. 
Afin  que  (pour  que)  vous  le  sachiez. 
That  you  may  know  it. 
Je,  ne  sortirai  d'ici  que  je  ne  sois  paye". 
I  shall  not  go  away  from  here  before  I  am  paid. 


334  XIX.      DIX-NEUVIEME  LEQON. 

Quoiqu'il  me  I'ait  proinis. 

Although  he  has  promised  me. 

Pourvu  qu'il  y  consente. 

Provided  he  consent  to  it. 

Quelque  effort  que  /assent  les  hommes,  leur  ne'ant  parait  partout. 

Whatever  effort  men  may  make,  their  nothingness  appears  everywhere. 

A  molns  que  vous  ne  me  demandiez  pardon. 

Unless  you  ask  me  for  pardon. 

Au   (en)   cas  qu'il  mourut. 

In  case  he  should  die. 

NOTE.  The  Indicative  can  sometimes  be  used  after  avant  que,  jusqu'a  « 
que,  sinon  que,  de  sorte  que,  si  ce  n'est  que,  tellement  que,  and  de  manicre  que, 
when  all  doubt  and  uncertainty  are  excluded,  and  the  clause  expresses  a 
fact.  Ex.:  — 

Je  gardai  mon  sang  froid,  jusqu'a  ce  que  je  I'entendis  calomnier  mon  frere. 

II  s'est  occupe'de  cette  affaire  de  maniere  (de  sorte)  qu'on  n'a  pu  le  bldmer. 

12.  la  the  same  manner  the  Subjunctive  is  employed  after  the 
simple  que,  when  used  instead  of  one  of  the  conjunctions  mentioned 
in  §11.     Ex.:  — 

Je  ne  puis  vous  pardonner  avant  que  vous  me  fasslez  I'aveu  de  vos  fautes  el 
que  vous  me  promettiez  de  vous  corriger. 

I  cannot  pardon  you  before  you  confess  your  faults  and  promise  me  to 
improve. 

Venez  que  (instead  of  afin  que)  je  vous  en  dise  la  raison. 

Come,  that  I  may  tell  you  the  reason  of  it. 

Son  esprit  est  toujours  actif,  quot qu'il  solt  malade  et  qu'il  ne  puisse  travailler, 

His  mind  is  always  active,  although  he  is  sick  and  cannot  work. 

13.  The  conjunction  q ue,  used  to  avoid  the  repetition  of  si,  gov- 
erns the  Subjunctive.     Ex.  :  — 

Si  je  ne  suis  pas  rentre*  a  quatre  heures  et  qu'on  vienne  me  demander,  etc. 
If  I  am  not  at  home  at  four  o'clock,  and  somebody  comes  for  me,  etc. 

14.  The  Subjunctive  is  also  used  after  attendre  ;  till  is  translated 
Ij  que,  and  not  by  jusqu'a  ce  que,  as  :  — 

A  ttendez  qu'il  revienne,  wait  till  he  comes  back. 

15.  Aside  from  the  instances  above-mentioned,  the  Subjunctive 
also  occurs  in  a  few  expressions  which  appear  either  the  expression 
of  a  wish  or  as  a  kind  of  third  person  Imperative.     Notice  espe- 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD.  335 

cially :   Dusse-je  !   should  I  !     Puissiez-vous !    would  that  you  I 
Puissent-ils !  may  they  .  .  .  .  !     Further :  — 

Dieu  veuille  or  plut  a  Dieu,  would  tc  Heaven. 

Vive  le  roi,  long  live  the  king ! 

Puissicz-vous  ctre  heureux,  may  you  be  happy  ! 

Qii'on  amene  I'accusg,  let  the  culprit  be  brought  here ! 

Qu'ils  viennent,  let  them  come  ! 

Qite  Dieu  vous  btnisse,  God  bless  you ! 

Que  la  terre  lui  soil  legere,  may  the  earth  lie  lightly  upon  him ! 

A  Dieu  ne  plaise  que,  may  heaven  not  permit,  etc. 

THEME   50. 

1.  Before  war  was  declared,  the  Carthaginians  sent  once  more 
ambassadors  to  Rome.  2.  I  cannot  depend  on  your  promise,  unless 
you  give  me  the  necessary  security.1  3.  Caesar  went  by  forced2 
marches  to  Vienne,  on  the  Rhone,  before  the  enemy  (plur.)  became 
aware3  of  his  approach.  4.  Get  up  early  to-morrow  morning,  that 
we  may  start4  in  good  time  (a  temps').  5.  I  shall  not  yet  pass  to 
the  perusal3  of  this  author,  unless  you  advise6  me  to  do  it.  6.  Keep 
a  strict  watch7  over  all  your  senses,  lest  intemperance  get8  the  better 
of  you.  7.  Though  he  is  lazy,  yet  he  improves  a  little  (fait  quel- 
ques  progres).  8.  I  shall  wait  until  (§  14)  you  have  done.  9. 
Wait  till  the  rain  be  over  (passee).  10.  Although  Homer,9  ac- 
cording to10  Horace,  slumbers11  at  tunes,12  he  is  nevertheless  (il  n'en 
cst  pas  mains)  the  first  of  all  poets.  11.  You  will  succeed,13  pro- 
vided you  act  with  vigor.  12.  I  shall  soon  speak  French,  though  I 
am  convinced  that  it  is  a  difficult  language  13.  I  shall  not  leave 
the  house  before  (que  —  ne)  you  sign14  this  paper.  14.  May  God 
protect15  you.  15.  May  Heaven  preserve  us  from  war. 

1.  Garantie,  f.  2.  A  marches  forcees.  3.  S'apercevoir  de.  4.  Partir.  5.  Lec- 
ture, f.  6.  Conseiller.  7.  Veillez  avec  soin.  8.  To  get  the  better  of,  maitriser 
qn.  9.  Homcre.  10.  Selon.  11.  Sommeiller.  12.  Quelquefois.  13.  Reussir.  .  14. 

Signer.    15.  Protcger. 

THEME   51. 

1.  A  thoughtless1  man  knows  nothing,  though  he  have  read  a 
great  many  books ;  in  the  same  manner  a  great  many  persons3  re- 


33 G  XIX.      DIX-NEUVIEME   LEQON. 

main  ignorant,  though  they  have  travelled  through  the  most  civilized 
countries.  2.  She  will  forgive  you,  provided  you  make  her  an 
apology.3  3.  If  somebody  comes,  and  I  am  not  at  home,  send  for 
me.  4.  I  shall  be  obliged4  to  do  it.  5.  We  should  be  obliged  to  do 
it.  6.  I  feared  you  would  have  complained  of  me.  7.  Our  cousio 
sot  out  without  our  knowing  (w.  that  we  knew)  [of]  his  intentions. 
8.  Edo  not  believe  he  has  studied  history.  9.  Do  you  think  they 
would  refuse  me,  if  I  requested  it  of  them  (si  je  les  en  priais)  1 
10.  May  all  nations  be  convinced5  of  this  truth !  11.  I  do  not ' 
think  he  is  so  old.  12.  Get  in6  without  his  seeing  you  (w.  that  he 
s.  y.).  13.  Go  gently,7  lest  he  should  hear  you.  14.  Make 
haste,8  lest  they  should  set  off  without  you.  15.  I  do  not  deny  that 
it  may  be  so.  16.  We  do  not  fear  that  it  will  give  you  pain.9  17. 
Do  not  let10  that  child  ride  this  horse ;  I  am  afraid  he  will  throw" 
him  off.  18.  We  ought  to  practise  what  the  gospel12  teaches  us. 
19.  Shall4 1  read  the  letter  aloud?  20.  Yes,  if  you  please.  21. 
I  doubt  whether  the  young  man  would  have  succeeded,  had  it  not 
been  for13  your  assistance. 

1.  Insouciant.  2.  Gens.  3.  Vos  excuses.  4.  Falloir.  5.  To  be  convinced,  se 
convaincre.  C.  Entrez.  7.  Doucement.  8.  Depechez-vous.  9.  Faire  de  la  peine. 
10.  Permettrc.  11.  Jeter  &  bos.  12.  IJevangile,  m.  13.  Sans,  se<e  p.  300. 


READING  LESSON. 
ALEXANDRB   SELKIRK. 

(Suite.) 

"  Abandonne  sur  cette  ile  deserte  avec  mcs  habits,  un  lit,  un 
fusil,1  une  livre  de  poudre,  des  balles,  du  tabac,  une  hache,  un  cou- 
teau,  un  chrudron,2  une  bible  et  quelques  autres  livres ;  je  m'amusai 
et  pourvus3  &  mes  besoins4  le  mieux  qu'il  me  fut  possible.  Mais 
durant  les  premiers  huit  mois  j'eus  beaucoup  de  peine  a  vaincre  la 
melancolie  et  a  surmonter  1'horreur  que  me  causait  une  si  afireuse 
solitude. 

"  Je  fis  deux  cabanes5  h,  quelque  distance  Tune  de  1'autrc,  avee 


THE   SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD.  337 

du  Lois  de  pimcnt  ;6  jo  les  couvris  d'une  espece  de  jone7  et  Ics  doub- 
lai8  de  peaux  do  ehevres  que  je  tuais  a  mesure  que  j'cn  avals  besom, 
tant  que  ma  poudro  dura.  Lorsqu'elle  apprucliait  de  sa  fin,  ja  trou- 
vai  le  secret  de  tirer  du  feu  avec  deux  morceaux  de  bois  que  jo 
frottaia9  Tun  centre  Tautre.  Je  faisais  la  cuisine10  dans  la  plus  pe- 
tite de  mes  huttes,  et  dans  la  grande  jo  dormais,  chantais  dcs  psauines 
et  priais  Dieu.  Le  mallieur  m'avait  fait  connaitre  le  prix  de  la 
religion. 

"  Accable  de  tristesse,  rnanquant  de  pain  et  de  sel,  je  ne  man- 
geais  qu'a  Fcxtremite,  lorsque  la  faim  ine  pressait,  et  je  n'allais  me 
couchcr  que  lorsque  je  ne  pouvais  plus  soutenir  la  veille.u  Le  bois 
de  piment  me  servait  a  cuire  la  viande,  et  a  m'eclairer,  et  son 
odour12  aromatique  recreait13  mes  esprits  abattus. 

"  Je  ne  manquais  pas  de  poissons,  mais  je  n'osais  en  manger  sans 
sel,  parce  qu'ils  m'incommodaient,  a  la  reserve14  des  ecrevisses  de 
riviere,  qui  sont  ici  d'un  gout  exquis,  et  aussi  grosses  que  celles  de 
mer.  Tantot  je  les  mangeais  bouillies,  et  tantot  grillees,15  de  memo 
que  la  chair  dcs  chevres,  qui  n'a  pas  le  gout  si  fort  que  celle  des 
notres,  ct  qui  donne  un  excellent  bouillon.16  J'en  avais  tue  jusqu'^i 
cinq  cents.  Quand  ma  poudre  fut  finie,  je  les  prenais  a  la  course. 
Par  un  exercice  continuel  je  m'etais  rendu  si  agile  que  je  courais  a 
travers  les  bois,  sur  les  rochers  et  les  collines  avec  une  vitesse  in- 
croyable.  Peu  s'en  fallut  un  jour  quo  mon  agilite  ne  me  coutat  la 
vie.  Je  poursuivais  une  chevre  aveo  tant  d'ardeur  que  je  la  pris 
Bur  le  bord  d'un  precipice  que  des  buissons17  me  eachaient,  et  je 
culbutai13  de  haut  en  bas  avec  elle.  Cette  chute19  terrible  me  fit 
perdre  toute  connaissance.  Enfin  revenu  a  moi-meme,  je  trou  vai  la 
ohevre  rnorte  sous  moi,  et  j'eus  assez  de  peine  a  mo  trainer20  a  ma 
sabane,  qui  en  etait  a  un  mille,21  et  a  en  sortir  au  bout  de  dix 
jours. >J  (To  lie  continued.) 

1.  Gun.  2.  Kettle.  3.  From  pourvoir,  to  provide.  4.  Need,  want.  6.  Hut.  6. 
Piinenta.  7.  Rush.  8.  To  line.  9.  To  rub.  10.  To  cook.  11.  Watch,  watching. 
12.  Smell.  13.  To  revive.  14.  Ex«cption.  15.  Broiled.  16.  Broth.  17.  Bushes, 
18.  To  tumble.  10.  Fall.  20.  To  drag.  21.  A  mile. 

22 


338  XX.      VINGTIEME  LEgON. 

QUESTIONNAIRE. 

Quels  effets  {things)  lui  avait-on  laiss^s  ? 

N'avait-il  pas  de  nourriture  spirituelle  ? 

Quel  fut  le  premier  soinde  Selkirk  ? 

De  quoi  couvrit-il  les  cabanes? 

D'oii  tira-t-il  ces  peaux? 

Est-ce  qu'il  priait  aussi  Dieu  ? 

Avait-il  de  quoi  faire  du  pain  ? 

Que  mangeaitril  done  ? 

N'avait-il  pas  de  poisson  ? 

N'y  avait-il  pas  d'ecrevisses  ? 

Comment  les  mangeait-il  ? 

Eut-il  toujours  assez  de  poudre  ? 

Comment  prenait-il  alors  les  chevres  ? 

Etait-il  done  si  agile  ? 

N'eut-il  pas  d'accident  faclieux  ? 

N'avait-il  pas  remarque  le  precipice  ? 

So  blessa-t-il  par  suite  de  cette  chute  ? 

Quand  il  revint  a  lui,  dans  quel  etat  se  trouvait-il  ? 


XX.    VINGTIEME 


THE  INFINITIVE. 

1.  The  Infinitive  sometimes  takes  the  place  of  a  noun.  It  is 
used  as  the  subject  of  a  sentence,  where  in  English  the  Part.  Pres. 
is  often  found .  Ex . :  — 

Secourir  les  pauvres  est  une  action  louable. 
To  relieve  the  poor  is  a  praiseworthy  action. 
Mtfdire  est  une  infamie. 
Calumniating  is  shameful. 


THE   INFINITIVE.  339 

NOTE  1.  In  some  instances  it  becomes  properly  a  noun  and  takes  the 
article  with  it,  as:  le  manger,  le  boire,  les  vivres  (victuals).  If  such  an  In- 
finitive is  amplified  by  means  of  other  words,  it  is  better  to  write  cest  or 
c'&ait  instead  of  est  or  etait,  and  sometimes  also  voila.  Ex. :  — 

N'aimer  que  soi,  c'est  aimer  pen  de  chose. 

To  love  no  one  but  one's  self  is  to  love  very  little. 

NOTE  2-  When  this  amplification  is  somewhat  long,  the  Infinitive  can- 
not remain  at  the  beginning  of  the  sentence,  but  must  be  placed  after  the 
predicate,  and  takes  de  before  it.  In  order,  however,  not  to  confuse  the 
sense  and  the  construction  of  the  sentence,  ce  or  il  is  employed  as  a  merely 
introductory  subject ;  ce,  if  a  substantive  follows,  il,  if  an  adjective.  Ex- 
amples :  — 

C'est  un  Jionneur  d'etre  utile  a  sa  patrie. 
11  est  glorieux  de  mourir  pour  sa  patrie. 

NOTE  3.  If  this  antecedent  predicate  have  several  or  long  amplifications 
the  subject-infinitive  is  commonly  introduced  by  an  expletive  que.  Ex. :  — 

C'e"tait  une  grande  nouveaute"  pour  le  roi  que  d'entendre  parler  si  naturelle' 
ment. 

2.  Where  two  imperatives  are  connected  in  English  by   and, 
if  the  first  is  a  verb  of  motion  the  second  must  be  translated  in 
French  by  the  Infinitive,  and  the  conjunction  omitted.     Ex.:  — 

Go  and  see  my  brother,  allez  voir  mon  frere. 
Go  and  do  it,  Allez  le  faire. 

3.  A  verb  immediately  preceded  by  and  depending  on  another 
verb  (auxiliaries  excepted),  or  following  a  preposition,  other  than 
en,  must  be  put  in  the  Infinitive  :  — 

Je  vous  le  ferai  savoir,  sans  etre  presse*. 

4.  Comment,  how ;  que,  what ;  oil,  where ;  pourquoi,  why,  and 
a  few  other  words  similarly  used  in  interrogations,  are  often  followed 
by  the  Infinitive  instead  of  the  Indicative,  when  the  sense  will  not 
thereby  be  rendered  obscure.    Thus  "Pourquoi  alter  t"  may  mean 
"  Why  do  you  go ?  "     "  Que  faire?  "    "  What  is  to  be  done"?  " 
"  Que  dire  ?  "   "  What  shall  I  say  V  » 

5.  The  Infinitive  without  a  preposition  is  used  in  French  after 


340  XX.      VINGTIEMB   LE?ON. 

verbs  of  motion,  as  :  alter,  envoy  er,  etc. ;  after  verbs  that  denote  a 
perception  of  the  senses,  as:  entendre,  sentir,  voir,  etc.,  and  after 
the  following  verbs  :  — 

Affirmer,  to  affirm.  jurer,  to  swear. 

insurer,  to  assure.  laisser,  to  let,  to  permit. 

wouer,  to  confess.  fiier,  to  deny. 

cvmpter,  to  reckon,  intend.  oser,  to  dare. 

croire,  to  beliere.  paraitre,  to  appear. 

daigner,  to  deign.  penser,  to  think. 

declarer,  to  declare.  pretendre,  to  pretend. 

desirer*  to  wish.  pouvoir,  to  be  able. 

devoir,  to  be  obliged.  reconnaitre,  to  acknowledge, 

e&'re,  to  say.  savoir,  to  know, 

espe'rer,*  to  hope.  sembler,  to  appear,  to  seem. 

faillir,  to  miss.  souhaiter,*  to  wish. 

faire,  to  do.  soutenir,  to  maintain. 

falloir  (il  faut),  it  must.  Mmoigner,  to  testify. 

s'imaginer*  to  imagine.  vouloir,  to  be  willing. 

Examples :  — 
I7enez  nous  vozr  demain. 
Come  and  see  us  to-morrow. 
Je  cowrs  Zui  apprendre  cette  nouvelle. 
I  hasten  to  tell  him  this  news. 
77  faut  envoyer  cJiercher  If-  mtfdecin. 
We  must  send  for  the  doctor. 
Vous  osezy — -daignez,  —  d&irez,  etc.  lui  parlerl 
You  dare,  —  deign,  — wish,  etc.  to  speak  to  him ! 
Je  croyais  — ,  je  dgsirais,  etc.  lui  rendre  un  service. 
I  thought — ,  I  wished — ,  etc.  to  render  him  a  service. 
Je  compte  — ,  fespere,  etc.  alter  a  Paris. 
I  intend — ,  I  hope,  etc.  to  go  to  Paris. 
Je  ne  sais  pas  nager. 
I  cannot  swim. 
Croyez-vous  avoir  raison  ? 
Do  you  belie  /e  you  are  in  the  right  ? 
Je  Ventends  venir. 
I  hear  him  coming. 


THE  INFINITIVE.  341 

NOTE  1.  After  the  above  four  verbs  marked,*'  de  is  sometimes  used, 
especially  when  they  themselves  stand  in  the  Infinitive.    Ex. :  — 
Peut-on  espe"rer  de  vous  voir  demain  ? 
Pcrsonne  ne  doit  s'itnagincr  de  tout  savoir. 

NOTE  2.  The  verb  faire  is  used  for  to  do,  to  make  and  to  get,  to  cause  ;  in 
all  these  cases  it  is  immediately  followed,  in  French,  by  the  Infinitive  active 
without  a  preposition:  — 

Je  ferai  bdtirune  maison. 

I  will  cause  a  house  to  be  built. 

Vbulez-vous  faire  laver  vos  gants  ? 

Will  you  have  your  gloves  washed  ? 

Je  lui  ferai  faire  un  theme. 

I  will  make  him  write  an  exercise. 

6.  The   simple  Infinitive  is  governed  further  by  the  verbs: 
aimer*  when  used  in  the  Conditional,  I  should  like ;  preferer,  to 
prefer  ;  aimer  autant,  to  like  as  much ;  il  vaut  mieux,  it  is  better. 

Examples :  — 

J*aimerais  le  voir,  I  should  like  to  see  him. 

//  vaut  mieux  ce'der,  it  is  better  to  yield. 

Je  prefere  rester  a  la  maison,  I  prefer  staying  at  home. 

NOTE.   When,  however,  in  the  second  member  of  a  comparison  a  second 
Infinitive  follows  que,  this  latter  takes  de  before  it.    Ex.:  — 
J'aime  mieux  mourir  qu&de  trahir  mon  secret. 
I  will'rlther  die  than  betray  my  secret. 

7.  The  Infinitive  is  used  after  every   preposition  except  en. 
Examples :  — 

An  lieu  de  jouer,  instead  of  playing. 

Sans  aller,  without  going. 

Pour  voir,  for  the  purpose  of  seeing. 

THEME  52. 

1.  To  speak  too  much  is  dangerous.  2.  To  clothe1  the  poor  is  a 
good  work.2  8.  To  lie  is  to  disregard3  God  and  to  fear  men.  4. 
To  purchase  peace  of  an  enemy  is  to  give  him  tho  means  of  carry- 

*  In  regard  to  aimer  with  a  consult  $  15  of  this  lesson. 


342  XX.      VINGTIBME  LEgON. 

ing  on4  war.  5.  Can  you  inform  me  whether  the  courier  has 
arrived?  6.  He  has  not  yet  arrived.  7.  One  must  know  [how]  to 
keep6  a  secret.  8.  This  man  thinks  he  knows  (-fo/*.)  everything. 
9.  We  hope  to  see  the  queen.  10.  When  do  you  intend  to  re- 
turn? 11.  I  do  not  know  precisely  ;6  but  I  hope  to  see  you  again 
soon.  12.  The  king  caused  the  brave  soldiers  to  be  rewarded.  13. 
It  is  much  better  to  keep  silent7  than  to  say  such  things.  14.  The 
most  unfortunate  of  men  is  he  who  thinks  himself  to  be  such  (T). 
15.  He  assured  us  that  he  had  been  there.  16.  To  yield8  to  ne- 
cessity 13  not  to  be  [a]  coward.9  17.  Eating,  drinking,  and  sleeping 
were  his  only  occupations.  18.  I  hastened  to  communicate10  to  him 
this  intelligence.11  19.  He  came  to  tell  me  that  he  had  won  noth- 
ing in  the  lottery.  20.  Who  would  not  rather  (like  to)  be  poor 
than  possess  unjustly  acquired  wealth?12  21.  Bayard  said  to  the 
Constable  de  Bourbon  :  "  It  is  better  to  perish  fighting  (en  combat- 
tanf)  for  one's  (sa)  country,13  than  to  conquer  and  (to)  triumph  H 
over  it  (d'elle) . 

1.  Vetir.  2.  (Euvre,  f.  3.  Mepriser.  4.  Continuer.  5.  Taire.  6.  Au  juste.  7. 
Se  taire.  8.  Cider  a.  9.  Ldche.  10.  Communiquer.  11.  Nouvelle,  f.  12.  Des 
richesses  mal  acquises.  13.  Patrie.  14.  Triompher. 


THE  INFINITIVE   PRECEDED  BY  DE. 

8.  After  a  substantive  which  the  verb  limits,  the  English  prepo- 
sition of  with  a  Pres.  Participle  (of  going,  of  seeing,  etc.)  is  gen- 
erally expressed  by  de  with  the  Infinitive.     Ex. :  — 

Le  de'sir  de  vous  voir,  the  desire  of  seeing  you. 

Sa  manierede  penser  et  d'agir  (of  thinking  and  acting). 

//  est  temps  de  partir,  it  is  time  to  set  out. 

J'ai  riionneur  de  vous  saluer. 

9.  The  preposition  de  is  placed  before  a  verb  in  the  Infinitive, 
after    the    adjectives :    avide,    content,    mecontent,    las,    digne, 
Capable,  incapable,  etc.,  and  in  general  after  an  adjective,  whenever, 
by  inverting  the  sentence,  the  clause  containing  the  Infinitive  might 


THE  INFINITIVE.  343 

be  made  the  leading  term  of  an  assertion  expressed  as  subject  to 
some  tense  of  to  be.     Ex.: — 

Je  suis  curieux  de  savoir. 

I  am  anxious  to  know. 
Etes-vous  las  de  travailler  ? 
Are  you  tired  with  working  1 

Get  homme  est  capable  de  vous  tromper. 
That  man  is  capable  of  deceiving  you. 
Vous  etes  tres-adroit  d'avoir  si  bien  re'ussi. 
You  are  very  clever  to  have  succeeded  so  well. 

10.  De   is  used  before  the   Infinitive  after    impersonal  verbs, 
such  as  :  il  convient,  it  is  proper  ;  il  importe,  it  concerns ;  il  s'agit, 
it  is  the  question ;  il  suffit,  it  is  enough  ;  il  me  tarde,  I  long,  and 
after  il  est,  il  etait  or  il  senible  followed  by  an  adjective,  as  :  il  est 
facile,  il  etait  necessaire,  etc.     Ex.:  — 

H  m'importe  beaucoup  de  lui  dire  cela. 
It  concerns  me  much  to  tell  him  this. 
H  est  beau  de  pardonner  a  son  ennemi. 
It  is  a  good  thing  to  pardon  one's  enemy. 

II  suffira  de  lui  parler. 

It  will  be  enough  to  speak  to  him. 

11.  De  is  used  after  que,  than,  in  a  comparison  of  predicates. 
See  jSToEe,  §  6,  of  this  lesson. 

THEME  53. 

1.  You  have  no  cause1  to  be  angry  with  (contre)  me.  2.  Were 
you  at  the  concert  yesterday  ?  3.1  did  not  have  the  pleasure  of 
seeing  you.  4.  The  way2  to  be  happy  is  to  be  virtuous.  5.  Have 
you  the  intention  of  selling  your  horse  ?  6.  Not  at  all ;  I  intend 
to  keep  it.  7.  I  fear  losing  (to  lose)  your  confidence.3  8.  It  is 
too  late ;  it  is  time  to  go  to  bed.  9.  The  art  of  dancing  was  known 
to  the  ancients.  10.  It  is  disgraceful4  to  obey  (a)  one's  passions. 

11.  The  desire  of  appearing  clever  often  prevents  one  becoming  so.5 

12.  We  rejoice  greatly  to  see  you.     13.  It  is  agreeable  to  hear  the 
twitter8  of  the  birds.     14.  It  is  useless  to  warn7  him.     15.  It  is  a 


344 


XX.      VINGTIEME  LE^ON. 


beautiful  thing  to  forgive  one's  enemies.  16.  It  is  pleasant  to  live 
with  one's  friends.  17.  It  is  the  fate8  of  all  human  things  to  be  of 
short  duration.9  18.  The  great  secret  of  being  happy  is  to  work 
and  to  be  virtuous.  19.  I  don't  approve  [of]  your  project  of  going 
to  Europe.  20.  Gentleness10  is  the  surest  means  of  escaping  every 
offence.  21.  It  is  sad  to  have  no  friends  and  to  be  forsaken.11 

1.  Avoir  sujet.  2.  Le  moyen.  3.  Confiance,  f.  4.  LTonteux.  5.  De  le  devenir. 
6.  Le  gazouillement.  7.  Avertir.  8.  Le  sort.  9.  De  rfavoir  qu'une  courte  duree, 
10.  La  douceur.  11.  Abandonne. 

12.   De  is  further  used  before  the  Infinitive,  when  the  latter  is 
immediately  preceded  by  any  of  the  following  verbs :  — 

Abstenir  ($'),  to  abstain.  d€fendre  (se),  to  decline. 

defier,  to  challenge. 
dfyecher  (se),  to  hasten. 

d&accoutumer  (se),  )  A    ,  ~ 

,  \   '   >  to  leave  off. 


accuser,  to  accuse. 

achever,  to  finish. 

qffecter,  to  affect. 

agir  (s')  (unip.),  to  be  the  question,    deshabituer  (se), 

ambitionner,  to  aspire  to. 

appartenir,  to  pertain,  to  become. 

applaudir  (s*),  to  rejoice,  exult. 


apprehender,  to  apprehend. 
avertir,  to  warn. 
aviser  (sj),  to  determine. 
bldmer,  to  blame. 
bruler,  to  wish  ardently. 
censurer,  to  censure. 
cesser,  to  cease. 
ch'agriner  (se),  to  grieve. 
charger,  to  commission. 
choisir,  to  choose. 
commander,  to  command. 
conjurer,  to  entreat. 
conseiller,  to  advise. 
convenir,  to  become,  to  suit. 
convaincre,  to  convince. 
com'ger,  to  correct. 
craindre,  to  fear. 
d&ourager,  to  discourage. 
dedaigner,  to  disdain,  scorn. 
d€fendret  to  forbid. 


de'sespe'rer,  to  despair. 

de'sirer,  to  desure.  De  is  often  omit- 
ted after  this  verb. 

de'soler  (se),  to  be  grieved. 

d&ester,  to  detest.  De  may  be  omit- 
ted. 

d&ourner,  to  dissuade. 

devoir  (se),  to  owe  it  to  one's  self. 

diffe'rer,  to  put  off. 

dire,  to  tell. 

disconvenir,  to  disown,  deny. 

discontinuer,  to  discontinue. 

disculper,  to  exculpate. 

dispenser,  to  excuse  from. 

dispenser  (se),  to  forbear. 

dissuader,  to  dissuade. 

douter,  to  doubt. 

tcrire,  to  write. 

effbrcer  (s'),  to  endeavor. 

effrayer  (s'),  to  be  frightened, 

empecher,  to  hinder. 

empresser  (s'),  to  hasten. 

enrager,  to  be  enraged. 


THE  INFINITIVE. 


345 


entreprendre,  to  undertake. 

fyouvanter  (s'),  to  be  frightened. 

essayer,  to  try. 

Manner  (s'),  to  wonder. 

fviter,  to  avoid. 

excuser  (s'),  to  excuse  one's  self. 

feindre,  to  feign. 

ftliciter,  to  congratulate. 

finir,  to  finish. 

flatter  (se),  to  flatter  one's  self. 

fr€mir,  to  shudder. 

garder  (se),  to  take  care. 

gemir,  to  moan,  lament. 

glorifier  (se),  to  pride  one's  self. 

hasarder,  to  hazard,  to  risk ;  se  hasar- 

der  requires  a. 
hater  (se),  to  hasten. 
imputer,  to  impute. 
indigner  (s'),  to  be  indignant. 
ingfrer  (s'),  to  intermeddle. 
inspirer,  to  inspire. 
furer,  to  swear. 
manquer,  to  fail. 
m€diter,  to  contemplate. 
meler  (se),  to  concern  one's  self. 
menacer,  to  threaten. 
mfriter,  to"  deserve. 
moquer  (se),  to  laugh  at. 
mourir  (fig.),  to  long. 
TKfgliger,  to  neglect. 
nier,  to  deny. 
ojfrir,  to  offer. 
omettre,  to  omit. 
ordonner,  to  order. 
oublier,  to  forget. 
pardonner,  to  forgive. 
parler,  to  speak, 
joosser  (se),  to  do  without. 
permettre,  to  permit. 
persuader,  to  persuade, 
pzgwer  (se),  to  take  pride  in, 
plaindre,  to  pity. 


plaindre  (so),  to  complain. 

prescrlre,  to  prescribe. 

presser,  to  urge. 

presstr  (se),  to  hasten. 

pr&umer,  to  presume. 

/?ner,  to  pray,  entreat. 

promettre,  to  promise. 

proposer,  to  propose. 

proposer  (se),  to  purpose. 

protester,  to  protest. 

pwwr,  to  punish. 

rassasier  (se),  to  be  sated. 

rebuter,  to  discourage. 

rebuter  (se),  to  be  weary. 

recommander,  to  recommend. 

refuser,  to  refuse. 

regretter,  to  regret. 

rejouir  (se),  to  rejoice. 

remercier,  to  thank. 

repentir  (se),  to  repent. 

reprendre,  to  censure. 

re'primander,  to  reprimand. 

reprocher,  to  reproach. 

reprocher  (se),  to  reproach  one's  self. 

re'soudre,  to  resolve.    When  active, 
followed  by  Je ;  passive,  by  a. 

rcssouvenir  (se),  to  remember. 

n're,  to  laugh. 

risquer,  to  venture. 

seoz'r,  to  be  becoming. 

rougir,  to  blush. 

scandaliser  (se),  to  take  offence. 

sommer,  to  summon. 

souffrir,  to  suffer. 

souhaiter,  to  wish.    Z)e  may  be  sup- 
pressed. 

soupfonner,  to  suspect. 

souvenir  (se),  to  remember. 

sw^ire  (unip.),  to  suffice. 

suggfrer,  to  suggest. 

supplier,  to  beseech, 
r,  to  endeavor. 


346  XX.  VINGTIEME 

tarder,  (unip.),  to  long.  se  trouver  bien,  to  derive  benefit. 

tenter,  to  attempt.  se  trouver  mal,  to  fare  ill. 

trembler,  to  tremble.  vanter  (se),  to  boast. 


EXAMPLES. 

Tl  cesse  de  pleuvoir,  it  ceases  raining. 
Je  vous  conseille  de  partir,  I  advise  you  to  set  out. 
Je  crains  de  vous  deranger,  I  fear  to  disturb  you. 
H  est  deyendu  de  fumer  id,  smoking  is  forbidden  here. 
Dites-lui  de  venir,  tell  him  to  come. 
Vous  me'ritez  d'etre  punt,  you  deserve  to  be  punished. 
//  risque  de  tout  perdre,  he  risks  losing  everything. 

La  forteresse  fut  soimne'e  de  se  rendre,  the  fortress  was  summoned  to  sur- 
render. 

13.  After  the  following  prepositions  and  conjunctions :  — pres, 
hors,  avant;  au  lieu,  loin,  afin,  a  moins,  de  crainte,  or  de  peur, 
d  force  (by)  faute  (for  want  of) ,  plutot  que  (rather  than) .  Ex. :  — 

Avant  de  partir,  before  departing. 

Au  lieu  de  pleurer,  instead  of  crying. 

Loin  de  se  corriger,  far  from  amending  himself. 

A  force  de  prior,  by  much  entreaty. 

Dieu  nous  affl.ige  afin  de  nous  corriger,  God  sends  us  afflictions  (in  order) 
to  amend  us. 

Je  sors,  de  crainte  (or  de  peur)  de  vous  deranger,  I  go  for  fear  of  disturbing 
you. 

THEME  54. 

1.  I  advise  you  to  stay  here  and  (to)  begin  your  studies.  2.  I 
beg  you  to  come  at  six  o'clock.  3.  The  first  step1  towards  good 
(vers  le  oien)  is  to  avoid  evil.  4.  It  is  (c?est)  the  duty  of  a  Chris- 
tian2 to  please  God,  to  hurt  nobody,  and  to  do  good,  even  to  Iiis 
enemies.  5.  He  is  not  able  to  go  so  far.  6.  You  are  very  amiable 
in  having  come  to  pay3  us  a  visit.  7.  It  is  dangerous  to  trust4  every- 
body. 8.  The  law  of  nature  forbids  us  to  do  injustice  (torC)  to 
others.  9.  A  simple  and  temperate  diet5  lays  the  foundation6  of 
firm  health,  [which  is]  capable  of  enduring7  the  greatest  hardships.8 
10.  I  cannot  help9  recognizing  in  the  laws  of  nature  a  wonderful 


THE  INFINITIVE.  347 

ait ;  and   I  hesitate  not  to  say,  in  the  language  of  Scripture,10  that 
every  star  hasteneth11  to  go  whither  the  Lord  scndeth  it. 

1.  Le  pas.  2.  Chretien.  3.  Faire.  4.  Se  fier  a.  5.  Nourriture.  6.  Prepare. 
7.  Supporter.  8.  Les  fatigues.  9.  APempechcr.  10.  L'Ecriture  Sainte.  11.  Se 
dcpecher. 

THEME  55. 

1.  I  was  astonished,  after  such  news,  to  see  the  man  so  quiet. 

2.  Before  one  writes  (-&/.)»  one  must  know  what  one  wishes  to  say. 

3.  Instead  of  working,  he  went  to  walk  that  day.     4.  I  longed1  to 
see  my  native  country2  again ;  accordingly3 1  determined  to  embark4 
for  Europe.     5.  By  much  entreaty,  I  induced5  my  friend  to  accom- 
pany me.     6.  For  fear  of  offending  him,  I  preferred  to  remain6 
silent.     7.  The  enemy  retired,7  in  order8  to  make  believe  that  he 
had  given  over9  the  siege.     8.  When  one  advised  Philip  to  expel10 
from  his  dominions11  a  man  who  had  spoken  ill  of  him ;  "  I  will  take 
care12    not  to  do  it,"    replied  Philip;    "he  would  go  everywhere 
and  speak  ill  of  me." 

1.  II  me  tardait.  2.  Pays  natal.  3.  CPest  pourquoi.  4.  S'enibarquer  pour.  5. 
Engager  a.  C.  Me  taire.  7.  Reflective  verb.  8.  Ajin  de.  9.  Eenoncer  a.  10. 
Chasser.  11.  Etat.  12.  Se  garder  bien. 

THE   INFINITIVE   WITH   «. 

Workplace  the  preposition  a  before  the  Infinitive  of  a  verb :  — 

14.  When  the  English  Infinitive  is  passive,  or  can  be  changed  to 
the  passive  without  altering  the  sense.     Ex. :  — 

La  moisson  a  esptfrer,  the  harvest  to  be  hoped  for. 
Cette  maison  est  a  vendre,  this  house  is  to  be  sold. 
Je  n'ai  pas  de  temps  a  perdre,  I  have  no  time  to  lose. 

15.  After  a  substantive,  when  the  following  verb  is  or  maybe 
expressed  by  in  with  the  Pres.  Part.     Ex. :  — 

JTaurai  beaucoup  de  plaisir  a  vous  voir. 
I  shall  have  great  pleasure  in  seeing  you. 

16.  After  any  adjectives  which  take  a  verb  in  the  Infinitive  to 
complete  the  sense,  provided  the  verb  preceding  the  adjective  is  not 
used  impersonally.     Especially  after :  — 


348  XX.      VINGTIEME  LEgON. 

Accessible,  accessible.  lent,  slow. 

aistf,  easy.  pret,  ready. 

attentif,  attentive.  prompt,  quick. 

607?,  good.  propre,  fit,  proper. 

dispose',  disposed,  inclined.  sensible,  sensible. 

difficile,  difficult,  hard.  sourd,  deaf. 

docile,  obedient.  utile,  useful. 

habile,  skilful.  inutile,  useless. 

facile,  easy.  (See  also  L.  VIII.,  Gov.  of  Adj.) 

EXAMPLES. 

Cette  lecon  est  facile  a  apprendre,  this  lesson  is  easy  to  learn. 

Ce  fruit  n'est  pas  bon  a  manger,  this  fruit  is  not  good  to  eat. 

Ce  theme  est-il  difficile  a  traduire  ?  is  this  exercise  hard  to  translate  1 

Nous  sommes  disposes  a  croire  que,  etc.,  we  are  disposed  (inclined)  to  believe 
that,  etc. 

Soyez  prompts  a  faire  le  bien,  be  quick  to  do  good. 

NOTE.  Compare  the  following  sentences,  in  which  the  verb  preceding 
the  adjective  is  used  impersonally  (see  L.  XX.,  §  10).  Ex. :  — 

II  n'est  pas  facile  de  prononcer  ce  mot,  it  is  not  easy  to  pronounce  that 
word. 

77  est  difficile  de  vaincreses  passions,  it  is  difficult  to  conquer  one's  passions. 

H  semble  difficile  d' apprendre  cette  langue,  it  seems  difficult  to  learn  that 
language. 

The  other  way  would  be :  — 

Ce  mot  n'est  pas  facile  a  prononcer. 

Cette  langue  parait  difficile  a  apprendre,  etc. 

THEME   56. 

1.  This  wood  is  to  be  sold.  2.  These  rooms  are  to  let.  3.  We 
have  not  a  moment  to  lose.  4.  There  is  much  pleasure  in  taking  a 
a  walk.  5.  Is  this  house  to  sell  or  to  let  ?  6.  It  is  to  let.  7.  I 
perceived  in  him  a  kind1  of  repugnancy  to  learn  Greek.2  8.  You 
know  his  courage  in  facing3  dangers.  9.  This  girl  spends  all  her 
time  in  playing.  10.  There  is  more  glory  in  dying  like  Nelson  than 
in  living  in  unmerited4  honor.  11.  Is  German  easy  to  learn?  12. 
It  is  not  so  cany  as  French.  13.  That  is  easy  to  say,  but  not  so 
easy  to  do.  14.  That  forest5  is  dangerous  to  pass.  15.  I  am 
ready  to  follow  you,  but  I  fear  that  you  are  not  fit  to  guide6  us, 


THE  INFINITIVE.  349 

16.  Be  attentive  to  seize  the  opportunity.7  17.  The  just  man  is 
slow  to  punish  but  quick  to  reward.  18.  Are  you  disposed  to  do 
what  I  tell  you?  19.  I  shall  be  quick  to  perform  what  you 
command  me. 

1.  Une  sortc  de  repugnance.     2.  Le  Grec.      3.  Affronter.      4.  Au  sein  des  hon- 
neurs  qu'on  tfa  pas  merites.     5.  For 'it ,  f.    6.  Guider,  conduire.     7.  ISoccasion. 


17.    The  following  verbs  also  govern  the  Infinitive  with  a :  — 

Abaisser(s'),  to  stoop.  consentir,  to  consent. 

aboutir,  to  end  in.  consister,  to  consist. 

accorder(s'),  to  agree,  to  coincide.  conspirer,  to  conspire. 

accoutumer,  to  accustom.  consumer,  to  consume. 

acharner(sy),  to  strive  furiously.  contribuer,  to  contribute. 

admettre,  to  admit,  to  permit.  convier,   to  invite.     Sometimes  fol- 
aguerrir(s'),  to  become  inured.  lowed  by  de. 

aider,  to  help.  couter,  to  cost.    When  used  imper- 
aimer,  to  like  (v.  L.  XX.,  §  6).  sonally  it  is  followed  by  de. 

amuser(s3),  to  amuse  one's  self  with,  decider,  to  decide. 

animer,  to  animate,  to  incite.  determiner,  to  determine. 

appliquer(s'),  to  apply  one's  self.  determiner (se),  to  resolve. 

apprendre,  to  learn,  to  teach.  disposer,  to  dispose. 

appreter(s'),  to  prepare.  disposer  (se),  to  prepare  one's  self. 

aspirer,  to  aspire.  divertir(se),  to  amuse  one's  self. 

assignerj^sQ  assign,  to  summon.  donner,  to  give. 

assujettir(s'),  to  subject  one's  self  to.  employer,  to  employ. 

attacher(s'),  to  strive.  encourager,  to  encourage. 

attendre(s>),  to  rely  upon,  expect.  engager,  to  induce. 

attendre,  to  put  off,  delay.  enhardir,  to  embolden. 

augmenter(s'),  to  increase.  enseigner,  to  teach. 

autoriser,  to  authorize.  entendre(s'),  to  be  skilful,  lo  be  a 
aviler(s'),  to  debase  one's  self.  judge. 

avoir t  to  have.  entreprendre,  to  undertake. 

balancer,  to  hesitate.  essayer(s'),  to  attempt. 

borner(se),  to  confine  one's  self  to.  e'tonner(s'),  to  wonder. 

chercJier,  to  seek.  etre,  to  be. 

complaire(se) ,  to  delight  in.  &udier(sy),  to  make  it  one's  study. 

concourir,  to  concur.  €vertuer(se),  to  strive  (may  be  fol- 
condamner,  to  condemn  :  also  the  ref.      followed  by  pour), 

condescend™,  to  condescend.  exceller,  to  excel. 


350 


XX.      VINGTIEMB  LEgON. 


exciter,  to  excite. 
excrcer(s'),  to  practice. 
exliorter,  to  exhort. 
exposer(s')  to  expose  one's  self. 
hair,  to  hate. 

halituer(s'),  to  become  used  to. 
hasarder(se),  to  venture. 
hssiter,  to  hesitate. 
induire,  to  induce. 
instruire,  to  instruct. 
inttfresser,  to  interest. 
inviter,  to  invite. 
inettre,  to  set,  to  put. 
mettre(se),  to  begin. 
montrer,  to  show,  to  teach. 
obstiner(s'),  to  persist  in. 
ojfrir(s'),  to  offer  one's  services. 
opinidtrer(s')  to  insist  upon. 
parvenir,  to  succeed  in. 
passer,  to  spend  (time,  etc.). 
pmclier,  to  incline. 
penser,  to  think,  to  intend. 
perseverer,  to  persevere. 
persister,  to  persist. 
plaire(se),  to  delight  in. 
plier(se),  to  bend,  bow,  comply. 
porter,  to  induce. 
pousser,  to  urge,  compel. 


prendre  plaiser,  to  take  pleasure. 

j?r^>arer(se),  to  prepare. 

pretendre,  to  lay  claim,  to  sue.  When 
signifying  to  wiran,  to  intend,  it 
governs  the  infinitive  without  a 
preposition. 

provoquer,  to  provoke. 

rtfduire,  to  constrain. 

reduire(se),  to  be  reduced. 

renoncer,  to  renounce. 

rfyugner,  to  be  repugnant. 

resigner(se) ,  to  be  resigned. 

rtfsoudre(se),  to  resolve. 

resfer,  to  remain.    Also  used  imp. 

r€ussir,  to  succeed. 

risquer,  to  risk. 

servir,  to  serve. 

songer,  to  dream,  think,  purpose. 

suffire,  to  suffice.  May  be  followed 
by  pour.  When  used  imperson- 
ally, is  followed  by  c?e. 

larder y  to  defer,  to  delay. 

tew/re,  to  tend,  to  intend,  to  aim. 

femr,  to  be  anxious,  desirous. 

travailler,  to  labor. 

viser,  to  aim. 

vouer,  to  devote. 


Examples :  — 

J'aime  a  danser,  I  like  to  dance. 
Mon  JUs  apprend  a  chanter,  my  son  learns  to  sing. 
Je  vous  autorise  a  vendre  man  jardin. 
I  authorize  you  to  sell  my  garden. 
Notre  bonheur  consiste  a  vivre  suivant  la  nature. 
Our  happiness  consists  in  living  according  to  nature. 
On  m'a  invite'  a  falre  une  promenade. 
I  have  been  invited  to  take  a  walk. 

18.    The  Infinitive  preceded  by  a  is  idiomatically  used  after  the 
verb  etre  to  translate  the  English  progressive  forms,  such  as  :  1  am 


THE  INFINITIVE.  351 

singing,  I  was  writing,  etc.  The  French  Je  suis  a  chanter, 
J'etais  a  ecrire,  are,  however,  not  so  much  used  as  the  English 
participial  inflections,  which  are  generally  rendered  by  the  simpla 
verb  Je  chante,  fecrivais,  etc. 

1 9.  The  Infinitive  with  a  also  occurs  in  abbreviated  expressions 
which   in  reality   are    simply  contracted    subordinate    sentences. 
Examples :  — 

A  I' entendre,  on  d trait  qu'il  est  innocent. 

To  hear  him,  one  would  say  he  is  innocent. 

A  vous  voir,  on  croirait  .  .  . 

To  see  you,  one  would  think  .  .  . 

//  &ait  le  premier  a  se  jeter  sur  I'ennemi. 

He  was  the  first  to  throw,  i.  e.  who  threw  himself  on  the  enemy. 

Je  ne  suis  pas  homme  a  me  laisser  qffenser. 

I  am  not  the  man  to  allow  myself  to  be  offended. 

Je  me  plagai  de  maniere  a  pouvoir  tout  observer. 

I  placed  myself  in  such  a  posture  as  to  observe  everything. 

20.  Yerbs  with  a  or  de.     The  following  verbs  require  either  a 
or  de,  according  to  the  sense  in  which  they  are  employed  :  — 

1.  Commencer,  to  begin,  is  generally  followed  by  a.    Ex.: — 
On  a  commence"  a  jouer,  they  have  begun  to  play. 

But  if  ^..expresses  simply  a  fact  without  any  idea  of  continuation,  de  is 
used  after  it :  — 

Puisque  j'ai  commence'  de  rompre  le  silence. 

Since  I  have  begun  to  break  the  silence. 

2.  Cont'muer  a  denotes  an  uninterrupted  continuation  of  the  action. 
Example  .*  — 

Si  vous  continuez  a  travailler  si  fort,  vous  ruinerez  votre  saute". 
If  you  continue  to  work  so  much  you  will  ruin  your  health. 

Continuer  de  denotes  an  action  repeated,  but  after  successive  interrnp« 
tions.    Ex.:  — 
Mon  ami  continuait  de  m'&rire. 
My  friend  continued  to  write  to  me. 

3.  Dcyier  requires  a  when  it  means  to  challenge,  to  provoke  (to  a  competi- 
tion), and  de  when  it  means  to  set  at  defiance,  or,  defy  to  do  something. 


352  XX.      VI^GTIEME  LEgON. 

4.  S'effbrcer,  synonymous  with  faire  des  efforts,  to  exert  one's  self,  to 
take  pains,  takes  a.    Ex.: — 

//  s'effbrcait  a  faire  son  devoir. 

lie  took  pains  (exerted  himself)  to  do  his  duty. 

S'effbrcer  de  means  to  endeavor.    Ex.:  — 

Je  m'cfforcerai  dobtenir  cette  place. 

I  shall  endeavor  to  get  that  place. 

5.  Eire,  to  be,  when  joined  to  cey  is  followed  by  a  if  it  denotes  turn,  and 
by  de,  if  it  denotes  duty  or  right,  as  :  — 

C'est  a  vous  a  parler,  it  is  your  turn  to  speak. 

C'est  au  maitre  d'ordonner,  c'est  a  moi  d'ob&ir. 

It  is  for  the  master  to  command,  it  is  for  me  to  obey. 

6.  Laisser,  to  leave,  meaning  to  transmit,  is  followed  by  a ;  meaning  to 
cease  or  abstain,  by  de;  and  when  used  in  the  sense  of  to  permit  (to  let),  it 
governs  the  next  verb  without  a  preposition. 

7.  Manquer  a  denotes  the  omission  or  neglect  of  a  duty :  — 
Pourquoi  avez-vous  manque'  a  faire  votre  exercice  ? 

Why  have  you  neglected  to  do  your  exercise  ? 
Manquer  de  signifies  to  fail,  to  be  on  the  point  of:  — 
J'ai  manque"  de  perdre  la  vie,  I  had  nearly  lost  my  life. 

8.  S'occiiper  takes  a  in  the  sense  of  to  employ  one's  time,  to  work  at. 
Examples :  — 

H  s'occupe  a  lire,  he  occupies  himself  with  reading. 

L'auteur  de  "  Paul  ct  Virginie"  s'occupait  a  recueillir  les  mate'riaux  decet 
cuvrage. 

The  author  of  "Paul  and  Virginia"  occupied  himself  in  collecting  the 
materials  of  this  work. 

S'occuper  de  signifies  mcttre  ses  soins,  to  pay  attention  to,  to  think  much 
of.  Ex.:  — 

H  s'occvpe  de  delruire,  les  alms. 

He  is  thinking  how  to  abolish  abuses. 

9.  Venir  governs  the  Infinitive  with  a,  when  it  signifies  to  happen. 
Example:  — 

S'il  venait  a  apprendre  que  vous  etes  id. 
If  he  happened  to  know  that  you  are  here. 

Venir  is  followed  by  de,  when  it  is  used  to  express  a  thing  just  happened 
(see  P.  I.,  L.  XLVIL).  Ex.:  — 


THE  INFINITIVE.  353 

Mes  soeurs  viennent  de  sortlr. 
My  sisters  have  just  gone  out. 

10.    Tarder  a  signifies  to  delay.    Ex.:  — 
Ne  tardez  pas  a  lui  envoyer  de  I 'argent. 
Do  not  delay  sending  him  some  money. 

Tarder,  as  an  impersonal  verb :  il  me  tarde,  I  long,  governs  the  Infiu- 
itive  with  de.    Ex.:  — 

n  me  tarde  de  le  revoir,  I  long  to  see  him  again. 

21.  The  following  eleven  verbs  may  take  either  a  or  de:  — 

Ccnsentir,  to  consent.  s'enteter,  to  be  obstinate  in. 

contraindre,  to  compel.  essayer,  to  try. 

demander,  to  demand.  obliger,  to  oblige. 

forcer,  to  force.  ouUier,  to  forget. 

s'empresser,  to  be  eager.  tdcher,  to  try. 
s' engager,  to  engage,  agree. 

Examples :  — 

//  ne  demande  qu'a  manger  et  a  boire. 
He  demands  nothing  but  to  eat  and  drink. 
Elk  demanda  au  del  de  lui  pardonner  sa  faute. 
She  prayed  to  heaven  to  forgive  her  fault. 
Le  banquier  s'engagea  a  (or  de)  payer  la  somme  de  mille  francs. 
The  banker  agreed  to  pay  the  sum  of  a  thousand  francs. 
.• 

THEME    57. 

1.  When  the  captain  began  to  speak,  all  the  soldiers  listened* 
attentively.  2.  In  the  spring  the  trees  begin  to  cover  themselves 
with  leaves.  3.  They  continued  to  live  in  peace.  4.  We  have 
continued  to  write  to  him,  but  he  has  not  yet  answered  us.  5. 
The  unfortunate  never  fail  to  complain.  6.  I  have  failed  to  do 
what  I  had  promised  you.  7.  I  will  endeavor  to  satisfy  him.  8. 
It  is  long  before  he  comes  (he  delays  to  come).  9.  I  long  to  have 
finished  my  work.  10.  At  last  I  longed  (il  me  tar  da)  to  see  again 
my  native  country.  11.  That  woman  is  occupied  only  with  iron- 
ing.2 12.  Do  not  fail  to  be  here  at  a  quarter  to  six.  13.  Come 
and  see  us  this  evening.  14.  Is  your  brother  at  home  ?  15.  No, 
23 


354  XX.      VINGTIEMB   LEgON. 

he  has  just  gone  out.    16.  We  have  just  received  your  letter.    17. 
lie  agreed  to  inform  you  of  the  result.3 
1.  Ecouter.    2.  Eepasser.    3.  Resulted. 


INFINITIVE  WITH  THE   PREPOSITIONS  POUR,  PAR, 

APRES,  SANS. 

22.  Pour.      Whenever    the   English   to   before   an   Infinitive 
expresses  a  design  or  purpose,  and  can  be  changed  into,  in  order 
to,  pour  must  be  used.     Ex. :  — 

//  attend  de  V argent  pour  payer  ses  dettes. 
He  is  expecting  money  to  pay  his  debts. 
J'ai  fait  mon  possible  pour  les  reconcilier. 
I  have  done  all  in  my  power  to  reconcile  them. 
Je  I'ai  fait  moi-mcine  pour  ne  pas  vous  deranger. 
I  did  it  myself  not  to  disturb  you.     . 

23.  The  preposition  pour  is  also  used  after  the  adjective  follow- 
ing assez,  trop,  suffisant,  or  after  the  verb  suffire.     Ex.:  — 

M.  R.  est  assez  riche  pour  acheter  cette  campagne. 
Mr.  R.  is  rich  enough  to  buy  that  estate. 
Caroline  est  trop  jeune  pour  faire  cet  ouvrage. 
Coroline  is  too  young  to  do  this  work. 

24.  The  French  usage  differs  from  the  English  in  employing  the 
Infinitive  instead  of  a  separate  clause,  when  the  dependent  clause 
has  the  same  subject  as  the  principal  clause  :  — 

Je  crois  etre  blesse",  I  think  I  am  wounded. 

J'espere  me'riter  votre  confiance,  I  hope  I  deserve  your  confidence. 

Je  voudrais  etre  riche,  I  wish  I  were  rich. 

THE3IE  53. 

1.  I  travel  to  see  the  world.  2.  The  army  was  too  fatigued  to 
renew1  the  attack.  8.  I  will  do  everything  to  oblige  you,  4.  God 
has  not  given  us  hearts  to  hate  one  another.  5.  lie  is  going  into 
the  country  to  shoot.2  6.  Some  people  are  hated  without  deserving8 


THE   INFINITIVE.  355 

it.  7.  It  is  necessary  to  know  the  human  heart  to  judge  well  of 
others.4  8.  After  having  terminated  some  affairs  at  home,  I  shall 
begin  by  paying5  some  visits.  9.  Nobody  can  be  happy  without 
practising6  virtue.  10.  If  the  emperor  Titus  passed  one  day  with- 
out doing  good7  to  (a)  anybody,  he  used8  to  say:  "I  have  lost 
this  day." 

1.  Renouveler  Vattaque.    2.  C7iasser.    3.  Meriter.    4.  Des  autres.    6.  Faire.    6. 
Pratiquer.    7.  Du  Men.    8.  H  avail  coutume. 


HEADING  LESSON. 

ALEXANDRE     SELKIRK. 

(Suite.; 

"  Une  longue  habitude  me  fit  manger  la  viande  sans  sel  et  sans 
pain.  Dans  la  saison  j'avais  quantite  de  bons  navets1  qui  avaient 
&e  semes  par  Pequipage2  de  quelque  vaisseau  et  qui  couvraient 
plusieurs  arpents3  de  terre.  Je  ne  manquais  pas  non  plus  d'exeel- 
lents  choux4  que  je  cueillais  sur  une  espece  de  palmier  et  que  j'as- 
saisonnais  avec  le  fruit  du  piment,  qui  est  le  meme  que  le  poivre  do 
la  Jamaique,  et  dont  Fodeur  est  delicieuse. 

"  Messouliers  et  mes  habits  furent  bientot  uses  a  force  de  courir 
k  travers  les  bois  et  les  broussailles.5  Cependant  mcs  pieds  s'endur- 
cirent6  $i  bien  a  la  fatigue,  que  je  courais  partout  sans  peine. 

"  Revenu7  enfin  de  ma  melancolie,  je  me  divertissais  quelquefois 
h  graver  mon  nom  sur  1'ecorce8  des  arbres  avec  la  date  de  mon  exil, 
ou  bien  h  chanter  et  a  dresser9  k  la  danse  des  chats  et  des  chevreaux. 
Lorsque  je  n'eus  plus  d'habits,  je  me  fis  un  juste-au-corps10  et  un 
bonnet  (cap)  de  peaux  de  chevres  que  je  cousis  ensemble  avec  de 
petites  courroies ; u  un  clou12  me  servait  d 'aiguille.  Je  me  fis  aussi 
des  chemises  d'un  morceau  de  toile  que  j'avais.  Quand  mon  cou- 
teau  fut  use'  jusqu'au  dos,  j'en  forgeai  d'autres  avec  quelques  cercles 
de  fer  que  j'avais  trouve*s  sur  le  rivage,  et  je  les  aiguisai13  sur  des 
pierres. 

"  C'est  ainsi  que  la  ndcessitd  m'apprit  h  pourvoir  h  tous  mes 
besoins." 


356  XX.      VINGTIEME  LE<JON. 

"  Pendant  mon  sejour14  dans  cette  ile  deserte,  j'ai  vu  plusieurs 
fois  des  vaisseaux  qui  passaient,  mais  il  n'y  en  eut  que  deux  qui 
vinrent  y  mouiller.15  Incertain  de  quelle  nation  ils  etaient,  je  m'en 
approchai  pour  les  examiner.  Mais  quelques  Espagnols  qui  ayaient 
cleju  mis  pied  a  terre,  ne  m'eurent  pas  plutot  aper9u  qu'ils  tirerent16 
sur  moi  et  me  poursuivirent  jusque  dans  les  bois,  oil  je  grimpai  sur 
un  arbre.  Je  ne  fus  pas  decouvert,  quoiqu'ils  rodassent17  dans  les 
environs  et  qu'ils  tuassent  quantite  de  chevres  sous  mes  ycux. 
Eufin  j'aper£us  vos  navires  que  je  pris  aussitot  pour  anglais.  J'al- 
lumai  un  feu  sur  un  rocher  pres  du  rivage  pour  vous  donner  le  sig- 
nal de  ma  detresse.18  Vous  me  comprites  et,  graces  a  votre  huma- 
nite,  je  puis  esperer  de  revoir  ma  patrie.J> 

1.  Turnips.  2.  The  crew.  3.  Acre.  4.  Cabbage.  5.  Brushwood.  6.  To  harden. 
7.  Recovered.  8.  Bark.  9.  To  train.  10.  Jacket.  11.  Strap.  12.  A  nail.  13.  To 
sharpen.  14.  Stay.  15.  To  anchor.  16.  To  fire  or  shoot  at.  17.  To  run  about, 
ramble.  18.  Distress. 

QUESTIONNAIRE. 

Comment  mangeait-il  la  viande  ? 

N'avait-il  pas  autre  chose  a  manger  ? 

Manquait-il  de  choux  ? 

Ou  les  cueillait-il  ? 

Avec  quoi  assaisonnaitril  scs  choux? 

Avait-il  toujours  des  souliers  et  des  habits  ? 

Comment  se  divertissait-il  quelquefois  ? 

Lorsque  ses  habits  furent  uses,  que  fit  Selkirk  ? 

De  quoi  se  servit-il  pour  coudre  les  peaux  de  chevres  ? 

De  quoi  se  fit-il  des  chemises  ? 

Quand  son  couteau  fut  use,  que  fit-il  ? 

NVt-il  jamais  vu  de  vaisseaux  qui  passaient  ? 

De  quelle  nation  *etaient-ils  ? 

Que  firent-ils  lorsqu'ils  Feurent  apergu  ? 

Fut-il  decouvert  ? 

Qu'aperQut-il  enfin? 

Pourquoi  alluma-t-il  un  feu  sur  le  rivage  ? 

Ce  signal  fut-il  remarqu^  ? 


THE   PRESENT   PARTICIPLE.  357 


XXI.     VINGT    ET    UNIEMB    LE£ON. 


THE  PRESENT  PARTICIPLE. 

1.  The  Present  Participle  is  invariable  in  French.     Ex. :  — 
Une  femme  mourant  de  soif. 

A  woman  dying  of  thirst. 

Une  preuve  convainquant  tout  le  monde. 

A  proof  convincing  everybody. 

Une  mere  consolant  sa  file. 

A  mother  consoling  her  daughter. 

Une  pluie  fecondant  la  terre. 

A  rain  fructifying  the  earth. 

2.  When  the  Present  Participle  loses  its  verbal  nature  and  be« 
conies  a  participial  adjective,  it  follows  the  noun,  and  agrees  with  it 
as  an  adjective.     Ex. :  — 

Une  femme  mouranle. 
A  dying  woman. 
Une  preuve  convainquqnte. 
A  convincing  proof. 
Des  paroles  consolantes. 
Consoling  words. 

3.  The  Present  Participle  is  often  used  in  English  as  a  substan- 
tive, which  is  not  the  case  in  French.    It  can  sometimes  be  rendered 
by  a  noun,  in  most  cases  by  the  Infinitive  (see  Leeson  XX.,  §  1), 
Examples :  — 

La  lecture  est  un  passe-temps  agr€alle. 
Heading  is  an  agreeable  pastime. 
Sa  passion  dominante  est  la  chasse. 
His  ruling  passion  is  hunting. 
I  like  dancing,  faime  a  danser. 

4.  When  an  English  Present  Participle  has  reference  to  a  sub- 
stantive which  is  not  in  the  Nominative  Case,  it  is  rendered  in  French 


358  XXI.      VINGT   ET   UNIEME 

by  the  Present  or  Imperfect  of  the  Indicative,  with  the  relative 
pronoun  qui  before  it.     Ex. :  — 

H  portait  une  louteille  qui  contenait  du  poison. 

He  carried  a  bottle  containing  poison. 

5.  An  English  Present  Participle  preceded  by  any  preposition 
but  by  and  on  (§  7),  such  as,  a?,  from,  before,  after,  for,  without, 
is  rendered  in  French  by  the  Infinitive  with  de,  a,  pour  or  saizs  (as 
TO  have  seen  before).     Ex. :  — 

L'art  d'&rire  est  tres-ancien. 

The  art  of  writing  is  very  old. 

Je  connais  sa  maniere  de  penser  et  d'agir. 

I  know  his  manner  of  thinking  and  acting. 

Ne  Vempecltez  pas  de  faire  du  lien. 

Do  not  prevent  him  from  doing  good. 

Je  I'ai  rencontre' avant  de  partlr. 

I  met  him  before  leaving. 

On  ne  peut  pas  trahir  la  verite  sans  se  rendre  coupable. 

One  cannot  speak  against  the  truth  without  being  guilty. 

6.  Sometimes  the  English  Present  Participle  is  used  substantively 
with  a  possessive  pronoun  before  it ;  then  it  must  be  rendered  in 
French  by  the  conjunction  que  and  the  Indicative  or  Subjunctive, 
according  as  the  case  requires.     Ex. :  — 

Je  doute  qu'il  soil  un  honnete  homme. 
I  doubt  his  being  an  honest  man. 
Nous  avons  appris  qu'il  s'est  fait  soldat. 
We  heard  of  his  becoming  a  soldier. 

THEME  59. 

1.  Miss  Mary  is  an  obliging  young  lady.  2.  I  listened1  [to]  her 
encouraging  words.  3.  He  has  given  us  consoling  news.  4.  These 
books  are  very  interesting.  5.  That  mother,  in  her  supplicating2 
attitude,  would  have  appeared  ton  ;hing,  even  without  the  surprising 
eloquence  of  her  discourse.  6.  The  young  soldier,  preceding  all 
the  others,  seized3  the  standard.4  7.  That  mountain,  commanding 
an  extensive5  view,  was  very  well  calculated6  for  our  observation!. 
8.  Caroline,  weeping  bitterly,7  threw  herself  into  her  mother's  arms. 


THE    PEESENT    PARTICIPLE.  359 

9.  I  have  seen  your  brother  (§  4)  playing  in  the  garden.  10. 
Alexander  asked  the  physicians  standing8  by  (autour  de)  him  if  he 
should  die  of  (de)  his  illness.  11.  The  soldiers  of  Alexander,  for- 
getting their  wives  and  children,  looked  upon9  the  Persian  gold  as10 
their  plunder.11  12.  It  ceased  raining.  13.  He  risked  losing  his 
life.  14.  I  am  afraid  of  losing  her  confidence.  15.  The  desire  of 
appearing  clever  often  prevents  one  from  becoming  so.  16.  He 
left12  without  paying  his  debts.  17.  I  heard  of  his  being  (§  6) 
married.  18.  We  noticed13  his  looking  at  it  (le).  19.  Rewrote 
to  me  without14  his  father's  knowing  it. 

o 

1.  Ecouter  qch,  2.  To  supplicate,  supplier.  3.  tfemparer  de  qch.  4.  Le  dra- 
peau.  5.  Etendue,  f.  G.  Propre  a.  7.  To  weep  bitterly,  fondre  en  larmes.  8. 
Se  tenir.  9.  To  look  upon,  regarder  qch.  10.  Comme.  11.  Butin,  m.  12.  Par- 
4r.  13.  Remarquer.  14.  Sans  que  with  the  Subj . 

THE  GERUND,— PRESENT  PARTICIPLE  WITH  EN. 

7  The  Gerund  is  the  Present  Participle  with  the  preposition  en 
prefixed.  It  generally  denotes  1,  either  a  means  by  which  the  ob- 
ject of  the  leading  clause  is  attained,  or  2,  a  simultaneous  action, 
that  is,  an  action  during  the  transaction  of  which  another  is  acted  by 
the  same  subject.  It  is  always  invariable,  and  corresponds  to  the 
English  Present  Participle  preceded  by  the  prepositions  J#,  in,  and 
on  or  while  ;  or  is  sometimes  rendered  by  the  simple  Participle  with- 
out preposition.  Ex. :  — 

1.  Denoting  a  means  :  — 

On  se  forme  I' esprit  en  lisant  de  Ions  livres. 

We  form  our  minds  by  reading  good  books. 

Nous  avons  obtenu  la  paix  en  faisant  de  grands  sacrifices. 

We  have  obtained  peace  by  making  great  sacrifices. 

//  se  sauva  en  sautant  par  la  fenetre. 

He  saved  himself  by  jumping  through  the  window. 

2.  Denoting  a  simultaneous  action  :  — 

La  dtfesse  sourit  en  voyant  Teltfmaque. 

The  goddess  smiled  on  seeing  Telemachus, 

//  me  dit  cela  en  tremUant. 

He  trembled  as  he  told  me  this. 


360  XXI.      VINGT   ET   UN1EME   LE(JON. 

Je  Uai  rencontre*  en  allant  au  chateau. 

I  met  him  in  going  (as  I  was  going)  to  the  castle. 

Je  Us  le  journal  en  dejeunant. 

I  read  the  paper  while  breakfasting. 

NOTE.  The  English  by  with  a  Participle  is  rendered  in  two  cases  only 
by  par  and  the  Infinitive,  viz.,  with  commencer,  to  commence,  begin,  and 
Jin  <V,  to  terminate  with,  to  do  something  at  last.  Ex. :  — 

Je  veux  commencer  par  reciter  ma  lecon. 

I  will  begin  by  saying  my  lesson. 

II  finit  par  me  demander  pardon. 

At  last  he  begged  my  pardon  (he  ended  by  asking). 

8.  To  enforce  the  simultaneousness  of  the  two  actions,  tout  is 
often  placed  before  the  Gerund.  Ex. :  — 

Tout  en  pleurant  il  ne  put  s'empecher  de  rire. 
Whilst  crying  he  could  not  forbear  laughing. 

THEME  CO. 

1.  We  learn  the  news  by  reading  the  newspapers.  2.  By 
observing  these  rules,  you  may  avoid  mistakes.  3.  By  studying 
much,  you  will  become  learned.  4.  More  glory  is1  acquired  by 
defending  one's  fellow-citizens2  than  by  accusing  them.  5.  In 
going3  this  way  we  shall  meet  him.  6.  I  met  my  friend  as  I  was 
going  to  the  post-office.  7.  By  paying  all  his  debts,  he  reestab- 
lished4 his  credit  8.  He  told  me,  trembling,  that  he  had  lost  all  his 
money.  9.  You  may  easily  get5  praise,  by  complying6  with  the 
(aux)  wishes  of  the  people7  with  whom  you  converse,  and  by  pre- 
ferring others  to  yourself. 

1.  On  acquiert.  2.  Concitoyen,  m.  3.  Prendre.  4.  Retdblir.  5.  Obtenir  dca 
louanges.  6.  To  comply  with,  se  conformer  a  qch.  7.  Des  personnes. 


READING  LESSOR 

GESLER  CONDUIT  TELL  A  KCSXACH. 

Tell,  dans  la  barque,  etait  moins  cinu  des  cris  des  soldats,  da 
bruit  des  vagues  ecumantes,  du  sifflemeut  des  vents  dechaines,  qu'il 


THE  PRESENT  PARTICIPLE.  361 

ne  le  fut  en  deeouvrant  la  caver ne  de  Grutli.  H  attendait  le  tr6- 
pas,1  et  ne  songeait  qu'a  1'avantage  que  son  pays  pourrait  tirer  de  la 
mort  du  gouverneur:  II  jouissait  en  silence  de  la  peur,  des  geinis- 
sements,2  du  tourmenfc  qu'eprouvait  Gesler,  lorsqu'im  des  rameurs, 
tout-a~coup  s'adressant  acet  homme  cruel:  "  Nons  sommes  perdus," 
dit-il,  "  il  n'est  plus  en  notre  puissance  de  maintenir  au  milieu  des 
fiots  la  barque  emportee3  par  le  vent  du  nord  qui,  dans  un  instant, 
va  la  briser  en  pieces  centre  les  rochers  da  rivage.  Un  soul 
homme,  le  plus  renomme,  le  plus  habile  de  nos  trois  cantons  dans 
Tart  de  braver  les  tempetes  du  lac,  pent  nous  sauver  de  la  mort. 
Get  homme  est  ici :  lo  voila !  le  voila  charge*  de  tes  chaines ! 
Choisis,  Gesler,  choisis  promptement  entre  le  trepas  ou  sa  liberte." 

Gesler  fremit4  a  cette  parole.  Sa  haine  violente  pour  Tell  com- 
bat dans  son  ame  pusillanime  P  amour  merne  qu'il  a  pour  la  vie ;  il 
hesite  encore,  il  ne  repond  point,  mais  les  prieres,  les  murmures  des 
soldats  et  des  rameurs  qui  lui  demandent,  qui  le  pressent  de  sauver 
leurs  jours  et  les  siens,  en  delivrant5  son  prisonnier;  Ig,  crainte 
d'etre  mal  obei,  s'il  se  refuse  aux  voeux  de  tous,  et  la  tempete  qui 
augmente,  determinent  enfin  Gesler.  "  Qu'on  brise6  ses  chaines,' ' 
dit-il,  "  je  lui  pardonne  tous  ses  crimes,  je  lui  rends7  la  vie  et  la  li- 
berte, si  son  adresse  nous  amene  au  port." 

Leatsoldats,  les  rameurs,  s'empressent8  de  rendre  libre  Guillaume. 
Ses  fers  sont  tornbes,  il  se  leve,  et,  sans  prononcer  un  seul  mot,  il 
s'empare  du  gouvernail.9  Faisant  mouvoir  sous  sa  main  la  barque, 
comme  1'enfant  fait  plier  la  baguette10  qu'il  tourne  a  son  gre,  il 
oppose  la  proue11  aux  deux  vents,  dont  les  forces  ainsi  divisees 
la  tiennent  en  equilibre.  Profitant  ensuite  d'un  moment  de 
calme,  il  tourne  de  la  proue  a  la  poupe,12  maintient  la  barque  dans 
la  direction  qui  seule  peut  la  sauver,  fait  prendre  les  rames  a  deux 
seuls  rameurs,  dont  il  dirige  les  efforts,  ct  s'avance,  malgre'  les  vents, 
malgre  les  flots  ct  la  tempete,  vers  le  detroit13  qu'il  veut  repasser 
Les  tenebres14  empechent  Gesler  de  s'apercevoir  qu'il  retourne  aux 
memcs  lieux  d'ou  il  cst  parti.  Tell  continue  sa  marche ;  la  nuit 
presque  cntiero  s'ecoule  ;1S  il  est  rentre  dans  le  lac  d'Uri,  il  aper^oit 
la  lueur  mourante  du  signal  donne  sur  le  mont  d'Altdorf.  C'est 


362  XXI.     VINGT  ET  TJNIEME  LEgON. 

cette  lueur16  qui  lui  sert  d'etoile ;  il  connait  lo  lac  depuis  longtemps, 
il  en  eVite  les  ecueils,17  il  s'approche  pourtant  du  rivage  qui  borde 
le  canton  de  Schwitz ;  il  pense  a  Werner  StaufFacher ;  il  calcule  que 
Werner  doit  etre  en  marche,  et  que  les  cliemins  encombres  de 
ncige,  le  forceront  de  cotoyer18  le  lae.  Dans  ce  faible  espoir,  il 
navigue,  en  feignant  d'ignorer  les  lieux  oil  la  tempete  pousse  la 
barque,  en  augmentant  les  terreurs  de  Gesler  et  de  ses  soldats. 
(  To  be  continued.) 

1.  Death.  2.  Sighs.  3.  Carried  away.  4.  To  shudder,  tremble.  5.  To  liberate, 
6.  To  break  (see  p.  372,  $  15).  7.  I  give.  8.  See  p.  3S8,  $  9.  9.  The  helm,  rudder. 
10.  The  rod.  11.  The  prow.  12.  The  stern.  13.  The  strait.  14.  The  darkness. 
35,  To  pass  away.  16.  Light.  17.  Cliff.  18.  To  follow  or  march  along  the  coast, 

QUESTIONNAIRE. 

Tell  etait-il  ^mu  de  quelque  chose  ? 
Qu'attendait-il? 
A  quoi  songeait-il  ? 
De  quoi  jouissait-il  en  silence  ? 

Qu'est-ce  qui  determina  enfin  Gesler  h  delivrer  le  prisonnier  ? 
Que  dit  alors  un  <les  rameurs  h  Gesler  ? 
Qui  etait  le  batelier  le  plus  habile  dans  les  trois  cantons  ? 
Le  rameur  nomma-t-il  cet  homme  ? 
Entre  quoi  Gesler  avait-il  a  ehoisir  ? 
Quel  parti  (decision)  prit-il  ? 
Que  firent  les  soldats  et  les  rameurs  ? 
Quand  les  fers  furent  otes,  que  fit  Tell  ? 
Quelle  manoeuvre  fit-il  apres  ? 
Racontez  ce  que  fit  Tell  ensuite. 
Gesler  s'aper$ut-i!  que  Tell  retournait  vcrs  les  nie 
ils  etaient  pailis  ? 

Yers  quel  lac  Tell  dirige-t-il  la  barque  ? 
De  quel  rivage  s'approche-t-il  ? 
A  qui  pense-t-il  ? 
Que  calcule-t-il  a  son 
Que  femt-il  ? 


THE   PAST   PARTICIPLE.  363 


XXII.    VINGT-DEUXIEME    LE£ON. 


THE  PAST  PARTICIPLE. 

Every  possible  difficulty  in  regard  to  the  agreement  of  Past  Participle 
may  be  solved  by  the  application  of  one  of  the  three  following  rales  :  — 

1.  The  Past  Participle,  when  used  adjectively,  is  placed  after  the 
noun  and  agrees  with  it  as  an  adjective.     Ex.:  — 

Une  fleur  fletrie,  a  withered  flower. 

Une  lettre  lien  e'crite,  a  well  written  letter. 

DCS  maisons  bien  meublees,  well  furnished  houses. 

2.  The  Past  Participle  accompanied  by  the  auxiliary  eire  agrees 
with  the  subject,  except  in  reflective  verbs.     Ex.:  — 

Cette  lettre  est  lien  tfcrite,  this  letter  is  well  written. 
Mes  deux  tantes  sont  mortes,  both  my  aunts  are  dead. 
La  ville  fut  prise,  the  town  was  taken. 
La  unit  sera  bientot  passte,  the  night  will  soon  be  over. 

3.  The  Past  Participle  accompanied  by  the  auxiliary  avoir  (and 
by  etre  in  reflective  verbs)  agrees  with  the  direct  object,  but  only 
when  ihat  direct  object  precedes.     Ex. :  — 

La  lettre  que  j'ai  recue. 

The  letter  I  have  received. 

Les  lettres  que  fai  regues. 

The  letters  I  have  received. 

Les  dames  que  nous  avons  rencontre'es. 

The  ladies  we  have  met. 

Les  affaires  que  vous  avez  entreprises. 

The  affairs  you  have  undertaken* 

Ou  sont  les  livres  ?  — je  les  at  perdus. 

Where  are  the  books  ?    I  have  lost  them. 

Ou  est  ta  plume  ?  — je  Vai  perdue. 

Where  is  thy  pen  ?    I  have  lost  it. 

OIL  sont  les  fruits  que  vous  m'avez  envoy^s  $ 

Where  are  the  fruits  you  sent  me  ? 


384  XXn.      VINGT-DEUXIEME   LEgON. 

But  there  is  no  agreement  in  the  participle  when  there  is  no 
direct  object,  or  when  the  direct  object  comes  after  the  participle 
Example :  — 

•Tai  re$u  une  lettre — deux  lettres. 

I  have  received  one  letter  —  two  letters. 

J'ai  rencontr€  une  dame  —  deux  dames. 

I  met  one  lady —  two  ladies. 

J'ai  perdu  les  livres. 

I  have  lost  the  books. 

J'ai  perdu  la  plume. 

I  have  lost  the  pen. 

Nous  avons  mange". 

We  have  eaten. 

Us  ont  re'pondu  a  noire  lettre. 

They  have  answered  our  letter. 

fifes  freres  avaient  dormi. 

My  brothers  had  slept. 

4.  In  reflective  verbs,  as  etre  takes  the  place  of  avoir,  the  par- 
ticiple agrees  with  the  second  pronoun,  if  that  is  a  direct  object. 
Examples :  — 

7/s  se  sont  presents. 
They  presented  themselves. 
Elle  s'est  blessfe. 
She  wounded  herself. 

But  when  the  second  pronoun  is  an  indirect  object,  the  participle 
remains  unchanged,  unless  the  direct  object  precedes,  as  in  verbs 
conjugated  with  avoir.  Ex. :  — 

Us  se  sont  presents'  des  fleurs. 

They  presented  flowers  to  each  other. 

Us  se  sont  ecrit  deux  lettres. 

They  wrote  a  letter  to  each  other. 

But  the  participle  must  agree  if  the  direct  object  (fleurs,  lettres) 
precedes.  Ex. :  — 

I^es  fleurs  qu'ils  se  sont  presentees. 
Les  lettres  qu'ils  se  sont  tfcrites. 


THE   PAST   PARTICIPLE.  365 

APPLICATION  OF  THE  ABOVE  KULES. 

As  the  application  of  the  above^  rules  may  present  some  difficulty, 
special  rules  will  be  given,  though  all  that  follows  is  really  embraced 
in  §§  2  and  3. 

5.  The  Past  Participle  of  a  neuter  or  intransitive  verb  conju- 
gated with  avoir  never  agrees,  when  conjugated  with  etre  it  always 
agrees  with  the  subject.     Ex.:  — 

Les  deux  lieures  que  j'ai  dormi. 

The  two  hours  during  which  I  slept;  que  is  equivalent  to  pendant 

lesquelles. 

Us  sont  toirib&s,  they  fell.    Elles  sont  tomb&s. 

Hence  also  the  Past  Part,  ete  is  always  invariable :  Elle  a  etc, 
Mies  out  ete. 

6.  The  Past  Participle  of  an  impersonal  verb  is  always  invari- 
able, as : 

Les  pluies  qu'il  y  a  eu  cet  hiver. 
The  rains  we  have  had  this  winter. 

7.  A  Past  Participle  does  not  agree  with  en  (of  it,  of  them, 
some) ,  because  en  is  not  considered  as  a  direct  object.     Ex. :  — 

Avez-vous  des  fleurs  ?  —  Ouit  il  nous  en  a  donntf. 

Bufc^he  presence  of  en  does  not  prevent  the  participle  from  agreeing  with 
the  real  direct  object  if  that  precedes.    Ex. : 
La  bonne  opinion  que  fen  avals  concue. 
The  good  opinion  I  had  conceived  of  it. 

8.  A  Past  Participle  between  two  que's  is  invariable.     Ex. : 
Les  Uvres  que  vous  avez  cru  que  je  vous  donnerais,  the  books  you 
thought  I  would  give  you.     The  first  que  is  not  the  object  of  cru, 
but  of  donnerais. 

9.  The  Past  Participle  followed  by  an  infinitive  agrees  when  the 
object  that  precedes  is  governed  by  the  participle,  if  the  object  de- 
pends on  the  infinitive  the  participle  is  invariable.     Ex. :  La  dame 
gue  fai  vue  peindre,  the  lady  I  saw  painting.     La  dame  que  fai 
vu  peindre  means,  The  lady  whom  I  saw  painted,  that  is,  whose 


366  XXII.      VINGT-DEUXIEME 

portrait  I  saw  taken.  La  dame  quefai  entendue  chanter,  tlie  lady 
I  heard  singing ;  but,  La  chanson  que  fai  entendu  chanter,  the 
song  I  heard  sung,  —  because  que  is  governed  not  by  entendu  but 
by  chanter.  For  the  same  reason  Je  les  ai  laisses  partir,  I 
allowed  them  to  go ;  but,  Us  se  sont  laisse  surprendre  par  Vennemi  ; 
they  allowed  themselves  to  be  surprised  by  the  enemy.  In  this  last 
sentence  se  is  the  object  of  surprendre,  as  it  is  equivalent  to,  They 
allowed  the  enemy  to  surprise  THEM. 

10.  The  past  Participle  of  the  verb  faire  followed  by  an  infini- 
tive never  agrees,  because  faire  thus  connected  with  an  infinitive  is 
considered  for  all  purposes  of  government  as  forming  but  one  verb 
with  it.     Thus  w  Je  le  fais  passer,  le  is  the  object  of  faire  passer  ; 
in  Je  lui  fais  passer  le  pont,  le  pont  is  the  direct  object,  and  lui 
and  not  le  must  be  used,  as  faire  passer  cannot  have  two  direct 
objects.     Hence  fait  is  invariable  in  the  phrase  :    Une  femme  s'est 
presentee  a  la  porte,  je  Vai  fait  passer,  a  woman  presented  her- 
self at  the  door,  I  let  her  pass. 

11.  After  the  Past  Participles  du,  pu,  and  voulu  an  infinitive 
may  be  understood,  in  which  case  they  remain  invariable,  as :  Je 
lui  ai  rendu  tous  les  services  que  fai  du  .  .  .  que  fai  pu  (that 
is  lui  rendre) ,  I  rendered  him  all  the  services  I  should  ...  I  could 
(render  him).    But,  Les  somrnes  qiCil  ma  dues,  the  sums  he  owed 
me  —  dues  agrees  with  its  object  que  which  precedes. 

12.  The  Past  Participles  atiendu,  excepte,  passe,  suppose,  and 
vu  are  sometimes  employed  as  prepositions.     They  then  precede  the 
noun  they  govern,  and  are  invariable. 

Other  instances  might  be  adduced,  but  a  strict  application  cf  §§  1,  2,  3, 
and  4,  will  be  found  to  cover  all  cases  of  doubt. 

THE3IE  61. 

1.  She  is  loved.  2.  We  are  satisfied.  3.  My  sisters  are  satis- 
fied. 4.  My  aunt  has  arrived.  5.  My  cousins  (fem.^)  have 
arrived.  6.  This  house  is  sold.  7.  The  two  houses  are  sold.  8. 
These  letters  are  written  very  well.  9.  My  mother  has  gone  out, 


THE   PAST  PARTICIPLE.  367 

and  my  sisters  Lave  also  gone  out.  10.  Mary's  grandmother  ap- 
pears afflicted.  11.  The  trees  have  been  felled.1  12.  Virtuous 
people  are  esteemed,  and  the  impious2  (are)  despised.  13.  The 
rule3  whish  I  have  learned  is  very  easy.  14.  The  woman  I  have  seen 
is  very  handsome.  15.  Where  is  the  letter  which  you  have 
received?  16.  Here  it  is  (la  void)  •  it  is  written  in  (en)  French. 
17.  The  horses  which  we  have  sold  were  very  old.  18.  How  many 
horses  have  you  sold  ?  19.  We  have  sold  them  all.'  20.  Which 
house  have  you  taken?4  21.  How  many  books  has  he  bought? 
22.  Where  is  my  pen  ?  23.  I  have  not  seen  it.  24.  Where  are 
my  sisters  ?  25.  I  have  not  seen  them.  26.  Here  are  the  apples 
(which)  you  have  given  me ;  I  have  not  eaten  them.  27.  The 
young  ladies  have  been  much  amused5  in  your  company.  28.  Gen- 
tlemen, you  are  mistaken.6  29.  She  has  repented  of  her  neglect- 
fulness.7  80.  I  saw  (Jiave  seen)  them  play  before  my  house.  31. 
The  singers8  whom  I  heard  singing  yesterday  were  Tyrolese.9 

1.  To  fell,  cottper.    2.  Impie.    3.  Regie,  f.    4.  Louer.    5.  S'amuser.    6.  Se  trow- 
per.    7.  Negligence.    8.  Chanteur,  m.    9.  Tyroliens. 


THEME  C2. 

1.  That  girl  has  run  too  fast ;  she  is  out  of  breath.1  2.  My  aunt 
has  travelled  in  Italy.  3.  His  mother  (has)  lived2  in  this  house  for 
(pendant)  two  years.  4.  These  young  men  (gens)  have  studied 
French  and  German.  5.  We  (have)  met  some  ladies  in  the  street. 
6.  Miss  Eliza  has  brought  a  bunch3  of  flowers.  7.  For  whom  has 
she  brought  them  ?  8.  She  (has)  brought  them  for  you.  9.  Have 
you  read  these  two  books?  10.  No,  sir,  I  have  not  yet  read  them. 
11.  I  have  read  another  book  which  your  brother  has  lent  me.  12. 
The  carpenter4  has  built  a  new  house,  and  he  has  sold  it  this  morn- 
ing to  Mr.  B.  13.  The  rain  which  has  fallen  this  morning  has 
spoiled  the  roads.  14.  We  have  bought  twenty  acres5  of  land,6 
15.  The  excessive  heat  which  we  had7  last  summer  has  occasioned 
diseases.8  16.  There  came  a  person  that  I  did  not  know.  17. 
Why  are  these  plants  so  wet?u  18.  I  (have)  ordered10  them  to  be 


368  XXII.      VINGT-DEUXIEME  LEgON. 

watered.10     19.  Tho  measures11 1  was  obliged12  to  take  have  not  had 
the  expected  effect.13     20.  The  landlord14  caused15  them  to  bo  paid. 

1.  ZTors  (Flialcine.  2-.  Demeurer.  3.  Bouquet.  4.  Le  charpentier.  5.  Arpent, 
in.  6.  Terre.  7.  Put  the  Cornp.  Prcs.  of  the  impersonal  form  il  fait.  8.  Maladie. 
V.AIouilUes.  10.  Faire  arroser.  11.  Afesure,  f.  12.  Tart,  of  devoir.  13.  Effet,  m. 
24.  L'aubergiste.  15.  Faire. 

TIIE3IE   63. 

1.  Where  is  your  gold  watch?  2.  I  have  sent  it  to  the  watch- 
maker.1 3.  I  thought  you  had  allowed2  it  to  be  stolen.  4.  Tho 
two  horses  which  I  (have)  advised  you  to  buy  are  worth  (valent)  a 
thousand  francs.  5.  Happy  the  princes  who  have  always  used3 
their  power4  for  the  good5  of  their  people.  6.  You  must  (il  faut 
que  vous)  finish  the  letter  which  you  have  begun  to  write.  7.  The 
apples  wliich  I  have  forbidden  you  to  eat  are  not  ripe.  8.  How 
many  men6  commit  the  same  faults  which  they  had  resolved  to 
avoid.7  9.  We  have  showed8  him  all  the  honor  (£>/.)  it  was  our 
duty  [to  show  him].  10.  My  friend  rendered  me  every  service9  he 
could.  11.  Have  you  bought  some  cigars  ? 10  12.  Yes,  I  have 
bought  [some].  13.  Are  not  these  trees  very  high ?  14.  I  have 
seen  higher  ones.  15.  The  ship  which  we  saw  launched11  has  now 
the  name  of  Arion.  16.  The  play12  I  saw  performed13  last  night 
has  been  very  much  applauded.  17.  Imitate  the  virtues  which  you 
have  heard  praised  (Inf.).  18.  We  used14  all  the  means  we  could. 

1.  Horloger.  2.  Laisser.  3.  Employer.  4.  Fouvoir,  m.  5.  Le  Men.  6.  Que 
tfhommes.  7.  Eviter.  8.  Fait.  9.  Tous  les  services  qu\  10.  Cigare,  m.  11.  Lan- 
cer. 12.  La  piecz.  13.  Jouer*  14.  Employer. 


THE   PARTICIPLE  ABSOLUTE.  369 


XXIII.     VINGT-TEOISIEME 


THE  PARTICIPLE  ABSOLUTE. 

1.  The  Participle  Absolute  is  used,  as  in  English,  instead  of 
accessory  and  subordinate  clauses  beginning    with   a  conjunct  ioa 
which  have  the  same  subject  as  the  leading  clause.     Ex. :  — 

Regulus  s'e'loigna  de  Rome,  tenant  les  yeuxfixe's  a  la  terre,  et  laissant  safenunc 
ct  scs  enfants. 

L'ennemi,  voyant  (as  he  saw)  noire  petit  nombre,  recommencd  le  combat. 

Ne'optoleme,  poursuivant  son  discours,  me  dit,  etc. 

Le  charpentier,  laissant  son  ouvragea  moiti€  faitt  alia  diner. 

L'empereur  Conrade,  ne  voulant  plus  tenter  la  fortune,  abandonna  subitement 
la  Teri'e-Sainte>  etc. 

Ne  sachant  oue  faire,  il  prit  ce  parti. 

2.  When  the  accessory  sentence  expresses  an  event  which  has 
taken  place  before  another  expressed  in  the  principal  sentence,  the 
compound  form  of  the  Participle  Absolute  (ayant  vu,  ayant  fait, 
etc.)  is  used.     Ex. :  — 

Le  comte  de  Toulouse ray 'ant  somm€  (having  summoned)  la  ville  de  se  rendre, 
la  dedaTa  sa  possession. 

Le  roi  ayant  tout  sacri/ie"  pour  le  bonheur  de  son  peuple,  fut  enfin  la  victimc 
de  ses  bonnes  intentions. 

Lysandre  ayant  fait  un  riche  butin  (booty)  dans  la  prise  d'Athenes,  envoya  a 
Laafd&none  tout  l'or  et  I'argent  qu'il  avait  pris. 

THEME    64. 

1.  As  the  two  combatants  would  not  yield,1  they  were  pierced 
with  wounds.2  2.  As  Mentor  heard  the  voice  of  the  goddess  who 
was  calling  her  nymphs  into  the  wood,  he  waked3  Telemachus.  3. 
Grantor,  seeing  that  I  was  already  very  near  him,  redoubled  his  zeal, 
and  attempted1  to  barricade  my  way.  4.  That  mountain,  command- 
ing an  extensive5  view,  was  well  calculated6  for  our  observations.  5. 
I  cannot  accompany  you  into  the  country,  having  some  business  that 
2-4 


370  XXIII.      VINGT-TEOISIEMB  LEgON. 

requires  my  presence  here.  6.  How  many  people  do  we  see,  who, 
"  knowing  the  value  of  time,  waste7  it  improperly.8  7.  Wishing  to 
make  something  of  my  son,  I  have  put  him  into  your  hands.  8. 
Newton,  having  taken  the  average9  of  years  during  which  the  kings 
of  the  various10  countries  have  reigned,  reduced  each  reign  to  about 
twenty- two  years.  9.  Napoleon,  seeing  that  the  battle  of  Waterloo 
was  lost,  drew  his  sword  and  wished  desperately11  to  fling  himself 
into  the  tumult  of  the  battle.  10.  Franklin,  [after]  having  looked 
everywhere  for  employment,12  reentered  at  the  printer13  Keimer's. 

1.  Ceder.  2.  De  coups.  3.  EveilUr.  4.  Chercher  a  barrer.  5.  Etendu.  6. 
Propre  a.  7.  Perdre.  8.  Mai  a  propos.  9.  Le  terme  moyen.  10.  Different.  11. 
En  desespere.  12.  De  I' 'occupation.  13.  Chez  Vimprimeur  K. 

3.  The  Participle  Absolute  can  also  be  used  in  the  place  of  sub- 
ordinate sentences  beginning  with  a  conjunction,  if  they  have  a  dif- 
ferent subject.  Ex.  :  — 

Le  roi.etant  mort,  son  Jils  lid  succe'da. 

The  king  being  dead  his  son  succeeded. 

La  ville  aijant  €t€  prise,  les  soldats  la  pillereni. 

The  town  being  taken,  the  soldiers  pillaged  it. 

Le  repas  €tant  jini,  nous  nous  mimes  en  route. 

When  diner  was  over,  we  set  off. 
fctani  is  sometimes  omitted.    Ex. :  — 

Le  repas  fini  (for  e'tant  fini),  nous  nous  mimes  en  route. 

When  dinner  was  over,  we  set  off. 

L'ope'ration  achevee,  le  roi  remonta  a  cheval. 

The  operation  being  performed,  the  king  mounted  again  on  horseback. 

Cette  disposition  faite,  nous  entrdmes  dans  la  salle  de  reception. 

When  this  arrangement  was  made,  we  entered  the  parlor. 

THEME   65. 

1.  My  mother  being  ill,  I  cannot  go  out  to-day.  2.  Franklin, 
geeing  that  all  his  efforts  were  useless,  went  back  to  his  country,  in 
order  to  brave  the  storm1  with  his  countrymen.  3.  Wishing  to  see 
him,  I  went  to  his  house.  4.  Mary  and  her  brother  Henry,  per- 
ceiving a  pretty  butterfly,2  endeavored  to  catch3  it.  5.  The  gates 
being  closed,  we  could  not  enter.  6.  Philip  sent  deputies  to  the 
Scythians,4  demanding  (pour  demander)  a  part  of  the  expenses5  of 


THE   PARTICIPLE   ABSOLUTE.  371 

the  seig?  ;  the  Scythians,  alleging6  the  barrenness7  of  their  land, 
replied  that,  haying  no  riches  sufficient  to  satisfy  so  great  a  king, 
they  thought  [it]  more8  unfit  to  pay  but9  a  part,  than  to  refuse  the 
whole.10  7.  The  wound  still  bleeding,11  she  fainted.12  8  Every- 
body  will  respect  the  magistrates  who,  forgetting  their  own  interest, 
observing  the  law,  favoring13  virtue  and  restraining14  vice,  seek  the 
welfare15  of  their  country. 

1.  L-orage,  m.  2.  Papitton,  m.  3.  Attraper.  4.  Scythe,  m.  5.  Lcs  frais.  Q. 
AlUgucr.  7.  La  sterilite.  8.  Mains  convenaUe.  9.  De  ne  payer  qu'une  partie. 
10.  Le  tout.  11.  Saigner.  12.  S'evanouir.  13.  Favoriser.  14.  lieprimer.  15.  IA 
lien. 


READING  LESSON. 

GESLEIl    CONDUIT   TELL   A   KUSNACII. 

(Fin.) 

Enfia  1'orient1  se  colore,  ct  la  tempete  semble  s'appaiser  aux  pre- 
miers rayons  de  1'aurore.  Lc  jour  naissant  deeouvre  h  Tell  lea 
roches  voisines  d'Altdorf,  avant  que  le  tyran  ait  eu  le  temps  de  les 
reconnaitre ;  Guillaume  y  dirige  sa  barque  ct  la  fait  marcher  plus 
rapidcment.  Gesler,  dont  la  ferocite  revient  a  mesure  que  le  dan- 
ger s'eloigne,  observe  avec  des  yeux  sombres.  II  veut,  mais  il 
n'ose, pas  encore  le  faire  charger  de  liens.2  Ses  soldats  et  ses  mate- 
lots3  reconnaissent  bientot  ou  ils  sont,  en  instruisent  le  gouvcmeur, 
qui  s'avan^ant  vers  Tell  avcc  colere,  lui  demande  d'une  voix  terrible, 
pourquoi  la  barque,  qu'il  a  guide e,  a  repris  le  chemin  d'Altdorf. 

Guillaume  sans  lui  repondre,  pousse  la  barque  droit4  h  un  rocher 
peu  eloigne*  de  la  rive,5  saisit  d'une  main  prompte  Fare  et  la  fieche6 
qu'un  archer  tenait  a  la  main,  et,  rapide  comme  1' eclair,  s'elance7  de 
la  teque  sur  le  rocher.  La,  sans  s'arreter,  il  saute  sur  un  autre 
lue,  gravit8  aussitot  la  roche  escarpee,9  et  se  montre  sur  le  sommet, 
sernblable  a  1'aigle  dcs  Alpes  quand  il  se  repose  aupres  des  nuages, 
et  qu'il  promene  ses  yeux  pedants  sur  les  troupeaux  des  valions. 

Le  gouverneur  etonne  pousse  un  cri  de  fureur,  de  rage.  II  com- 
mande  aussitot  qu'on  debarque,  et  que  ses  soldats,  disperses,  envi- 
ronnent  de  toutes  parts  le  roc  ou  il  yoit  le  heros.  On  obeit^  les 


372  XXIII.      VINGT-TROISIEME 

archers  descendant  ct  preparent  deja  leurs  arcs ;  Gesler,  qui  marehe 
au  milieu  d'cux,  yeut  que  leurs  fleches  reunies  s'abreuvent  toutes 
du  sang  de  Guillaume.  Guillaume  aussi  a  ses  desseins.  II  no  s'ar- 
rete,  il  ne  se  montre  que  pour  attirer  1'ennemi.  II  laisse  approcher 
cettc  troupe  armee  jusqu'a  la  juste  distance  ou  son  trait6  peut  don- 
ner  la  mort.  II  regarde,  fixe  Gesler,  pose  sa  fleche  sur  sa  corde,  et. 
Fadrcssant  au  coeur  du  gouverneur,  il  la  fait  voler10  dans  les  airs 
La  fleche  vole,  siffle,11  frappe  au  milieu  du  coeur  de  Gesler.  Lo 
tyran  tombe,  be*gaie  sa  fureur,  et  son  ame  s'exhale  au  milieu  des 
imprecations.  Tell  a  deja  disparu ;  plus  leger  que  le  faon,12  s'est 
precipite  du  sominet  du  roc,  il  court,  il  vole  sur  la  glace ;  il  gagne, 

traverse  des  senders13  deserts,  et  prend  le  chemin  d'Altdorf. 

Florian. 

1.  The  east.  2.  Fetters,  chains.  3.  Sailor.  4.  Straight.  5.  Bank.  6.  Arrow. 
7.  Jumps.  8.  To  climb  up.  9.  Steep.  10.  To  fly.  11.  To  hiss.  12.  The  fawn.  13. 
Path. 

QUESTIOXNAIEE. 

Que  decouvre  le  jour  naissant  a. Tell? 
Que  fait  Gesler? 

Quelle  etait  I'lntention  de  Gesler  ? 

De  quoi  les  soldats  et  les  matelots  instruisent-ils  le  gouverneur  ? 
Quand  Gesler  apergut  les  roches  d'Altdorf,  que  demanda-t-il  a 
Tell? 

Guillaume  lui  fit-il  une  reponse  ? 

Ou  pousse-t-il  la  barque? 

Que  saisit-il  d'une  main  prompte  ? 

Ou  s'elance-t-il  de  la  barque? 

A  qui  ressemble-t-il  quand  il  se  montre  stir  le  somnict  ? 

Qu'est-ce  que  le  gouverneur  commando  alors  ? 

Fut-a  obei  ? 

Gesler  que  veut-il  ? 

Juscp'ou  Tell  laissc-t-il  approcher  la  troupe  ? 

Qui  veut-il  frapper  ? 

Sa  fleche  l'a-t-ellc  atteint  ? 

(tye  fait  Tell  alors? 

Quel  clicmin  Tell  prcnd-il? 


GOVERNMENT   OF   VERBS.  373 

XXIV.     VINGT-QUATRIEME    LE£ON. 


GOVERNMENT  OF  VEKBS. 

1.  Many  verbs  which  in  English  require  a  preposition,  such  as 
at,  of,  from,  to,  ivith,  for,  etc.,  take  in  French  a  direct  object. 
Such  are  :  — 

approuver,  to  approve  of.  envoyer  chercher,  to  send  for. 

attendre,  to  wait  for.  espe'rer,  to  hope  for. 

chercher,  to  look  (seek)  for.  expier,  to  atone  for. 

connaitre,  to  be  acquainted  with,   to   fournir,  to  supply  with. 

know.  prier  Dieu,  to  pray  to  God. 

considerer,  to  look  upon.  regarder,  to  look  at. 

desirer,  to  wish  for.  rencontrer,  to  meet  with. 

devenir,  to  become.  r&oudre,  to  resolve  upon. 
fcouter,  to  listen  to. 

Examples :  — 

Attendez-vous  noire  frere,  are  you  waiting  for  your  brother  1 

Qu'etes-vous  devenu,  what  has  become  of  you  ? 

//  faut  envoyer  chercher  le  me'decin,  we  must  send  for  the  doctor. 

2.  TChe  following  verbs  which  in  English  usually  require  a  direct 
object  take  in  French  the  preposition  a :  — 

Apprendre  >  qch.  a  qn.,  to  teach  one    permettre  a  qn.f  to  allow  one. 

enseigner     )  something.  plaire  a  qn.,  to  please  one. 

conseiller  qch.  a  qn.,  to  advise.  reme'diera  qch.,  to  remedy. 

convenir  a  qn.,  to  suite  any  one.  renoncer  a  qch.,  to  renounce,  abdicate 

deplaire  a  qn.,  to  displease  one.  something. 

de'sobe'ir  a  qn.,  to  disobey  one.  re'signer  a  qch.>  to  resign  something. 

dire  a  qn.,  to  tell  some  one.  roister  a  qn.,  to  resist  one. 

falre  tort  a  qn.,  to  wrong  one.  ressembler  a  qn.,  to  resemble  one. 

se  Jier  a  qn.,  to  trust  one.  subvenir  a,  to  relieve. 

nuire  a  qn.,  to  hurt,  injure  one  succe*der  a,  to  succeed. 

Mir  a  qn.,  to  obey  one.  se  soustraire  a,  to  keep  out  of  the 

ordonner  a  qn.,  to  order.  way. 

pardonner  a,  to  pardon,  forgive  one.    survivre  a,  to  outlive,  survive. 

parvcnir  a  e^A.,  to  attain.  toucher  a  qch.,  to  toilth  something. 


374  XXIV.      VINGT-QUATRIEME  LECON. 

Examples :  — 

Pouvez-vous  enseigner  le  latin  a  man  Jils  f 
Can  you  teach  my  son  Latin  ? 
H  faut  obcir  a  vos  parents. 
You  must  obey  your  parents. 
On  ne  peut  pas  plaire  a  tout  le  monde. 
You  cannot  please  everybody. 
Ne  vous  Jiez  pas  a  lui. 
Do  not  trust  him. 

THEME   66. 

1.  Who  teaches  your  brother  French?  2.  Mr.  R.,  who  is  a  very 
good  teacher.  3.  This  ribbon  does  not  please  my  sister.  4.  You 
have  wronged  your  neighbor;  you  have  hurt  his  credit;1  at  least  he 
says  so  (le).  5.  A  good  Christian  forgives  his  enemies.  6.  Miss 
Mary  resembles  her  mother  [very]  much.  7.  Will  you  allow  your 
pupils  to  to  take  a  walk  this  afternoon  ?  8.  Yes,  I  will  allow  them 
to  go  with  you.  9.  Children.;  must  obey  their  parents.  10.  The 
oScer  disobeyed  the  orders  of  the  king.  11.  The  son  succeeded 
his  father.  12.  The  riches  of  the  count  would  iiave  relieved  the 
wants2  of  the  poor.  13.  He  who  wishes  to  please  everybody,  runs 
the  risk3  of  pleasing  (de  ne  plaire)  nobody.  14.  Louis  the 
Fourteenth  survived  his  son,  the  dauphirc,  and  his  grandson.4  15. 
Do  not  touch  anything. 
1.  Credit,  m.  2.  Besoin,  m.  3.  Courir  risque.  4.  Petit-fils. 


3.  Verbs  which  require  in  English  the  prepositions  0/*and  from 
are  generally  followed  in  French  by  de.  Besides  these,  the  follow- 
ing also  require  de :  — 

Accabler  de,  to  overwhelm.  approcher  de,     ) 

s'acquitter  de  qch,  to  discharge.  s'approcher  de,  ) 

s'ajfliger  de,  to  be  afflicted  at.  s'armer  de,  to  arm  one's  self  with. 

s'apercevoir  de,*   to  remark,  to  per-  avoir  besom  de,  to  want,  to  require, 
ceive.  avoir  pitie'  de,  to  pity. 

*  Apercevoir,  when  not  a  pronominal  verb,  governs  the  direct  object  and  applies 
to  visible  things,  as :  J'apergus  une  fiamme. 


GOVERNMENT   OF  VERBS. 


375 


to  distrust. 


avoir  or  prendre  soin  de,  to  take  care 
of. 

bruler  de,  to  burn  with. 

charger  de,  > 

cooler  de,  \  to  Ioad  wlth' 

se  contentcr  de,  to  be  satisfied  or  con- 
tented with. 

couvrir  de,  to  cover  with. 

se  defier  de, 

se  mejier  de, 

depcndre  de,  to  be  dependent  on. 

envelopper  de,  to  wrap  up  in. 

faire  de,  to  do  with  (to  make  use  of). 

faire  present  de,  to  present  with. 

fe'Hciterqn.  deqch.,  to  congratulate  on, 

fourmiller  de,  to  swarm  with. 

honorer  de,  to  honor  with. 

jouir  de  qch.,  to  enjoy. 

medire  de  qn.,  to  traduce,  to  slander. 

se  meler  de  qch.,  to  meddle  with. 

se  moquer  de  qn.,  to  laugh  at. 


mourir  de,  to  die  of. 

munir  de,  to  furnish,  provide  -with. 

se  passer  de  qch.,  to  do  without. 

perir  de,  to  perish  or  die  of. 

profiler  de  qch.,  to  profit  by. 

pourvoir  de,  to  provide  with. 

punir  de  qch.,  to  punish  for. 

r&ompenser  de  qch,,  to  reward  for. 

regarder  de,  to  regard  with. 

se  rejouir  de,  to  rejoice  at. 

remercier  de  qch.,  to  thank  for  some- 
thing. 

rernplir  de,  to  fill  with. 

se  repentir  de,  to  repent. 

rire  de,  to  laugh  at. 

se  souvenir  de,  to  remember,  to  recol- 
lect. 

sourirc  de,  to  smile  at. 

triompher  de,  to  triumph  over. 

se  tromper  de,  to  mistake. 


Examples :  — 

Approchez-vous  du  feu,  come  near  the  fire. 
Je  me  suis  defi€  de  ses  promesses. 
I  distrusted  his  promises. 
On  m'accabla  de  reproches. 
They  overwhelmed  me  with  reproaches. 
Ette  sourit  de  noire  cmbarras. 
She  smiled  at  our  embarrassment. 


THEME   67. 

1.  He  was  overwhelmed  with  reproaches.1  2.  You  must  dis- 
charge that  obligate.  3.  Death  pities  nobody,  neither  rich  nor 
poor.  4.  Come  near  the  window.  5.  Nature  wants  few  things. 
6.  She  is  contented  with  little.  7.  Have  you  not  perceived  this 
mistake?  8.  No,  sir,  I  have  not  perceived  it  (en).  9.  The 
ground2  was  covered  with  snow.  10.  The  general  honored  me  with 


376  XXIV.       VINGT-QUATRIEME 

his  friendship.  11.  Your  brother  presented  me  with  this  silver  pen- 
holder.3 12.  The  impious4  mock  at  virtue  and  religion.  13.  Do 
not  meddle  with  my  affairs.  14.  Distrust  that  man  ;  he  will  laugh 
at  your  benefits5  when  he  no  longer  requires  them.  15.  Never  tra- 
duce (slander)  anybody.  16.  Mr.  A.  is  a  very  strong  man;  he 
enjoys  good  health.  17.  If  he  repents  his  faults,  I  will  pardon 
him,  18.  I  cannot  do  without  his  help.6  19.  I  hope  (that)  you 
will  profit  by  this  experience.  20.  Kemember  your  promise.  21. 
I  remember  that  story  very  well.  22.  Everybody  rejoices  at  that 
victory.7 

1.  Reproclic,  m.    2.  La  terre.    3.  Porte-plume,  m.    4.  Impie.  5.  Bienfait,  m.   6. 
Secours,  m.    7.  Victoire,  f. 

4.    Yerbs  with  different  governments.     The  following  verbs  have 
different  governments  according  to  their  different  significations  :  — 

1.  Abuser  qn.}  to  deceive. 

abuser  de  qch.y  to  abuse,  to  misuse. 

2.  Assister  qn.,  to  assist,  to  help. 
assister  a  qch.,  to  be  present  at. 

3.  Changer  qch.,  to  change,  to  alter,  to  exchange. 

changer  de  qch.,  to  change,  to  change  one  thing  for  another. 
changer  en,  to  turn  into. 

4.  Convenir  de  qch.,  to  agree  (construed  with  etre). 
convenir  a  qn.,  to  suit. 

5.  Croire  qn.,  to  believe  some  one. 
croire  qch.,  to  believe  something. 
croire  a  qch.,  to  believe  in  something. 
croire  en,  to  believe  in. 

6.  Deinander  qn.,  to  ask  or  inquire  for  some  one. 
demander  qch.,  to  ask  for  somothing. 
deinander  a  qn.,  to  ask  a  person. 

demander  qch.  a  qn.,  to  ask  something  of  some  one  or  to  ask  some  one 
for  something. 

7.  Echapper  and  s'e'chapper  de,  to  escape  from,  i.  e.  out  of. 
tfcJiapper  a,  to  escape  from,  i.  e.  to  avoid,  to  be  preserved  from. 

8.  Se  facher  de  qch.,  to  be  sorry  for. 

"      "      contre  qn.,  to  be  angry  at. 

9.  Jnsulter  qn.  or  qch.  (dir.  obj.),  to  offend  by  insults. 
insulter  a  qn.  or  a  qch.,  to  deride,  to  scorn,  to  insult. 

10.  Jouer  a  qch.,  to  play  at  a  game. 


GOVERNMENT   OF  VEEBS.  377 

jouer  de  V  argent,  to  play  for  money. 

jouer  d'un  instrument,  to  play  (on)  an  instrument. 

se  jouer  de  qn.,  to  laugh  at,  to  deceive. 

11.  Manquer  (neuter  verb  without  a  government),  to  be  wanting  or  miss- 

ing. 

manquer  qn.  or  qch.,  to  miss,  to  fail  in. 
manquer  de  qch.,  to  be  wanting  in,  to  be  short  of. 
manquer  a  qn.  or  a  qch.  (also  contre  qch.),  to  fail  in,  to  omit. 

12.  Rgpondre  a  qch.,  to  answer. 
re'pondre  de  qch.,  to  answer  for. 

13.  Satisfaire  qn.,  to  satisfy,  to  content. 

satisfaire  a  qch.,  to  fulfil  duties  to  .  .  .  ,  to  satisfy. 

14.  Servir  qn.,  to  serve  one,  to  be  at  one's  service. 
servir  de  qch.,  to  serve  as  something,  for  some  one. 

15.  Souscrire  qch.,  to  subscribe,  to  sign. 
souscrire  a  qch.,  to  approve  of,  to  subscribe  to. 

\Q.  User  qch.,  to  use  up,  to  wear  out. 
user  de  qch.,  to  make  use  of,  to  use. 

Examples :  — 

On  a  change"  les  conditions,  they  have  altered  the  conditions. 
J'ai  change  de  logement,  I  have  taken  other  lodgings. 
Que  demandez-vous,  what  do  you  ask  for  ? 
Demandez  a  votre  mere,  ask  your  mother. 

J'ai  demande'  mon  argent  a  mon  oncle,  I  have  asked  my  money  of  my 
'"ncle.     '*tf 

Repondez  a  ma  question,  answer  my  question. 
Pouvez-vous  re'pondre  de  sa  probite",  can  you  answer  for  his  honesty  ? 

5.    Special  remarks  on  some  verbs. 

1.  Acheter  qch.  a  qn.,  to  buy  something  of  some  one. 

2.  Aider  qn.,  to  succor,  to  support,  to  give  means  of  doing. 
aider  a  qn.,  to  help,  to  aid  physically  in  doing  something. 

3.  Applaudir,  to  applaud  something,  governs  the  dir.  obj. 
applaudir,  to  applaud  a  person,  governs  the  ind.  obj. 

4.  Approcher  qch.  (active  verb),  to  approach,  to  advance,  to  bring  or  push 

near. 

approcher  qn.,  to  approach  —  to  have  free  access. 
approcher  de  qn.  or  de  qch.,  to  approach  some  one  or  something;  to  go 

or  draw  nearer  (sec  §  3). 

5.  Emprunter,  to  borrow,  governs  the  indirect  object  of  the  person  when 


378  XXIV.      YINGT-QUATRIEME 

represented  by  a  personal  pronoun  (such  as  lui,  leur,  nous,  etc.).  But 
it  requires  a  or  de  when  the  person  is  expressed  by  a  noun  (as  :  a 
or  de  mon  frere,  of  my  brother. 

6.  En  croire  qch.,  to  trust,  to  depend  upon.  • 

7.  Heriter  qch.  de  qn.,  to  inherit  something  from  some  one.     If,  however, 

no  person  is  mentioned,  the  thing  follows  the  preposition  de. 

8.  Persuader  qn.  de  qch.,  to  convince  a  person  of  the  truth  of  a  thing. 
persuader  qch.  a  qn.,  to  persuade  one  to  do  something. 

9.  Redoubler  qch.  (dir.  obj.),  means  to  redouble,  i.  e.  to  reiterate. 
redouble-  de  qch.,  to  redouble,  i.  e.  to  augment  in  force. 

10.  Penser  a  means  to  have  one's  mind  upon. 
penscr  de,  to  have  an  opinion  of. 

Examples :  — 

Approchez  la  table,  approach  the  table  (bring  it  nearer). 
Tout  le  monde  pent  approcher  notre  prince. 
Everybody  has  free  access  to  our  prince. 
Ne  vous  approchez  pas  tant  da  bord. 
Do  not  go  so  near  the  edge. 
Pensez  a  moi,  think  of  me. 
Que  pensez-vous  de  cda,  what  do  you  think  of  that  ? 

6.  On  the  verb  faire.     The  verb  faire  when  followed  by  an 
Infinitive  with  a  dir.  obj.,  requires  the  person  in  the  ind.  obj.,  the 
two  verbs  being  considered  as  one  verbal  expression  the  sense  of 
which  is  is  always  active.     The  reason  of  it  is  that  an  active  verb 
cannot  have  two  direct  complements  (see  L.  XXII,  10).     Ex.  :  — 

Je  lid  ai  fait  e"crire  cinquante  mots. 
I  have  made  him  write  fifty  words. 
Sa  mere  lui  a  fait  raconter  cette  histoire. 
His  mother  caused  him  to  relate  that  story. 

But  if  there  be  no  direct  object  after  the  Infinitive  that  follows 
faire,  the  person  stands  in  the  direct  object.     Ex.:  — 

Je  les  ai  fait  partir,  I  have  made  them  depart. 
Nous  les  avons  fait  renoncer  a  leur  preventions. 
We  have  made  them  abandon  their  pretentious. 

7.  The  verbs  ecouter,  entendre,  laisser  and  voir,  also,  are  some- 
times used  in  this  manner,  as  :  — 


GOVERNMENT   OF  VERBS.  379 

Je  lui  ai  vu  maltraiter  son  chien. 
I  saw  him  ill-treat  his  dog. 

But  this  is  not  generally  adopted,  and  it  is  better  to  say  :  — 

Je  I'ai  vu  maltraiter  son  chien. 

Jai  vu  le  petit  gargon  (dir.  obj.)  maltraiter  son  chien. 

8.    When  the  Infinitive  is  followed  by  a  subordinate  sentence  with 
qite,  the  indirect  object  is  preferred,  as  :  — 
Je  lui  ai  entendu  dire  qu'il  partirait. 
I  heard  him  say  that  he  was  going  to  leave. 
JJai  entendu  dire  a  son  pere  qu'il  lui  pardonnerait. 
I  heard  his  father  say  that  he  would  forgive  him. 

THEME  68. 

1.  The  jailer1  has  deceived  the  prisoner  with  respect  to  (sur)  the 
lot2  which  awaited  him.  2.  Have  you  not  abused  our  patience  ? 
3.  "We  have  abused  it  (en).  4.  The  hour  from  10  to  11  does  not 
suit  my  sister.  5.  We  have  agreed  on  the  price.3  6.  Let  us 
always  assist  the  poor.  7*  I  could  not  be  present  at  the  funeral.4 
8.  I  have  changed  my  opinion.  9.  Could  you  change  me  this 
napoleow?  10.  Industry  is  the  true  philosopher's5  stone  that 
changes  all  metals  into  gold.  11.  Whom  have  you  asked  for  ?  12. 
I  inquired  for  my  eldest6  brother.  13.  Have  you  asked  your  friend 
for  money?  14.  I  have  not  asked  him  for  any.  15.  Do  not  be- 
lieve that  man,  he  is  a  liar.7  16.  I  do  not  believe  in  his  promises. 
17.  We  believe  in  God.  18.  The  little  bird  has  escaped  from  his 
cage.  19.  Can8  you  play  at  chess?9  20.  No,  Sir,  but  I  will 
play  at  cards  with  you,  if  you  like.10  21.  I  play  (on)  the  violin 
and  my  sister  plays  on  the  piano.  22.  We  often  play  together. 
23.  I  was  too  late,  I  missed  the  train.11  24.  A  soldier  must  (doit) 
not  fail  in  courage.  25.  The  pupil  redoubled  his  application,  when 
he  heard  that  a  prize3  would  bo  given.  26.  The  man  is  too  poor, 
he  cannot  satisfy  his  creditors.12  27.  Do  you  make  use  of  specta- 
cles?13 28.  Yes,  I  always  wear  spectacles;  I  am  short-sighted.14 
29.  Make  him  read  a  chapter15  or  two.  30.  I  made  him  relate16 


380  XXY.    VINGT-CINQUI£ME 

the  story  a  second  time.     31.  Charles  the  XII  made  all  that  muL 
titude  cross17  the  river,  without  retaining18  a  single  soldier  prisoner. 

1.  Le  geoher.  2.  Le  sort.  3.  Prix,m.  4.  Fnnerailles,  f.  pi.  5.  Pliilosophale. 
6.  Aine.  7.  Menieur.  8.  Savoir.  9.  ^fzu:  echecs.  10.  Vouloir.  11.  ie  convoi. 
12.  Creancier.  13.  Lunettes,  f.  pi.  14.  J'ai  Za  vwe  fcasse.  15.  CJiapitre,  m.  16. 
Raconter.  17.  Repasser.  18.  >Sa«5  en  rctenir. 


XXV.     VINGT-CINQUIEME 


IDIOMATICAL  EXPRESSIONS. 

Idioms  are  modes  of  speaking  peculiar  to  one  language,  which 
cannot  be  literally  translated  into  another. 

Avoir,  to  have. 

Avoir  vingt  ans,  to  Le  twenty  years  old. 
Avoir  mal  aux  yeux,  to  have  sore  eyes. 
Avoir  mal  a  la  tete,  to  have  a  (or  the)  headache. 
J'ai  froid  aux  mains,  my  hands  arc  cold. 
Vous  avez  beau  parler,  it  is  in  vain  for  you  to  talk. 
J'ai  de  la  peine  a  le  croire,  I  can  hardly  believe  it. 
Avoir  froid,  to  he  cold,  —  cliaud,  to  be  warm. 
Avoir  honte,  to  be  ashamed. 
Avoir  raison,  —  tort,  to  be  right,  —  in  the  wrong. 
Avoir  bonne  mine,  to  look  well. 
N' avoir  que  faire  de,  to  have  no  occasion  for. 
Avoir  grand  soif,  — faim,  to  be  very  thirsty,  —  hungry. 
Avoir  quelque  chose,  to  have  something  the  matter  with  one. 
Avoir  peur,  to  be  afraid. 
Avoir  sommeil,  to  be  sleepy. 
Avoir  soin,  to  take  care. 
Avoir  besoin,  to  have  need,  want. 
Avoir  sujet,  to  have  reason. 
Avoir  regret,  to  regret. 
Avoir  envie,  to  desire. 


IDIOMATIC AL   EXPRESSIONS.  381 

Avoir  coutume,  to  be  accustomed. 

Avoir  lieu,  to  take  place. 

Avoir  beau,  to  be  in  vain. 

L* avoir  belle,  to  have  a  favorable  opportunity  to  do  it. 

Eire,  to  be. 
Etre  en  &at  de,  to  afford. 
Eire  a  son  aise,  to  be  in  good  circumstances. 
Etre  mat  avec  quelqu'un,  to  be  out  of  favor  with  some  one. 
Etre  de  mottle*,  to  go  halves. 
Etre  a  'la  portee,  to  be  within  reach. 
Etre  sur  le  point  de,  to  be  very  near  to,  to  be  going  to. 
II  en  est  de  .  .  .  ,  it  is  with,  it  is  the  case. 
Etre  riche  dc,  to  be  worth,  to  possess.     When  a  person  is  the  subject^ 

valoir  is  never  used  in  this  sense. 

II  est  riche  de  douze  mille  piastres,  he  is  worth  twelve  thousand  dollars. 
Etre  en  retard,  to  be  late. 
Eire  a  mcme  de,  to  be  able  to. 
Etre  en  peine  de,  to  be  uneasy  about. 
Etre  en  vie,to  be  alive. 
Etre  en  chemin  pour,  to  be  on  the  way  to. 
Etre  au  fait,  an  courant  de,  to  be  familiar  with, 
Etre  a  la  veille  de,  on  the  eve  of. 
Etre  de  trop,  to  be  in  the  way. 
Etre  lien  avec,  to  be  on  good  terms  with. 
Etre  brouille'  avec,  on  bad  terms  with. 

Etre  aux  prises  avec,  to  be  in  open  rupture,  quarrel  or  battle  with, 
Etre  d'avis,  to  be  of  opinion. 
Y  etre,  ro  be  at  home. 
Etre  d' accord,  to  be  in  tune. 

Ce  piano  n'est  pas  d 'accord,  this  piano  is  not  in  tune. 
Nous  sommes  d'accord,  we  agree. 
Vous  n'y  etes  pas,  that  is  not  it. 

Faire,  to  do,  to  make. 

Faire  savoir  qn.,  tC  let  one  know,  to  send  word. 

Faire  chaud,  faire  froid,  to  be  warm,  —  cold  (of  the  weather). 

Se  faire  des  amis,  to  get  friends. 

Faire  faire,  to  get  made. 

Faire  semblant  de,  to  pretend. 


382  XXV.      VINGT-CINQUIEMB 

Faire  attention,  to  pay  attention. 

Faire  cas  de,  to  value,  to  esteem. 

Faire  un  tour  de  promenade,  to  take  a  walk. 

Faue  voile  or  mettre  a  la  voile,  to  set  sail. 

Faire  de  son  mieux,  to  do  one's  best. 

Ne  faire  que,  to  do  nothing  but. 

C'en  est  fait  de  moi,  I  am  undone,  it  is  over  with  me. 

Vous  feriez  mieux  de  rester,  you  had  better  stay. 

Faites-moi  grace  de  tons  ces  details,  spare  me  particulars. 

Faire  raccommoder,  to  have  mended. 

Faire  la  cuisine,  to  cook. 

Faire  tort  a,  to  injure. 

Faire  bouillir,  to  boil. 

THEME  69. 

1.  How  old  was  your  father  when  he  died  ?  2.  He  was  seventy, 
3.  And  your  mother?  4.  She  was  almost1  eighty.  5.  I  do  not 
remember  to  have  ever  been  so2  thirsty  as  I  was  yesterday.  6. 
Warm  yourself,  if  you  are  cold ;  my  feet  are  not  cold,  because  I 
have  walked  much,  but  my  hands  are  so  cold,  that  I  cannot  write. 
7.  There  are  some  walks3  in  our  park  which  are  three  hundred  feet 
long.  8.  You  are  in  the  wrong,  and  he  is  in  the  right.  9.  It  is 
in  vain  for  you  to  ask  money  from  a  miser,  he  will  never  give  you 
any.  10.  Is  it  cold  this  morning?  11.  Yes  sir,  it  is  very  cold; 
however,  I  do  not  think  it  is  quite  so  cold  as  it  was  yesterday.  12. 
The  weather  is  very  inconstant;  it  was  hot  yesterday,  it  is  cold 
to-day ;  it  rained  this  morning ;  it  is  fine  weather  now,  btt  perhaps 
it  will  rain  again  before  (it  be 4)  night. 
1.  Pres  de..  2.  SI.  3.  Allee,  f.  4.  Faire  (Subj.). 


Donner,  to  give. 

Donncr  dans  le  pifye,  to  be  caught  in  the  snare. 

Donner  sur  le  jardin,  to  look  out  on  the  garden. 

Donner  carte  blanche,  to  give  full  powers. 

Donner  sur  I'ennemi,  to  fall  upon  the  enemy. 

Ne  savoir  ou  donner  de  la  tcte,  to  know  not  what  way  to  turn. 

Ce  vin  donne  a  la  tele,  that  wine  flies  up  to  the  head. 


IDIOMATICAL   EXPRESSIONS.  383 

Donner  un  coup  de  main,  to  help. 

.Donner  a  pleines  mains t  to  give  largely. 

Se  donner  des  airs,  to  take  a,  great  deal  on  one's  self. 

Se  donner  la  peine,  to  take  tlie  trouble. 

Jouer,  to  play,  etc. 

Jouer  d'un  instrument,  to  play  (upon)  an  instrument, 

Joueraquelquejeu,  to  play  at  some  game. 

Jouer  une  piece  de  theatre,  to  act  a  play. 

Jouer  un  tour  a  qn.,  to  serve  (play)  one  a  trick. 

Se  porter,  to  be  (in  reference  to  health). 

77  se  porte  bien,  he  is  well. 

Aimer  mieux,  to  have  rather,  to  choose  rather. 

Aller  a  bride  abattue,  to  go  at  full  speed. 

Dormir  la  grasse  matine'e,  to  sleep  very  late. 

Prendre  en  mauvaise  part,  to  take  amiss. 

S'y  bien  prendre,  to  go  the  right  way  to  work. 

S'y  prendre  mal,  to  go  the  wrong  way  to  work. 

Se  passer  de,  to  do  without. 

Trouver  mauvais  que,  to  take  ill  if. 

Trouver  son  maitre,  to  meet  with  one's  match. 

Trouver  a  redire,  to  find  fault  with. 

Savoir  bon  gr€t  to  be  thankful  for. 

Tenir  parole,  to  keep  our  word. 

Ne  tenir  qu'a,  to  be  in  a  person's  power. 

H  ne  tient  pas  a  moi  que,'it  is  not  my  fault. 

S'en  tenir  a,  to  stand  to. 

Faire  tenir,  to  forward. 

Venir  a  bout  de,  to  bring  about,  to  accomplish. 

En  vouloir  a,  to  have  a  spite  against,  to  be  vexed  with. 

Je  voudrais  pouvoir,  I  wish  I  could. 

//  y  va  de  votre  vie,  your  life  is  at  stake. 

Venir  de,  to  have  just  done  something. 

En  venir  aux  mains,  to  come  to  blows. 

THEME   70. 

1.  How  do  you  do  this  morning?  2.  I  am  very  well,  I  thank 
you.  3.  And  how  does  your  sister  do?  4.  She  is  not  well ;  she 
has  been  ill  for  these  two  months,  and  I  fear  she  will  never  be  well 
again,  5.  And  your  brothers,  how  are  they  ?  6.  The  youngest  is 


384  XXV.      VINGT-CINQUIEME   LE^ON. 

very  well,  but  I  do  not  know  how  tlie  eldest  does,  because  we  have 
not  heard1  of  him  for2  these  two  months ;  he  was  very  well  when 
he  wrote  to  us  last.8  7.  It  is  with  the  diseases  of  the  heart  as  with 
those  of  the  body,  some  are  real,4  and  some  imaginary.  8.  It  is 
with  men  of  learning  as  with  ears5  of  corn;  they  raise  their6  heads 
while  they  are  empty,  and  when  they  are  full,  they  begin  to  droop.7 
9.  It  is  with  your  son  as  with  other  children.  10.  I  do  not  think 
it  will  be  with  my  son  as  it  was  with  yours. 

1.  Avoir  de  ses  nouvelles.    2.  For  these — depuis.     3.  La  demiire  foi9.    4.  J?&L 
5.  Epis  de  lit.     6.  Def.  Art.    7.  Pencher. 

THEME  71. 

1.  I  have  great  pain1  in  my  side.  2.  He  has  sore  eyes.  3.  He 
has  a  sore  foot.  4.  My  lips  are  sore.  5.  She  had  the  toothache 
yesterday,  now  she  has  a  headache ;  to-morrow,  perhaps,  she  will 
have  the  ear2-ache.  6.  When  I  was  young,  I  often  had  the  head- 
ache. 7.  Why  do  you  not  eat,  if  you  are  hungry?  8.  I  am  not 
very  hungry,  I  can  wait  [till]  dinner  time,3  but  I  am  very  thirsty, 
and  I  will  thank4  you  for5  a  glass  of  wine.  9.  It  is  very  cold 
to-day.  10.  It  was  cold  yesterday.  11.  It  will  be  hot  soon.  12. 
I  am  thirsty.  13.  He  is  hungry.  14.  My  sister  is  not  well,  she 
has  not  been6  well  for  three  weeks,  she  has  a  headache  to-day. 
15.  At  what  o'clock  did  you  rise  this  morning?  16.  I  rose  at 
four  o'clock.  17.  It  is  in  vain  for  you  to  say  so,  I  do  not  believe 
you. 

1.  Eien  mat.   2.  Oreille.    3  Le  diner.   4.  Prter.    5.  De  me  donner.    6.  Se  pyr- 
ter,  use  the  Present  tense,  • 


ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


OE  THE  WOKDS  THAT  OCCUR  IN  THE  THEMES. 


A. 

Able  (to  be),  pouvoir,  irr.  see  p.  190. 

About,  environ,  see  also  p.  301. 

Absolve,  v.  a.,  absoudre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 

Abstain,  s'abstenir,  irr.  see  p.  187. 

Abundance,  abondance,  f. 

Abuse,  dire  des  injures,  maltraiter. 

Accept,  agreer,  accepter. 

Accompany,  accompagner. 

Account,  compte,  m. 

Acquaintance,  connaissance,  f. 

Acquire,  acquerir,  irr.  see  p.  187. 

Act,  agir. 

Action,  action,  f. 

.Admirable,  admirable* 

Admiral,  amiral,  m. 

Admit,  admettre,  irr.  see  p.  180. 

Advantage,  wantage,  m. 

Affair,  ajfiiire,  f. 

Afraid  (to  be),  avoir  peur. 

After,  apres. 

Aftcrnoon,~apres-midit  m.  f. 

Again,  encore. 

Against,  contre. 

Age,  age,  in,  [old  age,  vieillesse,  f.J 

Agree,  ccnvenir,  irr.  see  p.  187. 

Agreeable,  agreable. 

Agriculture, 'agriculture,  f. 

Alike,  par  ell. 

All,  tout ;  all  that,  tout  ce  qui,  see  p.  127. 

Alley,  allee. 

Allow,  per?nettre,\rT.  see  p.  180. 

Almost,  presque. 

Already,  deja» 

Also,  aussi. 

Always,  toujours. 

Ambitious,  ambitieux, 

Amiable,  aimable. 

Among,  parmi. 

Amuse,  amuser,  entretenir. 

Ancestors,  ancetres.  aieux. 

And,  et. 

Anger,  colere. 

Angry,  f  ache. 

Angry  (to  be),  se  fdcher. 

Animal,  animal. 

25 


Anoint,  oindre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 
Answer,  v.,  repondre. 
Answer,  n.,  reponse,  f. 
Any  (with  neg.),  aucun,pas  de. 
Anybody  (after  neg.),  personne, 
Any  more  (after  neg.),  plus. 
Appear,  paraitre,  irr.  see  p.  178. 
Appetite,  appetit,  m. 
Apple,  pomme,  f. 
Apply  to/y'orfresaer. 
Approach,  approcher,. 
April,  avril,  m. 
Arm,  bras,  m. 
Army,  armee,  f. 

Art,  art,  m. 

Artist,  artiste. 

As,  comme;  (so)  as  —  as,  aussi — que. 

Ashamed,  Uontciix. 

Ashes,  cendre,  f. 

Ask,  demander. 

Assiduity,  assiduite*. 

Assist,  assister,  secourir,  irr.  see  p.  184. 

Assistance,  secours,  m. 

Astonishing,  etonnant. 

At,  a,  en ;  see  p.  302 :  at  home,  a  la  mai- 

son ;  at  your  house,  chez  vous ;  at  first, 

d'abord;  at  once,  tout  (Pun  coup;  at 

all,  dutout. 
Attack,  attaquer. 
Attain,  atteindre,  irr.  see  p<  175;  parve- 

nir,  irr.  see  p.  187. 
Attention,  attention,  f. 
Attentive,  attentif. 
Attract,  attirer. 
August,  aout,  m. 
Aunt,  tante,  f. 
Author,  auteur? 
Avarice,  avarice,  f. 
Avaricious,  avaricieux. 
Avoid,  eviter. 
Avow,  avoucr. 

B. 

Bad,  mauvais. 
BaU,  balle,  f.,  bal,  m. 

885 


386 


VOCABULARY 


Bark,  dboyer. 
Barley,  orge,  f. 
Battle,  bataille.  f. 
Beard,  barbe,  f. 

Beat,  battre,  see  p.  107,  f  rapper. 
Beautiful,  beau. 
Because,  parce  que. 
Become,  devenir,  irr.  see  p.  187. 
r><  d  (to  ;.ro  to),  se  coucher. 
Bee,  abeille,  f. 
,Beer,  biere,  f. 

Before,  avant,  (levant,  see  p.  298. 
Beg,  prier,  mendier, — for  a  thing,  de- 
mender,  solliciter. 

"Beg-in,  commencer,  se  mettre  a,  see  p.  180. 
Behind,  derriere. 
Believe,  croire,  irr,  see  p.  177. 
Belong,  appartenir,  irr.  seep.  187. 
Better,  meitteur,  superieur. 
Better,  adv.,  mieux,  to  be  better,  valoir 

mieux. 

Between,  ent  re. 

Beyond,  au-dessus,  au  dela;  dela,  outre. 
Big,  grand,  gros. 
Bite,  mordre. 
Bird,  oiseau,  m. 
Bitter,  amer. 
Black,  noir. 
Blame,  bldmer. 
Blood,  sang,  m. 
Blush,  rougir. 
Boarding-house,  pension,  f. 
Body,  corps,  m.      Everybody,  chacun, 
tout  le  monde.    Nobody,  personne. 

Boil,  bouilltr,  irr.  see  p.  180. 

Bonnet,  chapeau,  m. 

Book,  livre,  m. 

Boot,  botte,  f. 

Born  (to  be),  naitre,  irr.  see  p.  181. 

Boy,  qarqon,  m. 

Box,  boite,  cassette,  f. 

Bottle,  bouteittet  f. 

Brave,  brave,  courageux. 

Bray,  braire,  def.,  see  p.  197. 

Bread,  pain. 

Break,  rompre,  see  p.  107,  casser,  writer. 

Breakfast,  dejeuner. 

Bring,  apporter. 

Brother,  frere,  —  in  law,  beau-frere. 

Build,  bdtir,  consiruire,  irr.  see  p.  172. 

Burn,  bruler. 

Business,  affaires^  occupation,  f. 

But,  mais. 

Butter,  beurre,  m. 

Buy,  acheter. 

Uy,  par,  see  p.  302. 


c. 

Cabbage,  chout  m. 
Calf,  veau,  m. 
Call,  appeter,  —  to  mind, 
Caine*!,  chameau,  ni. 
Can,  see  p.  190-1. 
Candle,  chandeUe}  f. 
Cans,  canne,  f. 


Cap,  casquette,  f. 
Carnival,  carnaval,Ta, 
Care,  soin,  ra. 
Carriage,  voiture,  f. 
Carry,  porter. 
Cast,  jeter. 
Castle,  chateau. 
Cat,  chat.  m. 
Cattle,  betail,  m.,  pi.  bcs 
Cease,  cesser. 
Celebrated,  celebre. 
Chair,  cliaise,  f. 
Chamber,  chambre,  f. 
Chase,  chasse,  f. 
Chastise,  cMtier. 
Cheese,  froniage,  m. 
Cherry,  cerise,  f. 
Child,  enfant,  m.  f. 
Choose,  choisir. 
Church,  eglise.  f. 


, 

Class,  classe,  f. 
Clean,  net. 
Clean,  v.,nettoi/er. 
Cloak,  manteau,  m. 
Cloth,  drop,  m. 
Clothe,  vetir,  irr.  see  p.  183. 
Cloud,  nuage,  m. 
Coach,  carrosse,  m, 
Coast,  cote,  f, 
Coat,  habit,  m. 
Coffee,  cafe,  m. 
Cold,frdid. 
Color,  couleur,  f. 
Come,  venir,  irr.  see  p.  187,  arriver,  — 

down,    descendre,  •—  in,   entrer,  —  in 

again,  rentrer. 
Comfort,  v.,  consoler. 
Comfort,  n.,  agrement,  m. 
Command,  ordre,  m. 
Command,  v.,  commander,  ordonner. 
Commence,  commencer. 
Commerce,  commerce,  m. 
Complain,  se  plaindre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 
Compel^  contraindre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 
Comrade,  camarade.  m. 
Conceal,  cacher,  taire,  irr.  see  p.  178. 
Conceive,  conctvoir,  irr.  see  p.  189. 
Conduct,  n.,  conduite. 
Conduct,  v.,  conduire,  irr.  see  p.  172. 
Confess,  avouer. 
Confidence,  conjlance,  f. 
Conflagration,  incendie,  m. 
Conquer,  vaincre,  irr.  see  p.  174;  COTZ- 

querir,  irr.  see  p.  188. 
Conqueror,  vainqueur,  m. 
Consent,  cojisenttr,  irr.  see  p.  181. 
Consequence,  suite,  f. 
Consider,  considerer. 
Constrain,  contraindre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 
Construct,  construire,  irr.  see  p.  172. 
Contain,  renfermer,  contenir,  irr.  see  D. 

187. 

Contented,  content. 
Continue,  continuer. 
Convince^  convaincre,  Irr.  see  p.  174. 
Cook,  cuire,  irr.  see  p.  172. 


VOCABULARY. 


S87 


Cool,  frais,  fern,  fraiche. 
Copy-book,  cahier,  m. 
Corn,  ble,  m.,  —  market,  halle  aux  bUs. 
Correct,  corriger. 
Co?fc,  corner. 

CouulRy,  pays,  m.,  campagne,  f. 
Courage,  courage,  m. 
^Course,  cours,  m. 
Ccu«in,  cousin,  m.,  cousine,  f. 
('over,  courrir,  irr.  see  p.  J85. 
Cow,  vacfte,  f. 
Creator,  createur,  m. 
Creditor,  creancier,  in. 
Crime,  crime,  m. 
Cry,  crier,  pleurer. 
Cup,  coupe,  tasse,  f. 
Currant,  groseiUe,  f. 
Custom,  coutume,  f. 
Cut,  couper,  tailler. 

D, 

Damp,  humide.  • 

Danger,  danger,  m. 

Dark,  sombre. 

Daughter,  >Kfe,  f. 

Dawn,  v.,  poindre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 

Di\y,jour,  m.  journcc,  f.  day-light,  Jour. 

Deaf",  sourd. 

Dear,  c/*er. 

Doath,  mortj  f. 

Debt,  dette,f. 

Deceive,  tromper,  decevoir,  irr.  see  p. 

December,  ddcembre,  m. 

Decision,  decision,  f. 

Deer,  chevreuil,  cerf,  m. 

Defect,  defaut,  m. 

Defend,  defendre. 

Delight,  seplaire  a,  irr.  seep.  178. 

Demolish,  -demolir. 

Deny,  ?iier,  disconvenir,  irr.  see  p.  187* 

Depart,  partir,  irr.  p.  183. 

Departure,  depart,  m. 

Depend,  dependre.  —  upon  or  on,  ccww- 

fer  swr. 

Depict,  depeindre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 
Describe,  dccrire,  irr.  see  p.  170. 
Deserve,  meriter. 
Desire,  desir,  m. 
Despise,  mepriser. 
Destroy,  detruire,  irr.  see  p.  172. 
Die,  mourtr,  irr.  see  p.  180. 
Difficult,  difficile. 
Difficulty,  difficult^  f. 
Diligent,  applique:. 
Dine,  v.,  diner. 
Dinner,'  n.,  diner,  m. 
Direct  (a  letter),  adresser. 
Directly,  £ow£  tfe  suite,  a  V instant. 
Direction,  adresse.  f. 
Disappear,  dispuraltre,  irr.  see  p.  178. 
Discontented,  mccontent.  • 

Discover,   decouvrir,    irr.    see   p.    185. 

inventor. 
Disease,  maladlc,  f. 


Displease,  deptaire,  irr.  see  p.  178. 

Dissatisfy,  mtcontcnter. 

Dissolve,  dissoudre,  irr.  sec  p.  175u 

Distinguish,  distinguer. 

Distress,  amiger. 

Divide,  dlviser,  partager. 

Do,faire,  irr.  see  p.  160. 

Dog,  cliien,  m. 

Door,  porte,  f.  door-way,  portail. 

Doubt,  douter. 

Doubtful,  douteux. 

Draw,  tirer,   attirer,  —  after,  entrainef 

—  (pictures),  dessiner —  upon  one's  self 

yattirer. 

Dream,  songer,  rever. 
Dress,  habillcr,  purer,  vetir. 
Drink,  boire,  irr.  see  p.  177. 
Drop,'goutte,  f. 
Drunk  and  drunken,  ivre. 
Dry,  sec. 

Duck,  canard,  m. 
Dumb,  muet. 
During,  pendant. 
Dust,  poussiere,  f. 
Duty,  devoir,  m. 
Dwell,  demeurer,  liabiter. 
Dye,  teindre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 

E- 

Ear,  oreille,  f. 

Early,  de  bonne  heure. 

Earth,  terre,  f/ 

Easily,  facilement. 

Easy,  aise,  facile. 

Eat,  manger. 

Edftion,  edition,  impression,  f . 

Educate,  elever. 

Education,  education,  f. 

Effort,  effort,  m. 

Egg,  ceiif,  m. 

Elect,  etire.  irr.  see  p.  177. 

Elephant,  elephant,  m. 

Ell  (measure),  aune,  f. 

Elm  (tree),  orme,  m. 

Eloquently,  eloquemment. 

Embarrass,  embarrasser,  d^r anger. 

Embellish,  embellir. 

Employ,  employer. 

End,  ii.,  bout,  m.  (object)  fin,  f.  bul,  m. 

End,  \.,finir,  cesser. 

Enemy,  ennemi,  m. 

Engine  (steam),  machine  a  vapeur. 

Enough,  assez. 

Enrich,  enrichir. 

Enter,  entrer. 

Entertain,  entretcnir,  amuscr, 

Entertaining,-  amusant. 

Envy,  enme,  f. 

Equal,  egal,  pareil. 

Equality,  egalite,  f. 

Error,  faute,  erreur,  f. 

Escape,  echapper,  se  sauver.  see  p.  105. 

fair,  irr.  gee  p.  183. 
Esteem,  estimer. 
Evening,  soir,  m.  soiree,  f. 


SS3 


VOCABULARY. 


tenement,  m. 
er,  jamais. 
Everybody',    chacun,   tout    le   monde,— 

thing,  tout,  —  wiiere ,partout. 
E\  il,  nial,  m. 
Example,  exempte,  m. 
Execute,  execitter,  s'aqutitcr  de. 
Exercise,  exercice,  theme,  m. 
Exhaust,  epuiser. 
Exi^t,  exixter. 

Exy>ect,  attendre,  s'attendre  a. 
Extinct,  eteint.  To  beconm — sjetcindre. 
Extinguish,  eteindre,irr.  see  p.  175. 
Extract,  extraire,  irr.  see  p.  174. 
Extreme,  extreme. 
Eye,  csil ;  pi.  yeux,  m. 


F. 

Fable,  fable,  m. 

face,  ./hce,  f.  visage,  m.  figure*  f. 

I  ail,/ai//ir,  def.  see  p.  197,  manquer. 

Faint,  dCfaWir,  def.  see  p.  197. 

Faithful,  ./fr&te. 

Fall,  tomber,  choir,  dechoir,  def.  see  p. 
189. 

Fall,  cfcwte,  f. 

False,  faux. 

Falsehood,  mensonge,  m. 

Family,  fa  mi  lie,  f. 

Fan,  evant/iil,  m. 

Far,  ?om,  from  far,  <fe  Zotn. 

Fat,  <7/-a5. 

Fate,  sort. 

Father,  pcre, in-law,  bcau-pere,  god- 
father, parrain. 

Fault,  faute,  f.  defaut,  m. 

Fear,  peur,  crainte,  f. 

Fear,  craindre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 

Fearful,  craintif. 

Feather,  plume,  f. 

February,  fivrier,  m. 

Feed,  nourrir,  (graze)  paitre.  irr.  see  p. 
178. 

Feel,  sentir,  irr.  see  p.  184. 

Feign,  feindre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 

Fellow-traveller,  compagnon  de  voyage. 

Ferocious,  ft  race. 

Fertilize,  fertiliser. 

Few,  pen,  a ,  quelques. 

Field,  champ. 

Fic,rht,  combattre. 

Fill,  emplir,  remplir,  rassasler,  combler. 

Find,  trouver. 

Fine,  beau. 

Finish,  finir,  terininer,  achevcr. 

Fire,  feu,  m. 

Flag,  pavillion,  drapeau,  ra. 

Flatter,  flatter. 

Flatterer,  flatteur,  m. 

Fiee,  fuir,  s'enfuir,  irr.  see  p.  183. 

Flesh,  chair,  f. 

Florin,  florin,  ra. 

Flour,  farine,  f. 

Flourish,  fleurir,  see  p.  102. 

Flower,  fteur,  f. 


Fly,  mouche,  f. 

Fly,  /«i>,  tfenfuir,  irr.  see  p.  183,  rofer. 

Fog,  brouillard,  m. 

Follow,  suivre,  irr.  seep.  174. 

Folly,  sottise,  folie,  f. 

Fool,  so£,  imbecile,  fou. 

Foolishness,  sottine,  betise. 

Foot,  ;w"ed,  m. 

For,  prep.  pour. 

For,  conj.  car,  as ,  quant  a. 

Forbid,  dJfendre,  God 1  a  Dicu  m 

plaise! 

Forehead,  front,  m. 
Foreign,  etrcmger. 
Foresee,  prcvoir,  irr.  ^e  p.  192,  pressen- 

tir,  irr.  see  p.  184.     % 
Forest,  foret,  f. 
Forget,  oublier. 
Forgive,  pardonner. 
Fork,  fourchette. 
Formerly,  autrefois. 
Forsake,  abandonner. 
Fortnight,  quinze  jours. 
Fortune,  fortune,  f. 
Forward,  and  forwards,  en  avant,  sur  U 

dei-ant. 

Found,  fonder. 
Freeze,  geler. 
Frequently,  souvent. 
Fresh,  frais,  fern,  fraiche. 
Friday,  vendredi. 
Friend,  ami,  m.  amie,  f. 
Friendly,  amical. 
Friendsliip,  amitie'» 
Fruit,  fruit,  m. 
Full,  piein. 

Fulfil,  remplir,  satififaire. 
Furniture,  meubles,  pi.  m. 

G- 

Gain,  gagner, (a  victory)  rempoj*- 

ter+  —  (affection,  hatred)  attirer. 

Game,  jeu,  (chase)  gibier. 

Gape,  Miller. 

Garden,  jardin,  m. 

Gardener,  jardiniert  m. 

Gate,  porte,  f. 

Gather,  cueiUir,  rccueilUr,  irr.  see  p.  184. 

General,  general,  m. 

Generous,  genereux. 

Genius,  genie,  m. 

Gentleman,  gentilhomme. 

Gentleness,  douceur,  f. 

Get  up,  se  lever. 

Gift,  don,  m. 

Girlie,  f. 

Give,  donner. 

Glad,  aise,  content. 

Gladly,  volontiers,  avecplaisir. 

Glass,  verre,  m. 

Glitter,  rehiire,  irr.  see  p.  171. 

Glory,  gloire,  f. 

Glove,  gant.  m. 

Go,  alter,  irr.  see  p.  194, —away  (set 
out),  s>en  alter,  partir,  irr.  see  p.  183, 


VOCABULARY. 


— far  from,  s'eloigner  de,  —  for,  aller 
chercher,  —  on,  continuer,  —  out,  sor- 
tir,  irr.  see  p.  184,  — out,  eteindre,  irr, 
see  p.  175. 

God,  Dieu,  m. 

Gold,  or,  m. 

Good,  n.,  le  bien. 

Good,  ad.,  bon,  sage.  To  be for 

nothings  ne  valoir  rien. 

Good  will,  bicnveillance,  f. 

Goodness,  bonie,  f. 

Govern,  gouverner. 

Gown,  robe,  f. 

Grammar,  grammaire,  f. 

Grandfather,  grand-pere,  aleul. 

Grandmother,  grand'mere. 

G  rant,  accorder. 

Grass,  her  be,  verdure,  f. 

Graze,  paltre,  irr.  see  p.  178. 

Great,  grand. 

Green,  vert. 

Grief,  douleur,  f,  peine,  f. 

Grind,  rnoudre,  irr.  see  p.  174. 

G  round,  terre.    On  the a,  par  tcrre. 

Grow,  croitre,  irr.  see  p.  178,  —  lean, 
maigrir,  —  old,  vieillir.  —  pale,  pdlir, 
—  red,  rougir,  —  tall,  grandir,  —  thin, 
maigrir,  —  worse,  empirer. 

Guilty,  coupable. 


H- 

Hail,  n.,  greU,  f. 

Hail,  v.,  greler. 

Half,  n.,  moitie.  f. 

Half,  ad.,  demi. 

Hand,  main*  f. 

Handkerchief,  mouchoir,  m. 

Handsome,  beau. 

Happen,  arriver,  survenir,  irr.  see  p. 

187. 

Happily,  heureusement. 
Happiness,  bonheur,  m. 
Happy,  heureux. 
Hard,  <7wr,  difficile. 
Hardly  at  all,  ne  —  guere, — e\er,presque 

jarnais. 

Hare,  lievre,  m. 
Harvest,  moisson,  r dealt e. 
Haste,  and  Hasten,  hater,  se  depeclier, 

s'emprcsscr. 
Hat,  chapeaU)  m.     To  put  on  one's — , 

mettre  son  chapeau,  se  couvrir.     To 

take  off  one's  hat,  oter  son  chapeau,  se 

tlecouvrir. 

Hate,  hair,  Bee  p.  102. 
Hatred  haine^  f. 
Hay,/oi»,  m. 
Head,  tete,  f. 
Heal  guerir. 
Health,  santd.f. 

Hear,  entendre,  ouir,  def.  see  p.  198. 
Heart,  cmur,  m. 
Heat,  'chtileur,  f. 
Heaven.  cieZ,  pi.  deux,  m. 
Eeavy ,  towr/i,  pesant. 


Helm,  gouvernail,  m. 

Henceforward,  desormais,  dorenavanf. 

Here,  id,  y* 

Heretofore,  autrefois. 

Hide,  caclier. 

High,  haut,  elevt. 

Hill,  coiline,  f.  coteau,  m.,  montagne,  f. 

Hinder,  empecher. 

History,  histoire,  f. 

Hit,  frapper,  atteindret  irr.  see  p.  175. 

Hive,  ruche,  f. 

Hoist,  hisser. 

Hold,  tenir,  irr.  see  p.  187. 

Hole,  /row,  m. 

Holiday,  conge,  m. 

Home,  cm  /o^is,  a  to  maison,  chcz  soi,  see 

p.  37. 

Honest,  honnete. 
Honor,  honncur,  m. 
Hope,  n.,  ejsp&anct)  f.,  espoir,  m. 
Hope,  vr.,  espcrcr. 
Horse,  chcval,  m. 
Hot,  chaud. 
Hour,  heiire,  f. 
House,  maison,  f. 
How,    comment,    combien,    quet  —  long 

(since  when)?  depute  quandl  —  many 

(much)  combien. 
However,  quelque. 
Human,  humain. 
Hunger,  faim,  f.     To  be  hungry,  avoir 

faim. 

Hunter,  chasseur,  m. 
Hunting1,  chasse,  f. 

Hurt,  nuire,  irr.  see  p.  172,  Ue8t&r,gtiter. 
Husband,  mari,  epoux. 


I. 

Ice,  glace,  f. 

Idea,  idee,  f. 

Idle,  paresseux. 

If,  si. 

Ill,  adj.,  malade. 

Ill,  adv.,m«J. 

Illness,  maladie,  f. 

Image,  image,  f. 

Imagine,  imaginer. 

Immortal,  immortel. 

Importune,  importuner. 

Impossible,  impossible. 

In,  en,  dans,  see  p.  297,  and  p.  304. 

Inch,  pouce,  m. 

Increase,  accroitret  croitre,  Irr.  see  p. 

178,  augmenter. 
Incredible,  incroi/abte. 
Inconstant,  inconstant. 
Incur,  s'attirer,  encourir,  irr.  see  p.  184k 
Indeed,  vraiment. 
Infamous,  in  fame. 
Infringe,  enfreindre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 
Inhabit,  habiter^  demeurer» 
Inhabitant,  habitant,  m. 
[i\jure,  nuire,  irr.  see  p.  172. 
Ink,  encre,  f. 
Inkstand,  cncrier,  m. 


390 


VOCABULARY. 


Inquire,  s'enqulrir,  irr.  see  p.  188. 

Inquisitive,  curieux. 

Inscribe,  inscrire,  irr.  see  p.  17fi. 

Instruct,  instruire,  irr.  see  p.  172. 

Interrupt,  interrompre. 

Into,  dans,  see  p.  297. 

Introduce,  presenter,  introduire,  irr.  see 

p.  172. 

Invent,  inventer. 
Invite,  inviter. 
Iion,/er,  m. 
3  laud,  He,  f. 
Ivory,  ivoire,  m. 


January,  Janvier,  m. 

Jealous,  jaloux. 

Jealousy,  jalousie,  f. 

Jewel,  bijou,  m. 

Join,  joindre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 

Joy,  joie,  f. 

July,  juillet,  m. 

June,  juin,  in. 

Just,  juste. 

Justice,  justice,  f. 


K- 

Keep,  tenir,  irr.  see  p.  187,  (observe)  ob- 
server. 

Kill,  Zwer. 

Kindness,  bontd. 

King,  rot,  m. 

Kingdom,  royaume,  m. 

Kitchen,  cuisine,  f. 

Knee,  genou,  m. 

Knife,  couteau,  m. 

Know,  connaitre,  irr.  see  p.  178,  savoir, 
irr.  see  p.  191. 

Knowledge,  science,  f.,  savoir,  m.,  ccw- 
naissance,  f. 


L. 

Laboi,  n.,  travail,  m.,  pi.  aw#. 

Labor,  v.,  travaiUer. 

Laborious,  labor  icux. 

Laconic,  laconique. 

Lady,  dame,  f. 

Lambjtt^nerm,  m. 

I^anguago,  langue,  f.,  langage,  m. 

Land,  terre,  f. 

Large,  #ro?,  grand. 

Last,  v  ,durer,  contimter. 

Last,  adj.,  dernier, passe. 

Lasting,  durable. 

Late,  adj., /CM,  see  p.  247. 

Late,  adv.,  tarrf,  e/i  retard. 

Laugh,  ?*ire,  irr.  see  pp.  194  and  107. 

Law,  Joz",  f. 

Lawyer,  aoocat,  m. 


Lead,  n.,p?o??j5,  m. 

Lead,  v.,  mcner,  —  into,  induire  en,  irr. 

seo  p.  172. 
Leaf,  f  cut  fie,  f. 
Lt-ague,  lieue,  f. 

Learn,  apprendre,  irr.  see  p.  181. 
Learned,  savant. 
Least,  le  moindre.     At  the—,  da  mains. 

(at  all  events),  au   moins,-ii\  the — ,' 

du  tout. 

Leave  (of  absence),  conge,  m. 
Leave,  v.,  quitter,  laisser,  ccsser.    Take 

—  offprendre  conge  de. 
Left,  gauche,  f. 
Leg,  jam.be,  f. 
Lend,  prttcr. 
Less,  7noins. 
Let,    laisser,  — 113     go,     allons,  —  him 

know,  faites-lui  savoir,  (to  hire)  loner. 
Letter,  lettre,  f. 
Liar,  menteur,  m. 
Liberty,  libcrtf,  f. 
Lie,  ffiisir,  def.  see  p.  108. 
Lie,  inentir.  irr.  see  p.  164. 
Life,  vie,  f. 
Lift  up,  lever,  eUver. 
Like,  pareil,  adv.,  comme. 
Likely,  probable,  vraisemblable. 
Lily,  "ifo,  m. 
Limit,  limiter,  borner,  restrcindre,  see 

p.  175. 

Line,  ligne,  f. 
Linen,    toile,   f.      Unbleached—,    ^oi7e 

ccrue. 

Lion,  lion,  m. 
Listen,  ecouter. 

Little,  adj.,  petit,  adv.,  pcu,  ne  —  guere. 
Live,  vivre,  irr.  see  p    161,  (dwell),  do 

menrer,  habiier. 
Loadstone,  aimant,  m. 
Lock,  serrure,  f. 
Locksmith,  scrrurier,  m. 
Long,  adj.,  lonfl,  fern,  longue,  adv., 

temps,  depute  lonytemps. 
Look  at,  refjarder,  —  for,  chcrcher. 
Looking-glass,  miroir, 
Lose,  pcrdre. 
Loss,  perte,  f. 
Love,  n.,  amour,  m. 
Love,  v.,  aimer,  —  dearly,  c/idrzr. 
Low,  has. 
Luxury,  luxe,  m. 


M. 

d,/o?«,  insenst. 

Bladam,  Madame, 

Magnificent,  mtigniflque. 

Maintain,  tnaiiitenir,  irr.  see  p.  187, 
nourrir. 

Make, /«f re,  irr.  see  p.  ISO,  — up  a  quar- 
rel, muster  une  querclle,  —  haste,  si 
dtpecnerl 

Man,  homme,  m. 
I  Manners,  mceurs,  f. 


VOCABULARY. 


391 


Many,  pluslcurs,  teaucoiip,  lien  des.  So 
— ,  taut,  tant  de,  aiitunt.  As  —  as,  aa- 
tant  (/lie.  Too  — ,  trop. 

Mflp,  Carte,  f. 

March,  //i./rx,  m. 
-  M:;IT;. <;:*',  tn./.ritf/e,  m. 
Marry,  m  /.  />>-,  <-p<td-ser,  se  marier. 
Master,  u.,  iii;i'ii  re,  ni. 
M.i  ••!•,  v.,  dontpfcr,  K\>W  purer  de.   • 
Mutter,  w  ///(.' ye,  ('.,  ajj'aire,  L,  chose,  f. 
5I.iv,  //j.v/,  in. 

Meadow,  /m>,  m.,  prairie,  f. 
M  <•;'!,  repns,  m.,farlne,  f. 
MLV.H,  ta 
Me;m>,  'ittoi/en,  m. 
Bleat,  t-irtfw/e,  f. 
Meddle,  ,se  niilr.r  (dc), 
Mcdioiuo,  mSdecine. 
Meet,  reucontrer. 
%lelt,foudre. 
Hklcraber.  incmbrc,  ra. 
Memory,  mtmuire. 

Mead,  raccomHiodeTi  —  a  pen,  tattler, 
Mere   ,'int,  nSyociftnt. 
Messenger,  messager. 
Metal,  Wf'<«/,  m. 
Middle,  milieu t  m. 
Mild,  <Zo«,r. 
Milk,  /r«Y,  m. 
Miller. meunier,  m. 
Mind,  esprit,  m. 
Minute,  minute,  f. 
Miss,  Mademoiselle. 
Misfortune,  malhcur,  m. 
Mislead,  Sfjarcr,  induire  en  erreur. 
Mist,  brouilhirdi  in. 
Mistake,  v.,  *'e    (romper,    Tiitcoiiiiciitrc, 

in1,  see  p.   l?i),  intpreudre,  irr.  see  p. 

181. 

Mistake,  n.,  erreur,  f.,  frtute,  f. 
Mistrust,  .se  iiuyler  dt,  ae^L'-jier  de. 
Mock,  .s«  moqiier  de,  rire  de,  irr.  see  p. 

I'M. 

Modern,  moderne. 
Modest,  modeste. 
Modesty,  modestie,  f. 
Moment,  moment,  instant,  ra. 
Monday,  lundi,  in. 
Money,  argent,  in. 
Month,  m-ois,  m. 
Moon,  <f//?ie,  f. 
More,  /?//£S. 

Morning,  matin,  matinee. 
Morr-il,  inortcl. 
Mot'ier,   //?r?-e,  f., —  in  law,  IcUc-mere. 

Gruimiuot  her,  y raiuVmcrc. 
Motive,  ntoi(t\  in. 
Mourning,  deuil,  m. 
Mouse,  .so/r/'/x,  f. 
Mouth,  hi  me  he,  f. 

Move,  mouroir,  emouvoir,  irr.  soe  p.  190. 
Much,  bniucoup,  blen  de.    Too  — ,  /ro;>. 

Ho\v  — ,  comhten.    As  — ,  ^an/,  autant. 

As  —  as,  aidant  que. 
Mud,  /«/<fc,  f. 
Murder,  assassirwr. 
Music, 


M^uslin,  momseline,  f. 
Mutton,  mouton,  m. 

N. 

Nail,  on#?c,  m.,  (of  metal)  clou^'m, 

Naked,  nu. 

Name,  nom,  m. 

Nupkin,  serviette,  f. 

Nature,  nature,  f. 

Naughty,  mechant. 

Near,  proclie,  pres,  aupres.  He  is  pi  city 

near  it,  U  ne  s>enfaut  guere. 
Nearly,  presque,  a  peu  pres, 
Neat,  propre. 

Neatly,  proprement,  joliment. 
Necessary,  nccessaire,  to  be,  —  fattc  ;r, 

irr.  see  p.  190. 
Neglect,  n.,  ncgUgencet  f. 
Neglect,  v.,  ncyUger. 
Neighbor,  voisin,  m.,  voisinc,  f. 
Neither  —  nor,  ?i£  —  w», 
Never,  ?ie — jamais. 
New,  7?e?(/,  now;eau,frais. 
News,  nourelle,  f. 
Next,  prochain,  suivant. 
Nice,jo/i.  gentil. 
Niece,  niece,  f. 
Night,  7im'£. 
No,  now,  point. 
No,  ???*/,  aucun. 
Nobility,  noblesse,  f. 
Noise,  bruit. 
Noon,  razV//,  m. 
Nose,  ??e-r,  m. 
Not,  non,  non  pas,  ne—pas,  —  at  all, 

point  da  tout. 
Not  In  irr,  ne  —  rien. 
Notwithstanding,  nonobstant, 
Nourish,  nuttrrir. 
November,  novembre,  m. 
Now,  maiiitenant,  a  present. 
Number,  nombre,  numdro^  m. 
Nut,  noix,  f. 

O. 

Oak,  chene,  m. 

Oats,  avoine,  f. 

Obedient,  obdissant. 

Obey,  obcir. 

Oblige,  obliycr,  fairc  un  plaisir,  rendre. 

tin  hon  ojjicc. 
Obliging,  obUgeant. 
Observe,  obxeruer. 
Obtiiin,  oWewir,  irr.  see  p.  187,  rempor- 

ter,  acqui'rir. 
Occupy,  occuper. 
October,  o^tobre,  m. 
Odious,  odicux. 
Of,  de. 

Ollend,  ojfcnscr. 
Olfer,  u.,  offre,  f. 

Oiler,  v.,  oJWr,  irr.  see  p.  184,  proposer. 
Often,  souvent. 
Oil,  huile.  f 


392 


VOCABULARY. 


Old,  vieux,  (vieil},  age, —  age,  vieiUtssc, 
f.  How  —  are  you,  qucl  dge  avez- 
vous  1 

Omit,  omettre,  irr.  see  p.  180. 

On,  sur. 

Once,  une  fois,  —  on  a  time,  autrefois. 
At  — ,  de  suite.  All  at  — ,  tout  a  coup, 
tout  iVun  coup. 

Only,  adj.,  seul,  unique. 

Only,  adv.,  ne  —  que. 

Open,  ouvrir,  irr.  see  p.  185. 

Open,  adj.,  ouvert}  sincere,  franc. 

Openness,  sincente,  f. 

Opportunity,  occasion,  f. 

Oppose,  s'opposer. 

Opposite,  vis-a-vis ,  oppose. 

Or,  ou. 

Orange,  orange,  f. 

Order,  n.,  ordre,  m. 

Order,  v.,  prescrire,  irr.  see  p.  176. 

Other,  autre. 

Otherwise,  autrement. 

Ought.    See  Owe. 

Over,  sur,  au-dessus.  To  be  all  —  mud, 
etre  tout  convert  de  lone.  1  t's  all  over, 
c'est  fait,  or  e'en  est  fait  de.  .  . 

Overtake,  atteindre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 

Owe,  devoir,  irr.  see  p.  189. 

Owl,  Jiibou,  m. 

Own,  propre. 

Owner,  proprietaire. 

Ox,  bueuf,  m. 


P. 

Pagan,  palen,  m. 

Pain,  peine,  f.     On  —  of  death,  sows 

pei-ne  de  mort. 
Painful,  penible. 
Paint,  peindre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 
Painter,  peintret  m. 
Painting,  tableau,  m. 
Palace,  palais,  m. 
Pale,  pale. 
Paper,  papier,  m. 
Pardon,  pardonner. 
Parent,  pere,  mere.     Parents,  pere  et 

mere. 
Part,  partie,  f.    To  take  —  in,  se  meler 

de. 

Party,  partie,  m. 
Pass,  passer. 
Passage,  passage,  m. 
Patient,  maladc,  m. 
Pay,  payer. 
Peace,  paix,  f. 
Peach,  peche,  f. 
Pear,  poire,  f. 
Peasant,  paysan,  m. 
Pebble,  caillou,  m. 
Peculiar,  particulier. 
Fen,  plume,  f.,  —  holder,  porte-plume. 
Pencil,     crayon,    m.,   —    case,    porte- 

crayon. 

Penknife,  canif,  m. 
People.  peuple.gena* 


Perceive,  apercevoir,  irr.  see  p.  ISO. 

Perform,  faire,  s'acquitter  de. 

Perish,  j>c'rt>. 

Permit,  permcttre,  irr.  see  p.  180. 

Persecute,  persecuter. 

Persecutor,  persecnteur,  m. 

l*erson,  personne,  f. 

Persuade,  persuader. 

Picture,  tableau,  m. 

Piece,  morceau,  m.,  piece,  f. 

Pierce,  percer. 

Tig,  cockon,  m. 

Pin,  epingle. 

Pitiless,  impitoyalle. 

J'ity,  u.,  pitie,  f.    It  is  a  —,  c'cst  dom- 

mage. 

Pity,  v.,  plaindre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 
Place,  n.,  lieu,  m.,  place,  f. 
Place,  v.,  placer,  mettre,  irr.  see  p.  ISO. 
IMain,  plaine,  campagne,  f. 
Plan,  plan,  projet,  m. 
IMank,  planche,  f. 
Plant,  plante,  f. 
Plate,  assiette,  f. 
riay,  n.,    jeu,    m.,  com<idiey  —  thiag, 

•joujou,  m. 
Play,  v.,  jotter. 
J  Mayer,  jouer,  m. 
Please,  plaire  a,  irr.  see  p.  178.    If  you 

please,  s'il  vous  plait. 
Pleasure,  jtlaisir,  m.    To  take  pleasure 

in,  se  plaire  a  .  .  . 
Plum,  prune,  f. 
Plunder,  but  in,  m. 
Pocket,  poche,  f.,  —  handkerchief,  mou- 

choir,  m.,  —  book,  ijorte-feuille. 
Poet,  potte. 

Poison,  v.,  empoisonner. 
Polite,  poll. 
Politeness,  politesse,  f. 
Pond,  etang,  m. 
Poor,  pauvre. 
Pope,  pape,  m. 
Poplar,  peuplier,  m. 
Populous,  peuplc. 
Portion,  part,  f.,  portion,  f. 
Post-office,  poste.  f. 
Potato,  pomme  de  terre,  f. 
Pound,  livre,  f. 
Poweruil,  jjuissant, 
Praise,  louer. 
Pray,  privr. 
Precious,  precieux. 
Prefer,  prefirer. 
Prescribe,  prescrire,  irr.  see  p.  176,  OJ*~ 

donner. 

Presence,  presence,  f. 
Present,  present. 
Preserve,  preserver,  (pickle)  confire,  irr. 

see  p.  172. 

Pretence,  prctexte,  m. 
Pretend,  feindre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 
Pretty,  adj.,jo#,  gentil. 
Pretty,  adv.,  assez.    He  is  pretty  near  it, 

U  ne  s'en  faut  guere. 
Prey,  proie,  f. 
Pride,  orgueil,  m. 


VOCABULARY. 


393 


.Principle,  prtnrfpt,  m. 
Print,  imp  rimer. 
Printing,  iinprimerie,  f. 
Prison,  prison,  f. 
Prodigious,  prodigieux. 
-  Produce,  produire,  irr.  see  p.  172. 
Project,  projet,  m.   * 
Promise,  n.,  promease,  f. 
Promise,  v.,  promettre,  irr.  see  p.  180. 
Proper,  convenable. 
Property,  propriety,  f.,  lien,  in. 
Proposal,  proposition,  f. 
Propose,  proposer. 
Prove,  prouver, 
Punctually,  ponctuellement. 
Punctuality,  exactitude,  f. 
Punish,  punir. 
Punishment,  punition,  f. 
Pupil,  eleve,  m.  and  f. 
Purchase,  acheter. 
Purchaser,  acheteur,  m. 
Purpose,  but,  m.,  dessein,  m.    On — ,  ex- 

pres,  a  dessein. 
Purse,  bourse,  f. 

Pursue,  poursuivre,  irr.  see  p.  174. 
Pat,  mettre,  irr.  see  p.  ISO. 


Q. 

Quarrel,  querelle,  f. 
Queen,  reine,  f. 
Question,  n.,  question,  f. 
Question,  v.,  interroger. 
Quiet,  tranquille. 
Quite,  tout,  tout  a  fait. 


Railroad,  chemin  defer,  m. 

Rain,  n.,  pluie,  f. 

Rain,  v.,  pleitvoir,  irr.  see  p.  190. 

Rainy,  pluricux. 

Raise,  clever,  lever. 

Rare,  rare. 

Rashness,  temeritd,  f. 

Ray,  rayon,  m. 

Reach,  atteindre,  irr.  see  p.  V<5,parve~ 

nir,  irr.  see  p.  187. 
Read,  lire,  irr.  see  p.  177.    To  —  again, 

retire. 

Ready,  pr&t. 
Reaper,  moissoneiir. 
Reason,  raison^t, 
Rebuild,  rebntir. 
Recall,  rappeler.    To  —  to  mind,  se  rap- 

peler. 
Receive,  recevoir,  irr.  see  p.  189,  accuc.il- 

lir,  irr.  see  p.  184. 

Recognize,  reconnaitre,  irr.  see  p.  178. 
Recollect,  se  rappeler. 
Recompense,  recompense. 
Recover,  se  porter  mieux,  gutrir. 
Bed, 


Reduce,  redtnre,  irr.  ses  p.  372. 

Reed,  roseau,  m. 

Reel,  chanceler. 

Reilect,  rcflechir. 

Refuse,  refuser. 

Regular,  regulier. 

Reign,  regne,  m. 

Rejoice,  se  rcjouir. 

Relate,  rapporter,  raconter. 

Relieve,  secourir,  irr.  see  p.  184. 

ReJy,  comx>ter,  tfappuyer. 

Remain,  r ester,  demeurcr. 

Remedy,  remede,  m. 

Remember,  se  souvenir,  irr.  &ee  p,  187,  &<* 

rappeler,  —  me  to  him,  rappetez-moi  & 

son  souvenir. 
Rend,  dechircr. 
Render,  rcndre. 
Renounce,  renoncer  &. 
Repair,  reparer. 

Repeat,  rtpeter,  redire,  irr,  see  p.  172. 
Repent,  se  repentir,  irr.  see  p.  134. 
Report,  n.,  bruit,  m. 
Report,  v.,  rapporter,  raconter, 
Repose,  v.,  se  reposer. 
Represent,  rej)rcsenter. 
Reproach,  v.,  reprocher,  bldmer. 
Reproduce,  reproduire,  irr.  see  p.  172. 
Require,  demamler. 
Resemble,  ressembler. 
Reside,  demeurer. 
Resolution,/erme^,  f. 
Resolve,  rc'soudre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 
Rest,  n.,  repos. 
Rest,  v.,  reposer,  s'appuyer. 
Restless,  inquict. 

Restrain,  restrcindre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 
Return,  retourner,  revenir. 
Reveal,  reveler. 
Revenge,  vengeance,  f. 
Reward,  n.,  recompense,  f. 
Reward,  v.,  rccon^enser. 
Ribbon,  ruban,  m. 
Rice,  riz,  m. 
Rich,  riche. 

Riches,  richesse,  f.,  biens,  m.,  pi. 
Ridiculous,  ridicule. 
Riprht,  litre,  m.,  raison,  f.    You  arc  in 

tiie  — ,  vous  avez  raison, 
Ring,  sonner. 
Ripen,  murir. 
Kis j,  se  lever. 
Usk,  hazardcr. 
liver,  Jleuve,  m.,  riviere,  f. 
{oad,  chemin,  in.,  route,  f. 
lob,  roter. 
lobber,  roleur,  m. 
loot',  toil,  rn. 
Room,  cliambre,  f. 
Rose,  rose,  f. 
Kotten,  pourri. 
Hound,  adv.,  autour. 
Ruler,  regie,  f. 
Run,  courir,  irr.  see  p.  184,  —  away, 

s'enfuir,  irr.  see  p.  183,  —  to,  acconrir} 

—     over,    parcourir,     —     aground, 

edhouer. 


394 


VOCABULARY. 


S. 

Sacred,  sacre. 

Sad,  fnche.ux,  triste. 

Sadness,  tristesse,  f. 

Snge,  n  ,  saye,  in. 

Salt,  sel,  m. 

Same,  im'me. 

Satin,  satin,  m. 

Satisfy,  sati*f(tire,  irr.  see  p.  ISO. 

Saturday,  samcdi,  m. 

Savage,  sauvaye. 

Sr.ucer,  soucoiipe,  f. 

Save,  Sfiwer. 

Say,  dire,  irr.  seep.  172. 

Scarce,  scarcely,  ujjcine. 

Scholar,  ccottcr,  m.,  eVere,  in. 

School,  doofe,  f. 

Scold,  grander. 

Scratch  out,  rayer. 

Seal,  cachet er. 

Season,  saison,  f 

Seduce,  sddmre,  irr.  see  p.  172. 

See,  roiV,  irr.  see  p.  lltt. 

Seek,  chercher. 

Seem,  paraitre,  irr.  see  p.  178,  scmbler. 

Seize,  saisir. 

Seldom,  rarement. 

Sell',  me  me. 

Sell,  vend  re. 

Send,  envoy  er,  irr.  see  p.  194,  —  away, 

renroycr,  congedier,   —  for,  envoger, 

chercher. 
Sense,  sens,  m. 
Sentiment,  sentiment. 
September,  septembre. 
Se r v ant,  </< n?ie.s tique. 
Serve,  serrir,  irr.  see  p.  183. 
Set  on",  out,  partir,  irr.  see  p.  183. 
Sew,  covdre,  irr.  see  p.  174. 
Shade,  shadow,  ombre,  f. 
Shame,  /iwrfe,  f. 
Share,  partayer. 
Shed,  rerser,  repandrt* 
Sheep,  motion,  m. 
Sheetj/anV/e,  f.  (of  a  bed)    r7r«^,  ra. 
Shine, 'briller,  luire,  irr.  see  p.  171. 
Shirt,  chemise,  f. 
Shoe,  soniier.  m. 
Shoemaker,  cordonnicr. 
Shop,  boutique. 
Short,  cowrtf. 
Show,  montrcr. 
Shower,  on  dee,  f. 
Shrub,  arbuste,  m. 
Shun,  cvitcr,  fair,  irr.  see  p.  183. 
Sliutj/erwer,  —  in,  enfermer. 
Sick,  ma  fade. 
Side,  co/c,  m. 
Sight,  rwe,  f. 
Silence,  silence,  m. 
Silk,  soie,  f. 
Silly,  niais. 
Silver,  arpcnt,  m. 
Simple,  simple. 
Since,  depuis. 
Sincere,  sincere. 


Sincerity,  sincerite,  f. 

Sing,  chanter. 

Singular,  tingulier. 

Sir,  monsieur. 

Sister,  sccur,  —  in  law,  belle-sozur. 

Sit  (down),  s'asseoir,  irr.  see  p.  192. 

Skate,  paiiner. 

Skin,  peau,  f. 

Slander,  v.,  mcdire,  (de). 

.sleep,  v.,  dormir,  irr.  see  p.  183. 

Slide,  glister. 

Small,  petit. 

Smoke,  fium'e,  f. 

Snow,  n.,  neiffer,  f.,  —  flakes,  des  JloconB 

de  neiye. 
Snow,  v.,  neiger. 
So,  ainsi,  —  many,  tant  de. 
Soap,  savon,  in. 
Sober,  sabre. 
Soft,  doux. 

Soil,  v.,  souiUer,  salir. 
Soldier,  soldat,  in. 
Some,  du,  de  la,  des,  quelque. 
Something,  quelque  chose. 
Son,  jlls,  m. 

Soon,  bientot.  so  —  ,  sltot. 
Sorrow,  douleur,  f.,  chargin,  m. 
Sorry,  fdche  (de}. 
Soul,  dine,  f. 
Source,  source,  f. 
South,  swrf,  midi,  m. 
Speak,  parler,  —  ill  of,  medlre  (de). 
Spell,  (paler. 
Spite,  malice,  f.    In  —  of,  en  cfc^pft  de, 


Spoil,  corrompre. 

Spoon,  cuiller,  cuillere,  f. 

Sport,  jeu,  m. 

Spread,  c  tend  re,  repandre. 

Spring,  priiitemps,  m.,  ressort,  m. 

Stagger,  chanceler. 

Stain,  n.,  tac&e,  f. 

Stain,  v.,  taclier. 

Stairs,  escalier,  m. 

Stake,  T?/CM,  m.     Our  life  is  at  —  ,  il  y  vet, 

de  not  re  vie. 
Star,  etoile. 

State,  etat,  ra.,  condition,  f. 
Stay,  restcr,  demeurer. 
Step,  pas,  m. 
Stick,  baton,  m. 
Still,  encore,  toujours. 
Stih<?,  piqucr. 
3tobking,  &«s,  ra. 
Stone,  joierr«,  f. 
Stop,  arretev.    ' 
Storm,  tempete,  f. 
Strange,  etrange. 
Stranger,  etranger* 
Strawberry,  f  raise,  f. 
Street,  rue,  f. 
Strength,  force,  f. 

Strike,  f  rapper,  (of  a  clock)  Gamier. 
String,  cordon,  m. 
Strong,  fort. 
Study,  u.  {tittle,  f. 


VOCABULARY. 


395 


Stuff,  tf ojTe,  f. 

Subdue,  suhjuffer,  dompter. 

Submit,  soumettre,  irr.  see  p.  180. 

Subtract,  soustraire,  irr.  see  p.  174. 

Succeed,  reussir. 

Success,  succes,  m. 

Successful,  heureux.    To  be  — ,  reussir. 

Sucli,  tel. 

Suffer,  souffrir,  irr.  see  p.  185,  endurer, 

tutor. 

Suffice,  sufire,  irr.  see  p.  171. 
Sufficiently,  assez. 
Su^ar,  sucre,  m. 
Suit,  convenir,  irr.  see  p.  187. 
Summer,  cte,  m. 
Sun,  soleil. 
Superfluous,  super jlu. 
Support,  v.,  appuyer,  soutenir,  irr.  see 

p.  187. 

Suppose,  supposer. 
Sure,  sur. 
Surprise,  etonner,  surprendre,  irr.  see 

p.  181. 
Surprising,  surprenant,  ttonnant,  mer- 

veilleux. 

Surrender,  se  rendre,  livrer. 
Surround,  environner,  entourer. 
Sword,  epee,  f. 
Swim,  nager. 
Symbol,  symbole,  f. 


T. 

Table,  table,  f. 

Taint,  corrompre. 

Take,  prendre,  irr.  see  p.  180,  —  part  in, 

se  meler  de ;  —  charge  of,  se  charger 

de ;  —  away,  6tert  enlever. 
Talent,  talent,  m. 
Talk,  causer. 
Task,  tdche,  f. 
Taste,  fl.,  gouty  m. 
Taste,  v.,  gouter. 
Tea,  the,  m. 
Teacher,  maitre. 

Tear,  larme,  f.    To  burst  into  — ,  fondre 
•  en  larmes. 
Tear,  v.,  dechirer. 
Tell,  dire,  irr.  see  p.  172. 
Than,  que,  de. 
Thank,  remercier.     I  —  thank  you,  je 

vons  renter  tie,  or  simply,  merci. 
That,  ce,  cela. 
Thaw,  deyeler. 
Then,  adv.,  alors,  puis. 
Then,  conj.,  done. 

There,  la,  y.     There  is,  there  are,  il  y  a. 
Thickj  cpais.    An  inch  thick,  epais  d'un 

pouce. 

Thief,  voleur,  m. 
Thimble,  de  (a  coudre),~m. 
Thing,  chose,  f. 
Think,  penser. 
Thorn,  cpine,  f. 
Thought,  pensee. 
ti  menace,  f. 


Through,  a  travers,  au  travers  de,  par. 

Thum1"),  pouce,  m.  \ru.<j<>.. 

Thunder,  n  ,  tonnerre,  m.  —  storm',  o- 

Thunder,  v.,  tonner. 

Thursday,  jeudi,  m. 

Thus,  ainsi. 

Tiger,  tigre,  m. 

Till,  jusqu'a, 

Time,  temps,  m.,  fois,  f.,  see  p.  160. 

Timid,  tiinide. 

Tired,  las,  fatigue. 

To,  a.  To-day,  aujourd'hui.  To-mor« 
row,  demain.  The  day  after  to-mor- 
row, apres-demain. 

Too,  trop,  —  much,  many,  trop. 

Tooth,  dent,  f. 

Toward  and  Towards,  vers,  sur,  cnvers. 

Towel,  essuie-mains,  m. 

Tower,  tour,  f. 

Town,  ville,  f. 

Tradesman,  marchand. 

Tragedy,  tragedie,  f. 

Transgress,  enfreindre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 

Translate,  tradmre,  irr.  see  p.  170,  trans- 
feror. 

Translation,  traduction,  version,  f. 

Travel,  voyager. 

Traveller,  voyageur,  m. 

Treasure,  tresor,  m. 

Treat,  trailer,  —  ill,  maltraiter. 

Treatment,  traitement.    * 

Treaty,  traite,  m. 

Tree,  arbre.  m. 

Tremble,  trembler,  tressaillir,  irr.  see  p, 
185. 

Trouble,  n.,  peine,  f. 

Trouble,  v.,  troubler,  inquieter. 

True,  vrai,  veritable. 

Trust,  avoir  confiance,  se  fler,  croirc, 
ajouter  foi,  s'en  rapporter  a. 

Truth,  verlte,  f. 

Try,  essatjtr. 

Tuesday,  mardi,  m. 

Tutor,  precepteur,  tuteur,  m, 

Tyrant,  tyran,  m. 

u. 

Ugly,  laid,  vilain. 

Umbrella,  parapluie,  m. 

Unbleached,  ecru. 

Uncle,  oncle,  m. 

Understand,  comprendre,  irr.  see  p.  Ifil, 

entendre. 

Undertake,  entrcprendre,  irr.  see  p.  181. 
Undo,  defaire,  irr.  see  p.  180,  penlrc- 

'miner. 

Unfortunate,  maihcurcux. 
Ungrateful,  ingrat. 
Unhappy,  malheureux. 
Unheard  of,  inoui. 
Unknown,  inconnu. 
Unless,  a  moins  que,  de. 
Unsettled,   irresolu,    incertafo,    incon- 

stant. 
Unstitch,  decoudre* 


396 


VOCABULARY. 


Upon,  sur. 

Uprightness,  probitd,  f. 
Use,  n.,  usage,  m.    To  make  —  of  any- 
thing, se  servir  de. 
Use,  employer, 
Useful,  at  He. 
Usually,  ordinairement. 


V. 

Vainly  (in  vain),  en  vain. 

Valley,  vatlee,  f. 

Valor,  valeur,  f.,  bravoure,  f.,  courage, 

m. 

Variety,  rarietd. 
Velvet,  velours,  m. 
Verb,  verbe,  m. 
Verse,  vers,  m. 
Very,  ires,  fort,  Hen. 
Vessel,  vaisseau,  m. 
Vice,  vice,  m. 
Victory,  victoire,  f. 
Village,  village,  m. 
Vinegar,  vinaiyre,  m. 
Violate,  eitfreindre,  irr.  see  p.  176. 
Violet,  violette,  f. 
Virtue,  vertn,  f. 
Virtuous,  vertueux. 
Visit,  viftfe,  f. 
Voice,  voix,  f. 
Volume,  volume,  tome,  in. 
Vow,  n.,  t/ecw,  m. 
Vow,  v.,  vouer. 
Voyage,  n.,  voyage,  m. 
Voyage,  v.,  voyager. 


w. 

Wait,  attendre. 

Walk,  marcher,  se  promener. 

Wall,  mur,  m. 

Walnut,  uoix,  f. 

Want,  11.,  nifinquc,  f.,  faute,  f, 

Want,  v.,  vouloir,  avoir  em-is,  i 

War,  guerre,  f. 

Warm",  chaud. 

Watch,  montre,  f. 

Water,  e<:/?^,  f. 

Wegk./a»We. 

Weariness,  ennui,  m. 

Wearisome,  emmyeu-x. 

Weary,  adj.,  /a^s,  fatigue. 

Weary,  v.,  enniiyer. 

Weatlier,  temps,  m.  % 

Wednesday,  mercredi,  ixx. 

Week,  semaiiw,  f. 

Weep,  pleurcr. 


Well,  5tcn.    To  be  well  (in  health),  s< 

porter  bien. 
What,  que,  quoi,  quel. 
Wheat,  froment,  bit,  m. 
When,  quandt  lorsque. 
Where,  oil. 
Whip,  fouet,  m. 
White,  blanc. 
Who,  qui,  lequel  etc. 
Whole,  tout. 

Whose,  de  qui,  dont,  see  p.  120. 
Why,  pourquoi. 
Wicked,  mtchant. 
Wife,  femme. 
Willing,  pret.     To  be  — ,  vouloir,  iir. 

see  p.  191. 

Willingly,  volontiers. 
Win,  gagner. 
Wind,  vent,  m 

Wind  up  a  watch,  remonter  une  montre. 
Window,  f  entire,  croisce,  f. 
Wine,  vin,  m. 
AVinter,  hiver,  m. 
AVipe,  essuyer. 
Wisdom,  sagesse. 
^Visc,  sage,  savant. 
Wish,  souhaiter,ddsirer,  vouloir >  irr.  see 

p.  191.    I  should  — ,  je  voudrais. 
With,  avec. 
Without,  sans. 
Witness,  tembin,  m. 
Wonderful,  admirable,  merveilleux. 
Wood,  bois,  m. 
Wool,  laine,  f. 
Word,  mot,  m.,  parole,  f.  To  keep  one's 

— ,  tenir  sa  parole. 
Work,  n.,  travail,  ouvrage,  m. 
Work,  v.-travailler. 
World,  monde,  m. 
Worse,  adj.,  pire. 
Worse,  adv.,  pis. 
Worth,  digne.    To  be  — ,  valoir,  irr.  see 

p.  11)1. 

Wound,  n.,plaie,  blessure. 
Wound,  v.,  blesser. 
Wretched,  malkeureux,  miserable. 
Write,  i-crire,  irr.  see  p.  175. 
Writing,  n.,  ecriture,  f. 
Wrong,  tort,  in.     To  be  in  the  — ,  avoir 

tort. 

Y. 

Year,  an,  m.,  annee,  f. 
Yes,  oui. 
Yesterday,  hier. 
Yet.  entire 
\  lela,  txaer. 
Young,  jeunc. 
Youth,  jeunessSj  f. 


TESTIMONIALS. 


NEW  YORK,  February,  l?e 

I  have  usel  tj  Otto's  French  Grammar"  since  its  publication,  and 
consider  jt  the  best  book  on  the  subject.  It  is  based  on  the  most 
modern  grammars  published  in  Paris ;  it  is  thorough,  and  full  6i 
idiomatical  expressions  that  can  be  found  in  no  other  work. 

LUCIEN  OUDIX,  A.M. 
Instructor  of  the  French  Language,  N.  Y.  Free  Academy. 


I  have  used  "  Otto's  German  Grammar."  I  consider  it  a  very 
good  book ;  its  abundant  vocabularies,  and  its  fulness  in  idioms, 
are  especially  useful.  The  appendix,  also,  is  very  valuable,  con- 
taining, as  it  does,  some  of  the  most  popular  and  characteristic 
German  poems,  which  may  be  tunied  to  many  uses. 
F«,J.  1,  1865  ADOLPII  WERXER, 

Professor  of  German,  New-\'nrk  Free  Academy. 


WASHINGTON  UNIVERSITY    ST.  Louis,  JAN.  2,  1805. 

It  gives  me  great  pleasure  to  inform  you  that  I 
have  introduced  your  edition  of  "Otto's  German  Grammar"  in 
my  classes  in  this  University,  and  that  I  regard  it  as  the  very  best 
German  grammar,  for  school  purposes,  that  has  thus  far  come  to 
my  notice.  Your  German  editions  of  the  "Irnmensee,"  "  Vergiss- 
memnicLt,"  and  "  Irrlichter,"  are  great  favorites  among  my  pupils  ; 
vid  your  "  College  Series  of  Modern  French  Plays,"  edited  bf 
Mr.  Ferdinand  Bocher  of  Harvard  College,  I  regard  as  very  usefu 
t»r  the  recitation-room,  and  for  private  reading. 
Yours  very  truly, 

B.  L.  TAFEL,  Ph.  D, 
?rof&*ar  of  Modern   i^n-fKOges  and    Comparativt    Philology  in    WcuMmgta* 


Eian  SCHOOL, 
BOSTON,  March  31,  18 66 

After  a  six  months'  trial,  we  conclude  that  Otto'i 
Grammar,  revised  by  Bocher,  i$  superior  in  all  respect* 
to  any  other  of  which  we  have  knowledge. 

E.*  HUNT, 

WILLIAM  NICHOLS,  Jr., 
ROBERT  EDWARD  BABSON, 
THOMAS   SHERWIN,  Jr.,    * 

Teachers  in  English  UlgJi  School. 

I  fully  and  emphatically  indorse  the  above  opinion  respecting 
0 tto's  Frenc4r  Grammar. 

JOHN  D.  PHILBRICK, 
Superintendent  of  Public  Schools. 


STATE  NORMAL  SCHOOL, 

SALEM,  Mass,  April  3,  1866. 

Wo  are  using  in  our  school  several  of  your 
jublieations  with  much  satisfaction.  This  is  especially  the  case 
with  Otto's  French  Grammar.  As  a  class  text-book,  this  grammar 
is,  in  my  opinion,  the  best  in  the  market. 

For  the  excellence  of  your  school-books,  both  as  to  matter  and 
typographical  beauty,  you  richly  merit  the  gratitude  of  teachers 
and  pupils. 

D.  B.  IIAGAR. 


CAMBRIDGE,  April  6, 18C6. 

DEAR  SIR, —  Otto's  French  Grammar,  revised  by  Bocher,  which 
we  have  been  trying  with  a  class  in  our  "shorter  course  of  study," 
has  been  adopted  for  all  our  French  classes,  in  place  of  Fasquelle'a 
book.  We  can  heartily  indorse  the  testimonial  from  the  teachen 
la  the  Boston  High  School. 

W'  J..  ROLFE, 
Mister  cf  Cambridge  JJigh  Sckod 


Standard  EducMLauaC  Works. 

L.  PYLODETS  FRENCH  SERIES. 

Beginning  French.    ifono.    Boards I  g| 

Beginner's  French  Reader.    A  Companion  to  "Beginning 

French."    With  Illustrations.  16mo.    Bds 60 

Beginner's  Second  French  Reader 1.25 

Couttes  de  Rosee.    Petit  Tresor  poStique  des  Jeuncs  Per- 

ionnes.    18mo 75 

«.  a  Litterature  Francaise  Classique.    I2mo 1.73 

la  Litterature  Fransaise  Contemporaine.    I2mo 1.50 

Mere  L'Oie.    Poesies,  Chansons  et  Rondos  Eufautines.    Avcc 

.Illustrations.    8vo.    Fancy  Boards 60 

Riodu.    Lucie.    French  and  English  Conversations.    12mo....  75 
Sadler.     Translating  English  into  French.    With  Notes  and 

Vocabulary.    12mo 1.25 

Smith  &  Nugent's  French-English  Dictionary.    18mo..  1.50 

St.  Pierre.    Paul  et  Virginie,  et  La  Chaumiere  Indienne.    18mo. 

Boards : 50 

UrbinO  Series  (for  Translating  English  into  French).    IGmo 60 

Witcomb  and  Bellenger's  Guide  to  French  Conversa- 
tion.   18mo 75 

GERMAN. 

Tke prices  are'for  paper  ewers,  unless  otherwise  expressed. 

Andersen.    Bilderbuch  ohne  Bilder.   With  Nets*,   lima.  60 

Die  Eisjungfrau.   With  Notee.   I2mo. 60 

Carove.    Das  Maerchen  ohne  Ende *5 

Evans.  Abriss  der  Deutshen  Literaturgeschichte.  I2mo. 

'    Cloth 1.50 

Eichendorff.  Aus  dem  Leben  eines  Taugenichts.  I2mo.  75 
Elz.  Er  ist  nicht  eiferstichtig ;    Benedix,    Der  Weiber- 
feind  ;  Miiller,  Im  Wartesalon  Erster  classe.    (Three  comedies, 

each  in  one  act.)  60 

Pollen's  German  Reader.  I2mo.    Cloth 1.50 

Fouque.  Undine.    With  Vocab.   12mo 50 

Freiligrath's  Neuere*Gedichte 75 

German  Ballad  Book.    By  Prof.  L.  Simonson.   With  Notes. 

16mb.    Cloth 1.50 

Soethe.  Egmont.  With  Notes 50 

—.Faust.    With  Notes.  12mo 75 

—  Iphigenie  auf  Tauris.    \\;ith  Notes.   I2mo 40 

Herrman  and  Dorothea.    With  Notes.    I2mo 40 

Grjirm.  Venus  von  Milo.  linphacl  and  Michael  Angdo.  12iuo.  71 


Standard  Educational  Works. 

Heyse.  Anfang  und  Ende.    I2mo $  4C 

—  Die  Einsamen.   I2mo id 

James.    German-English  Dictionary.    8vo.  Half  roan 2.0C 

Jensen.  Die  Braune  Erika.    With  Notes.    I2mo 40 

Keetels*  Oral  Method  with  German.    12mo.    Half  roan,  l  75 

Kosrner.   Zriny-   withNotea 60 

Krauss1  Introductory  German  Grammar.    I2mo.  Cloth.,.  100 

Lessing.  Minna  von  Barnhelm.  With  Notes.  I2mo. 50 

—  The  Same,  in  English,  with  German  Notes.    12mo fifl 

* —  Emilia  CalottLx12mo * 

Lodeman's  German  Conversation  Tables.   Boards...  40 

Mugge.  Riukan  Voss.    I2mo % 40 

—  Signa  die  Seterin.    I2mo 40 

Nathusius.  Tagebuch  eines  Armen  Fraeuleins.  I2mo....  75 
Otto's  German  Conversation  Grammar.    12"K>.    Roan...  1.75 
Evans'    German    Reader.    With  Notes  and  Voeab.  By 

Prof.  E.  P.  Evans*.   12mo.    Koaii 1.50 

—  Key  to  Otto's  German  Grammar.    Paper 75 

Beginning  German.    With  additional  Heading  Matter. 

ByL.  Pylodet.    16nio.  Clo 1.00 

Prinzessin  Use.    With  Notes.    12mo 50 

PutlitZ.    Was  SichDer  Wald  Erzahelt.    12mo BO 

—  Badekuren.   With  Notes.    I2mo 50 

—  Das  Herz  Vergessen.    With  Notes.    I2mo 50 

Vergissmeinnicht.    With  Notes.    12mo 40 

Schiiler.  Jungfrau  von  Orleans.    With  Notes.    I2mo 50 

—  Wilhelm  Tell.    With  Notes.    I2mo CO 

—  Wallenstein's  Lager.  "        I2ino... *....  50 

—  Die  Piccolomini.         "         I2mo 50 

—  Wallenstein's  Tod.     "         I2mo 50 

—  Wallenstein.    I2mo.  Cloth 1.50 

—  Maria  Stuart.    With  Notes.    I2mo 60 

Sprechen  Sie  Deutsch  ?   or,  Do  You  Speak  German? 

]8mo.    Boards 60 

Storme.  Easy  German  Reading.    iGmo.    Cloth 100 

Storme.  Immensee.    With  Notes.    I2mo 40 

Tieck.  Die  Elfen.  Das  RothkaJppchen.  With  Notes,  ismo.  60 
Wessely,  English-German  Dictionary.     I6mo.    Cloth....  1.0C 
Whitney,  Prof.  W.  D.  German  Grammar.     With  Exer- 
cises.   12mo.    Roan 1.71 

German  Reader.    With  Notes  and  Vocab.    I2mo.  Roan.  2.00 

Wilhelmi  Einer  mussheirathen,  and  Benedix,  Eigensinn. 

I2mo 43 

Witcomb  and  Otto's  Guide  to  German   Conversation- 

Edited  by  L.  Pylodet.    ISmo     Cloth    73 

I, 


Standard  Educational  Works. 

ITALIAN- 

Cuore's  Italian  Grammar.    I2mo.  Roan $1.75 

Key  to  above.    Paper '. 75 

DalP,  Ongaro.  La  Rosa  Del!'  Alpi.  With  Noies.  I2jao.  tt.per.  75 

James  and  Grassi,  Italian-English  Dictionary.  8vo.  Hf.  roan  2.00 

Nota,  Alberto.    La  Fiera.    With  Notes.    I2mo.    Paper 75 

Parlate  Italmo  ?  or,  Do  You  Speak  Italian  ?   16mo.  IMa.  Cfi 

Pellico.  Francesca  da  Rimini.    I2mo.  Paper.. 13 

SPANISH  AND  PORTUGUESE. 
Caballero  La  Familia  de  Alvareda.   I2mo.   Paper.... A_ 


984592 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


(English  Spelling  Book. )    12mo.    Boards 60 

Yonge5  Miss.     Landmarks  of  History.    3  vols.    12mo.     Cloth. 

I.  Ancient  History 1.00 

I!,  Medieval   History 1.25 

III.  Modern  History 1.5C 

end  for  a  Descriptive  Catalogue. 

HOLT  &  WILLIAMS,  Publishers, 

2<;  BOIS'D  STREET,  NEW  YORK. 


H 

H 

:;;-;r:' 


